MINISTRY OF HOME AFFAIRS

TANZANIA POLICE FORCE

POLICE GENERAL ORDERS

 THE POLICE GENERAL ORDERS

INTRODUCTION
This is the Second edition of the Police General Orders. The first edition was produced
in 1961 and has been in use since then.
It will be noted that the structure of these General Orders is different from the previous
edition. This has been necessitated by the fact that a lot of development has taken place
in the area of policing. In our work now we are confronted with new legislations almost
every day. There have also been changes in the way government finances are
disbursed and procurement matters are handled as well as the fact that the country is
now practising multi-partism in which case members of the Tanzania Police Force are no
longer expected to be members of any political party. In the area of international law on
policing a series of developments have taken place and some of these developments
have been reflected in these Orders based on the extent our domestic laws and
Constitution have taken them into account. Here, special regard has been given to the
spirit of the UN Basic Principles on the Use of Force and Firearms by Law Enforcement
Officials 1990 and UN Code of Conduct for Law Enforcement Officials 1979. In this
regard, some General Orders have been modified to match with the prevailing reality
and to allow flexibility to accommodate the changes that have been referred to above.
The revision of these General Orders has also taken into account various Government
directives on the administration of the Force in the country.

PURPOSE OF THE GENERAL ORDERS

This document sets forth the General Orders of the Force. They are issued pursuant to
the authority granted to the Inspector General of Police under Section 7(2) of the Police
Force and Auxiliary Services Act Cap. 322 R. E. 2002. The directives contained in these
General Orders help guide the Force personnel in carrying out their duties and
responsibilities as members of the Force. Each member is expected to follow the
directives set forth in these General Orders, although it is understood that these General
Orders cannot regulate conduct in every situation that may arise in the course of
policing. Judgment and discretion must be prudently applied. Each directive issued
supersedes all conflicting prior policies and orders published by the Force.

KNOWLEDGE OF THE GENERAL ORDERS

Every member is responsible for becoming aware of, understanding, and following the
General Orders and other directives of the Force. Through its training programme, the
Force will endeavor to increase the knowledge and understanding all members have of
such directives. Members of the Force are expected to consult these General Orders
when questions arise regarding execution of police work.

DISCREPANCIES IN ORDERS OR DIRECTIVES

All members are obliged to comply with these General Orders. Any member who
believes a discrepancy exists in these General Orders or any other Force Orders or

i
directive, or who has a question about any aspect of a responsibility or guideline, shall
bring the matter to the attention of a supervisor for resolution, guidance or clarification.

ISSUE OF COPIES OF GENERAL ORDERS

Copies of General Orders shall be issued as prescribed in Para 5 of P.G.O. No. 22. The
copies of the General Orders remain the property of the Force. Any loss of a copy of the
General Orders or a part of it will be reported to the member's immediate supervisor.
Members, who are issued copies of these General Orders, are responsible for
maintaining their copies in a good condition and in a secure place. The General Orders
shall be updated periodically by including new provisions or by revising or rescinding
existing provisions as may be published in the Force Orders from time to time. As
changes or additions to these General Orders are made and distributed, members shall
promptly update their copies of the General Orders. The updating of the General Orders
shall be done pursuant to Paras 6 to 8 of P.G.O. No 22.

REVIEW AND REVISION OF THE GENERAL ORDERS

Any member can propose a change to these General Orders. The proposed change
must be made in writing, preferably in the format of the existing General Orders. The
proposal should be routed through the official channels of communication in the Force. A
team assembled by the Inspector General shall review the proposed change. The team
may also act on its own initiative to propose a change to these General Orders. When
the team's review is complete, the team shall recommend to the Inspector General
whether the proposed change be adopted and what wording the proposed change
should have.
The policy and planning section of the Force shall coordinate the development of new
directives, conduct periodic General Orders review and recommend updates, cause the
distribution of new or amended directives, and maintain the official publications of the
Force. The Police College and Training Schools will be responsible for providing or
coordinating sufficient training to ensure an understanding of the existing P.G.O or new
or amended General Orders. Changes to the General Orders shall be distributed as
soon as possible.

NUMBERED SECTIONS
Directives contained in these General Orders are grouped together by category and
function. Orders in a section are assigned paragraph numbers to index the information
that makes up the specific General Order. There are fifteen sections grouped as follows
- Force organization, Force administration, training on arms, parades and drills,
complements, discipline and conduct, fiscal management, buildings and quarters, stores,
communications and Force transport, staff welfare, crime and investigation, police duties
– general, police bail and bond, prisoners management and supervision of offenders,
traffic law enforcement, political affairs and democratic activities, and prosecutions.

ii
RELATION TO OTHER OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS
Members are expected to know, understand and follow other official Force publications,
including Force Orders, Standing Orders, or any other publication of a directive nature.
Members are expected to keep themselves current on all directives issued by the Force
that affect them.

GENERAL CONDUCT
The General Orders dictate discipline and good conduct. No member of the Force shall
act or behave in such a manner as to dishonor or disgrace him/herself in any way that
can be associated with the Force.

PERFORMANCE OF BASIC DUTIES

These orders underpin the requirement that Members perform their basic duties and
take appropriate action to preserve the public safety, prevent crime, detect and arrest
law violators, protect life and property and enforce the laws in effective and efficient way.
Members should do so to the best of their ability and in accordance with Force policies,
procedures and orders. Performance standards are based on the following thresholds:
A. MAINTENANCE OF WORK COMPETENCY. All members shall maintain
competency to properly perform their duties. Members are expected to know and
enforce laws as their duties dictate.
B. PERFORMANCE OF BASIC DUTIES IN A COMPETENT MANNER.
Members shall perform their assigned duties in a competent manner.
Incompetence may be demonstrated by
i. lack of knowledge of the laws to be enforced;
ii. lack of knowledge or an unwillingness to perform assigned tasks;
iii. the failure to conform to work standards;
iv. the failure to take appropriate action in response to a crime,
incident or disorder; or
v. a written record of repeated infractions of policies, procedures, or
orders.

USE OF DISCRETION
Common sense and reasonableness shall guide a member's use of discretion when the
use of discretion is appropriate. A member must be faithful to applicable laws, the oath
of office, the code of ethics, and the Force's mission, goals and objectives in exercising
discretionary judgment.

CONCLUSION
It is my belief that, as members of the Force, we must utilise our decisive strength and
major resources in fulfilling our objectives. It is crucial to note that the primary emphasis
of General Orders is on promoting ethical behaviour consistent with the mission, vision

iii
and objectives of our Force. It recognises the Force is a field full of complexities, which
frequently present members of the Force with difficult theoretical, practical and ethical
decisions. Thus the General Orders are intended to guide all members of the Force in
situations where the right course of action may not always be clear.
It is in this regard that the following ethos will guide the Force in its work:
i. INTEGRITY - Members will always maintain personal integrity in
all that they do, at work and at home.
ii. EXCELLENCE - Members will always pursue excellence for
themselves and the Force.
iii. FAIRNESS - Members will always treat all persons fairly.
iv. PRIDE - Members will take pride in themselves, the Force and
their profession and shall always maintain their honour.
v. HONESTY - Members will always be honest; honest to
themselves, to their supervisors and to the public.
vi. SERVICE - Members will always endeavour to provide the highest
level of service.
vii. COMPASSION - Members will always be compassionate.
It is my sincere hope that these General Orders will keep our behaviour in check, keep
us away from career and professional problems and guide us towards making our
mission, vision and objective a reality.
These General Orders come into force forthwith.

SAID ALI MWEMA

INSPECTOR GENERAL OF POLICE
DAR ES SALAAM
2006

iv
 SECTION 1
FORCE ORGANIZATION
Nos. 1 – 30
P.G.O. No. Title
1. Basic Principles Guiding the Force
2. Constitution, Administration and Duties of the Force
3. Organisation-Command Structure
4. Organisation – Titles and Abbreviations of Officers
5. Organisation – Titles and Abbreviations of Stations and Units
6. Establishment and Strength of the Force
7. Organisation – Zanzibar command
8. Criminal Investigation Department – Constitution, Organisation
and Duties
9. Police Medical Unit - Constitution, Organisation and Duties
10. Field Force Unit – Constitution and Duties of
11. Railways Police-Constitution, Organisation and Duties
12. Crime Intelligence Unit -Constitution, Organisation and
Duties
13. Marine Police – Constitution, Organisation and Duties
14. Band unit- Constitution, Organisation and Duties
15. Dog and Horse Unit – Constitution, Organisation and Duties of
16. Air Wing Unit – Constitution, Organisation and Duties
17. Airports Police Unit– Constitution, Organisation and Duties
18. Traffic Police Unit – Constitution, Organisation and Duties
19. Organisation – Stations and Units – Classification of
20 Mobile Police Stations
21. Establishments Maintenance UnitsTradesmen
22. Orderlies – Gazetted Officers
23. Organisation – Orders
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.

1
 P.G.O. No. 1
BASIC PRINCIPLES GUIDING THE FORCE
Basic Principles:-
1 (a) The Force has its origin in the Constitution of the United Republic of Tanzania
1977, Cap. 2 R.E. 2002 and is constituted under section 3 of the Police Force and Auxiliary
Police Services Act, Cap 322 R.E. 2002 for the preservation of peace, the maintenance of law
and order, the prevention and detection of crime, the apprehension and guarding of offenders and
the protection of property in Tanzania.
(b) The Force is a union establishment and has mandate throughout Tanzania
(c) All police officers are required to operate on the principle that Tanzania is a
democratic country and is governed by the principles of the rule of law. This principle should
form the basis of any action by any member of the Force.
(d) The following principles which are outlined in details in these Orders are
meant for the general guidance of all ranks. Every officer is required to familiarise himself with
the provisions of these orders. It is the responsibility of every Commanding Officer and every
senior officer to ensure that all members under their charge are properly instructed on them.

Operative Principles
2. Every member of the Force is duty bound at all times to respect rights and freedoms
as laid down in the Constitution of the United Republic of Tanzania 1977, Cap. 2 R.E. 22002
and the Constitution of Zanzibar 1984 (together hereinafter referred to as the “Constitutions” and
any other legal instruments in force. Any deviation from that principle by any police officer
against any person cannot be accepted except where:
(a) that person infringes the fundamental rights and freedoms of others; and
(b) it is the only way to protect the fundamental rights and freedoms of others.
Even in such exceptional cases a police officer should ensure that such infringement
of those rights and freedoms is kept to a minimum.

3. Every member of the Force should take note that laws and regulations change from
time to time and therefore every effort must be made to promptly update oneself with such legal
development in the country particularly those that which affects their day to day activities. The
Police headquarters will to the extent possible ensure Commanding Officers are adequately
updated on all legal developments in the country that affect police work.

Independence within the criminal justice system

4. Every member of the Force is required to take note of the principle of the
independence of the judiciary in the execution of his duties. The observation of the existing
demarcation of the responsibilities of the three main branches of the state helps to sustain
harmony and avoid unnecessary conflicts between the Force and other Government
functionaries.

5. The execution of any orders of superiors in the Force and the Government must at all
times scrupulously respect the independence and impartiality of the Judiciary which includes the
prosecution system. Any lawful decisions of the Judiciary shall not be objected to or their
execution obstructed in any way.

6. The Force is vested with some limited number of quasi-judicial powers. Such powers
include the compounding of some offences, admitting suspects to police bond, issuing of
warnings and notifications to traffic offenders, revocation of lawfully issued permits or licences
such as arms licences and driving licences. In exercising these powers every care should be taken
as decisions made thereunder may be contestable in legal proceedings. The legal rights and
remedies available to people affected by the exercise of the police quasi-judicial powers should
be adequately protected.

2
 P.G.O. No. 1
7. Every member of the Force should desist from any attempt of turning a police facility
into a personal facility. Detentions of persons in police facilities shall always be in accordance
with the laws. Persons convicted of offences and sentenced to imprisonment shall be taken
immediately to the nearest prisons facility.

Operational Independence - Fundamental Principles

8. Police officers at all levels shall be guided by the laws in their performance of their
duties. Undue influence, political, religious or otherwise should not be allowed in police
decisions as these may have an adverse effect in delivering justice. Every police officer is
encouraged to perform his/her duties without fear or favour when performing within the limits of
the laws.

9. Successful police performance requires the cooperation of other police stakeholders

who include other Government Departments, Non-Governmental Organisations, organised and
non-organised communities, societies and individuals. Every police officer should work toward
the promotion and sustenance of this necessary cooperation without compromising the expected
quality of his/her performance.

10. Commanding Officers, Senior Officers and all members of the Force should conduct
themselves in a manner that commands due respect of all others outside the Force. Every
member should thrive at ensuring that all members of the community value him/her and the
Police Force in general as the appropriate deliverer of justice amongst members of the
community.

11. Every member should aim at strict adherence to the guidelines propounded in these
Orders and others which may issue from time to time to ensure the integrity of the member
him/herself and of the Force in general. In particular all corrupt practices and any abuse of power
are strictly prohibited.

12. Confidentiality of informers and crime information is the essence of the public’s
confidence in cooperating with the police in the maintenance of law and order. No police, the
world over has ever been able to achieve much without properly endorsing this most important
public’s confidence in its members. Commanding Officers and all senior officers should
endeavour at ensuring the observation of this integral principle of police work.

Guiding principles regarding police action

13. Protection of life and property is the essence of the Force and this is realised through
the enforcement of the laws of the land without any discrimination. It is therefore the
responsibility of every member to guarantee members of the community of their equality before
the law irrespective of life status socially, politically or economically by treating every person
with due dignity and respect.

14. Objectivity in police action should always be a guiding lead to any member as it
ensures fairness and impartiality. Any decision for police action by any member should be
reasonable and should avoid being carried away by any discriminatory factor such as nationality,
tribe or ethnic origin, political opinion, colour, sex, race, language, religion, or social status.

15. Torture and any inhuman or degrading treatment to any person by any member of the
Force under any circumstances is totally intolerable. In any dealings with the public every
member should accord the deserving respect and dignity as required by the circumstances.

16. The use of force by any member of the Force will only be acceptable to the extent
considered necessary to achieve a legitimate objective. Every member shall therefore apply force
in performing his duties only when absolutely necessary and only to the extent needed to attain
the lawful objective.

3
 P.G.O. No. 1
17. Corruption is opposed to justice and is totally intolerable in the Force. Every member
is required to desist from corrupt acts and must resist and oppose all forms of corruption by any
member of the Force. It is the responsibility of every member to reveal to his superior any
suspect corrupt behaviour by any member of the Force.

18. Every member in the performance of his duties has a specific responsibility toward
vulnerable groups of the community. These groups include children, women, disabled and the
old. Extra care shall be exercised in handling police matters affecting these groups and assistance
shall be offered to them to the extent possible.

Specific cases - Police investigations

19. The purpose of police investigations is generally to unveil all facts relating to
information of a reported or imminent crime incidence for appropriate decision and action. Civil
matters are not a concern of the Force unless they are a crime incidence appendage and as such
civil matters should not be subject for police investigations. In some cases police are directed by
courts of law to oversee the execution of a court order or decree arising out of civil matters to
ensure law and order. In any case, civil matters brought to police for investigative action shall
courteously be redirected to the courts where remedies can be obtained. Every member of the
Force should therefore desist from involving in investigations in civil matters.

20. The guiding principle in all police investigations should be the presumption of
innocence. Basing police investigations on any other presumption will normally not lead to
uncovering the truth of the matter under investigations and hence the delivery of appropriate
justice.

21. Crimes are actions defined as such by the laws. Police investigations must adhere
strictly to the relevant laws. It is emphasised that wherever police investigations involve the
vulnerable groups of the community the applicable laws should strictly be adhered to.

22. Interviews and interrogation of witnesses, suspects and accused persons shall be
carried out in strict compliance to the relevant guidelines in these orders. It is hereby empasised
that records of all such interviews and interrogations should be appropriately kept.

23. Rights and specific privileges of witnesses, suspects and accused persons shall at all
times be protected.

24. Every member shall render any necessary support and assistance to victims of crimes.

25. Any needs for translators and interpreters arising during police investigations shall be
adequately addressed.

Specific cases - Arrest/ deprivation of liberty by the police

26. Arrests involve the deprivation of a person’s freedom and liberty and as such shall be
carried out with all due care and diligence. All guidelines relating to arrests stipulated in these
orders shall be strictly adhered to.

27. Every member shall observe the right of an arrested person being informed of the
reasons for his/her arrest in a clear language subject to obtaining circumstances.

28. The safety of person under the custody of police is the responsibility of the arresting
officer and any other officer under whose charge the arrested person is placed.

29. The rights of communication of an arrested person as detailed in these orders shall be
strictly observed by all members of the Force

4
 P.G.O. No. 1
Specific cases - Respect for private life and other rights
30. Members of the Force are strictly prohibited from infringing any person’s rights to
private and family life including homes and correspondences. Infringement of this right is only
acceptable where there exist specific lawful grounds and even in such cases it is emphasised that
the infringement must be kept to a minimum.

31. The rights of an individual include his personal data and as such the collection,
storage and use of such data by any member of the Force shall be limited to what is necessary for
the attainment of specific lawful objectives.

32. Every members of the Force shall at all times respect an individual’s right to
freedom of opinion, conscience, expression, peaceful assembly, movement and peaceful
enjoyment of property. Infringement of these rights will be acceptable only in specific legitimate
circumstances laid down in the laws and amplified by these orders.

Specific cases - Use of Firearms

33. The use of firearms tends to conflict with the essence of the Force of protection of
life. It is for this reason that every member of the Force is called upon to attain the highest
degree of proficiency in the use of firearms and the orders regulating such use.

34. It is the responsibility of every Commanding Officer and senior officers to ensure
members under their charge are appropriately instructed of correct use of arms in the
performance of police duties.

5
 P.G.O. No. 2
CONSTITUTION, ADMINISTRATION AND DUTIES OF THE FORCE

Constitution of the Force:-

1. The Force is constituted under section 3 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E.
2002.

Command of the Force:-

2. (a) The Force is under the control and direction of the Inspector General whose powers are
prescribed in the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002, and other relevant legislation.
(b) The Inspector General is assisted in his duties by Commissioners who are appointed for specific
functions in the Force. Any act which may be done, ordered or performed by the Inspector General may, subject
to the orders and directions of the Inspector General be done or performed by any of the Commissioners.

Organisational Duties and Responsibilities:-

3. The Inspector General is the utmost head of the Force responsible for the administration,
superintendence, control and direction of the Force in the whole of Tanzania.

4. All Commissioners are responsible to the Inspector General for the following:-
(a) The efficient administration and management of the Force, (including discipline and the welfare
of all Members of the Force) according to the Constitution, laws and regulations of the land;
(b) The efficient operations and training in the Force;
(c) Criminal investigations and related matters;
(d) The efficient administration and management of the Force matters relating to Zanzibar; and
(e) Any other matters that may be assigned to them by the Inspector General through relevant
instruments.

5. (a) Regional and Unit Commanders are responsible to the Inspector General as follows:-
(i) For the efficient administration and management of their commands, according to the
Constitution, laws and regulations, of the Force in the Region or Unit.
(ii) For the efficiency and administration, the discipline and the welfare of all members of the
Force in the Region or Unit.
(iii) For the efficient application of the directions contained in the laws of Tanzania (Mainland
and Zanzibar) in particular the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322, Criminal Procedure Statutes,
Evidence Statutes, Police Force and Prisons Service Commission Act, Cap. 241 R.E. 2002 and all Regulations,
Orders and circulars issued thereunder such as the Police Force Service Regulations, Police General Orders,
Fiscal and Procurement laws and regulations made there under, and other directions as they are given from time
to time.
(iv) For the maintenance of close liaison with Regional Commissioners and other Regional
Government Officials, and to render all assistance possible to Officers in Charge of stations and Units in his
Region.
(v) For keeping the Inspector General fully and immediately informed of all matters of
special interest.
(vi) On the whole, for coordination of all matters relating to the Force in their respective
Regions or Units.
(vii) As accounting officers, for proper accounting of all police finances in their respective
Regions or Units.
(b) The Inspector General may appoint Deputy Regional or Unit Commanders to assist Regional and
Unit Commanders in the execution of their duties. A Deputy Regional or Unit Commander shall be responsible
to the respective Regional or Unit Commander for the assignments given to him from time to time by the
concerned Regional or Unit Commander.

6. All Police Officers Commanding Districts and specialised Units are responsible to the Regional Police
Commander as follows:-

6
 P.G.O. No. 2
(a) For the efficient administration and management, according to the Constitution, laws and
regulations of the Force in their respective Districts and Units;
(b) For the efficiency and administration, the discipline and the welfare of all members of the Force
in the Districts and Units.
(c) For the efficient application of the directions contained in the laws of Tanzania (Mainland and
Zanzibar) in particular the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322, Criminal Procedure Statutes,
Evidence Statutes, Police Force and Prisons Service Commission Act, Cap. 241 and all Regulations, Orders and
circulars issued thereunder such as the Police Force Service Regulations, Police General Orders, Fiscal and
Procurement laws and regulations made there under, and other directions as they are given from time to time;
(d) For the maintenance of close liaison with Government Officials in their respective areas of
jurisdiction, and to render all assistance possible as may be required;
(e) For keeping the Regional Police Commander fully and immediately informed of all matters of
special interest;
(f) In particular, the Officers in Charge, Districts, for the coordination of all matters relating to the
Force in their respective Districts; and
(g) To be accounting officers of all police finances in the respective Districts and Units.

7. All Police Officers in charge stations are responsible and accountable to their respective Officer
Commanding District for efficient and effective administration of matters relating to the Force in their respective
areas of jurisdiction

8. All Officers in Charge Police Posts are responsible and accountable to their respective Officer
Commanding Station for efficient and effective administration of matters relating to the Force in their respective
Police Posts jurisdiction.

9. The organisational chart for the Force is included in this order as Appendix “A”.

APPENDIX “A”
To P.G.O No. 2

7
 P.G.O. No. 2
ORGANISATIONAL CHART

INSPECTOR
GENERAL

COMMISSIONER COMMISSIONER COMMISSIONER COMMISSIONER

ADMINISTRATION OPERATIONS INVESTIGATIONS ZBR
AND FINANCE AND TRAINING

REGIONAL/
UNIT
COMMANDERS

OFFICERS I/C
DISTRICTS

OFFICERS
I/C
STATIONS

OFFICERS I/C
POSTS

8
 P.G.O. No. 3
ORGANISATION-COMMAND STRUCTURE

1. (a) The Force is divided into the following 45 main police “Commands”:-

COMMAND COMMAND
Police Headquarters Arusha Region
Zanzibar Police Dar es Salaam (Region) Special Zone
Criminal Investigation Department Dodoma Region
Police Training School Moshi Iringa Region
Police College Dar es Salaam Kagera Region
Field Force Unit Kaskazini Pemba Region
Signals Unit Kaskazini Unguja Region
Traffic Unit Kigoma Region
Airports Police Unit Kilimanjaro Region
Air wing Police Unit Kusini Pemba Region
Police Vehicles Maintenance Unit Kusini Unguja Region
TRC Police Unit Lindi Region
TAZARA Police Unit Manyara Region
Stock Theft Prevention Unit Mara Region
Police Medical Unit Mbeya Region
Police Dog and Horse Unit Mjini Magharibi Region
Police Main Stores Morogoro Region
Marine Police Unit Mtwara Region
Police Band Dar es Salaam Mwanza Region
Pwani Region
Rukwa Region
Ruvuma Region
Shinyanga Region
Singida Region
Tabora Region
Tanga Region

(b) The Command structure chart of the Force is presented in Appendix “B” to this
order.

2. All Regional Commands will be sub-divided into Police districts, as shown in

Appendix “A”. Unless otherwise stated, Police Districts will have the same boundaries as
administrative Districts.

3. Police Districts which are made up of two or more administrative Districts (or areas),
may further be divided into Police Sub-Districts, each of the latter corresponding to one
administrative District (or area).

4. Each Police District and Sub-District will in turn be divided into Station Areas; each
controlled by a Police Station. The boundaries of Station Areas will be laid down in Station
Standing Orders.

5. (a) Each of the main commands listed in paragraph 1 of this Order will be
controlled by a “Commanding Officer” (Note – Commanding Officer is a descriptive term
not a title.)
(b) The Commanding Officers in charge of Regional commands will be known as
Regional Police Commanders and will be assisted by Staff Officers.
(c) Each Police District and Police Sub-District will normally be commanded by
a Gazetted Officer known as O/C. District (O.C.D.) and O/C. Sub – District (O.C.S.D.).

9
 P.G.O. No. 3
6. Subject to specific General Orders dealing with the overall command of the C.I.D.,
Field Force Unit, etc., each Commanding Officer, O/C. District, O/C. Sub-District and O/C.
Station will be held responsible for all aspects of Police work within his command.

10
 P.G.O. No. 3
APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No.3)
COMMAND POLICE DISTRICT
Arusha Region Arusha
Arumeru
Monduli
Ngorongoro
Karatu
Dodoma Region Dodoma
Mpwapwa
Kondoa
Kongwa
Dodoma Rural
Ilala Region Kati
Kariakoo
Buguruni
Ukonga

Iringa Region Iringa

Ludewa
Makete
Mufindi
Njombe
Kagera Region Bukoba
Ngara
Karagwe
Biharamulo
Muleba
Kaskazini Pemba Region Wete
Micheweni
Kaskazini Unguja Region Kaskazini A
Kaskazini B
Kigoma Region Kigoma,
Kasulu,
Kibondo
Kilimanjaro Region Moshi,
Rombo,
Hai,
Same,
Mwanga
Kinondoni Osterbay
Kawe
Magomeni
Kimara
Kusini Pemba Region Chake Chake
Mkoani
Kusini Unguja Region Kati
Kusini
Lindi Region Lindi,
Nachingwea,
Kilwa
Liwale
Manyara Region Babati
Hanang’
Kiteto

11
 P.G.O. No. 3
Mbulu
Simanjiro
Mara Region Musoma
Tarime
Serengeti
Bunda
Mbeya Region Mbeya
Ileje
Rungwe
Chunya
Mbozi
Kyela
Mbarali
Mjini Magharibi Region Mjini
Magharibi
Morogoro Region Morogoro
Kilosa
Kilombero
Ifakara [Ulanga]
Mtwara Region Mtwara
Masasi
Newala
Tandahimba
Mwanza Region Mwanza [Nyamagana and
Ilemera]
Ukerewe
Magu
Geita
Sengerema
Kwimba
Pwani Region Kibaha
Kisarawe
Bagamoyo
Mafia
Rufiji
Mkuranga
Rukwa Region Sumbawanga,
Mpanda
Nkasi
Ruvuma Region Songea
Mbinga
Tunduru
Namtumbo
Shinyanga Region Shinyanga
Bariadi
Maswa
Kahama
Meatu,
Bukombe
Singida Region Singida
Manyoni
Iramba
Tabora Region Tabora
Nzega,
Sikonge

12
 P.G.O. No. 3
Urambo
Igunga
Tanga Region Tanga,
Korogwe,
Lushoto
Muheza
Pangani
Handeni
Temeke Chang’ombe
Mbagala
Kigamboni

13
 P.G.O. No. 3

APPENDIX “B”
To P.G.O. No. 3

COMMAND STRUCTURE CHART

IGP

RPC/CO

OCD

OCS

I/c POST

14
 P.G.O. No. 4
ORGANIZATION - TITLES AND ABBREVIATIONS OF
OFFICERS

1. The following standard officers’ titles and abbreviations will be used throughout the
Force in routine correspondence when attached to a signature:
ABBREVIATION FULL VERSION
A/Insp Assistant Inspector
ACP Assistant Commissioner
Ag Acting (to prefix rank abbreviation)
ASP Assistant Superintendent
CO/FF Commanding Officer, Field Force
C/PC Commandant Police College
C/PTS Commandant, Police Training School
CA Chief of Administration
CDP Chief of Development Planning
CF Chief of Finance
CI Chief of Inspections
CMDT Chief of Manpower Development and Training
CO Commanding Officer
CO TR Command Officer Traffic Unit

COP Chief of Operations

CP Commissioner
CP (A&F) Commissioner (Administration and Finance)
CP (O&T) Commissioner (Operations and Training)
CP (ZBR) Commissioner (Police Zanzibar)
Cpl Corporal
CPR Chief of Public Relations
CRO Charge Room Officer
CSO Chief Signal Officer
DCI Director, Criminal Investigation
DCP Deputy Commissioner
Det Detective (to prefix all detective ranks up to and including
Inspector)
DHM Dog and Horse Master
DM Director of Music
Drv Driver (to prefix rank abbreviation)

15
 P.G.O. No. 4
FCA Force Chief Accountant
FDS Force Driving School
FTO Force Transport Officer
GO Gazetted Officer
Insp Inspector
O/C ADU Officer in Command Anti-Narcotics Unit
O/C CID Officer in Command District C.I.D.
O/C CIU Officer in Command Crime Intelligence Unit
O/C FF Officer in Command Field Force Unit
CO/ FB Officer in Command Forensic Bureau
O/C MT Officer in Command Transport Branch
O/C P Officer i/c. Police Post
O/C RCIU Officer in Command Regional Crime Intelligence Unit
O/C RFF Officer in Command Regional Field Force Unit
O/C RP Officer in Command Regional Railways Police Unit
O/C TRC Officer in Command Tanzania Railways Corporation
Police Division
O/C RSTPU Officer in Command Regional Stock Theft Prevention Unit
O/C TAZARA Officer in Command TAZARA Police Unit
OCD Officer in Command District
OCS Officer in Command Station
OCSD Officer in Command Sub District
PC Constable
QM Quartermaster
RCO Regional Crime Officer
RPC Regional Police Commander
RSM Regimental Sergeant Major
RSO Officer in Command Regional Signals
RTO Officer in Command Regional Traffic
S/Sgt Staff Sergeant
SACP Senior Assistant Commissioner
Sgt Sergeant
Sig Signaller (to prefix rank abbreviation)
SO (A) Staff Officer Administration
SO (B) Staff Officer (Buildings)
SO (CID) Staff Officer (Criminal Investigation Department)
SO (CPU) Staff Officer (Crime Prevention Unit)
SO (D) Staff Officer (Development)

16
 P.G.O. No. 4
SO (I) Staff Officer Inspection
SO (M) Staff Officer Mgambo
SO (O) Staff Officer (Operations)
SO (P) Staff Officer (Personnel)
SO (PHQ) Staff Officer (Headquarters)
SO (PR) Staff Officer Public Relations
SO (RPR) Staff Officer Regional Public Relations
SO (S) Staff Officer (Sports)
SO (T) Staff Officer (Training)
SP Superintendent
SSP Senior Superintendent
STPO Stock Theft Preventive Officer
STPU Stock Theft Preventive Unit
WP Woman Police

Note: Regional, District, Sub-District or Station abbreviations will be added in brackets at the
end of the Officer in Command, viz.:
(a) RPC. (T) = Regional Police Commander, Tanga
(b) OCD. (KOR) = Officer in Command Korogwe District
(c) OCS. (HA) = Officer in Command Handeni Police Station.
(d) RCO (T) = Officer in Command Tanga Regional C.I.D.
(e ) RFF (T) Officer in Command Tanga Field Force Unit.
(f ) OCRP (T) Officer in Command Tanga Railways Police Unit.
(g) RSO (T) Officer in Command Tanga Regional signals
(h) RCIU (T) Officer in Command Tanga Region Crime Intelligence Unit.
(i) RTO (T) Officer in Command Traffic, Tanga.
Note: “Commanding Officer” is a descriptive term, not a title.

17
 P.G.O. No. 5
ORGANISATION – TITLES AND ABBREVIATIONS OF
STATIONS AND UNITS

1. The following standard titles and abbreviations for Police Stations and Units will be
used throughout the Force:-
(a) UNITS
NAME ABBREVIATION
Band B.
Central C.
Crime Intelligence Unit C.I.U.
Criminal Investigation Department C.I.D.
Criminal Investigation Department Headquarters C.I.D. H.Q.
Dar es Salaam DSM
Dodoma DOM
Dog Section D.S.
Field Force FF
Field Force Units FFU.
Force Driving School F.D.S.
Forensic Bureau F.B.
General Duties Branch* GD
Iringa IRA
Kagera KGR
Kaskazini Pemba KAS(P)
Kaskazini Unguja KAS(U)
Kigoma KGM
Kilimanjaro KRO
Kusini Pemba KUS(P)
Kusini Unguja KUS(U)
Lindi LND
Manyara MYR
Mara MRA
Mbeya MBY
Mjini Magharibi MJN(M)
Morogoro MRG
Mtwara MTR
Mwanza MWZ
Police College PC

18
 P.G.O. No. 5
Police District D
Police Headquarters PHQ
Police Main Stores P.M.S.
Police Station PS
Police Sub-District S.D.
Police Training School P.T.S.
Pwani PWN
Quartermaster QM
Railways Division R.D.
Regional Command RegCom
Rukwa RKW
Ruvuma RVM
Shinyanga SHY
Signals Unit SIGS
Signals Unit Headquarters SIGS. H.Q.
Singida SGD
Stock Theft Prevention Section S.T.P.U.
Tabora TBR
Tanga TNG
TAZARA TZR
Traffic Unit Tr.D.
Transport Branch M.T.B.
Zanzibar ZBR
Zanzibar Police Headquarters ZBR(PHQ)
NOTE: The General Duties Branch of the Force consists of all ranks wearing uniform and
engaged on police general duties. It does not include the Field Force and other
specialized branches, which have their own titles.

(b) STATIONS
FULL NAME ABBREVIATION Airport, Zanzibar AZB
Amani AMN
Airport, Arusha AAR Arusha ARS
Airport, Chake Chake ACH Babati BAB
Airport, Dar es Salaam MNIA Bagamoyo BAG
Airport, Dodoma ADO Basuto BST
Airport, Kilimanjaro KIA Bayagu BYG
Airport, Mtwara AMT Bereko BRK
Airport, Mwanza MWA Biharamulo BIH

19
 P.G.O. No. 5
Bisumwa BIS Chuo Kikuu Dar es salaam CHD
Bomang’ombe BOM Chwaka CHW
FULL NAME ABBREVIATION Dabalo DBL
Borega BRG Dodoma DOM
Borogonja BGJ Dumila DUM
Bububu BUB Dunga DUN
Buck Reef BRF Fuoni FUO
Bugarama BGA Gairo GAI
Buguruni BUG Gamasara GAS
Buhemba BUH Geita GET
Bukene BUK Gingiliani GIN
Bukima BKA Gonja GOJ
Bukoba BKB Halungu HAL
Bukoli BKO Handeni HAN
Bukombe BKE Haneti HAT
Bukumbi BKM Heka Azimio HAZ
Bulamba BUL Himo HIM
Bumbwini BUM Ibaga IBG
Bunazi BUN Iboja IBJ
Bunda BND Ifakara IFA
Busangi BUS Igalula IGL
Busisi BSS Igirubi IGR
Butiama BUT Igogo IGO
Butundwe BNW Iguguno IGG
Bwanga BWA Igunga IGU
Central P.S., Dar es Salaam CDS Igurusi IGS
Chake Chake CHC Ihanja IHJ
Chake Chake (District) CHK Ikungi IKG
Chala CAA Ikwiriri IKW
Chalinze CHL Ilala ILA
Chang’ombe CHA Ileje ILE
Chato CHT Ilongero ILO
Chikuyu CKY Ilula ILL
Chimala CHI Inyala INY
Chipogoro CHP Inyonga ING
Choma CHM Iramba IRA
Chunya CHU Iringa IRI

20
 P.G.O. No. 5
Isaka ISK Kegonga KEA
Iselamagazi ISE Kengeja KEG
Isenye INE Kenkombyo KYO
Itigi ITG Kenyana KYA
Kabanga KBG Kiabakari KRI
Kagunga KGG Kiagata KGA
Kagwe KWE Kibakwe KKW
Kahama KAH Kibalisa KBS
Kakonko KAK Kibara KBR
Kalango KAL Kibaro KRO
Kalema KLM Kibaya KIB
Kaliua KAU Kibiti KBT
Kalya KAA Kibondo KBO
Kamachumu KAM Kidatu KDT
Kamsamba KSM Kigamboni KGM
Kanyigo KGO Kigeraetuma KRM
Kara KRA Kigogo Ferry KGF
Karagwe KAR Kigoma KIG
Karatu KRT Kigoma (Kati) KGT
Karumwa KRU Kigwe KIW
Kasamwa KSW Kijingu KIJ
Kasanga KSG Kijitonyama KJT
Kaseya KSY Kilimarondo KRN
Kashasha KHH Kilimatinde KLT
Kaskazini A KSA Kilombero KOE
Kaskazini B KSB Kilosa KIL
Kasulu KAS Kilwa – Kivinje KLK
Kasumulu KSL Kilwa – Road KLR
Kate KAE Kimali KLI
Katesh KTS Kimamba KIM
Kati KAT Kingolwira KWR
Katoro KTR Kintinku KIN
Katumba KTU Kiomboi KIO
Katunguru KTG Kipeta KPE
Kaunda KDA Kirongwe KIE
Kawe KAW Kirumba KIR
Kayisho KAO Kisaki KIK

21
 P.G.O. No. 5
Kisanga KSN Mabandampakani MBP
Kisarawe KIS Machochwe MCC
Kisesi KSE Madaba MDD
Kishanje KJE Madema MAD
Kisorya KSR Madibira MDR
Kiwira KWI Mafia MAF
Kogaja KJA Mafinga MFA
Komaswa KWA Maganzo MGZ
Konde KOD Magharibi MGH
Kondoa KON Magomeni MAG
Kongwa KNG Magu MGU
Korogwe KOR Magugu MGG
Kusini KUS Mahembe MHB
Kwamtoro KTO Mahenge MHE
Kwimba Ngudu KWN Mahonda MAH
Kyaka KYK Mahurunga MHR
Kyela KYL Mahuta MHT
Laela LAL Maili Moja MMO
Lalago LGO Majengo MAJ
Lamadi LDI Majimoto MTO
Lindi LIN Makambako MKO
Lionjo LJO Makanda MKD
Litembo LTE Makele MKL
Liuli LIL Makongorosi MSI
Liwale LWL Makunduchi MAK
Lizabon LIZ Makuyu MYU
Loliondo LOL Malampaka MLK
Longido LON Malangali MGL
Lugalo LUG Malindi MAL
Lukumbule LLE Malinyi MNY
Lunguru LRU Malya MYA
Lunguya LGU Manda MDA
Lupembe LPE Mandawa MDW
Lusewa LWA Mang’ula MLA
Lushoto LUS Mangaka MKA
Lwangwa LGW Manyoni MAN
Mabanda Mjini MMJ Manyovu MYV

22
 P.G.O. No. 5
Masasi MSS Misungwi MIS
Masumbwe MSW Mjini MJN
Maswa MAS Mkoani MKN
Matamba MAM Mkoani (District) MND
Matarawe MRW Mkokotoni MKT
Matayi MYI Mkuu Rombo MKR
Matemanga MTE Mkuyuni MYN
Matombo MAT Mkwajuni MNI
Matongo MGO Mlandizi MLZ
Mavota MAV Mlimba MLB
Mazizini MAZ Mlowo MWO
Mbamba Bay BAY Mombo MOM
Mbarali MBL Monduli MDL
Mbekenyera MYE Morogoro MOR
Mbeya MBE Mose MOE
Mbinga MBI Moshi MOS
Mbingu MBG Mpanda MPA
Mbozi MBZ Mpuyi MPY
Mbulu MBU Mpwapwa MPW
Meatu MEA Msamala MSM
Mererani MER Msimbazi MSZ
Mfenesini MFE Mtama MTM
Mgambo Kigoma MKG Mtambile MTA
Mgandu MDU Mtera MTR
Mgango MGN Mtibwa MBW
Mgeta MGT Mtimbira MTI
Mgololo MLO Mtimko MIO
Micheweni MCH Mtitu MTT
Mikese MKS Mto Mara MMA
Mikindani MIK Mtowisa MWS
Mikumi MKI Mtukula MKU
Milepa MLP Mtwara Kati MTW
Milola MLL Mufindi MUF
Mingoyo MIN Muganza MUZ
Minziro MRO Mugeta MUT
Misasi MSA Mugoma MGM
Mishamo MSO Mugumu MUG

23
 P.G.O. No. 5
Muhange MGE Nduguti NDT
Muhenze MZE Newala NEW
Muheza MUH Ngambo NGB
Muhoro MUO Ngamiani NGM
Muhukuru MRU Ngamu NAU
Muhutwe MUE Ngara NGR
Muriti MRI Ngare, Nairobi NNB
Murongo MUR Ngare, Nanyuki NNK
Murusagamba RUS Ngasamu NSA
Murutunguru UTU Ngerengere NGE
Musoma MUS Ngorongoro NGO
Muyama UYA Ngudu NGU
Mvomero MVO Nguliati NGI
Mwadui MWD Nguruka NGK
Mwamapalala APA Njombe NJM
Mwampembe MPE Nshamba NSH
Mwanakwerekwe MWK Nyakabindi NDI
Mwandiga IGA Nyakahanga AHA
Mwanga MWG Nyakahura URA
Mwanza MZA Nyakalilo AKO
Mwanza North MWN Nyakanazi AZI
Mwera MWE Nyamilembe NLM
Mwese MSE Nyamongo NMG
Mwimbi MWI Nyamswa AMS
Mzumbe MZU Nyamwaga NYW
Nachingwea NAC Nyang’wale AGW
Nalasin NAL Nyangae NYA
Namabengo NAM Nyantira NTI
Namanyere NMN Nyaronga NYR
Namasi NSI Nyegezi NYZ
Namtumbo NTM Nyumba ya Mungu NYM
Nanga NGA Nzega NZG
Nanyamba NAY Nzela NLA
Nasa Darajani NDJ Ol Moloq OLM
Nata NAT Oldonyo Olobaiye OLO
Ndago NDG Oldonyo Sambu OLS
Ndanda NDD Omukariro OMU

24
 P.G.O. No. 5
Oyster Bay OYB Sitakishari STS
Paje PAJ Songea SON
Pangani PAN Songea Bus Stand SBS
Panyakoo PAO Songwe SGW
Peramiho PER STAMICO STA
Puge PUE Suguti SGI
Robanda ROA Sumbawanga SUM
Rongai RGA Sumve SVE
Rua Mchanga RUA Sungwizi SZI
Ruaha Mbuyuni RUM Tabora TAB
Ruangwa RUN Tanga TAN
Rubale RUB Tarakea TKE
Ruhembe RHE Tarime TAR
Rulenge RLE TAZARA – Dar es salaam TPG
Runzewe RZW TAZARA – Makambako TMK
Rusumo RUU TAZARA – Mbeya TMB
Rutamba RUT TAZARA – Mlimba TML
Same SAM Tegeruka TEG
Sangamwalugesha SLU Traffic Dar es salaam TRD
Sanya Juu SJU Traffic Malindi TRM
Sanza SAZ TRC, Bukoba RBK
Sao Hill SAH TRC, Dar es Salaam RDS
Sapiwi SAP TRC, Kemondo Bay KEM
Saragana SAR TRC, Moshi RMS
Selander Bridge SLB TRC, Mwanza RMZ
Sengerema SEN TRC, Tabora RTB
Sepuka SEP TRC, Tanga RTN
Seronera SER Tukuyu TUK
Shelui SHE Tumbi Kibaha KBH
Shinyanga SHI Tunduma TDM
Shirati SRT Tunduru TUN
Shirati Marine SMR Turiani TUR
Sigunga SUG Ujiji UJJ
Sikonge SKG Ukerewe UKW
Simbo SIM Ukiriguru UKI
Singida SGD Ukumbisiganga UKA
Sirari SIR Ulyankulu ULY

25
 P.G.O. No. 5
Unguja Ukuu UKU Utegi UGI
Urafiki URK Utete UTE
Urambo URM Uvinza UVZ
Usa River USR Vwawa VWA
Usenya USE Wazo Hill WZO
Usoke USK Wete WET
Note. The General Duties Branch of the Force consists of all ranks wearing uniform and
engaged on police general duties. It does not include the Field Force and other specialised
branches which have their own titles.

2. These abbreviations will be used in correspondence and in conjunction with file

reference numbers.

26
 P.G.O. No. 6
ESTABLISHMENT AND STRENGTH OF THE FORCE
1. The authorised establishment of each Police formation is approved and published by
the Inspector General.
2. Commanding Officers shall maintain the strength of each Unit as near as possible to
its authorised establishment, at the same time bearing in mind the need to use their resources
to the best advantage. Strength may not exceed establishment, except for short periods,
without reference to the Inspector General.
3. Commanding Officers may not transfer Inspectors who have been Gazetted as
Officers in Command without reference to the Inspector General (except, of course, in
emergency) but are otherwise free to arrange transfers within their commands of all grades
of General Duties Inspectors and Rank & File.
4. (a) All ranks below Gazetted Officer shall remain on the strength of the
Command to which they were last posted until transferred, retired, dismissed or discharged.
(b) All officers below the rank of Gazetted Officer who are on vacation, on
leave prior to retirement, on prolonged sick leave or on courses of instruction shall remain
on the strength of the Command to which they are posted.
5 Monthly Manpower Returns (PF. 191) are required from the following Stations and
Formations:-

RETURN RETURN TO INCLUDE ORIGINAL TO IGP

REQUIRED FROM AND COPY TO
Police HQ. All ranks -
D.C.I. All ranks C.I.D. HQ. Including -
Forensic Bureau
Director of Music All ranks -
COs. Police College, Return A: P.T.S. Staff including Band
P.T.S. Moshi and Dog and Horse Sections.
Return B: All ranks under training, D.C.I.
both recruits and personnel on courses.
CO. TRC Police, CO. Return A: All ranks excluding C.I.D.
TAZARA Police and personnel.
CO. Airports Return B: C.I.D. personnel of all Units D.C.I.
All R.P.C’s Return A: All ranks excluding C.I.D.
personnel.
Return B: All C.I.D. personnel D.C.I.
All O.C. Districts All ranks of A,B, and C stations CSO and FF where
including signals excluding CID and applicable
FF
All O/C. F.F. units` All ranks in the Field Force personnel -
Unit
All Regional/unit All CID personnel of the region/unit. D.C.I and RPCs
C.I.D. Officers concerned
C.S.O All ranks including signals personnel -
Commissioner (ZBR) Return A – All ranks in the ZBR
(PHQ) including Signals, FF , P.T.S,
All ranks in the Regions in Unguja and
Pemba
Return B – CID personnel and all D.C.I.
ranks under training at P.T.S.
Quartermaster, PMS All ranks -

27
 P.G.O. No. 6
RETURN RETURN TO INCLUDE ORIGINAL TO IGP
REQUIRED FROM AND COPY TO
All COs specialised All ranks -
Units

6. All casualties will be reported on Monthly Manpower Returns, with full particulars of
each casualty for publication in Force Orders without further reference to the reporting
officer.
7. (a) All information required on this Return shall be entered under the appropriate
headings. Casualties for whom no appropriate headings exist will still be shown on the
Manpower Return with full particulars, for example: -
(i) E. XXX Police Constable Driver John ceased to draw Driver’s
Allowance when proceeding on leave, with effect from 1st January 2004.
(ii) E. YYY Police Constable George interdicted from duty on half pay
(authority Inspector General’s letter E.YYY/25, dated 1st February 2004).
(b) In addition, notification of departures on leave and courses during the month
on the reverse of the form should include, under the column “Reasons”, the period of leave
granted and whether or not transport assistance was utilised. Any incomplete or incorrect
information supplied on the Manpower Returns, in so far as casualties are concerned, will be
ignored and will not be published in Force Orders.
8. This Return will include the total number of all ranks serving in each Station or Unit
at 0800 hours on the first day of each month.
9. This return shall be sent direct to the Inspector General and to Commanding Officers
detailed in paragraph 5, above. The Inspector General’s copy will reach Police Headquarters
not later than the fifteenth of each month.

28
 P.G.O. No. 7
ORGANISATION – ZANZIBAR COMMAND

1. The Command in Zanzibar shall be under the Commissioner (ZBR).

2. The Commissioner (ZBR) shall be responsible to the Inspector General:

(a) For the efficient administration and management of the Force in Zanzibar,
according to the Constitution, laws and regulations of the land, and in all matters that may be
assigned to him by the Inspector General.
(b) For the efficiency, administration, discipline and the welfare of all Members of
the Force stationed in Zanzibar.
(c) For keeping the Inspector General fully and immediately informed of all
matters of importance and special interest in the implementation of the police work in
Zanzibar.
3. All officers in charge of Investigations, Operations, Administration and Training,
Planning and Development, Inspections, and Staff Officer (PHQ) in Zanzibar, are
responsible and accountable to the Commissioner (ZBR).
4. The organisational structure for the command in Zanzibar is presented in Appendix
“A” to this order.

29
 P.G.O. No. 7
APPENDIX “A” TO PGO NO 7

ORGANISATIONAL CHART FOR THE ZANZIBAR POLICE

HEADQUARTERS

COMMISSIONER [ZBR]

O/C O/C O/C O/C PLANNING O/C

INVESTIGATI OPERATIONS ADMINISTRATIO & INSPECTIONS
ONS N & TRAINING DEVELOPMENT

30
 P.G.O. No. 8
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION DEPARTMENT – CONSTITUTION,
ORGANISATION AND DUTIES

Constitution
1. The Commissioner in charge of investigations otherwise referred to as the Director
of Criminal Investigation shall be the overall in charge of the CID and related matters.
2. (a) The Deputy Director of Criminal Investigations (ZBR) shall report to the
Director of Criminal Investigation through the Commissioner (ZBR) on all matters relating
to CID (ZBR).
(b) All Regional Crime Officers shall report to the Director of Criminal
Investigation on all matters relating to the CID in their respective regions provided that
Regional Crime Officers (ZBR) will channel their reports through the Commissioner (ZBR).
General Responsibilities of the C.I.D
3. The following shall be the general responsibilities of the C.I.D:-
(a) The prevention of crime.
(b) The efficient investigation and detection of serious crime and incidents;
(c) The collection and collation of all information regarding crime in Tanzania
so that the Inspector General and the government in general may be kept informed in all
matters of criminal interest;
(d) The maintenance of close and effective liaison with all branches of the
Force, in particular, with the General Duties Division;
(e) The maintenance of criminal records and statistics; and
(f ) The provision of advice and assistance in all investigations giving rise to
difficulty or doubt and seeking legal advice as may be necessary.

Organisation
4, (a) The C.I.D. is divided into the following main Divisions
(i) C.I.D. Headquarters with the following Divisions/sections: -
• Offences against security of the state and Public tranquillity – [X
Section ]
• Offences against person – [Y section]
• Offences against property – [Z section]
• The Administration and Finance
• Legal and Research Section
(ii) The Forensic Bureau
(iii) Arms Management and Registry.
(iv) Regional C.I.D. Units.
(v) Divisional C.I.D. Units namely Railways (TAZARA and TRC) and
Airports.
(vi) District C.I.D. Units.
(b) The organisational chart of the CID is represented in this order as Appendix
“A”.

Duties and Responsibilities of the Director of Criminal Investigation

5. Subject to the general directions of the Inspector General, the Director of Criminal
Investigation is responsible for the following duties: -
(a) The organisation and administration of the C.I.D, which shall include the
appointment, posting and transferring of all C.I.D. personnel within Tanzania,
the submission of recommendations for their promotion, their specialist
training, and for the general efficiency of criminal investigation work.

31
 P.G.O. No. 8
(b) Informing the Inspector General and the Government in general of all matters
of criminal interest.
(c) By regular inspections, ensuring that the highest standards of efficiency in the
prevention and detection of crime and the collection of criminal intelligence
are maintained by C.I.D. Units and personnel.
(d) Ensuring that the work and responsibilities of C.I.D. Units and personnel and
specialised branches of the C.I.D. are properly governed by the General
Orders.
(e) Ensuring that the C.I.D. cooperates to the fullest extent with the General
Duties Division of the Force, the National Security Service, the Director of
Public Prosecutions and other Government Departments.
(f) The compilation and collation of criminal statistics and returns as may be
required from time to time.
(g) Providing general assistance, guidance and advice in all matters relating to
the prevention and detection of crime and particularly in cases where expert
opinion is sought on forensic, fingerprints, ballistics, document and physical
examinations, legal advice and the framing of charges.
(h) The supervision or the taking over of the investigation of serious, important
and political crimes and inquiries within Tanzania, either upon the direct
instructions of the Inspector General or at his own discretion.
(I) Direct liaison with the Director of Public Prosecutions in legal matters.
(j) The dissemination of criminal intelligence to C.I.D. Units as may be
necessary.
(k) The maintenance of close contact with the C.I.D. of the Police Forces of
neighbouring territories and Interpol members to ensure maximum co-
operation with them
(l) The control and administration of the Anti Narcotics Unit in matters
concerning measures to combat drug trafficking and abuse.
(m) The notification of the arrest of any national of a foreign State to the
appropriate local Consular Officer.
(n) All matters in connection with mutual assistance in criminal matters,
extradition, expulsion and deportation.
(o) The supervision and control of all licensed general dealers in second – hand
goods and scrap metals.
(p) The administration of the Central Arms Registry.
(q) The supervision control and licensing of sweepstakes, lotteries and public
collection within Tanzania.
(r) The control and allocation of criminal investigation funds (P.G.O.133).
Duties and Responsibilities of O/C Regional C.I.D. Units
6 Subject to the general direction of the Director of Criminal Investigation, O/C.
Regional C.I.D. Units (R.C.O.) are primarily and directly responsible to their Regional
Commanders for all matters relating to criminal investigation within their Regions, and
particularly for the efficient investigation of those crimes listed in Appendix “A”. They will
carry out such investigations as may be ordered by their Regional Commanders for the
proper maintenance of law and order, and all duties which they may be called upon to
perform will be carried out as directed by their Regional Commanders and undertaken in
their name. O/C. Regional C.I.D. Units will be responsible for the following duties:-
(a) Exercising direct charge of all C.I.D. personnel in their region.
(b) The organisation and efficiency of all C.I.D. personnel and Units in their
regions by regular inspections and visits, such inspections to be performed
quarterly.
(c) The personal supervision of all criminal investigation into serious crimes
within the Region, and they will themselves visit the scenes of all-major
offences and incidents.

32
 P.G.O. No. 8
(d) Keeping their Regional Commanders fully informed in all matters of criminal
interest affecting their regions.
(e) Maintaining close liaison with the Director of Criminal Investigation on all
criminal matters of a serious nature.
(f) Providing assistance, guidance and advice to District Units and Police
Stations in all matters relating to the prevention and detection of crime.
(g) The training of C.I.D. personnel and the organisation of refresher courses
based on the syllabus approved by the Inspector General
(h) Ensuring general compliance by all C.I.D. Units with the procedures and
requirements laid down in P.G.Os, and particularly in the following: -
(i) No. 40 Criminal Investigation Department – Maintenance of Records
(ii) No. 41 Criminal Statistics.
(iii) No. 227 Investigation Charges.
(iv) No. 229 Investigation Exhibits.
(v) No. 230 Investigation Fingerprints.
(vi) No. 231 Investigation Identification by Photographs.
(vii) No. 232 Investigation Identification Parades.
(viii) No. 233 Investigation Missing Persons.
(ix) No. 235 Investigation Scenes of Crime sections.
(x) No. 236 Investigation Statements
(xi) No. 238 Investigation Wanted Persons.
(xii) No.286 Case Files and Minor Offence Dockets Preparation of
(xiii) No. 311 Reports Immediate Action on Receipt of
(xiv) No. 358 Supervision of Habitual Criminals on Court Order.
(xv) No. 359 Supervision of Habitual Criminals Without Court
Supervision Order.
(i) The control and allocation of Regional C.I. funds supplied to them for the
purchase of criminal information and the maintenance of accounts and
records in accordance with P.G.O. 133.
(j) The prompt submission of all returns listed in appendix “B” as required by
Police General Orders.
(k) Direct liaison with State Attorney where posted locally.

Duties and Responsibilities of O/C. District C.I.D. Units

7. In precisely the same manner as O/C. Regional C.I.D. Units (R.C.O.) are responsible
to their Regional Commanders for all matters relating to criminal investigation within their
Regions, so are O/C. District C.I.D. Units responsible to their O/C. District for all similar
matters and for the performance of the same duties within their Districts. In addition, they
will be responsible for the following:-
(a) Personal visits to the scenes of all serious crimes and incidents occurring in
the District.
(b) The preparation of first Crime Reports (PF. 4) for submission to Regional
Headquarters in accordance with paragraph 9 of P.G.O. 311.
(c) The close control and supervision of the day to day duties of detective staff.
(d) The prompt submission of all returns listed in Appendix “B” as required by
Police General Orders.

Divisional C.I.D. Units – Railways and Airports

8. (a) Subject to the general directions of the Director of Criminal Investigation, the
officers in charge of the C.I.D Units of the Railways Units (TAZARA Police and Tanzania
Railways Corporation Police) and Airports Police are responsible to their Unit Commanders
for all matters relating to criminal investigation within their Units, and in particular for the
efficient investigation of offences against the laws controlling the Railways Units (TAZARA
Police and Tanzania Railways Corporation Police) and Airports. These Units are empowered
to conduct and pursue investigations into offences relating to their Units throughout

33
 P.G.O. No. 8
Tanzania and, through the Director of Criminal Investigation, application may be made by
Regional Commanders for their specialised services in the Airports, etc. located in their
commands.
(b) District C.I.D. Units will normally investigate serious crimes on trains and
railway property occurring in their area, such as serious assaults against the person and other
crimes not directly related to railway or airport operations, but the assistance of the Airports,
Railways Units (TAZARA Police and Tanzania Railways Corporation Police) C.I.D. Units
may be sought and involved in serious cases.
(c ) Personnel of the Airports, Railways Units (TAZARA Police and Tanzania
Railways Corporation Police) C.I.D. Units will maintain the closest liaison with Regional
and District C.I.D. Units when engaged in investigations into airports or railways offences in
their respective areas and will ensure that all information they may obtain on other criminal
matters is passed to the respective C.I.D. Unit.

Duties and Responsibilities of the O/C. Forensic Bureau.

9 Subject to the directions of the Director of Criminal Investigation, the O/C. Forensic
Bureau, is responsible for the efficient organisation and administration of the Bureau
established for the maintenance of Territorial criminal records, and will be responsible for
the following duties: -
(a) The classification, filling and maintenance of impressions in-
(i) the Main Fingerprint collection
(ii) the Single Fingerprint collection; and
(iii) the Scenes of Crime collection.
(b) The searching of fingerprint records to trace criminal antecedents (P.G.O. No.
230)
(c) The examination of articles at or brought from scenes of crime and the
identification of marks found at scenes of crime (P.G.O.) Nos.229 and 235).
(d) The examination of arms, armunitions, explosives, arsenals, drugs, toxic and
biological substances used in the commission of offences.
(e) The preparation of evidence involving fingerprints, typewritten, hand-written
and other exhibits submitted for expert examination.
(f) Photography for all police purposes including the maintenance of up-country
dark rooms and the training of personnel for this purpose.
(g) The issue of identity cards on police supervisees and the maintenance of a
territorial index on supervisees and habitual criminals (P.G.O. Nos. 358 and
359).
(h) The maintenance of indexes respecting stolen property.
(i) The maintenance of records of wanted and missing persons (P.G.O. No. 238).
(j) The preparation of the Police Gazette and its supplements.
(k) The compilation of crime statistics (P.G.O. No. 41) and returns (Appendix
“C”), and the upkeep of crime maps and charts.
(l) The organisation, administration and staffing of up-country scenes of crime
sections (P.G.O. No.235).
(m) The custody and maintenance of Police Museum exhibits.
(n) The maintenance of records in computer section.
(o) Such other duties as the Director of Criminal Investigation may from time to
time direct.

Duties and Responsibilities of O/C. Scenes of Crime Sections

10. Scene of Crime Sections shall be attached to Regional C.I.D. Units to assist in the
investigation of serious crime. The in charge of each Scene of Crime Section is responsible
to the O/C. Forensic Bureau for the technical efficiency of the Section and works under the
local directions of the Regional C.I.D. Officer. Scenes of crime sections will:-

34
 P.G.O. No. 8
(a) accept articles submitted for examination which have been found at scenes of
crime;
(b) take possession of all portable articles bearing finger, palm or foot
impressions found at scenes of crime;
(c) photograph all non-portable articles bearing marks or finger, palmer or foot
impressions;
(d) ensure that finger, palm or foot impressions are efficiently photographed and
that four prints of each mark photographed are prepared;
(e) maintain a Scenes of Crime Register (PF. 129) and enter relevant particulars
therein in numerical and chronological sequence;
(f) ensure the safe custody of all articles and exhibits taken over and submit to
the evidence section. An Exhibits Register (PF.16) will be maintained
wherein descriptions of such articles will be entered in terms of P.G.O. No.
229;
(g) maintain an index of photographs for each mark processed, bearing relevant
references;
(h) take all elimination prints;
(i) eliminate innocent prints and forward copies of all marks not eliminated to
the Forensic Bureau with a completed copy of PF. 118 within 48 hours of
visiting the scene of crime;
(j) compare all outstanding marks on record with fingerprints received on PF. 15
and enter particulars of each set of prints so compared in the Scenes of Crime
Register;
(k) file PF. 15 when endorsed with C.R.O. number, in the two-handed system
collection;
(l) forward all identified marks or prints to the Forensic Bureau, for confirmation
of comparison as may be necessary;
(m) follow the procedure as laid down in P.G.O. No. 229 where cases are required
to be proved in court;
(n) be responsible for the maintenance of Dark Rooms used by them and the safe
custody of cameras and other equipment on charge;
(o) maintain a Stores Ledger for all equipment on charge;
(p) submit a monthly return to reach the O/C., Forensic Bureau not later than the
fourth of the succeeding month, giving summary of the work carried out by
the Section.

Duties and Responsibilities of O/C X – Offences against security of the state and public
tranquillity
11. Subject to the directions of the Director of Criminal Investigation, the O/C X is
responsible for the following:-
(a) The efficient organisation and investigation of offences against security of the
state and public tranquillity including terrorism.
(b) The efficient organisation and administration of the Crime Intelligence Unit,
Crime Statistics, the National Central Bureau [Interpol], the Anti-Narcotics Unit and the
Anti-smuggling Unit.

Duties and Responsibilities of O/C Y – Offences against Persons

12. Subject to the directions of the Director of Criminal Investigation the O/C Y is
responsible for the following: -
(a) The efficient organisation, administration and investigation of offences
against persons which offences include all homicides, sexual offences and witchcraft.
(b) The investigations of all complaints against Police.

Duties and Responsibilities of O/C Z – Offences against Property

35
 P.G.O. No. 8
13. Subject to the directions of the Director of Criminal Investigation the O/C Z is
responsible for the following:
(a) The efficient organisation, administration and investigation into all offences
against property. These offences including frauds, robberies, motor vehicle thefts, house
breaking, malicious damages to property and stock thefts.
(b) The investigation of money laundering and international financial crimes and
matters connected to mutual assistance in criminal matters and crime proceeds.

Duties and Responsibilities of the O/C. Arms Management and Registry

14. The O/C. Arms Management and Registry shall administer the Registry established
to control the licensing of firearms within Tanzania. He shall be responsible to the Director
of Criminal Investigation on all matters relating to arms licensing and registration. His duties
shall be as follows: -
(a) The maintenance of all arms registry records.
(b) The supervision of arms licensing in Tanzania.
(c) The preparation and distribution of the Arms Black List.
(d) The supervision of matters concerning private arms warehouses, private
warehouse lists lost, stolen and unclaimed firearms.
(e) The preparation of Monthly, Quarterly and Annual Reports concerning arms
licensing for submission to the Director of Criminal Investigation.
(f) Direct liaison with the Small Arms Control Units for purposes of controlling
proliferation of small arms in the country.

Use of the C.I.D.

15. It is the duty of the C.I.D. to investigate all serious crime listed in Appendix “C”
together with any other investigations, which cannot be satisfactorily investigated by the
General Duties Branch of the Force. As a general rule, all minor crimes shall be handled by
the General Duties Branch and should not be referred to the C.I.D. unless there are special
reasons for doing so. O/C. District and Stations must decide without delay whether any
report should be passed to the C.I.D. for investigation and whether any cases which have
been investigated unsuccessfully by the General Duties Branch should be referred to the
C.I.D. for further investigation or closed undetected.

APPENDIX “A” TO
P.G.O. No. 8

36
 P.G.O. No. 8

ORGANISATIONAL CHART OF THE CID

DCI

SO (F&A) OC (FB)

CID (ZBR) O/C O/C O/C AMAD O/C

(X-SECTION) (Y-SECTION) (Z-SECTION) LEGAL AND
RESEARCH
SECTION

APPENDIX “B” (TO P.G.O. No. 8)

C.I.D. RETURNS

Return Interval By whom submitted Date to be submitted

Progress Reports Monthly Districts to Regions 1st of each month.

Region to C.I.D. HQ. 7th of each month.

Forensic Bureau to C.I.D. 7th of each month.

HQ.

C.I.F. Returns Monthly Regions to C.I.D. H.Q. 7th of each month.

Crime Statistics Quarterly District to Regions 5th of succeeding

month

Regions to C.I.D. HQ. 7th of succeeding

month

Annual Statistics Annually Districts to Regions 7th January.

Regions to C.I.D. HQ. 7th January.

Forensic Bureau to C.I.D. 7th January.

HQ.

37
 P.G.O. No. 8

38
 P.G.O. No. 8
APPENDIX “C”
TO P.G.O. No. 8

SERIOUS CRIME AND INCIDENTS WHICH ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE

REGIONAL AND DISTRICT C.I.D. OFFICERS TO INVESTIGATE

1. All civil disturbances, inter-racial or religious conflicts.

2 All cases of major political or public significance.
3. All offences, which by law require the sanction of the Director of Public Prosecutions
to prosecute.
4. Any criminal cases in which an important political personality is an accused or
suspect.
5. All criminal cases involving Members of Parliament.
6. All cases destined for trial by the High Court
7. Incidents where police have had cause to discharge firearms or tear smoke to restore
order.
8. All serious criminal offences committed by foreigners or juveniles.
9. Theft of arms and ammunition and explosives.
11, Serious assaults on members of the Force, including rescues of prisoners from Police,
Prisons or other lawful custody.
12 All cases under section 5 and 6 of the Public Order Act Cap. 385 R.E. 2002.
13. Sabotage.
14. All criminal cases in which members of the Police Force are accused.
15 All cases under the Trades Unions Act, Cap. 244 R.E. 2002.
16. Rape
17. Arson
18. Robbery with violence
19. All unnatural offences in which more than one race or juveniles are concerned.
20. Malicious damage, i.e. damage that seriously interferes with, or which is likely to
interfere with, any public service
21 Serious thefts in which Government or diplomatic mission servants are suspects.
22 Forgeries of a serious nature.
23 All cases under the Prevention of Corruption Act, Cap. 329 R.E. 2002.
24 Thefts of postal matter and Post Officer frauds.
25 Coining offences.
26 All serious breakings.
27 All cases under Sections 41 and 42 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act,
R.E. Cap. 2002.
28 Any other serious or important cases which in the opinion of the O/C Regional or
District C.I.D. require investigation including all cases as may be directed by the Director of
Criminal Investigation.

39
 P.G.O. No. 9
POLICE MEDICAL UNIT - CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION
AND DUTIES
Constitution
1. The CO. Police Medical Unit shall be the overall in charge of the Police
Medical Unit.
2. The Officer in Charge Police Medical Services (ZBR) shall report to the CO.
Police Medical Unit through the Commissioner (ZBR) on all matters relating to
Police Medical Services (ZBR).
General Responsibilities of the Police Medical Unit
3. The following shall be the general responsibilities of the Police Medical
Unit::-
(a) provision of medical services to the members and other units of the
Force, and where need be, to the members of the public in need of such services
particularly in emergency cases;
(b) supply of medical facilities to stations and units as the case may be
and to ensure that such facilities are utilised in accordance with the laid down
procedures;
(c) to propose to the Inspector General appropriate health policy for the
Force and to supervise it once promulgated;
(d ) to promote awareness amongst members of the Force on issues of
medical importance such as prevention and treatment of infectious and contagious
diseases and care of persons so affected;
(e) the maintenance of health records and statistics for the Force;
(f) participate in activities relating to disaster management and rescue
operations; and
(g) liasing with other health organs such as the Ministry of Health and
World Health Organisation on matters relating to research and development in the
health sector.

Organisation
4. (a) The Police Medical Unit is divided into the following main sections all
under the Police Medical Unit Headquarters -
(i) Regional Police Medical Units for mainland and
(ii) Police Medical Unit (ZBR-PHQ)
(iii) Kilwa Road Police Hospital
(b) The organisational chart of the Police Medical Unit is represented in
this order as Appendix “A”.
5. The Inspector General shall appoint a number of officers to assist in the
management of the Medical Units depending on the need for such appointments.

40
 P.G.O. No. 9
APPENDIX “A” TO PGO. No.9

ORGANISATION CHART OF THE POLICE MEDICAL UNIT

CO POLICE
MEDICAL UNIT

OC POLICE MEDICAL OC REGIONAL OC KILWA ROAD

UNIT (ZBR) POLICE MEDICAL POLICE HOSPITAL
UNIT

41
 P.G.O. No. 10
FIELD FORCE UNIT – CONSTITUTION AND DUTIES OF

1. The Field Force Unit is the branch of the Force, which is specially trained and
equipped to deal with emergencies and field operations in support of the General Duties
Police.
2. (a) Field Force Units, each with an establishment of 1 Gazetted Officer, 1
Inspector, 1 Staff Sergeant, and 60 Rank & File (including Drivers and Signallers) are
distributed as hereunder: -

PLACE NO. OF UNITS

Dar es Salaam 12
Unguja Mjini Magharibi 4
Kusini Unguja 1
Kaskazini Pemba 2
Kusini Pemba 2
Arusha 3
Dodoma 3
Singida 2
Sumbawanga 2
Bukoba 3
Songea 2
Mtwara 2
Morogoro 3
Tanga 2
Mbeya 2
Kigoma 3
Iringa 2
Tabora 2
Lindi 1
Moshi 2
Mwanza 4
Musoma 4
Manyara 2
Shinyanga 2
Pwani 1

(b) The Field Force Unit, Ukonga, will also provide an operational reserve if
so required.
3. The Headquarters of the Field Force Unit is at Police Headquarters. All candidates
for Field Force duties will be trained at the Police Training School Moshi, before posting to
Regional Units.
4. The Field Force Unit is under the general direction and command of the CO. Field
Force Unit, who is responsible to the Inspector General for: -
(a) the general supervision and administration of all Field Force Units;
(b) the provision and implementation of specialised training programmes, with
particular emphasis on Field Force Unit requirements (i.e. Riot Drill, Field
Craft, etc;)
(c ) the issue of comprehensive Standing Orders covering all Unit routine
duties;

42
 P.G.O. No. 10
(d) all transfers in accordance with P.G.O. No.59, paragraph 5 (e).
5. Regional Units are under the full operational control of Regional Commanders, who
are also directly responsible for the efficiency and good discipline of the Units serving under
their command.
6. All correspondence between the CO. Field Force Unit, and O/C. Regional Field
Force Units will be routed via Regional Commanders. The latter are responsible for keeping
the CO. Field Force Unit fully informed of all matters of interest affecting their Units.
7. Regional Commanders should make full use of their Field Force Units in support of
General Duties personnel. Long distance patrols, bad character raids, and various types of
field operations are all suitable Field Force duties.
8. A standing reserve of 25 per cent of Unit establishment shall always be maintained
in barracks to deal with sudden emergency calls and Regional Commanders are responsible
to ensure that this reserve is increased to a level commensurate with the general security
situation prevailing in their respective Regions at any given time. At the same time, Field
Force personnel should not be kept unnecessarily in barracks on full training schedules.
9. Field Force Units will always operate under the direct command of their own
officer, but the latter shall be subject at all times to: -
(a) all orders issued by Regional Commanders or by other officers acting on
behalf of Regional Commanders;
(b) the orders of the senior officer present, provided that such orders do not
conflict with instructions already issued by the Regional Commander.
10 Field Force personnel may not be “borrowed” for beat duty or other routine jobs
normally performed by General Duties personnel, but may be used under their own officers
for specific Unit commitments, including the policing of a section of town if General Duties
Constables are in short supply.
11. The normal period of duty in the Field Force Unit for members of the Rank & File is
three years, but this may be exceeded or reduced at the discretion of the Inspector General.
12. Members of the Rank & File will not normally be permitted to serve in the Field
Force Unit during their first contract, but this rule may be relaxed from time to time on the
instructions of the Inspector General.

43
 P.G.O. No. 11
RAILWAYS POLICE-CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION AND
DUTIES

General
1. In this Order Railways Division refers to both the Tanzania Railways Corporation
(TRC) Police Unit and Tanzania Zambia Railways Authority (TAZARA) Police Unit.

Command
2. The COs, Railways Division will normally command the Dar es Salaam Unit of
their respective commands, but may be required by the Police Headquarters to support the
Regional Police Commander, in time of serious unrest or emergency.
3. Regional Commanders will exercise direct control over Railways Units in their
Regions, subject to the following general administrative duties, which will still be the
responsibility of the COs Railways Division: -
(a) General duty policy for Railways Police personnel in their commands;
(b) Arrangements for postings, leave and transfers in their commands;
(c) Investigation of railways cases and incidents in their commands.
4. (a) Regional Commanders and O/C. Districts will be responsible for the
conduct of Railways Police work and for the discipline and direct administration of Railway
Police personnel posted to their areas. They will exercise supervision to ensure that they are
discharging their duties efficiently and are continuously engaged in safeguarding the
interests of the Railway Administration. Inspections of Railway Police Units will be carried
out regularly in accordance with P.G.O. No. 47. O/C. Districts will deal with pay and
accounts affecting Railway Police Units and will include Railway Police personnel in their
welfare organisation.
(b) COs Railways Division shall regularly provide Regional Commanders and
O/C. Districts in their respective areas with full information on all important matters
affecting Railways Division personnel serving under their commands.
Duties and Responsibilities
5. The duties and responsibilities of the Railways Divisions are as follows: -
(a) The security and protection of (T.R.C. and TAZARA) property and the
investigation of crime reported thereon.
Note: The responsibility for policing T.R.C. and TAZARA residential areas and the
investigation of offences in such areas rests with the District Police.
(b) Enforcement of law and order in trains and Railway Stations.
(c) Escorts for T.R.C. and TAZARA cash and all explosives when moved on
T.R.C. or TAZARA rails or other road services; and
(d) Security patrols on passengers, cargo, mail and mixed trains.

Railways Organisation and Police Areas

6. (a) The T.R.C. system is divided into four sectors for purposes of police
control and O/Cs TRC Police will be responsible for policing as follows: -
(i) Dar es Salaam - Central Line: Dar es Salaam to Dodoma and
Singida;
(ii) Tabora - Central Line: Itigi – Kigoma; Tabora – Shinyanga and
Kaliua – Mpanda;
(iii) Mwanza - Mwanza – Shinyanga (excluding Shinyanga);
(iv) Tanga - Tanga – Moshi – Arusha.
(b) The TAZARA system is divided into four sectors for purposes of police
control and O/Cs TAZARA Police will be responsible for policing as follows:-
(i) Dar es salaam: Dar es salaam (Pugu) – Kisaki;

44
 P.G.O. No. 11
(ii) Mlimba: Kisaki – Msolwa;
(iii) Makambako: Msolwa – Uyole Mbeya;
(iv) Mbeya: Uyole Mbeya - Tunduma
Investigation of Railway Offences
7. (a) All reports of offences, accidents and incidents (including discrepancy
reports) occurring on the railway system will be dealt with according to P.G.O. No. 309,
irrespective of whether or not Railway Police personnel are established at the place where
such report is received. Railway Police, where present, will normally carry out the
investigation under the direction and supervision of the O/C. District.
(b) Reports on all cases of level-crossing accidents will be sent to Railways
Division at Dar es Salaam. The payment of accident report fees (vide P.G.O. No. 292,
paragraph 9) is waived in the case of the Railways. Traffic accident files compiled in such
cases will be forwarded to Railways Division, upon the completion of the proceedings.

45
 P.G.O. No. 12
CRIME INTELLIGENCE UNIT: CONSTITUTION,
ORGANISATION AND DUTIES
General

1. The Director of Criminal Investigation is responsible to the Inspector General or, in

his absence, to the officer performing the duties of Inspector General, for the efficient
administration, organisation and function of the Crime Intelligence Unit, including the
administration, development, direction and overall supervision of police and civilian staff
employed within Crime Intelligence Unit at the C.I.D. Headquarters and Crime Intelligence
Units throughout Tanzania. The Director of Criminal Investigation will also be responsible
for the dissemination of intelligence to the Inspector General himself and on the Inspector
General’s behalf to such officers of the Government of Tanzania and of other Governments
as may be required or as the Inspector General may direct.

2. The Director of Criminal Investigation will keep the Inspector General informed of
all reports, correspondence and any other matter, which the Director of Criminal
Investigation may asign or otherwise disseminate on the Inspector General’s behalf.

3. Regional and District Units of Crime Intelligence Unit will be under the direct
command of the Director of Criminal Investigation and will keep their Regional Crime
Officers and O/C. CIDs informed of all intelligence, including matters of a criminal nature,
affecting the security of their areas of responsibility.

4. (a) Both the Officer i/c of Intelligence Unit at the CID Headquarters and the
O/Cs. Intelligence Units are responsible for ensuring that Regional Crime Officers are kept
fully informed of all Crime Intelligence Unit operations and other important matters
affecting their respective areas. The following particular actions will be taken to achieve
this: - (i) All incoming security correspondence addressed to O/C Regional Crime
Intelligence Units shall be referred without undue delay by the latter on Regional Crime
Intelligence Unit files to the Regional Crime Officers for information and comment.
(ii) All out-going reports and assessments from O/C. Regional Crime
Intelligence Units to Crime Intelligence Unit at the C.I.D. Headquarters shall be routed
through Regional Crime Officers, in order that they may comment thereon if they so desire
before onward despatch to Crime Intelligence Unit at the C.I.D. Headquarters. All such
comments will be sent to Crime Intelligence Unit at the C.I.D. Headquarters with the report
to which they refer.
(iii) Reports from Zanzibar will be routed through the Commissioner (ZBR).
(b) Regional Crime Officers are responsible for ensuring that there is no delay
in the passage of Crime Intelligence Unit papers through their offices.

5. Detailed instructions for the reporting of intelligence in accordance with paragraph

4, above, will be issued by the Director, Criminal Investigation Department from time to
time.

6. Without prejudice to paragraph 3, above, Regional Crime Officers are authorised to

give such orders to Regional Crime Intelligence Unit Officers as may appear to be urgently
necessary and such orders shall be obeyed by all such Crime Intelligence Unit Officers.
Regional Crime Officers will be responsible for informing the Director, Criminal
Investigation Department, as soon as possible, of the nature of the orders given and the
reason, which made it necessary for the orders to be given.

46
 P.G.O. No. 12
7. The Director of Criminal Investigation, acting on behalf of the Inspector General,
shall be authorised to issue any necessary orders or instructions to Regional Crime
Intelligence Unit Officers and, if necessary, to amend or countermand orders already issued
by Regional Crime Officers to such Crime Intelligence Unit Officers; in every case such
orders or instructions will be routed through the Regional Crime Officers concerned.
Regional Crime Officer shall, in every case, ensure that such orders are passed on to the
Crime Intelligence Unit officers concerned and are obeyed by them.

47
 P.G.O. No. 13
MARINE POLICE – CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION AND
DUTIES

Constitution and Boundaries

1. (a) The Tanzania Police Marine is a Unit under the Tanzania Police Force.
(b) The extent of Police Marine Unit jurisdiction is in respect of internal and
territorial waters of the United Republic of Tanzania together with the contiguous zone from
the territorial waters.
(c) The territorial waters to which the marine has jurisdiction is shown in
Appendix A to this Order.

Main Duties and Responsibilities

2. The Unit shall have the following main duties and responsibilities:-
(a) To patrol the Tanzania territorial waters.
(b) To support other Police operations within the territorial waters.
(c) To carry out rescue operations in the territorial waters.
(d) To ensure security and protection of Government properties under its charge.

Organisation
3. The Commanding Officer Marine Unit shall be responsible to the Inspector General and
will normally command the Dar es Salaam unit of the Marine Police.

4. (a) Regional Commanders will exercise direct control over marine units in their
regions except on technical issues and postings and transfers of the Unit’s personnel which
shall be the responsibility of the Commanding Officer Marine Unit.
(b) Financial arrangements in relation to marine unit personnel shall be in
accordance with orders issued by the Inspector General from time to time.

5. Officers in charge Marine in the regions shall provide Regional Commanders and
O/C Districts in their respective areas with full information on all important matters
connected to Marine Police Unit personnel serving under their command. They shall be staff
officers to the Regional Police Commanders in marine issues and to the Commanding Officer
in technical issues.

6. (a) With exception of Dar es Salaam and Zanzibar, Regional Police

Commanders, Officer Commanding Districts (OCDs) and OC Marines will be responsible for
the conduct of Marine Police work and for the discipline and direct administration of Marine
Police personnel posted to their areas. They will exercise supervision to ensure that they are
discharging their duties efficiently and effectively.
(b) Inspection of Marine Police Units will be carried out regularly in accordance
with PGO No.47.
(c) O/C Districts will deal with pay and accounts relating to Marine Police units.
(d) Marine Police personnel welfare and canteen will be the responsibility of the
Regional Police Commanders.

Organisation of Marine Police Units

7. Marine Police Units will be organized as follows:-
(a) Indian Ocean – Dar es Salaam, Zanzibar, Mtwara and Tanga
(b) Lake Victoria – Bukoba, Shirati and Mwanza
(c) Lake Tanganyika – Kigoma and Kipili
(d) Lake Nyasa - Itungi Port

8. Marine Units will be composed of the following sections:-

48
 P.G.O. No. 13
(a) Navigation
(b) Engineering
(c) Scuba Diving

9. (a) The navigation section will be composed of the Captain, Navigators, Seamen,
Gunners, Painters, Radar operators and Technicians.
(b) The Captain shall be responsible as follows:-
(i) The in charge of the boat irrespective of his rank and seniority and
that it is prohibited for any other officer to interfere in any way with
the technical operations of the vessel.
NOTE: - An officer senior in rank to the Captain in a police vessel shall be in charge of
disciplinary issues only.
(ii) Coordination of vessel communications
(c) Navigators shall be responsible to the Captain for sailing the vessel;
(d) The leading seaman (Bousin) will be answerable to the Captain and
responsible for the following:-
(i) the in charge of all daily duties performed in the boat;
(ii) supervision of the general cleanliness of the vessel;
(iii) ensuring adequate assistance to the navigators in steering the vessel;
(iv) supervision of the guns and their cleanliness;
(v) detailing personnel to perform look out and anchorage duties;
(vi) coordination of the rank and file and officers aboard the vessel
(vii) boat guns drills and training;
(viii) seamanship training.

10. The in charge of the engineering section, which includes engineers, caterers, and
electricians, shall be responsible for the following:-
(a) preparation of the engines before sailing;
(b) checking of the sailing worthiness of the vessel;
(c) reporting to the boat Captain once satisfied that the engines are ready for
sailing;
(d) ensuring cleanness of the engines; and
(e) ensuring adequate catering and first aid services in the vessel.

11. Marine divers shall be answerable to the Captain and their responsibilities will
include:
(a) rescue operations;
(b) checking the sailing worthiness of the boat;
(c) in charge of the swimming operations; and
(d) training of new sailors employed in the Unit and other non-swimmers.

Food and Rationing

12. (a) Food shall be prepared by qualified cooks under the supervision of the Chief
Engineer.
b) The cooks to be employed in vessels must posses recognised awards from
recognized Institutions.
(c) The food supplied will be as prescribed by the Inspector General based on
maritime guidelines.

13. Catering in a vessel shall include dry ration for emergency purposes at appropriate
scales in accordance with maritime guidelines.

Marine Boat Operations

14. (a) A Marine Boat will be involved in major operations or long safari only under
the Sailing Order (P.F. 222) signed by the Commanding Officer Marine in Dar es Salaam or

49
 P.G.O. No. 13
Regional Police Commanders in the Regions and that the Inspector General shall be informed
of the operations and safaris immediately.
(b) An operation is considered to be major if the coverage of the operation goes
beyond 12 nautical miles from the sea baseline.
(c) The sailing order for a Marine boat sailing in ordinary patrols and emergency
operations will be signed by the CO. Marine.

Recruitment
15. Personnel to be recruited in the Marine Unit shall be those trained in the following
fields of specializations:-
(a) Seamanship and gunnery
(b) Navigation
(c) Marine Engineering
(d) Scuba Diving
(e) Electricity
(f) Boat Building
(g) Radar Technicians
(h) Radar Operation
(i) Painting
(j) Catering.

Allowances
16. Marine personnel of all ranks are entitled to professional allowance to be paid to
professionals and trade pay to artisans at rates to be prescribed by the Inspector General from
time to time and promulgated in Force Orders.

General Matters
17. The Commanding Officer Marine Unit shall ensure that police boats under his
charge are dry docked for inspection of the parts under water and other repairs at least once in
every six months.

50
 P.G.O. No. 13
APPENDIX ‘A’
To P.G.O. No. 13

TERRITORIAL SEA AND CONTIGUOUS ZONE

(Territorial Sea and Exclusive Economic Zone Act Cap. 238 R.E. 2002)
SECTION 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Article 2
Legal status of the Territorial Sea, of the air space over the Territorial Sea and of its bed and
subsoil
1. The sovereignty of a coastal State extends beyond its land territory and internal
waters and, in the case of an archipelagic State, its archipelagic waters, to an adjacent belt of
sea, described as the territorial sea.
2. This sovereignty extends to the air space over the territorial sea as well as to its bed
and subsoil.
3. The sovereignty over the territorial sea is exercised subject to this Convention and
to other rules of international law.

SECTION 2
LIMITS OF THE TERRITORIAL SEA
Article 3
Breadth of the territorial sea
Every State has the right to establish the breadth of its territorial sea up to a limit not
exceeding 12 nautical miles, measured from baseline determined in accordance with this
Convention.

Article 4
Outer limit of the territorial sea
The outer limit of the territorial sea is the line every point of which is at a distance
from the nearest point of the baseline equal to the breadth of the territorial sea.

Article 5
Normal baseline
Except where otherwise provided in this Convention, the normal baseline for
measuring the breadth of the territorial sea is the low-water line along the coast as marked on
large scale charts officially recognised by the coastal State.

Article 6
Reefs
In the case of islands situated on atolls or of islands having fringing reefs, the baseline
for measuring the breadth of the territorial sea is the seaward low-water line of the reef, as
shown by the appropriate symbol on charts officially recognised by the coastal State.

Article 7
Straight baselines
1. In localities where the coastline is deeply indented and cut into, or if there is a
fringe of islands along the coast in its immediate vicinity, the method of straight baseline
joining appropriate points may be employed in drawing the baseline from which the breadth
of the territorial sea is measured.

2. Where because of the presence of a delta and other natural conditions the coastline
is highly unstable, the appropriate points may be selected along the furthest seaward extent of
the low-water line, notwithstanding subsequent regression of the low-water line, the straight

51
 P.G.O. No. 13
baseline shall remain effective until changed by the coastal State in accordance with this
Convention.
3. The drawing of straight baseline must not depart to any appreciable extent from the
general direction of the coast, and the sea areas lying within the lines must be sufficiently
close to the land domain to be subject to the regime of internal waters.

4. Straight baseline shall not be drawn to and from low-tide elevations, unless
lighthouses or similar installations which are permanently above sea level have been built on
them or except in instances where the drawing of baseline to and from such elevations has
received general international recognition.

5. Where the method of straight baseline is applicable under paragraph 1, account

may be taken, in determining particular baseline, of economic interests peculiar to the region
concerned, the reality and the importance of which are clearly evidenced by long usage.

6. The system of straight baseline may not be applied by a State in such a manner as
to cut off the territorial sea of another State from the high seas or an Exclusive Economic
Zone.

Article 8
Internal waters
1. Except as provided in Part IV, waters on the landward side of the baseline of the
territorial sea form part of the internal waters of the State.

2. Where the establishment of a straight baseline in accordance with the method set
forth in article 7 has the effect of enclosing as internal waters areas which had not previously
been considered as such, a right of innocent passage as provided in this Convention shall exist
in those waters.

Article 9
Mouths of rivers
If a river flows directly into the sea, the baseline shall be a straight line across the
mouth of the river between points on the low-water line of its banks.

Article 10
Bays
1. This article relates only to bays the coasts of which belong to a single State.

2. For the purposes of this Convention, a bay is a well-marked indentation whose

penetration is in such proportion to the width of its mouth as to contain land-locked waters
and constitute more than a mere curvature of the coast. An indentation shall not, however, be
regarded as a bay unless its area is as large as, or larger than, that of the semicircle whose
diameter is a line drawn across the mouth of that indentation.

3. For the purpose of measurement, the area of an indentation is that lying between
the low-water mark around the shore of the indentation and a line joining the low-water mark
of its natural entrance points. Where, because of the presence of an island, an indentation has
more than one mouth, the semicircle shall be drawn on a line as long as the sum total of the
lengths of the lines across the different mouths. Islands within an indentation shall be
included as if they were part of the water area of the indentation.

4. If the distance between the low-water marks of the natural entrance points of a bay
does not exceed 24 nautical miles, a straight baseline of 24 nautical miles, a closing line may
be drawn between these two low-water marks, and the waters enclosed thereby shall be
considered as internal waters.

52
 P.G.O. No. 13
5. Where the distance between the low-water marks of the natural entrance points of a
bay exceeds 24 nautical miles, a straight baseline of 24 nautical miles shall be drawn within
the bay in such a manner as to enclose the maximum area of water that is possible with a line
of that length.

6. The foregoing provisions do not apply to so-called "historic" bays, or in any case
where the system of straight baseline provided for in article 7 is applied.
Article 11
Ports
For the purpose of delimiting the territorial sea, the outermost permanent harbour
works which form an integral part of the harbour system are regarded as forming part of the
coast. Off-shore installations and artificial islands shall not be considered as permanent
harbour works.

Article 12
Roadsteads
Roadsteads which are normally used for the loading, unloading and anchoring of
ships, and which would otherwise be situated wholly or partly outside the outer limit of the
territorial sea, are included in the territorial sea.

Article 13
Low-tide elevations
1. A low-tide elevation is a naturally formed area of land which is surrounded by and
above water at low tide but submerged at high tide. Where a low-tide elevation is situated
wholly or partly at a distance not exceeding the breadth of the territorial sea from the
mainland or an island, the low-water line on that elevation may be used as the baseline for
measuring the breadth of the territorial sea.

2. Where a low-tide elevation is wholly situated at a distance exceeding the breadth of

the territorial sea from the mainland or an island, it has no territorial sea of its own.

Article 14
Combination of methods for determining baseline
The coastal State may determine baseline in turn by any of the methods provided for
in the foregoing articles to suit different conditions.

Article 15
Delimitation of the territorial sea between States with opposite or adjacent coasts
Where the coasts of two States are opposite or adjacent to each other, neither of the
two States is entitled, failing agreement between them to the contrary, to extend its territorial
sea beyond the median line every point of which is equidistant from the nearest points on the
baseline from which the breadth of the territorial seas of each of the two states is measured.
The above provision does not apply, however, where it is necessary by reason of historic title
or other special circumstances to delimit the territorial seas of the two States in a way which
is at variance therewith.

Article 16
Charts and lists of geographical co-ordinates
1. The baseline for measuring the breadth of the territorial sea determined in
accordance with articles 7, 9 and 10 or the limits derived therefrom, and the lines of
delimitation drawn in accordance with articles 12 and 15 shall be shown on charts of a scale
or scales adequate for ascertaining their position. Alternatively, a list of geographical co-
ordinates of points, specifying the geodetic datum, may be substituted.

53
 P.G.O. No. 13
2. The coastal State shall give due publicity to such charts of or lists of geographical
co-ordinates and shall deposit a copy of each such chart or list with the Secretary-General of
the United Nations.

APPENDIX B
To P.G.O. No 13

ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE OF THE MARINE UNIT

COMMANDING OFFICER

STAFF OFFICER CHIEF ENGINEER

CHIEF NAVIGATOR

O/C MARINE UNITS

NAVIGATION ENGINEERING SCUBA DIVING

SECTION SECTION SECTION

54
 P.G.O. No. 14
BAND UNIT- CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION AND DUTIES
Constitution
1. (a) The Police Band Unit shall be under the control and superintendence of the
Director of Music who will be stationed in Dar es salaam.
(b) Matters relating to Police Band in Zanzibar shall be handled by the
Commissioner (ZBR).
Organisation
2. Police band will be operated in the following areas:
(a) Police Band Dar es salaam
(b) Police Band P.T.S. Moshi
(c) Police Band (ZBR)
3. The organisational chart of the Police Band is represented in this order to Appendix
“A”.
General Responsibilities of the Director of Music
4. (a) The Director of Music will be responsible for the training, maintenance of
discipline, welfare and pay of Bands personnel at Dar es Salaam; the supervision of Band
quarters and of clothing and equipment of Band personnel at Dar es Salaam, the arrangement
of Dar es Salaam bands engagements and programmes.
(b) All administrative arrangements for rail/road journeys and the preparation
of warrants:
(c) The maintenance and accounting of all band funds, property, and stores.
5. The Commissioner (ZBR) will be responsible for the maintenance of discipline,
welfare, pay and clothing of personnel of the Band in Zanzibar
6. The Director of Music will inspect all police bands quarterly, in accordance with
PGO. No. 47, and advise the Inspector General on all music matters arising therefrom.
7 The Director of Music will be responsible for ordering all new instruments and
replacements.
8. The Commandant P.T.S. Moshi will maintain the P.T.S Band assisted by Band
Master P.T.S. Band.

APPENDIX “A”
To P.G.O. NO. 14

ORGANISATION CHART OF THE BAND UNIT

55
 P.G.O. No. 14

DIRECTOR OF MUSIC

BANDMASTER BANDMASTER BANDMASTER

(ZBR) PTS - MOSHI DSM

56
 P.G.O. No. 15
DOG AND HORSE UNIT – CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION
AND DUTIES OF

Constitution
1 The Dog and Horse Unit is under the general direction and Command of the CO.
Dog and Horse Unit and constituted by members of the Force specially trained and equipped
to deal with field operations in support of the General Duties of police and C.I.D.

Organisation
2. Dog and Horse Units are distributed in every Region as per the instruction of the
Inspector General.

3. The Headquarters of the Dog and Horse Branch is at Dar es Salaam and operational
units will be established as directed by the Inspector General.

4. All candidates for Dog and Horse handling and other duties will be trained at the PTS
Moshi before being posted to Regional Units.

5. All correspondence between Regional Units will be routed via the CO Dog and
Horse to the Inspector General who is fully informed of all matters of interest affecting the
Units

6. Dog and Horse Units will always operate under the direct command of their own
officer, but the latter shall be subject at all times to:

7. (a) All orders issued by Regional Commanders or by other officers acting on

behalf of Regional Commander.
(b) The orders of the senior officers present provided that such orders do not
conflict with instructions already issued by the Regional Commander.

Responsibilities of Dog and Horse-master

8. The Force Dog and Horse-master is responsible to the Inspector General for
(a ) the training and postings of all Police dogs and horses and their handlers and
riders;
(b) inspection of all Dog and Horse Sections, as laid down in P.G.O. No. 47;
(c) proper utilisation of Dog and Horse for purposes of law enforcement;
(d) ensuring that Dog and Horse are cared for, exercised and receive adequate
diet and medication to keep them fit at all times.
(e) the general supervision and administration of all Dog and Horse Units;
(f) the provision and implementation of specialised training programmes , with
particular emphasis on Dog and Horse requirements;
(g) the issue of comprehensive standing Orders covering all Units routine
duties; and
(h) all transfers, in accordance with PGO no. 59 para 5(e).

9. Regional Dog and Horse Units are under the full operational control of the Regional
Commanders who are also directly responsible for the efficiency and good discipline of the
Units serving under their Command

10. Regional Commanders should make full use of their Dog and Horse Units in support
of General Duties personnel including C.I.D. Long distance patrols, bad character raids,
Tracking, Identification of items i.e. explosive, drugs and various types of field operations
are all suitable Dog and Horse duties.

57
 P.G.O. No. 15
APPENDIX “A” To PGO NO. 15
ORGANISATION CHART – DOG AND HORSE UNIT

IGP

CO. DOG/HORSE
UNIT

SO
ADMINISTRATI

OC. OP
TRAINING
OC. DEVELOPMENT AND
PLANNING

O/C DOG/HORSE
REGION/UNIT

58
 P.G.O. No. 16
AIR WING UNIT: CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION AND
DUTIES

Constitution
1. The Commanding Officer Air Wing Unit shall be responsible to the Inspector
General for the control and superintendence of the Air Wing Police.

2. The Air Wing Unit will be stationed in Dar es Salaam or any other station as may be
directed by the Inspector General.

3. The Commanding Officer Air Wing Unit will exercise direct control over the
following administrative duties:-
(a) Provision of air transportation in the Force.
(b) Control of revenue collection and expenditure of government funds related to
the Air wing Unit.
(c) Coordinate rescue and other operations involving the use of police aircrafts.
(d) Ensure and maintain competency and professionalism of personnel under his
command.
(e) Carry out air patrols as may be directed from time to time.

Organisation
4. The Air Wing Unit will have an establishment of Pilots, Engineers, Technicians and
other officers holding various police ranks as may be determined by the Inspector General
from time to time.

5. The Air Wing Unit will contain the following organisational sections:
(a) Pilots
(b) Engineers
(c) Administration
(d) Stores

Air wing Responsibilities and Duties

6. The responsibilities of the air wing sections are as follows:
(a) Pilots Section
Responsible for flights planning, issuing instructions on handling of the aircraft during
flights and cleanliness of the cabin, taking care of the cabin and passengers abode aircraft
during flights under the command of a Chief Pilot who will be asisted by Chief Instructor
and Operations Officer.
(b) Engineering Section:
Responsible for the preparation of the aircraft before flight and once satisfied that the aircraft
is ready for flight inform the Chief Pilot. The section will be responsible for the general
cleanliness of the aircrafts. The section will ensure regular maintenance of aircrafts in
accordance with the prevailing regulations on civil aviation. The Section should also make
sure the aircrafts operate in accordance with laid down aviation regulations. It will also carry
out alert service bulletins and other service bulletins as issued from time to time by aircraft
manufacturers. It will be under the Chief Engineer assisted by a Deputy Chief Engineer.
(c) Administration Section
Responsible for the general administration, discipline of staff, and police correspondences in
the Air Wing Unit and will be headed by a senior ranked Staff Officer appointed by the
Inspector General.
(d) Stores Section

59
 P.G.O. No. 16
Responsible for the storage of spare parts and sending aircraft parts to manufacturers for
repairs or overhaul and will be headed by an officer with knowledge of storekeeping and
forwarding and clearing of goods.

7. (a) Since the Force does not offer training in such Air Wing fields, the
recruitment in these areas of specialisation will be done from graduates of recognised
Institutions
(b) Internal recruitment is also another source of Air Wing Unit personnel
where selected general duty servicemen and women are sent to the training Institutions
before being transferred to the Unit.

Allowances
8. Air Wing Unit personnel of all ranks are entitled to allowances to be paid at rates to
be prescribed by the Inspector General from time to time and promulgated in Force Orders.

60
 P.G.O. No. 16

APPENDIX “A” TO PGO No. 16

ORGANISATIONAL CHART OF THE AIR WING DIVISION

CO
AIR WING DIVISION

SO
ADMINISTRATION

PILOTS SECTION ENGINEERING SECTION STORES SECTION

61
 P.G.O. No. 17
AIRPORTS POLICE UNIT – CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION
AND DUTIES
Constitution
1. The Commanding Officer Airports Police Unit will normally command all the Airports
Police Units in Tanzania.

2. The Commanding Officer Airports Police Unit will exercise direct control over
division units in the regions, subject to the following general administrative duties which
will still be the responsibility of the Airports Commanding Officer:-
(a) General duty policy for airports division personnel.
(b) Arrangement for posting, leave and transfers.
(c) Proposal for Re-allocation of funds from the Airport Police Unit vote under the
following heads:-
(i) personal emoluments;
(ii) transport and travelling;
(iii) travelling on leave;
(iv) office and genera;l
(v) electricity;
(vi) maintenance and running of vehicles;
(vii) miscellaneous Stores;
(viii) rations to witnesses and prisoners;
(ix) telephones and Telegrams; and
(x) rank and File welfare.
(d) Providing O/C District and Stations with full information on all important
matters affecting Airports Police Unit personnel serving under their command.
(e) Providing Airports Police Unit CID assistance in serious or complicated Airport
cases.

3. (a) Airports Police Unit Commander and Officer Commanding District and stations
will be responsible for the conduct of Airports Police work and for the discipline and direct
administration of Airports Police Personnel posted to their areas. They will exercise
supervision to ensure that they are discharging their duties efficiently and are continuously
engaged in safeguarding the interests of Airports Administration.
(b) Inspections of Airports Police Units will be carried out regularly in accordance
with PGO. No. 47
(c) Officer Commanding Districts and stations will deal with pay and accounts
affecting Airports Police Units and will include Airports Police Personnel and
their welfare organization.

Organisation and Police Areas

4. The Airport system is divided into eight (8) sectors for the purpose of Police control
and Airport Police Units will be responsible for policing as follows:-
(a) DAR ES SALAAM- Mwalimu Nyerere International Airport
(b) KILIMANJARO - Kilimanjaro International Airport (KIA)
(c) MWANZA - Mwanza Airport
(d) DODOMA - Dodoma Airport
(e) MTWARA - Mtwara Airport.
(f) ARUSHA - Arusha Airport
(g) ZANZIBAR - Zanzibar International Airport
(h) PEMBA - Chake Chake Airport

5. Other Airports will be serviced by the General Duty Police as the need may arise and
incidents arising out of Airports in these areas will be handled by the station having
jurisdiction in the area.

62
 P.G.O. No. 17
Duties and Responsibilities
6. The Airports Police Unit is responsible for the discharge of police functions and
activities in the United Republic of Tanzania to protect civil aviation against unlawful
interference.

7. The specific responsibilities of the Airports Police Unit in the area of aviation security
are as follows:-
(a) Prevention and detection of crimes to civil aviation facilities.;
(b) Routine surveillance and patrol of all airports terminal areas;
(c) Surveillance of arriving/departing passengers or persons who may pose a threat
to civil aviation;
(d) Contingency planning in cooperation and coordination with the Airports
Administration, the Tanzania Civil Aviation Authority, Airport Fire Services and the Air
Defence Unit of the Tanzania Peoples Defence Force for response to and control of acts of
hijacking, sabotage, bomb or other threats, ground attacks and civil disorder;
(e) The provision of specialist response, including but not limited to Ant-terrorism
unit and intervention and explosive devise disposal in co-operation and co-ordination with
the Tanzania People’s Defence Force;
(f) The provision of rapid armed response capability to major incidence at all the
named airports in co-operation and co-ordination with the Air Defence Unit of the TPDF;
(g) Training of appropriate Police Personnel in Aviation Security practices and
procedures pertinent to their operations;
(h) Apprehending offenders infringing aviation security laws and regulations;
(i) Liaison with Interpol in matters of Aviation Security internationally;
(j) Cooperation and co-ordination with the Civil Aviation Security Unit;
(k) Participating in search and rescue of passengers on crashed aircrafts and
aircrafts in distress;
(l) Prevention and combating drug trafficking in cooperation with the Anti-Drugs
Unit;
(m) Escort of government leaders, state leaders and other important leaders.

8. All reports of offences, accidents and incidents (including discrepancies will be dealt
with according to PGO No. 309 irrespective of whether or not Airports Police Personnel are
established at the place where such report is received. Airports Police, where present will
normally carry out the investigation under the direction and supervision of the Officer
Commanding District and stations.

9. Reports on all cases of runway accidents will be sent to the Commanding Officer at
Dar es Salaam. The payment of accident report fees (vide PGO. No. 292, paragraph No. 9 is
waived in the case of airports. Traffic accidents files compiled in such cases will be
forwarded to Airports Police Unit Commanding Officer upon the completion of the
proceedings.

63
 P.G.O. No. 18
TRAFFIC POLICE UNIT – CONSTITUTION, ORGANISATION
AND DUTIES
Constitution
1. The Commanding Officer, Traffic Unit shall be responsible to the Inspector General on
all matters relating to traffic management and control in Tanzania.

2. (a) Traffic matters in Zanzibar shall be coordinated by the Officer in Charge of

Traffic Section ZBR who shall be responsible to the Commissioner (ZBR);
(b) All reports on traffic matters from ZBR to the Inspector General shall be copied
to the Commanding Officer Traffic Unit.

3. The Commanding Officer, Traffic Unit shall also be the Executive Secretary to the
National Road Safety Council of Tanzania and his office will be the Secretariat of the said
Council.

Organisation
4. The Traffic Unit shall be divided as follows:
(a) Traffic Unit (HQ)
(b) Regional Traffic Offices
(c) District Traffic Units

5. The organisational chart of the Traffic Unit is presented in Appendix “A” to this order

Duties of the Commanding Officer, Traffic Unit

6. (a) Commanding Officer, Traffic Unit will be responsible for the following
matters:-
(i) general command, administration and supervision of the Unit in the
country;
(ii) postings and transfer of traffic personnel in the Force;
(iii) giving directives and issuance of comprehensive standing orders to
Regional Traffic Officers through their respective Regional Police Commanders who shall
ensure that such orders are passed on to the Regional Traffic Officers for implementation;
(iv) regular inspection of Regional Traffic stations to ensure that
efficient traffic management, enforcement and compliance with traffic laws and the Orders;
(v) development of a traffic enforcement programme based on accident
analysis.
(vi) ensure enforcement of traffic laws and regulations throughout
Tanzania;
(vii) Conduct public education and awareness programmes on traffic
matters;
(viii) keep the Inspector General informed of all matters relating to traffic
and those of special interest for the development of traffic regulation regime in Tanzania;
(ix) advise the Inspector General on traffic matters and policy;
(x) Liaise with institutions and stakeholders dealing with traffic matters
with a view of promoting road safety in general;
(xi) manage traffic analysis to include location, day, time and causation
of road accidents and share the results with other institutions dealing with road safety such
as the National Roads Safety Council of Tanzania;
(xii) supervise the collection and compilation of data on traffic matters
and submit periodic report as required by P.G.O. No. 59;
(xiii) inspection, endorsement and registration of International Driving
Permits; and
(xiv) inspection, endorsement and registration of driving schools and
driving school instructors.

64
 P.G.O. No. 18
(b) In the discharge of his disciplinary and administration duties the Commanding
Officer Traffic Unit shall be assisted by Staff Officer and such other officers or Inspectors in
the following Sections:
(i) research and Statistics Section;
(ii) education, Training and Publicity Section;
(iii) road Transport, Laws and Accidents Section; and
(iv) traffic Section (ZBR);

(c) The Officer in charge of the Research and Statistics Section shall be responsible
to the Commanding Officer for the recording and keeping road accident data and preparation
and submission of annual traffic returns.

(d) The Officer in charge of the Education, Training and Publicity Section shall be
responsible to the Commanding Officer for public dissemination, mobilisation, and
sensitisation on road safety matters.

(e) The Road Transport and Accidents Section shall be responsible to the
Commanding Officer for identifying causes of accidents and suggesting appropriate
remedies including the application, interpretation and development of traffic laws.

Duties of the Regional Traffic Officer

7. (a) The Regional Traffic Officers are responsible to the Commanding Officer
Traffic Unit through the Regional Commander for the following matters:
(i) dealing with and monitoring all traffic matters in their respective
regions;
(ii) carrying out vehicle inspections as may be required due to accidents
or other reasons as directed by the Commanding Officer Traffic Unit from time to time;
(iii) carrying out and monitor driving qualifying tests for applicants of
driving licences;
(iv) carrying out and monitor notifications and prosecution of traffic law
violations;
(v) coordination and monitoring traffic escorts and official motorcades;
(vi) carrying out and monitoring roads and highways patrols;
(vii) conducting and monitoring investigations on road traffic violations;
(viii) controlling traffic during major incidents and disasters;
(ix) management of road blocks;
(x) management and supervision of the utilisation of zebra crossings
and other pedestrian crossings in traffic lights and other places;
(xi) ensuring smooth flow of traffic particularly during rush hours
whereby manual traffic control in road intersections may be necessary;
(xii) supervision of post-mortem of fatal accidents to determine cause of
death;
(xiii) ensuring that traffic control services are available to the public at all
times; in this case, if due to shortage of personnel additional manpower is needed, to liase
with the Regional Police Commanders for additional personnel from the General Duty
Police;
(xiv) prompt submission of returns in accordance with P.G.O. Nos 375,
376, 286, 309, and 320;
(xvi) arrangements for the escort of loads of abnormal size;
(xvii) operation of speed measuring devices; and
(xviii) operation of breath test equipment.

(b) The Regional Traffic Officers shall in the execution of their duties be assisted by
the following sections:-

65
 P.G.O. No. 18
(i) road Patrol Section;
(ii) vehicle Inspection Section;
(iii) traffic Investigation Section; and
(iv) traffic Records Section;

(c) The O/C Road Patrol Section shall be responsible to the Regional Traffic Officer
for the following matters:
(i) patrol of highways and roads;
(ii) management of scenes of accidents;
(iii) traffic flow management and control in highways and roads;
(iv) management of escorts and official motorcades; and
(v) submit information to their respective seniors on matters arising out
of road patrols.

(d) The O/C Vehicle Inspection Section shall be responsible to the Regional Traffic
Officer for the following matters:
(i) examining road worthiness of vehicles and issue report thereof;
(ii) examining vehicles involved in road accidents and issue report
thereof;
(iii) testing and examining applicants for driving licences; and
(iv) filing returns relating to vehicle inspections.

(e) The O/C Traffic Investigation Section shall be responsible to the Regional
Traffic Officer for the following matters:
(i) investigation of traffic cases;
(ii) management of post-mortem in case of fatal accidents;
(iii) compilation of traffic case files;
(iv) coordination with the Traffic Prosecution Section on preparation of
charges;
(v) management of case summons and securing witnesses; and
(vi) filing returns relating to investigations.

(f) The O/C Traffic Records Section shall be responsible to the Regional Traffic
Officer for the following matters:
(i) keeping records and files relating to traffic matters;
(ii) preparing and submitting traffic returns in accordance with P.G.O.
No. 372; and
(iii) preparing traffic forms relating to accidents.

Duties of the Officer in Charge, District Traffic Unit

8. The Officer in Charge, Traffic Unit shall be responsible to the Regional Traffic Officer
through their O/C. Districts for the implementation of all traffic matters in the respective
District.

66
 P.G.O. No. 18
APPENDIX “A”
To PGO No. 18
ORGANISATIONAL CHART OF THE TRAFFIC UNIT

COMMANDING OFFICER
TRAFFIC DIVISION

Road Transport,
Staff Officer Laws and Accidents
Section

Education,
Training and Research and
Publicity Section Statistics Section

REGIONAL TRAFFIC
OFFICERS

Vehicle Inspection Traffic Investigation

Section Section

Road Patrol Section Traffic Records

Section

OFFICERS IN CHARGE
(TRAFFIC)

67
 P.G.O. No. 19
ORGANISATION – STATIONS AND UNITS – CLASSIFICATION
OF

1. Established Police Stations (i.e. Stations for which an establishment has been
allocated by Police Headquarters) will be classified as Class “A”, “B” or “C” Stations, in
accordance with the list at Appendix “A”.

2. (a) Class “A” Stations have a planned establishment of more than 100 Rank &
File.
(b) Class “B” Stations have a planned establishment of more than 50, but less
than 100 Rank & File.
(c) Class “C” Stations have a planned establishment of 50 or less Rank & File.

3. The term “Police Post” will only be used for small unestablished temporary Stations

68
 P.G.O. No. 19
APPENDIX “A”To
P.G.O. No. 19
CLASS “A” STATIONS

Arusha Korogwe Mwanakerekwe

Babati Kwimba Ngudu Mwanga
Bagamoyo Kyela Mwanza Kati
Bariadi Lindi Mwera
Bomang’ombe Liwale Nachingwea
Buguruni Madema Namanyere
Bukoba Magomeni Nansio Ukerewe
Bukombe Magu Newala
Bunda Mahenge Ngambo
Central P.S. (DSM) Mahonda Oysterbay (DSM)
Chakechake Malindi Railways (DSM)
Chang’ombe (DSM) Malindi/Traffic Same
Chunya Masasi Shinyanga
Dodoma Maswa Singida
Geita Mazizini Songea
Ifakara Mbeya Sumbawanga
Ileje Mbinga Tabora
Iringa Meatu Tanga
Kahama Mkokotoni Tarime
Kasulu Mkuranga Traffic (DSM)
Katesh Mkuu Rombo Tukuyu
Kibaya Morogoro Tumbi
Kibondo Moshi Tunduru
Kigamboni Mpanda Usa River
Kigoma Msimbazi (DSM) Utete
Kigoma Kati Mtwara Kati Vwawa
Kilosa Mugumu Ngara
Kilwa Musoma Muleba
Kisarawe Mwadui

CLASS “B” STATIONS

Bandarini Kawe Makambako

Biharamulo Kengeja Makunduchi
Bububu KIA Manyoni
Buhemba Kiabakari Manyovu
Butiama Kibiti Maswa
Chalinze Kigoma Reli Mbozi
Dar es SalaamChuo Kikuu Kijitonyama Mbulu
DIA Airport Kilimatinde Mfenesini
Fuoni Kilwa Road (DSM) Micheweni
Handeni Kimamba Mikumi
Himo Kiomboi Mingoyo
Igogo Kirumba Mkoani
Igunga Kondoa Mlandizi
Ikwiriri Kongwa Mombo
Ilala Kwerekwe Monduli
Inyala Kyaka Mpwapwa
Iramba Loliondo Mtama
Kamachumu Longido Mtwara Airport
Karagwe Lushoto Mufindi
Karatu Mabandampakani Muheza
Kawe Majengo Mwanza Airport

69
 P.G.O. No. 19
Mwanza North Nyaronga Sirari
Mwera Nzega Stakishari
Nachingwea Pangani Sumbawanga (Ufipa)
Newala Rombo Tabora Railway,
Ngamiani (Tanga) Ruangwa Tarakea
Ngare Nairobi Sanya Juu Tunduma
Ngerengere Selander Bridge Tunduru
Ngorongoro Sengerema Ujiji
Ngudu Shirati Urafiki
Njombe Shirati Wanamaji Urambo
Nyamwaga Sikonge Nzega Wazo Hill

CLASS “C” STATIONS

Amani Igirubi Kiabakari

Basuto Iguguno Kiabalisa
Bayagu Igurusi Kiagata
Bereko Ihanja Kibakwe
Bisumwa Ikungi Kibara
Borega Ilongero Kibaso
Borogonja Ilula Kidatu
Buckreef Inyonga Kigeraetuma
Bugarama Isaka Kigongo Ferry
Buhemba Isaka Reli Kijingu
Bukene Iselamagazi Kilimarondo
Bukima Isenye Kilombero
Bukoba Railway Itigi Kimali
Bukoli Kabanga Kimamba
Bukumbi Kagunga Kinampanda
Bulamba Kagwe Kingolwira
Busangi Kakonko Kingwe
Busisi Kalango Kintinku
Butundwe Kalema Kipeta
Bwanga Kaliua Kirongwe
Bumbwini Kalya Kisaki
Chala Kamachumo Kisanga
Chato Kamsamba Kisesi
Chikuyu Kanyigo Kishanje
Chimala Kara Kisorya
Chipogoro Karumwa Kiwira
Choma Kasamwa Kogaja
Chwaka Kasanga Komaswa
Dabalo Kashasha Konde
Dodoma Airport Kasseya Korotambe
Dodoma Railway Kasulo Kwamtoro
Dumila Kasumulu Kyerwa (Kagenyi)
Dunga Kate Laela
Fuoni Katoro Lalago
Gairo Katumba Lamadi
Gamasara Katunguru Lionjo
Gingilian Kaunda Litembo
Gonja Kayisho Liuli
Halungu Kegonga Lizaboni
Haneti Kemondobay Reli Lugalo
Heka Azimio Kengeja Lukumbule
Ibaga Kenkombyo Lunguru
Iboja Kenyana Lunguya
Igalula KIA Lupembe

70
 P.G.O. No. 19
Lusewa Mlimba Nyakahura
Lwangwa Mlowo Nyakalilo
Mabanda Mjini Morogoro Reli Nyakanazi
Machochwe Mose Nyamilembe
Madaba Moshi Railways Nyamongo
Madibira Mpuyi Nyamswa
Mafia Msamala Nyang’wale
Maganzo Mtambile Nyangae
Magugu Mtera Nyantira
Mahembe Mtibwa Nyumba ya Mungu
Mahonda Mtimbira Nzela
Mahurunga Mtimko Oldonyo Olobaiye
Mahuta Mtitu Oldonyo Sambu
Mailimoja Mtomara Olmoloq
Majimoto Mtowisa Omukariro
Makanda Mtukula Paje
Makele Muganza Panyakoo
Makongolosi Mugeta Peramiho
Makuyu Mugoma Puge
Malampaka Muhange Robanda
Malangali Muhenze Rongai
Malinyi Muhoro Ruaha/Mbuyuni
Malya Muhukuru Ruamchanga
Manda Muhutwe Rubale
Mandawa Muriti Ruhembe
Mang’ula Murongo Rulenge
Mangaka Murusagamba Runazi
Manyoni Murutunguru Runzewe
Masumbwe Muyama Rusumo
Matamba Mvomero Rutamba
Matarawe Mwamapalala Sangamwalugesha
Matayi Mwampembe Sanza
Matemanga Mwandiga Sao Hill
Matombo Mwese Sapiwi
Matongo Mwimbi Saragana
Mavota Mwanza Railway Sepuka
Mbambabay Mzumbe Seronera
Mbarali Nalasi Shelui
Mbekenyera Namabengo Sigunga
Mbingu Namasi Simbo
Mererani Namtumbo Songea Bus Stand
Mfenesini Nanga Songwe
Mgambo Kigoma Nanyamba Stamico
Mgandu Nasa Darajani STPU Moshi
Mgango Natta Suguti
Mgeta Ndago Sumve
Mgololo Ndanda Sungwizi
Migoro Nduguti Tanga Railway,
Mikese Negezi Tegeruka
Mikindani Ngamu Turiani
Mikumi Ngare Nanyuki Ujiji
Milepa Ngarenairobi Ukiriguru
Milola Ngasamo Ukumbisiganga
Mingoyo Ngerengere Ulyankulu
Minziro Nguliati Unguja Ukuu
Misasi Nguruka Ungujaukuu
Mishamo Nkungi Usenya
Misungwi Nshamba Usoke
Mkuyuni Nyakabindi Utegi
Mkwajuni Nyakahanga Uvinza

71
 P.G.O. No. 19
Zanzibar Airport

72
 P.G.O. No. 20
MOBILE POLICE STATIONS

1. Mobile Police Stations will be used in Regions at the discretion of Regional

Commanders. They may be used to permit the extensive policing of rural areas or as a base
from which intensive investigations can be carried out in a specific case. In certain
circumstances, they can be utilised as operation headquarters.

2. A Mobile Police Station will normally be in the command of an Inspector, assisted by

the following: -
General Duties –
1 N.C.O.
2 Police Constables
1 Driver.
1 Signaller.
C.I.D.-
1 N.C.O.
1 Detective Constable
Crime Intelligence –
1 N.C.O.

3. Every Mobile Police Station will be accompanied by a Field Force Unit or General
Duties escort, which shall never be less than one section. This escorting party will be self-
contained and will travel in Field Force Unit transport where available.

4. Sufficient motor vehicles, with drivers, will be provided to transport personnel, tents,
bedding, mosquito nets, cooking and personal equipment. Where necessary, a water trailer
for towing will be taken. Water trailers will be drained and refilled twice each week. Under
no circumstances will personnel travel inside the Mobile Police Station. Camp equipment
will not be carried in the Mobile Police Station.

5. Mobile Police Stations will carry the equipment as determined by the Regional
Commander.

6. .The following main Station records will be maintained, together with any others, as
directed by Commanding Officers: -
(a) Report Book (P.F. 162) P.G.O. No. 309.
One Report Book, which will be drawn from the Police station of the District in which it is
operating, will be maintained in accordance with paragraph 23 of P.G.O. No. 309. This
Report Book will be handed over to the O/C. District upon the departure of the Mobile
Police Station and will be retained by him until the Mobile Police station returns to his
District. Note that a Mobile Police Station will not maintain its own separate Report Book,
but will keep a series of Report Books supplied and retained by the District Stations in
whose areas operations are undertaken. Cases handed over for prosecutions or further
investigation by a Mobile Police Station to the District Police Station before the Mobile
Police Station finishes its operations in the District will be treated as transferred cases (vide
paragraph 22 of P.G.O. No. 309). All other cases handed over on the departure of the Mobile
Police Station from the District will be serially numbered from the District Station
Investigation Register and all subsequent action on them will be recorded in `the Mobile
Police Station Report Book (vide paragraph 23 (b) of P.G.O. No. 309).
(b) Station Diary (P.F. 51) – P.G.O. No. 284
All reports made to a Mobile Police Station whether verbally or in writing, shall be briefly
recorded in the Station Diary (P.G.O. No. 284, paragraph 4 (e) refers) in addition to their
entry in the Report Book.

73
 P.G.O. No. 20
Detention Register (P.F.20) should be maintained in accordance with P.G.O. No. 353 where it
is essential to detain persons in custody at the Mobile Police Station. Those in custody should
normally be transferred to the District Police Station for detention and not detained overnight
at the Mobile Police Station.
Prisoner’s Property Receipt Book (P.F. 63) should be maintained in accordance with Police
General Order No. 357.
Visiting Officer’s Inspection Book (P.F. 187) should also be maintained in accordance with
Police General Order No. 303.

7. Regional Commanders will issue written instructions to the Inspectors in charge of

Mobile Police Stations laying down in precise terms the route to be travelled, the duties to be
performed and the radio schedules to be maintained. In all other respects, Mobile Police
Stations will be organised and operated in the same manner, as a Police Station as far as may
be possible. Notification of serious incidents and crime will be reported in accordance with
P.G.O. No. 311. Commanding Officers will carry out regular inspections of Mobile Police
Stations working in their areas.

8. Upon the departure of a Mobile Police Station from a District, it is important that all
criminal intelligence and other information which should properly be notified for recording
at the District Police Station is conveyed to the Officer – in – Charge

74
 P.G.O. No. 21
ESTABLISHMENTS MAINTENANCE UNITS TRADESMEN
1. The Police Training School Moshi and each Regional Headquarters (except Dar es Salaam,
which will be served by the Quartermaster) will operate small Maintenance Units of Carpenters,
Cobblers, Tailors, Assistant Armourers and Assistant Storekeepers (hereinafter referred to as
“tradesmen”).

2. (a) These Units will be composed entirely of specially qualified members of the Rank &
File and will not exceed the establishment set out hereunder: -
Region Carpenters Cobblers Tailors Asst. Armourers
Tanga, 2 2 2 1
Kilimanjaro,
Arusha, Mbeya,
Iringa, Morogoro,
Tabora, Kigoma,
Shinyanga,
Dodoma, Mara
and Mwanza
Ruvuma, Pwani, 1 1 1 1
Rukwa, Mtwara,
Lindi, Kagera
and Singida
Police Training 6 6 6 1
School Moshi
Quartermaster 6 1 1 1

(b) This establishment will include 3 Sergeants and 6 Corporals, if personnel with suitable
qualifications are available for promotion.

3. No other Stations or Units may employ tradesmen, but Regional Commanders may attach
members of their Headquarters maintenance Units to other Stations which have special need of their
services, provided that the Regional establishment set out above is not exceeded.

4. In some Regions the full establishment of tradesmen may not be required. For instance, it will
be possible in many places to send all boot repairs to the local prison, thereby obviating the need for
cobblers. Regional Commanders will, therefore, ensure that they do not engage unnecessary
tradesmen.

5. (a) Carpenters, Cobblers and Tailors may be engaged and attested locally by Regional
Commanders and all engagements must be reported to Police Headquarters. Training at the Police
Training School Moshi is not necessary for tradesmen, but they will be eligible for promotion to Corporal
and Sergeant on basis of five and ten years’ service respectively, provided that N.C.O. vacancies exist
in their particular establishment.
(b) All recommendations for promotion will be submitted to Police Headquarters in the
normal way.
(c) Tradesmen will normally be appointed at the lowest point in the Constables’ salary
scale, but the Inspector General may award increments of salary in respect of previous experience or
skill. Recommendations to this effect should be submitted to the Inspector General supported by
testimonials or certificates.

6. One Assistant Armourer will be stationed at each Regional Headquarters, except Dar es
Salaam. All will be fully trained police officers with normal promotion prospects. They will carry out their
duties in accordance with paragraph 2 of P.G.O. No. 81.

75
 P.G.O. No. 21
7. Assistant Storekeepers, who will also be fully trained police officers, unless otherwise
authorised by Police Headquarters, will be stationed at all Class “A” and “B” stores, as authorised under
P.G.O. No. 171. The following establishment set out hereunder will not be exceeded and Commanding
Officers should only provide one storekeeper for Class “A” Stations, if two are unnecessary: -
Class “A” Store 2
Class “B” Store 1
Police Training School 4
Assistant Storekeepers should normally be Police Constables, but N.C.O.s may be used if necessary in
Class “A” Stores only.

8. (a) Medical Dressers, who will be trained police officers, unless otherwise authorised by
Police Headquarters, may be employed at District Headquarters Stations where facilities exist and
where suitably qualified officers are available.
(b) The following establishment may not be exceeded: -
District Headquarters 1
Police Training School Moshi 3

9. Cobblers, tailors, Carpenters, Assistant Armourers and Assistant Storekeepers stationed at

Regional Headquarters shall be under the direct control of the Regional Headquarters Inspector, who
will ensure that they carry out their duties in a proper manner. Under no circumstances may Cobblers,
Tailors and Carpenters be employed on private work. Regional Commanders will ensure that a record is
kept of all jobs allocated to these personnel.

10. Tool kits, in accordance with Appendixes “A”, “B” and “C”, may be obtained from the
Quartermaster on indent and issued to Armourers, Cobblers and Carpenters.

11. All specialist personnel referred to in this order will be carried by the establishment of the
Station or Unit to which they are posted, unless provided for otherwise in the Force authorised
establishment.

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 21)

TOOLS KIT – ARMOURER’S

Brace, Armourer’s 1
Brace, Armourer’s bit screwdriver, small 1
Brace, Armourer’s bit screwdriver, large 1
Carborundum stones 1
Chests, Armourer’s 1
Cork 1 set
Drifts (4 per set) 1 set
Files, sight 1 set
Hammer, Rawhide 1
Hammer Warrington, cross pain riveting 1
Horse and Bolts, Armourer’s 1 set
Rod, cleaning No.1 1
Stick, cleaning chamber 1
Striker, point gauge No. 1 1
Tester, trigger B 1
Tool, adjusting foresight No. 1 MK II 1
Tool, adjusting foresight No. 1 KM II converted for No. 4 rifle 1
Tool, adjusting punch for above 1
Tool, bore bit 1
Tool, bore brush 1

76
 P.G.O. No. 21
Tool, bore rod 1
Tool, extractor spring No.1 1
Tool, extractor spring No. 2 for No. 4 rifle 1
Tool, removing foresight screws No.4 1
Tool, striker removing No. 2 mark I I 1
Vice, Armourer’s parallel 4” vice clams, leather 1 set.

APPENDIX “B”
(TO P.G.O. No.21)
TOOLS KIT COBBLER’S

Awls, handles 2
Awls, needles 6
Boxes, tool 1
Hammer, shoemaker’s 1
Knives, leather 1
Lasts, shoemaker’s 1
Padlock 1
Pincers, lasting 1
Pliers 1
Punches, 6-way 1
Rasp 1
Stones, oil 1

Materials
Beeswax
Heels, leather
Heels, rubber
Heel plates
Leather, sole
Leather, upper
Nails, 1”
Soles, leather
Soles, rubber
Studs
Tread, shoemaker’s
Toe plates

APPENDIX “C”
(TO P.G.O. No.21)
CARPENTER’S TOOLS
Auger bits, ¼, 3/8, ½, 5/8, ¾, and 1 1 each size
Brace, ratchet, 10” Stanley, No. 81 1
Cabinet, rasp, 12” 1
Carpenters’ pencils 6
Chests, tools, carpenter’s 1
Chisels, firmer, ¼, ½ and ¾ 1 each size
Drill hand, Stanley No. 805 1
File, saw, taper 4” 1
Glue pot, 11/2 pint 1
Hammer, claw No. 4 1
Handsaw, 24 1
Keyhole saw 1
Marking gauge, single 1

77
 P.G.O. No. 21
Nail puller 1
Nail punch 1
Oilstone, combination 8 x 2 x 1 No. 108 1
Plane, jack, Stanley No 51/2 1
Plane smooth Stanley No. 4 1
Pliers, 7 1
Pincers, 8 1
Raw plug, Handyman Outfit 1
Rule, Boxwood, 4fold, 3ft. Rabone No. 1375 1
Spokes have, Stanley No. 151 1
Screwdriver, 6 1
Screwdriver, 12 1
Square 9 1
Tenor saw, 12 1
Twist drills, 1/16, 1/8, ¼ 1 each size
Vice, record No. 521/2 1

78
 P.G.O. No. 22
ORDERLIES – GAZETTED OFFICERS
1. Each Regional Commander and Gazetted Officer of or above the rank of Assistant
Commissioner is entitled to one full-time orderly (who shall be a Police Constable) to look
after his uniforms and to accompany him on safari.
2. .Orderlies are not household servants and shall not be employed on menial duties.
3. No N.C.O. may be employed as an orderly.
4. No Police Constable may be employed as an orderly unless he is willing to undertake
the work.
5. Gazetted Officers shall not pay an extra allowance for the service of their orderlies.
6. Gazetted Officers shall, if possible, train their orderlies to drive a motorcar, so that
they can be used as drivers in time of emergency.
7. O/C. Districts and Field Force Units may arrange for Constables serving under their
command to clean their uniforms and to accompany them on safari.

79
 P.G.O. No. 23
ORGANISATION – ORDERS
General
1. All official Orders issued to the Force in accordance with this Police General Order
are for Police use only and may not therefore be divulged to members of the public

Police General Orders

2. Police General Orders (P.G.Os) are Orders of a permanent nature issued by the
Inspector General to the Force.

3. Every Gazetted Officer and Inspector is required to have a thorough knowledge of

all P.G.Os.

4. Commanding officers are responsible for ensuring that -

(a) all P.G.Os are enforced and obeyed by all ranks;
(b) members of the Rank & File are given adequate instruction in all P.G.Os,
which in any way affect them.

5 Copies of P.G.Os will be issued to all Gazetted Officers and Inspectors and to the
Stations and Formations listed hereunder: -
Police Headquarters 20
Police Zanzibar 100
C.I.D. Headquarters 10
Police Training School Moshi 100
CO, Field Force Unit 2
Police Training School Zanzibar 40
Regional Headquarters 20
Class A Stations 10
Class B Stations 10
Class C Stations 5
Field Force Unit 5
Commandant, Police College 100
Signals Unit 28

6. All O/C. Stations and Formations issued with P.G.O. and all officers who hold
P.G.Os on personal issue are directly responsible that their copies are always up to date and
amended without delay whenever P.G.O. amendments are published in Force Orders.

7. Amendments to P.G.Os will be issued by the Inspector General in Force Orders.

Each amendment will be numbered. Amendments will be inserted in P.G.Os in the following
manner: -
(a) In red ink if the amendment is a minor alteration to one or two words or
figures.
(b) By pasting in opposite the section of the P.G.O. to be amended if the
amendment is approximately paragraph length.
(c) By the replacement of a complete page in the volume if the amendment is
very extensive.
(d) In every case, the amendment number will be written in red ink in the
margin of the amendment and full details of the amendment will also be shown in the
Register of Amendments at the end of the volume

8. The Inspector General however will from time to time issue revised editions of the
Police General Orders which takes into account all amendments which have been made over
the years and any other additions which he deems necessary for the effective implementation
of the mandate of the Force. It should be noted also that Police General Orders are

80
 P.G.O. No. 23
Government property. Officers holding personal copies will, therefore, return same to the
Quartermaster on termination of service in the Force.

Force Orders
9. Force Orders, Part 1, are orders of a temporary or semi-permanent nature issued
by the Inspector General to the Force.

Standing Orders
10. Standing Orders are orders of a permanent nature peculiar to certain Stations and
Units, e.g. orders regarding beats, patrol schedules, licensed premises, local administration,
etc., amplifying but not repeating Police General Orders or other published Police
instructions. Under no circumstances may standing orders conflict with Police General
Orders.

11 (a) Commanding Officers are responsible that all Stations and Units under
their command are issued with comprehensive up to date sets of Standing Orders covering
their normal working requirements. These Orders shall be known as Regional, District,
Station and Unit Standing Orders.
(b) Standing Orders may only be issued by: -
(i) Commanding Officers.
(ii) O/C. Districts
(iii) CO Field Force Units.
(iv) Director of Music.

12 O/C. District and Field Force Units must submit drafts of all Standing Orders to
their Regional Commanders for approval before issue. The Director of Music may issue
Standing Orders directly connected with his respective Unit , but must submit drafts of all
Standing Orders which affect other commands to Police Headquarters for approval before
issue.

13 All Standing Orders may be issued in both English and Kiswahili and will be
numbered and filed in numerical order. An index of both English and Kiswahili Orders shall
also be provided for easy reference.

14. Standing Order files should be accessible to all ranks so that newly transferred
personnel may familiarise themselves with local Orders, which are not common to other
Stations and Units.

81
 SECTION II
FORCE ADMINISTRATION
Nos. 31 – 80

P.G.O. No. Title

31. Band-Buglers –Conditions Of Service

Band Unit – Administration Of
32.

33. Books – Movement Order (P.F. 58)

34. Books – Sick Report Register

35. Books And Registers – Destruction of

36. Command -Handing Over Procedure

37. Commendations and Awards

38. Correspondence – Classified

39. Correspondence – Routine

40. Habitual Criminals Dossiers

41. Criminal Statistics

42. Documentation – Inspectors And Rank & File

43. Dog and Horse Unit

44. Criminal Investigation Department – Administration

45. Professional Advancement - Examinations

46. Identity Certificates

47. Inspections – Formal – By Gazetted Officers

48. Leave

49. Pension Ability – Rank & File

50. Plain Clothes Duty

51. Police Gazette

52. Probation-Confirmation-Promotion On Trial

53. Promotions

54. Recruits- Procedure

103
55. Re-engagement and Discharges

56. Reports- Confidential

57. Reports- Progress

58. Time off and Time off leave

59. Transfers- Inspectorate and Rank and File

60. Books of reference

61. Death and Burial of Officers

104
 P.G.O. No. 31
BAND-BUGLERS –CONDITIONS OF SERVICE

Enlistment
1. The Commandant Police Training School Moshi, shall be responsible for the
enlistment and training of Buglers. Buglers will only be enlisted on instructions from
Police Headquarters.
Enlistment Conditions
2. Candidates for enlistment as Buglers must comply with the following
requirements. They shall be:-
(a) not less than 15 years of age and not more than 17 years of age;
(b) of a physique likely to conform, in due course, to standards required of all
members of the Rank & File;
(c) certified by a Government Medical Officer as being medically fit for
service in the Force and to be the age they claim if no satisfactory proof can otherwise
be produced;
(d) in possession of the written consent of their parents or guardians to join
the Force as Buglers;
(e) literate in Kiswahili and must have reached at least Standard VII
(Tanzania);
(f) of good character.
Proficiency Test
3. The Commandant Police Training School, Moshi, will arrange for the Director of
Music to visit the Training School to test Buglers who have completed their period of
training.
Posting
4. Buglers will remain with the Band at the Police Training School until posted
elsewhere by Police Headquarters.
Re-enlistment as Police Constables
5. When Buglers reach their eighteenth birthday, they will either: -
(a ) re-enlist as Bugler Police Constable, in which case they will not be
required to undergo the Recruit’s Course at the Police Training School, Moshi; or
(b) opt to cease bugling and join the Force as Recruit Police Constables, in
which case they will be required to undergo a full Recruit’s Course at the Police
Training School, Moshi, subject to their being of the required physical standards.
These may be relaxed at the discretion of the Commandant, Police Training School,
Moshi, or;
(c ) be discharged.
Previous Service to Count
6. The whole period of service spent as a Bugler prior to enlistment as a Police
Constable will count as normal Police service for the purposes of seniority and the
award of any future gratuity under Section 63 of the Police Force and Auxiliary
Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002. However, in accordance with the provisions of
section 18 (c) of the Public Service Retirement Benefits Act, Cap. 371 R. E. 2002,
service whilst under the age of 18 may not be counted towards a pension.

105
 P.G.O. No. 32
BAND UNIT – ADMINISTRATION OF
Administration
1. The Director of Music will be responsible for:-
(a) the training, maintenance of discipline, welfare and pay of Bands and
cultural troupes personnel;
(b) the supervision of clothing and equipment of Band and cultural
troupes personnel
(c) the arrangement of Bands and cultural troupes engagements and
programmes;
(d ) all administrative arrangements for rail/road journeys and the
preparation of warrants; and
(e) the maintenance and accounting of all Band and cultural troupes
property and stores.

Band – Zanzibar Police

2. The Commissioner of Police Zanzibar will be responsible for the maintenance
of discipline, welfare, pay and clothing of personnel of the Band at Zanzibar.
3. The Director of Music will inspect quarterly, in accordance with P.G.O. No.
47 and advise on all musical matters.
4. The Director of Music will be responsible for ordering all new instruments and
replacements.
5. Private engagements may be accepted at the discretion of the Commissioner of
Police Zanzibar. Donations and 50 per cent of the fees received shall be forwarded to
the Director of Music, who will pay all amounts into the Police Band Fund. The
remaining 50 per cent will be shared equally among the performers and paid out
against signature.
Bands – Police Training School Moshi
6. The Commandant Police Training School Moshi will be responsible for the
maintenance of discipline, welfare, pay and clothing of personnel of the Band at the
Police Training School Moshi.
7. The Director of Music will inspect all Bands quarterly, in accordance with
P.G.O. No. 47 and advise on all musical matters.
8. The Director of Music will be responsible for ordering all new instruments and
replacements.
9. Private engagements may be accepted at the discretion of the Commandant
Police Training School Moshi. Donations and 50 per cent of the fees received shall be
forwarded to the Director or Music, who will pay all amounts into the Police Band
Fund. The remaining 50 per cent will be shared equally among the performers and paid
out against signature.
The Police Band Fund
10 The rules governing the administration, income and expenditure of the Police
Band Fund are given hereunder.
11. The Fund shall be known as the Tanzania Police Band Fund, and all moneys
will be deposited in a Bank Account at Dar es Salaam.

106
 P.G.O. No. 32
12. All donations and fees paid to the band for private engagements in accordance
with the scales laid down in this Order will be paid into the above Fund.
13. The fund will be used for the purchase of music and to defray incidental
expenses incurred by the Band. It shall be administered by the Director of Music in
accordance with this order.
14 The Director of Music shall-
(a) Maintain the following accurate and up to date accounts:
(i) Band Account Book;
(ii) Petty Cash Book; and
(iii) Payment to Bandsmen Register;
(b) In no circumstances incur any debts or commitments, which cannot be
met by the Fund.
(c) Personally authorize expenditure up to Shs. 50,000/= per item and
control a petty cash account to the maximum of Shs. 50,000/=.
(d) Refer all proposed items of expenditure in excess of Shs. 50,000/= to
the Inspector General;
(e) Ensure that all payments and donations to the Fund are credited at
once to the Police Band Fund Account.
(f) Send receipts acknowledging all payments or donations.
(g) Certify all bills as correct before payment.
(h) Maintain an engagement book showing the names of Band personnel
and their authorized share of private engagement fees; draw the necessary funds from
the bank and pay out against signature.
(i) Produce accounts, bank statements and receipts for inspection by the
Inspector General of Police at the end of each quarter.
Band Fees and Allowances
15 The Director of Music, Inspectors and members of the Band will be paid
monthly allowance in accordance with the rates approved by the Government.
16. The fees payable for Band performances at private engagements shall be as
follows: -
(a) Full Band – 150,000/=.
(b) Jazz Band – 100,000/=.
(c) Transportation Charges- unless prior exemption has been obtained
from the Inspector General, transportation charges will also be levied in accordance
with rates for hiring Government transport, provided that the journey exceeds 20
kilometres from Kilwa Road Barracks in Dar es Salaam or the Police Training School
in Moshi or from the accommodation occupied temporarily by the Band while on
safari.
17. Charges will not be levied for performances given by order of His Excellency
the President of the United Republic of Tanzania, nor for performances at any public
functions approved by the Inspector General. Charges will be made for private
engagements attended by his Excellency the President when the engagement is not
ordered by the President as part of an official programme.
18. Where private engagement is required for charitable or other such cause, and a
reduction is requested by the organisers, the matter will be referred to the Inspector
General.
19. The fees payable for private performances shall be distributed as follows: -
(a) Full Band,
50 per cent to the Band Fund,

107
 P.G.O. No. 32
40 per cent to the performers (in shares – see paragraph 22), and
10 per cent to the Director of Music or O/C i/c Band Unit.

(b) Dance Band,

20 per cent to the Band Fund,
70 per cent to the performers (divided equally), and
10 per cent to the Director of Music or O/C i/c Band Unit.

20. The 40 per cent of Full Band Fees payable to performers will be distributed as
follows: -
Inspectors 4 shares
First class performers 3 shares
Second class performer 2½ shares
Third class performers 2 shares.

21. When the Director of Music or the O/C i/c Band Unit is not present, the 10 per
cent of fees drawn under paragraph 21 (a) and (b) will be added to the percentage
allocated to performers.
22. The Band shall not be made available for private performances, which
interfere in any way with official duties.

108
 P.G.O. No. 34
BOOKS – MOVEMENT ORDER (P.F. 58)
1. A Movement Order (P.F. 58) authorising an officer’s movement outside his
normal duty area shall be issued to all members of the Inspectorate and Rank & File
who are about to leave their Stations or Units, whether temporarily or permanently on:-
(a) transfer;
(b) leave;
(c) temporary postings or attachments;
(d) special courses of instruction;
(e) escort duty;
(f) all other duties, which take them outside the area or district to which
they are posted (excluding long-distance patrols carried out in accordance with P.G.O.
No. 302).
2. Movement Orders shall be prepared, in duplicate, and issued by O/C. Stations
and units, who will enter thereon: -
(a) precise instructions for the journey, including the route to be taken;
(b) salary and travel assistance details of those going on leave or transfer, in
accordance with paragraphs 33 and 34 of P.G.O. No. 48.
(c) the amount of travel assistance granted to the officer concerned and also
any further assistance that officer might anticipate from officers en route or at his final
destination;
(d) under the heading “Details” the weight of the officer’s baggage when on
permanent transfer; and
(e) the travel entitlement of the officer in cases where the family of that
officer has preceded him on leave and where it is not possible to issue return travel
warrants for them prior to that officer’s departure on leave.
3. Only one Movement Order will be made in respect of a party of police involved
in the same duty movement, but the names of all concerned will be entered on Form
P.F. 58.
4. Police officers travelling under the authority of a Movement Order shall:-
(a) produce their movement orders on the demand of a senior officer,
(b) report at the Police Station (if there is one) in any place through which
they travel and obtain the O/C. Station’s endorsement on their Movement Order,
(c ) request any Government Officer to whom they report in connection with
their duty to similarly endorse their Movement Order; and
(d ) report to O/C. Station or Unit, without delay, as soon as they arrive at
their destination and hand over their movement order.
5. O/C. Station or Unit to which personnel report in accordance with paragraph 4
(d) shall:-
(a) record the exact time of arrival on the Movement Order and in the
Occurrence Book,
(b) investigate any undue delay in the journey;
(c) retain and file the movement order if the prescribed journey has been
completed; and

109
 P.G.O. No. 34
(d) hand back the Movement Order if the prescribed journey has not been
completed and issue precise onward travel instructions.
6. Movement Orders of personnel on temporary attachment of less than 28 days’
duration will be retained by O/C. Station or Unit and re-issued with the time of
departure endorsed thereon when the holders return to their permanent posting.
7. O/C. Stations and Units will file completed movement order for six months and
then destroy them.

BOOKS – SICK REPORT REGISTER

1. A sick report register (P.F. 40) will be maintained at all Police stations in
which the following particulars will be recorded: -
(a) Date.
(b) Number and name of Inspector or member of the Rank & File
reporting sick.
(c) Nature of illness.
(d) Number of days spent in hospital
(e) Number of days sick leave granted.
(f) Number of days off duty.
(g) Number of days on light duty.
2. Every member of the Inspectorate and Rank & File will be issued with a
Medical History Book (P.F. 31c) upon appointment.
3. Medical History Books will be retained by the O/C. Units, who will be
responsible for ensuring that the books are maintained in accordance with this Order

110
 P.G.O. No. 34
4. Whenever a personnel reports sick, he will be given his/her Medical History
Book and instructed to produce it to the Medical Officer or clinic which he attends,
where details regarding sickness requiring hospitalisation or sick leave will be
recorded. He will return the book to his/her O/C. at the earliest possible opportunity.
5 The O/C. Station will complete the details in the sick report register from the
personnel’s medical history book.
6 The medical history book will accompany the personnel on transfer and will be
sent to Police Headquarters for filing upon the personnel’s discharge from the Force.

111
 P.G.O. No. 35
BOOKS AND REGISTERS – DESTRUCTION OF
1 All completed Police books and registers, except only:-
(a) Treasury and Stores records, which must be preserved in accordance with
Regulation 140 of Public Finances Regulations; and
(b) Official books which must be preserved for a special period under
specific Police General Orders, shall be destroyed two years after the date of the last entry
on the last page.
2. Destruction shall, in every case, be authorised by a Gazetted Officer. Books and
registers, which are due for destruction, shall be produced at formal inspections and
Gazetted Officers shall ensure that old and useless records are not preserved.

112
 P.G.O. No. 36
COMMAND-HANDING OVER PROCEDURE
1. Every Gazetted Officer and Inspector who hands over command of a police
formation shall prepare comprehensive handing over notes for the information and
guidance of his successor. These notes shall cover, inter alia:-
(a) all matters of interest concerning the staff;
(b) all matters which have been actively engaging the attention of the
police; and
(c) the state of police buildings and programmes for expansion.
2. Incoming officers will pay close attention to their predecessors’ handing over
notes and will take all necessary action to ensure continuity of policy and administrative
action.
Action on Handing and Taking Over
3. Incoming officers will normally take over only the Headquarters of large
formations but, when there is any change in the command of a formation where
Government cash or stores are on charge, the formation will be formally handed and taken
over in accordance with Part XIII Para (d) and Regulations 248-249 of the Public Finance
Regulations.
4. The handing over of all Stations and other Formations must be supervised by a
Gazetted Officer from Regional Headquarters who will witness the signing of the
certificates and affix his signature thereto.
5. The procedure for the preparation of Handing Over Certificates, set out in the
following paragraphs, will not apply to Crime Intelligence Unit Notes, which will be
covered by the Director for Criminal Investigation Department’s Standing Orders.
Handing and Taking Over Certificates
6. On completion of the handing over, the certificate
(………………….……………… ……………… originally T.F. 153 and S.F. 17), which
appear at Appendices “A” and “B” to this order, and P.F. 168, appearing in the Property
on Charge Register, will be completed by the officers concerned.
7. When a Regional Headquarters or other Command Headquarters is handed over,
three copies of the handing over certificates will be prepared and two copies will be sent to
Police Headquarters
8. When Police Stations and other Regional formations are handed over, Handing
Over Certificates will be prepared in quadruplicate and three copies will be sent to
Regional Headquarters. Regional Commanders will retain one copy and will forward the
remaining two copies to Police Headquarters.
9. Certificates must be properly completed in full and “NIL” should be entered
against any part of a handing and taking over certificate which is inapplicable to the
Station in question, e.g., the sections dealing with cash and stamps in the case of a station
where these are not held.
10. Certificates in the form set out at Appendix “C” will be completed in respect of
secret files and documents and forwarded under separate secret cover, together with lists
detailing the secret files and documents to which they refer. The distribution required is the
same as that for handing and taking over certificates, except that Police Headquarters
requires only one copy.
11. All deficiencies, discrepancies and losses of Government property shall be
entered on the certificate. Any officer who refuses to sign a certificate because he is

113
 P.G.O. No. 36
dissatisfied with the condition of the formation handed over to him shall report the fact at
once to his Commanding Officer.
Inspections on Taking Over
12. The incoming officer will, as soon as possible after taking over, inspect all
Stations under his command and will make himself conversant with all local standing
orders, revising them as and when circumstances demand

APPENDIX “A”
(TO P.G.O. No. 36)
T.F.N. 153
TANZANIA

.......................................STATION

Statement of Handing over of .................................................

Ministry/Department/Station on the ..............................200............

Cash Shs. Cts.

Notes .....................................................

Coins ......................................................

Cheques .................................................

Shs. Cts.

Bank Balance as per Bank Certificate

Less Cheques outstanding

Shs. Cts.

“Kodi” Stamps (as detailed and agreed with

Register)

114
 P.G.O. No. 36
Revenue Stamps (as detailed and agreed with
Register)

Embossed Paper (as detailed and agreed with

Register)

Revenue Counterfoil Books (as detailed on Revenue Counterfoil Return

attached)

Registered Nos. No. of Weight

Pieces

Ivory (as detailed in Register)

(a) Elephant

(b) Hippopotamus

Rhinoceros Horn

Game Skins (Detail types)

Livestock (as detailed in Livestock Return attached)

Safes, Strong rooms, Cash Boxes (Steel and Wooden) and Keys

Make and Dimension of Marker’s Maker’s Where duplicate held

Safes, etc. No. of No. of
Keys, etc.
Safe

115
 P.G.O. No. 36
Financial, etc. Instructions No. of Copies

Government Regulations .......................

Financial Orders, Part I ..........................

Financial Orders, Part II......................

Financial Orders, Part III .....................

General Orders .....................................

The Laws of Tanzania (Sets) .................

Treasury Circulars ............................

Stores, Furniture, etc. (as detailed in Register)

Stores Form 17 has been completed.

Departmental Vote Book

I hereby certify that I have handed over the Departmental Vote Book duly entered todate
and that it clearly shows the exact amount of expenditure charged against the Vote or Votes
for my Department, and also the expenditure authorised to be incurred, in accordance with -
------------------------------------ Regulation No. 236.
....................................................Signature} Outgoing Officer

.....................................................Designation}
Received the Departmental Vote Book.
..................................................... Signature} Incoming Officer
..................................................... Designation}
We hereby certify that we have handed over and taken over the Cash, Stamps, Counterfoil
Books, Safes, Stores, etc., as shown above and that the amounts and quantities agree with
the balances shown in the various Books of Account, Registers, etc., *with exception noted
on attached sheet against each item of which the explanations of the outgoing officer are
given.
……................................ 200 ............ .........................................................
Outgoing Officer
.............................................200..................................................................
Incoming Officer
*Delete if not required.
NOTE: Copies of this Handing Over Statement to be sent to the Accounting Officer of
Ministry/Department and Director of Audit and a copy filed in the office.

116
 P.G.O. No. 36

APPENDIX “B”
(TO P.G.O. No. 36)
CERTIFICATE OF HANDING OVER STORES (S.F. 17)

...................................... Department ….......................... 200 .............

...................................... Station
I hereby certify that I have this day handed over to Mr. ......................... all stores of the
................................... Department/District hitherto under my charge.
..........................................
Signature of Outgoing Officer
I hereby certify that I have this day taken over from Mr. ......................... all stores of the
.......................................... Department/District, having compared the stores on hand with
the ledger balances, and found them to be:
correct and in order;
correct with the exception of the articles shown in the attached schedule of discrepancies.
..........................................
Signature of Incoming Officer.
TO: ...................................
.....................................
.....................................

117
 P.G.O. No. 36

APPENDIX “C”
(TO P.G.O. No. 36)
SECRET
CERTIFICATE OF HANDING AND TAKING OVER OF SECRET DOCUMENTS

............................ Station

I hereby certify that I have today handed over to Mr. .............................. the under
mentioned secret files and documents: -

Title …………………………………………..

Ref. No. …………………………………………..

.............................................. ................................... 200 .....

Signature of Outgoing Officer

I hereby certify that I have today taken over the above-mentioned secret files and
documents, I have read the instructions contained in Government Security Instructions.

............................................. ................................... 200 .....

Signature of Incoming Officer

118
 P.G.O. No. 37
COMMENDATIONS AND AWARDS
1. Members of the Inspectorate and Rank & File who perform work of
outstanding quality (not mere routine efficiency) may be recommended for: -
(a) His Excellency the President’s Commendation;
(b) The Inspector General’s Commendation.
2. A monetary award may also be granted by the Inspector General in addition to
a President’s or Inspector General’s award.
3. Commanding Officers will submit duplicate recommendations to the Inspector
General with full supporting reasons on the pro forma at Appendix “A”.
Recommendations should, if possible, be forwarded in the relevant Case Files.
4. Recommendations in respect of officers who refuse bribes shall include the
value of the bribe offered and information regarding the prosecution of the person who
offered the bribe.
5. Staff Officer (P) will be responsible for the preparation and dispatch of
Commendation Forms (P.F. 159 and P.F. 160, and the promulgation of all
commendations in Force Orders, Part I. All Commendation Forms will be signed by
the Inspector General.
6. Commendation Forms should be presented to recipients on parade by
Commanding Officers.
7 All commendations will be entered in Service Registers in red ink.
8. Unofficial commendations by the Courts or by members of the public, which
do not merit an official commendation, may be referred to the Inspector General for
information and records.

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 37)
RECOMMENDATION FOR COMMENDATION AND/OR REWARD

No. Brief facts for entry in record.Recommendations

Example For intelligent investigation
Rank
and perseverance in the case of theft of
Name property valued Shs. 2,000,000/=
Station leading to the recovery of the property
and the arrest of 4 offenders
Region subsequently convicted. .........................................
Unit Commander
Date: ...............................

DETAIL
On 1st February, 2004, etc., etc. .......................................
Regional Police Commander
Date: ............................

..........................................

119
 P.G.O. No. 37
Director of Criminal
Investigation
Date: ...............................
Continue overleaf if necessary:
........................................
Inspector General’s Decision
Date: ...............................

........................................
Inspector General
Date: ...............................

120
 P.G.O. No. 38
CORRESPONDENCE – CLASSIFIED
1. This Police General Order is published as a simplified guide to existing
Government Security Instructions and Force Security Instructions (Inspector General’s
Confidential Circular No. 19 “Instructions for the Handling of Classified Documents –
Correspondence – Classified”). Authorised personnel who regularly handle classified
correspondence are required to be acquainted in full with the instructions contained
therein. Personnel not so authorised must refer to their superior officer for appropriate
instructions.
Security Classifications
2 There are four security classifications in use within the Force, which are: -
(a) Top secret.
(b) Secret.
(c ) Confidential
(d) Restricted to Police use only.
In addition, the classification “Staff Confidential” is in general use for
information, which is not of a security nature but of a purely personal, or establishment
interest, the disclosure of which would cause administrative embarrassment or
difficulty.
3. Correspondence from other territories may be classified “Restricted” but this is
not a classification used in Tanzania. If correspondence classified as “Restricted” is
received, it will be treated in the same manner as Confidential correspondence
Marking of Classified Correspondence
4. The classification of a document will be printed or rubber – stamped in red ink at
the top and bottom of each page. Classifications should only be typed or hand-written
if no other facilities exist, and such markings must be in red.
5. Classified documents may not be down–graded without the authority of the
originating office. Where such authority is granted, the original classification will be
deleted in ink and the new classification substituted. The amendment will be signed
and dated by the officer responsible and a note made of the documentary authority for
doing so.
Filing
6. Classified documents will only be filed in files bearing the highest security
classification of the contents. The outside cover of a classified file will be marked with
its reference number and classification unless distinctive covers of the following
authorised patterns are used: -
TOP SECRET: Red with 1” black bars on the spine.
SECRET: Green with 1” red bars on the spine and diagonal red band.
CONFIDENTIAL: Blue with 1” purple bars on spine.

7. The title of a classified file will not be marked on the outside of the cover, but
will be shown on the inside of the front cover.
8. Top secret files must contain a minute sheet on the left-hand side of the file
listing all Top Secret folios in the file.
Accountable Security Documents
9. A document may be made accountable at the originator’s discretion. Recipients
of accountable security documents will be required to certify their safe custody at

121
 P.G.O. No. 38
specified periods, not less than once a year. The most common examples of
accountable security documents are codes and ciphers in use within the Force.
Register of Incoming and Outgoing Documents
10. A separate file index and register of outgoing and incoming documents will be
kept in respect of all classified correspondence. Separate indices and registers should
be maintained in respect of each security classification if this is necessary by reason of
the provisions concerning access to classified material. In most cases, however, it will
only be necessary to maintain one index and register for all classified correspondence,
but it must be remembered that the index and register have to be treated in accordance
with the highest security classification recorded therein.
Safety of Classified Material
11 Officers handling classified documents or files are personally responsible for the
safety of the classified material whilst it is in their possession and for ensuring that it is
at no time accessible to unauthorised persons.
12. Classified files or papers will, in no circumstances, be taken to private houses,
etc., unless the provisions for the security of the documents can be complied with and
authority has been obtained from the Inspector General for such action.
13. Classified files must not be left unattended at any time unless housed as laid
down in paragraph 14 of this order.
Minimum Standards of Housing classified documents
14. The following are the minimum acceptable standards for the housing of
classified documents: -

Nature of Material If Housed in Insecure Premises If Housed in

Secure Premises

TOP SECRET and all Code and A steel safe properly bricked in. A steel safe.
cipher Material.

SECRET Steel filing cabinet properly Steel filing cabinet

bricked in and fitted with
security Bar and six-lever
padlock.

CONFIDENTIAL Steel filing cabinet fitted with Steel filing cabinet.

locking bar and padlock

15 For the purpose of the above minimum standards, “secure premises” are to be
interpreted as a properly constructed strong room fitted with a steel door and six-lever
lock, or a building under security guard.
Handing and Taking Over of Classified Documents
16 When the custody of classified documents changes hands, both the incoming
and outgoing officer will carry out a physical check of all files and documents held, as
follows: -

122
 P.G.O. No. 38
(a) Files will first be checked by both officers against the relevant file
index.
(b) Contents will be examined and checked by both officers. When both
officers are satisfied that the contents of the file are in order, they will initial and date
the last folio at the time of checking.
(c) A Handing Over Certificate will be signed and dealt with in accordance
with P.G.O. No. 36.
Transmission of Classified Material
17. The full instructions for the transmission of classified documents are laid down
in the Inspector General’s Confidential Circular No. 19 “Instructions for the Handling
of Classified Documents – Correspondence – Classified” issued to all Gazetted
Officers, but for the purposes of this Order, the following instructions should be noted:
-
(a) TOP SECRET: Must not be sent by any other method than Hand-of-
Pilot Bag or by hand of an officer authorised to have access to Top Secret material.
(b) SECRET: By registered post, and documents must be contained in
a double envelope (see paragraphs 18 and 19 of this Order), or by hand of an officer
authorised to have access to Secret material.
(c ) CONFIDENTIAL: By registered post in a double envelope, or by
hand of an officer authorised to have access to Confidential material.
Double Envelops
18. The inner envelope will bear the address to which it is consigned and the file
reference of the contents, together with the date at the bottom left hand corner. The
security classification will be clearly stamped on both sides of the envelope. The
envelope must be sealed according to the classification of its contents.
19. The outer envelope will bear only the address to which the cover is consigned
and will only be sealed with wax if it is despatched by registered post. No security
classification or file reference will be shown on the outer envelope.
20. There are two types of seals, which may be used for sealing classified
documents:
(a) Brass Security Seals
These are used for imprinting the seal on wax and may be used for sealing envelopes
of all types of classified documents. When not in use, the seal will be kept in a safe.
(b) Red Paper Wafer Seals
These will either be stamped with the rubber stamp of the originating office or will
bear the signature of the dispatching officer. The wafer, stamp or signature will then be
covered by a strip of tape, which must overlap the wafer on each side, by at least one
inch. Wafer seals may only be used for sealing the inner or single envelope of secret
documents or envelopes containing confidential material. Top secret material will
never be sealed by this method.
Receipt of Classified Documents
21. On every occasion when Top secret or secret documents are dispatched, the
dispatching officer will ensure that a receipt (Form PF. 38) is completed and enclosed
with the documents for signature and return by the addressee

123
 P.G.O. No. 38
22. The addressee or officer to whom he has delegated responsibility is responsible
for checking the contents against the details on the receipt and, if correct, he will sign
and return the receipt to the despatching officer with the minimum of delay.
23 The dispatching officer, on receiving the receipt, will paste it on the file copy of
the document.
24. It is the responsibility of the receiving officer to check that the seals on the
backs of envelopes bearing security classifications show no sign of interference
Breaches of Security
25 Any suspected breaches in connection with classified documents will be
reported at once to the immediate senior formation. Investigations will commence at
the same time.
26. If envelopes or containers of security classified correspondence appear to have
been tampered with or do not agree with the details on receipt forms (PF.38), the
addressee shall be responsible for informing the despatching officer by the quickest
means. Both officers will commence inquiries at once, in addition to reporting to the
immediate senior formation.

124
 P.G.O. No. 39
CORRESPONDENCE – ROUTINE
1. All official correspondence and signals to Police Headquarters shall be
addressed to the Inspector General.
2. All Gazetted Officers attached to Police Headquarters shall sign all outgoing
departmental correspondence “For Inspector General of Police”.
3 Correspondence addressed to Permanent Secretaries and Heads of Government
Departments shall be signed “For Inspector General of Police”. The Commissioner
(Administration and Finance), Commissioner (Operations and Training), Deputy
Commissioners (PHQ), Senior Assistant Commissioners (PHQ.), Assistant
Commissioners (PHQ), Staff Officers (PHQ) and the Director of Criminal
Investigation are the only officers authorised to sign on behalf of the Inspector
General.
4. All correspondence from Police Headquarters shall be answered and
despatched back to Police Headquarters within 10 days upon receipt, unless otherwise
directed. Any officer who is unable to complete a reply within 10 days shall signal
Police Headquarters for permission to delay his reply and shall explain the reason for
such delay.
5. Police Headquarters reminders shall receive immediate attention and a full or
interim answer dispatched by the quickest possible means within 24 hours of the
receipt of such reminder.
6. Written requests to Police Headquarters for rulings on instructions shall
include all relevant data, precedents, if any, reference numbers of relevant files, and
shall provide adequate information so that Police Headquarters may give a decision on
the strength of the material provided.
7. Officers are not permitted to address Heads of Government Departments
directly on official matters. All such communications shall be sent through the
Inspector General, except that Regional Commanders may address Regional
Commissioners directly on routine matters and shall keep the Inspector General
informed of any matters of importance arising therefrom. Written requests for legal
advice from the Director of Public Prosecutions shall be sent through the Director of
Criminal Investigation. Correspondence, including signals, destined for the Police
Forces of other territories will be routed through Police Headquarters, Dar es Salaam.
In Regions bordering neighbouring territories, direct communication is permitted in
cases of emergency, pursuit of fugitive criminals and requests for road and traffic
checks. When such communication is made, copies will be dispatched to Police
Headquarters.
8. All correspondence to and from the Ministry of Public Security & Safety in
connection with vouchers, receipts and connected documents will be routed through
Police Headquarters. Direct correspondence between Commanding Officers and the
Ministry is forbidden, unless authorised by the Inspector General.
Miscellaneous Correspondence Rules
9. Every memorandum and minute shall be dated and shall bear the writer’s title
or rank after his signature. The subject heading on originating correspondence must be
retained on all subsequent correspondence.
10. Every memorandum shall deal with one subject only. Memoranda dealing with
a multiplicity of subjects are forbidden.
11. Every reply to a memorandum or minute shall deal with every point raised in
the original and in the order in which each point was raised.

125
 P.G.O. No. 39
12. A copy of every official memorandum or letter shall be filed in the office or
station from which it originated.
13. Unnecessary delay in answering correspondence is forbidden.
14. All correspondence from members of the public shall be acknowledged
formally on the day of receipt if a full and immediate reply cannot be sent.
15. Paper and forms issued for official use shall be used with strict economy and
undue wastage must be prevented. Regional Commanders shall check the supplies of
stationery issued to Stations under their command to ensure that there is no excessive
consumption. The use of Government stationery for private purposes is forbidden.
16. The covers of all anonymous letters shall be carefully preserved with the
letters and sent to the Director of Criminal Investigation for inquiry where necessary.
17. Every petition, report or request forwarded to a senior officer shall be
accompanied by a covering report from the forwarding officer. This instruction
particularly applies to material sent to Police Headquarters.
18. Members of the Rank & File who wish to address the Inspector General on any
subject may do so, but only through their Commanding Officers. Petitions addressed
direct to Police Headquarters will not be accepted. Commanding Officers shall submit
all such correspondence to the Inspector General with relevant comments thereon.
19. All Gazetted Officers and all members of the Inspectorate and Rank & File in
charge of Districts, Stations or Units shall instruct another officer to deal with their
routine correspondence during absence on tour or on patrol.
Filing System
20 Commanding Officers shall ensure that their Headquarters and all Formations
and Stations, down to and including District level, maintain such approved
standardized filing systems as may be laid down in Police General Orders.
21. Class “C” Stations are not required to keep a filing system. They shall
maintain separate files for letters received and copies of letters despatched.
22. All files held in Police Stations shall be inspected at formal inspections by
Gazetted Officers and old and useless papers destroyed. Accumulation of valueless
records must be prevented.
23. The date of receipt shall be recorded on the top of the front page of each item
of incoming correspondence
24 All outgoing correspondence (except secret and confidential papers) to any one
address shall be sent altogether in one envelope. The use of individual envelopes for
each item of correspondence is forbidden.
25. Where a bulk mailing system is operated, correspondence other than Secret
will be delivered for despatch in accordance with the procedure in operation at each
centre. Where no bulk mailing system is operated mail will be franked and posted.
26. Emails as a medium for correspondence are allowed subject to the policies and
guidelines to be issued by the Inspector General from time to time.

126
 P.G.O. No. 40
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION DEPARTMENT - MAINTENANCE OF
RECORDS
1 Criminal Records will be maintained by Regional and District C.I.D. Units in
strict conformity with this General Order and no record or register is to be opened
other than in conformity with this or other Police General Orders
Supervisees Dossiers, etc.
2. See P.G.O. No. 358
HABITUAL CRIMINALS DOSSIERS
3. See P.G.O. No. 359
Investigations Regional Dossiers
4. It is the responsibility of each O/C. C.I.D., to ensure that details or all cases,
inquiries and First Crime Reports received or taken over by him are recorded in the
Investigations Register (P.F. 169). The total value of property stolen and recovered
will be entered in column 4 under “Offence or Inquiry”. The name of the C.I.D. officer
investigating will be entered under column 6.
5. The register will be regularly reviewed and action taken by the Officer
Commanding C.I.D. to ensure that serious crime reported on First Crime Reports
(P.F.4) are thoroughly investigated and disposed of with all possible speed.
6. (a) Officers i/c C.I.D. Units will maintain a nominal index on PF. 131 in
Moore’s Modern Methods Binders. This index will contain descriptive records of the
following criminals:-
(i) Supervisees.
(ii) Habitual Criminal on whom a dossier is maintained.
(iii) Wanted persons of the District and Region, respectively, and
those promulgated through the medium of the Police Gazette.
(iv) Repatriates from the District and Region, respectively.
(b) PF. 131 will be indexed alphabetically, as follows:-
(i) Europeans and Asians. - On the last name or family’s name, e.g.:
an Asian with the name Gulamali Hussein Kanji will be indexed under the “K” group
in strict order of alphabetical sequence.
(ii) Africans, Arabs, etc.- On the first name, e.g.,: an African with
the name Mohamed s/o Salim will be indexed under the “M” group in strict
alphabetical sequence.
7. A separate PF. 131 will be filed for each alias, but the particulars of the person
need only be shown on the Master Card, provided all alias cards contain a reference on
the Master Card.
8. The O/C. District C.I.D. Units will ensure that the Nominal Index is checked
daily against the “Report of Apprehensions” (PF. 13), and immediately advise the
Police Station concerned of any criminal history shown against the persons arrested.
Stolen Property Index (P.F. 135)
9. The O/C. Regional (R.C.O.) and District C.I.D. Units will maintain a stolen
Property Index on PF. 135, which will be filed in Moore’s Modern Methods Binders.
10. The index will be based on a three-year rotational system, using PFs 135 of a
different colour annually, so that on completion of the third year, the first year’s PFs

127
 P.G.O. No. 40
135 are destroyed. PFs 135 will be issued in December of each year by the Director of
Criminal Investigation.
11. This index will include only items selected at the discretion of the C.I.D.
Officer from local sources and from the Police Gazette as being of Territorial interest
and likely to be traced locally, i.e., motor vehicles, machinery carrying the maker’s
number, passports, very valuable and distinctive jewellery.
12. Magisterial Inventories of Property found published in the Official Gazette will
be checked against the Property Index.
Stolen Bicycle Index (PF. 134)
13. The O/C. Regional (R.C.O.) and District C.I.D. Units will maintain a Stolen
Bicycle Index on PF. 134, which will be filed in Moore’s Modern Methods Binders in
strict numerical order, irrespective of make.
14. The index will be based on the three –year rotational system, using coloured PF
134, so that on completion of the third year, the first year’s cards will be removed and
destroyed.
15. The CO. Forensic Bureau will maintain a permanent Territorial Index to which
O/C. Stations and C.I.D. Units may refer.
16. Regional C.I.D. Officers and O/C. Districts will maintain graphs as set out in
Appendix “A” showing the state of Regional and District Crime.
Crime Graphs
17. Crime Graph 1 will indicate trends of success from month to month in true
Penal Code cases. The pillar will contain three sections: -
The lower section (shaded red) will indicate the number of cases in which convictions
are obtained.
18. The top section (shaded blue) will indicate the number of cases in which
acquittals occur and will include the number of cases in which investigation has been
unsuccessful.
19. Crime Graph II will indicate Penal Code trends in true cases investigated (in
blue) and the corresponding case conviction rate (in red).
20. Crime Graph III will indicate the month-to-month position of serious crime
(Appendix “A” to P.G.O. No. 311), with an independent reference to trends in
breaking offences reflected in green.
21 Graph numerical values are left to the discretion of the Regional and District
C.I.D. Officers.

APPENDIX “A”
(TO P.G.O. No. 40)
20……………...

128
 P.G.O. No. 40
......................... District
PENAL CODE

May

Aug

Nov
Mar

Dec
Apr
Feb

Sep

Oct
Jun
Jan

Jul
Mark
Graph : -
Red –
Convictions
Blue -
Acquittals
& Failures
Blank –
Pending

129
 P.G.O. No. 40

APPENDIX “B”
(TO P.G.O. No. 40)
PENAL CODE
20 ..... TO 20 ............
.................................. District
ANNUAL FIGURES

ITEM 20
2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2009 2010 2011 2012
15

Mark Graph
Red –
Convictions
Blue -
Acquittals &
Failures
Blank -
Pending

130
 P.G.O. No. 40

APPENDIX “C”
(TO P.G.O. No. 40)
SERIOUS CRIME
200 .......... ............................... District

CATEGORY Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

Mark Graph

Red – Convictions

Blue - True cases

Registered
Cases

Green – True
Breaking

Registered
Cases

131
 P.G.O. No. 41
CRIMINAL STATISTICS
General
1. Force Crime Statistics shall be prepared on form P.F. 70.
2 All O/C. Class “A”, “B” and “C” Stations are required to prepare accurate
consolidated statistics covering all crime reported to all Police Stations in their areas in
accordance with paragraphs 4 to 8. Notes on Compilation of Statistics are at Appendix
“A” to this Order.
Preparation of Criminal Statistics
3. All Class “A”, “B” and “C” Stations will be issued with Crime Statistics
Forms (PF. 70). These forms are in pads with quadruplicate copies marked “A”, “B”,
“C” and “D”. They are divided into a left hand section, referring to “Cases Reported”
and a right-hand section, referring to “Number of Persons” dealt with by the Police and
the Courts. The two sections may be joined together to facilitate compilation by
pinning (not gumming) the “Line No.” column of the left hand section over the
corresponding column on the right-hand section. Pins must be removed after the forms
have been completed.
4. Forms should, if possible, be typed but may be written. All preliminary
drafting must be done on the fourth copy, marked “D”.
5. All crime figures will be cumulative to the 31st December each year, i.e., the
figures included in the tables at the end of the first quarter will be those for January,
February and March; the figures at the end of the second quarter will be those for the
first six months of the year which will then have elapsed, at the end of the third
quarter, the figures for the past nine months will be inserted, while at the year’s end the
figures will represent the complete year.
6. The “Offences” tables will be compiled quarterly, and both “Offences” and
“Persons” tables annually. All copies will be submitted to Regional Commanders for
checking
7. (a) O/C. Stations are responsible for the accuracy of their statistics, which
they will submit to their O/C. Districts within 10 days of the end of the period covered
by the Return,
(b) O/C. Districts will check each Return and make any necessary
corrections and despatch same to reach the Regional C.I.D. Officer not later than 15
days after the end of the period under review.
(c) Regional C.I.D. Officers will re-check each Return and submit the
corrected “D” copies to their originating stations for filing. Copies “A”, “B” and “C”
will be submitted to Regional Commanders.
8. Regional Commanders will arrange for Station Returns to be consolidated into
Regional Returns and will submit them (copies “A” and “B”). together with the
supporting Station Statistical Tables, to the Director of Criminal Investigation before
the end of the month following the period under review. Copy “C” of the consolidated
Return will be retained at Regional Headquarters. CO. Railway Police Units will
submit statistics direct to the Director of Criminal Investigation. The Director of
Criminal Investigation will consolidate these statistics on a Territorial basis.
9. The Director of Criminal Investigation, on receipt of consolidated Regional
tables, supported by the Police Station tables, will prepare a consolidated Territorial
Table for the Inspector General.

132
 P.G.O. No. 41
APPENDIX “A”
(TO P.G.O. No. 41)

NOTES ON STATISTICS
SUMMARY SHEETS
1. A supplementary summary sheet form showing the same heading as on Tables
“A” and “B” is available on indent from Regional H.Q. to assist O/C. Stations in the
compilation of the Statistical Table. In practice, the summary sheet will be used against
the entries in the Report Book (PF. 172).
2. In compiling the return, take a summary sheet and start with the first sub-
heading shown on Table “A”. Go through the report book for the period under review
and record the required details of each offence on the summary sheet, ticking each in
the report book after it has been dealt with. The figures are then totalled on the
summary sheet or sheets and transferred to the criminal statistics tables “II”. The next
sub-heading is then dealt with in a similar manner, and so on until all headings are
completed.
3. At the end of the quarter some summary sheets may be retained in a safe place,
so that results of pending cases may be noted thereon. However, the offence and case
file number should be noted, together with the date of entry, to avoid confusion. The
report should also be marked in some way indicating that the result has been noted on
the summary sheet. This system will obviate the necessity of checking back through
the report book when compiling later statistical returns.
4. It may be found more convenient to mark pending cases in the Investigations
Register (PF. 169) and Minor Offence Docket Register (PF.170) at the time of
compiling the statistical return, which will obviate the necessity of checking back
through the Report Book when compiling later statistical returns.
(a) Total Cases Reported: All offences reported to Police will be recorded
on table I in column 3. Transferred reports will be shown only by the station actually
dealing with the case.
(b) Cases refused “Civil” or “No Offence Disclosed”: - Cases refused
“Civil” or “No Offence Disclosed” will be included with cases refused due to mistake
in Law or Fact on table 1 in Column 4.
(c) Cases refused “Frivolous or Trivial”: Cases refused “Frivolous or
Trivial” will be included with “Cases refused False or Vexatious” on table I in column
5.
(d) Persons Dealt With and Number Convicted: Persons dealt with and
number convicted is shown on Table II. It should be noted that particulars of
convictions are required in detail.
(e) Age Groups: The letter “A” in brackets following the word “Juvenile”
indicates that the age group of the offender is required. This age group is arrived at by
recording the age of the youngest and oldest offenders in each particular group. For
example, if it is found that “X” number of juvenile male offenders have committed the
offence of theft during the period and if the youngest is aged 10, and the eldest aged
14, then the age group will be recorded as 10/14.
(f) Age groups will be entered in the same column as the number of
offenders, but immediately below them a line should be drawn between the two.
For example: -
12 (Offenders)

133
 P.G.O. No. 41
10/14
SHADING
It will be noted on the forms that alternate columns are shaded, and on Table II this
occurs in all columns dealing with female offenders. The shading is to assist in the
completion of the form and has no special significance.
PENAL CODE OFFENCES
SUB-HEADING 1
Riot and Unlawful Assembly will include all offences against sections 74 to 83,
inclusive.
SUB-HEADING 2
Other Offences under Chapters 7, 8 and 9 will include all offences reported against
these chapters, except those dealt with previously.
SUB-HEADING 3
Perjury will include all offences reported against sections 103, 104 and 106.
SUB-HEADING 4
Escapes and Rescues from Lawful Custody will include offences against sections 115,
116 116A and 117.
SUB-HEADING 5
Other offences against chapters 10. 11, 12 and 13 will include offences not dealt with
under the foregoing sub-headings.
SUB-HEADING 6
Rape and Indecent Assault will include all offences reported against sections 131, 132,
135, 136, 137 and 138
SUB-HEADING 7
Unnatural Offences will include all offences reported against sections 154, 155, 156
and 157.
SUB-HEADING 8
Other Offences under Chapters 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 will include all offences not dealt
with under the foregoing sub-headings.
SUB-HEADING 9
Murder, Manslaughter and Infanticide will include all offences reported against
sections 197, 198, 199 and 219.
SUB-HEADING 10
Attempted Murder and Attempted Suicide will include all offences reported against
sections 211, 213, 214, 215, 216 and 217.
SUB-HEADING 11
Grievous Harm, Wounding, etc. will include offences against sections 225, 227 and
228.
SUB-HEADING 12
Assault on and Obstruction of Police will include offences against section 243,
subsection (b) and (d).

134
 P.G.O. No. 41
SUB-HEADING 13
Other Offences under Chapters 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 and 25 will include all offences
not previously dealt with under the foregoing sub-headings.
SUB-HEADING 14
Thefts under Shs. 100,000/= will include all offences reported against sections 265,
267, 269, 271, 272, 273 and 274 where the value of the property stolen does not
exceed Shs. 100,000/= and which are not dealt with under subsequent sub-headings.
SUB-HEADING 15
Thefts over Shs. 100,000/= will include all offences reported against sections 265, 267,
269, 272, 272, 273 and 274 where the value of the property stolen exceeds Shs.
100,000/= and which are not dealt with under subsequent sub-headings.
SUB-HEADING 16
Cattle stealing will include all offences reported against section 268. Until further
notice the number of cattle stolen and recovered, in addition to the value of the cattle,
will be submitted. The figures relating to the numbers stolen will be shown in columns
13 and 14 on line 32, which at present have no specified sub-headings. A note should
be made in column 2, line 32-“Numbers of Cattle Stolen/Recovered”. Care should be
taken that numbers are not confused with values when the summary is being totalled.
SUB-HEADING 17
Thefts by Government Servants (C/S Sections 270 and 271) will include all thefts by
Government/public servants or Government property only.
SUB-HEADING 18
Thefts by Local Government Servants (C/S sections 270 and 271) will include thefts
by Local Authority and other Local Government employees who cannot be defined as
being in the “Public Service”.
SUB-HEADING 19
Thefts by Political Party and Society Officials under sections 271 and 273 will include
thefts by all officials connected with political parties, Co-operative Societies, and other
societies, of the funds or property of the party/society with which they are concerned.
SUB-HEADING 20
Thefts by Trade Union Officials will include all thefts under sections 271 and 273 by
those officials of trade unions of funds, moneys or property intended for trade unions.
SUB-HEADING 21
Thefts, Prædial, will include all thefts of growing crops (C/S 265 and 280).
SUB-HEADING 22
Robbery and Extortion will include all offences reported against sections 286, 287,
288, 289, 290, 291 and 292.
SUB-HEADING 23
Burglary and Breaking by Night will include all offences reported against sections 294,
295, 296, 297 and 298 committed during the “night”.
SUB-HEADING 24
Breaking by Day will include all offences reported against Sections 294, 295, 296 and
298 committed during the “day

135
 P.G.O. No. 41
SUB-HEADING 25
Other offences under chapters 26, 27, 28 and 29 will include all offences in these
chapters not dealt with in the preceding sub-headings.
SUB-HEADING 26
False Pretences and Frauds will include all offences reported under chapters 30 and 32.
SUB-HEADING 27
Receiving stolen property will include all offences reported under chapter 31.
SUB-HEADING 28
Arson will include all offences reported against sections 319, 320, 321 and 322.
SUB-HEADING 29
Forgery will include all offences reported under sections 337, 338, 339, 340, 342, 343,
344, 345, 346, 348 (where the offence involving banknotes is not currency notes, e.g.
bank drafts, etc.), 349, 351 and 352
SUB-HEADING 30
Currency, etc., and Coining Offences will include all offences under sections 341, 348
(where the offence involves banknotes which are currency notes), 354, 355, 356, 357,
358, 359, 360, 361, 364, 365 and 366.
SUB-HEADING 31
All other offences under the Penal Code will include all other offences against the
Penal Code, which have not been dealt with previously.
OTHER STATUTORY OFFENCES
SUB-HEADING 34
Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap. 77 R.E. 2002 will include all offences reported under the
Act.
SUB-HEADING 35
Mining Act, Cap. 123 R.E. 2002 will include all offences under the Act.
SUB-HEADING 36
Road Traffic Act Cap. 168 R.E. 2002 and Highways Act, Cap. 167 R.E 2002 will
include all offences reported under the Road Traffic Act, Cap 168 R.E. 2002 and
Highways Act Cap 167 R.E. 2002 and Traffic offences dealt with under local
government authorities laws.
SUB-HEADING 37
Intoxicating Liquor Act will include all offences reported against the Act.
SUB-HEADING 38
Arms and Ammunition Act will include all offences reported against the Act.
SUB-HEADING 39
Prevention of Corruption Act, Cap 329 R.E. 2002 will include all offences reported
against the Act.
SUB-HEADING 40
Public Order Act, Cap. 385 R.E. 2002 will include all offences reported against the
Act.

136
 P.G.O. No. 41
SUB-HEADING 41
Children and Young Persons Act, Cap. 13 R.E. 2002 will include all cases involving
children in conflict with the law dealt with by Police in which such cases should not be
included in other subheadings even if they relate to them.
SUB-HEADING 42
Gaming Act 2003 will include all offences reported against the Act.
SUB-HEADING 43
Trade Unions Act, Cap. 244 R.E. 2002 will include all offences reported and dealt with
by Police under the Act.
SUB-HEADING 44
All other statutory offences will include all other offences dealt with by Police against
Statutes.

NOTE: All attempts to commit offences and recorded as such will be entered under
the main Sub-Heading, e.g., “Attempting to Obtain Goods by False
Pretences”. The particulars of this offence, etc., would be included in Sub-
Heading 26.

137
 P.G.O. No. 42
DOCUMENTATION – INSPECTORS AND RANK & FILE
Maintenance of Personnel Records
1. The following personnel records and documents shall be held and maintained
in respect of each member of the Inspectorate and Rank & File: -
(a) At Police Headquarters, by Establishments Branch
Inspectors:
(i) Confidential and open personal files.
(ii) Record of Service Card (P.F. 104A),
(iii) Rank & File:
Open personal file, which shall contain P.F.
161 “Application for Appointment” (see
paragraph 2 (a), below);
Record of Service Card (P.F. 104A)
(b) At each Command Headquarters, by Commanding Officers
Inspectors:
(i) Confidential and open personal files.
(ii) Service Register (P.F.104).
(iii) Rank & File:
Open personal file.
Service Register (P.F. 104).
(c ) At District Headquarters, class “A” Stations other than district Headquarters,
Field Force Units, and other sub-formations commanded by Gazetted Officers,
by the Gazetted Officer in charge
(i) Inspectors:
Open personal file.
Record of service card (P.F. 104A)
(ii) Rank & File:
Open personal file.
Service Register (P.F. 104A).
Documentation Procedure on Enlistment
2. The Commandants, Police Training School Moshi and Police College Dar es
Salaam, will ensure that enlistment documentation of all recruits of the Inspectorate
and Rank & File is carried out in accordance with P.G.O. No. 54. They will,
accordingly, prepare or complete -
(a) one copy of P.F. 161 (Application for Appointment), which will be
sent to Police Headquarters after attestation;
(b) two copies of PF. 104A (Record of Service), which will be sent to
Police Headquarters and to the Commanding Officer of the Formation to which each
P.A.1 and Recruit is posted as soon as he passes out from the Police Training School
or the Police College;

138
 P.G.O. No. 42
(c) one copy of PF. 104A (service Register), which will also be sent, after
passing out from the Police Training School or the Police College, to the Commanding
Officer of the command to which the P.A.1 or Recruit is posted, together with P.F.
104A (paragraph 2 (b), above) for retention onward transmission to the District
Headquarters, Field Force Unit or other Sub-Formation (provided the latter is
commanded by a Gazetted Officer) in which he is to serve, in accordance with the
procedure detailed in paragraph 1, above.
3. No enlistment documentation shall be carried out elsewhere unless specifically
authorised in Police General Orders or by Police Headquarters.
Entries in Personnel documents
4. Gazetted Officers who are responsible under paragraph 1 for the maintenance
of personnel records will ensure that all information published in Force Orders
affecting personnel under their command is entered, without delay in Record of
Service Cards (P.F. 104A) and Service Registers (P.F. 104). Nothing that has not been
published in Force Orders may be entered in these documents except -
(a) on the Record of Service cards (P.F. 104):
all local transfers within Commands;
(b) in service registers (P.F. 104):
(i) local transfers within Districts, etc.,
(ii) medical history, which shall only include serious illnesses,
serious injuries, venereal diseases and tuberculosis;
Note: O/C. Stations who do not hold service register are reporting details of all such
illnesses, etc. to the Gazetted Officer who holds the service registers.
(iii) musketry courses;
(iv) discharge particulars;
(v) reports as to general conduct, efficiency, etc.
The procedure for the maintenance of Service Registers is set out in the following
paragraphs.
Maintenance of Service Registers
5. Service Registers shall be fully and accurately maintained by the Gazetted
Officer responsible for this duty, vide paragraph 1 above. The rules set out in
Appendix “A” shall be observed in respect of entries in the various sections of the
Register.
Security of Personal Files and Service Registers
6 Officers maintaining personal records are personally responsible for the
security of these documents and also for ensuring that unauthorised persons do not
have access to them. It is cardinal rule of personnel administration that no person shall
have access to any official file containing confidential correspondence relating to
himself.

APPENDIX “A”
(TO P.G.O. No. 42)
GENERAL RULES FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF SERVICE REGISTER (P.F.
104) AND RECORD OF SERVICE CARDS (P.F. 104A)

139
 P.G.O. No. 42

1. The Commandant Police Training School Moshi, and those officers authorised
to carry out enlistment as per paragraph 1 of P.G.O. No. 54, shall be responsible for the
preparation of Service Register and record of service cards for all members of the
Force attested at the Police Training School. The following instructions are to be
observed when completing this Register: -
PAGE 1:
(a) NAME
The full name of the Recruit must be recorded and shall include his father’s names.
The surname, if any, should be underlined, e.g., James George s/o Fulani. The name
underlined will be the name by which the Recruit will be referred to.
(b) PHOTOGRAPH:
The photograph will be of the head and shoulders, with the Force number of the
Recruit clearly decipherable. The photograph will be taken against a suitable white
background.
(c) SIGNATURE
The signature of the holder of the Register shall be in accordance with the name
appearing on the front of the Register
PAGE 4:
PERSONAL DESCRIPTION
The personal description shall be completed in details. Where doubt exists as to the
precise date of birth of the recruit, he will be considered as having been born in July of
the particular year. The details of previous Police service, as shown on page 5, shall also
include details of previous Prisons service, and shall contain the rank and former service
number of the recruit when serving in the Prisons service, and shall also show details of
any medals awarded during that service.
PAGES 5/6
DECLARATION ON ENLISTMENT/MEDICAL CERTIFICATE
(a) Attesting officers shall warn all recruits that false answer to the
questions relating to previous service (which includes recruit service) and criminal
convictions are criminal offences and may result in prosecution.
(b) Service with any other forces should also include details of rank,
number and any decorations awarded.
PAGE 7:
PROMOTIONS AND REDUCTIONS
All promotions and reductions should be entered on page 7 of the Register, following
publication in Force Orders. Reductions shall be entered in red ink.
PAGE 8:
RE-ENGAGEMENTS
Every re-engagement shall be undertaken in accordance with the provisions of P.G.O.
No. 55 and the Force Order authority for all re-engagements shall be endorsed in the
Register.
PAGES 8/10:

140
 P.G.O. No. 42
TRANSFERS
All transfers, supported by the Force Order reference, shall be entered. Transfers
ordered as a result of disciplinary proceedings or on compassionate grounds shall be
entered in red ink with an endorsement in the right – hand margin against the entry. The
endorsement shall consist of the letter “C” for compassionate transfers and the letter
“D” for disciplinary transfers.
PAGE 11:
EXAMINATIONS PASSED
A record of all examinations passed, with the appropriate Official Gazette and/or Force
Order reference, shall be made on page 11. Where an officer has gained distinction in
any examination this entry will be made in red ink.
PAGE 11:
GOOD CONDUCT BADGES
The award of Good Conduct Badges will be shown on page 11. Whenever a disciplinary
offence necessitates that forfeiture of a Good Conduct Badge, or alternatively, service
counting towards a Good Conduct Badge, this entry will be made in red ink on this
page.
PAGE 12:
ALLOWANCES GRANTED OR WITHDRAWN
All allowances granted or withdrawn shall be entered on page 12 of the Register
following publication in Force Orders.
PAGE12
CLASS OF LEAVE TERMS, ELIGIBILITY FOR PENSION AND
CONFIRMATION
When an officer is declared to be pensionable under the provisions of the Public Service
Retirement Benefits Act, Cap. 371 R.E. 2002, this shall be entered and the relative
authority quoted.
PAGES 13/14:
COURSES – CERTIFICATES – SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS
The Commandant, Police Training School, shall report the result of all courses,
examinations, etc., to the Police Headquarters for publication in Force Orders as
necessary. The details of such courses and the standard obtained by an officer will be
noted on page 13 of the Register.
PAGES 15/16:
COMMENDATIONS, REWARDS, RECOMMENDATIONS, ETC.
Particulars of any award, medal, reward or commendation shall be entered on page 15
of the Register, following publication in either Force Orders or the Official Gazette.
PAGES 17/20:
DISCIPLINARY PUNISHMENTS
All disciplinary punishments shall be reported to Force Headquarters in accordance with
the provisions of P.G.O. Nos. 105 and 106, and, after promulgation in Force Orders,
shall be entered in the Register at pages 17 to 20. Those punishments, which
automatically entail forfeiture or deferment of grant of Good Conduct Badges and

141
 P.G.O. No. 42
allowances under the provisions of the Police Force (Good Conduct Badges and
Allowances) Regulations,1952, shall be entered in red ink.
PAGES 21/25:
REPORTS AS TO GENERAL CONDUCT, EFFICIENCY, ETC.
Such entries shall be made by the Gazetted Officer-in-charge of the personnel in the
following circumstances: -
(a) When a personnel transfers from one command to another.
(b) On the occasion of the preparation of a report for the annual increment.
(c ) When an official warning concerning bad service or behaviour is
administered.
(d) When a Commanding Officer institutes a recommendation for
promotion.
Such entries must be concise and to the point and shall provide a brief but accurate
assessment of each personnel’s ability and character. Promotion may be dependent on
entries made in pages 21 to 25 of the Register, and reporting officers shall, therefore,
take great care that these entries are framed with fairness and the full knowledge of the
personnel concerned. Meaningless generalisations, such as the words “needs watching”,
and exaggerations shall be avoided.
PAGES 26/27:
VACATION AND LOCAL LEAVE
Full details of all leave taken with particular reference to the grant of travel assistance,
or otherwise, shall be included. Any period of leave over/under spent, together with any
instructions relating there to, will be recorded in the “Remarks” column. This space
should be utilised for recording particulars of family transport assistance when families
precede or follow the husband on leave.
PAGE 28:
MEDICAL HISTORY
The details of periods off duty in cases of serious injury, illness or hospitalisation shall
be entered in the space provided. Short periods of “Excused duty” for simple ailments
should not be entered, all such casualties must be reported to Police Headquarters for
publication in Force Orders.
PAGES 29/30:
MUSKETRY COURSES
The results of all authorizsed musketry courses shall be entered on pages 29 and 30 of
the Register.
PAGE 31:
CLOTHING SIZES
Details of clothing sizes shall be entered on page 31 of the Register.
PAGE 31:
PARTICULARS OF DISCHARGE
When a member of the Rank & File leaves the Force, whether by discharge, dismissal,
resignation, and retirement or on medical grounds, the service register shall be
forwarded by his Commanding Officer to Police Headquarters for retention. After

142
 P.G.O. No. 42
confirmation of discharge by the Inspector General, the Register shall be retained in the
archives at Police Headquarters.
PAGES 31/32:
CONFIRMATION OF DISCHARGE
Details will be entered upon discharge, together with recommendations for
gratuity/pension, etc., on pages 31 and 32 of the Register.
INSPECTION OF SERVICE REGISTERS
2. Service Registers will be produced to all Inspecting Officers, who shall examine the
contents thereof with a view to the discharge or reduction in Rank of any member of
the Rank & File who is obviously inefficient or, alternatively, to submit early
recommendations for promotion of any outstanding members of the Rank & File.

143
 P.G.O. No. 43
DOG AND HORSE UNIT
Dog and Horse Section Personnel
1. The selection of personnel for training as dog or horse handlers will be carried
out by the Force’s Dog and Horse-master.
2. The Force’s Dog and Horse Master, Dar es Salaam, will be given one month’s
notice prior to handlers proceeding on leave. Dogs for which such handlers are
responsible may, on departure of the handler on leave, be sent to the Police Training
School Moshi for rehabilitation and rest.
3. The Dog and Horse-master at the Police Training School Moshi will provide an
escort for dogs returned to the Police Training School for rehabilitation. On conclusion
of his leave, the handler will report to the Police Training School to collect his dog and
undergo one week’s refresher course.
Purchase and Breeding of Dog and Horse
4. No dogs will be purchased or otherwise acquired without the prior approval of
the Force Dog and Horse-master, and the sanction of the Inspector General.
5. No horses will be purchased or otherwise acquired without the prior approval of
the Force Dog and Horse-master, and the sanction of the Inspector General.
Transportation
6 (a) When a Police dog is being taken from one place to another in a vehicle
not equipped as a travelling kennel, the handler will always sit in the back of the
vehicle with his dog and will hold his dog securely by the collar throughout the
journey
(b) In cases where long journeys are involved and in all cases where a dog
is moved on temporary duty, the following will apply: -
(i) By Road: The dog will be placed in a portable kennel in the
rear of the truck. The handler will travel in the rear of the truck
with his dog throughout the journey
(ii) By Rail: The dog will be placed in a placed kennel and the
handler will travel in the wagon or on the train with his dog
throughout the journey.
(iii) By Air: According to the airliner’s conditions for carriage of
livestock.
(c) It is also the rule that:
(i) On all long journeys the handler will be responsible for
watering and feeding the dog en route and for exercising it at
regular intervals.
(ii) The dispatching officer will issue Route Instructions to the
handler. These will incorporate (i) above, and all other
information as to the movement.
(d) The dispatching officer will issue the necessary warrant and will signal
the receiving unit as to time of departure and of arrival at destination. The receiving
officer will make necessary arrangements for transport and accommodation on arrival.
Transfer – Police Dogs and Handlers
7. No. transfer of dogs and handlers from one Dog and Horse Unit to another may
be made without the prior authorisation of the Force Dog and Horse-master.

144
 P.G.O. No. 43
8. All casualties affecting Dog and Horse Section personnel and animals will be
reported to Police Headquarters for publication in Part II of Force Orders.
9. Commanding Officers will be responsible for the administration and operation
of all Dog and Horse Units, except the training unit at the Police Training School
Moshi.
10. Where a Dog and Horse Unit is authorised, the Regional Commander will
ensure that the administration and supervision of the Unit is entrusted to a Gazetted
Officer.
Care and Training of Privately Owned Dogs
11 The Force Dog and Horse-master may not train or care for privately owned
dogs without the written permission of the Inspector General.
12 No dog handler or Horse Rider may keep, train, or in any way care for any
privately owned dog or horse.
Official Records
13. Only sires approved by the Force Dog and Horse-master shall be used for
“covering” brood bitches
14. Brood bitches will only be stationed at the Training School Moshi.
15. No dog will be taken on strength until it is six months old.
16. Each dog or horse will be allocated a number by the Force Dog and Horse-
master when it is taken on strength and particulars will be quoted in Part II of Force
Orders and in all subsequent correspondence regarding the animal. Dogs will be
numbered in sequence. Each number will be prefixed with the letters “P.D.”and for
horse “P.H”
17. When puppies are born to bitches on the strength of the Force, details will be
recorded on their dam’s history sheet. Details will include those relating to the disposal
of all puppies. This will apply also to horses.
18. When a dog/ horse is taken on strength, or a puppy/foul is accepted on
probation, a file will be opened for it and a dog/horse “Record of Service” Form
(P.F.154) will be completed, in triplicate, together with veterinary record cards “A”
and “B”. The triplicate copy of the Record of service will be kept by the Force Dog
and Horse-master, the duplicate will be forwarded to Police Head-quarters, and the
original filed in the file of the dog/horse concerned, together with the veterinary record
card, which will be held by the Unit where the dog/horse is stationed and will
accompany the dog/horse when transferred. A photograph of each dog/horse will be
affixed to P.F. 154 at the time it is posted for duty.
Disposal of Police Dog and Horse
19. (a) No dog/horse will be disposed off except on the instructions of the
Inspector General or a Veterinary Officer, except in the case of an order for destruction
due to injury, ill health or old age, or where the animal concerned is in such a condition
that immediate destruction is necessary. In such circumstances a Gazetted Officer may
give the order for destruction and shall forthwith forward a report of the circumstances
to the Inspector General and to the Force Dog and Horse-master.
(b) All other cases must be the subject of an application to Headquarters.
Such dogs are likely to be:-
(i) trained dogs that have ceased to be efficient;
(ii) partly trained dogs unlikely to become efficient;

145
 P.G.O. No. 43
(iii) puppies surplus to requirements.
As each of these categories would command a different price, application for
permission to sell should categorise the dogs to be disposed of accordingly, showing in
each case the proposed selling price.
(c) As a guide to calculating the proposed selling price, the following
factors should be considered: -
(i) In the case of dogs, the pedigree, the value of the parents,
and if known, the ruling market price for dogs of equivalent breed and pedigree.
(ii) In the case of puppies up to 12 weeks old, a minimum price
of Shs. 100,000, before taking into account the above factors.
Fire Alarm
20 In the case of the fire Alarm being sounded, all handlers and Horse Rider will
proceed by the fastest means to the kennelor stables area. They will remain there until
dismissed, ready to move their dogs to a place of safety should the kennels be
threatened.
Part II – Employment and Training
Employment of Dog and Horse
21 Senior police officers under whose command Dog and Horse Units are stationed
will direct the employment of all dogs under their respective commands. In this
connection, policy will be defined by the Inspector General. As regards the use and
limitation of Police Dogs, Commanding Officers should seek the advice of the Police
Dog and Horse-master, where appropriate. When operational use is made of a tracking
dog, the O/C. District concerned will complete a case report as soon as possible and
forward this to the Force Dog and Horse-master. A specimen of completed case report
is given at Appendix “C” to this order.
22. In addition to the requirements of paragraph 2 of P.G.O. No. 47, Dog and Horse
Units may be visited, as directed by the Inspector General or by request of
Commanding Officers, by the Dog and Horse-master whose advice may be sought on
matters of training and dog management.
23. The operational employment of trained dogs/horses stationed at the Police
Training School will be at the discretion of the Commandant, Police Training School,
and requests for assistance will be made direct to him through the Regional
Commander concerned.
24. Partly trained dogs/horses and/or handlers/riders may be employed on limited
operational duties under the supervision of the Force Dog and Horse-master.
25. All Police dogs and handlers will be trained in accordance with the directive
shown in appendix “A” and will attain the standards laid down in this Appendix.
26. The Commandant, Police Training School Moshi, will be responsible for
ensuring that no animal or handler/rider is classed as “trained” until it or he can fulfil
the conditions laid down in the Inspector General’s directive.
27. The Dog and Horse Master, Police Training School Moshi, will be responsible
to the Commandant for planning all initial training of dogs/horses and handlers to the
standard laid down by the Inspector General and ensuring that such standards are
maintained.

146
 P.G.O. No. 43
Daily Routine for Handlers and Riders
28. (a) All dog handler or horse riders will report at the kennel/stables area
for duty one hour before they are required to parade their Dog and Horse. They will
carry out the following duties before going on parade: -
(i) exercise their dog/horses, as in paragraphs 47 – 50;
(ii) clean kennel/stables and its area;
(iii) groom their dog and horses; and
(iv) proceed to place of duty.
(b) On return from duty, handlers must: -
(i) feed and water their dog/horse
(ii) exercise their dog/horse
(iii) clean feeding bowl and ensure a supply of water is in the
kennel and stables. and
(iv) Kennel/stable their dog/horse, and then dismiss.
29. When Dogs and Horses are not required for day duty, the handler’s and rider’s
programme will be:
(a) 0630 hours: Report for duty, clean kennels/stables and area.
Exercise and groom dog/horse carry out whatever training may be directed by the Dog
and Horse-master or Gazetted Officer in charge. Return dogs/horses to kennels/stables
on completion of training after watering
(b) 1600 hours: Report for duty. Feed, water and exercise dog/horse (if
not required for night duty – see paragraph 44). Groom, clean kennel area and re-
kennel dog.
Part III – Finance
Control of Funds for the Purchase and Maintenance of Dog and Horse
30.
(a ) Funds for these purposes will normally be allocated by the Inspector
General to Regional Commanders who will sub-allocate them to Dog and Horse Units
according to their estimated strength, after taking into account the value of bulk
purchases arranged by him through the Quartermaster
(b) Sub-allocations by the Commanders will be made monthly. Those for
the following month must take into account over or under-expenditure in the preceding
month resulting from variations as between estimated and actual strengths during that
period

Temporary Transfer
31 Where a dog, horse and handler/rider are transferred for temporary duty to
another Region, the following will apply: -
(a) HANDLER/RIDER – Period not exceeding two months he will be
regarded as on temporary transfer and draw his appropriate allowances. Over two
months, he will be transferred.
(b) DOG AND HORSE – Will be regarded as on temporary transfer
(duty), irrespective of the period they are away from their parent unit. Funds will be

147
 P.G.O. No. 43
provided by sub-warrant to the O/C. Station to which they are attached by the O/C.
parent Station.
Part IV – Kennel Management and Health and Cleaning of Horse Stables
Cleaning
32 Handlers/riders are responsible for the cleanliness of the kennels/stables of all
dogs/horses allocated to them.
33 Kennels/stables will be cleaned out twice daily; i.e. once in the early morning
before exercise, and once prior to bedding down at night. When kennels/stables are
cleaned, all faeces will be burned. After removal of dirty litter in the morning,
kennel/stables will be swilled out, except in inclement weather, when the floor of the
kennel/stables should be swept clean daily with sawdust, sand or earth, and the
kennel/stables disinfected twice weekly. In normal weather the disinfecting of the
kennel will be done twice weekly with a mild disinfectant.
34 Water and feeding bowls will be washed clean daily. The feeding bowl will be
washed after feeding and placed, upside down, in the place provided until again
required. When portable kennels are in use, feeding bowls will be left on the top of the
kennels. After cleaning, water bowls will be refilled with clean water and replaced in
the kennels.
Veterinary Inspections
35 All Dog and Horse on the strength will be examined once monthly by a
Government veterinary surgeon, or at more frequent intervals, at his discretion, and the
result of each examination will be entered on the veterinary record card “B” of the
dog/horse concerned. This will not apply to the Police Training School, where the Dog
and Horse-master, Police Training School, is responsible for obtaining the services of a
Veterinary Officer when necessary. The Veterinary Record Card “B” must be available
on all occasions when dogs/horses are inspected by a veterinary officer.
Reporting of Illness or Injury
36 Handlers/riders are responsible for reporting to their Commanding Officer, or to
the veterinary surgeon, as soon as a dog/horse appears to be ailing or in the case of
injury, card “A” will be made available. All cases of serious injury or illness will be
reported to the Commandant, Police Training School Moshi and to Police
Headquarters by signal. For guidance as to the prevention and treatment of common
ailments see “Notes on the Employment and Management of Police Dogs”, which will
be issued to Dog and Horse Units and included in Standing Orders for each Unit.
First Aid Equipment
37 All kennels/stables will be equipped with a first aid box as described in
appendix “B”. The contents will be used according to the instructions contained in the
box.
Dipping
38 Dogs and Horses will be dipped regularly. All Police dogs/horses will normally
be dipped weekly. In cold or inclement weather, dogs/horses will not be dipped but
will be dusted with “Gammatox Plus” powder. Dogs will not be dipped but dusted
with “Gammatox Plus” powder if they are sick.
Inoculation and Vaccination
39 All Police dogs will be subjected to the following inoculations and vaccinations:
-

148
 P.G.O. No. 43
(a) Rabies. – On acquisition. Every year thereafter, except in the case of an
outbreak of rabies, in which case dogs should immediately be inoculated
(b) Distemper, Hepatitis, Leptospirosis and Parvo (DHLP) – On acquisition
or, in the case of puppies, when 3 to 4 weeks old, then a boost after one month.
(C) All police horses shall be vaccinated against African Horse sickness at
the age of one year and then annually.
40 When a dog/horse is taken on strength and is in possession of an authentic
certificate of inoculation or vaccination in either case, a further dose will not be given
until it is next due. Particulars of all vaccinations or inoculations given will be entered
on the veterinary record card “A”. Particulars of injections received prior to acquisition
will be included in the same card.
Part V – Rations and Equipment for Dog and Horse
Feeding
41 (a) Dogs will be fed once daily unless illness or other circumstances
necessitate variation of this procedure. The daily ration for working dogs will consist of:
-
2½ lb of cooked meat, including bone.
1 lb. of biscuits, unpolished rice or maize flour.
2 oz. of vegetables.
1 oz. of salt per week.
(b) (i) Horses will be fed hoarse meal twice a day, in the morning and
in the evening. Each meal shall weigh 2.5 kg, unless illness or other circumstances
necessitate variation of this procedure e.g. Pregnancy, illness, etc
(ii) Where there is no zero grazing the horses shall be fed grasses
three times a day.
(iii) Horses will be fed also vegetables, cabbage 1 kg and 1 kg of
carrots for vitamins. They shall also be supplied with salt, supermaclik, or bayslick
mineral mix. These supplements can be changed depending on circumstances
necessitating variation e.g. Veterinary Doctor’s recommendations, illness or authority
of Dog and Horse master.
42 (a) This ration will be altered only on the instructions of the Dog and
Horse-master or of a veterinary surgeon.
(b) No horse will be fed horse malt within three hours of going on duty.
44 (a) When no cook is employed for the purpose, handlers of dogs will
prepare food in bulk, on a duty roster basis.
(b) When there is no sanitary labour, horse riders are responsible for
feeding of horses and cutting of grasses on a duty roster basis
(c) Where there is no sanitary labour, horse riders are responsible for
feeding of horses and cutting of grasses on a duty roster basis. They are also
responsible for the cleaning of horse stables, twice a day in the morning and in the
evening.
Grooming
45 (a) Each dog will be thoroughly groomed for at least 15 minutes daily.
Grooming will be carried out in accordance with the method taught. Particular

149
 P.G.O. No. 43
attention will be paid to the dog’s eyes, ears, nose, teeth, toes and docks, also to the
removal of ticks, which must be destroyed.
(b) Each horse will be thoroughly groomed for at least 15 minutes daily.
Grooming will be carried out in accordance with the method taught. Particular
attention to the horses, body, head, especially to the ears, tail and cutting of hooves.
Also ticks should be removed and destroyed.
Exercise
46 (a) Each dog must be exercised for two periods of at least 30 minutes each
per day, also for an additional period of 10 minutes before the animal goes on duty.
This exercise will be in addition to any duty training that may take place.
(b) Each horse must be exercised once a day or more according to the
instruction of in charge of horses or Dog and Horse-master. Each exercise should not
exceed 30 minutes. This exercise will be in addition to any duty training that may take
place.
47 Exercise will take place on routes and in areas specified by the Dog and Horse
master or the Gazetted Officer who has charge of the unit concerned.
48 Dogs will normally be exercised leashed, but the Dog and Horse-master or
Gazetted Officer in charge may order dogs to be exercised loose in areas where human
being or other dogs are unlikely to be encountered.
49 When entering or leaving the kennel area, dogs will always be held by the collar.
When kennelled in portable kennels they will always be chained to their kennels.
When kennelled in kennels built of permanent materials, they will be chained to their
kennels unless the design of the kennel is such that a separate exercise yard is provided
for each animal.
Equipment
51. (a) The following equipment will be issued for each dog: -
Equipment Normal Period for Exchange
1 Collar 1 year
1 Lead 1 year
1 Brush 1 year
1 Comb 2 years
1 Feeding Bowl as and when required
1 Water Bowl as and when required
Tracking/Training
Harness in 5 years
the case of tracking
dogs only)
Muzzles, leather (2 per Unit) 5 years
Portable Kennel 1
per Unit (or more in at the discretion of the O/C. Unit).
large Units
(b) The following equipment will be issued for each Horse
Equipment Normal Period for Exchange
1 Reign…………………………1 year

150
 P.G.O. No. 43
1 blanket………………………..1 year
1 Saddles………………………..5 years
1 Stirrup…………………………1 year
1 Horse shoe…………………….3 years
1 leather Ointment……………...6 months
1 Comb…………………………3 years
1 Hoof cutter…………………….3years
1 Hoof knife……………………...3 years
1Horse shampoo………………..1 month
1 Girth………………………….1 year
1.Drinker………………….……5 years

151
 P.G.O. No. 44
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION DEPARTMENT –
ADMINISTRATION

C.I.D. Appointments and Transfers

1. (a) As a general rule, members of the Inspectorate and Rank & File should
not be permitted to serve in the C.I.D. until they have completed two years’ General
Duties Service. O/C. Regional C.I.D. Units will maintain a list of suitable candidates
for service in the C.I.D. such personnel should possess good records, the qualities
required for detective work and some ability in criminal investigation.
(b) All transfers to and from the C.I.D. will require the approval of the
Inspector General, and the Director of Criminal Investigation will submit applications
in all cases. The Director of Criminal Investigation may transfer C.I.D. Inspectors and
Rank & File within the C.I.D., but authorised establishments will not be exceeded
except as a temporary measure. Transfers of Gazetted Officers will require the prior
approval of the Inspector General. The Director of Criminal Investigation will be
responsible for ensuring that all C.I.D. transfers are published in Force Orders.
(c) Rank & File posted to the C.I.D. will normally be regarded as trainees
for six months and should be attached to Regional C.I.D. Units whenever possible to
work under the guidance of more experienced C.I.D. officers. O/C. Regional C.I.D.
Units will be directly responsible for seeing that trainees are given every opportunity to
gain experience. On the completion of six months’ training, Regional C.I.D. Officers
will submit a report to the Director of Criminal Investigation on trainees’ capabilities
and aptitude for C.I.D. duties. Selected trainees will undergo a C.I.D. instructional
course at the Police Training School in Moshi or Zanzibar with a written and oral
examination at the end of it.
Plain Clothes and Detective Allowances to C.I.D. Rank & File
2. (a) C.I.D. personnel of all ranks are entitled to Detective and Plain Clothes
Allowance with effect from the date of their being accepted into the C.I.D. Such
allowances shall be authorised by the Director of Criminal Investigation in accordance
with the provisions of P.G.O. No. 50 and the Director of Criminal Investigation will
cause the authority for payment of such allowance to be published in Force Orders.
Plain Clothes and Detective Allowances payable to C.I.D. personnel are: -
(i) Plain Clothes Shs. 50,000 per annum
(ii) Detective (PCs & N.C.Os) Shs. 3,000/= per month.
(iii) Detective Inspectors and
Gazetted Officers Shs. 4,000/= per month.
(b) These allowances may be changed by the Inspector General from time
to time through Force Orders.

Filing System
3. All C.I.D. Units will operate a standard system of filing as prescribed by the
Police Headquarters from time to time. Files will be referenced with the station or unit
abbreviation (vide P.G.O. No. 5) followed by the letters “C.I.D.” and a number.

152
 P.G.O. No. 45
PROFESSIONAL ADVANCEMENT - EXAMINATIONS
Part I – Gazetted Officers’ Examinations
1. Gazetted Officers are required to pass the following examinations unless
specifically exempted therefrom under paragraph 2: -
(a) Gazetted Officers Proficiency Examination:
(i) To be passed in two years by Assistant Superintendents upon
promotion from the Inspectorate and on transfer from other Forces, unless exempted
by the Inspector General.
(b) Lower Standard Swahili Examination:
(i) To be passed at advanced level by all Gazetted Officers on transfer
from other Forces within two years of their first appointment to the Force. Gazetted
Officers transferred when over the age of 35 years may be granted three years in which
to pass this examination.
(ii) To be passed at advanced level by all locally – appointed Gazetted
Officers who have not passed in English and Swahili in the Form IV Examination or in
its equivalent.
Exemptions from the Lower Standard Swahili Examination
2. Exemption from the Lower Standard Swahili Examination can only be granted by
the President’s Office - Public Service Management.
3 These professional examinations form part of the incremental and efficiency bar
requirements. Probationary Assistant Superintendents who fail to pass the
examinations prescribed in paragraph 1 (a) and (b) will not, normally, be confirmed in
their appointments.
4. Gazetted Officers who fail to pass the examinations prescribed in paragraph 1 (a)
and (b) will be liable to stoppage or deferment of increment.
Examination Syllabi and Pass Standards
5. Full particulars of the examinations prescribed in paragraph 1 are as follows: -
(A) The Gazetted Officers Proficiency Examination:
The examination consists of four papers, as hereunder: -
(i) Sources of Criminal Law:
Questions on the Penal Code and other penal statutes – see Appendix “A”.
(ii) Constitution of the United Republic of Tanzania and Zanzibar
Constitution of 1984; Criminal Procedure, Police Duties and Code of Conduct;
Questions on Constitution of the United Republic of Tanzania 1977, Cap. 2 R.E 2002
and Zanzibar Constitution of 1984 the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E 2002,
Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap 322 R.E. 2002, the Police Force Service
Regulations, Police General Orders, C.I.D. Instructions.
(iii) Evidence:
Questions on the Evidence Act, Cap. 6 R.E. 2002.
(iv) Force Organisation, Administration and Fiscal Policies:
Questions on Financial Regulations, Police General Orders and Force Orders.

(v) International standards and treaties impacting on the Police work

153
 P.G.O. No. 45
Questions on the UN Code of Conduct for Law Enforcement Officials and the UN
Basic Principles for the Use of Force and Firearms by Law Enforcement Officials.

NOTE: (a) The qualifying standard for the examination is: -

(i) PASS: 55 per cent of the total marks, with not less than 50 per cent in
any one paper.
(ii) DISTINCTION: 75 per cent of the total marks, with not less
than 70 per cent in any one paper
(b) A candidate who fails in one subject may be permitted, by the Inspector
General, to sit, at a subsequent examination, for the subject in which he failed.
(c) The examination will normally be held in November of each year under
arrangement made by the Commandant, Police College.
(d) No books of reference will be permitted during the examination.
(B) The Lower Standard Swahili Examination
(a) The examination consists of two parts – oral and Written. Police
Officers are required to obtain a pass mark of 70 per cent (advanced level) in each part.
(b) The examination is held twice yearly, in March and September, details
being published in the Official Gazette.
Part II – Inspectorate Examinations
6. Members of the Inspectorate are required to pass the following examinations:-
(a) Police Proficiency Examinations, Standard I:
To be passed by all officers within two years of their appointment to the
inspectorate, provided that this examination has not been previously passed.
(b) Police Proficiency Examination, Standard II
To be passed by all members of the Inspectorate for promotion to Assistant Inspector.
NOTE: The Police Proficiency Examination, Standard I, is additional to any examination held
during the Assistant Inspectors’ Course at the Police College.
(c) Lower Standard Swahili Examination:
(i) All Assistant Inspectors must pass the Lower Standard Swahili
Examination unless they have passed in Kiswahili in the Form IV Examination or its
equivalent and hold the appropriate certificate.
Examination Syllabi and Pass Standards
(A) Police Proficiency Examination, Standard I:
7 (a) This examination will consist of four papers, as hereunder: -
(i) Criminal Offences: Candidates should be prepared to answer
questions on police powers of entry, inspection, search and arrest under the law as
regulated by the Constitutions, Police Force Ordinance and the Criminal Procedure Act
Cap. 20 R.E 2002, and general questions on the following Acts:
Road Traffic Act, Cap. 168 R.E.2002
Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap. 77 R.E 2002
Inquests Act, Cap. 24 R.E. 2002
Itinerant Traders Ordinance
The Drugs and Prevention of Illicit Traffic in Drugs Act, Cap. 95 R.E. 2002
Expulsion of Undesirables Act, Cap. 39 R.E. 2002.

154
 P.G.O. No. 45
Witchcraft Act, Cap.18 R. E. 2002.
Prevention of Corruption Act, Cap 329 R.E. 2002
(ii) Criminal Procedure, Police Duties and Code of Conduct: This
paper will include questions on Constitution of the United Republic of Tanzania 1977
and Zanzibar Constitution of 1984 Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20, Children and
Young Persons Act, Cap. 13, Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 and
Police Force Service Regulations.
(iii) Evidence: This paper will essentially address the Evidence Act,
Cap. 6 R.E. 2002.
(iv) Administration: This paper will include Police General Orders.
(v) International standards and treaties impacting on the Police work
This paper will deal with questions on the UN Code of Conduct for Law Enforcement
Officials and the UN Basic Principles for the Use of Force and Firearms by Law
Enforcement Officials.
(b) No books of reference will be allowed during this examination. The
Inspectors’ Proficiency Examination will be held annually in July. The examination
will be taken locally under arrangements made by the Commandant, Police College .
(c) The qualifying standard for the examination is: -
(i) PASS: Standard I - 50 per cent of the total marks for the
examination, with not less than 40 per cent in any one paper.
(ii) DISTINCTION: Standard 1 – 75 per cent of the total marks
for the examination, with not less than 60 per cent in any one paper.
(d) A candidate who fails in one subject may be permitted, by the Inspector
General, to sit, at a subsequent examination, for the subject in which he failed.
(B) Police Proficiency Examination, Standard II:
(a) As for Standard I, but questions may be set on any Ordinances listed in
Appendix “A”.

(b) The qualifying standard for the examination is: -

(i) PASS: Standard II – 60 per cent of the total marks,
with not less than 50 per cent in any one paper.
(ii) DISTINCTION: Standard II – 80 per cent of the total
marks, with not less than 65 per cent in any one paper.
(c) Lower Standard Swahili Examination:
As for Gazetted Officers.
Part III – Rank & File Examinations
8. Examinations, other than course qualifications, open to the Rank & File are:-
(A) The Police Proficiency Examination, Standard I:
The Police Proficiency Examination, Standard I, is open to all members of the rank &
File but the Regional Commander under whom each candidate is serving must certify
that the candidate has achieved a suitable general standard of education and legal
knowledge to justify his sitting the examination.
(B) Qualifying Examination for Non-Commissioned Officers:

155
 P.G.O. No. 45
(a) This Examination, which is open to all Constables and Corporals,
provides an additional opportunity for junior members of the Rank & File to qualify
for selection to attend promotional courses. Successful result in this examination will
not solely or automatically lead to attendance on a promotion course at the Police
Training School, but will serve as a valuable qualifying factor and will improve an
officer’s chance of promotion.
(b) The examination will be designed for members of the Rank & File who
have attained the equivalent of Form IV in English. It will be held twice yearly, the
dates and details of which will be published in Force Orders.
(c) The examination shall consist of two written papers:
(i) Penal Code, Criminal Procedure Act, Children and Young
Persons Act, Cap. 13 and Elementary Evidence
(ii) Police Duties and Code of Conduct based on Police General
Orders and the Constitution of the United Republic of Tanzania 1977, Cap. 2 and
Zanzibar Constitution of 1984.
(d) The standard of pass mark shall be 50 but the marks obtained in any
case on the two papers shall be recorded in the personnel’s personal files and published
in Force Orders.
Part IV – General Rules for Invigilating Officers
9. Officers invigilating police examinations will comply with the following rules: -
(a) An invigilating officer will be appointed at every station where an
examination is to be held. He will normally be a Gazetted Police Officer, an
Administrative Officer, or an officer of equivalent rank in one of the branches of the
Public Service.
(b) The examination will be held at the various stations on the dates
arranged for them. The papers must be taken in their proper sequence on the days
appointed by the examiner. The time allowed to complete each paper will not be
exceeded.
(c) Whilst under examination, candidates are to be placed at least six feet
apart.
(d) The following will be provided: clock, paper, blotting paper, pencil, pen
and ink and pins.
(e) The sealed packets containing the examination papers are not to be
opened by the invigilating officer until the time fixed for the examination in the subject
concerned and then only in the presence of the candidates.
(f) The examination papers will be distributed and the completed papers
will be collected by the invigilating officer at the appointed hours; any candidate,
however, who may have completed his paper on any subject before the specified hour
may hand it to the invigilating officer.
(g) A period may be allowed at the discretion of the invigilating officer,
prior to commencement of the paper, for candidates to read through the questions and
raise any queries on legibility of the paper or conduct of the examination. No other
questions will be answered.
(h) No books of reference are permitted unless otherwise stated in the
conditions of the examinations, e.g., law examinations. Any candidate detected in the
examination room in possession of any book of reference, or copying from the papers
of another candidate, or permitting his own papers to be copied or in attempting to give
or receive assistance of any description, will be disqualified.

156
 P.G.O. No. 45
(i) Candidates may not communicate with each other and strict silence is to
be observed in the examination room.
(j) Except in the case of the advanced English Literacy Examination,
candidates must write their names legibly at the top of each sheet of paper on which
their answers are recorded. All sheets of paper used in the examination room will be
pinned together when the examination papers are handed into the invigilating officer.
(k) All answers to the questions will be written in ink (except sketches and
plans, which may be in pencil)
(l) No candidate may leave the room until he has handed in his papers to
the invigilating officer. When a candidate has handed in his paper and left the room, he
may not re-enter the room until the period for that paper has expired. No candidate will
be allowed to leave within the first half-hour.
(m) The invigilating officer for the examination will be present during the
entire examination
(n) At the close of the examination in each subject the invigilating officer
will see that all papers are marked with the correct names of the candidates and are
placed in an envelop. The envelope will be secured, sealed and marked as follows: -
(i) Subject
(ii) Station
(iii) Signature of invigilating officer
(o) Each envelope will contain a list of the candidates whose papers are in
it. The list will be signed by the invigilating officer. No other papers will be placed in
the envelope.
(p) The invigilating officer will ensure that the outer envelopes are securely
fastened and sealed and will dispatch them by registered post to the examining officer
as soon as possible after the completion of the examination.
(q) At the completion of the examination, the invigilating officer will
forward to the examining officer a certificate that the prescribed order for the
examination was strictly observed, that he was present during the entire examination
and that none of the candidates received any assistance during the examination.
(r ) Rules (f) to (k) will be read to all candidates prior to the
commencement of the examination
(s) In the case of the Advanced English Literacy Examination the
procedure to be followed is outlined in the instructions, which are issued together with
the examination papers.

APPENDIX A
(To P.G.O. 45)

Local Government (District Authorities) Act, Cap. 287 R.E. 2002

Animals (Pounds) Act, Cap. 154 R.E. 2002
Arms and Ammunition Act, Cap. 223 R.E. 2002
Children and Young Persons Act, Cap. 13, R.E. 2002
Films and Stage Plays Act, Cap. 230 R.E. 2002
Drugs and Prevention of Illicit Traffic in Drugs Act, Cap. 95 R.E. 2002
Customs (Management and Tariff) Act, Cap. 403 R.E. 2002
Mining Act, Cap.123 R.E 2002
Explosives Act, Cap.45 R.E 2002
Expulsion of Undesirables Act, Cap. 39 R.E. 2002

157
 P.G.O. No. 45
Wildlife Conservation Act, Cap 283 R.E. 2002
Fugitive Offenders (Pursuit) Act, Cap. 57, R.E 2002
Extradition Act, Cap 368 R.E. 2002
Mutual Assistance in Criminal Matters Act, Cap.254 R.E. 2002
Gaming Act, 2003
Goldsmiths and Silversmiths Act, Cap. 228 R.E. 2002
Grass Fires (Control) Act, Cap. 135 R.E. 2002
Highways Act, Cap. 167 R.E. 2002
Immigration Act, Cap. 54 R.E. 2002
Inquests Act, Cap. 24 R.E. 2002
Intoxicating Liquors Act, Cap. 77 R.E. 2002
Auctioneers Act, Cap. 227R.E. 2002
Medical Practitioners and Dentists Act, Cap. 152 R.E. 2002
Mental Diseases Act, Cap. 98 R.E. 2002
Motor Vehicles Insurance Act, Cap. 169 R.E. 2002
National Security Act, Cap. 47 R.E. 2002
Pawnbroking (Prohibition) Act, Cap. 175 R.E 2002
Petroleum (Exploration and Production) Act, Cap. 328. R.E. 2002
Petroleum (Conservation) Act, Cap. 392 R.E. 2002
Pharmaceutical and Poisons Act, Cap 219 R.E. 2002
Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002
Probation of Offenders Act, Cap. 247 R.E. 2002
Public Order Act, Cap. 385 R.E. 2002
Public Service Regulations as they affect Police Force
Second Hand Dealers and Scrap Metal Ordinance Cap. 354
Societies Act, Cap. 337 R.E. 2002
Stock Theft (Prevention) Act, Cap.265 R.E. 2002
Magistrates Courts Act, Cap.11 R.E. 2002
Townships Ordinance Cap. 101
Townships (Removal of Undesirable Persons) Ordinance [R.L. Cap. 104]
Labour Relations and Employment Act, 2004
Business Licensing Act, Cap. 208 R.E. 2002
Road Traffic Act, Cap. 168 R.E. 2002
Witchcraft Act, Cap. 18 R.E. 2002 R.E. 2002
Destitute Persons Cap. 389
Ferries Act, ÿÿp. 173 R.Eÿÿ2002
Prevention of Corruption Act, Cap. 329 R.E. 2002
Weight and Measures Act, Cap. 340 R.E. 2002

158
 P.G.O. No. 46
IDENTITY CERTIFICATES
1. An Identity Certificate (P.F. 178 “Gazetted Officers and Inspectors” and P.F.
23 Rank & File”) bearing the holder’s photograph and signature, and also the left
thumb-print if the holder is a member of the Rank & File shall be issued to all
Gazetted Officer and Inspectors and to all Rank & File detectives serving in the C.I.D.
2. Every police officer to whom an Identity Certificate is issued shall carry it at all
times, whether on or off duty, and shall be liable to disciplinary proceedings if he loses
his certificate or is found without one in his possession.
3. Commanding Officers will ensure that all ranks serving under their command
are issued with Identity Certificates in accordance with paragraph 1.
4. The Staff Officer, Police Headquarters, will be responsible for the issue of all
identity certificates in respect of Gazetted Officers and Inspectors, and will maintain a
register of certificates on issue. The Director of Criminal Investigation will issue
identity certificates in respect of detective staff under his command. A register will be
maintained as above.
5. Photographs will be obtained from the Forensic Bureau and affixed to each
certificate in the space provided. Both the card and the photograph will be stamped by
the issuing authority.
6. Application for Identity Certificates in respect of Gazetted Officers and
Inspectors shall be made to the staff officer by Commanding Officers, and to the
Director of Criminal Investigation in respect of C.I.D. personnel.
7. Issues of Identity Certificates and their serial numbers shall be recorded in
holders’ Kit sheets, in accordance with P.G.O. No. 167.
8. Identity Certificates will be examined by Gazetted Officers during formal
inspections. Identity Certificates requiring replacement or new photographs shall be
returned to the issuing authority.
9. Every member of the Force to whom an Identity Certificate is issued shall
produce it on demand whenever he is required to prove his police status.
10. Identity Certificates will be withdrawn and returned to the issuing officer, i.e.,
Staff Officer, Police Headquarters, or the Director of Criminal Investigation, whenever
the holder is:-
(a) discharged; or
(b) transferred from C.I.D. to General Duty.

159
 P.G.O. No. 47
INSPECTIONS-- FORMAL --- BY GAZETTED OFFICERS

1. (a) All commands and units shall regularly be inspected as specified in this order.

(b) All Regional Commands and Divisions will be inspected at least once annually by
the Chief of Inspections or his delegate.

(c) Every Station and Unit, together with all buildings, grounds, vehicles, equipment
and personnel belonging or allocated thereto, shall be inspected formally by
Gazetted Officers in accordance with the programmes set out hereunder: -

Inspecting Officer Unit to be Inspected Frequency of

Inspection

(a) Regional Commanders All Stations, Field Force Units and Quarterly.
other personnel under their command.

(b) O/C. Districts All Stations in their Districts. Monthly.

(c) CO. Field Force. All Field Force Units throughout Half-yearly
Tanzania

(d) O/C. Regional Field Whole Regional Unit. Monthly.

Force Units.

(f) CO. TRC Police Whole Unit Quarterly

(g) Commandant P.T.S. (i) P.T.S. Monthly.

(ii) Dog and Horse Unit.

(h) Director of Music Bands Quarterly

(i) Marine Whole Unit Quarterly

(j) Traffic Whole Unit Quarterly

(k) Medical Unit Whole Unit Quarterly

(l) Airports Whole Unit Quarterly

(m) Air wing Whole Unit Quarterly

(n) Signals Whole Unit Quarterly

(o) TAZARA Police Whole Unit Quarterly

(See also paragraph 19 for action by D.C.I., C.S.O., O/C., D.M. and D.O.M.)

2. Advance notification of all formal inspections, shall be sent to the Station

scheduled for inspections. Surprise demi-inspections should be held at regular
intervals when officers are on safari but will not count as “Formal
Inspections”. Officers carrying out such surprise inspections shall always

160
 P.G.O. No. 47
check the Station arms, ammunition, books and prisoners in cells.

3. Formal inspections shall be conducted with the utmost thoroughness. The

primary objective is to find out what is wrong and put it right. Inspections
shall, therefore, be regarded as educational and inspecting officers shall take
care that every fault and the means of correcting the fault are explained to the
personnel concerned.

4. Buildings furniture and fittings, arms, equipment, Station property and kits
shall be in spotless condition for all formal inspections and inspecting officers
shall ensure that no dirt or litter escapes their attention.

5. Rank & File quarters shall be clean and tidy. Furniture and other private
possessions shall be arranged neatly inside each quarter and should not be
removed elsewhere. Families should sit quietly in their quarters until the
inspecting officer has passed. Unofficial wives and concubines will not be
present in quarters during inspections.

6 All arms, ammunition and station property (other than semi-fixtures) listed in
the Property on Charge Register (P.F. 168) shall be laid out in one convenient
place for examination by the inspecting officer. Loose ammunition shall be
laid out in tens for easy counting. All deficiencies shall be clearly shown.

7. Vehicles shall be drawn up in line for inspection with each driver standing in
front of his vehicle. Bonnets shall be open for easy examination of the engine.
Battery stoppers will be unscrewed and placed on top of the battery. Tool kits
will be laid out in front of each vehicle.

8. (a) Kits shall be laid out for inspection either on the veranda outside each
personnel’s quarter or, if no veranda exists, laid on the ground on
groundsheets directly in front of the doorway of each quarter.
Personnel not present for kit inspection will not lay out their kits.

(b) Commanding Officers only may dispense with kit inspections on their
formal inspection, if they so desire.

9. (a) Each formal inspection shall commence with a parade, conducted in

accordance with P.G.O. No. 85.

(b) All ranks, except those on duty or sick in barracks, shall parade for
inspection. All, however, must be present in their station for interview
by the inspecting officer.

(e) Weekly rest days shall not be granted on formal inspections days.

(d) Personnel absent from parade without lawful excuse shall be

defaulted.

(e) At the end of the parade inspecting officers are required to test
selected Inspectors and N.C.Os in squad drill, riot drill and weapon
training.

10. Police Dog and Horse (if any) will not parade with the personnel to be
inspected, but will be prepared for inspection and parade with their handlers in
a suitable shady spot where they can be examined by the inspecting officer.

161
 P.G.O. No. 47
11. (a) After the parade, all buildings, vehicles, dogs, horses, arms,
ammunition, stores, exhibits, Station property, furniture and kits shall
be examined. Deficiencies and damage shall be noted for early
attention and explanation by the O/C. Station

(b) Personnel found with damaged or deficient kits shall be defaulted and,
in addition to any punishment, shall be required to pay for replacement
if the loss or damage is caused by negligence.

12. All books shall be examined and initialled. The inspecting officer shall ensure
that all official books are properly kept in accordance with Police General
Orders. Particular attention shall be paid to the Report Book and to the
correctness or otherwise of police action recorded therein. Cross-references to
other official books should also be checked.

13. All ranks present at the inspection should be examined briefly on their
knowledge of Police General Orders, Police Duties and simple law and a note
made of any personnel found to be outstandingly good or hopelessly ignorant.
In addition, all ranks will be given an opportunity to put forward any
complaints, requests or other personal matters. All such matters will be
recorded in the report and will be attended to.

14. When the inspecting officer has finished his inspection and before he leaves
the Station or Unit under inspection, he will prepare comprehensive draft
inspection notes for incorporation in his finalised report.

15. Formal inspection reports shall be made out under the following headings and
sub-headings. All shall be covered. Any headings which are inapplicable shall
be shown as such: -

I. Establishment and Strength

Indicate the following

(a) Establishments,

(b) Name of O/C. Station,

(c) Number of personnel absent from the inspection and reason for their
absence,

(d) Any changes recommended in existing strength,

(e) Any comments on distribution and duties of personnel,

II. Parade and Drill

(a) Standard of turnout,

(b) Standard of squad and riot drill,

(c ) Ability of Inspector and N.C.Os tested in handling a squad,

III Buildings and Grounds

162
 P.G.O. No. 47
(a) Condition,

(b) Repairs required.

IV Motor Vehicles

(a) Condition,

(b) Tool deficiencies,

(c ) Log Books and petrol consumption.

V Bicycles

(a) Number on charge.

(b) Condition,

(c) Deficiencies.

VI Radio Equipment

(a) Condition of radio, batteries and chargers.

(b) Efficiency

VII Police Dogs

(a) Number.

(b) Health.

(c) Results achieved.

VIII Police Horses

(a) Number.

(b) Health.

(c) Results achieved.

IX Arms and Ammunition

(a) Condition.

(b) Deficiencies.

X Tear Smoke

(a) Condition.

(b) Replacements required for deteriorating stock.

(c) Deficiencies.

163
 P.G.O. No. 47
XI Furniture, Station Property and Stores

(a) Condition.

(b) Deficiencies.

(c) Repairs or replacements required.

(d) Recommendations re increase or decrease.

XII Fire Appliances

(a) Extinguishers requiring refilling.

(b) Sufficiency or otherwise of Station appliances.

(c) Efficiency of Station fire drill

(d) Kits

(e) Deficiencies.

(f) Replacements.

XIII Station Books

(a) P.F. 16 Exhibit Register.

(b) P.F. 20 Detention Register.

(c) P.F. 40 Sick Report Register.

(d) P.F. 51 Station Diary

(e) P.F. 54 Warrant Register.

(f) P.F. 55 Summons Register

(g) P.F. 57 Leave Register.

(h) P.F.59 Duty Roster.

(i) P.F. 60 Defaulter Register.

(j) P.F. 62 Patrol Book.

(k) P.F. 63 Prisoners’ Property Receipt Book.

(l) P.F. 65 Cash Bail Receipt Book.

(m) P.F. 104 Service Registers.

(n) P.F. 162 Report Book.

(o) P.F. 168 Property on Charge Register.

164
 P.G.O. No. 47
(p) P.F. 179 Missing and Wanted Persons Register.

(q) P.F. 181 Found and Unclaimed Property Receipt Book.

(r) P.F. 186 Identification Parade Register.

(s) P.F. 187 Visiting Book.

(t) P.F. 200 Armoury Register.

(u) P.F. 214 Supervision of Licensed Premises Register.

(v) P.F. 219 Private Firearms (Disposal) Register.

(w) P.F. 221 Investigations Register.

XIV Personnel

XV Station Records

XVI Cash

(a) Cash Books to be checked.

(b) Deficiencies.

XVII Prisoners

(a) Number in cells and their condition

(b) Cell Condition

(c) Prisoners ration, adequacy and condition of

XVIII Supervision of Bad Characters

(a) Efficiency of records

(b) Efficiency of police checks

XIX. Crime and State of the District

General state of crime
(a)
Increase or decrease since last inspection
(b)
Any special problems or recommendations.
(c)
Efficiency of police preventive measures
(d)

XX. Beat System

165
 P.G.O. No. 47
Standard of beat coverage

XXI Patrol System

Frequency and efficiency of patrols

XXII Welfare Facilities

XXIII Sickness and Malaria
XXIV Station Security
Efficiency of ‘Attacks-on-Station Drill’

XXV Knowledge of General Orders/Police Duties and Simple Law

Personnel with outstanding knowledge
(a)
Personnel with little or no knowledge
(b)
XXVI Complaints and Requests
XXVII Personnel with any Outstanding Ability
XXVIII Miscellaneous
XXIX Personal Report on the Inspection by the Inspecting Officer
XXX Report to Regional Commander on Action Still Required

Inspection officers are responsible for the typing and early dispatch of their
16.
reports. The later shall be typed on the left-hand side only of a line drawn
down the centre of each page
Routine action and filling of all Inspection Reports shall be dealt with as
17
hereunder:-

Inspection by Inspection of Action by Details of Action

O/C. Regional Regional Field O/C. of the F.F.Prepares three copies of his
Field Force Unit Force Unit Unit /her report, takes all possible
action thereon and sends two
completed copies to R.P.C.

R.P.C. (a) Issues any further

instructions by memo to the
O/C. of the F.F. Unit
concerned.
(b) Files one copy and sends
one completed copy with his
/her comments to the CO. Field
Force Unit.

CO. F.F.U Issues any further instructions

by memo to the O/C. of the
F.F. Unit concerned with a
copy to the R.P.C.
CO. Field Force Field Force Unit

COs. Railways Whole Units COs Railways Prepares one copy of his/her
Divisions Division, report takes all possible action
thereon.

CO. P.T.S. P.T.S. and Dog P.T.S. Prepares two copies of his /her

166
 P.G.O. No. 47
and Horse Unit report and sends one copy to
the R.P.C. Dar es Salaam, for
necessary action by him/her.

CO Band Band Units at CO Band Prepares one copy of his/her

Dar es salaam, report takes all possible action
Zanzibar thereon.

18. Details of all action taken to deal with recommendations and criticisms in
Inspection Reports shall be entered on the right – hand side of each page
directly opposite each item under reference. Officers at all levels shall
ensure that all possible actions are taken and recorded before they pass the
Inspection report to higher authority. Details of any items, which cannot be
handled locally, shall be given under Heading XXIX of the report. Any
subsequent action will be dealt with by memorandum.

19. Certain officers are also required to carry out regular inspection visits, as
shown hereunder, in order that they may check personally on the efficiency
and well-being of personnel directly or indirectly under their control: -

Inspecting Officer Unit to be Inspected Frequency of

Inspection
Director of Criminal All Regional C.I.D. Units Half yearly
Investigation

Chief Signals Officer All Signals Units Half yearly

COs. Railways Division All Railways Units. Half yearly

CO Dog and Horse Unit All Dog and Horse Units outsideHalf yearly
P.T.S.

Director of Music Dar es salaam Band Quarterly

CO. PTS P.T.S. Band Quarterly

Quartermaster Main Stores and Armoury Quarterly

Chief Armourer Regional and Field Force Half yearly

Other District Armourers Annually

167
 P.G.O. No. 48
LEAVE
Part I - General
Leave Entitlement

1. Leave should be respected as a right and when not granted by the employer,
the employee shall be paid a salary in lieu thereof. The amount payable in
lieu of leave will be calculated in proportional to the number of days due.

2. Leave shall be earned and calculated at an annual rate of twenty eight days
for all categories of officers except, for those officers serving on contract
terms whose leave shall be earned and calculated as stipulated in their
contracts.

Forms of Leave

3. Apart from the forms of leave granted on medical grounds which are dealt
with in Part IV and the special forms of leave described in paragraphs 18, 19,
24, 25, and 26 officers of the categories defined above will normally be
entitled for only one form of leave as set out in paragraph 4 below.

Method of computation and grant of leave

4 (a) There will be an annual leave cycle commencing from the 1st January
of each year in respect of all officers already in the service and from
the date of first appointment in respect of officers appointed after that
date

(b) When an officer proceeds on leave, he may be granted all the leave
due for the year i.e. 28 days, irrespective of the period of service
since the commencement of the annual leave cycle except in the
circumstances described under paragraph (c).

(c ) Subject to the approval of the Permanent Secretary of Ministry of

Public Security & Safety, an officer may be granted leave of absence
to attend to urgent private matters and such leave should be deducted
from his leave entitlement.

(d) All leave periods will be inclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, Public

Holidays excluding travelling time. Saturdays, Sundays and Public
Holidays will be leave earning except in circumstances in which an
officer is on leave pending retirement, resignation or termination of
appointment or is on leave without pay. Sick and convalescent leave
and maternity leave with pay will be leave earning.

(e) The grant of any leave for which an officer is entitled shall be at the
discretion of the Inspector General.

(f) There will be no objection to officers taking their leave piece-meal

provided they take their full leave entitlement during the annual leave
cycle. However, an officer may be permitted to accumulate leave on
grounds of exigencies of service over a two year period, but under no
circumstances will any accumulation beyond the two year period be
allowed. The accumulated leave will either have to be taken or be
paid in lieu thereof. It will be in order for an officer to commence his

168
 P.G.O. No. 48
leave in one cycle and for the leave to expire in following leave
circle.

(g) Where an officer who is entitled for leave will not be returning for
further service owing to resignation, retirement, termination or
appointment otherwise than by dismissal, he will be granted:

(i) proportionate leave as at the date of cessation of duty

calculated at his annual leave-earning rate in respect of the
complete months of his last leave-earning cycle plus.

(ii) Proportionate leave for the odd days, if any of this leave-
earning service in the last leave cycle, based on the proportion
of the number of odd days bears to the leave-earning rate.

(h) Where an officer has already availed himself of his full annual
leave in respect of the last leave cycle of his service, and
where, in terms of sub-paragraphs (i) – (ii) above, he is
entitled only a proportion of that annual leave, he will be
required to refund to the government the salary for the period
involved. In calculating proportionate leave, half a day or
more shall count as one day and less than half a day shall be
disregarded.

(i) Officers employed on teaching duties in the Force’s Training Schools

and Colleges will be required to take their leave when there are no
training programmes going on.

Part II – Transport Assistance on Leave

Grant of Transport Assistance

5. (a) The following arrangements for the grant of transport assistance will
apply:

(i) The grant of transport assistance will be related to two-year

leave cycle which will be reckoned from the 1st January of each
year in respect of officers who were in the service on that date
and from the date of first appointment in respect of officers
appointed after that date;

(ii) The Officer will be granted once during the two-year basis of
the prevailing fare rates by the railway services or by
recognized public motor transport at the appropriate grade as set
out in Appendix J/I of the Government Standing Orders for
him/herself, spouse and up to four children to and from the
point nearest to his/her home served by such service.

(iii) Where an officer who is eligible for the free travel privilege
once in the two-year period travels to his/her home on leave in
his/her car, he/she may be granted in lieu of the cash grant,
motor kilometre allowance at the appropriate rate as set out in
Section L of the Government Standing Orders to and from
points covered by sub-paragraph (ii) above, or to appropriate
rail/road fare, whichever is less.

169
 P.G.O. No. 48
(iv) The cash grant privilege may be granted to an officer either to
travel to his home or to any other named destination, provided
that in the latter case, the cash grant will be limited to what it
would have cost the Government had he/she travelled to his/her
home.

(v) The cash grant privilege may be utilised during any year of the
two-year leave cycle. The conditions to be satisfied for the grant
of this privilege are that the officer must travel to his/her home
or to any other named destination as approved by Inspector
General and that he/she must take all the leave due to him/her at
the time.

(vi) Notwithstanding the foregoing, the privilege will not be

withheld where an officer is prevented from taking his/her full
leave entitlement owing to the exigencies of the service.

(Vii) Incidental expenses are covered in Order J.34 of the

Government Standing Orders.

(b) In addition to the privileges set out in paragraph (a) above an officer
stationed in a Region which in the opinion of the Accounting Officer is
inaccessible by surface or water transport will be eligible for the
specific concession detailed in Order H.6 of the Government Standing
Orders when he/she travels under the arrangement described in
paragraph (a). An officer proceeding on leave to a Region which is
accessible by surface or water transport from other Region or from a
place other than one found inaccessible will not be granted this specific
concession.

Alternative rights of officers stationed/domiciled in regions which are

inaccessible by surface or water transport

6. In addition to the privileges set out in Order H.5, of the Government Standing
Orders an officer stationed or domiciled in a Region which in the opinion of
the Accounting Officer is inaccessible by surface or water transport will be
eligible to the following privileges not more than once in each two year cycle,
for the officer, spouse and up to four dependent children when travelling on
leave to, from or via Dar es Salaam.

(a) Officers stationed in a Region which is inaccessible by surface or

water transport

(i) An officer who is entitled to first class rail travel privileges but
excluding officers on temporary terms, will be eligible, once
in each two year leave cycle, for return air fares to Dar es
Salaam, including transport to and from his station to the
nearest airport in his Region, for the officer, spouse and up to
four dependent children provided that he actually travels by
air. As an alternative to being granted return air fares to Dar es
Salaam, the officer may be granted a cash grant to cover
railway/sea/bus fares to any other destination in Tanzania,
provided that the cost to Government is limited to the cost of
return railway/sea/bus fares to Dar es Salaam.

170
 P.G.O. No. 48
(ii) An officer who is entitled to second or third class rail travel
privileges but excluding officers on temporary or daily paid
terms will be eligible, once in each two year leave cycle, for
return road fares to Dar es Salaam from his station in the
Region for the officer, spouse and up to four dependent
children. In the absence of road service at the time when the
officer utilises this privilege, he/she may be granted return air
fares on the same basis as is applicable to an officer covered
by sub-paragraph (i) above provided he/she actually travels by
air.

(b) An officer who is entitled to the additional privileges set out in

paragraph (a) will be eligible once in each two-year cycle for return
air fares between Dar es Salaam and the nearest airport to his/her
home provided he/she actually travels by air or to the cash grant for
rail/sea/bus fares, on the same basis described in paragraph (a) above.

(c) Conditions

(i) The special travel privileges set out in paragraphs 6 (a) and (b)
above are in addition to the cash grant to which the officers are
eligible in each two year cycle under the provisions of Order
H.5 of the Government Standing Orders. The officers must,
however, avail themselves of the special travel privileges on
the same occasion as they utilise the cash grant in the two year
leave cycle.

(ii) For avoidance of doubt it is clarified that the additional travel

privileges described in paragraph (a) and (b) above will only
be granted if the officers in fact travel to the place which is
inaccessible by surface or ship. Officers may not choose to
claim the cost of these air fares towards an air journey to any
other destination. In cases, therefore, where officers choose to
travel to a destination other than their place of domicile the
cost of such journey should not exceed the expenditure which
would have been incurred had the officers travelled to their
place of domicile by the usual road or water transport services.

Transport assistance on leave pending resignation, completion of contract or

termination of appointment

7. (a) An officer proceeding to his home when travelling in the above

circumstances will be granted one way free travel privilege described
under Order H.5 (a) of the Government Standing Orders provided
that:

(i) he has completed the two year period as at the date of cessation
or duty; and

(ii) he has not already utilised the free travel privilege during the
two year period

(b) Where an officer, who was granted the cash grant, resigns from the

171
 P.G.O. No. 48
service before the completion of the two-year period in respect of
which the privilege was granted, he/her will be liable to refund the
cost incurred by Government in respect of the transport of himself
and his/her family to and from his/her leave destination.

Transport assistance on leave pending retirement

8 An officer who retires from the service will be eligible for the free travel
privilege described under understanding paragraph 5(a).

Extension of Casual Leave

9. In special circumstances and on the approval of the Government, Casual

Leave may be extended on full pay for a short period. Such extension will
entail a corresponding reduction in the number of days’ vacation leave for
which the officer becomes eligible on completion of a tour of service.

Application for Leave

10 (a) All applications for leave will be submitted to the Inspector General
through the proper channels on the appropriate form prescribed
below: -

(i) Gazetted Officers and Inspectors:

Forms as at Appendix H/I to Government Standing Orders.

(ii) Rank & File:

On P.F. 185 – “Karatasi ya Maombi”

(b) All Officers and members of the Rank & File are reminded to submit
their leave applications for approval after making provisional passage
reservations and, in any event, approximately three months before the
planned date of departure.
(c)
An officer’s leave will commence from the date on which he reports
to the Officer Commanding the District in which the leave will be
spent.

Next-of-Kin Card

11. 11. Every officer required to forward an up to date Next of Kin Card, in
duplicate, together with their leave application forms.

Sick Leave
(a)
12. The approved absence of an officer from duty on account of illness is
regarded as sick leave. Absence from duty on account of illness must
be reported by the officer concerned to the Inspector General and
must be supported by a certificate from a Government Medical
Practitioner or from a private practitioner under the provisions of
Order K.5 of the Government Standing Orders. Absence without
approval may entail disciplinary action.
(b)
Convalescent Leave: Any period of absence from duty granted on the

172
 P.G.O. No. 48
recommendation of the Medical Authorities for recuperative
purposed, immediately following any sick leave, is regarded as
convalescent leave.
(c)
No officer will be granted overseas sick or convalescent leave at
government expense.

Convalescent leave may be spent out of duty station

13. Subject to the recommendation of the Medical authorities and to the terms of
Paragraph sixteen and K.25 of the Government Standing Orders, an officer may
be permitted to spend any convalescent leave granted to him anywhere in
Tanzania. In all cases the Medical Officer must state to what place and area it is
advised that the officer should spend such convalescent leave, giving the
reasons therefor.

Convalescent leave may be approved by Permanent Secretary or Inspector

General

14. Convalescent leave to be spent within the United Republic may be granted by
the Permanent Secretary or Inspector General of Police, depending on the rank
of the applicant, on the recommendation of a medical officer.

Limitation of Sick and Convalescent leave

15 (a) A “sick period” is the period the length of which is three years from date
of first appointment, new “sick period” commencing thereafter. In a
case, however, where an officer’s sick leave extends from one “sick
period” to another, his fresh “sick period” will commence on his return
to duty on completion of such sick leave

(b ) The above limitation may not be exceeded without the specific authority
of the Permanent Secretary (Establishment). Full details of all periods of
sick and convalescent leave granted must be maintained in order to
ensure that these limitations are not exceeded without authority.

16. (a) If an officer falls ill so as to require medical attention during his/her
leave and is unable to resume duty on expiry of such leave he will report
to the O/C of the nearest District who will forward the information to
Inspector General of Police and at the same time forward a certificate
from his/her medical attendant stating the nature of illness and, if
possible, its probable duration. For officers above the rank of Assistant
Inspector, the Inspector General will forward the information to the
Permanent Secretary. The Permanent Secretary or Inspector General
depending on the rank of the personnel may then grant additional leave
which will be sick leave to the officer to the extent and on the terms as
may be recommended by the Chief Medical Officer. Unless this Order
is, observed, an officer will not be entitled to any extension of leave on
the grounds of ill health.

(b) Additional sick leave granted under the provisions of paragraph (a)
above will be subject to the overall limitations laid down in Order K.23
of the Government Standing Orders.

Convalescent leave

173
 P.G.O. No. 48
17. An officer who has been granted convalescent leave to be spent away from
hi/her station may be granted free transport for him/herself to and from the
destination recommended by the Medical Officer, and free transport by rail/
road for the spouse and up to four children if they accompany him/her.

Part III– Rank & File Leave Terms

18 (a) Members of the Rank & File are eligible for vacation Leave, but not
casual leave, which is earned at the following rates:

Category of Officer: Length of tour in months: Leave earning rate:

Sergeant-Majors, Sergeants,12-36 21/2 days per month

Corporals and below

(b) Periods of leave will be inclusive of Saturdays, Sundays and Public

Holidays.

(c) All leave earned during the triennial period must be taken during that
period. Any balance not so taken will be forfeited.

19. (a) A travel warrant for a member of the Rank & File, his wife or her
husband and his/her family of up to four children will only be granted
once during each three year period.

(b) The grant of travel assistance shall be as stated in Para 5 of this

Order.

20. Under no circumstance may an O/C. District or Station delay or withhold any
application for leave, an adverse recommendation on the grant of leave, or any
other relevant comment, may be inserted in the appropriate space in the Form
of Application for leave when forwarding to the final approving authority.

Leave of Absence not exceeding 48 Hours

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
21 21.Any Gazetted Police Officer in charge of police, or any other officer
appointed by the Inspector General to be in charge of Police at any place may,
in his discretion, grant to any member of the Force being below the rank of
Sergeant Major serving under his command, leave of absence not exceeding 48
hours on any one occasion. Such leave of absence shall not be taken into
account when reckoning the amount of Vacation Leave earned by such
member of the Force.

Wives and Families Preceding Husbands on Leave

22. Where the wife and/or children of an N.C.O. or Constable precede him on
leave, an entry will be made in red ink in the Vacation Leave section of the
Service Register quoting particulars of travel warrants issued and to whom. No
further transport facilities at Government expense will be allowed for the wife
and family of an N.C.O. or Constable during the current triennial period.

Movement Order

23 A Movement Order (P.F. 58) shall be issued to the Rank & File when

174
 P.G.O. No. 48
proceeding on any form of leave, vide P.G.O. No. 33.

Overstaying Leave

24. Rank & File who, under any circumstances whatsoever, consider that they will
not be able to return to duty on the due date shall report, with their copy of the
Movement Order issued to them, to the nearest Police Station commanded by
an Inspector or above or, if en route and delayed due to any cause, to the
nearest Police station.

25. The O/C. Station will note on the Movement Order the date and time of the
report and any other relevant information.

26. If it is considered that it will not be possible for the officer to return to duty for
some time, he/she may be employed at the Station to which he reported until
such time as it is practicable for him/her to continue his/her return journey

27 In cases of absence without leave where subsequent enquiry discloses

negligence or disobedience of orders on the part of the officer concerned,
disciplinary proceedings will be instituted against the offender. Irrespective of
the punishment subsequently imposed, an order will be made relating to the
forfeiture of pay for those days absent without leave, in accordance with
Regulation 65 of the Police Force Service Regulations, 1995.

28. For the purpose of this Order, one day’s pay shall be forfeited for each day or
part of a day by which the leave is overstayed.

Part IV--Sick Leave – All Ranks

Granting of Sick Leave

29. The following procedure shall apply when granting sick leave: -

(a) Gazetted Officers:

Any gazetted officer who is given a medical certificate recommending
sick leave, or any special concession, shall produce the medical
certificate to his immediate superior officer. If the latter is not
immediately available, he/she shall be contacted, at once, by signal or
telephone and informed of the exact terms of the medical officer’s
recommendations. The commanding officer shall approve the sick
leave and record the grant of such leave, if any, on the record of
service (P.F. 34) in the appropriate section, using red ink.

(b) Inspectorate and Rank & File:

The foregoing procedure shall also apply to the Inspectorate and the
Rank & File, excepting that any sick leave granted will be recorded in
the Service Register at page 28 in red ink.
In addition to the entries made in the Service documents of the
personnel concerned, details of all sick leave and hospitalisation
granted to the Rank & File, will be entered in the daily sick register,
P.F. 40, which shall be maintained by the –

(i) O/C. of every station;

175
 P.G.O. No. 48
(ii) Commandant, Police Training School Moshi, and Commandant
Police College;

(iii) O/C. of each Field Force Unit;

(iv) Chief signals officer (Headquarters only);

(v) Commissioner, Zanzibar

(vii) CO. Forensic Bureau,

(viii) Director of Criminal Investigation (Headquarters only);

(ix) Staff Office “A” (all Police Headquarters personnel).

30. The following symbols shall be used to indicate the type of leave granted to the
officer concerned
S.L. - Sick Leave.
E.D. - Excused Duty
L.D. - Light Duty
H. - Hospitalisation.
C. - Convalescent Leave.

31 31. Details of all sick leave awards during the month to all personnel will
be shown on P.F. 191 – “Monthly Manpower Statement” which is to be
submitted to Police Headquarters.

Part V – Miscellaneous Provisions

Officers involved in court or departmental inquiries

32. Leave shall not be granted to officers who may be required to attend court or a
Departmental Enquiry. Officers who are required to attend as above and to
whom leave has already been granted shall have such leave postponed. Leave
shall not be granted to officers who are the subject of a criminal or
Departmental Enquiry.

Leave Casualties

33. Casualties in respect of Gazetted Officers proceeding on Vacation Leave will

normally be replaced from the Gazetted Officer leave reserve at the discretion
of the Inspector General and in consideration of the exigencies of the service.

34. The leave reserve of Inspectors is integral with the authorised establishment of
the Region concerned and, therefore, replacements are not effected from Police
Headquarters.

35. Similarly, a leave reserve of the Rank & File has been included in the
authorised Regional Establishment and, therefore, replacements of Leave
Casualties will not be made until such time as a leave and transfer movement is
authorised under the terms of P.G.O. No. 60, or where the total number of
personnel on leave from any one district exceeds 25 per cent of the authorised
establishment of that district.

176
 P.G.O. No. 48
36. The replacement of specialist personnel, other than drivers, is a matter for the
head of the branch concerned.

Safe Custody of Arms and Ammunition when proceeding on Leave

37. All members of the Force will hand in all arms and ammunition committed to
their charge to the O/C. Station prior to proceeding on leave. A receipt for such
items will be obtained.

38 Officers owing firearms may deposit them in Police Armouries whilst on

Vacation Leave. In such circumstances, the Force accepts no responsibility
either for the safe custody or care and claming of the weapon so adequate
provision has been made for the continued licensing of the weapon during any
period of leave.

Off Duty Leave

39. No member of the Rank & File, when off duty, may leave his station without
informing the officer in charge of the barracks area of his intentions.

Weekly Rest Day

40 Under normal circumstances, every member of the Force shall be permitted

one period of 24 hours off duty per week at the discretion of the O/C. Station.
Accumulation is forbidden. No special leave privileges shall be granted over
weekends or public holidays.

Maternity Leave

41. Maternity leave is not considered as sick leave and is normally limited to three
months in accordance with the Government Standing Orders.

177
 P.G.O. No. 49
PENSIONABILITY – RANK & FILE
1 On completion of not less than 12 years continuous service the Inspector
General may recommend to the Permanent Secretary any member of the Police
Force below the rank of Assistant Inspector for admission to pensionable status

2 Before re-engagement after the completion of 12 years service, all officers being
below the rank of Assistant Inspector will be required to indicate whether they
wish to be admitted to pensionable status or to be re-engaged on gratuity terms.

3 Commanding Officers and police officers in charge of Districts, Branches, etc.,

who consider such applicants to have -

(a) good character, and

(b) certified fit by a Government Medical Officer, will complete the option
form at Appendix “A” in triplicate, two copies for dispatch to Police
Headquarters and one copy to be retained in the personal file of the office
concerned.

4. The Inspector General, being satisfied that the officer is in all respects suitable
for admission to the pensionable status will endorse the option form
accordingly.

5. Two copies of the option form will be returned to the Regional Commander and,
or O/C. District, Branch, etc. These officers will record, in red ink, under the
heading “Re-engagements” on page 8 of the Service Register (P.F. 104) and in
page 1 of P.F.104A (Pink Card), that such officer has been admitted to the
pensionable establishment.

6 On admission to the pensionable establishment, officers are confirmed in their

appointments and shall cease to be eligible for the award of gratuity under the
provisions of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002.

7 Different conditions of service apply to officers admitted to the pensionable

establishment. These are: -

(a) The option for admission to pensionable status, when exercised is

irrevocable.

(b) A member of the Police Force holding the rank of Sergeant Major or
(i) Staff Sergeant must serve until he attains the age of 50 years when he
may elect to retire. He may not continue to serve beyond the age of 55
years.

(ii) A member of the Police Force holding the rank of sergeant or corporal
must serve until he attains the age of 45 years when he may elect to
retire. He may not continue to serve beyond the age of 50 years.

(iii) A member of the Police Force holding the rank of constable must serve
until he reaches the age of 40 years when he may elect to retire. He may
not continue to serve beyond the age of 45 years.

178
 P.G.O. No. 49
(c) Officers who are dismissed on disciplinary grounds or discharged in the
public interest lose all claims to any pension earned at the time. However,
in any case where it is considered to be in the public interest to discharge
a pensionable officer, the government may, if it thinks fit, grant such
pension, gratuity or other allowance as it thinks just and proper.

(d) The amount of monthly pension due may be calculated from the
following formula: -
Monthly salary* x12 x Months of Service+ x 151/2
540 x 12 x 2
* Monthly salary will be taken as the average over the last
three years of service, whether or not a promotion has
occurred during this period.
+ “Months of service” means continuous service from the
date on which he attains his 18th birthday.

(e) Pensionable officers may commute not more than one half of their total
earned pensions and will thereby receive a lump sum equal to 151/2 times
that portions of the pension so commuted.

(f) Where an officer holding a pensionable office in which he has been

confirmed dies while in the service of the Government of Tanzania, it
shall be lawful for the Government to grant to his/her estate a gratuity of
an amount to be decided by the Government.

(g) Where an officer dies as a result of injuries received :-

(i) in the actual discharge of his duty; and

(ii) without his own default, and

(iii) on account of circumstances specifically attributed to the nature of

his duty,
and being in the service of the government of Tanzania, the
Government may grant, in addition to the grant of any pension
made to his estate under the provisions in sub-paragraph (g)
above, a pension to any surviving widow while she remains
unmarried and of good character, including a pension for any
children of such marriage until they attain the age of 21 years.

(h) In circumstances where the deceased officer leaves children but does not
leave a widow, a pension may be granted in respect of each child under
the age of 21 years.

(i) Furthermore, in circumstances where a pension is granted to a widow

with children and the widow subsequently dies, the pension payable to
the children of the marriage will continue until such time as they attain
the age of 21 years.

179
 P.G.O. No. 49
(j) In circumstances where the deceased officer does not leave a widow or
children but a mother wholly or mainly dependent upon him for support,
a pension may be payable to her while she remains of good character and
without adequate means of support.

180
 P.G.O. No. 50
PLAIN CLOTHES DUTY
1. All ranks who are posted to the C.I.D are permitted to wear plain clothes on
duty.

2. Members of the General Duties Branch may only be used on temporary plain
clothes duty to reinforce the C.I.D. for a specific purpose and for a very limited
period, provided that permission has been obtained in each case as hereunder: -

(a) Up to 14 consecutive days’ temporary plain clothes duty may be

authorised by O/C. District.

(b) Over 14 days but not exceeding 2 months’ temporary plain clothes duty
may be authorised only by Regional Commanders.

(c ) Over 2 months’ temporary plain clothes duty may only be authorised in

exceptional circumstances by the Director of Criminal Investigation on
the recommendation of a Regional Commander.

3. (a) The C.I.D. personnel are entitled to the allowances at the rates
approved by the government.

(b) Members of the General Duties Branch who complete more than one
month’s temporary plain clothes duty (in accordance with paragraph 2
(c) are similarly entitled to draw both allowances.

4. C.I.D. drivers will not receive detective allowance and may only receive plain
clothes allowance if they are required to drive in plain clothes

5. The following rules govern payment of plain clothes and detective allowances:
-

(a) The approval of the Director of Criminal Investigation is required for

the allocation of allowances to detectives serving under their command.

(b) Allowances will not be paid until published in Force Orders.

(c) Allowances will be paid during casual leave but not during vacation
leave.

(d) Allowances will be paid during sickness up to the end of the month in
which the officer concerned ceased duty.

(e) Both allowances will cease on termination of service with the C.I.D.

6. The Director of Criminal Investigation is responsible for the allocation of all

plain clothes and detective allowances to C.I.D. personnel. He is also
responsible for the publication of all such allocations in Force Orders.

181
 P.G.O. No. 51
POLICE GAZETTE

General

1 The Tanzania Police Gazette is the official publication of the Force for the
dissemination of important criminal and police information. All copies of
the Gazette will be carefully filed and maintained as a permanent record at
all Police Stations.

2 The Gazette is published weekly in English and Kiswahili. Special issues

will be made when necessary.

Compilation

3 The Gazette will be compiled under the following heading and sub-
headings: -
PERSONS:
Apprehension sought
Information sought.
Missing.
PROPERTY:
All identifiable stolen property.
Stolen bicycles.
Lost and found valuable property.

4. Wanted persons are published as a supplement on printed name cards and

consist of persons who are wanted in connection with the following
offences:-
Murder.
Breakings.
Robberies.
Sexual.
Major frauds.
Thefts involving large sums of money.
Breach of supervision or community service orders.
Escapes from lawful custody (exception extra-mural labour).
Treason
Terrorism
Trafficking in narcotics
Trafficking in human Beings
Offences under the Economic and Organised Crime Control Act

Any other serious or important cases which in the opinion of the CO

182
 P.G.O. No. 51
Forensic Bureau may consider necessary.

Submission of Entries for Publication

5. O/C. stations, in conformity with this order, are responsible for the early and
accurate submission to the Forensic Bureau of all information which
warrants publication.

6. Each item for publication will be submitted on the correct pro-forma as set
out in this order and will be prefixed according to the heading under which
the entry is to appear in the Gazette.

7. The utmost care must be taken when submitting items in respect of persons
that the correct sub-heading is selected, otherwise an unlawful arrest may
result.

8. The Gazette is published on Tuesdays. Items for inclusion must therefore

reach the Forensic Bureau by the Friday of the week proceeding the day of
publication.

Method of Submission
PERSONS

9. Particulars of persons wanted, missing; suspected (information sought) will

be submitted on description of person form (P.F. 179), as set out in P.G.O.
No. 238 – “Investigation – Wanted Persons”.

STOLEN PROPERTY

10. Particulars of stolen property will be submitted on Description of Property

Form (P.F. 61). Care must be taken to ensure that the correct part of the
form is used, depending on the type of property stolen.

Publication of “Gazette”

11. The CO Forensic Bureau shall be responsible for:

(a) editing and selecting material for publication;

(b) publishing the Gazette on Tuesday of each week;

(c) maintaining a central index of all wanted, suspected and missing

persons;

(d) maintaining a central index of all identifiable property reported

stolen;

(e) publishing monthly, as a supplement “A” to the gazette, prisoners

who are due for release from prisons during the following month.
Only those prisoners with two or more convictions for serious
offences will be selected;

(f) publishing quarterly a consolidated photographic list of wanted

persons who have appeared in the Gazette, but still remain at large.

183
 P.G.O. No. 51
Cancellations

12. The cancellation of items published in Police Gazettes will be the

responsibility of the O/C. Station originating the entry. O/C. Stations will
submit notices of cancellation or amendments to the CO Forensic Unit on
P.F. 68

Suitability of Material for Publication

13. O/C. Stations, when considering the suitability of items for publication in
the Police Gazette will give the material the following tests: -

(a) Could the person be identified from the description?

(b) Could the property be identified from the description?

(c) Could other stations assist?

(d) Would the information be of use to other Stations?

(e) Is “All Stations” circulation through the Police Gazette justified or

would a limited circulation suffice?

184
 P.G.O. No. 52
PROBATION-CONFIRMATION-PROMOTION ON TRIAL
Part I-Probation
Period of Probation

1. All appointments to Inspectorate rank (pensionable officers) are normally

subject to two years’ probation.

2. During the period of probation an officer is required to gain professional

knowledge and to prove his suitability by the exhibition of high standards of
personal conduct and integrity. Without these qualities he cannot be
considered fit to undertake the duties and responsibility expected of him.

Extension of Probationary Period and Termination of Service During Probation

3. Any officer on probation whose behaviour and efficiency is considered to be

unsatisfactory at the end of his normal probationary period and/or who has
failed to pass the prescribed examinations, will be liable to undergo a further
period on probation. Commanding Officers who are dissatisfied with any
probationary officer serving under their command that their services be
terminated forthwith.

4 Every opportunity shall be given to officers on probation to gain the

necessary professional qualifications and to reach the high standards of
conduct and integrity expected of them. Probationary officers who fail to
attain the requisite standard or who are clearly unsuited to a police career
shall be the subject of a report to the Inspector General, with a
recommendation that their service be terminated forthwith.

5 Whenever a Commanding Officer makes such a recommendation, he shall

inform the officer concerned in writing.
Note: In accordance with Regulation 26 (2) of the Police Force Service
Regulations, no recommendation for the extension of a probationary period or for the
termination of an appointment will be sent to the Police and Prisons Service
Commission until the officer concerned has had an opportunity to submit his written
representation thereon.

Duties of Senior Officers towards Officers on Probation

6 (a) Senior Officers, under whom an officer on probation is required to

serve, have a duty to guide, encourage and closely supervise his work.
They shall not only instruct him on the duties he is called upon to
perform, but shall also advise him of any failings or faults in his work
or behaviour. They shall help and encourage him to rectify his
deficiencies and to earn the necessary recommendation for
confirmation in his appointment. In addition they shall ensure that the
studies for the examinations he is required to take and that he sits for
them within the prescribed time limits.

(b) Constructive criticism and advice shall be given as required and shall
not be withheld. Commanding Officers shall send a written warning (with a
copy to the Inspector General) to any probationary officer who is guilty of
serious or continued misconduct or inefficiency and shall obtain a written
acknowledgement of the warning. Senior officers shall keep a record of all
warnings and of favourable comments given to probationary officers, in order

185
 P.G.O. No. 52
that their reports may be accurate and just.

Confidential Reports

7. (a) Commanding Officers shall report to the Inspector General, in

triplicate, using Form C.R. 1, on the behaviour and efficiency of
every officer on probation serving under them. Such reports will be
required after six, twelve, eighteen and twenty four months intervals.

(b) Confidential reports shall cover all aspects of behaviour and

efficiency.

(c) Commanding Officers will recommend in their final report (or earlier
if they so desire) whether or not they consider that the officer on
whom they are reporting should be confirmed, discharged or allowed
an extension of his probationary period, bearing in mind the
requirements of qualifying examinations prescribed in P.G.O. No. 44.

Confirmation in Rank

8. Officers on probation will not be confirmed in their rank until they have
earned satisfactory reports and have passed the prescribed examinations.

Part II – Promotion on Trial

Trial period

9. All confirmed officers who are promoted to, or above the rank of Assistant
Inspector will be required to serve a six-month trial period in the rank to
which they are promoted before their promotion can be finally confirmed.

Duties of Senior Officers towards Officers promoted on Trial

10. The provisions of paragraph 6 apply equally to officers promoted on trial and
senior officers must ensure that they are given every chance to make a
success of their promotion.

Confirmation of Appointment

11. (a) Commanding Officers will report on every officer who has been
promoted on trial at the end of the six month trial period, or earlier if
an officer fails to justify his promotion, in accordance with the
procedure laid down in paragraph 7, and will recommend whether or
not confirmation of appointment should be approved.

(b) Officers who fail to obtain satisfactory reports are liable to be

reverted by the Police Service Commission to the rank they held
immediately prior to their promotion on trial.

(c) Whenever a Commanding Officer submits an adverse report on an

officer promoted on trial he shall inform the officer concerned in
writing

Note: In accordance with Regulation 26A of the Police Force Service Regulations, no
recommendation for the reversion in rank of an officer promoted on trial will be sent to the

186
 P.G.O. No. 52
Police Service Commission until the officer concerned has had an opportunity to submit his
written representations thereon.

187
 P.G.O. No. 53
PROMOTIONS
General

1. (a) All police promotions will be by selection based on seniority, merit

and possession of certain prescribed qualifications. As a general rule,
officers will not be promoted unless they have passed the
examinations prescribed in P.G.O. No. 45 or have been granted
exemption therefrom.

(b) All confirmed officers serving on local terms who are promoted to or
above the rank of Assistant Inspector will be required to serve a six
months trial period in the rank to which they are promoted before
their promotion can be finally confirmed. (See also paragraphs 9-11
of P.G.O. No. 52).

2. Commanding Officers and O/C. District, Stations and Units are particularly
responsible that promotion claims of all ranks under their command are
considered at regular intervals and that no one is forgotten.

3. All recommendations for promotion should be based on the principles set out
at Appendix “A”.

Promotions to Gazetted Rank

4. Promotion to gazetted rank will normally be limited to members of the

Inspectorate who are confirmed officers and have passed Gazetted Officers
Course.

Promotions within the Inspectorate

5 Promotions within the Inspectorate will normally be limited for those with
three years service qualifications as Assistant Inspectors before promotions to
Inspector.

Promotions to the Inspectorate

6. Promotions from the Rank & File to the Inspectorate will normally be limited
to personnel with the following qualifications: -

(a) At least two years’ service

(b) Form IV educational qualifications.

(c) Successfully passed the Assistant Inspectors’ Course.

Rank & File Promotions

7. Promotions within the Rank & File will normally be limited to members with
the following qualifications:-

(a) Three years’ service as a Constable before promotion to Corporal.

(b) Three years’ service as corporal before promotion to Sergeant.

188
 P.G.O. No. 53
(c) Three years as sergeant before promotion to staff sergeant

(d) Successfully passed the appropriate Promotion Course.

Promotion Boards

8. (a) All Inspectorate and Rank & File promotions shall be considered by
a Promotion Board, which shall submit its recommendations to the
Inspector General.

(b) All other promotions shall be done in accordance with the Police
Force and Prisons Service Commission Act and its regulations.

9. The Inspector General will convene Promotion Boards and nominate the
officers to serve upon them.

10 The Board may require candidates for promotion to appear before it and may
take whatever action it considers necessary to facilitate its deliberations.

Recommendations for Promotion

11 Before a Promotion Board assembles, a Promotion Report (P.F. 175) will be

prepared in respect of each candidate by his O/C. District or Unit and his
Commanding Officer and will be submitted under confidential cover via
Heads of Branches to the Inspector General.

12 When a Commanding Officer proposes to recommend for promotion a

personnel who has saved under his command for less than three months, he
shall make out a Promotion Report in accordance with paragraph 11 and pass
it to the Commanding Officer under whom the personnel previously served
The latter shall also prepare a report and submit both reports to the Inspector
General.

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 53)

PROMOTION‫ ־‬GENERAL PRINCIPLES

189
 P.G.O. No. 53
1. All selections for promotion shall be based on seniority, merit and (except in special
cases) the possession of the requisite educational and professional qualifications. As
a general rule, preference should be given to officers who have displayed qualities of
leadership, superior intelligence and particular zeal in the discharge of their official
duties.

2. Officers responsible for promotion recommendations must consider the promotion

claims of every personnel under their command in order of seniority, but their final
decision must be based on merit, efficiency and undoubted suitability for higher rank,
irrespective of the candidate’s position on the seniority list. Seniority by itself cannot
be accepted as an adequate qualification for promotion.

3. Accelerated promotion is open to qualified officers who have shown proof of

outstanding ability and industry, or have demonstrated particular suitability for any
particular post carrying higher rank. Special consideration will be given to such
personnel and they should invariably be recommended for promotion, irrespective of
their seniority.

4. The special qualifications to be considered in making selection from seniority lists of

qualified personnel are as follows:

(a) Good conduct,

(b) Education;

(c ) Professional knowledge;

(d) Aptitude for command,

(e) Good temper;

(f) Good manner and address,

(g) Sobriety,

(h) Courtesy towards the general public;

(i) Good health and zeal,

(j) Energy and efficiency in the discharge of police duties.

5. The efficiency of the Force depends very largely on the professionalism, leadership,
conduct, ability and efficiency of its gazetted Officers and Inspectors. The greatest
care must, therefore, be exercised when considering promotion recommendations to
these ranks. Only those with suitable qualifications will be considered for
advancement.

6. Officers enlisted for specialist duties of a technical nature will not, normally, be
considered for promotion outside their own particular branch or sphere of
employment. All other officers are liable to transfer on promotion to any branch of
the Force and no promotions will be made in relation to the establishment of any
particular formation.

190
 P.G.O. No. 54
RECRUITS – PROCEDURE
Part I – Recruits Selection and Attestation of

1. A candidate for appointment as a Recruit Constable must be: -

(a) Between 18 and 25 years of age;

(b) Not less than 5 ft. 8 in. in height (bare feet) and 33 in. round the chest
(deflated), but exceptionally well qualified candidates and English
literate who have passed Form IV (Division 3) or above may be
accepted if no less than 5 ft. 6 in. Female candidates who have the
requisite qualifications but are 5 ft. 4 in. tall may also be considered
for recruitment.

(c ) Passed by a Government Medical Officer as physically fit for service

in the Force, eyesight without glasses should be 6/6 R-6/6 L;

(d) Of good character;

(e) Without a criminal record;

(f) Literate in Kiswahili and English and has attained a Form IV

(Division 3) or its equivalent

(g) Tanzanian citizen

2. (a) Particulars of recruits who claim previous service in the Force must be
referred to Police Headquarters before enlistment. Candidates
discharged from the army, prisons services, national service, any other
police force, auxiliary police or private security firms will not be
accepted with a character assessment below “Very Good”.

(b) Only in exceptional circumstances will re-enlistment of ex-members

of the Force be approved by the Inspector General. Interviewing
officer will therefore define the circumstances when referring such
cases to Headquarters. Applicants for re-enlistment will not be sent to
the Police Training school until authorised by Headquarters.

3. The Inspector General may, in his discretion, in respect of any particular

candidate, dispense with any qualifications.

(a) A Gazetted Officer will personally interview each candidate and will
only accept those with the necessary qualifications. He will also
explain the conditions of service. Those who appear suitable for
recruitment will be sent for a medical examination. A Government
Medical Officer should complete M.F. 35 and return it to the
recruiting officer.

(b) Before potential recruits are sent to the Police Training School they
will be required to sign a certificate that they are not members of any
political party or association or give any active support, openly or in
private, to any such Organisation or to its funds, meetings, or other
activities. Potential recruits who reveal past associations with any
political party may be permitted to join the Force provided that an
undertaking to cease membership of such Organization is given prior

191
 P.G.O. No. 54
to attestation.

(c) The Inspector General may prescribe additional requirement to be

complied with before a candidate is accepted and sent to the Police
Training School.

5. Candidates who pass the preliminary medical examination referred to in

paragraph 4 (a) above, will be dealt with as follows:

(a) Three sets of fingerprints will be taken on P.F. 31A and submitted to
the Forensic Bureau for search. Forms will be endorsed “Applicant for
Engagement: Tanzania, four sets of fingerprints will be forwarded.

(b) Parts I, II and III of the application for Appointment Form, P.F. 161,
will be completed and sent to the Commandant, Police Training
School, by the fastest means.

(c) The O/C. of the forwarding station will inform the Commandant,
Police Training School, by signal of the number of recruits being
dispatched and their expected arrival date at Moshi.

6. Wives and families will not be permitted to accompany recruits to the

Training School, nor will they be permitted to join them there.

7. (a) Three copies of the fingerprint forms will be returned after search to
the Commandant, Police Training School. Where it is found that the
recruit has a previous conviction, the Commandant., will be notified
by signal giving brief particulars of the date, place and offence. Where
it is disclosed that the candidate has served previously in the Force,
the details will be referred to the Inspector General.

(b) The Commandant, Police Training school, will return one copy of the
fingerprints to the Forensic Bureau duly endorsed with the recruit’s
force number as soon as this has been allocated. The third copy will
be sent to Police Headquarters, together with P.F. 104A at the
completion of the recruit’s course.

8. (a) Recruits will be interviewed upon arrival at the Training school,

where all particulars will be checked. Section 27 of P.F. 161, Part IV,
will be completed, showing the place of residence of the recruit during
the last three years. Form P.F. 161 will be dispatched to the CO.
Forensic Bureau,, who will return it, without delay, having completed
section 27.

(b) Subject to final medical examination and criminal and security

clearance the recruit will be attested by a Gazetted Officer, when the
conditions of service will again be explained to him. He will then be
allotted a force number.

( c) The date of enlistment will be the date upon which the recruit is
attested at the Police Training school and will be endorsed on the
relevant service register (P.F. 104) by the Commandant., Police
Training School.

(d) A recruit becomes eligible to receive the pay and allowances of a

192
 P.G.O. No. 54
recruit constable with effect from the date of attestation.

(e ) The attestation of recruits will be promulgated in Part II of Force

Orders without delay.

(f ) No canteen credit will be granted to recruits until they have finally

been attested by the Commandant, Police Training School.

Part II – Recruits-Documentation, Discharge or Final Acceptance

Documentation

9. (a) Following attestation, the Commandant, Police Training school, will

take the following action in respect of the recruit: -

(i) forward P.F. 161, duly completed, to Police Headquarters;

(ii) prepare one service register (P.F. 104);

(iii) prepare three record of service cards (P.F. 104A); and

(iv) open a personal file containing :-

Record of Service Card (P.F. 104A).
Fingerprint Form (P.F. 31A).
Medical History Sheet (P.F. 31C).
Kit Sheet (P.F. 31D).
All correspondence affecting the individual.

(b) Upon the completion of three months’ training the Commandant

Police Training school, will obtain five photographic prints of each
recruit (head and shoulders and without head-dress), on which the
personnel’s Force number will be clearly shown. These will be
disposed of as follows :-

(i) on print affixed to the service register;

(ii) one print affixed to the Recruit’s Pay Book;

(iii) one print forwarded to Police Headquarters for affixing to P.F.

161; and

(iv) two prints, together with the negative, sent to the Forensic
Bureau.

Discharges Prior to Attestation

10. Where a recruit is rejected by the Commandant, Police Training School, prior
to attestation, the following action will be taken: -

(a) He will be informed of the reasons for his non-acceptance and will be
returned to the place of enlistment at Government expense, unless it is
found that he has a previous conviction after declaring to the contrary,
in which case with the authority of the Inspector General, he may be

193
 P.G.O. No. 54
prosecuted and, if convicted, he will not be attested.

(b) He will be paid subsistence allowance at the prevailing rate per day
for the period of stay at the police training school and for his return
journey.

(c) The cost of the rations provided by the Police Training School will be
deducted from the allowance payable above.

(d) A record of the reason for rejection, the date of departure and amount
of subsistence allowance paid will be endorsed on the reverse of the
Application for Appointment Form, P.F. 161, which will then be
forwarded to Headquarters. Form P.F. 31A will also be returned to the
Forensic Bureau for retention. The reason for rejection will also be
endorsed on P.F. 31A so that in the event of a personnel re-applying
for enlistment the details will be available.

Resignation

11. Where a recruit wishes to resign for some reason during his course of
training, he will be permitted to do so. Where a recruit resigns from the Force
during his initial training, the cause of resignation will be recorded on the
Fingerprint Form (P.F. 31A), together with a recommendation whether he
may or may not be re-enlisted. This form, duly endorsed, will be forwarded
to the Forensic Bureau.

Discharge During Training

12. Where a recruit is discharged from the Force during his initial training, the
cause of discharge will be recorded on the Fingerprint Form (P.F. 31A),
together with a recommendation whether he may or may not be re-enlisted.
This form, duly endorsed, will be forwarded to the Forensic Bureau.

Final Disposal

13. (a) Before completion of the recruit’s basic training course, the
Commandant will notify Police Headquarters of the particulars of
recruits available for postings. Posting instructions will then be issued
by Police Headquarters

(b) On receipt of posting instructions, the Commandant., will arrange for

the following procedure: -

Service Registers to be completed in all respects, including

(i) details of the up grading and posting of the recruit.

(ii) Record of Service Cards to be completed, as in sub-paragraph

(i); one card will be forwarded to Police Headquarters,
together with one copy of P.F. 31A.

Service Register and record of service card to be forwarded to

(iii) the Regional Headquarters to which the recruit is posted. ‘The
Regional Commander will retain the Record of Service Card
and forward the service register to the station to which the
recruit is to be posted.

194
 P.G.O. No. 54
A completed Kit Sheet (P.F. 31D) and a full set of uniform
(iv) and equipment, all in good condition and in accordance with
the scale laid down in P.G.O. No. 172, to be issued to each
recruit before final posting from the Police Training school.

Pay recruits such salary as may be due to them. Canteen and

(v) messing accounts will be settled prior to departure

Prepare course reports in duplicate for each recruit. The

(vii) contents of each report will be made known to the individual
concerned and both copies will be forwarded to the Inspector
General for perusal and any instructions he may wish to issue.
After perusal by the Inspector General, the reports will be
disposed of as follows :-
Original:- Retained in the personnel’s personal file at
Police Headquarters.
Duplicate:- Forwarded to the recruit’s Commanding
Officer for perusal and onward transmission to the O/C. of the
Station or Unit to which he posted. It will then be filed in the
recruit’s personal file.
NOTE: The Commandant will endorse on the report the particulars
of the Region to which the personnel has been posted. This should
be included under “Commandant’s Remarks” for the information of
Police Headquarters.

Arrange for the dispatch of all Constables to the Headquarters

(viii) of the Region to which they are posted, with instructions to
report to the Regional Commander. A Movement Order (P.F.
35) will be issued. The Regional Commander will be
informed by the Commandant., if necessary by signal, of the
date of dispatch and expected dates of arrival of all
Constables concerned.

Pay

14. On up-grading to the rank of Constable, the recruit will normally enter the
lowest point in the Constables, salary scale, but the Inspector General may
appoint a recruit to a higher point in the scale in respect of approved previous
service and/or specialist qualifications.

195
 P.G.O. No. 55
RE-ENGAGEMENT AND DISCHARGES
Re-engagement
1. Re-engagements of all non-pensionable police officers within a Command will
be effected by or on the instructions of the Commanding Officer, who will review each
individual case before authorising re-engagement.
2. Re-engagements will be effected under Regulation B.12.5 of the Police Force
Service Regulations of those wishing to re-engage each whose retention in the Force is
desirable.
3. All non-pensionable officers shall be medically examined by a Government
Medical Officer one month prior to re-engagement and passed fit for all duties.
4. Non-pensionable officers re-engaging for further service will sign the Re-
engagement Agreement (P.F. 190). This form will be prepared in triplicate and
completed by the officer re-engaging, the Medical Officer and the Commanding
Officer approving re-engagement. One copy will be sent to Police Headquarters for
publication of re-engagement in Force Orders and filing. The remaining copies will be
placed on the officer’s personal file at Regional/Branch and District/Unit
Headquarters.
5. It is the personal responsibility of Commanding Officers to carefully assess the
record of conduct and efficiency of non-pensionable officers prior to authorisation of
re-engagement and to ensure that re-engagement is approved on a selective basis.
6. O/C. Stations and Units will apply to their Commanding Officers for permission
to re-engage a member of the Rank & File one month before due date and will, in each
instance, include with their recommendation the agreement form, including the
completed medical certificate.
7. Commanding Officers will take steps to ensure that non-pensionable Rank &
File are reminded at regular intervals that re-engagement is dependent upon efficiency
and good conduct.
8. Non-pensionable officers who are considered unsuitable for re-engagement will
be discharged as time expired on completion of their current period of engagement.
9 The following procedure will be followed for Non-pensionable officers of the
Rank & File who are considered unsuitable for re-engagement:
(a) Non-pensionable officers of the Rank & File whom it is not proposed to
re-engage will be so advised, in writing, three months prior to the date his current
engagement expires; and
(b) If such officer wishes to appeal against the decision not to re-engage his
written appeal, together with the Regional Commander’s report and any other
statement, etc., will be referred to the Inspector General for his ruling which will be
final.
10 All non-pensionable members of the Rank & File will be re-engaged for
consecutive periods of three years.
11. The powers of the Inspector General under section 36 (1) of the Police Force
Service Regulations are delegated to Commanding Officers.
Discharge
12. Discharge of non-pensionable officers for any reason other than expiry of the
period of engagement requires the approval of the Inspector General and no such
discharge shall be carried out until such approval has been received.

196
 P.G.O. No. 55
13. In all cases where the provisions of Regulation 38 of the Police Force Service
Regulations apply, Commanding Officer will submit their recommendations to the
Inspector General for approval
14. Particulars of discharges will be included in casualty returns and will be
published in Force Orders.
Discharge Procedure at Station
15. (a) Whenever a Commanding Officer proposes to discharge a member of
the Rank & File from the Force under the terms of Regulation 38 (2) (b) of the Police
Force Service Regulations, 1995, he will refer the matter direct to the Medical Officer
of the District where the officer is stationed and obtain a medial report showing
whether or not he is fit for further service. The same procedure will apply with regard
to the medical examination of personnel who may qualify for compensation under the
Workmen’s Compensation Ordinance unless there are strong reasons for requiring a
Board to be convened.
(b) The Medical Officer’s report will be submitted to the Inspector General
for his decision.
(c) A “Government Medical Officer” means a Registered Medical
Practitioner, i.e. one who has appeared in the official Gazette as qualified to practise in
Tanzania.
16. (a) When a non pensionable member of the Force is to be discharged for
any reason the O/C Station will take the following actions:-
Uniform and Equipment – Withdraw all Government property, equipment and stores
on issue to the member. Items on Station or Unit charge on temporary issue to member
will be taken back on Station or Unit charge. The balance (i.e., uniform and equipment
on personal issue) will be returned to the nearest Regional or authorized Store where
they will then be taken on charge.
(b) Documents – Complete all relevant documents required to be entered
up on discharge and for promulgation. Completed documents, personal file (and, in the
case of C.I.D. and plain clothes staff, warrant card) will then be forwarded to
Headquarters for record purposes.
Note – Particular attention will be paid to the following: -
(i) Completion of P.F. 31A (Fingerprint Form).
(ii) Service Register.
(iii) Discharge of Certificate.
(iv) Travel Warrant.
Discharge Certificate
17. (a) A Discharge Certificate (P.F. 33) will be issued to officer bellow the
rank of Assistant Inspector on discharge. Discharge Certificates not to be issued to
recruits discharged during their probationary training at the Police Training School.
(b) The Discharge Certificate (P.F. 33) will be prepared by the officer
effecting the discharge. The completed certificate will be handed to the personnel,
personally, prior to his departure on leave.
(c) Where a personnel is eligible to receive a gratuity, the officer effecting
the discharge will ensure that the future address of the officer, i.e., the address to which
all communications are to be forwarded, is correctly recorded (P.O. Box numbers
should not be accepted). This matter is of the utmost importance and great care should
be taken in ensuring that his future address is correctly ascertained and noted. In rural

197
 P.G.O. No. 55
areas the address will include village, primary court, ward leader, etc. The Service
Register and other personal documents should then be forwarded to Police
Headquarters as soon as possible.
18. Discharge Certificates will be issued free of alteration or erasure and all
recipients will be warned that any alteration or erasure on a certificate will render it
void. They will further be warned that the uttering of an altered certificate is a criminal
offence and may lead to prosecution.
19. Unused Discharge Certificates will be kept under lock and key.
20. When an N.C.O. or Constable is discharged on medical grounds, the nature of
the disability should be added to the cause of discharge in the Discharge Certificate,
except in cases where it would clearly be to the disadvantage of the personnel that such
addition should be made.
Assessment of Character on Discharge
21. (a) The object in giving a certificate of character is to assist a personnel in
obtaining employment in private life and the guiding principle should be to describe
his character as a personal as assessed by his record as a policeman. Assessing officers
should, therefore word the certificate in such a manner that potential employers can
readily estimate the true worth of personnel as a prospective employee.
(c) The chances of success of an ex-policeman in obtaining employment
must depend upon the manner in which his character is assessed. The responsibility of
the officer assessing character is, therefore great, and care must be taken to ensure that
every assessment is made with scrupulous fairness. The following terms will be strictly
adhered to: -
(i) Exemplary.
(ii) Very good
(iii) Good
(iv) Fair.
22. (a) “Exemplary” character is to be reserved for personnel who have served
for at least 12 years, who have not committed more than the following number of
major offences during their service and who have been clear of an entry for periods
stated hereunder –
Length of Service (Years) No. of entries allowed No. of years clear of entry
12 and under 15 1 7
15 and under 18 2 8
18 and upwards 2 8
not more than one to be a case of drunkenness. In the case of an officer of 18 years’
service or upwards, the restriction as to the number of entries allowed will only apply
to last 16 years of his service.
(b) “Very good” character may be awarded to -
(i) an officer whose character is otherwise exemplary, but who has
not sufficient service to make him eligible for the award of an “Exemplary” character;
(ii) an officer who has served 12 years or more whose service has
been very good, but who has not qualified for an “Exemplary” character.
(c) “Good” character may be awarded to an officer whose services have
been good, but who has not qualified for a “Very Good” character.

198
 P.G.O. No. 55
(d) “Fair” character may be awarded to personnel whose services have not
qualified him for any of the preceding assessments of character.
P.F. 31A – Fingerprints
23. (a) Fingerprints ink will invariably be used when taking fingerprints on
Discharge Certificates, Character Rolls, etc. On no account is rubber stamp ink to be
used.
(b) Where a member is not recommended for re-enlistment in the Force, a
brief note will be endorsed on the P.F. 31A, giving the reason for such
recommendation, e.g., misconduct, inefficiency, etc.
24. The effective date of discharge is the day following that on which leave pending
discharge expires. For example, if a Constable has earned 90 days’ leave which expires
on the 29th August, the effective date of his discharge is the 30th August.
25 No additional time in respect of travelling between the place of discharge and his
home will be granted to any personnel proceeding on leave pending discharge.
Discharge – Inspectorate
26 The Inspector General may terminate the service of an Inspector on grounds of
public interest in accordance with the procedure laid down in Regulation 67 (2) of the
Police Force Service Regulations.
27. Commanding Officers are responsible for ensuring that every Inspectorate
discharge takes place in accordance with the following procedure: -
(a) All arms, ammunition, stores and equipment on personal issue will be
withdrawn, and taken on charge at the nearest authorised store.
(b) The Inspector’s Identity Card will be withdrawn and returned to Police
Headquarters for disposal.
(c ) All discharge documents will be completed.
(d) All allowances and salary will be paid up to the date of discharge or up
to the date the Inspector proceeds on leave prior to discharge. Free transport will be
provided for the Inspector and his family to his destination, in accordance with
Government Standing Orders.
(e) The Inspector’s Personal File will be sent to Police Headquarters for
disposal.

199
 P.G.O. No. 56
REPORTS – CONFIDENTIAL

1 An Annual Confidential Report on each member of the Inspectorate and Rank &
File is required from the O/C. of his District/Unit. The report will be endorsed by the
CO. concerned, with his comments.
2 The following forms will be used: -

(a) Probationary Assistant Inspectors-Form C.R. 1.

(b) Confirmed Members of the Inspectorate – Form C.R. 2.

(c) Rank & File – P.F. 182.

3. All reports will include a recommendation whether or not the next increment due
should be granted, stopped, or deferred.
4 Two months before the date on which each increment falls due, Personnel
Section at Police Headquarters will send to the CO. the appropriate forms, in triplicate
(quadruplicate in the case of Form C.R. 1). The CO. will then, without delay, forward
all copies to the O/C. District/Unit in which the man is serving.
5. On receipt of Confidential Report Forms, the O/C. District/Unit will enter his
report and his recommendation regarding the grant, stoppage or deferment of
increment in the appropriate place and forward all copies of the report to his CO. under
confidential cover. A note should be made on the District/Unit Personal File of the
officer concerned showing the date of dispatch of the report to the CO.
6 The CO. will scrutinize the report and complete the appropriate section of the
form. If the report by the O/C. District/Unit recommends the stoppage or deferment of
the officer’s increment, the CO. will, provided that he agrees with the recommendation
briefly inform the officer in writing, of the contents of the adverse report, giving the
reason for the recommendation for stoppage or deferment.
7. The CO. will then forward all copies of the report to the Inspector General under
confidential cover with a copy of the letter he has addressed to the officer as per
paragraph 6 above. A note should be made in the Regional Branch Personal File or the
officer concerned showing the date of dispatch of the report to the Inspector General.
8 The Personnel Department at the Headquarters will take the following action:-
(a) For Inspectors:- Record on the form his decision regarding the grant or
his recommendation to the Permanent Secretary regarding the stoppage or deferment
of the increment and, in the case where the stoppage or deferment of an increment is
approved by the Permanent Secretary, advice the Inspector concerned of the reason for
the decision and the duration of the stoppage/deferment. One copy of the report form
will be returned to the CO. concerned, endorsed with the decision, for filing by the CO.

(b) For Rank & File:- Ensure that the appropriate staff action is taken to
implement the CO’s. recommendation on the granting of the increment and advise the
member of the Rank & File whose increment is to be stopped or deferred the reason
for and the duration of the stoppage/deferment. One copy of the report form will be
returned to the O/C. District/Unit through the CO. for filing in the District Personal file
of the officer concerned.

Confidential Reports
9. Ambiguities, meaningless phrases and unqualified condemnations are to be
avoided.
10. Adverse reports referring to failings which can be corrected must be
communicated to the officers concerned in order that they may have full opportunity to
mend their ways. The Senior Assistant Commissioner (Headquarters) will deal with

200
 P.G.O. No. 56
Inspectors by letter. CO. will ensure that Rank & File are informed verbally by O/C.
Districts/Units in accordance with paragraph 8 (b) above.

Increments
11 Increments are not automatic and may only be granted if work and behaviour
have been satisfactory. Stoppage or deferment for a certain period must be considered
for officers who fail to give satisfaction, but should not be recommended in the case of
a man who is incapable of improvement by reasons of poor education or low mental
calibre. The procedure as to stoppage and deferment of increments is laid down in
Regulation 71 of the Police Force Service Regulations and should be studied by all
Gazetted Officers.

Stoppage of Increment
12 Stoppage of increment for 12 months should be recommended for a man whose
work and behaviour have been uniformly bad and for those who have failed to mend
their ways in spite of deferment of increment.

Deferment of Increment
13. (a) Deferment of 6 or 12 months should be recommended for a man whose
work or behaviour has deteriorated, but who appears capable of mending his ways :-
(b) Deferment should be recommended for an officer who has failed to
achieve certain prescribed standards or qualifications and will normally remain in force
until those standards have been attained.

Restoration of Stopped or Deferred Increment

14. At the end of each period of stoppage or deferment, the Staff Officer (Personnel)
will call upon the commanding Officer to recommend (in the case of an Inspector) or
to direct (for rank & File) whether the increment should be restored, stopped or
deferred for a further period. Action thereafter will proceed in accordance with
paragraphs 8 and 9 above.

Notes: (a) In the case of Inspectors, failure to pass the Police Qualifying
Examination or Language Examination within the prescribed period will normally entail
stoppage or deferment of increment (P.G.O. No. 45 refers).

(b) The decision to recommend stoppage or deferment of an increment will

be taken in cases where the standard of efficiency of an officer has fallen below the
required standard, but in the opinion of his Commanding Officer can be remedied.
Continued failure to mend his ways will normally entail the officer’s discharge under
Regulation 67 (2) of the Police Service Commission Regulations.
(c) Members of the Rank & File who draw Proficiency Allowances (i.e.,
Drivers and Bandsmen) will normally lose their respective allowances if their
increments are deferred or stopped on grounds of inefficiency or ill-discipline. The
consequential financial penalty is severe. Gazetted Officers who are about to
recommend stoppage or deferment of increment should, therefore, first consider the
full financial implications which may be involved in such cases. All recommendations
for stoppage or deferment of increment must include specifically recommendations
covering the loss or down-grading of Proficiency allowances.

Additional Confidential Reports

15. Commanding Officers are also required to prepare detailed confidential Reports
in memo form (not on P.F. 182) on every Gazetted Officer and Inspector under their
command whose transfer is ordered of another command. One copy of the report will

201
 P.G.O. No. 56
be sent to the Commanding Officer of the formation to which the officer is transferred
and the other copy will be sent to the Inspector General. These reports are additional to
the Annual Confidential Reports required under paragraph 1 above.

16. Whenever a Commanding Officer writes officially to a Gazetted Officer or

Inspector under his command, either in commendation for good work, or as a warning
for inefficiency or bad behaviour, he shall send a copy of his memorandum to the
Inspector General.

202
 P.G.O. No. 57
REPORTS – PROGRESS
1. Progress Reports, in the form set out in paragraph 3 below, will be prepared at
the end of each month by Commanding Officers and by the Quartermaster and
Director of Music one copy will be sent to the Inspector General to reach him before
the 15th of each month.
2 In addition, O/C. Regional Field Force Units, and Signals Branches will submit
similar monthly Progress Reports in triplicate, to their Regional Commanders before
the 5th of each month. Regional Commanders will attach two copies to their own
Progress Reports before submission to the Inspector General.
3 Progress Reports will be drawn up under the following headings, and will
provide a concise but complete account of all matters of importance affecting the
formation under review. Details of local action taken or attempted to deal with
complaints and queries raised in these reports must always be given.
Report Headings:
(a) General remarks on the state of the Region or Unit.
(b) General report on personnel
(c) Buildings.
(d) Use of equipment and new equipment received during the month.
(e) State of transport.
(f) Discipline and number of defaulter cases.
(g) Sickness.
(h) Establishment and strength (including wastage):-
(i) Number of dismissals.
(ii) Number of discharges as unlikely to become efficient.
(iii) Discharge on medical grounds
(iv) Resignations.
(v) Retirements
(i) Welfare.
(j) General report on serious crime, significant increases in crime and other
matters of criminal interest- detailed statistics are not required.
(k) The number of public meetings and processions disallowed during the
preceding month and the reasons thereof.
(l ) Stock theft problems, with details of serious incidents, investigations
and preventative measures.
(m) Stations and Units inspected formally by Regional Commanders and
other Regional Headquarters staff members, with dates of inspection
(n) Number of incidents involving use of lethal force and reasons thereof.

203
 P.G.O. No. 58
TIME OFF AND TIME OFF LEAVE
1. Members of the Rank & File, excluding Staff Sergeants and Sergeant Majors,
O/C. Stations and members serving in:-
(a) the C.I.D.;
(b) the Crime Intelligence Unit,
(c) the Field Force Unit;
(d) all Training Establishments;
(e) the Stock Theft Unit; and
(f) the Band,
who are required to perform extra daily duty in excess of the statutory eight hours laid
down in P.G.O. No. 288, may be compensated by a corresponding period of Time Off,
in accordance with the conditions set out in this Order.
2. Time Off is a concession, not a right. It will not be granted -
(a) in time of emergency;
(b) when there are insufficient personnel available for duty;
(c ) in respect of long-distance patrols field operations and other special
duties which normally exceed eight hours.
3. (a) Time Off may be suspended by O/C. Stations for periods not exceeding
seven days whenever they consider that pressure of work justifies such a step.
Regional Commanders may similarly suspend time off in any station for any period
they consider necessary.
(b) Time Off should not be suspended without good reason and every effort
should be made to avoid unnecessary delay in the grant of time Off Leave to members
who have earned it.At the same time, Commanding Officers and O/C. stations should
take action under paragraph 3 (a) if they are satisfied that the continuation of Time Off
will seriously interfere with the working efficiency of their Stations.
4. Time Off and Time Off Leave may only be granted by O/C. Stations, and by
Gazetted Officers and Inspectors acting on their behalf, as compensation for extra duty
which has been performed on the direct orders of a superior officer.
5. For the purpose of this Order, attendance at Court will count as duty, provided
that it is necessary and of the shortest possible duration. Senior officers, and, in
particular, prosecuting officers, will ensure that personnel do not remain in court when
their presence is no longer required there. As a general rule, personnel who are
required to attend long court proceedings should not be given additional duties.
6. (a) Time Off will be earned at the following rates:-

Period of Extra Duty Time Off Earned:

Less than 1 hour Nil
Over 1 hour, but less than 1.30 hours 1 hour
Over 1.30, but less than 2 hours 1.30 hours
Over 2 hours, but less than 2.30 hours 2 hours
(b) These rates will apply equally to extra duty periods of any length. Under
no circumstances shall Time Off be granted for extra duty periods of less than one
hour’s duration.
7. Claims for time off will be handled as follows:-
(a) Every member of the Rank & File to whom paragraph 1 applies will be
issued with a Time Off Card (P.F.217)
(b) Personnel who have carried out extra duty will appear before their O/C.
stations at such time as may be ordered and apply to them for Ttime Off entries to be
made on their cards.
(c) O/C. Stations will satisfy themselves that the extra duty for which Time
Off is claimed was necessary and performed on the direct orders of a superior officer,
and if so satisfied, will enter and initial in blue/black ink on the Time Off card the
period of Time Off he grants, in accordance with paragraph 6 above.

204
 P.G.O. No. 58
8. (a) Members of the Rank & File who have accumulated eight hours time Off
on their cards may apply to their O/C. Station for a day’s Time Off Leave. O/C.
Stations will:-
(i) check the entries on each Time Off Card and satisfy themselves that
all is in order;
(ii) draw a red line below the last entry on the card if satisfied that eight
hours’ Time Off has been accumulated;
(iii) decide if and when each applicant can be granted Time Off Leave
and inform him accordingly at the same time making such adjustments as may be
necessary in the Station Duty Book and Duty Roster;
(iv) enter on the card in red ink below the red line the date on which the
holder may take his Time Off Leave.
(b) Under no circumstances may Time Off Leave be granted until eight hours
Time Off has been accumulated.
9 (a) Not more than eight hours Time Off may be accumulated.
(b) Personnel who have already accumulated eight hours Time Off will not be
granted further Time Off until their accumulated period has been cancelled out by the
grant of Time Off Leave.
10. Under no circumstances may Time Off Leave be granted in respect of any
unsigned entries in Time Off Cards. The same applies to altered entries which do not
bear the signature of the O/C. Station.
11 Defaulter proceedings will be initiated against any member of the rank & File
who:-
(a) makes a false or exaggerated claim for Time Off;
(b) alters or erases any entry on his Time Off Card; or
(d) loses his Time Off Card.
12. P.G.O. No. 288 shall be read in conjunction with this Order.

205
 P.G.O. No. 59
TRANSFERS – INSPECTORATE AND RANK & FILE
1. (a) Police Headquarters’ sanction is necessary for all :-
(i) inter-command transfers of Inspectors;
(ii) transfers of Inspectors who have been appointed by the
Inspector General to be “Officers-in-Charge of Police” under
Section 8 (3) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act,
Cap. 322, R.E. 2002.
(b) All other Inspectorate transfers within Commands may be arranged by
Commanding Officers without reference, but all must be reported to Police
Headquarters.
2. As a general rule, members of the Inspectorate will not be permitted to serve
for more than six years in the same Command unless they are engaged on specialist
duties. Commanding Officers will, therefore, refer to Police Headquarters whenever
Inspectors have completed six years’ service under their command and will
recommend whether or not they will be transferred elsewhere.
3. Members of the Inspectorate engaged on General or Field Force duties will
normally be required to serve three consecutive years in the same District or Field
Force Unit. Unnecessary transfers should be avoided, but Commanding Officers are
not bound to adhere to the three-year period.
4. Members of the Rank & File employed on General Duties will normally be
required to serve for the following periods :-
(a) In any one Region – six consecutive years (i.e., for two tours of
normal duration).
(b) In any one District at a Class “B” station – three consecutive years
(i.e., for one tour of normal duration).
(c) In any one District at a Class “C” Station – eighteen months.
(d) (d) At any temporary post for six months, except that in the case of
N.C.O.s, this period may be extended to one year.
(e) At the Police Training School – three years, except that selected
members may be required to serve for longer periods at the discretion of the Inspector
General.
5. (a) The normal period of service for members of the Rank & File
employed on Field Force duties will be three years, except that selected members may
be required to serve for longer periods at the discretion of the Inspector General.
(b) Members of the Rank & File will not normally be posted to duty with
the Field Force until they have completed at least one tour of service of normal
duration.
( c) Service with the Field Force should normally be performed between
the ages of 22 and 40 years.
(d) Personnel posted to the Field Force Unit will first undergo a course of
training at the Police College at Moshi.
(e) Transfers within the Field Force Unit will be arranged by the CO,
Field Force Unit but require Police Headquarters’ confirmation.
(f) Transfers to and from the Field Force will be referred by the
Commandant, Field Force Unit to Police Headquarters.
(g) Under no circumstances may Regional Commanders arrange local
Field Force transfers without reference to Police Headquarters via the CO, Field Force
Unit.
6. Members of the Rank & File posted to the Signals Branch will be required to
serve on signals duties for a period of three years from the date of their completing
specialized training.

206
 P.G.O. No. 59
7. (a) Transfers will normally be effected upon return from leave.
(b) The names of personnel due to transfer from a Region will be sent by
Commanding Officers to Police Headquarters two months before the personnel are due
to go on leave. Posting instructions will then be issued. Personnel who travel on leave
through a Region to which they will be posted will, if possible, take their personal
effects with them for storage at the Regional Headquarters of Station where they will
serve on return from leave. This will in no way prejudice the payment of allowances
referred to in paragraph 13.
(c ) Inter – District transfers will be arranged by Commanding Officers who
will make the necessary arrangements when the personnel return from leave.
Arrangements for transferring personnel from and to posts will be undertaken on a
local basis.
8. The Commandant, Police Training School, will advise Force Headquarters in
advance of the numbers of recruits and other personnel available, with respective
dates, for posting on completion of their training courses. Posting instructions will be
issued forthwith.
9. No member of the Force may claim a transfer as a right and transfers will be
kept to a minimum in the interests of efficiency and economy. Subject to the authority
of the Inspector General, transfers may be permitted in special circumstances on
compassionate grounds and in the interests of the Force.
10. Transfers should be effected and completed within the first week of the month
and, where possible within a Region or District, should be effected in Force transport
when engaged on normal duty journeys. The Service Register, and personal file will be
forwarded to the O/C. District to which the personnel is transferred. Details of all
transfers will be notified to Police Headquarters for publication in Force Orders
without delay. Officers responsible for ensuring that transfers of personnel are carried
out on time will keep a record in diary form of all future transfer requirements within
their commands.
11. (a) Members of the Rank & File on transfer travelling through Dar es
Salaam will report their arrival and departure to the Regional Police Commander, Dar
es Salaam, at Central Police Station. No travelling allowance will be payable for the
period spent in Dar es Salaam unless the Central Police Station Diary reference for
arrival and departure is endorsed on the Route Instruction.
(b) Members of the Rank & File in transit will be permitted to remain in
Dar es Salaam only for so long as it is necessary to catch the onward connection to
their destination. Disobedience of this order, in addition to forfeiture of travelling
allowance, will be dealt with by the receiving Unit as a disciplinary offence of absence
without leave.
(c) Unit Commanders dispatching personnel on transfer via Dar es Salaam
will ensure that the above orders are endorsed on the Route Instruction.
12. O/C. Stations will check the kit and equipment of personnel prior to their
departure on transfer and will record any deficiencies and arrange for their
replacement. In cases where such are due to neglect or misuse, arrangements will be
made for the recovery of the cost. Canteen debts will be settled in full prior to
departure on transfer
13. (a) Disturbance allowance will be paid in accordance with Order L.18 of
the Government Standing Orders in the case of personnel transferred from one Station
to another, but not in cases where transfers have been ordered on disciplinary grounds
or any other grounds.

207
 P.G.O. No. 59
(b) Subsistence allowances will be paid in accordance with L3 of the
Government Standing Orders in accordance with the prevailing rates
(c) Disturbance allowance and 50% of subsistence allowances shall be
paid by the Command to which he will be allocated and the other 50% will be paid by
the Command from which the transfer takes place.
(d) All travelling costs shall be paid by the Command from which the
transfer takes place.
14. Members of the Force are liable to be transferred anywhere in the Territory
and will be required to perform duty in any branch of the Force upon the orders of the
Inspector General. The officers commanding specialized branches of the Force may
authorize the transfer of members of the Rank & File serving in their branches, but the
transfer of General Duties personnel into and from the specialized branches will be
subject to the instructions of the Inspector General.
Application for Transfer to Other Forces
15. All applications for transfer to other forces and all answers to advertisements
offering appointments else where shall be submitted via the Inspector General in the
first instance. Direct correspondence with other Forces is forbidden.

208
 P.G.O. No. 60
BOOKS OF REFERENCE
1. The issue of books of reference will be in accordance with Appendix “A” to
this order.
2. O/C. Stations/Units and Staff Officers at Regional Headquarters will ensure
that titles and quantities of books issued are entered in the Property on Charge Register
(P.F. 168). This does not apply to the periodic issue of the Government Gazette, Force
Orders and circulars.
3. Amendments to the publications issued will be carried out by the responsible
officers aforementioned.
4. Adequate provision will be made at Stations/Units and Regional Headquarters
for the storage and care of Books of Reference. These items will be examined by
commanding Officers during formal inspections and be the subject of comment where
necessary.

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. 60)
DISTRIBUTION OF BOOKS OF REFERENCE

Police Stations
MATERIA
REFEREN

Police HQ.

O.C., F.F.

Reg. H.Q.

Personal
MOSHI

(ZBR)

F.F.U
P.T.S

P.T.S

A B C

Issue
DCI
CE

Laws of Tanzania 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 1 1

Police Law Manual 1 3 20 20 1 3 2 1 1 1 1

Archibald 2 1 1 1 1

Notes on Fingerprints 2 5 5 1 2 1

Forensic Cases (T.T.) 2 1 1 1 2 1

Simpson 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Forensic
Medicine

E.A. Law Reports 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

English/Swahili 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Dictionary

Swahili/English 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Dictionary

High Court Digests 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1

209
 P.G.O. No. 60
Police Stations

MATERIA
REFEREN

Police HQ.

O.C., F.F.

Reg. H.Q.

Personal
MOSHI

(ZBR)

F.F.U
P.T.S

P.T.S
A B C

Issue
DCI
CE

Police Force Service 3 3 20 20 1 2 2 1 1 1

Regulations, 1995.

S.J. Amb. 1st Aid 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Handbook

Drill Manual 1 1 4 4 2 2 1 1 1 1

Musketry Manual 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1

Road Accidents and 1 4 4 1 1 1 1

Sketching

Accounts, Stores and 4 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1

Procurement Manuals

Specimen Charges 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

Staff List 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Riot Manual 1 1 10 10 2 1 1 1 1 1 1

Gazette 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1

Scientific Aids to 2 2 1
Criminal Investigation

Police Law – Moriarty 13 13 1 1

Photograph in Crime 6 1 1 1 1
Detection

Police procedure and 3 1 1 1 2

Administration
Moriarty

Constable’s Guide to 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
Law of Evidence

Fingerprints and Palm 1 1 1 1 1 1

prints Notes

Questions & Answers 1 3 3 1 1 1

- Police Duties

Instructions for taking 1 3 3 1 1

fingerprints

210
 P.G.O. No. 60
Police Stations

MATERIA
REFEREN

Police HQ.

O.C., F.F.

Reg. H.Q.

Personal
MOSHI

(ZBR)

F.F.U
P.T.S

P.T.S
A B C

Issue
DCI
CE

Chambers Dictionary 3 1 4 4 1 2 1 1 1 1

Law Reports of 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
Tanzania

Tanzania Law Reports 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Human Rights 3 3 50 50 3 10 10 10 10 10
Training Manual for
Tanzania Police

UN Human Rights and 2 2 5 5 2 2 2 2 2 2

Law Enforcement
Training Manual
(Professional Training
Series No. 5 1997)

UN Code of Conduct 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 3 2 5
for Law Enforcement
Officials

UN Basic Principles 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 3 2 5
for the Use of Force
and Firearms by Law
Enforcement Officials

* 2 copies where R.P.C. and O/C. Regional C.I.D. are in different buildings

211
 P.G.O. No. 61
ILLNESS, DEATH AND BURIAL OF OFFICERS

Serious Illness of Officers

1. When a police officer is considered to be dangerously ill, the Commanding

Officer under whose charge he is, should immediately notify the Inspector General and
also arrange to communicate the particulars to the Officer’s relatives if they are not near
him. Similar notifications should be sent regularly, even daily if necessary, until the
patient is considered to be out of danger. Information should also be furnished by the
Commanding Officer as to whether the patient’s wife/husband is with him/her.

Death Notification To Government/Inspector General:

2. As a rule all deaths in any department of the Government should immediately

be notified to the appropriate authority.
3. (a) The death of a member of the Force as a Government employee should
be reported to the Inspector General in the first instance. The initial notification
should be followed up by a detailed report giving the following information:-

(i) hour, date, place and nearest relative;

(ii) address if known, of the nearest relative;

(iii) a report by the Medical Officer, through the Commanding

Officer, suitable for communication to the relatives of the
deceased, omitting any details of a distressing or painful nature;

(iv) in the first instance, a report by the Commanding Officer

responsible for notifying the death of a personal nature.
Reference can be made to the deceased officer’s good qualities
or work and the esteem in which he was held. Reference to any
last wishes of the deceased and the funeral arrangements can
also be made in this report. The report should be sent to the
Inspector General who can either embody the information
given in a personal letter to the nearest relative, or forward the
report as it stands if the information cannot be amplified in the
report. Care should be taken to address the letter personally and
to couch it in sympathetic terms.
(v) Inform on the arrangements made regarding the administration
of the estate of the deceased.

(b) The above report, which should be submitted without delay, should be
forwarded together with a certified copy of the entry in the Register of
Deaths.

(c) The report as described in the foregoing paragraphs will be furnished by

the deceased officer’s in-charge if the death occurs within his
cognizance.

Cost of Coffins and Headstones:

4. (a) The following costs of the burial of every member of the Force and
civilian serving in the Force will be borne by public funds:

212
 P.G.O. No. 61
(I) Coffin;
(ii) Grave;
(iii) Shroud;
(iv) Wreath;
(v) Transport costs of the deceased employee from the
point of death to the home place of the deceased or any other
place as decided by the deceased himself prior to the
occurrence of death or his relatives or his official
representative(s), whichever is nearer.

(b) The Police Headquarters maintains an account to meet burial expenses

for all employees in the Force.

Entitlement to Military Funerals:

5. If the next-of-kin so desires, a military funeral:-

(a) shall, when practical, be accorded to
(i) a deceased member of the Force who dies when on duty or
when on continuing full time service either with the Force or on
secondment to other Government Department; and
(ii) a former member of or above the rank of Assistant
Commissioner other than an officer who was disgracefully dismissed
from service

(b) may, with the prior approval of the Inspector General be accorded to a
deceased former member of the Force other than a member who was
disgracefully dismissed from service and does not come within the provisions
of (a) of this paragraph.
Participation in Military Funerals
6. If the exigencies of the service permit, a CO. may, with the prior approval of the
Inspector General, authorise service participation in a military funeral other than that
prescribed in paragraph 4(a) above.

213
 SECTION III
TRAINING ON ARMS, PARADES AND DRILLS
Nos. 81-100

P.G.O. No. Title

81. Arms – Care and Cleaning of

82. Arms – Safety Precautions

83. Joining Instruction – Courses

84. Parades – Drill

85. Parades – Formal

86. Parades – Lecture

87. Range Courses

88. Range Courses – Tear Smoke

89. Range Discipline

90. Riot Drill

91.

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

100.

231
 P.G.O. No. 81
ARMS – CARE AND CLEANING OF
General

1. (a) All arms on charge to Police Stations and Regional Headquarters shall be
cleaned and oiled once per week by a special detail of 1-3 Constables
(depending on the number of arms to be cleaned). Arms will be issued for
cleaning and will not normally be cleaned inside the armouries. Rifles will also
be cleaned prior to the holding of parades, when they will always be inspected.

(b) The procedure set out in (a) above will also apply to Field Force Units except
that rifles will be cleaned by the individuals to whom they are issued.

(c) All arms issued for patrols, range courses, etc., will be cleaned and oiled
before return to the armoury.

(d) Every officer who fires a weapon is responsible for cleaning it in the manner
laid down in this Order as soon as possible after the firing takes place.

(e) Gazetted Officers and Inspectors are responsible for the care and cleanliness of
revolvers issued to them.

(f) All arms including sterling guns, revolvers, greener guns and signal pistols,
will be inspected weekly.

(g) No hard substance, such as emery paper, bath brick or hard, coarse rags shall
be used for cleaning the outside or inside of a firearm.

Repairs

2 (a) The chief armourer shall work under the direction of the Quartermaster and
shall be responsible for the inspection and maintenance of all arms on charge
to the Force. He shall train and direct the work of Assistant Armourers who
will be posted to small armoury units established at each regional
headquarters. Assistant Armourers will carry out their duties under the
immediate control of the Officers i/c Regional Stores. The chief armourer shall
carry out inspections as directed and shall report on the maintenance of all
arms in their regions as directed. Assistant Armourers shall carry out only the
repairs and adjustments set out in Appendix A and they will inspect and report
on the maintenance of all arms in their regions as directed. They shall report all
cases of neglect or misuse of arms to the Chief Armourer through their
Officers i/c Regional Stores. They shall record all work carried out in their
Daily Work Books. They shall not undertake any armoury work or repairs to
privately-owned firearms.

(b) If any weapon is damaged or unserviceable, the Assistant Armourer shall

examine it and if the repair is beyond the scope of their duties as set out in
Appendix A, the faulty weapon shall be sent to the Chief Armourer at the
Police Main Stores, Dar es Salaam, labelled with Station Repair Card (P.F.
164) for repair or removal from charge of its previous unit. If the Chief
Armourer considers that a weapon cannot be satisfactorily repaired, he shall
report the fact to the Quartermaster who shall issue a replacement from stock.
The Chief Armourer, through the Quartermaster, shall call for a special report
on any damage which appears to have been caused by negligence.

232
 P.G.O. No. 81
Rifles - Care and cleaning of
Weekly Cleaning

3. Rifles must be cleaned weekly in the following manner:-

(a) Check that the number on the bolt and the number on the body are the same.

(b) Raise the back sight, push forward the safety catch, press down the bolt catch,
pull the bolt back as far as it will go, turn the bolt head upwards, withdraw the
bolt and lower the back sight.

(c ) Press up the magazine catch and remove the magazine.

(d) Press down the wide end of the magazine platform until the narrow end is clear
of the front lips, then lift out the platform and spring narrow end first.

(e) Unroll the pull-through, put a piece of flannelette, four by two inches, in the
CENTRE loop and wrap it round the cord.

(f) Drop the pull-through weight into the breech behind the bridge charger guide.
Rest the toe of the butt on the ground and pull the cord through in one
movement. Try not to let the cord rub against the muzzle or it will cause wear.
Keep on pulling through until the barrel is clean, folding the dirty side of the
flannelette as necessary. Then, using a clean piece of flannelette and oil, lightly
oil the bore. Shake the oil bottle before using it.

(g) Using flannelette and a stick, clean and lightly oil the chamber

(h) Clean and remove all dirt from the bolt, then lightly oil it.

(i) Clean the magazine inside and out and the platform and spring then lightly oil
them

(j) Clean the outside of the rifle and the breech using a small brush for the
crevices. Rub the metalwork over with a piece of oily flannelette.

(k) Re-assemble the rifle.

(l) Once a month smear a little linseed oil on the woodwork (not the metalwork)
of the rifle in the shade for three hours; then wipe off all surplus linseed oil
thoroughly

Cleaning before Firing

4. (a) Clean the rifle as for “Weekly Cleaning” except that the following must be dry
and free from oil :-
The bore, chamber, face of the bolt, magazine platform, inside the magazine
and the cocking piece.

(b) Check carefully that the foresight and back sight are quite free from dirt and
that the aperture is clear.

(c) Check that the gas escapes are clear.

233
 P.G.O. No. 81
No hard substance, such as emery paper, bath brick or hard, coarse rags shall
be used for cleaning the outside or inside of a firearm.

Cleaning after Firing

5 (a) Strip rifle as for “Weekly Cleaning” except that the following must be dry and
free from oil

(b) Clean the barrel after it has cooled with Young’s oil, in accordance with the
instructions in paras. 8-11.

(c) Clean and oil the magazine and bolt and all metalwork of the rifle.

(d) Re-assemble the rifle.

NOTE: (a) The bore must be cleaned, inspected and oiled daily for several days after
firing.

(b) If a worn barrel becomes fouled, it may be cleaned with wire gauze. Only a
trained Armourer may use this method. The gauze is fitted to the FIRST
loop on the pull-through, i.e., the loop nearest the weight.

(c) If a pull-through breaks and jams in the bore, the rifle shall be sent for the
Regional Armoury unit’s attention.

Guns – Care and Cleaning of

6. (a) Guns shall be cleaned weekly.

(b) Carry out elementary stripping and clean out the barrel with a pull through and
piece of clean flannelette size 4” x 3”, then pull through again when the barrel
is clean with a piece of oily flannelette size 4” x 2”. Clean and oil the chamber
using a piece of stick with flannelette on it. Clean the remaining parts of the
weapon with an oily rag, paying particular attention to the oiling of the face of
the bolt, inside the bolt run and to the ejector. Clean magazines with an oily
rag and ensure that the platform is easy to move inside the magazine case.

(c) In the case of S. & W. revolvers, break open the cylinder, but do not try to
remove it. Using the cleaning rod issued, put a piece of 4” x 2” flannelette in
the eye, push it through the barrel until it comes out quite clean.

(c) Clean the cylinder in the same manner. Using a slightly smaller piece of oily
flannelette, push through the barrel and leave lightly oiled. Rub over the
outside parts with a lightly oiled cloth.

Use of Young’s Oil

7 (a) Mix three parts of water to one part of Young’s Oil and shake well before use.

(b) Saturate a piece of 4” x 2” flannelette thoroughly with the mixture and swab
out the barrel, using a cleaning rod or pull-through which should be inserted
through the breech

234
 P.G.O. No. 81
(c) Dry out the barrel with clean 4” x 2”.

(d) Oil the barrel with a piece of 4” x 2” soaked with plain Young’s Oil, avoiding
the use of excessive quantities of oil.

(e) For the next 2/3 consecutive days, dry out the barrel with clean 4” x 2” and re-
oil with plain Young’s Oil.

(f) Resume routine cleaning with standard rifle oil after the third day when
sweating should have ceased.

8. Young’s Oil is not a true oil and should never be regarded as such. It shall only be used
for cleaning barrels and bolt heads (instead of boiling out) and if employed correctly,
will almost eliminate sweating. The standard rifle oil must be used on all working
parts.

9 Young’s oil applied to any metal surface will resist rust for a considerable period since
it evaporates into a sticky grease which will not drain off. Barrels which are protected
with Young’s Oils must, therefore, be pulled through before firing

10 This oil is expensive and shall not be wasted. It will not deteriorate when mixed with
water and any mixture prepared in excess of immediate requirement shall, therefore, be
kept for future use.

Appendix “A” to
P.G.O. No. 81

DUTIES AND SCHEDULE OF REPAIRS TO BE UNDERTAKEN BY ASSISTANT

ARMOURERS

1. To inspect for cleanliness and serviceability, all arms in his region.

2 To zero all arms in his region.

3. To remove obstructions from the bores all arms in his region.

4. To adjust on rifles: Striker Protrusion, Trigger Pressures, Applied Safety, Feed

Extraction and Ejection.

5. To fit, as appropriately, on all available weapons with striker and screw, cocking piece,
trigger and pin mainspring, extractor and screw, extractor spring, stock butt with bolt
and washers, butt plate with screw, upper band, lower band, band screw, sling swivels,
hand guards front and rear, foresight protector with screw, safety catch and locking
with spring and screw, spring and screw, spring and platform magazine assembly,
auxiliary magazine spring back sight assembly ejector screw.

235
 P.G.O. No. 82
ARMS – SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Handing over Precautions

1. The following safety precautions shall be strictly observed by all ranks whenever a
firearm is either issued from or received back into a police armoury or is handed over
by one police officer into the custody (however temporary) of another officer :-

(a) Rifles

(i) Open the bolt before handing over.

(ii) Examine the chamber and magazine before accepting and make sure
that the rifle is unloaded.

(b) Revolvers/pistols

(i) Break open the Revolver/Pistol before handing over.

(ii) Examine the chamber before accepting.

(c) Sub-Machine Guns

(i) Remove the magazine,

(ii) Examine the chamber and all magazines before accepting.

(d) T.792 Pistols.

(i) Open the breech before handing over.

(ii) Examine the chamber before accepting.

Loading and Unloading

2. Except in emergency, all police arms shall be loaded and unloaded as a drill
movement under the direct supervision and control of the senior officer present in
accordance with the instructions set out hereunder. Arms shall always be loaded and
unloaded out of doors unless a Gazetted Officer or Inspector instructs otherwise.

(a) Rifles.

(i) To load, release the safety catch, ease springs, press the trigger and
apply the safety catch. Then remove and charge the magazine
(normally with 5 rounds) and replace the magazine.

(ii) To unload, remove the magazine, unload it completely and replace

magazine. Then ease springs press the trigger and apply the
Revolver/Pistol.

(b) Revolvers

236
 P.G.O. No. 82
(i) To load, break open and load the chambers with five rounds, starting
with the chamber immediately to the left of the chamber opposite the
striker and continuing in an anti-clockwise direction. The chamber
opposite the striker will not be loaded. Then close the
Revolver/Pistol.

(ii) To unload, break open the Revolver/Pistol slowly, catching the

rounds in the palm of the right hand. Then close the Revolver/Pistol.

(c) Sub-Machine Guns.

(i) To load, set the change lever to “R” open and close the breech block
and set the change lever to “S”. Then load 30 rounds by hand into the
magazine and place the magazine in the magazine container (or in the
gun if so ordered).

(ii) To unload, remove magazine from the gun, set the change lever to
“A” and pull the breech block backwards and forwards to or three
times with the trigger pressed. Then remove all rounds from the
magazine using the thumb and forefinger.

(d) T.792 Pistols.

(i) To load, open the breech and load the chamber(s). Close weapon
and apply safety catch (if any).

(ii) To unload, open the breech, unload completely, then close the
weapon and apply safety catch (if any).

237
 P.G.O. No. 83
JOINING INSTRUCTION – COURSES

Part I: Police Training School Moshi

1. The address of the Police Training School is P.O. 3024 MOSHI.

2 All courses will commence on a Monday, trainees being required to report to the
Guard Room at the Training School not later than 0900 hours on the preceding
Saturday.

3 (a) No accommodation will be provided for wives and families of trainees.

(b) Wives and families of Inspectors and N.C.O. may visit them whilst they
are at the Training School, provided permission has been obtained from
the O/C. Under no circumstances will visitors be accommodated at the
Training School

(c) Commanding Officers will ensure that adequate financial provision is

made for families while their husbands are away.

4 Members of the Rank & File attending the Police Training School on any type of
course shall bring with them :-

(a) Complete Kit with any deficiencies covered by Stores Repair Cards (P.F.
164).

(b) Kit Sheet (P.F. 31D).

(c) Service Register and the duplicate of their personal file.

5 Arms and ammunition will not be brought by trainees to the Training School.

6 The following rules will apply to all students attending Police Training School
Courses :-

(a) They shall wear civilian clothes evenings and weekends when off duty.

(b) They shall use the Mess and are not permitted to take meals outside during
normal working hours.

(c) They shall pay messing, laundry and canteen charges in accordance with
Police Training School standing orders.

(d) They shall return all items of equipment issued to them whilst attending
courses at the Police Training School at the conclusion of each course.

7 (a) The normal allowances will be paid to those eligible to receive them for
periods spent on courses.

(b) Trainees will be eligible to draw travelling allowance for the journey to
and from the Training School.

238
 P.G.O. No. 83
8 Motor vehicles and bicycles will not normally be brought to the Training School,
but where officers wish to bring a motor vehicle they must obtain permission from
the O/C. prior to their arrival at the Training School.

9 Officers nominated to attend a Drivers’ Course should be certified fit by a

Government Medical Officer prior to attending the course. The Medical Certificate
should accompany the officer.

Part II: Police College Dar es Salaam

10. The address of the Police College is P.O. Box 2503, Dar es Salaam. The Telephone
number of the O/C’s office is Dar es Salaam 283225.

11 All courses will commence on Monday. Students are required to report to the
college office not later than 1200 hours on the preceding Saturday.

12. Transport will meet passenger trains arriving on the assembly day of each course.
Application for other transport requirements will be notified to the O/C. before the
assembly day.

13. No accommodation is available for wives, servants and families of students.

14. Students required to give evidence in court shall complete such commitments
before joining their courses.

15 Students attending all courses at the college shall bring with them :-

(a) a complete set of uniform and equipment;

(b) bedding, except that blankets are provided for students on Gazetted
Officers’ courses;

(c ) Service Register and the duplicate of their personal file;

(d) P.F. 175 – Special recommendation for promotion in the case of students
on Assistant Inspectors Courses.

16 Arms and ammunition will not be brought to the Police College.

17 The following rules will apply to all students attending the Police College:-

(a) They shall be subject to Police College Standing Orders.

(b) Students on Assistant Inspectors Courses are required to mess at the

college where all meals are supplied.

(c) All students will receive their pay at the college at the end of each month.

(d) Students will be entitled to draw travelling/subsistence allowances at the

prevailing rates. This will be announced from time to time by the
Government. These allowances will normally be paid at the end of each
month.

(e) All students are required to make their own laundry arrangements and to
bring irons with them (electric irons may be brought).

239
 P.G.O. No. 83
(f) Students may bring with them any personal reference books for use during
the training, but adequate supplies of reference books exist at the college.

18 The following facilities are available:-

(a) A mess is provided for students on Gazetted Officers’ Courses from which
drinks, cigarettes, etc., may be purchased on a cash basis.

(b) A canteen is provided for students on Assistant Inspectors courses which

is also operated on a cash basis.

(c) All students may use the police canteen in the Kilwa Road Barracks where
credit may be arranged on monthly terms in accordance with the scale set
out in Police College Standing Orders, all reasonable requirements of
foodstuffs are stocked by this canteen

(d) Recreation facilities are available to all students at the college include
tennis, squash, volleyball, hockey, netball, basketball and football, the
necessary equipment being provided. Students are required to provide
their own sportswear.

PART III: Police Training School Zanzibar

19 The address of the Police Training School is P.O. Box 237, Zanzibar, Tanzania. The
telephone number is 2230256.

20 Training scheme as in so far as feasible will be conducted in the Police Training

School Zanzibar in the following programmes:-
(a) Promotional courses;

(b) Refresher courses; and

(c) Specialist courses.

21 All courses will commence on Monday. Students are required to report to the Police
Training School not later than 09.00 hrs on the preceding Saturday

22 When transport is required to convey trainees and their kits at the time of arrival to
Zanzibar, application may be sought by telephone to the Police Training School

23 (a) Trainees are not allowed to bring with them families, as no accommodation
will be available for wives and children of trainees at the school.

(b) Wives and families of students may pay only visits whilst they are on course
provided permission has been sought. Under no circumstances will visitors be
accommodated at the Training School.
24 Students required to give evidence in Courts shall complete such commitments before
joining courses.

240
 P.G.O. No. 83
25 Students and all other members of police attending courses, seminars or other
ceremonies at the Police Training School shall bring with them:-All uniforms and
equipments necessary for their own personal usage such as bed covers, mosquito nets,
sports kits and not arms, ammunition and explosions.
26 The following rulers will apply to all members of Police attending Police Training
School for courses, seminars and other ceremonies:-

(a) They shall report whilst on uniform;

(b) Uniforms are going to be used at all times, except evening and weekends
when off duty where civilian clothes are preferred;

(c) They will use mess facilities, thus they should note that they are not
permitted to take their meals outside during that time;

(d) They shall pay their canteen bills and charges accordingly at school;

(e) They shall return all items and equipment’s issued to them whilst attending
courses or ceremonies;

(f) They will neither be allowed to make their own messing arrangements nor
cooking of any sort in dormitories; and

(g) Day out will only be available during week ends and holidays where
members have not been assigned specific duty and by a prescribed
permission;.
27 Trainees and other members will be eligible to get travelling assistance back to
Pemba and Dar es Salaam on completion of their training, seminar and any other
ceremony conducted at the Training.

28 Motorcycles, vespers and bicycles will not normally be brought to the Training
School. But, where a trainee or other member wishes to bring a motor bike must seek
and obtain permission from the commandant and the reasons of doing so prior to
his/her arrival at the Training school.
29 There is a school mini canteen available to students. Soft drinks, beers and cigarettes
are available. Shop supplies other requisites including stamps, stationers, detergents,
e.t.c. The shop is run in cash bases. Students their bills if any before leaving the
school.
All trainees and other members shall be subject to Police Training School Standing
Orders from their arrival to their departure after conclusion of their activities.

30 (a) Cleanliness and healthy precautions are necessary to be observed by all at

all times while in school.

(b) Students and all other members are required to keep dormitories, latrines,
grounds and other environments in word and outward tidy and clean all the
time to carter for any erupting disease.
31 For precautions, students are insisted to seek advice and other Government Medical
Assistants at Police and other dispensaries for assistance when they fall sick before
committing themselves to private dispensaries.

241
 P.G.O. No. 84

PARADES – DRILL
1 Every member of the Rank & File serving in Police Stations will be required to attend
one Drill parade per week (in addition to the weekly riot Drill parade) at which
instruction will be given in squad drill, arms drill and weapon training. Musketry
training in preparation for annual range courses will also be included

2. Two parades per week shall be held in Class “A” and “B” Stations and one parade per
week in Class “C” Stations. Suitable duty arrangements will be made so that every
member of the Force can attend one parade, care being taken to ensure that members
of the Force on night duty are not required to attend early morning parades. In Class
“C” Stations all members of the Force not engaged on essential duties swill be
required to attend.

3 Drill parades shall be of at least one hour’s duration, unless the Regional Commander
directs otherwise.

4 Commanding Officers’ formal parades will be held once per month at each Regional
Headquarters. All available Gazetted Officers and Inspectors will attend. These
parades will take the place of the normal weekly parades referred to in Para 1.

5. The following procedure shall be followed at drill parades if sufficient members of

the Force are available:-

(a) A Gazetted Officer or Inspector shall command each parade

(b) The parade shall be inspected by the officer-in-charge of the parade.

(c) The first half of the parade shall be devoted to squad and arms drill and, where
big parades are mounted, it will be split into squads of 10 to 20 persons and
placed under the command of Inspectors or senior N.C.O.s. The officer in
command of the whole parade shall pay close attention to the ability of the
officers handling the squads and shall test them at regular intervals

(d) The second half of the parade will be devoted to parade drill and marching and
musketry training.

(e) At the end of the drill period the parade will b e reformed and dismissed

6. Parades will be replaced by lectures if the weather should make it impossible to hold
a drill parade in the open air and under-cover facilities are not available

7. This order does not apply to the Field Force, but O/C., Field Force Unit shall lay
down a regular programme of drill parades in Standing Orders.

8. An Attendance Book shall be kept at each Station giving the date of each Drill Parade
and the names of the members of the Force who attend. O/C. Stations will ensure that
parades are attended in compliance with this Order.

242
 P.G.O. No. 85
PARADES – FORMAL

1. Full Guards of Honour mounted for the President and Vice President of the United
Republic of Tanzania, President of Zanzibar and Prime Minister of the United
Republic of Tanzania or Complimentary Guards of Honour mounted for members of
the Judiciary or for other distinguished visitors and personages, shall be in
accordance with the following scale:-

(a) Full Guards of Honour

Place Gazetted Officers Inspectors Senior N.C.Os. Rank & File

Every Region
2 2 3 96

(b) Complimentary Guards of Honour

Place Gazetted Inspectors Senior N.C.Os. Rank & File

Officers

Every Region 1 2 3 46

Not Guards of Honour should normally be officered entirely by Gazetted Officers,

e: but Inspectors may be used if Gazetted Officers are not available in the
proportion set out above.

2. (a) Guards of 100 officers shall parade in three ranks in open order with two
N.C.O.s as right and left markers. The junior Gazetted Officer and the
Inspector will take up positions two paces in front of the front rank and
covering off the third officer from each flank. The Gazetted Officer in
command of the guard will take up position in the centre of the parade four
paces in front of the front rank.

(b) All other Guards shall parade in two ranks in open order with two N.C.O. as
right and left markers. The Inspector will take up position two paces in front of
the front rank, covering off the third officer from the left. The Gazetted Officer
will take up position two paces in front of the front rank, covering off the third
officer from the right.

3. Presidential Salutes shall only be ordered for those persons entitled to a full Guard of
Honour. General Salutes shall be given on other occasions.

4. Dress for Guards of Honour shall be No. 1 Dress for all ranks. Gazetted Officers will
wear swords.

Inspection Parades

243
 P.G.O. No. 85
5. The parade procedure set out in the following paragraphs will apply both on formal
inspections and on other occasions when police parades are held to honour
individuals who are not entitled to a Guard of Honour.

6. (a) Inspection parades shall normally be formed up in three ranks in open order,
but if the parade consist of not more than eleven officers, excluding the parade
Commander, and not less than seven, it shall be formed up in two ranks in
open order. If the parade consists of less than seven officers, excluding the
parade Commander, it shall be formed up in single rank.

(b) Bayonets will be fixed prior to the arrival of the inspecting officer.

7. (a) The parade shall normally be commanded by the Officer-in –Charge of the
Unit under inspection. If a Gazetted Officer, other than the Commanding
Officer, is available, he shall command the parade.

(b) The parade Commander shall take post three paces in front of the centre of the
parade. Gazetted Officers and Inspectors shall carry swords/regulation canes.
If the parade Commander is a member of the Rank & File, he will carry a rifle
with bayonet unfixed.

8. When the inspecting officer arrives he will be met off the parade ground by a
conducting officer. The conducting officer may be the Commanding Officer of the
officers on parade or some other officer deputed by him.

9. The conducting officer will lead the inspecting officer to the saluting base and will
then take up position one pace behind and one pace to the left of the inspecting
officer.

10. The parade Commander shall call the parade to attention and slope arms while the
inspecting officer is being escorted to the saluting base. He will give the appropriate
compliment only when the inspecting officer has arrived at the saluting base and
halted.

11. When the inspecting officer has halted in front of the parade, the parade Commander
will give the order for the appropriate salute as hereunder:-

(a) For the Inspector General to Assistant Commissioners – General Salute,

Present Arms

(b) For Superintendence and above Present Arms.

(c) For other Gazetted Officer - Salute by the Parade Commander only Inspectors.

(d) For Ministers and Regional Commissioners - General Salute, Present Arms.

(e) For other Inspecting Civilians - Salute by the Parade Commander only.

12. (a) When the inspecting officer returns the salute of the officers on parade, the
conducting officer shall stand to attention and NOT salute. All ranks in
uniform watching the parade shall also stand to attention, but NOT salute.

(b) Supernumeraries other than Gazetted Officers and Inspectors, on parade

without arms, shall stand to attention, but not salute.

244
 P.G.O. No. 85
13. (a) After the salute, the parade Commander will order slope arms and then order
arms (or order arms only if no present arms has been given). He will then
march forward, halt immediately in front of the inspecting officer, salute and
report the parade ready for inspection.

(b) The inspecting officer will then inspect the parade, accompanied by the parade
Commander and conducting officer.

14. If the inspecting officer addresses anybody during his inspection the person so
addressed shall answer, but not salute.

15. At the conclusion of the inspection of the parade, the inspecting officer, accompanied
by the conducting officer, will return to the saluting base and take up position in
accordance with para.9. The parade Commander will give orders for the appropriate
salute in accordance with para.11, followed by the order to slope arms. The inspecting
officer will then leave the saluting base and the parade will be dismissed.

16. On formal inspection parades, if so ordered by the inspecting officer, the parade
Commander will order the parade to stand fast after the final salute and will unfix
bayonets, port arms and examine rifles. He will then stand the parade at ease and
await the inspecting officer’s examination in squad and riot drill.

245
 P.G.O. No. 86
PARADES – LECTURE

1. Every member of the Rank & File (excluding C.I.D. personnel) serving in Police
Stations and Field Force Units will be required to attend one lecture parade per
week at which instruction will be given on Police General Orders, Standing Orders,
basic law and general police duties.

2. Two lectures per week shall be held in Class “A” and “B” Stations and one lecture
per week in Class “C” Stations and suitable duty arrangements will be made so that
every member of the Force can attend one lecture. At Class “C” Stations all
members of the Force not engaged on essential duties will be required to attend.

3. As a general rule, lectures shall be given by experienced Gazetted Officers or

Inspectors and Commanding Officers shall ensure that lectures are given on suitable
subjects.

4. All Assistant Inspectors who are not engaged on essential duties shall also attend
these lectures so that they may gain experience in the method of instruction.

5. All ranks attending lecture parades shall be given an opportunity of questioning the
lecturer and shall be encouraged to discuss subjects of particular importance.

6. An Attendance Book shall be kept at each Station, giving the date and subject of
each lecture and the names of the personnel who attended. O/C. Stations will ensure
that lecture parades are attended as ordered in Para. 2.

7. O/C. Field Force Units should not necessarily limit their members of the Force to
one lecture parade per week. Frequent lecture parades should always be held when
units are not engaged in operational duties.

8. Commanding Officers of specialized units will make whatever arrangements may be

possible to ensure that their members of the Force receive suitable instruction.

246
 P.G.O. No. 87

RANGE COURSES
1. Regular Annual Musketry Courses covering:-

(a) Rifle;

(b) Revolver/Pistol; and

(c) Sub-Machine Gun;

will be fired between 1st January and 31st December each year by personnel as stated
in this Order.

2. The following musketry courses will be fired:-

(a) Rifle

(i) Course No. 1 Recruits Instructional Course – Appendix “A” (Course

No. 1 will be fired twice during period of training)

(ii) Course No. 2 Recruits’ Classification course – Appendix “B” to be

fired by all recruits at the Police Training School..

(iii) Course No. 3 Field Force Instructional Course – Appendix “C”

(iv) Course No. 4 Field Force Classification Course – Appendix “D” to be

fired by all Field Force personnel.

(v) Course No. 5 General Police Instructional Course – Appendix “E”

(vi) Course No. 6 General Police classification course – Appendix “F” to

be fired by all general duties personnel.

(b) Revolver/Pistol

(i) Course No. 7 Revolver/Pistol Instructional course – Appendix “G”

(ii) Course No. 8 Revolver/Pistol Classification Course – Appendix “H”

Course No. 7 will only be fired as an initial training practice by personnel

requiring instruction in the use of revolvers. Course No. 8 to be fired by all
Gazetted Officers and Inspectors and other personnel armed with revolvers
for the performance of their duty.

(c) Sub-Machine Gun

(i) Course No. 9 Sub Machine Gun-Appendix “I” to be fired by all

General Duties and Field Force Gazetted Officers and by all Field
Force Inspectors.

3. All courses will be fired off under the supervision of a Gazetted Officer or Inspector.

247
 P.G.O. No. 87
4. The oldest stocks of ammunition held on Station charge will invariably be used.

5. The Force Armourer will zero all rifles on Station charge during his regular
inspections of arms.

6. All courses will be fired with safety precautions as laid down in P.G.O. No. 89
strictly observed.

7. Where no snap apparatus is available, snap targets will be permanently exposed and
fire control will operate on the blast of a whistle using a stop watch.

8. Target sizes are as follows :-

(a) 4’ target – Bull 12”

(b) Inner 24”

(c) Magpie 36”

Outer (rest of target).

For grouping practices, a white patch (3 x 4) over centre point of target as aiming
mark.

SNAP 22” diameter with 12” inscribed circle.

FIGURE II as issued.

NOTE: For volley firing practices, black patch 41/2” x 8” at height of 10” from base on Figure II.

9. The scoring to be shown in each case is for the Annual Classification only. The first
practice on each weapon is for training only and the score will not be included in the
final results, nor will scores obtained from 200 meter and 300 meter practices be
added.

10. The following officers are responsible for seeing that all ranks fire their appropriate
courses:-

(a) Commandants - P.T.S. – Moshi– all ranks at P.T.S.

(b) Commandant - P.T.S. – Zanzibar – all ranks at P.T.S.

(c) Commandant - Police Training College, Dar es Salaam. – all ranks at the
college.

(d) R.P.Cs. – all ranks in their Regions.

(e) CO., Specialised units – all ranks in their units

11. Personnel at Stations which are not provided with ranges must be taken to the nearest
range to fire their courses. If no convenient range is available, commanding Officers
will arrange for courses to be fired on temporary ranges and in such circumstances,
will ensure that strict safety precautions are enforced. Temporary ranges may only be
used after they have been checked and approved by a CO.

248
 P.G.O. No. 87
12. All results of the Annual Classification will be recorded in each officer’s service
Register and on the Pro-forma attached at Appendix “J” and sent to Police
Headquarters each year.

13. All ranks should be thoroughly practised in use and control of firearms including
general musketry instruction, aiming and fire control before firing their annual
courses.

249
 P.G.O. No. 87
APPENDIX “A”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE No. 1 – RIFLE-INSTRUCTIONAL-RECRUITS (TO BE FIRED TWICE
DURING TRAINING PERIOD)
SCHEDULE “A”

Remarks
Distance
Practice

H.P.S.
Serial

Rounds
Target

Detail
1 Grouping 4’grouping 100 5 Lying 25 Wrist or forearm rested.
(aiming meters.
mark)

2 Application 4’grouping 100 5 Lying 20 Scoring 4, 3, 2, 1.

(aiming meters.
mark)

3 Snap Snap with 100 5 Lying in the open. 20 Firer may be in the aim
shooting inscribed meters. There will be 5 throughout. Hits will be
circle of exposures of 5 signalled by twisting the target
12” seconds each given immediately after being struck.
diameter at irregular intervals Scoring 4, 3.
over a period of 11/2
minutes. Intervals
between exposures
will not be more than
6 seconds. A trial
exposure will be
given.

4 Application Figure II 50 5 Standing 20 Firer will reload in the shoulder.

Target meters. Scoring 4, 3.

5 Volley firing Figure II 50 5 Standing 20 This practice will be controlled

with black meters. by the officer on duty at the
patch 41/2” firing point. Each firer will
x 8” and stand facing the target and on
10” from the word of command “Target
base in front – volley fire – at the
knees – present” each firer will
come up to the aim – safety
catch forward. The firing point
officer will then give the order
“FIRE”. Each Firer will then
fire one round at his target. This
order will be repeated 5 times.
Scoring: Black rectangle – 4
points Ochre – 3 points, Grey-1
point.

250
 P.G.O. No. 87

APPENDIX “B”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE NO. 2 – RIFLE – CLASSIFICATION – RECRUITS
SCHEDULE “B”

Rounds

Remarks
Distance

H.P.S.
Serial

Practice

Target

Detail
1 Grouping 4’ grouping 100 5 Lying 25 To be fired in the open, without rest,
(aiming meters. scoring:
mark)
4”-25 points
8”- 20 points
12”- 15 points
12” One wide – 10 points.

2 Application 4’ 100 5 Lying 20 Scoring 4,3,2,1.

meters. in the
open

3 Application 4’ 100 5 Lying 20 Wearing respirators. Respirators will be

meters. in the adjusted 2 minutes before firing.
open

4 Application Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standi 20 Scoring 4, 3.

ng

5 Application Figures II 100-50 10 Standi 40 5 rds. From 100 meters, double up to 50

meters. ng meters, reload and fire remaining 5 rounds.

6 Volley Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standi 20 As for course No. 1 – serial 5.

firing with black ng
patch 41/2
x 8 and 10
from base

Total 45 HPS. 145 Marksman 115, 1st Class 95, 2nd class 75.
meters. Those personnel who pass out as Marksmen
or 1st class shots will then fire 5 rounds at
200 meters. And 5 rounds at 300 meters.
This last practice will enable Commanding
Officers to select marksmen for
competitions. It will not be used for
classifications nor will the results be
included in the annual return except form
the point of ammunition expenditure.

251
 P.G.O. No. 87
APPENDIX “C”
TO P.G.O. 87

COURSE NO. 3 – RIFLE – INSTRUCTIONAL – FIELD FORCE

SCHEDULE “C”

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds
Target

H.P.S.
Detail
Serial

1 Group 4’ grouping 100 5 Lying 25 Wrist or forearm rested.

ing (aiming mark) meters.

2 Appli 4’ 100 5 Lying in the 20 Scoring 4,3,2,1.

cation meters. open

3 Snap Snap 100 yd. 5 Lying in the 0 Firer may be in the aim throughout. Hits
shooti open. There will be signalled by twisting the target
ng will be 5 immediately after being struck.
exposures of 5
seconds each
given at
irregular
intervals over
a period of
11/2 minutes.
Intervals
between
exposures will
not be more
than 6
seconds. A
trial exposure
will be given.

4 Appli 4’ 100 5 Lying in the 20 Wearing respirators. Respirators will be

cation meters open adjusted 2 minutes before firing.

5 Rapid 4’ 100 5 Lying in the 20 5 rounds in 25 seconds. Scoring: 4 (Bull

meters open and Inner) 3 (elsewhere on scoring
surface).

6 Appli Figures II 5 meters 5 Standing 20 Fire will reload in the standing load
cation position – scoring 3, 2.

7 Volle Figures II with 50 meters 5 Standing 20 Detail as for course No. 1 serial 5.
y black patch
firing 41/2 x 8” and
10” from base

Total 35 HPS. 145

meters

252
 P.G.O. No. 87

APPENDIX “D”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE NO. 4 – CLASSIFICATION – FIELD FORCE
SCHEDULE “D”

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds
Target

H.P.S.
Detail
Serial

1 Grouping 4’ 100 meters. 5 Lying in 25 Scoring 25, 20, 15,

Grouping the open 10.
(aiming
mark)

2 Application 4’ 100 meters. 5 Lying in 20 Scoring 4,3,2,1.

the open

3 Application Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standing 20 Wearing respirators.

Scoring 4, 3.

4 Application Figure II 100-50 10 Standing 40 5 rounds from 100

meters. meters. On
command “forward”
double to 50 meters.
Reload and fire 5
rounds.

5 Volley firing Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standing 20 As for course No. 1,

with black serial 5.
patch 41/2
x 8” and
10” from
base

6 Rapid Figure Ii 50 meters. 10 Standing 40 Time allowed 50

secs, 5 meters. In
magazine. Safety
catch on 5 rounds in
pouch.

Total rds. 40 HPS. 165 Marksman 125. 1st

class 100. 2nd class
80. Those personnel
who pass out as
Marksmen or 1st
Class shots will then
fire 5 rounds
application at 200
meters. And 5
rounds at 300

253
 P.G.O. No. 87

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds
Target

H.P.S.
Detail
Serial
meters. This last
practice will enable
commanding
officers to select
marksmen for
competitions. It will
not be used for
classifications nor
will the results be
included in the
annual return except
form the point of
ammunition
expenditure.

254
 P.G.O. No. 87

APPENDIX “E”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE NO. 5 – RIFLE – INSTRUCTIONAL – GENERAL POLICE
SCHEDULE “E”

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds
Target

H.P.S.
Detail
Serial

1 Grouping 4’ grouping 100 5 Lying 25 Wrist and

meters. forearm rested

2 Application 4’ 100 5 Lying in the 20 Scoring 4, 3, 2,

meters. open 1.

3 Application Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standing 20 Scoring 4, 3.

4 Volley firing Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standing 20 Conditions as in

with black course No. 1
patch 41/2 x serial 5.
8” and 10”
from base

Total 20 H.P.S. 85
rounds

255
 P.G.O. No. 87
APPENDIX “F”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE NO. 6 RIFLE – CLASSIFICATION – GENERAL POLICE
SCHEDULE “F”

Rounds

H.P.S.

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Target

Detail
Serial

1 Grouping 4’ grouping 100 5 Lying in the 25

(aiming meters. open
mark)

2 Application 4’ 100 5 Lying in the 20 Scoring 4, 3, 2, 1.

meters. open

3 Application Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standing 20 Scoring 4, 3.

4 Application Figures II 100-50 5 Standing 40 5 rds. From 100

meters. meters. – on
command
“Forward” double
to 50 meters.,
reload and fire 5
rds.

5 Volley firing Figure II 50 meters. 5 Standing 20 Volley firing in

with black accordance with
patch 41/2 x course No. 1,
8” and 10” serial 5.
from base

Total rounds. 30 HPS. 125 Marksman 97, 1st

class 84, 2nd class
65. Those
personnel who
pass out as
Marksmen or 1st
class shots will
then fire 5 rds
application at 200
meters. And 5 rds.
At 300 meters.
This last practice
will enable
commanding
officers to select
marksmen for
competitions. It
will not be used
for classification

256
 P.G.O. No. 87
nor will the results
be included in the
Annual return
except from the
point of
ammunition
expenditure.

257
 P.G.O. No. 87

APPENDIX “G”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE NO.7 – REVOLVER/PISTOL – INSTRUCTIONAL
SCHEDULE “G”
(To be fired by Trainees during their initial training only)

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds
Target

H.P.S.
Detail
Serial

1 Application Figures II 3 meter 5 R. Hand 20 All hits to

(Black patch and 5 double count. A black
rectangle 16” meters. action 2 rectangle will
x 12”) rds. @ 3 be pasted on to
meters. 3 the centre of
Rds. @ 5 the “body” of
meters. No the figure
timing. target. Hits
within this
rectangle – 4
points. Hits
elsewhere on
the figure
target – 2
points.

2 Application As for serial 1 5 Firer uses 20

left hand

3 Application Figure II ( as 10 meters. 5 R. Hand 20 Scoring as in

above) double serial 1.
action No.
timing

4 Application As for Serial 3 5 Firer uses 20 Scoring as in

left hand serial 1.

5 Application Figure II (as 15 meters. 5 R. or 20 Scoring in

above) Hand as serial 1.
suits Firer.
No timing

Total Rds. 25 H.P.S. 100

258
 P.G.O. No. 87
APPENDIX “H”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE NO. 8 – REVOLVER/PISTOL – CLASSIFICATION
SCHEDULE “H”

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds
Target

H.P.S.
Detail
Serial

1 Application Figure II 10 meters. 5 Pistol loaded in 20 Figure II target no

holster, flap aiming mark or scoring
buttoned. Timing rectangle. All its on
by whistle. Draw “body” of target count
and Fire on first 4 pts. Hits elsewhere –
whistle. Stop on 3 pts.
second whistle.
Time allowed 10
seconds in all.
Either hand.
Double or single
action as suits firer

2 Application As for serial 1 5 Firer uses other 20 Scoring as in Serial 1.

hand. Time 10
seconds

3 Application Figure II 15 meters. 5 As in serial 1 but 20 Scoring as in serial 1.

time allowed to be
15 seconds. Single
or double action as
suits firer. Left or
right hand.

4 Application Figure II 20 meters. 5 Pistol loaded in 20 Scoring as in serial 1

holster. Time plus bonus of 5 points
allowed 25 if four or more shots
seconds. Single or are on the body of the
double action. target.
Right or left hand,
as suits firer.

Total Rds. 20 H.P.S. 85

CLASSIFICATION POINTS

Marksman 75 points

1st class 60 points

259
 P.G.O. No. 87
2nd class 50 points

F.T.Q. Below 50 points.

260
 P.G.O. No. 87

APPENDIX “I”
TO P.G.O. 87
COURSE NO. 9 SUB-MACHINE CARBINE
SCHEDULE “I”

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds

Details
Target

H.P.S.
Serial

1 Under 20 12 1 Figure II To be fired in 4 or 5 bursts from 24” Scoring: 2 points for

Instructi meter with the shoulder using sights. Time each hit in the rectangle.
on s. inscribed 9 secs. 1 point for each hit
Bursts rectangle 8” elsewhere on the target.
x 12”. No
aiming mark

2 Annual 25 5 As for serial To be fired from the shoulder 15 Scoring: 3 points for a hit
Classific meter 1” black using sights. Charge lever at in the rectangle: 2 points
ation: s. aiming mark “R”. for a hit elsewhere on the
Single target.
Rounds

3 Bursts 20 10 As per serial To be fired in 4 or 5 bursts from 20 Scoring: 2 points for

meter 1 the shoulder using sights. Time each hit in the rectangle;
s. 8 secs. 1 point for each hit
elsewhere on the target.

4 Single 20 8 4 Figures Iis To be fired by alignment of 28 Scoring 3 points for each

rounds meter spaced 1 sights from the shoulder, hit whether once or more,
s. width apart Charge lever at “R”. 1 shot at plus two points for each
with each target right to left. 1 shot at shot within the rectangle.
inscribed each target left to right. Time 10
rectangle 8” secs.
x 12”

5. Bursts 15 10 4 Figure Is To be fired in 4 or 5 bursts by 32 Scoring: 3 points for

meter as for serial sense of direct in from the each target hit whether
s. 4 waist. Time 8 secs. hit once or more, plus 2
points for each shot
within the rectangle.

6 Bursts 25 to 9 As for serial Firer commences at 30 meters. 30

and 10 4 Advances to 25 meters. And
single fires from shoulder at No. 1
shots target. Repeat at 20 meters. At
No. 2 target. Advance to 15
meters. And fire at No. 3 target.
Repeat at 10 meters. At No. 4
target. Time for firing at each

261
 P.G.O. No. 87

Remarks
Distance
Practice

Rounds

Details
Target

H.P.S.
Serial
range 2 secs. Charge lever at
automatic “A”.

Total rds. 42 HPS. 125 Marksman -115

1st Class -100
2nd class - 85
3rd class - 65.
FTQ. - Below 65.
*Not to be included in
total

262
 P.G.O. No. 87
APPENDIX “J”
TO ) P.G.O. 87
RETURN OF ANNUAL RANGE COURSE RESULT
Station ............................................................................ 20 .......................
N.B. Enter classification as follows (actual score not required):
1 class, 2nd class, Fail
st

Rank No. Name Rifle Revolver/Pistol Sterling

263
 P.G.O. No. 88
RANGE COURSES – TEAR SMOKE
1. Regional Commanders, and COs. TRC and TAZARA Police shall arrange that
regular half-yearly tear smoke courses are held at all Stations and Units issued with
tear smoke equipment. One quarter of the total stock of shells, grenades and T.792
cartridges new models held in each Station and Unit shall be expended each year
on these courses. The oldest stocks of shells and grenades shall be fired first and
T.792 cartridges shall not be fired until all shells and grenades have been used up.

2. Every tear smoke course shall be fired under the personal supervision of a Gazetted
Officer and only with the authority of a Commanding Officer.

3. As a general rule, courses at Class “A” Stations and Field Force Units shall be fired
in conjunction with riot drill. Combined courses for both General Duties and Field
Force Unit personnel may also be held if stocks of expendable tear smoke are
insufficient for effective separate courses.

4. All available General duties and Field Force Unit personnel shall attend these
courses.

5. All ranks attending the courses shall wear respirators and shall be marched through
concentrations of smoke to accustom them to “action” conditions.

6. Goggles will also be worn as an alternative to respirators, but NOT when T.792
smoke is fired.

7. Stations and Units shall indent, at once, on their Regional Headquarters for
replacement shells, grenades, cartridges, etc., and Commanding Officers shall
similarly indent on the Quartermaster so that all expended rounds are replaced with
the minimum of delay.

8. This Order shall not apply to the Police Training School Moshi and the Police
Training School Zanzibar where courses may be arranged to suit training
programmes.

9. This P.G.O. is subject to occasional temporary modification in Force Orders when

stocks of tear smoke equipment fall below a safe level.

264
 P.G.O. No. 89
RANGE DISCIPLINE
Range Officer

1. All firing practices on police ranges shall be under the direct control of a Range
Officer, who shall be a Gazetted Officer or confirmed Inspector. The Range
Officer shall appoint an N.C.O. as Butt Officer to take charge of the butt party.

Preliminary Precautions

2. The Range Officer shall not permit firing to commence until:-

(a) He is satisfied that all persons have been cleared from the range;

(b) He has posted look-out personnel, if such are required;

(c) A large red flag has been hoisted in a conspicuous position, easily visible
to all persons approaching the range; this flag shall not be lowered until
firing is ended;

(d) The butt party is in position in the butts;

(e) Red flags have been placed in position on the butts and firing point.

The Firing Party

3. The Range Officer shall take command of the firing party on arrival at the range
and shall:-

(a) place the firing party behind and clear of the firing point

(b) instruct the firing party in range discipline;

(c) explain the practices to be fired;

(d) form and record the firing details and allocate targets;

(e) place the coaches, ammunition party and telephone orderlies (if any) in
their correct positions;

(f) where no range telephone is available arrange communication with the

butts by signal (whistle or bugle);

(g) satisfy himself that the range is clear and that the look-out personnel (if
any) are properly posted;

(h) inform the Butt Officer that he is ready to fire;

(i) form up the first details on the firing point opposite their targets and issue
ammunition;

(j) take down the red flag on the firing point as soon as the Butt flag is
lowered, give the order to load and open fire, weapons shall be pointed
towards the butts when loading;

265
 P.G.O. No. 89
(k) unload and inspect all weapons at the end of each practice and order the
details to leave the firing point; weapons shall be pointed towards the butts
when unloading;

(l) on leaving the firing point, each detail will collect and hand in their
empties, unexpended ammunition and misfires, to be dealt with in
accordance with para. 10.

(m) raise the red flag on the firing point and inform the Butt Officer that firing
has ceased;

(n) form up the next detail on the firing point and carry on firing;

(o) on completion of firing, check scores with the Butt Register, enter names
of details and sign the Butt Register;

(p) ensure that all empties are handed in; that the range is cleaned and that all
targets are put away before the firing party leaves the range.

(q) carry out a weapon inspection before fires leave the range and search their
pouches for any live rounds, each will be asked whether he has any live
ammunition and they will be warned of the serious consequences of being
in possession of live ammunition at any time except when it is issued for
operational reasons or when on the range for the purpose of firing.

Firing Point Discipline

4. (a) No-one, except the firing detail, the coaches and the Range Officer and his
Assistant shall be allowed on the firing point.

(b) No weapon shall be loaded without orders from the Range Officer.

(c ) No drill cartridges shall be taken onto the firing point.

(d) No-one shall speak on the firing point without the permission of the Range
Officer

Suspension of Firing

5. (a) Red flags shall be raised both on the butts and on the firing point if the
Range Officer or Butt Officer wishes to suspend firing. The range Officer
shall at once order firing to cease and shall inform the Butt Officer that he
has done so. Safety catches shall be applied and rifles laid on their left
sides. Magazines shall be removed from automatic weapons. Weapons on
the firing point shall not be touched and everyone shall stand up.

(b) If any person enters the danger zone, or if a “look-out” blows his whistle,
firing shall be suspended forthwith and shall not be resumed until the
Range Officer is satisfied that the range is clear.

(c) The Butt Officer shall not permit any member of the butt party to leave
the safety of the butts until he has been informed by the Range Officers
that firing has ceased.

(d) Red flags shall remain flying on the butts and on the firing point while

266
 P.G.O. No. 89
firing is suspended. Under no circumstances shall firing be resumed until
the flags have been lowered.

The Butt Party

6. (a) The Butt Party shall be under the direct control of the Butt Officer.

(b) No member of the Butt Party shall leave the butts without the permission
of the Butt Officer. The latter shall not permit anyone to leave the butts
until he has been informed by the range officer that firing has ceased and
until the red flags have been raised on the butts and firing point.

(c) On arrival at the Butts the Butt Officer shall :-

(i) instruct the Butt Party in safety precautions;

(ii) where practicable, detail two personnel to each target frame;

(iii) erect the required targets,

(iv) patch up all old shot holes with the appropriate coloured paper;

(v) check the targets and demarcation of scoring areas for clear
visibility and correct dimensions, aiming patches to be affixed to
targets in accordance with small arms range course instructions
in force and checked for accuracy;

(vi) test the target mechanism and range telephone (if any);

(vii) Rehearse the markers in their duty,

(viii) Ensure that all butt equipment is ready.

(d) The following procedure shall be followed when firing is under progress:

(i) Where two markers have been allocated to each target, one
marker shall watch the bank beyond the target to note the strike
of the shorts and the direction of the misses. The second marker
shall watch the target.

(ii) In practices other than groping, shots shall be signalled correctly,

in accordance with paragraph 7.

(iii) Targets shall only be lowered on the command “check” or

“down” or on a pre-arranged whistle signal. When targets have
been lowered the markers shall stand away and shall not touch
the target until the Butt Officer has recorded the scores and given
the order to “patch up”.

(iv). At the end of a timed practice, targets shall be half-lowered to

prevent additional shots appearing on a clear target.

(v) There is no signalling during timed practices but scores will be

signalled at the end of the practice or reported over the telephone

267
 P.G.O. No. 89
(vi) Targets for snap shooting shall be raised to a uniform height and
consistently positioned, unless the conditions of the practice state
otherwise. Where practicable they shall be raised straight up and
down and not swung up from the side. Care should be taken to
avoid straying off patches when targets are raised or lowered.
Snap shooting targets shall be raised in the correct position and
for the prescribed interval before firing begins to enable the
firing detail to check for height and position.

(e) Targets shall be checked at the end of each practice and scores recorded
in the Butt Register. Any corrections to the Register shall be initialled by
the Butt Officer.

(f) The Butt Officer shall inform the Range Officer if any target receives hits
in excess of the number authorized

(g) After targets have been checked or the shots recorded, shot holes shall be
marked off with a pencil and patched up.

(h) When all firing is finished, the targets shall be patched up and all range
equipment put away. At least two personnel shall be detailed to carry 4
ft./6ft. targets.

Signalling

7. (a) Shots shall be signalled at the butts by a disc marker painted white on one
side and black on the other, mounted on a light wooden pole at least 8 ft.
in length.

(b) Shots shall be signalled as follows:-

(i) Bull – The white side of the marker exposed over the bull.

(ii) Inner – The black side of the marker waved twice across the
target.

(iii) Magpie – The marker revolved twice in front of the target.

(iv) Outer – The black side of the marker moved vertically twice up
and down on the left side of the targets.

(v) Miss – The red flag to be raised on the side of the target. If the
direction of the miss cannot be determined, the flag shall be
waved across the target.

(vi) Ricochet – The flag shall be exposed at the bottom of the target.

(c) The strike of each shot shall be signalled by pointing the top of the
marking disc at the shot hole in the target.

(d) Individual shots in grouping practices shall not be signalled. Details

should, if possible inspect their targets at the end of each grouping
practice. If this is impossible, the following signals shall be made:-

(i) 4” Group – Signal as for a bull

268
 P.G.O. No. 89
(ii) 8” Group – Signal as for inner.

(iii) 2” Group – Signal as for magpie.

(iv) In each case the apex of the marker shall be placed on the mean
point of impact (MPI).

(v) 12” and 1 wide – Signal as for outer and point the apex of the
marker at the centre of the four shots. The wide shot shall be
disregarded.

(vi) No Group – Signal as for miss.

(e) In snap-shooting practices, immediately the targets have been struck, they
will be twisted around quickly and brought down ready for the next
exposure.

(f) Individual shots in timed practices shall not be signalled; Scores will be
telephone or otherwise communicated from the butts at the end of the
practice.

(g) Shots cutting any scoring line shall carry the higher score; shots cutting
the edge of any figure or snap target shall count as hits.

(h) Spotting discs shall be used for advanced and competition shooting.

Scoring

8. (a) Scoring for grouping practices at 100 meter shall be as follows :-

(i) 4” Group – 25 points

(ii) 8” Group – 20 points

(iii) 12” Group – 15 points

(iv) 12” Group and 1 wide – 10 points.

Groups shall be measured by wire rings 4”, 8” and 12” in diameter. No points shall be
awarded unless there are five shot holes on the scoring surface of the target. If there are
more than five shot holes the practice shall be fired again. A12” group and 1 wide will only
score if the wide shot is on the scoring surface of the target. Ricochets do not count.

(b) Scoring for other than grouping practices shall be as laid down from time
to time in range course instructions.

9. All scores shall be entered in the appropriate Range Registers (P.F. 94 and P.F.95).

10. All empties from ammunition fired on courses or at any other time will be
collected and returned to store, to be disposed of in accordance with instructions
which may be issued from time to time. MISFIRES are NOT to be counted as
empties and MUST NOT be placed in the containers with empties. MISFIRES are
still potentially “live rounds” and must be treated as such.

269
 P.G.O. No. 89
Miniature and 25-meter Ranges

11. (a) When it is necessary to examine the targets, rifles will be unloaded and
laid on the firing point with the breeches open. The red flag will be raised
before anyone approaches the targets.

(b) During inspection weapons will be held parallel to the ground and
pointing at the targets.

Pistols

12. (a) Pistols will be kept in their cases until required for use. When out of the
case they will be carried at the rest position. During loading and
unloading and all the time they are loaded pistols will be pointed towards
the butts.

(b) After firing with the pistol the supervising officer will give the order “.
No person shall be permitted to move towards the target until the officer
in charge gives the order to do so.

Small Arms Training Manual

13. Gazetted Officers and Inspectors are required to study and make themselves
familiar with the Police Manual of Small Arms Training.

Weapon Training

14. Daily periods of weapon training, as laid down in Appendix “A” to PGO 87 -
Police Annual Small Arms Range Courses Instructions, should be carried out for at
least six weeks prior to firing the annual course. Weapon training will also be
included in the normal training schedule throughout the year

270
 P.G.O. No. 90
RIOT DRILL

General
1. Riot Drill shall be carried out in accordance with the procedure laid down in the
official Police Riot Manual. No divergence of any kind is permitted and all words of
command must be given in exact compliance with the Manual.

2. (a) A full Riot Drill practice parade of at least one hour’s duration shall be
carried out once per week by all Class “A” and “B” Stations and Field Force
Units.

(b) Similar arrangements will also be made by the Commandants, Police

College and Police Training Schools (Moshi and Zanzibar) and COs.
Railways (T.R.C. and TAZARA) Police.

(c) Commanding Officers may temporarily exempt Stations with insufficient

manpower to form a Minor Riot Unit.

3. All Riot Drill parades shall be carried out under the personal supervision of the
following officers:

(a) District H.Q. Stations – by the O/C. District.

(b) Other Class “B” Stations – by the officer in charge.

(c) Field Force Units – by the O/C. Unit.

(d) Elsewhere – by a Gazetted Officer.

Supervision will be delegated to the next most senior officer, if and only if, the
above mentioned officers are unavoidably absent in Court or on safari.

4. Commanding Officers should also attend if present in their Headquarters.

5. All available General Duties Gazetted Officers and Inspectors shall also attend and
shall be tested in their ability to handle a Riot Unit.

6. Parades shall be held both on a parade ground or suitable open space and in quite
roads. Care shall be taken not to interfere with traffic or inconvenience or frighten
the general public in any way, but every effort shall otherwise be made to carry out
the drill in realistic surroundings.

7. Commanding Officers shall ensure that all ranks are fully conversant with Riot Drill
and are capable of operating efficiently in every section of a Riot Unit.

271
 SECTION IV

COMPLIMENT, DISCIPLINE AND CONDUCT

Nos. 101 – 120

P.G.O. No. Title

101. Compliments - Judicial
102. Compliments – Saluting
103. Discipline – Complaints Against Police Officers
104. Discipline – Corruption
105. Discipline – Defaulter Procedure-Inspectorate
106. Discipline – Rank & File
107. Discourtesy
108. Discipline – Donations and Presents from the Public
109. Indebtedness
110. General Rules of Conduct
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.

273
 P.G.O.No.101
COMPLIMENTS – JUDICIAL
Compliments to Judge
1. Police Guards of Honour shall be mounted in each Regional Headquarter with a High
Court Session, to mark the commemoration of the Law Day with exception of Dar es Salaam
where the Guard of Honour will be mounted to commemorate the same on the opening of the
first session of the Court of Appeal. This is usually done in the first week of February each
year.
2. Dates of the commemoration will usually be announced by the Registrar of the Court
of Appeal of Tanzania or the Registrar of the High Court.
3 Guards will be mounted in accordance with paragraph 1 (b) of P.G.O. No. 85
4. Gazetted Officers and InspectorsAllAll officers will wear No. 1 Dress. Gazzetted
Officers and Inspectors , the formerwill to carry swords. Rank & File will paradeRank & File
will parade in Working Dress. in working dress.
5. Regional Commanders are responsible for finalising all arrangements with the
Registrar of the Court of Appeal, Registrar of the High Court, or other court official
accompanying the inspecting Judge.
6. No other Guards, however small, shall be mounted at any Police Station to honour
the arrival of a Judge.
7. The senior police officer available police officer at each station, except in High Court
Zonal centres shall invariably present himself and pay usual compliments whenever a judge
arrives and departs.

274
 P.G.O.No.102

COMPLIMENTS – SALUTING
1 All Assistant Inspectors and above shall salute their superiors in rank.
2. (a) All members of the Rranks and Ffiles of all ranks shall salute all ranks of and
above Assistant Inspectors of all ranks and above.
(b) Assistant Inspectors under training shall not be saluted within the boundaries of
the Police Training School and Police College by members of the Rank & File.
3. Gazetted Officers and Inspectors in command of parades shall be saluted by officers of
equal rank.
4 A salute shall invariably be acknowledged by the officer to whom it is accorded and
the acknowledgement shall be definite and appropriate. Acknowledgements shall be made by
the senior of two or more officers saluted at the same time.
5. (a) All ranks in uniform shall salute His Excellency the President of the United
Republic of Tanzania,, His Excellency the Vice President of the United Republic of Tanzania
His Excellency the President of the Revolutionary Government of Zanzibar, the Prime
Minister, Chief Minister (ZBR), the Chief Justices, Speakers of the National Assembly or
House of Representatives (ZBR), the Vice President , the Prime Minister or Chief Minister
(ZBR), all cabinet ministers, Pparliamentary Ssecretaries, Members of Parliament and
Members of the House of Representatives (ZBR) within the precincts of Parliament or House
of Representatives (ZBR) building and within their own constituencies, Regional
Commissioners within their Regions, and Judges of all ranks within the precincts of their
courts.
(b) Inspectors and Rank & File shall also salute District Commissioners within
their Districts and magistrates within the precincts of their Courts.
(c ) Members of the Rank & File shall also salute commissioned officers (in
uniform) of other Forces in Tanzania.
6. Police officers shall not salute out of doors between the hours of 1900 and 0600. They
shall stand to attention only when addressing officers entitled to a salute.
7. Quarter guards, except between the hours of 1900 and 0600, shall turn out and:-
(a) present arms for Gazetted Officers of or above the rank of Superintendent;
(b) stand to attention, with a butt salute by the Guard Commander only, for
Assistant Superintendents and Inspectors.
8. (a) Security sentries armed with rifles, except between the hours of 1900 and 0600,
shall pay normal compliments as laid down in para .8, sub-paras (a) and (b).
(b) Sentries armed with revolvers, or unarmed, shall stand to attention and salute
with the hand for Gazetted Officers and Inspectors.
9. When the National Anthem is played, the following compliments shall be paid unless
orders to the contrary are issued:-
(a) Gazetted officers Officers and Inspectors in uniform shall stand to attention and
salute., except when in attendance of His Excellency the President on ceremonial parades
when they will not salute but stand to attention
(b) Rank & File in uniform shall stand to attention, but not salute
(c)© All ranks in mufti shall stand to attention and remove their hats.
10. All ranks out of doors within the boundaries of any police compound or barrack
area shall stand to attention when Retreat is sounded.

275
 P.G.O.No.102
10. All ranks out of doors within the boundaries of any police compound or barrack area
shall stand to attention when Retreat is sounded.
11. (a) All ranks, except Defaulters, when appearing before an officer entitled to a
salute, shall march up, halt, turn towards the officer and salute
(b) Defaulters shall comply with the procedure in sub-paragraph (a) above, but
shall not salute.
12. Police officers shall not pay complements when interference with the performance of
their duty would result, and, in particular, when:-
(a) on traffic point duty;
(b) engaged on enquiries and wearing plain clothes;
(c ) driving or riding in or on a motor vehicle, motorcycle or bicycle;
(d) escorting prisoners.
13. Compliments shall be paid in accordance with Appendix A.

276
 P.G.O.No.102

APPENDIX “A”TO P.G.O. No.102

SALUTES
PART I
(In this Appendix “uniform” shall mean “Full uniform” unless the contrary is stated
HOW AND WHEN TO SALUTE
Occasion Compliments
1. In uniform, with rifle sloped, at the halt. Give butt salute
2. In uniform, with rifle sloped, on the Eyes left or right, and give butt salute.
march.
3. In uniform, with rifle not sloped, at the Slope arms and give butt salute, OR
halt stand to attention if unable to slope
arms in time.
4 In uniform, with rifle not sloped, on the Slope arms, eyes left or right, and give
march. butt salute
5 In uniform, no rifle, at the halt. Stand to attention and salute with the
hand (except in Orderly Room)
6 In uniform, no rifle, on the march. Eyes left or right, and salute with the
hand.
7 In uniform, without head-gear, at the halt. Stand to attention only.
8 In uniform, without head-gear, on the Eyes left or right only.
march.
9 In uniform, carrying a cane at the halt and Cane drill, in accordance with W.O.
on the march. publication “Drill (All Arms) 1951”,
Chapter VIII.
10 In uniform, carrying anything (except rifle Disengage the right hand, stand to
or cane) in one hand, at the halt. attention and salute.
11 In uniform, carrying anything (except rifle Disengage the right hand, eyes left of
or cane, in one hand on the march. right, and salute
12 In uniform, carrying anything in both Stand to attention, OR put whatever is
hands, at the halt. being carried down on the ground, and
salute with the hand.
13 In uniform, carrying anything in both Eyes left or right, OR if impossible to
hands on the march. do so, no compliment will be given.
14 In uniform, sitting down Stand to attention and salute with the
hand.
15 In uniform, without head-gear, sitting Stand to attention only.
down.
16 In mufti and hat, at the halt, and sitting Stand to attention and raise the hat.
down
17 In mufti and hat on the march. Raise the hat.
18 In mufti without a hat, at the halt and Stand to attention only.
sitting down.
19 In mufti, without a hat, on the march Eyes left or right
20 When a group of police officers is The senior officer present shall call
approached by an officer entitled to a the group to attention and shall,
salute. himself, pay the appropriate
compliment in accordance with this
order.

277
 P.G.O.No.102

SWORD DRILL
PART II
SALUTING WITH A SWORD AT THE HALT
1. First Motion – Bring the sword to the recover.
2 Second motion – Bring forward towards the mouth and Lower lower the sword sharply
to the right side to the full extent of the right arm, edge to the left, point 12 inches from the
ground and straight to the front, thumb flat along the handle, fingers gripping it, right hand
just behind the thigh.
3. Third Motion – Bring the sword to the recover.
4 Fourth Motion – Return to the position of the carry.
SALUTING WITH A SWORD ON THE MARCH
56. In slow time – The movement starts from the carry, as the left foot comes to the
ground and on the word of command “Eyves-right”. The movement lasts over four paces,
finishing on the right foot. There is no pause between the movements, which will be carried
out as one graceful gesture.
76. First Motion – Shoot the right arm out to the right, arm horizontal at shoulder height
and square off to the right, blade perpendicular, edge to the right. At the same time turn the
head and eyes to the right.
87. Second motion – Carry the sword round in a sweep, keeping the blade perpendicular
and the hand and elbow in the same plane as the shoulder, by bending the elbow to bring the
hilt to the mount, with the sword in the position of the recover. The elbow is kept level with
the shoulder and the thumb remains round the handle.
98 Third Motion – Continue the sweep to bring the hilt to the point of the right shoulder.
At the same time, keeping the edge to the left, change the grip so that the thumb points up the
side of the handle, The elbow is still shoulder high with the upper arm square off to the right,
forearms horizontal, hand inline with the mouth.
109. Forth Motion – Lower the sword sharply to the position of the salute. The timing is as
follows:-
(a) Left foot comes to the ground – shoot the right arm out.
(b) Right foot comes to the ground – sword at the recover.
(c) Left foot comes to the ground – sword at the right shoulder.
(d) Right foot comes to the ground – point lowered
10 “Eyes-Front”- As the left fot comes to the ground, turn the head and eyes to the front
and at the same time bring the sword to the position of the recover, elbow close to the side.
As the left foot next comes to the ground, bring the sword down to the position of the carry.
1111. In quick time – The sword will be retained at the carry. Head and eyes will be turned to
the front on the word of command.

278
 P.G.O.No.103
DISCIPLINE – COMPLAINTS AGAINST POLICE OFFICERS
1. Every complaint or allegation, however trivial, against a member of the Force shall be
reported at once to the Regional Commander of the Region in which the complaint or
allegation is made.
2 Regional Commanders shall be directly responsible for thorough and immediate
investigation into all such complaint and may request other Commanding Officers to make
enquiries on their behalf. They shall submit a full case file with a detailed covering report to
reach the Inspector General within fourteen days in respect of every case which in their
opinion may require disciplinary or court proceedings. Case files involving personnel not
under the command of the Regional Commander responsible for the investigation shall be
sent to the Inspector General via the commanding officer concerned, in order that the latter
may include his own remarks therein.
3 Regional Commanders may authorisze defaulter proceedings in minor cases and will
then forward the case file to the Inspector General showing the result of the case. All cases of
a serious nature must be referred to the Inspector General via the Director of Criminal
Investigation before defaulter or other proceedings are instituted.
4 All serious cases which may require the offending officer’s prosecution before a court
must be personally investigated by a Regional Commander or Gazetted Officer acting under
his personal direction. All such cases must be referred to the Inspector General via the
Director of Criminal Investigation, by signal if necessary, with the Regional Commander’s
recommendations, before court proceedings are initiated.
5. It is of the utmost importance that every complaint should receive immediate and
through investigation. Every police officer who receives such a complaint must report it at
once to the O/C. of his police station who must at once inform the nearest Gazetted Officer.
O/C. Stations are responsible for immediately securing any witnesses or evidence relevant to
the complaint. If a Gazetted Officer is not immediately available, they must carry out
preliminary investigations themselves and await further instructions from Regional
Headquarters.
6. In exceptional cases, where no Gazetted Officer can be made available for some
considerable time, an Inspector may be authoriszed to handle the whole investigation.
7. As a general rule, the officer-in-charge of such investigations must be senior to the
officer against whom a complaint is made.
8. Every complaint against a police officer must been entered in the Report Book of the
Station where the compliant is made.

279
 P.G.O.No.104

DISCIPLINE – CORRUPTION
1. The good name of the Police Force and the reputation of its members depend on the
honesty and integrity of each serving police officer. Every corruption or corrupt practice and
every suspicion of corruption to be deduced from police inactivity or peculiar activity reflects
on the reputation of the Force.
2. Any Police officer who suspects or knows of corruption or corrupt practice among his
colleagues in the Force but adopts a passive attitude on the grounds that it is excusable, old
custom, or nothing to do with him, is an accessory to the corruption and is, therefore,
culpable. Those in position of authority who fail to report the existence or suspected
existence of corruption leave themselves open to suspicion of connivance.
3. There is no possible excuse for corruption and action against those found to be corrupt
will be merciless. No member of the Force who is suspected of corruption can be considered
for promotion until the suspicion is cleared in accordance with the Police Force Service
Regulations.
4. When a corrupt situation is proved to exist, or when illegal action is allowed to
continue and become common knowledge as the obvious result of corruption, every police
officer serving in the area is liable to be called to account. Action against corruption is the
responsibility of every member of the Force.
5. All ranks are warned against association with persons engaged in questionable
occupations. Failure to report an illegal act committed by a friend is a serious offence and is
bound to create suspicion of corruption.
6. Any attempt to victimise persons who have assisted in the detection of corruption will
result in instant dismissal from the Force.
7. Every police officer who has any suspicion or knowledge of corruption shall make an
immediate report to his O/C. District or to any Gazetted Officer.
8. If any police officer observes any member of the Force receiving what appears to be
an illegal gratification, he will ascertain the number rank , and the name and address of the
person paying over the gratification. He should seize any money paid over in his presence
and report at once to the senior officer in station, who shall immediately inform his
Commanding Officer.
9. Any person who offers an illegal gratification to a police officer shall be arrested, the
gratification seized and a report made at once to the nearest police station.
10. A Case File shall be opened into every case of corruption, whether or not such
corruption is complete or attempted, or merely alleged or suspected, and whether or not a
police officer is involved as a guilty or innocent party.
11. Regional Commanders shall report at once to the Inspector General if legal
proceedings are contemplated against any member of the Force and shall in every case,
forward the case file to the Inspector General via the Director of Criminal Investigation.

280
 P.G.O.No.105
DISCIPLINE – DEFAULTER PROCEDURE – INSPECTORATE
1. Every member of the Inspectorate who commits or is reasonably suspected of having
committed an offence against the Force Disciplinary Code (set out at Appendix “A” of
P.G.O. 106106) may be dealt with as a defaulter, in accordance with the provisions of Police
Force Service Regulations, 1995. See in particular Regulation C.6 of Police Force Service
Regulations, 1995.
2. Careful enquiries shall be made into every offence alleged to have been committed by
members of the Inspectorate in accordance with the procedure laid down in paras. 2- 13, and
17 of P.G.O. 106106. In every case, a preliminary report shall be submitted to the O/C.
District or Unit for onward transmission to the Commanding Officer.
3 When it appears to a Commanding Officer that there is a prima facie case of breach of
discipline against an Inspector serving under his command, he shall inform the Inspector
thereof, in writing and request him to submit his explanation, in writing within seven days.
After seven days the facts of the case, together with any explanation received from the
Inspector, shall be forwarded to the Inspector General.
4. The Inspector General will then frame a charge or charges if he is satisfied that there is
sufficient evidence to justify disciplinary proceedings. P.F. 32 will not be used. The charges
will then be sent to the Inspector, through his Commanding Officer, with a covering letter
requiring him to plead “Guilty” or “Not Guilty” to each charge, in writing, within seven days.
The Commanding Officer will arrange for the letter and the charge to be served, without
delay, on the Inspector.
5. If the Inspector wishes to plead “Guilty” to any charge(s) he may add to his written
plea any matter which he desires to be taken into consideration concerning the case and this
will be forwarded with the Commanding Officer’s comments to the Inspector General. The
Inspector General will then impose a punishment if he accepts the plea of “Guilty”.
6. (a) In case where a plea of “Not Guilty” is submitted, the Inspector General will
appoint a Tribunal consisting of an officer of the rank of Assistant Commissioner or higher,
or two Gazetted Officers, naming one as President, neither of whom shall be the originator of
the complaint.
(b) In addition, the Inspector General will appoint a prosecutor whose role shall be
to prosecute the charge as laid down by the Inspector General. (Note. There is no authority to
substitute or amend a charge as laid by the Inspector General). It will be the duty of the
prosecutor to arrange for the gathering of evidence and securing witnesses.
(c) An Inspector shall at all times have the right to be represented by another
Inspector, or with the Inspector General’s permission, by a Gazetted Officer. Advocates may
not appear.
(d) The Inspector charged shall be given copies of or reasonable access to such
police records and other documents as he requires which are necessary to enable him to
prepare his defence, other than any records or documents in respect of which the Inspector
General is of the opinion that privilege could be claimed before a court.
7. The manner in which the case shall be heard shall, in so far as is applicable, be in
accordance with paras. 23-30 of Police General Order No. 106.
8. The greatest care will be exercised in the conduct of the hearings. It should be
realiszed that in the event of an appeal, the tribunal record will be scrupulously reviewed by
the ………appellate authority and cases will be invalidated if faults or omissions in the
administration of justice by the Tribunal are disclosed. The procedure laid down in the Police
Force Service Regulations must invariably be followed without deviation.
9. (a) When a Tribunal has concluded the hearing it shall forward the record of the
inquiry together with its finding on each of the charges and the reasons therefore, and its

281
 P.G.O.No.105
recommendations as to an award, to the Commanding Officer. The Commanding Officer will
then add his comments on both the finding and the recommendations and submit the case
papers to the Inspector General.
(b) The Inspector General may:-
(i) confirm all or any of the findings or substitute for any finding of the
tribunal any other finding at which the tribunal could have arrived upon the evidence, and
himself make an award in relation thereto or, if he considers that the circumstances of the case
are such as to warrant dismissal, he shall report the case to the Permanent Secretary together
with a record of all the proceedings therein and his findings and recommendation for
dismissal, and the Permanent Secretary may dismiss the Inspector or remit the case to the
Inspector General, in which case the Inspector General may award any punishment stated in
paragraph 10 to this order; or

(ii) quash any finding and acquit the defaulter in respect thereof or order a
retrial on such charge or charges as he may specify.

Punishment
10. One or more of the following punishments may be awarded by the Inspector General
to an Inspector who pleads or has been found guilty of an offence against discipline:-
(a) a fine not exceeding one month's pay;
(b) stoppage or deferment of increment;
(c) reduction in grade;
(d) reprimand.

11. (a) The Inspector General will inform the defaulter in writing of the punishment or
action taken and the letter conveying the information will normally be served on him by his
Commanding Officer or by a GazettedGazetted Officer acting on the instructions of the
Commanding Officer.
(b) In the event of a recommendation being made for his dismissal, the Inspector
will normally remain under interdiction – paras. 35-40 of P.G.O. No. 106106 refer.

Right of Appeal
12, (a) Every Inspector has a right of appeal against the award of any punishment
within seven days from the notification of the punishment to him and may appeal to the
Permanent Secretary by a petition, in writing containing any representations relevant to the
exercise of the powers of the Permanent Secretary regarding the punishment.
(b) The defaulter will submit his appeal through the normal channels to his
Commanding Officer who will forward it with his comments to the Inspector General for
submission to the Permanent Secretary.

Documentation
13. O/C. Districts and Units are responsible that action is taken after cases have been
finalised to implement the punishment. Entries will not be made in the Defaulter’s Register
but punishments awarded shall be published in Force Orders. All punishments published in
Force Orders shall be recorded without delay in the appropriate space on Record of Service
Cards P.F. 104A and in the Service Register PF. 104. The proceedings will be retained on the
officer’s confidential file at Police Headquarters.

282
 P.G.O.No.106

DISCIPLINE – DEFAULTER PROCEDURE – RANK & FILE

General
1. (a) This general order lays down the procedure to be followed for defaulters from
the Rank & File and amplifies the existing legislation laid down in the Police
Force Service Regulations, 1995.
(b) Throughout this Order the term “Commanding Officer” means a Regional
Commander, the Director of Criminal Investigation, the Commissioner of
Police Zanzibar, the Director of Crime Intelligence Unit, Commandants Police
Training School and Police College, CO Field Force Unit, CO. TAZARA
Division, CO. Railways Police, the Chief Signals Officer, CO Airports
Division, CO Marine Police Unit, CO Stock Theft Prevention Unit, CO
Medical Unit, the Quartermaster, O/C Police Band Dar es Salaam, CO Dog
and Horse Unit.

Defaulters
2. Gazetted Officers, Inspectors and Non-Commissioned Officers are responsible for the
discipline of the personnel under their command. They shall ensure that every report,
allegation and complaint against any of their personnel is thoroughly and properly
investigated and that no offence, however trivial, is overlooked. Formal defaulter
proceedings in the case of very minor offences and irregularities are not always
necessary or advisable and senior officers may deal with them informally. All other
offences shall be dealt with by official disciplinary proceedings and Gazetted Officers
are responsible that these proceedings are conducted expeditiously and in accordance
with the provisions of this order and Regulation C.7 of the Police Force Service
Regulations, 1995.
3. Every member of the Rank & File who commits or who is reasonably suspected of
having committed an offence against the Force Disciplinary Code (offences are listed
at Appendix “A”) may be dealt with as a defaulter. Disciplinary proceedings may be
instituted as the result of a report by a police officer or by any other person.
4. The recorded proceedings in every defaulter case shall be in two parts. The first part
is the preliminary enquiry into the alleged offence. The second part is the record of
evidence taken when the case is tried by an officer so empowered to hear it.
5. The preliminary enquiry, however short, must be prepared in order that the apparent
truth or falsehood of the complaint or allegation can be assessed and a decision
reached as to whether or not a disciplinary charge should be laid against the alleged
offender.

INITIATION OF DEFAULTER PROCEEDINGS

Complaints by Members of the Public

6. Every complaint and allegation against any Police officer by a member of the public
shall be investigated with the greatest care in accordance with the provisions of
P.G.O. No. 103, every case will be referred to a Commanding Officer and serious
cases requiring disciplinary or court proceedings will be forwarded to the Inspector
General with the Commanding Officer’s recommendations. Where it is shown that a
breach of discipline has occurred, instructions will be given for the defaulter to be
charged and the final action against the alleged offender shall be shown in P.F. 32 and
Defaulter Charge Sheet Copy P.F. 32A. It is essential, in the interests of the Force,
that the truth or falsehood of each allegation is established with the minimum of
delay. Ponderous and unnecessary paper work shall be avoided.
7. Disciplinary proceedings shall be taken on an anonymous complaint only if there are
good grounds for believing that the complaint is justified.

283
 P.G.O.No.106
8. Any police officer who is alleged to have committed an assault on a member of the
public shall be informed of the allegation by his O/C. District, Unit or Station as soon
as it is made. Where it is found that there is a prima facie case of assault or bodily
harm against a member of the public, the officer will be prosecuted under the Penal
Code before a Magistrate.
9. Every malicious complaint by a member of the public against the Force or any of its
members shall be reported to a Commanding Officer.

Reports by Members of the Force

10. Any police officer who detects another officer in the actual commission of an offence
shall at once record the basic facts of the offence (date, time, place, offender’s name
and number etc.) in his note book and shall inform the alleged offender that he will be
reported. Names and address of witnesses shall, if possible, be obtained and recorded.
Personnel found asleep on duty will , whenever possible, be awakened in the presence
of a witness. All available evidence of the alleged offence shall be recorded in
statement form without delay and passed to the O/C. of the Station.
11. Any police officer who has good reason to believe either by personal observation or
from any credible source that a member of the Rank & File has committed an offence
shall make a report, in writing, to the O/C. of the Station concerned. He shall, if
possible, produce statements from witness in support of his report.

Action by O/C. Station

12. As soon as an O/C. Station receives a report against a police officer, irrespective of
whether or not such officer is under his command, he shall satisfy himself to the best
of his ability that all available supporting evidence has been recorded and shall,
within forty-eight hours of receiving the original report, forward the preliminary
enquiry to his O/C. District.

Action by O/C. District

13. The O/C. District shall examine every such preliminary enquiry without delay and
shall satisfy himself that all necessary enquiries have been made and all available
evidence is recorded in statement form. He shall, if necessary, proceed himself to the
Station concerned and carry out a personal investigation.
14. If he considers there is sufficient evidence to justify disciplinary proceedings, he shall
frame a charge or charges under the police disciplinary code (see Appendix “A”) on
defaulter charge sheet P.F. 32 and on defaulter charge sheet copy PF. 32A, in
duplicate. Every charge shall commence with a statement of the offence using the
wording set out in the code followed by brief particulars of the actual offence which
must be specific in character, e.g. :-
“You P.C. ................................ being a junior police officer in the Force are charged under
Regulation C.5(iii) of the Police Force Service Regulations with using insubordinate language
to your superior officer in that you, at 1000 hours on 1st July, 2004, in the Charge room of
........................ Police Station did use insubordinate language at Sergeant Major
..................................to wit you said the following words, that
………………………………………………That this language was intended to insubordinate
the said Sergeant Major ……………………………..”
15. (a) If he is unable to decide upon the correct charge or whether or not a charge
should be laid, he shall refer the preliminary enquiry to his Commanding
Officer for instructions and the latter shall frame the charge or otherwise
advise him.
(b) He shall also refer the preliminary enquiry to his Commanding Officer for
instructions where members of a specialised branch of the Force are
concerned, together with recommendations as to the charge(s) to be framed.
16. If he decides that the evidence does not justify disciplinary action, he shall inform the
police officer who is the subject of the report that he will not be defaulted. The case

284
 P.G.O.No.106
papers will then be destroyed.
17. If he receives a report against a police officer not under his command, he shall
forward the case papers without delay to his Commanding Officer for onward
transmission to the commanding officer under whom such police officer is serving.

Duties of O/C. Station

18. If a charge is laid, one copy of the charge on PF. 32 and two copies of PF. 32A shall
be attached to the case papers, PF.32 will be used when the case is heard and utilised
as the file cover. The O/C. Station shall then:-
(a) explain the exact meaning of the charge to the defaulter and ensure that he
fully understands the offence for which he has been defaulted;
(b) warn him that he will be required to plead guilty or not guilty to the charge
when his case is heard;
(c) impress on him that he can call any witnesses to testify in his defence and that
he must produce them, with the assistance of his O/C. Station if necessary, on
the date set for the hearing of his case;
(d) inform him as soon as possible of the date and time he will be required to
attend orderly room and the name of the officer who will hear the case;
(e) inform him that he can request another officer not below him in rank to
accompany and assist him in the defence when the case is heard; and
(f) endorse on P.F. 32 the date upon which the action above was taken.

Date of Hearing
19. Every defaulter shall be allowed at least two days from the date of being informed of
the charges against him to consider his defence and the case shall be heard as soon as
possible after this period has expired. Every defaulter shall be tried without delay and
officers shall hold Orderly Room at regular intervals.

Authority to try Defaulter Cases

20. As a general rule every defaulter shall be tried by the Gazetted Officer under whose
direct command he serves but members of specialised branches of the Force serving
in districts shall be tried by an officer detailed by the commanding officer where no
officer of their own branch is available.
21. Gazetted Officers will invariably hear disciplinary cases and only if a Gazetted
Officer is unable to visit the Station within a reasonable period will an Inspector be
authorised to record a plea and evidence. In such cases the O/C. District, to whom the
proceedings must be sent, shall examine the evidence and give his finding and
punishment. He will then send the case papers for confirmation to the Commanding
Officer with his comments.

Procedure for Hearing a Defaulter Case

22. All preliminary arrangements for the hearing of defaulter cases including the
attendance of interpreters, witnesses and defaulters, shall be made by the
Commanding Officer of the Station where the defaulter is placed.
23. Every defaulter, wearing formal working dress, shall be marched before the officer
hearing the case. He shall stand to attention but shall not salute either at the beginning
or at the end of the proceedings.
24. If a defaulter, prior to the hearing, objects to a particular officer trying his case on the
grounds of partiality or bias, he shall submit his reasons in writing to such officer who
shall adjourn the case and forward the case papers, with the defaulter’s
representations, to the Commanding Officer who may, at his sole discretion, appoint
another officer to hear the case.
25. The officer hearing the case shall first read over the charge(s) to the defaulter, if
necessary through an interpreter, and shall satisfy himself that the defaulter
understands them. He shall then instruct the defaulter to plead guilty or not guilty to

285
 P.G.O.No.106
each charge and shall record his plea(s) separately on the Defaulter Charge Sheet,
P.F.32.
26. A charge may be amended or a new charge substituted before the close of the case for
the prosecution if the original charge is found to be defective or out or order, provided
that the amended or substituted charge is read over and explained to the defaulter. The
defaulter shall be required to plead to such amended or substituted charge and where
necessary shall be granted reasonable time to prepare his defence and call further
witnesses.
27. Every officer empowered to hear a case may summon and examine witnesses and
require the production of all documents relevant to such enquiry. He may also adjourn
the hearing from time to time.
28. Officers hearing cases should pay close attention to the preliminary enquiry report,
which should always be available. It can serve as a guide to the case and to the
reliability of witnesses, who may change their original testimony when the case is
heard. The preliminary enquiry report need not be forwarded when the case papers
are submitted to higher authority unless the report contains information of significant
importance to assist the relevant authority to issue instructions or make a decision
concerning the case.

Plea of Guilty
29. (a) If the defaulter pleads guilty, the officer hearing the case shall record a
summary of the facts and shall record evidence of character, including details
of any previous misconduct or commendations earned. He shall further record
any extenuating circumstances which the defaulter wishes to put forward in
mitigation of his offence and may award a punishment. If the offence is one of
such gravity that the officer hearing the case does not consider that the
punishment he is empowered to award is sufficient to meet the circumstances,
he shall send the proceedings, together with his report, to his Commanding
Officer for the award of a suitable punishment and the defaulter should be
informed that his case has been referred to higher authority.
(b) Whenever a punishment is awarded, the officer hearing the case will address
the defaulter in the following terms:-
“Do you wish to say anything regarding my finding and punishment before I
refer the case to the Commanding Officer for confirmation? Anything you
wish to say will be taken down in writing and will be sent to the Commanding
Officer as part of these proceedings”.
(c) No reference to the defaulter’s right of appeal will be made at this stage.

Plea of Not Guilty

30. If the defaulter pleads not guilty, the officer hearing the case shall:-
(a) record all the available evidence which appears to him to be relevant, starting
with the first prosecution witness. Care should be taken when recording a
statement not to waste time and space by recording matter which has no
connection with the case. Statements shall be numbered and shall be recorded
one after the other on both sides of marginal paper with no gaps in between.
The use of separate sheets of paper for each statement is forbidden;
(b) permit the defaulter to cross-examine each prosecution witness and shall
himself carry out such re-examination as may appear necessary. The same
procedure shall be applied in reverse with defence witnesses. The record of
cross-examination and re-examination, or a note that none took place, shall
follow immediately after each statement and shall be signed by the officer
hearing the case;
(c) read out each witness’s statement to ensure that it is correct and that the
defaulter understands it;
(d) enter the names of all witnesses and their statement numbers, and details of

286
 P.G.O.No.106
any exhibits admitted in evidence, in the appropriate spaces on P.F. 32;
(e) give his findings :-
(i) if the finding is one of guilty he shall ask the defaulter if he wishes to
say anything in mitigation and this shall be recorded. He shall then
accept evidence of character of the defaulter and include details of
previous misconduct and commendations awarded;
(ii) if the finding is one of “not guilty” the defaulter shall fall out and the
tribunal record will be retained in the member’s file;
(f) either :-
(i) impose a suitable punishment if he is empowered to do so. When he
awards the punishment he will address the defaulter in the following
terms: “Do you wish to say anything regarding my finding and
punishment before I refer your case to the commanding officer for
confirmation, Anything you wish to say will be taken down in writing
and will be sent to the commanding officer with these proceedings”;
Or
(ii) refer the case papers to his commanding officer (vide paragraph 29 (a)
without imposing a punishment if he feels that the case is of such
gravity or complexity that he himself cannot or should not impose the
punishment. At the same time he will inform the defaulter that his case
has been referred to higher authority.

Confirmation of punishment by Commanding Officers

31. (a) All defaulter cases shall be referred to a Commanding Officer for :-
(i) confirmation of punishment, or
(ii) award of punishment where a tribunal’s powers are inadequate to meet the
gravity of the case.
With regard to (i) above Commanding Officers are empowered to confirm,
remit, or reduce any punishment, to quash any finding, or to order a re-hearing.
They are not in power to increase any punishment unless the defaulter has been
given an opportunity of first being heard by the Commanding Officer. Under
(ii) they may impose any punishment listed in C.8 (2) of the Police Force
Service Regulations or they may refer the case to the Inspector General for the
award of a suitable punishment. In practice this will only occur when the
Commanding Officer recommends the reduction of a rank of a defaulter.
(b) Deputy Regional Commanders may exercise the powers of confirmation on
behalf of commanding officers in the event of the latter is prolonged absence
from their Headquarters.
(c) The decision of the Commanding Officer will be conveyed, without delay, to
the defaulter in person by the officer hearing the case.
(d) Commanding Officers will scrutinise all defaulter cases submitted to them by
their subordinates and will record their confirmation or alteration of each
punishment in the appropriate space on P.F. 32 and on both copies of P.F. 32A.
The complete case papers will then be returned to the officer who heard the
case and he will proceed in accordance with paragraph 33.
(e) If a Commanding Officer decides to order a review, he will return the papers to
the officer who heard the case with instructions that the latter will re-hear the
case in whole or in part and take such further evidence as may be necessary, in
accordance with the procedure laid down in paragraphs 18-30, and then re-
submit the proceedings to his Commanding Officer for confirmation, in
accordance with paragraph 31(a).

Confirmation of punishment by Inspector General

32. (a) All defaulter cases in which a punishment of dismissal is recommended will be
forwarded by Commanding Officers to the Inspector General.

287
 P.G.O.No.106
(b) The Inspector General will endorse his decision on P.F. 32 and on both copies
of P.F. 32A. One copy of P.F. 32A will be filed at Police Headquarters, P.F.
32A and the remaining copy of P.F. 32A will be sent with all supporting
documents to the Commanding Officer. The Commanding Officer will file P.F.
32A and will send P.F. 32 and supporting documents to the Officer who
originally heard the case with instructions to inform the defaulter immediately,
and in person, of the Inspector General’s decision.

Right of Appeal
33. (a) When the officer who heard the case receives back the case papers from his
Commanding Officer with the latter’s confirmation or alteration of punishment
endorsed thereon, he will :-
(i) call up the defaulter as soon as possible and inform him of the result of
his case and of his right to appeal within seven days from the date of
notification;
(ii) certify on P.F. 32 that he has so informed the defaulter;
(iii) In due course record the defaulter’s decision whether or not to appeal
on P.F. 32 and on both copies of P.F. 32A;
(iv) if the defaulter does not wish to appeal, arrange for the early
implementation of the punishment(s) endorsed on P.F. 32 and P.F.
32A. He will then file P.F. 32 and supporting case papers in the
defaulter’s personal file and dispatch the two copies of P.F. 32A to
Regional Headquarters and Police Headquarters for filing and
promulgation of punishment;
(v) if the defaulter wishes to appeal, he shall submit his representation, in
writing within seven days, setting out the grounds for his appeal to the
officer hearing the case. The latter will add his own comments on P.F.
32 and will dispatch the complete case papers to his Commanding
Officer for his comments to be added to P.F. 32 and for onward
transmission to the Inspector General. Any punishments imposed on
him will be suspended until the result of his appeal is known;
(b) (i) The Inspector General will endorse his decision on P.F. 32 and on both
copies of P.F.32A in respect of the appeal. One copy of P.F. 32A will
be filed in police Headquarters and the remaining case papers will be
returned to the defaulter’s Commanding Officer;
(ii) The Commanding Officer will detach and file the remaining copy of
P.F. 32A and send the case papers and P.F. 32 to the officer who heard
the case; and
(iii) The Officer who heard the case will inform the defaulter of the result
of his appeal and certify on P.F. 32 that he has done so. He will then
arrange for implementation of any punishments imposed on the
defaulter and will file the case papers and P.F. 32 on the defaulter’s
personal file.
(c) All appeals must be submitted through O/C. Stations and normal police
channels. Appeals received by the Inspector General which have not been
submitted in this manner will be returned without consideration.

Interdiction from duty

34. (a) When a member of the Rank & File is charged with a criminal offence or with
a serious offence against discipline and his O/C. District is of the opinion that
it is not in the public interest to allow him to continue to exercise his police
powers, he shall immediately withdraw the man from all duty and shall request
his Commanding Officer to seek the Inspector General’s early approval for
interdiction. Such action shall be taken in all cases where it appears that an
order for the man’s dismissal will be made.

288
 P.G.O.No.106
(b) When a member of the Rank &File is found guilty of a disciplinary offence
and recommended for dismissal, if not already under interdiction, he shall be
reported to the Inspector General for interdiction from duty on half pay from
the date of such recommendation. He shall remain under interdiction until the
sentence of dismissal, if approved, is conveyed to him, which date will be the
official date of his dismissal.
35. Application for confirmation of interdiction will be made by signal and will include
the effective date for interdiction and brief particulars of the offence or charge. If a
member of the Rank & File is arraigned on a criminal charge, the date of interdiction
shall take effect from the date when the criminal proceedings are instituted against
him. Upon interdiction a man is placed on half basic pay without allowances, but
where it is considered that undue hardship would arise, the request for confirmation
of interdiction will include a recommendation as to the rate of salary to be authorized
during such period.
36. If the proceedings against any member of the Rank & File do not result in dismissal
he shall be entitled, unless otherwise directed by the Inspector General in the
proceedings, to the full amount of salary which he would have received if he had not
been interdicted.
37. An officer who has been interdicted will remain interdicted until final disposal of his
case unless otherwise ordered by the Inspector General. No officer who has been
interdicted will be allowed any credit at a canteen without the express permission of
the O/C. District who shall exercise his discretion in the light of the seriousness of the
case and the family responsibilities involved. He shall not be permitted to perform
any duty and shall be required to hand over his complete kit and any other
Government property in his possession to his O/C. Station.
38. Suspension from office may only be imposed by the Inspector General and will not
form the subject of recommendation from commanding Officers and will normally be
reserved for cases of conviction before Criminal Courts (see procedure set out in
paragraph 41(a) (ii)).
39. When interdiction has been authorized a note to that effect will appear on P.F. 32.

Authorised Punishments
40. A defaulter’s rank, length of service, previous service and all aspects of the case shall
be taken into consideration before a punishment is awarded. N.C.Os are responsible
for the maintenance of discipline and are expected to set a good example, they are,
therefore, liable to severe punishment if they commit disciplinary offences. The
authorised punishments are set out in C.8.2 of Police Force Service Regulations and
no other punishment may be imposed. In general, a system of progressive severity of
punishment will be adopted and if a succession of punishments have failed to act as a
deterrent to further misconduct, a recommendation for dismissal by the Inspector
General will be justified. Where a defaulter has been found guilty of more than one
offence, it is not necessary or desirable to impose sentences in respect of each offence
if a recommendation for dismissal is being made.
41. One or more of the following punishments may be awarded to a rank and file
who pleads or has been found guilty of an offence against discipline–
(a) A fine not exceeding seven days' pay.
(i) The only permissible cash punishment (excluding payment for lost or damaged
Government property) shall be a fine which shall be expressed as one or more
days pay, and shall refer to basic pay exclusive of allowances.
(ii) Deductions from salaries in respect of defaulter punishment shall not be made
until the punishment has been published in Force Orders.
(iii) In no case shall the stoppage due to the recovery of fines exceed one half of the
pay of the defaulter in any month.
(iv) In special cases, Commanding Officers may approve payment of fines by
instalment on the recommendation of a tribunal.

289
 P.G.O.No.106
(v) All pay so forfeited shall be credited to the Police Rewards Fund and the
(vi) E.R.V. number will be shown on the Return of Departmental Fines.
(b) Confinement to Barracks
(i) Confinement to barracks not exceeding seven days;
Confinement to Barracks shall be for a set number of days provided
they do not exceed seven days. Personnel so confined shall report
themselves to the charge room or guard room every two hours between
0600-2000 hours when not on duty and record of each such visit shall
be made in the station Diary
(ii) compulsory performance of extra duties or drills;
(c) Extra Duties or Drills
(i) An extra duty shall be of four hours’ duration.
(ii) Each extra drill shall be of one hour’s duration and shall be performed
under close supervision. N.C.O.s shall not be awarded extra drills.
(d) Fatigue duties;
Each fatigue shall be of two hours’ duration and shall consist of sweeping, grass
cutting, painting etc. Personnel on fatigue may not be used on work for other
Government Departments or for private individuals. N.C.O’s shall not be awarded
fatigues.
(e) Temporary deprivation of privileges
Privileges which may temporarily be deprived include time off provided the privilege
is not curtailed for more than seven days.
(i) No award by an appropriate tribunal shall be carried into effect unless and until
it is confirmed by a Commanding Officer. The Commanding Officer may vary
or remit the punishment awarded but no punishment shall be increased added
unless the officer has been given an opportunity of being heard by the
Commanding Officer.
(ii) Commanding Officers may vary or remit the finding and punishment awarded
to the defaulter; provided that the Commanding Officer shall have no power to
vary a finding of not guilty and punishment unless the accused has been given
an opportunity of being heard by the Commanding Officer.
(iii) Where a report or reference has been made to the Commanding Officer the
Commanding Officer may award any one or more of the punishments specified
in paragraph 41 (a) or in lieu thereof, or in addition thereto, may dismiss or
terminate the appointment of a non-commissioned officer or constable.
(iv) When an N.C.O. is dismissed he shall first be reduced to the ranks. The official
date of dismissal will be the day upon which the defaulter is informed of the
punishment.
(f) When member of the Rank & File is convicted before any Criminal Court for
an offence, the officer is liable to dismissal. The following details will be
dispatched by signal to the Inspector General upon the date of conviction:
(i) Number and name;
(ii) Offence and section of the law contravened;
(iii) Details of the convicting court and criminal case number;
(iv) Date of conviction;
(v) Full detail of sentence(s) imposed;
(vi) Two copies of the judgment will be obtained from the Court and
forwarded to the Inspector General without delay.
(vii) In case of an appeal, final result of the appeal will be similarly
communicated giving the following information:
Date of delivery of judgment;
Criminal Appeal case number,
Full results of appeal.
(g) Dismissal from the Force shall be effective from the date of conviction or
dismissal of an appeal, if one is lodged.

290
 P.G.O.No.106
Warning for Dismissal
42. (a) An official warning for dismissal must be recorded when there is obvious
necessity to warn a member of the Rank & File that he will be dismissed from
the force if his conduct does not improve. Confirmation by a commanding
officer is necessary.
(b) Warning for dismissal shall always be recorded on P.F. 32 and P.F. 32A and in
the service register, with other details of the punishment. It shall always be
awarded in conjunction with another punishment (e.g. fine of three days’ pay
and warned for dismissal).
(c) If a police officer commits a serious offence or several minor offences within
three years of a warning for dismissal, he shall be recommended for dismissal
unless special mitigating circumstances render dismissal inadvisable.
(d) A warning for dismissal shall be cancelled automatically if a police officer’s
record remains completely clear of offences for the three years following the
award of the warning.

Criminal Offences against discipline

43. (a) Provision is made under Regulation C.19 of the Police Force Service
Regulations for certain serious offences against discipline to be triable before
Magistrate Courts and for the punishment of a fine between Shs. 400/= to Shs.
2000/= or to imprisonment of between three and twelve months to be imposed
depending on the offence committed. Prosecution will not normally be
instituted under this Regulation unless the offences are of an aggravated or
serious character and the prior approval of the Inspector General to prosecute
has been obtained.
(b) Commanding Officers shall be informed at once if any member of the Rank &
File is arrested under Regulation C.19 and they will either order release within
twenty-four hours if satisfied that prosecution is unnecessary or refer by
telephone to the Commissioner (Administration and Finance) for permission to
prosecute if they consider that disciplinary proceedings would be appropriate.

Offences Requiring Special Treatment

44. (a) Persistently Sleeping on Duty
Sleeping on duty is a most serious offence and shall be treated as such. Any
police officer who is found guilty of sleeping on duty while armed shall
normally be interdicted from duty in accordance with paragraph 35 and
recommended for dismissal. Personnel found guilty of sleeping on duty
unarmed shall be fined and warned for dismissal provided that no similar
offence has been committed within the last three years. A second conviction of
sleeping on duty within three years shall normally result in dismissal.
(b) Drunkenness
If a police officer is thought to be intoxicated and unfit for duty he shall, if
possible be brought before a Gazetted Officer or Inspector who shall take note
of his condition and deal with him as necessary. He shall be locked up in
Barracks, or in an empty cell if unruly, and kept under restraint until sober.
Where the offence is so aggravated as being likely to lead to a prosecution
under Regulation C.19 before a Magistrate, and where medical facilities are
available, the defaulter will be sent to hospital for examination by a doctor. In
all other cases of simple drunkenness it is not necessary to obtain medical
evidence. The provisions of sub-paragraph (a) apply equally to personnel who
are found guilty of drunkenness on duty. Intoxication off duty carries the same
penalties as sleeping on unarmed duty. If an officer who is intoxicated also
commits other disciplinary offences he will only be charged with the main
offence of being drunk or unfit for duty through drink.

291
 P.G.O.No.106
(c) Desertion
An officer who deserts commits an offence under Regulation C.19.2(c) of the
Police Force Service Regulations and must be treated as a deserter.
(d) Assaults, Threats or Insults
Assaults, threatens or insults another officer of senior or equal rank when such
other officer is on duty or when such assault, threats or insult relates to or is
consequent upon, the discharge of his duty by the officer so assaulted,
threatened or insulted constitute an offence and officers concerned will be
prosecuted accordingly.
(e) Refusal to obey a lawful order of his superior officer
Officers are bound to obey lawful orders issued by their superiors.
Commanding Officers should follow up all cases reported to them by those
under their command relating to disobedience of lawful orders and are also
reminded that disobedience of lawful orders is also an offence under section
124 of the Penal Code which reads:
“A person who disobeys any order, warrant or command duly made, issued or
given by a court, an officer or person acting in any public capacity and duly
authorised in that behalf, is guilty of an offence and is liable, unless any other
penalty or mode or proceeding is expressly prescribed in respect of that
disobedience, to imprisonment for two years”.

Leave
45. (a) No member of the Rank & File who is likely to be the subject of a disciplinary
or criminal enquiry shall be allowed to go on leave until action against him is
concluded.
(b) Any police officer who commits a serious disciplinary offence whilst on leave
shall be called into the nearest Police Station to which a Gazetted Officer is
posted and the case shall be heard without delay. Proceedings shall not be
postponed until such officer finishes his leave.

Documentation
46. The result of each defaulter case will be entered in the Station or Unit Defaulter
Register (P.F. 60) in accordance with paragraph 49 below.
47. All defaulter punishments, excepting only those punishments awarded to recruits
under training at the Police Training School shall be published in Force Orders.
48. All punishments which are published in Force Orders shall be recorded without delay
in the appropriate space on service registers P.F. 104 and Record of Service Cards,
P.F. 104A.

Defaulter Register (P.F.60)

49. (a) Defaulter Registers shall be maintained by the following units :-
(i) All Police Stations, (District headquarters staff, i.e. C.I.D. and Signals
personnel will be regarded as Police Station staff for the purpose of
this Order);
(ii) All Field Force Units;
(iii) All Regional Headquarters, covering Rank & File staff on
establishment, including C.I.D., Crime Intelligence Unit and Signals;
(iv) Police Training School, covering Rank & File attached thereto.;
(v) Field Force Training school covering all Rank & File attached thereto.
(vi) Police Headquarters, covering all Rank & File attached to
Headquarters, stores, armoury and signals branch.;
(vii) C.I.D. Headquarters covering all Rank & File attached thereto;
(viii) Director of Music covering the Band; and
(ix) O/C. Railways and TAZARA covering all Railways and TAZARA
Rank & File in Dar es Salaam.

292
 P.G.O.No.106
(b) At the termination of each defaulter case the final result shall be entered in the
Unit Defaulter Register and the Force Order Number also quoted where
applicable, one line shall be left blank between each entry in the Defaulter
Register. Where the sentence imposed is a fine and/or an order to pay for items
of lost or damaged property, the general revenue receipt number shall be
entered on this line.
(c) Defaulter Registers will be produced at formal inspections. Copies are not
required to be sent to Police Headquarters.

APPENDIX “A”
TO P.G.O. No. 106
FORCE DISCIPLINARY CODE
LIST OF OFFENCES
A Police Officer commits a disciplinary offence if he:
1. Persuades or endeavours to persuade, procures or attempts to procure, or assists
any Police Officer to desert, or being cognizant of any such desertion or intended
desertion does not without delay give information thereof to his superior officer;
2. Strikes or uses or offers violence against his superior officer;
3. Uses threatening or insubordinate language to his superior officer;
4. Is guilty of insubordinate conduct;
5. Causes a disturbance in any police lines, barracks or station;
6. Is disrespectful in work, act or demeanour to his superior officer;
7. Refuses to obey any lawful order of his superior officer;
8. Fails to comply with any lawful order given to him by his superior officer;
9. Renders himself unfit for duty by reason of intoxication;
10. Drinks intoxicating liquor when on duty;
11. Is drunk on duty, or in any police lines, barracks or station, or in uniform;
12. Absents himself without leave;
13. Is asleep while on duty;
14. Leaves his post before he is regularly relieved except in fresh pursuit of any
offender whom it is his duty to apprehend;
15. Being under arrest or in confinement, leaves or escapes from his arrest or
confinement before he is set at liberty by proper authority;
16. Neglects or refuses to assist in the apprehension of any member of the Force
charged with any offence when lawfully ordered so to do;
17. Negligently allows to escape any prisoner who is committed to his charge or whom
it is his duty to keep or guard;
18. Offers or uses unwarrantable personal violence to or ill-treats any person in his
custody;
19. Is guilty of cowardice;
20. Discharges any firearms without orders or just cause;
21. Without reasonable cause fails to appear at any parade appointed by his superior
officer;
22. Pawns, sells, loses or damages by neglect, makes away with, wilfully damages or
fails to report any damage to any arm, ammunition, accoutrement, uniform, vehicle

293
 P.G.O.No.106
or other article supplied to him or any property committed to his charge;
23. Is in unlawful possession of any public property, or any property of any other
member of the Force, or any property of a person in his custody;
24. Commits any act of plunder, or wanton destruction of property;
25. Accepts or solicits a bribe or gratuity;
26. Is slovenly, inattentive, uncivil or quarrelsome;
27. Parades for duty, dirty or untidy in his person, arms, clothing or equipment;
28. Without due authority discloses or conveys any information concerning any
investigation or other police or departmental matter;
29. Makes or signs any false statement in any official record or document;
30. Makes or joins in making any anonymous complaint;
31. Malingers or feigns or wilfully causes any disease or infirmity;
32. Is guilty of wilful misconduct or wilfully disobeys, whether in hospital or
elsewhere, any orders, and so causes or aggravates any disease or infirmity or
delays its cure;
33. Has contracted venereal or other disease and fails to report without delay to a
Government medical officer for treatment;
34. Incurs debt in or out of the force which he is unable to discharge;
35. Without proper authority extracts from any person, carriage, portage or provisions;
36. Resists an escort whose duty it is to apprehend him or to have him in charge;
37. Having been lawfully confined, breaks out of police lines, camp or quarters;
38. Makes any false statement upon joining the Force;
39. Refuses or neglects to make or send any report or return which it is his duty to
make or send;
40. Knowingly makes a false accusation against any member of the Force;
41. In making a complaint against any member of the Force knowingly makes a false
statement affecting the character of such member or knowingly and wilfully
suppresses any material facts;
42. Engages without authority in any employment or office other than his police
duties;
43. Becomes surety for any person or engages in any loan transaction with any police
officer without the permission in writing of the Inspector General;
44. If called upon by a Senior Police Officer to furnish a full and true statement of his
financial position, fails to do so;
45. Wilfully disobeys any regulation or order of the Force;
46. Is guilty of any act, conduct, disorder or neglect to the prejudice of the good order
or discipline of the Force, or in violation of duty in his office, or any other
misconduct as a member of the Force not herein before specified.

294
 P.G.O.No.107
DISCIPLINE – DISCOURTESY
1. No Police Officer, whether on or off duty, may be rude, abusive or discourteous to
any member of the public.

2. Gazetted Officers, Inspectors and N.C.Os are held responsible for the behaviour of
the officers under their command and for taking immediate disciplinary action against
any police officer who adopts a rude, insolent or bullying attitude towards members
of the public. Bad cases should be referred to the Inspector General for dismissal
proceedings.

3. Members of the public shall not be kept waiting unnecessarily in police stations. They
have the right to expect immediate attention and charge room officers are responsible
for ensuring that members of the public get the requisite attention expeditiously. If
delay is unavoidable, the person concerned shall be told politely that he can either
wait or come back later at his convenience. He must not on any account be ignored or
kept waiting without being informed of the progress made with regard to the issue
that brought him to the police station.

4. Witnesses shall not be kept waiting unduly in Police Stations. If members of the
public are required to make statements or assist in Police investigations they must be
told exactly when to appear and their statements taken without delay at the time
arranged. All police officers are responsible to ensure that members of the public are
treated with politeness, efficiency and in compliance with the law.

5. The following are serious offences by police officers:-

(a) Discourteous and abusive behaviour when dealing with traffic offences or
when making inquiries or arrests.

(b) Delay, whether deliberate or otherwise, in handling reports, complaints, etc.,

made by members of the public at Police Stations.

(c) Failure to assist people who need help, i.e. old persons or children crossing
busy roads.

(d) Adopting any sort of bullying tactics.

(e) Riding bicycles or driving vehicles in a careless and dangerous manner.

(f) Lounging about in uniform to the inconvenience of the general public.

6. The police are given certain special powers in order that they may serve the public.
Officers who abuse these powers or seek to intimidate or bully the public are liable to
dismissal.

295
 P.G.O.No.108
DISCIPLINE – DONATIONS AND PRESENTS FROM THE PUBLIC

1. Under no circumstances may any police officer solicit or accept a donation or present
from a member of the public, either for himself or for the Force, or for any member
thereof, without the prior written approval of the Inspector General.

2. If any member of the public expresses a wish to donate money or goods to the Force,
he shall be advised to write direct to the Inspector General on the matter.

3. No donations or presents shall be received at any Police Station or office, or by any

police officer. Cash or goods, whether sent by hand or by post, shall be returned at
once to the donor. The latter shall be advised that he can write direct to the Inspector
General, who alone can deal with such matters.

4. In every case where a donation is offered to the Force, or any member thereof, an
entry shall be made in the Report Book of the Station concerned and a short report of
the facts sent via the Regional Commander concerned to the Inspector General.

5. Whenever a donation or present is handed back to the donor, a receipt shall be

obtained and attached to the report referred to in paragraph 4 above.

7. Police officers are prohibited from receiving presents for themselves or for their
families from members of the public. If any such present is received it shall be
returned at once to the donor, an entry made in the Report Book of the Station
concerned and a report sent to the Commanding Officer. The latter shall, at his
discretion, forward such report to the Inspector General.

8. (a) Officers are prohibited from receiving or giving valuable presents other than
ordinary gifts from or to personal friends and relatives whether in the shape of
money, goods, free passages or other personal benefits. This order applies not
only to officers themselves but also to their families and officers will be held
responsible for its observance by their families.

(b) This is particularly important in relation to those individuals and commercial

firms who take Christmas, Id-el-Fitr, Id-el-Haj, Diwali, etc. as occasions on
which to offer gifts often of considerable value to their clients or associates.
The acceptance of such gifts by an officer, of his family, is bound to affect his
reputation for impartiality in the community in which he lives, and is likely to
affect the public confidence in the complete integrity of the service. This
restriction does not apply to presents of little value, such as diaries, pens, etc.
given by shop-keepers to their customers, usually as a token of goodwill on
festival occasions.

(c) Where valuable presents are sent to an officer or to his family they should be
returned immediately to the donors, with an explanation that the acceptance of
such presents is not allowed under regulations. If the return of a present would
cause offence and embarrassment, it should be handed over to the
Government, for which a receipt should be issued.

(d) Inspector General may authorise the opening of a voluntary subscriptions list
for any purpose deemed to be in the interest of the service of public at large
provided that the following conditions are observed:

(i) contributions will not be solicited outside the service;

296
 P.G.O.No.108
(ii) a publicly circulated subscription list, which tends to set a
predetermined level of contributions, will not be used and any hint of
coercion must be avoided.

297
 P.G.O.No.109
INDEBTEDNESS
1. Government Standing Order F.11 reads as follows :-

(a) Serious pecuniary embarrassment, from whatever cause will be regarded as

necessarily impairing the efficiency of an officer and rendering him liable to
disciplinary proceedings.

(b) Pecuniary embarrassment – involved both in the lending and borrowing of

money at usurious rates of interest will be regarded as an offence affecting
both the respectability of the service and the trustworthiness of the individual
and may be held to be a bar to promotion or increment. The mere fact, under
whatever plea, of an officer becoming a party to accommodation bills or
promissory notes, whether for his own purpose or for another person, will be
regarded in the same light.

(c) Normally, every possible opportunity will be given to officers who are in debt
to extricate themselves from their financial embarrassment, but it is obvious
that there must be a limit beyond which an officer cannot be retained in the
public service, in which case consideration may be given for his removal in the
public interest. In certain circumstances, it might even be necessary to consider
dismissal, but this step will only be taken in cases of serious nature and where
indebtedness is not the only factor involved.

(d) Whenever an officer is reported upon as being a judgment debtor a letter will
be addressed to him by his Permanent Secretary/Head of Independent
Department or Regional Development Director informing him that government
takes a very serious view of his indebtedness and adding that he has rendered
himself liable to disciplinary proceedings which could result in his removal
from the service if rapid steps are not taken by him to improve his situation.
He should, at the same time, be called upon to furnish a complete list of his
debts and liabilities, whether as principal or surety, together with his proposals
of liquidating these. If there appears to be a reasonable chance that he can set
his affairs in order, he should be given an opportunity to do so and a further
letter should be addressed to him warning him that if he fails to reduce his
debts as required or if he incurs fresh debts, disciplinary action will be
invoked. He should be required also to submit quarterly reports showing
exactly the state of his finances and the amounts which have been liquidated
during the three months previous to the date on which the report is submitted.

(e) When an officer’s indebtedness requires that he should no longer carry out
duties in which he might be tempted to appropriate for his own use public
funds or stores, it may be necessary to remove him in the public interest or to
move him to a post where temptation cannot come his way. This later
alternative may not always be possible with the result that government may
have no option but to seek his removal in the public interest. Any officer,
therefore, holding an appointment of this nature and who shows a tendency to
run into debts should be warned in writing of his position.

2. Commanding Officers shall report to the Inspector General any police Officer under
their command who is known to be heavily in debt.

3. Indebtedness breeds corruption. No police officer can be regarded as reliable if he is

unable to pay his debts. Indebtedness is a bar to promotion and no officer who is

298
 P.G.O.No.109
heavily in debt can hope for advancement in the Force. Any police officer who finds
himself unable to pay his debts shall make an immediate report thereon to his
Commanding Officer via normal channels for the information of the Inspector
General.

4. Every member of the Rank & File shall give a truthful and accurate declaration of his
indebtedness on the demand of a Gazetted Officer.

5. Commanding Officers are responsible that no member of the Rank & File is granted
an increment or is recommended for promotion until he has been questioned
regarding his indebtedness.

6. Commanding Officers shall ensure that every member of the Rank & File about to
transfer to another command is questioned regarding indebtedness and shall report
any outstanding debts to the Commanding Officer of the formation to which the man
transfers, All possible action shall be taken to effect settlement of debts, particularly
those due to Government, before a transfer takes place.

7. The greatest care shall be taken to recover all moneys due to Government and to
canteens and messes from personnel who have resigned, retired or who are dismissed.
Under no circumstances shall dismissal be delayed for the recovery of debts due to
Government, but an immediate report shall be sent to the Inspector General on the
non-recovery of any money due to Government.

8. Police officers are protected by section 45 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services
Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002 which lays down that no salary or allowance paid to any
member of the Force of or below the rank of Inspector shall be liable to be attached,
sequestered or levied upon for or in respect of any debt of claim for any money
borrowed by him or any goods supplied to him or to any person on his behalf while
he is a member of the Force. It is highly undesirable that police officers should run
into debt and Commanding Officer shall do everything possible to prevent members
of the Rank & File from obtaining credit from tradesmen. Shopkeepers who are
known to extend credit to members of the Rank & File shall be informed that no
departmental action can be taken to recover money owed to them by police officers
and that they should not extend credit facilities to members of the Rank & File.
Commanding Officers shall, if necessary, solicit the co-operation of local Chambers
of Commerce in an effort to stop undesirable credit.

9. Gazetted officers and inspectors must report, at once, to the Inspector General via
their Commanding Officers if they are served with any form of legal process for the
recovery of a civil debt.

10. Any police officer who makes a false declaration of indebtedness shall be defaulted
and severely punished.

299
 P.G.O.No.110
GENERAL RULES OF CONDUCT
General Matters

1. The following rules of conduct are issued for the general guidance of all ranks. Some
of these rules are repeated in greater detail in individual Police General Orders. Every
police officer shall familiarise himself with the provisions of this order and senior
officers are responsible that all members of the Rank & File are properly instructed
therein.

2. (a) The necessity or propriety of lawful orders issued by official superiors,

whether written or verbal or issued generally or with reference to a particular
matter may not be questioned. This is because a subordinate is not concerned
with the policy of the Force nor with all the decisions which cause policy
decisions to be made.

(b) Representations that an order is unreasonable, improper or likely to contravene

a particular law or any other existing order may be made through the proper
channels to Commanding Officers but, in the case of any order calling for
immediate action, the order shall first be obeyed and the representation made
afterwards. The representation so made will be scrutinised and if found to be
true the concerned superior will take appropriate remedial measures to address
the matter.

(c) Every police officer should make himself conversant with his conditions of
service and with Government Standing Orders, Police General Orders and the
laws of Tanzania insofar as may be necessary to enable him to perform his
duties with efficiency and to regulate his conduct in his relations with the
Force and the public.

Absence from Duty and Departure From Tanzania

3. (a) Absence from duty without permission except in the case of illness or other
unavoidable circumstances is forbidden.

(b) Departure from Tanzania without permission is forbidden.

Borrowing and Lending Uniform

4. Borrowing and lending articles of uniform, equipment and arms is forbidden.

Gaming Activities in Barracks

5. Gaming activities in barracks, including the playing of any game of chance where
money or the equivalent in kind is to be exchanged either immediately or
subsequently is forbidden unless specifically authorised by the Inspector General in
compliance with the Gaming Act 2003. N.C.Os, and/or the senior officer present will
be held responsible for stopping such games. All players shall be defaulted.

Calls of Nature

6. Obeying calls of nature in drains or police compounds or elsewhere than in latrines is

forbidden.

300
 P.G.O.No.110
Spitting

7. Spitting in police stations, barracks or compounds or in any public place, whether on

or off duty, is forbidden.

Noise in Barracks

8. Noise, quarrelling or unnecessarily loud talk in barracks and married quarters is

forbidden.

Refreshments on Duty

9. Obtaining refreshment (except by departmental arrangement) or accepting any form

of food or drink from members of the public while on duty is forbidden. Personnel on
long distance patrol are permitted to purchase food and drink as required.

Complaints

10. (a) No member of the Force is permitted to complain on behalf of another member
of the Force.

(b) All members of the Force must understand that if they prefer changes against
their superiors, they will expose themselves to severe penalties if their
complaints should prove on investigation to be groundless, frivolous,
vexations or to have sprung from a spirit of recrimination or from vindictive,
personal or any other motives not directly concerned with the implementation
of the mandate of the Force.

(c) Great latitude is to be given by Commanding Officers to any officer, who

thinking himself aggrieved, wishes to appeal to the Inspector General and
though it is their duty to point out to the complainant the danger of proving a
groundless or frivolous complaint, yet if the latter persists, his complaint,
whatever it may be, is to be forwarded, provided it is couched in temperate and
becoming terms. Care should be taken to avoid complaints couched in abusive
language.

Females and Civilian in Barracks

11. No one except police officers, their wives and children and servants shall be
permitted to live in any Police quarter without the permission of the O/C. Station.

Livestock in Barracks

12. Cattle, goats and sheep shall not be kept in Police Stations or in Barrack compounds.
Poultry may only be kept in properly constructed fowl houses in areas approved by
the O/C.

TURNOUT

13. (a) When uniform is worn it shall be worn in accordance with General Orders.
Watch chains, trinkets, ornaments, political badges and civilian clothing shall
not be worn so as to show outside the uniform. Wrist watches may be worn.
Umbrellas and sticks (other than regulation canes) shall not be carried when
in uniform.

301
 P.G.O.No.110
(b) Uniform shall not be worn off duty by members of the Force. The wearing of
odd articles of uniform when off duty or with civilian clothes is forbidden.

(c) Hair will be kept cut short at all times and the practice of allowing long hair
to remain on the head under the headdress is forbidden.

Smoking on Duty

14. Smoking on duty except during rest periods (and within permitted areas) while on
long distance patrols is forbidden. Smoking in any police vehicle or charge room or
other police office to which the public have free access is also forbidden. Smoking off
duty but when in uniform in any public place, thoroughfare or elsewhere in view of
the public is also forbidden.

Anonymous Letters

15. Anonymous letter writing is forbidden.

Removal of Government Property from Barracks

16. Government property must not be removed from Stations or Barracks nor may any
article of Government furniture be removed from any room or office without the
permission of the Commanding Officer.

Entry into Licensed Premises

17. No police officer while on duty shall enter licensed premises, coffee shops or other
similar places of public resort except under specific orders or in the execution of his
duty. The Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap. 77 R.E 2002 prohibits officers from drinking
while on duty.

Entry into Cinemas, Theatres and Disco Halls

18. Police officers shall not seek free entry to cinemas, theatres and halls of music, except
when on duty and acting on instructions. They shall not demand or accept
complimentary passes from the management, nor shall they seek free admittance for
their servants or friends.

Entry into Police Offices

19. (a) No police officer shall enter the offices in Police Headquarters, Regional
Headquarters, District Stations or of any Branches, except in pursuance of his
official duty.

(b) Clerks in police offices are forbidden to permit the inspection of

correspondence without the sanction of the Gazetted Officer in charge.

Police Officers served with Legal Process

20. Any police officer who is served with a legal process, which shall include all forms of
process issued by the Court for the recovery of civil debt, shall report the fact, at
once, through the proper channels, to his Commanding Officer.

302
 P.G.O.No.110
Private Legal Proceedings

21. No police officer shall take steps to institute legal proceedings in his own personal
interest in matters arising out of his public duties without the notice to the
Government.

Inquiries from Private Individuals

22. (a) No police officer shall carry out inquiries at the direct instance of a private
individual or of another Department without the permission of a Commanding
Officer.

(b) Police information shall not be passed to any private individual or to another
Department without the express authority of a Gazetted Officer.

Note: This paragraph does not apply to routine information passed by O/C. Districts to
District Officers nor to routine enquiries requested by District Officers.

Expert Evidence

23. No police officer shall give evidence in any proceedings as an expert, otherwise than
on behalf of Government without the consent of the government through the
Inspector General.

Indebtedness

24. No police officer shall contract debts which he cannot pay nor involve himself in
pecuniary embarrassment.

Presents

25. Police officers and their families are forbidden to receive money, tokens or valuable
presents from members of the public, whether in the shape of goods, free passages or
other personal benefits, neither shall they give such presents.

Reports for Private Individuals

26. (a) No police officer shall make any report, confidential or otherwise for a private
individual or firm without the permission of the Government through the
Inspector General.

(b) No police officer shall use his official knowledge for the private gain of
himself or his family.

Private Agencies

27. No police officer shall undertake any private agency in any matter connected with the
exercise of his public duties.

Corruption

28. (a) No police officer shall, either by himself or by or in conjunction, corruptly

solicit, accept or obtain, or agree to accept or attempt to obtain, from any
person for himself or for any other person, any advantage as an inducement to,
or reward for, or otherwise on account of, any agent (whether or not such agent

303
 P.G.O.No.110
is the same person as such first-mentioned person) doing, or forbearing to do,
or having done or forborne to do, anything in relation to his function as a
police officer.

(b) No police officer shall solicit, accept or obtain or agree to accept or attempt to
obtain for himself or for any other person, any advantage without lawful
consideration or for a lawful consideration which he knows or has reason to
believe to be inadequate, from any person whom he knows or has reason to
believe to have been, or to be, or to be likely or about to be, concerned in any
matter or transaction with himself as a police officer, or having any connection
with the official functions of himself or of any police officer to whom he is
subordinate, or from any person whom he knows or has reason to believe to be
interested in or related to or acting for or on behalf of the person so concerned,
or having such a connection.

Raffles and Lotteries

29. No police officer shall hold or organise directly or indirectly any raffle or lottery
except in accordance with Police General Order No. 322.

Petitions

30. If a police officer writes a petition for another person he shall sign it with his own
name as the writer.

Subscriptions and presentations

31. (a) No police officer shall collect or solicit subscriptions for any purpose
whatsoever nor solicit any collective address, testimonial or presentation nor
subscribe for any such object intended for a member of the Force without the
prior sanction of the Government through the Inspector General.

(b) No presentation to an officer on retirement shall be made or organized without

the consent of the Inspector General. Such presentations will normally be
restricted to members of the Force who have completed 10 years service in
Tanzania.

Soliciting Signatures

32. Soliciting other police officers to sign or attest collective memorials of any kind
relating to departmental or Government measures is forbidden.

Publication or communication or Official Information

33. (a) No police officer shall, except as provided in sub-para. (b) of this order, make
public or communicate to the press or to individuals or make private copies of
documents, papers or information of which he may have become possessed in
his official capacity. Official reports are “papers” within the meaning of this
Order and the writers thereof are not at liberty to communicate them to the
press or to individuals without the permission of the Inspector General.

(b) Certain police officers are permitted to give the Press routine information on
day to day crime reports but only in accordance with specific Police General
Orders on the subject. Any unauthorised disclosure of police information or
reports is strictly forbidden.

304
 P.G.O.No.110
Interviews on government Policy

34. No police officer, whether on duty or on leave, shall allow himself to be interviewed
on questions of public policy or on matters affecting the defence or military resources
of any part of Tanzania, but information which is not of a confidential nature and
which may be of material assistance in discussing local questions, should not be
withheld from the public when asked for.

Calling Public Meetings

35. No police officer shall call a public meeting to consider any action of the
Government, or take part in the proceedings of a public meeting called for such
purpose.

Distributing Political Publications

36. No police officer shall act as a distributor of political publications or sign or procure
signatures to any public petition regarding the actions or the proposals of the
Government.

Employment on Newspapers

37. (a) No police officer shall, without the consent of the Inspector General act as the
editor of any newspaper or take part, directly or indirectly, in its management
nor contribute to it anonymously nor publish in any manner nor broadcast
anything which may be reasonably regarded as of a political or administrative
nature.

(b) No police officer shall write or communicate to newspapers or to other

publications any matter connected with the Force or their duty or indirectly by
solicitation or otherwise instigate another person to do the same thing on his
behalf, without permission of the Inspector General.

(c) Officers are only permitted to publish in their own name, or give broadest talks
on, matters relating to subjects of general interest.

Membership of Political Parties

38. No police officer shall belong to a political party nor act, directly or indirectly, as a
political agent for such organisation or for any member there of, nor address any
public meeting in connection with such organisation, nor take any part in the
furtherance of the objects of such organisation.

Membership of Secret Societies

39. No police officer shall belong to any secret society or to any other organisation
inimical to the peace and good order of Tanzania.

Association with Bad Characters

40. No police officer shall associate with bad characters or with criminals, except in
pursuance of his duty.

Membership of a Trade Union

305
 P.G.O.No.110
41. No police officer shall belong to any Trade Union or any body or association
affiliated to a Trade Union.

Co-operation with the Public

42. All police officers while avoiding unnecessary conversation on duty shall give the
closest attention to members of the public who request their aid and shall at all times
comply with requests to furnish their names and numbers.

Responsibility for Families

43. Members of the Force will be held responsible for their families’ compliance with
these Orders. They are also held responsible for all acts done by members of their
families while occupying Government quarters, which, if done by themselves would
constitute breaches of orders.

306
 SECTION V
FISCAL MANAGEMENT
Nos. 121 – 140
P.G.O. No. Title
121. Expenditure – Control of
122. The Basis of Accounting and the Preparation of the Annual Accounts
123. Receipts
124. Payments - Control and Vouching of Payments
125. Payments - Imprests
126. Payments - Loans and Advances
127. Payment - Salaries
128. Accounts and Book- keeping
129. Custody and Security of Public Money - Strongrooms, Safes and Strongboxes
130. Custody and Security of Public Money - Inspection Unit
131. Custody and Security of Public Money - Handing-Over Procedures
132. Pay and Advances – Miscellaneous Matters
133. Criminal Investigation Funds
134. Rewards – Payment of, by Police
135. Force Funds
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.

309
 P.G.O. No. 121

EXPENDITURE – CONTROL OF
Responsibility of Officers
1. The general duties of officers with regard to financial procedure are governed by
the Public Finance Act, Cap.348 R.E. 2002 and Public Finance Regulations, 2001 and all
officers will acquaint themselves with these regulations.
Expenditure not to be incurred without Authority
2. The Inspector General at the Police Headquarters, on behalf of the
InspectorGeneral of Police is responsible to the Accounting Officer for the control of
expenditure from police votes. No expenditure chargeable to police votes may be
incurred without prior authority from the Inspector General.
3. It must be clearly understood that once the annual estimates have been passed by
the Parliament and the appropriation law enacted, the expenditure for the year is
definitely limited and fixed. It is then the duty of warrant holders to see that their votes
are so administered and expenditure so controlled that there will not be any over-
expenditure. In this regard all Commanding Officers must ensure that:–
(a) all finances are allocated and utilised to best effect; and
(b) all controls such as those contained in the approved Estimates and
Warrants are strictly observed.
4. Where in spite of all efforts it appears that over-expenditure will be inevitable an
application for more funds should be sent to the Inspector General well in advance.
Such applications must give a full account as to how over-expenditure comes about. In
dire emergencies, however, where the public interest demands it, over-expenditure may
be incurred without prior reference to the Inspector General, provided he is informed
as soon as it is possible.
5. Except in emergencies as stated in paragraph 3 above officers who incur
expenditure in excess of their votes without authority may be held personally
responsible and may be liable to disciplinary action or surcharge.
Authority for expenditure
6. (a) The authority for expenditure of police votes will be provided by warrants,
issued by the Inspector General apportioning sums for expenditure on specified services
by Commanding Officers.
(b) Commanding Officers may in turn sub-allocate their funds to the districts.
Payments on the due date
7. It is of paramount importance that payments for services rendered in any one
year are completed before the end of that year. It is the duty of all officers, who incur
expenditure of any nature, to ensure that the bills are obtained and settled immediately.
The plea that a creditor failed to render his account promptly will not normally be
accepted as an excuse for any delay.
Classification of Expenditure

310
 P.G.O. No. 121
8. All expenditure will be classified and will be charged to its correct item. Under no
circumstances will any wrongly classified expenditure be allowed, however necessary of
urgent the expenditure may have been.
Method statements of Expenditure
9. Together with other forms required by the Public Finance Act Cap.348 and its
Regulations, holders of departmental warrants will submit to the officer who issued the
warrant, a monthly statement of expenditure on funds warranted. This statement
should be submitted as soon as possible after the end of the month of which the payment
refers and will be in the form given in Appendix “A” to this Order.

APPENDIX “A”
To P.G.O No.121
Spent during

Total actual
expenditure to

Balance col.(4)
Commitments

commitments
Estimated
out standing
Title of item

expenditure

less col. (8)

further
the month
allocated
Sub-vote

Item No.

expenditure to
Funds

Total

……………20....
date

plus

less col. (6)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

311
 P.G.O. No. 122
THE BASIS OF ACCOUNTING AND PREPARATION OF
ANNUAL ACCOUNTS
Basis of accounts.
1. Commanding Officers shall ensure that those responsible for preparing accounts
for the funds managed by the Force, unless otherwise stated in these General Orders,
are guided by the provisions of Regulation 53 of the Public Finance Regulations, 2001
which are summarised below:
(a) The Police accounts shall be kept on a cash basis in order that the amount
of cash spent on a particular service can be compared with the amount authorised by
the warrant of fund issued by Inspector General.
(b) For purposes of sub-paragraph (a) all actual receipts and payments made
during the financial year shall be recorded in the Appropriation Accounts.
(c) A liability shall not be recorded unless prior approval of expenditure is
obtained from the Government.
(d) No Commanding Officer shall make any entry in the accounts of the Force
which anticipates the receipts of revenue or payment of expenditure by the Force.
(e) Where it is discovered that a Commanding Officer has taken action which
anticipates the warrant of funds by the Inspector General and thereby causes any
payment to be made as a result of such action, such payment shall be treated as
unauthorised expenditure, and a new item entitled "Unauthorised Expenditure" shall
be opened for the Vote in which the amount involved shall be debited to that account
and will be included in statement of Items in Excess to be reported to the Inspector
General.
2. (a) No Commanding Officer or any officer shall cause to transfer expenditure
from one financial year to another, and any such transferred expenditure shall be
treated as unauthorised expenditure.
(b) The closure of the Appropriation Accounts shall not be delayed for the
clearance of suspense accounts. Such accounts are intended for use during the financial
year and their use must not result in a delay in reporting unauthorised expenditure to
the Inspector General.
(c) In the event that an appropriate vote of expenditure cannot be identified
such expenditure shall be included by the Commanding Officer, in an item for which he
is responsible as unauthorised expenditure and it shall be reported to the Inspector
General.
Appropriation Accounts and Reports
3. (a) Commanding Officers shall submit within 15 days of the end of the
financial year, statements showing the financial position of the command at the last day
of the financial year. This will enable the Inspector General to comply with section 25 of
the Public Finance Act, Cap. 348 R.E. 2002
(b) Commanding Officers must ensure that the funds allocated form the basis
of the accounts for the year to which they relate and the classification and subdivision of
the statements of revenue and expenditure accord with those allocations
(c) The statements to be produced to the Inspector General may contain
details other than those required under section 25 of the Public Finance Act, Cap. 348 to
ensure that the financial position of the command is fully disclosed, and in order to
achieve this objective, the Commanding Officer shall produce such other statements or
provide such additional information as he considers it necessary.
312
 P.G.O. No. 122
4. The statements made under paragraph 3 above shall include:–
(a) an Expenditure Statement signed by the Commanding Officer showing the
services for which the moneys expended were voted, the sums actually expended on
each service, and the state of each vote compared with the amount appropriated for that
vote by the Inspector General;
(b) a statement signed by the CO. and in such Form as directed under the
Public Finance Act, Cap. 348 and its regulations and any other form as the Inspector
General may direct containing the amount of commitments outstanding for the supply
of goods and services at the end of the financial year and such other information as the
Inspector General may require;
(c) a statement of Revenues Received signed by the Commanding Officer and
in such form as directed under the Public Finance Act Cap. 348 and its regulations and
any other form the Inspector General may direct showing the amount contained in the
Estimates of Revenue for each source of revenue and the amount actually collected and
such statement shall contain an explanation for any variation between the revenues
actually collected and the amount estimated;
(d) a statement of Arrears of Revenue signed by the Commanding Officer
showing the amount outstanding at the end of the financial year for each source of
revenue such other information in such form as directed under the Public Finance Act,
Cap. 348 and its regulations and any other form the Inspector General may direct; a nil
return shall be submitted if appropriate;
(e) a statement of assets signed by the CO. containing details and values of all
unallocated stores under his control at the end of the financial year together with the
details and values of such other classes of assets under the control of the Commanding
Officer as the Inspector General may from time to time determine;
(f) any other statements and in such form as the Inspector General may from
time to time require;
(g) within three months the Inspector General shall consolidate various
reports from Commanding Officers for the purpose of preparation of Appropriation
Account.
5. All accounts under paragraph 4 above shall where appropriate:–
(a) be prepared in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Practice
and any instructions issued by the Inspector General;
(b) identify any significant departures from Generally Accepted Accounting
Practice as recognised by the accounting profession in Tanzania for use in the Force
and that directed under the Public Finance Act, Cap. 348 and its regulations and any
other form directed by the Inspector General for use in the preparation of the accounts
and the reasons for such departure; and
(c) state the basis of accounting and the accounting policies used in their
preparation and identifying and significant departures therefrom and the reason for
such departure.
Commercial activities
6. (a) Cash based systems of accounting shall be used for the control of
essentially cash based operations such as the payments for the normal activities of the
command but it cannot be appropriate in activities of a commercial nature.

313
 P.G.O. No. 122
(b) Notwithstanding sub-paragraph (a) all services offered commercially shall
in addition to having proper authorisation of expenditure, be required to be properly
costed to avoid hidden subsidies.
(c) In order to achieve proper costing all costs including those such as
depreciation that are of a non-cash nature shall have to be taken into account.
(d) Commercial activities shall be managed in such a manner that promotes
commercial lines, and in order to achieve such objective appropriate accounting
systems shall be employed.

314
 P.G.O. No. 123
RECEIPTS
Responsibilities for Revenue Collection
1. Commanding Officers shall be personally responsible for ensuring that adequate
safeguards are in place and are applied for the prompt collection of and proper
accounting for all revenue and other funds for the Force or Government relating to
their commands or offices.
Limitations on officers who may collect
2. (a) No Police Officer shall collect funds for the Force or Government unless he
is specifically authorised to do so.
(b) If in exceptional circumstances a Police Officer comes into receipt of funds
for the Force or Government he shall without delay pay such money to a regular
collector of revenue within his Station or Unit, obtaining a receipt for the amount so
paid in.
(c) Except with the specific authority of the Inspector General, no officer shall
be authorised to collect funds for the Force or Government or to post collections into a
cash book.
Revenue to be accounted for Gross
3. (a) In all cases the gross amount of moneys received shall be paid into or
accounted for the Accounts Department of the Force or Sub-Accounts Department of
the Force.
(b) Any charges against the revenue received shall require appropriate
authority as expenditure of Force and shall appear as a charge on public funds in the
books of account duly supported by the proper vouchers.
(c) Between the time of receipt and the time of payment of revenue as
designated by the Inspector General, no expenditure shall be made of it by any police
officer.
(d) No person shall lend or borrow or cause to lend or borrow any money
collected under this paragraph in any manner or purpose whatsoever.
(e) No cash received under this paragraph shall be used to cash any cheque,
other than a Force cheque for a Police Officer or any other person, nor may any officer
convert funds for the Force or Government received in local currency into foreign
currency or vice versa.
Crediting revenue to year of account
4. (a) No outstanding item of revenue shall be carried to a revenue item as a
charge to an advance account pending the collection of the amount.
(b) Revenue collected in any year shall not be placed on deposit or held in
suspense with the object of transferring it to revenue in the following year.

Vouching of receipts
5. (a) All receipt entries in the accounts shall be vouched for on the form or in the
manner prescribed by Law, transferring it to revenue in the following year.
(b) No receipts shall be issued for payments by police officers which are
effected by means of deduction on payment vouchers.

315
 P.G.O. No. 123
Responsibility for control of receipts
6. (a) Commanding Officers shall be responsible for ensuring that the approved
system for the safe custody, recording and proper use of all receipts, licences and other
documents issued for the receipt of funds for the Force or Government is consistently
observed.
(b) Each office in which receipts, licences or any other relevant documents are
held shall keep a complete register in the prescribed form, accounting for all receipts,
licences and other documents received and issued.
(c) Commanding officers shall ensure that details of the receipt documents are
fully and correctly entered therein as soon as they are received, and that all issues of
receipt documents are acknowledged by the officer to whom the issue is made.
Receipt Books to be Checked
7. (a) On receipt from the Police Headquarters and before being entered in the
register all receipt documents shall be checked by the Commanding officer to ensure
that they are correct and consecutively numbered, and he shall insert and sign on the
inside front cover of each book a certificate in the following form:–

"Examined by me this day and found to contain .................................... forms correctly

numbered.
Name:...................................................
Date ................................ Signature ………………………………”

(b) Any book found defective must be immediately returned to the Police
Headquarters with a report of the defect.
(c) Where there is a change of an officers-in-charge of the receipts, the stock of
all receipt documents shall be checked against the register by both the officer handing
over and the officer taking over, and a statement on hand or take over, signed by both
officers shall be sent to the Commanding Officer.
Safe custody of receipt books
8. (a) The officer in charge of the office must keep all unused receipt documents
under lock and key, keeping the key personally and issuing only such documents as are
required for immediate use.
(b) All receipt documents actually in use shall be locked up at the close of each
day by the officer in charge of them.
(c) Officers making outdoor collections shall return to their offices all receipt
documents before the close of business so that their receipts and collections can be
lodged in safe custody, no officer shall keep such receipt documents on private premises
overnight.
Preparation of receipts
9. (a) Where receipts, licences, or any other relevant document are issued from
counterfoil books the officer signing the original of the receipt, licence, or any other
relevant document shall initial the counterfoil and ensure that it contains all the
necessary detail including the amount received, the particulars of the payment and the
date and that it accords with the original and if such documents and other copies to be

316
 P.G.O. No. 123
reproduced by carbon paper, the officer issuing those documents shall ensure that the
carbon copies are clear and legible in every respect.
(b) The original and counterfoil or copy of every licence or similar document,
which is not in itself also a receipt in evidence of payment of the fee prescribed, shall on
issue be endorsed with the number and date of the receipt issued in respect of the
payment of the fee and with the amount of the fee, and that receipt shall similarly be
entered with the details of the licence, or any other relevant document in respect of
which it is issued.
No alterations to be made
10. (a) No alterations shall be made to any receipt, licence, or other similar
document and if an error is made in completing the document or if the document is
otherwise spoiled, the original and the counterfoil or copies shall be clearly marked as
cancelled and initialled by the officer empowered to issue the document.
(b) Where an error is made in the document referred to in sub-paragraph (a)
the original, counterfoil or copies shall not be destroyed, but they must be retained
intact and produced for inspection when required.
Receipts to be issued immediately
11. (a) A receipt in the proper form shall be issued immediately for any funds for
the Force or Government received.
(b) When the payer presents himself in person the receipt shall be handed to
him at once.
(c) Where moneys are received by post, the receipt shall be sent on the same
day to the payee.
Inward remittance by mail
12. (a) Commanding Officers shall ensure that incoming letters in their commands
are opened by a senior officer in the presence of a witness notwithstanding that officer
does not have any direct responsibility for the collection of revenue.
(b) The officer opening the mail must maintain a register in which he shall
record full details of any cheques, cash or valuable documents received, including the
date, name of the sender, registered package number, and amount or description of the
articles.
(c) In the case of uncrossed cheques such cheques shall be immediately crossed
by the senior officer present.
(d) Items received in the mail shall be handed to the relevant officers
responsible for dealing with them who, if the items have been recorded in the register,
shall sign the register in acknowledgement of their receipt.
Notice of entitlement to receipts
13. (a) In every command office or other premises where funds for the Force or
Government are collected, notice shall be placed in prominent conspicuous positions
where they can be seen and read by members of the public, showing that all persons
paying moneys to the Officer are entitled to receive a receipt in the proper form for all
payments made by them.
(b) The notices made under sub-paragraph (a) shall require the public to
examine the receipts they receive to ensure that they are correct, especially in regard to
the amount paid, and to report immediately to a more senior officer any case in which
the officer receiving the moneys refuses or otherwise fails to issue a receipt.

317
 P.G.O. No. 123
Foreign moneys not to be accepted
14. Except with the prior approval of the Inspector General, no currency notes or
coins and no foreign stamps or cheques drawn in foreign currency shall be accepted in
payment of any moneys due to Force or Government, and no payment of moneys due to
the Force or Government shall be made by credit card or promissory notes.
Acceptance of cheques
16. (a) Subject to this section, a cheque may be accepted in payment of moneys
due to the Force provided the officer receiving the money has no reasonable grounds for
believing that the cheque may not be honoured.
(b) All cheques received under this Section shall be made payable to the
"Government of Tanzania" and crossed "Account Payee only", and any cheques not so
crossed on receipt shall be crossed by the receiver on receipt.
(c) A post-dated cheque shall not be accepted.
(d) An officer accepting a cheque in payment of moneys due to Force shall
have to ensure that:–
(i) the cheque is correctly dated, in that it is neither time expired nor
post dated;
(ii) the amount in words and figures agree;
(iii) the cheque is signed; and
(iv) all alterations to any details of the cheque are validated by the full
signature of the drawer.
(e) Any cheque which violates any of these conditions must not be accepted.
(f) Where payment is made by cheque the cheque number shall have to be
written on all copies of the relevant document of receipt and the serial number of that
document recorded on the back of the cheque.
Dishonoured cheques
17. (a) If a cheque received by the command is dishonoured by the bank by reason
that neither the revenue has been collected nor the amount of the debt settled, the
accounting action shall reflect that fact while avoiding creating fictitious assets
consisting of the amount of such dishonoured cheques.
(b) Where the dishonoured cheque cannot be immediately corrected and
represented, the following courses of action shall be taken, namely:–
(i) if the cheque has been received in payment of a licence or similar
pre-paid item (such as a firearms licence) the appropriate revenue item will be debited
by the entry of a debit item in the revenue cash book and the relevant Commanding
Officer shall be informed in order that appropriate action, such as revocation of the
licence, can be taken;
(ii) if the cheque has been received in settlement of a debt owed to
Force such as the settlement of an imprest the appropriate advance account shall be
debited by the entry of a debit item in the revenue cash book (thus restoring the debt)
and the appropriate Commanding Officer shall be informed so that appropriate action
can be taken;
(iii) if the cheque has been received as a condition for services to be
performed by the Force such as the provision of police service to Railways or Banks the
amount involved shall be debited, by the entry of a debit entry in the revenue cash book,

318
 P.G.O. No. 123
to an advance account in the name of the person or institution concerned; all necessary
steps will be taken to obtain the revenue due, including where appropriate legal action
in respect of the dishonoured cheque;
(iv) all outstanding balances on the advance accounts created under
sub-paragraph (iii) shall be closed at the end of the financial year by crediting the
advance account and debiting the revenue item; these amounts will then be included on
the Register of Losses and dealt with accordingly; under no circumstances will a
dishonoured cheque be held as a part of a cash balance;
(v) the name of the drawer and the amount of a dishonoured cheque
shall be included in a Schedule to be maintained by the Commanding Officer; when the
revenue is collected from the debtor the entry shall be removed and the list shall be
circulated regularly to all collectors of revenue and no cheque will be accepted for
payment of amounts due to the Force by such collector from any person whose name
appears on that Schedule.
(c) All instances of dishonoured cheques shall be brought to the immediate
attention of the Inspector General.
(d) All original dishonoured cheques shall be retained and kept in safe
evidence and such cheques may represent important prima facie evidence of a debt due
to Force and may be used in any legal action taken to recover the amount due.
Posting of receipt
18. Each receipt shall be posted into the cash book at the time of the actual
transaction or as soon as possible thereafter.
Surplus collection
19. (a) Commanding Officers shall ensure that any surplus which may be found
when balancing the cash book with the collections shall be investigated forthwith.
(b) If no explanations of the surplus is discovered which would enable the
matter to be corrected immediately, the cash shall have to be credited to "Miscellaneous
Receipts, Surplus Cash" and reported to the Inspector General.
(c) All officers responsible for revenue collections shall ensure that the records
are kept in such form as the Inspector General may prescribe and that they show the
persons from whom revenue is due, the amount payable and the date, receipt number
and amount of the collections made.
(d) The records under sub-paragraph (c) shall not only serve to show the
revenue payable and collected, but the current state of the revenue collections and of
any arrears of revenue, and such records shall whenever possible be self-balancing and
be reconciled with the cash collections monthly.
(e) The officer who posts assessment registers, rent rolls, ledgers and similar
documents shall inform the officer in charge of the collection office whenever the
amount collected differs from the amount due, any such difference being immediately
investigated and action taken as may be appropriate to the circumstances of the case.
Payment of receipts into a bank
20. (a) All collections of revenue or other funds for the Force or Government shall
be paid into a bank daily, or if this is not possible, at the earliest possible opportunity.
(b) When paying collections into a bank, the full particulars of the amount and
serial number of the cheque and the name of the bank shall be recorded and retained
with the copy of the bank lodgement slip.

319
 P.G.O. No. 123
(c) When paying collections into the bank the officer doing so shall present to
the Commanding Officer the total sum collected or where the collections have been paid
into a bank, the bank lodgement slip; the completed Revenue Collectors Cash Book;
and if so required by the Commanding Officer the relevant receipt books.

(d) Details of the bank receipt shall be posted into the cash book in support of
the payment of the amount collected.
Checking of records
21. (a) It shall be the responsibility of every Commanding Officer to ensure that
the accounts of the command are properly maintained and are correct at all times.
(b) In exercising this control the Commanding Officer shall appoint an officer
whose duty shall be to examine and check daily all entries in cash books and other
books of account, with counterfoils or copies of receipts or original documents verifying
the correctness of the transactions.
(c) The officer so appointed under sub-paragraph (b) shall be an officer who
has taken no part in the work to be checked.
(d) After they have been checked, the cash books, receipt books, shall be
initialled and dated by the checking officer in such a manner that the period and items
covered by the check may be clearly identified.
(e) The Chief of Inspections shall arrange from time to time and at least every
three months, a check to be carried out by a more senior officer on a surprise basis.
(f) The check to be conducted under sub-paragraphs (e) shall verify that the
cash in hand is correct, the cash books and ledgers have been posted up to date,
effective controls and safeguards are applied and that arrears of revenue are not being
allowed to accumulate.
(g) The officer conducting a surprise check shall enter the results of his check
in the Register of Surprise Inspections, signing and dating the entry.
Arrears of revenue returns
22. (a) Within 15 days of the close of the financial year each Commanding Officer
shall submit to the Inspector General in the prescribed form, a return of all arrears of
the revenue for which he is responsible.
(b) The returns made and submitted under sub-paragraph (a) shall show
separately for each revenue Head, sub-head and item the arrears outstanding at the end
of the current financial year.
(c) The total shall be divided by financial year and will be supported by
detailed lists of the accounts still outstanding and a NIL return shall be submitted when
no revenue is outstanding.
(d) The Inspector General shall consolidate the individual returns into a
statement showing all the revenue outstanding under each revenue item as at the close
of the immediately completed financial year and such statement shall form part of the
Force's annual statements of accounts.

320
 P.G.O. No. 124
PAYMENTS - CONTROL AND VOUCHING OF PAYMENTS
Method of payment
1. (a) Except as otherwise provided in the General Orders, all payments of funds
for the Force or Government in Tanzania shall be made in accordance with the
authority and procedures prescribed in the Public Finance Act, Cap. 348 R.E. 2002 and
its regulations.
(b) Wherever practicable all payments of funds for the Force to persons
outside Tanzania will be made by direct payment to such persons by banker's draft or
otherwise through the local banking system.
(c) Where direct payment is thought to be inappropriate, payment shall be
made on the authority of the Inspector General through agents duly appointed for the
purpose with the approval of the Accounting Officer.
Charging to year of account
2. (a) Commanding Officers must ensure that the date of payment of any amount
governs the date of the record of the transaction in the accounts.
(b) The expenditure properly chargeable to the account of a given year must,
as far as possible, be met within that year, and must not be deferred for the purpose of
avoiding an excess on the amount provided in the estimates.
Payment vouchers
3. (a) Commanding Officers must ensure that all disbursements of public money
shall be properly vouched on the prescribed form of payment voucher which vouchers
must be typewritten or made out in ink or ballpoint pen and must contain or have
attached thereto full particulars of the service for which payment is made, such as
dates, numbers, distances, rates so as to enable them to be checked without references to
any other document.
(b) In the case of articles purchased at contract rate or prices, the articles
should be named in the same order as that in which they appear in the contract and
rates and prices should be stated in the same terms as those in the contract.
(c) Amounts paid shall be written in words as well as figures and copies of
vouchers must be clearly marked as such to distinguish them from the originals.
Certification of accuracy
4. (a) The officer who signs a voucher shall be responsible to certify the accuracy
of every detail and shall be held personally responsible for ensuring that:
(i) the services specified have been duly and competently performed;
(ii) that the prices charged are either according to contracts or
approved scales or are fair and reasonable according to local rates;
(iii) that authority has been obtained as quoted;
(iv) that the calculations and castings have been verified and are
arithmetically correct;
(v) that the classification of the expenditure is correct;
(vi) that there are sufficient funds uncommitted in the relevant vote to
meet the expenditure;
(vii) that the persons named in the voucher are those entitled to receive
payment; and

321
 P.G.O. No. 124
(viii) that any supplies purchased have been taken on charge or issued
for immediate use.
(b) Except in the case of a duly authorised pro forma invoice for a payment on
account, no more must be paid than the value of the work certified to have been
performed and where a deduction is due from the amount payable in a contract in
respect of any withholding moneys, penalties or fines, only the net sum shall be paid.
Commanding Officer responsible for all disbursements made
5. (a) The Commanding Officer shall be responsible for all disbursements made
from the votes under his control, but he may designate in writing and by name specific
officers who shall have the authority to sign payment vouchers on his behalf,
prescribing the financial limits and other conditions within which this authority may be
exercised.
(b) The Inspector General shall be advised through the names of the officers so
designated and the financial limits within which they may exercise their authority and
should be provided with specimen signatures of those officers.
(c) The Inspector General shall equally be advised when the authority of an
officer to sign payment vouchers is withdrawn.
Mode of signing payment vouchers
6. (a) The signature of officers on payment vouchers and certificates shall be in
ink or ballpoint pen and no stamped facsimile signatures shall be used.
(b) Only the original payment voucher or certificate shall be signed, copies of
the voucher being initialled only.
(c) Each certificate on or attached to a payment voucher and each sheet of a
voucher comprising more than one sheet must be signed separately and signatures may
not be written across one or more certificates.
(d) The name and designation of the officer signing a voucher or certificate
shall be typed or written legibly below the signature.
Accountability for unauthorised or irregular payments
7. In the event of an unauthorised or irregular payment being made in consequence
of an incorrect certificate, the officer who leading to the error and if found to have been
negligent shall be held responsible and any loss thus occasioned may be recovered
against him or her.
Vote Control Registers, consequences of unvouched payments and incorrect or
incomplete vouchers
8. (a) Each Commanding Officer shall keep a Vote Control Register in the
prescribed form showing separately under each Head, sub-head and item of the
estimates for which he is responsible:–
(i) the amount voted, revised as necessary to account for authorised
increases and for reductions by way of virement or reservation under FR 2.64;
(ii) the total amount authorised by Accounting Warrant(s);
(iii) the total expenditure to date;
(iv) any commitments entered into (including any allocation made to other
commands or offices by Warrant of Funds), indents for chargeable supplies, etc.; and
(v) the uncommitted balance available, i.e. (ii) - (iii + iv).

322
 P.G.O. No. 124
(b) Liabilities including outstanding indents incurred but not paid for in a
financial year must be entered in the Vote Control Register for the following financial
year.
(c) Except in the case of payments made from authorised imprests, all
payments in the Police Force shall be made by the Inspector General and the
Commanding Officers who shall be required to submit payment vouchers to the
treasury payment point designated by the Accountant General for such purpose.
(d) Payment on any voucher which is incorrect or incomplete shall be refused
and the voucher shall be returned to the Commanding Officer for amendment.
(e) Payment vouchers which are in order shall be certified by the Inspector
General or relevant authorised officer as "Passed for payment" and such payment must
only be made against the original copy of a payment voucher.
Role of Commanding Officers to ensure payment
9. The Commanding Officers shall ensure that payments due on the vouchers are
made as soon as possible to the persons entitled to receive them.
Modes of making payments
10. (a) Payments must be made only to the persons named in the vouchers or their
accredited agent and whatever possible must be made by means of direct bank transfer
or crossed cheques.
(b) Where payments are made in cash signed receipts (duly stamped where
necessary) must be taken at the time of payment.
(c) Except where an amount is receivable by a Police Officer for official
purposes or for his own account such as payment of subsistence allowance payment
must not be made to a public officer.

Payments to be made on person to whom it is addressed

12. (a) Where the recipient of a payment in cash is unable to write, he shall make
his thumb mark in acknowledgement of receipt, the act being witnessed by a Police
Officer other than the paying officer and the witness shall certify on the payment
voucher that the payments were made to the persons entitled to receive them.
(b) Where the paying officer is in doubt as to the identity of any person
drawing payment in cash, he shall require that person to produce proof of identity such
as a driving licence or to have his identity attested by a third person who can be
identified, who signs the voucher as witness to the payment.
(c) When payments are made to persons other than those named in the
vouchers, the authorities under which such payments are made such as powers of
attorney or letters of administration shall, if possible, be attached to the vouchers
themselves or shall be registered in the Accounts Department of the Force and notified
on the payment vouchers.
Missing vouchers or supporting documents
13. (a) For purposes of avoiding the danger of a duplicate payment being made on
a voucher, as soon as a voucher has been paid the officer making the payment will
stamp "Paid" across the face of the voucher and in the event of a duplicate or irregular
payment being made because of a failure to comply with this instruction the paying
officer responsible for the omission may be liable to be charged with the amount of any
loss.

323
 P.G.O. No. 124
(b) Where any voucher on which payment has been made is lost, mislaid or
inadvertently destroyed the paying officer shall inform the full circumstance of the case
to the Commanding Officer who shall report to the Inspector General.
(c) If after due enquiry the Commanding Officer is satisfied as to the
circumstances of such loss, mislaying or destruction and that payment has been
properly and correctly made, he will inform the Inspector General, who if satisfied will
inform the Accounting Officer to recommend to the Minister to authorise the payment
to stand charged in the accounts.
(d) For the purpose of this paragraph a payment voucher which is incomplete
because of its supporting documents are missing, shall be regarded as a missing
voucher.

324
 P.G.O. No. 125
PAYMENTS - IMPRESTS
Authorisation of imprests
1. (a) The Inspector General shall be authorised, as part of the Advances
Warrant issued to him by the Government to issue imprests to police officers who
require cash to be readily available to meet immediate payments for official purposes.
(b) Such imprests fall into two main categories, standing imprests issued to
Commanding Officers to meet such payments during the financial year and temporary
imprests issued to police officers to meet travelling and hotel expenses necessarily
incurred on official duty.
Issue of imprests
2. (a) Imprests shall only be issued for a purpose for which expenditure has been
included in the approved Estimates and lists of standing imprests required by
Commanding Officers in the forthcoming financial year must be submitted to the
Inspector General at least 14 days before the start of the financial year.
(b) Requests for temporary imprests must be made as the need arises and
should be submitted to the Inspector General at least 14 days before the money is
required.
(c) An imprest must be restricted to the minimum amount required for the
purpose for which it is issued.
Imprests to be issued to the holder
3. (a) All imprests of whatever nature shall be issued in the names of the officers
who shall hold them and they will remain their personal responsibility until they are
refunded or discharged by the submission of properly completed payment vouchers or
handed over to another officer responsible. The holder of imprest shall not be relieved
of any part of his responsibility by delegating the custody or operation of an imprest to
another officer.
4. An imprest must not be charged in the accounts as final expenditure, but the
actual payments out of such imprests being so charged and the full amount of the
imprest issued must be entered in the cash book as a payment and will be allocated
under-the-line under a separate account entitled "Imprests".
Custody of imprests
5 (a) The officer holding an imprest shall decide whether it is necessary to hold
the imprest in a bank account, taking into consideration the size of the imprest, the
nature and frequency of the payments to be made from it and the security facilities
available to him.
(b) Where the holder of imprest wish to deposit a standing imprest in a bank
account, authority for the opening of the account should be sought from the Inspector
General and the operation of the bank account subject to this Section.
(c) Cash in respect of a standing imprest must be kept completely separate
from any other cash for which the imprest holder is responsible.

Duty of imprest holder

6. (a) It shall be the duty of an imprest holder:
(i) to ensure that an imprest issued to him is used wholly and
exclusively for the purpose for which it was issued;

325
 P.G.O. No. 125
(ii) to account for the imprest in accordance with this Section and the
terms under which it was issued;
(iii) to ensure that the imprest moneys and any payment vouchers
awaiting recoupment are adequately safeguarded at all times;
(iv) to arrange for proper payment vouchers to be prepared in
support of all expenditure from the imprest, showing the amounts chargeable to each
Vote, sub-head and item or other accounts;
(v) to obtain proper receipts on all payment vouchers for
disbursements from the imprest;
(vi) to ensure that the full amount of the imprest can be fully
accounted for at all times in cash, stamps, money at bank, and/or completed payment
vouchers;
(vii) to ensure in the case of a standing imprest that the imprest is
recouped as and when necessary, but not less frequently than once each month;
(viii) except as provided for under this Section account for the imprest
in full on or before the close of business on the last working day of a financial year and
to refund any unexpended balance to the Accounts Department of the Force; and
(ix) to be ready at any time to produce to the Inspector General the
full amount of the imprest in cash, stamps, bank balance or completed payment
vouchers.
(b) The officer holding a standing imprest must keep an imprest account
showing the amount of the full details of the payment vouchers for imprest
disbursements made from the imprest.
(c) The imprest account shall be balanced at the time of each recoupment and
the total of the cash, stamps; bank balance and the completed vouchers must
correspond with the amount of the imprest.
(d) After recoupment the balance shall be carried down and the amount of the
recoupment entered, thus bringing the total to the amount of the original imprest.
Recoupment of imprests
7. (a) When recouping the imprest the imprest holder shall submit to the
Inspector General the properly completed vouchers supported by a covering schedule
summarising the individual vouchers.
(b) Vouchers shall be sent to the Accounts Department of the Force for
recoupment not later than the month following that in which they were paid.
(c) Vouchers paid in different months shall not be included in the same
recoupment.
(d) After examining the payment vouchers and on being satisfied that they are
correct, the Inspector General shall pay the total sum represented by the vouchers to
the imprest holder to recoup the imprest to its original amount.
Submission of account on standing imprests
8. (a) At the beginning of each month every holder of a standing imprest shall
submit to the Inspector General a signed account showing how his imprest was made up
on the last day of the preceding month and such the account shall be supported by a
signed certificate of the cash on hand, a bank statement and bank reconciliation, where
appropriate, and such other documents as are necessary to prove the level of the
imprest.
326
 P.G.O. No. 125
(b) On any change of an officer operating a standing imprest an account
similar to that prescribed in this paragraph must be prepared, showing how the imprest
was made up at the time of handing over.
(c) Five copies of the statement will be prepared and signed by both the officer
handing over and the officer taking over the imprest.
(d) The original statement shall be sent to the Inspector General, one copy will
be sent to the Accounting Officer and a third retained on file in the command of office.
(e) The officers concerned are required each to retain one of the remaining
copies and in no circumstances may a personal imprest be handed over to another
officer.
Retirement of imprests responsibility of holder of imprests
9. (a) All imprests shall be retired as soon as the necessity for them ceases to exist
and in any event, except as provided under this Section by the close of business on the
last working day of the financial year in which they were issued and where a new
imprest is necessary in the subsequent financial year it will be issued under the
authority of the Imprest Warrant for that year.
(b) Except as provided under this Section, where a Police Officer to whom an
imprest has been issued fails to retire it in full within 30 days of the close of the financial
year in which the imprest was issued or otherwise on the demand of the Inspector
General, the amount outstanding may forthwith be recovered from any salary or other
emoluments or from any other amounts due to the officer.
(c) Where no such salary, emoluments or amounts are available from which to
recover the imprest, the amount may be charged as a personal advance in the name of
the imprest holder and may be recovered as a civil debt due to the Force.
(d) Imprest holders are not relieved of their responsibilities until payment
vouchers submitted to the Accounts Department of the Force have been examined and
found to be correct.
(e) Notwithstanding the general rule that all imprests must be retired before
the close of the financial year, a personal imprest issued in one financial year in respect
of a duty journey which has not been completed by the end of that financial year may be
retained by the officer, but it must be accounted for as soon as the officer returns to his
normal place of work.
(f) Where the duty may not have been completed, so far as is practicable, the
officer should submit vouchers for the expenditure incurred by him against the imprest
before the end of the financial year, so that they can be included in the accounts of that
year.
(g) No further personal imprest shall be issued to a Police Officer for the
purposes of a duty journey if he is still in possession of an unretired imprest previously
issued to him for a similar purpose.

327
 P.G.O. No. 126
PAYMENTS - LOANS AND ADVANCES
Authority for loans and advances
1. (a) The grant of loans and advance from public funds is strictly limited and
such loans and advances may only be made by the Accounting Officer under the
authority of the Minister and for the purposes stated in the Public Finances Act, Cap.
348 Revised Edition 2002.
(b) Commanding Officers shall ensure that no action is taken by any officer in
their command which will result in the issue of an advance or loan without the prior
approval of the Accounting Officer and any officer taking such action shall be
personally liable in the event of non-payment.
(c) No expenditure which is properly chargeable to a Vote of Expenditure shall
be debited to an advance account.
Loans and advances to be secured by agreements
2. (a) Commanding officers shall ensure that all loans and advances other than
those for Standing or Special Imprests must be secured by agreements, the form of
which must be approved by the Accounting Officer.
(b) The agreements, which must clearly specify the full details of the loan or
advance, including the amount thereof, the terms of repayment, the collateral security
and the rates of interest, etc. must be properly signed and witnessed by all the parties
thereto and duly stamped where appropriate and the agreements shall be retained in
safe custody in a strong room or safe.
Commanding Officers to control issues and repayments
3. (a) The Commanding Officers shall be responsible for ensuring that payments
and repayments of loans or advances, and they shall be made strictly in accordance with
the terms and conditions attaching to the loan or advance.
(b) The Commanding Officers shall in particular, ensure that:
(i) payments are made only to persons entitled to them;
(ii) suitable terms and conditions have been prescribed to safeguard
the repayment of the loans of advances;
(iii) interest is charged where applicable;
(iv) repayments are not overlooked or delayed;
(v) that collateral security is held by the Force; and
(vi) proper accounts and controls are kept and the necessary
recoveries effected.
Commanding Officers to maintain accounts
4. The Commanding Officers shall maintaining the following accounts namely:
(a) a control account to record the total sum provided for each category of
loan or advance, the amounts issued, the repayments received and the balance
outstanding; and
(b) an individual account for each borrower which, apart from the accounting
transactions, should record the name of the borrower, the authority for the amount
loaned or advanced, the amount so authorised, the terms of the loan or advance, the
nature of the collateral security, the rate of interest payable and the due dates and
amounts of repayments.

328
 P.G.O. No. 126
Individual loan accounts
5. (a) The balances on the individual loan accounts will be listed and reconciled
with the relevant balances in the control accounts once a quarterly.
(b) Copies of the reconciliation shall be supplied by the Commanding Officers
to the Inspector General.

329
 P.G.O. No. 127
PAYMENT - SALARIES
Custody of records of personal emoluments
1. (a) Commanding Officers are responsible for ensuring that Personal
Emolument records are maintained for all permanent staff within their commands and
make sure they are correct and that all changes, increases or deductions are duly
notified to the Inspector General.
(b) The rates of salary and other personal emoluments for members of the
Force are as authorised in the salary scales published in the Estimates except in the case
of contract officers where the scale is that stated in the relevant contract.
(c) Advice of changes should be batched and sent to the Inspector General by
the appropriate date shown in the Schedule of Payroll Dates which is usually issued by
the Government at the start of the year.
Certificate of appropriate forms by Commanding Officers
2. (a) When the appropriate form is received by the Commanding Officers it
shall be verified against authorising documents, which shall come either from the Civil
Service Department in the case of allowances or changes of pay or from the Inspector
General in the case of deductions.
(b) No employee’s name shall be entered into the payroll until a copy of the
letter of appointment has been received and no action may be taken which would result
in the payment of additional salary or allowance to any officer until such time as a copy
of the proper authority has been received by the Commanding Officer.
Balance of salary or allowance due to an officer
3. Any balance of salary or allowance due to an officer who has been convicted for
misappropriation of funds or theft of property of the Force or Government, or who has
been dismissed, or whose appointment has been terminated thereby leaving sums due to
the Force, may not be paid without prior authority of the Accounting Officer.
Responsibility of Commanding Officers on books of accounts
4. (a) Commanding Officers are responsible for ensuring that the required books
and other records are properly maintained.
(b) Pay sheets in the form and manner laid down by the Inspector General
shall be prepared for each week and witness nominated by the Inspector General.
(c) Payment shall normally only be made to the person listed on the paysheet
after proper identification and signing unless an acceptable letter of authorisation to
make payment to another party is submitted and any unpaid wages shall be repaid to
the Government and the entry on the paysheet initialled by both the Paying Officer and
the witness.
(d) In no cases shall monies be paid to any officer, subcontractor, foreman or
any other person for distribution unless authorised by the Inspector General.

Salary
5. In this Part, the term "salary" shall be construed as including all items of
personal emoluments.

330
 P.G.O. No. 128
ACCOUNTS AND BOOKKEEPING
Estimates
1. The approved Estimates form the basis of the accounts for the year to which they
relate and the analysis and classification of the accounts of revenue and expenditure
must accord with those Estimates.
All accounting entries to be vouched
2. Every entry in the accounts shall be supported by the voucher or other approved
document containing the full details and particulars of the item or items to which it
relates.
Form of accounts
3. (a) A book, account or record that is required to be kept under the provisions
of the Public Finance Act, Cap. 348 Revised Edition 2002 or this Section may be kept or
prepared:
(i) by making entries in a bound or loose-leaf book;
(ii) by recording or storing the data concerned on electronic or other
non-traditional media by means of a mechanical, electronic or other device; or
(iii) in any other manner approved by the Inspector General.
(b) Where a book, account or record is to be kept or prepared by a
mechanical, electronic or other device or to be stored on electronic or other non-
traditional media, the data recorded or stored will be capable, at any time, of being
reproduced in a written form or another form approved by the Inspector General; or a
reproduction of the data is kept in a written form approved by the Inspector General.
(c) The provisions to the Public Finance Act and this Paragraph in respect of
written records will apply mutatis mutandis.
Use of computer based accounting systems
4. Where the data recorded or stored on electronic or other non-traditional material
by a mechanical or electronic device forms part of a system of account under the control
of a Commanding Officer, the prior approval of the Inspector General for which must
be obtained and any changes to it approved.
Security of accounting systems
5. Commanding Officers shall take all reasonable precautions to guard against
damage to, destruction of or falsification of or in, and discovery of falsification of or in
any book, account, record or part of a book, account or record required by the Act or
this Section to be kept and in particular shall ensure that all instructions issued by the
Inspector General in this respect are implemented and enforced.
Audit trail
6. Each Commanding Officer shall satisfy himself or herself that, where the system
involves the authorisation, approval, deletion or alteration of any transaction or data by
electronic means or any means other than in writing, an audit trail is made so that it
enables the person giving such authorisation or approval or deleting or altering a
transaction to be identified beyond reasonable doubt and the nature and, if of the
authorisation, approval, deletion or alteration is ascertained.
Security and passwords

331
 P.G.O. No. 128
7. (a) Notwithstanding the preceding provisions under this Part, each
Commanding Officer shall satisfy him/herself as to the security of the means of storage
and the method of processing of electronic media and its data and to the proper
documentation of any software involved and shall implement and enforce any
instructions issued by the Inspector General in this respect.
(b) In particular access to data and data processing areas shall be controlled
and the method of control document. Where passwords are used as a security check for
accessing data in a computer based accounting system for whatever purpose including
the authorisation or approval of transactions by electronic means or the alteration or
deletion of any data, they shall be kept secret by the person to whom they are allocated.
(c) Commanding Officers should bring to the attention of the officers handling
accounts that any officer who communicates a password to another officer commits an
offence under the Public Finances Act, Cap. 348 R.E. 2002.
Provision of technical and back-up support
8. (a) The Inspector General shall ensure that each command has a proper
technical support and is kept readily available for both hardware and software.
(b) Effective backup and disaster recovery procedures are put in place for the
event of a partial or complete breakdown or loss of the storage media or processing
equipment to ensure that the administration of the Force is not adversely affected.
Inspection and production of records
9 (a) Where any book, account or record is stored by means of a mechanical
electronic or other device on electronic or other non-traditional media and the Public
Finance Act or its regulations requires that the book, account or record and the matters
contained therein is required to be available for inspection or for copies to be made
thereof, a Commanding Officer shall make the book, account, record or matters
concerned available in written form or otherwise provide a document containing a clear
reproduction in writing of the whole or part of them as the requirement may entail.
(b) Any written document or reproduction supplied under this paragraph shall
be deemed to be a valid reproduction unless the contrary is established.
Alterations, corrections, etc.
10. (a) No any erasure or alteration shall be made in any cash book, assessment
register, rent roll, ledger, voucher or other document of account.
(b) Payment in connection with any document bearing an alteration or erasure
may be refused by the Inspector General.
(c) If any correction is necessary, the original entry must be crossed through
by a line only, so as to show clearly what the original entry was, and the correct entry
placed above the original one, the correction being initialled by the officer responsible.
(d) In no circumstances whatever may a correction be made in any document
which has been audited, without prior consent in writing of the Controller and Auditor-
General to be obtained through the Inspector General.
Frequent receipt of corrected documents
11. If documents containing corrections are frequently received by the Accounts
Department of the Force from any command or officer, the Inspector General may
invite the attention of the Commanding Officer to this fact and seek an appropriate
explanation.
Cash books generally

332
 P.G.O. No. 128
12. (a) The Commanding Officers shall keep in their offices a cash book, batch
sheets or other records showing the allocation of receipts and payments, journals and
ledgers together with such other books and registers as may be necessary for the proper
maintenance and production of the accounts of the Force.
(b) All cash and bank transactions shall be entered in the cash book as they
occur and the entries numbered consecutively on each side of the cash book in the order
of the receipts or payments and corresponding numbers will be entered on the
supporting vouchers, commencing a fresh series each month.
(c) The cash book must be totalled and balanced at the end of each working
day and the balance compared with the total amount on hand and in the event that the
balance does not agree with that total, the discrepancy must be investigated forthwith.
(d) The transactions and balances will then be independently checked
accordingly and, certificate being entered in the cash book showing the opening balance
of the day, the total receipts and the total payments of the day and the closing balance.
In the case of the Accounts Department of the Force cash book this certificate will be
signed and dated by the Inspector Generals or his deputy.
(e) In the case of other commands the certificate shall be signed and dated by
an officer nominated in writing by the Inspector General and the closing balanced shall
then be carried forward to constitute the opening balance of the next day.
Journals
13. (a) Journal entries may be prepared as required for all adjustments
authorised to be made by transfer between individual Votes, sub-heads or items of
revenue and of expenditure and other ledger accounts which do not involve cash
receipts or payments. Journal entries will be issued in accordance with Regulation 127
of the Public Finances Regulations.
(b) Each journal entry shall be consecutively numbered in sequence, a fresh
series being started for each month.
(c) The journal entries shall be posted daily after the completion of posting of
the receipt and payment vouchers for that day.
(d) In all cases journal entries must be supported by sufficient explanations,
authorities, references and documentation to enable the purpose of the transfer to be
understood without reference to any other source.
(e) Where a journal voucher involves adjustments between two or more Votes
the voucher shall be copied to all the Commanding Officers concerned.
Deposit accounts
14. (a) Deposit accounts may only be opened with the specific approval of the
Inspector General.
(b) The prime responsibility for keeping proper accounts for deposits lies with
the Commanding Officer concerned.
Maintenance of deposit accounts
15. The following accounts will be maintained in respect of deposits:–
(a) A control account for each category of deposits, which will show at any
time the total balance outstanding in respect of deposits of that category; and
(b) an individual account for each depositor, which will show at any time the
details of the transactions on that account and the balance outstanding.

333
 P.G.O. No. 128
Balances of individual deposit accounts
16. (a) The balances on individual deposit accounts as at the end of the financial
year will be listed and reconciled with the balances on the relevant control accounts.
(b) In the case of deposit accounts maintained by Commanding Officers, copies
of the reconciliation will be sent to the Accounts Department of the Force.
(c) Where the deposit accounts maintained solely in the Accounts Department
of the Force, a copy of the reconciliations shall be supplied to the Inspector General.
Standard forms
17. Standard forms and voucher required for accounting procedures may be
specified by the Government and that prior authority of the Inspector General must be
obtained before the introduction of any special forms or vouchers for use in the Force
other than those prescribed by the Government.
Preservation of accounting records
18. (a) The Inspector Generals shall issue instructions to Commanding Officers
specifying the precautions which may be taken in particular cases to safeguard
accounting records and documents and in particular those which have been stored on
electronic or other non-traditional media.
(b) The Inspector Generals shall ensure that all receipts and payment voucher
lodged with the Accounts Department of the Force are properly and securely bundled
and that they and all other accounting documents are kept in an orderly manner so that
they are available when required.
Principle of efficient accounting
19. Every Commanding Officer and accountants shall observe a principle that
efficient accounting is to a large extent dependent upon neatness and orderliness in the
filing and preservation of vouchers, books, registers and other documents which
support and explain entries in the accounts. In filing payment vouchers it is preferable
that they should be filed in vote order rather than in cash book sequence.
Accounting records
20. (a) All classes of account books and records will be carefully preserved and
may not be destroyed without the approval of the Inspector General.
(b) Account books and records shall be retained for the following periods:

Accounting records and Period of Retention:-

(a) copies of receipts, licenses, payment vouchers cash books- 3 years
(b) stores receipt and issues vouchers- 3 years
(c) Accounts Department of the Force copies of receipts, receipt vouchers, licenses- 7
years
(d) original payment vouchers, used cheques- 7 years
(e) abstracts, subsidiary records, stores ledgers, journals- 7 years
(f) Accounts Department of the Force main cash books, ledgers, loan and investment
registers - Indefinitely
(g) Establishment and salary records (which may be required for determining officers' and
widows' pensions and other terminal benefits)- Indefinitely

334
 P.G.O. No. 128
Destruction of accounting records
21. (a) Commanding Officers wishing to destroy accounting records will submit four
copies of the lists of documents concerned to the Inspector General to be dealt with in
accordance with Regulation 140 of the Public Finances Regulations.
(b) The Commanding Officer will advise the Inspector General in writing when
destruction of the documents has taken place, retaining his copy of the list as his authority for
the destruction.

335
 P.G.O. No. 129
CUSTODY AND SECURITY OF PUBLIC MONEY -
STRONGROOMS, SAFES AND STRONGBOXES

Provision of security facilities

1. (a) Each commanding Officer must ensure that strongrooms, safes and
strongboxes are provided for the safe custody of funds and valuables in all Force
premises in which such moneys are received and retained either temporarily or
permanently.
(b) Strongrooms and, where appropriate, safes shall be fitted with two
different locks, the keys or combinations of which should be held by different officers.
(c) The necessity for a strongroom, safe or strongbox shall be determined by
the Inspector General and it shall be the responsibility of Commanding Officers to
report to the Inspector General if they are not satisfied that adequate facilities are
available in any of their premises for the proper safe custody of funds for the Force or
Government and valuables.
Use of security facilities
2. (a) An officer holding the key of a strongroom, safe or strongbox must retain
the key in his personal possession and must ensure that it is properly safeguarded at all
times but the key shall not carry a tag or other indication of the strong room, safe or
strongbox which it operates.
(b) An officer holding the combination of a strongroom, safe or strongbox
must ensure the combination is known only to him and not divulged to any other
person.
(c) When operating the combination he must do so in such a manner that it
cannot be read off by another person and except as provided in this section no spare or
duplicate keys or written record of a combination shall be retained.
Custody of duplicate keys, written records, etc.
3. (a) Spare and duplicate keys or a written record of the combination of
strongrooms, safes and strongboxes other than those used for the storage of classified
material must be placed in an envelope which must be endorsed "Duplicate
key/combination of strong room, safe, strongbox, No. .....................”
(b) The key or combination holder must seal the envelope personally, either
with his personal seal or by signing and dating across the sealed flap in such a manner
that the envelope cannot be opened without disfiguring his signature.
(c) The envelope will then be deposited with the Inspector General, who shall
enter the deposit in a register showing the strong room, safe or strongbox number, its
location, the maximum overnight holding, the name and designation of the key or
combination holder and the date of the deposit.
(d) The Inspector General will issue an appropriate receipt to the depositor
and retain the envelope under maximum security in his own strongroom.
(e) The duplicate keys or written record of the combination of the Inspector
General's own strongroom shall be deposited in like manner in the Inspector General’s
office.
Duty of assignment officers during handover of strongrooms, etc.

336
 P.G.O. No. 129
4. (a) Combinations must be changed on the handover of a strongroom safe or
strongbox as provided in this Section or every six months, whichever is the earlier.
Similarly, duplicate keys will be changed over every six months.
(b) The Inspector General shall release the envelope containing the duplicate
key or record of the combination only against the surrender of the receipt which he
gave for it, noting the date of the withdrawal in his register.
(c) On receiving the envelope, the key or combination holder must check that
the seal has not been tampered with in any manner. The other key or written record of
the new combination shall be deposited in the bank.
Records of strongrooms
5. (a) Each Commanding Officer shall keep a record of strong-rooms, safes and
strongboxes on premises occupied by his/her command or office showing the
strongroom, safe or strongbox number, its location, the name and designation of the key
or combination holder, the dates on which he/she took over and handed over
responsibility for the strongroom, safe or strongbox and a record of the withdrawal of
duplicate keys or written combination in accordance with the proceeding regulation.
(b) A change of key or combination holder may be effected only on the
authority of the Commanding Officer, who must notify the change in writing to the
Inspector General.
(c) At the start of each financial year every Commanding Officer must submit
to the Inspector General, a return showing the make, type, maker's reference number
and location of each strong room, safe or strongbox in his/her command or office.
Strong rooms, etc., having different locks
6. (a) When a strong room, safe or strongbox having two different locks is
handed over it must be ensured, by examination of register that the officer taking over
has never held the key of the other lock but if such a situation cannot be avoided, the
lock of the strongroom, safe or strongbox must be changed.
(b) If the holder of a key to a strongroom, safe or strongbox loses his/her key
he/she must immediately report the fact to his/her Commanding Officer, who shall
forthwith investigate the matter and report the finding to the Inspector General.
(c) The Commanding Officer shall make arrangements for the lock be
changed immediately and where such change cannot be possible he/she shall arrange
for the duplicate key to be withdrawn by the key holder and the contents of the
strongroom, safe or strongbox removed under proper security to other safe custody,
until the lock can be changed, and similar action must be taken if the key holder has
good reason to suspect that his key has been exposed to copying or otherwise
compromised.
Contents of strong rooms, safes, etc.
7. If any case in which the lock of a strongroom, safe or strongbox needs to be
changed because of the loss of a key or officer responsible may be charged with the cost
of changing the lock and providing new keys.
Safes to be secured and locked
8. (a) Commanding Officers shall ensure that all safes on premises for which they
are responsible are secured by being built into the wall of the building or by otherwise
being securely attached to the structure. Except where strongboxes need to be moved
from place to place they should likewise be secured by being bolted to the structure,
access to the bolts being from inside the strongbox.

337
 P.G.O. No. 129
(b) Strongrooms, safes and strongboxes must be kept locked at all times except
during the actual process of depositing or withdrawing funds for the Force or
Government, and when a strongroom, safe or strongbox is open the officer in whose
charge it is must take every precaution to ensure that no other person has access to its
contents.
Custody of public money and valuables
9. (a) All public money and valuables received by a Police Officer and all funds
for the Force or Government retained in his custody must be deposited as soon as
possible in a strongroom, safe or strongbox pending their payment into the Accounts
Department of the Force or bank or being otherwise properly disposed of and in no
circumstances may any funds for the Force or Government other than temporary
imprest, be retained in the possession of a Police Officer other than in a strongroom,
safe or strongbox. Negligence in this respect will place the entire responsibility for any
loss upon the officer concerned.
(b) No Police Officer may keep, or allow to be kept in a strongroom, safe or
strongbox under his charge, private money or valuables or any money or valuables
other than those which he is bound to receive and account for by virtue of his office.
Money which may be retained in strongrooms, etc.
10. (a) The Inspector General will lay down the maximum amount of public
money and where appropriate the limitation of valuables which may be retained in a
strongroom, safe or strongbox overnight.
(b) If maximum amount is likely to be exceeded the excess may be placed in a
locked or sealed secure container and temporarily deposited in a strongroom or safe of
higher security grading, a receipt being obtained from the key holder of that
strongroom or safe.
(c) In exceptional circumstances where large amounts are involved the matter
should be reported to the Inspector General, who in his discretion may arrange for the
strong room or safe to be placed under police guard.

Keeping of certain items in strongrooms, etc.

11. When not in use the following items shall always be kept in a strongroom, safe or
strongbox:–
(a) cash, including cheques and other instruments of payment;
(b) the main and sub-stocks of stamps;
(c) cheque books;
(d) cash books;
(e) revenue receipt books of any description;
(f) special clamps and dies, seals, etc;
(g) any other official valuables; and
(h) a register, showing in as much detail as is practicable the contents of the
strongroom, safe or strongbox at any given time.
Surprise inspections of strongrooms, etc.

338
 P.G.O. No. 129
12. (a) Commanding Officers are responsible for arranging for surprise
inspections of the contents of strongrooms, safes and strongboxes in their commands or
offices.
(b) Inspections may be made at irregular intervals, but at least once every
three months. The inspecting officer will report to the Inspector General any
discrepancies, deficiencies or irregularity which he may find and any case in which he
considers the safe custody facilities to be inadequate.
(c) The result of each inspection shall be recorded in the Register of Surprise
Inspections.
Security of cash in transit
13. (a) The security of cash in transit is the responsibility of the Commanding
Officer concerned and a sufficient escort should be provided and other precautions
taken, by varying the route taken or the times of collection or paying-in.
(b) Where appropriate, the advice of the Criminal Intelligence Unit shall be
sought on the nature of the security precautions which should be applied in particular
circumstances.
Operation of bank accounts
14. Subject to the instructions of the Minister, the Inspector General may appoint
one or more banks in Tanzania to be bankers to the Force for the custody of funds for
the Force or Government and other official funds and for the transaction of official
banking business.
Authority of Inspector General to open bank account
15. (a) Except with the prior authority of the Inspector General no Police Officer
shall open a bank account for the deposit, custody or withdrawal of funds for the Force
or Government or other moneys for which he is responsible in his official capacity or
for the transaction of official banking business.
(b) The authority of the Inspector General will be conveyed in writing to the
Commanding Officer concerned and copied to the Accounting Officer and the
Controller and Auditor-General.
(c) The Inspector General may prescribe the maximum balance which may be
held in any official bank account and where at any time this balance seems likely to be
exceeded the officer operating the accounts will consult the Inspector General on the
action to be taken.
Prohibition to overdraw bank account
16. (a) It is expressly forbidden to overdraw an official bank account or to obtain
any advance or loan from a bank for official purposes, without the prior authority of
the Inspector General.
(b) The authority of Inspector General shall be conveyed in writing to the
Commanding Officer concerned and copied to the Accounting Officer and Controller
and Auditor-General and in no circumstances may private cheques be cashed through
official bank accounts nor may private money be deposited in such an account.
Signatories of cheques
17. (a) Commanding Officers may nominate officers who may sign cheques drawn
on bank accounts for which they are responsible. At least two signatures are required
for the operation of the account; one of whom is not responsible for the preparation of
the cheque and neither of which is responsible for the authorisation of the payment.

339
 P.G.O. No. 129
(b) The names and designation of those officers and their specimen signatures
will be advised to the bank where the account is held, copies of the advice being sent to
the Inspector General and the Controller and Auditor-General.
(c) Any change in signatories shall be similarly advised.
Arrangements in case of emergency
18. In order that a bank account shall continue to operate regardless of any
circumstances that may arise in respect of the normal signatories, arrangements may be
made by the Commanding Officers for the account to be capable of operation by the
Accounts Department of the Force in an emergency. The provisions in respect of the
number and status of the Accounts Department of the Force signatories shall apply to
such arrangements.
Issue of cheques
19. (a) Unless an open cheque is specifically requested by the payee and accepted
by authorizing officer, all cheques drawn on official bank accounts must be crossed.
(b) Every officer signing a cheque must satisfy him/herself that the cheque is
correctly drawn and that the payee and the amount correspond with the details of the
bill or voucher in respect of which it is in payment and that the details of the counterfoil
agree with those on the cheque.
(c) In no circumstances whatever, will an officer sign a cheque which has not
been fully completed in all respects.
(d) Cheques which are not crossed must be treated as if they were payments in
cash and where they are remitted by post, they must be sent to the payee under
registered cover.
Bank to be advised on lost or mislaid cheques
20. (a) In event of cheque issued by a command being reported as lost or
misreported before is cashed, the bank must immediately be advised to stop payment of
the cheque, acknowledgement of this instruction being obtained.
(b) The payee shall be requested to provide a written indemnity against any
loss being sustained by the Force because of the missing cheque and he may then be
issued with a replacement cheque.
(c) If the original cheque is found before a replacement cheque is issued, the
bank should be requested to lift the stop order. If the original cheque is found after a
replacement cheque is issued, it must immediately be cancelled.
Cheque books
21. (a) Cheque books or forms must be examined immediately they are received
from the bank to ensure that no cheque are missing. The checking will be carried out by
a responsible officer who will enter his initials and date on the reverse of the last
counterfoil in each cheque book or form in a series as evidence that the examination has
been made.
(b) Cheque books not required for immediate issue shall be stored in a strong
room, safe or strongbox. Cheque books which are currently in use will be similarly
stored overnight or when not immediately required.
(c) Counterfoils of all cheque issued and paid cheque returned by the bank
must be retained in safe custody as they may be requested for examination by the
Inspector General or Controller and Auditor-General.
Reconciliation of bank accounts
340
 P.G.O. No. 129
22. (a) The balance of every bank account as shown in the bank statement must be
reconciled with the corresponding cash book balance at least monthly, the reconciliation
statement being filed or recorded in the cash book.
(b) Reconciliations shall be carried out when responsibility for any bank
account or cheque book is handed over from one officer to another and on the occasion
of any surprise inspection or inspect.
(c) Copies of reconciliations of all accounts other than those of the Accounts
Department of the Force shall be sent to the Inspector General through or by the
Regional Commanders as the case may be.

341
 P.G.O. No. 130
CUSTODY AND SECURITY OF PUBLIC MONEY -
INSPECTION UNIT
Inspections
1. (a) The Chief of Inspection shall arrange with the other member or members
of his unit when they will assemble and in the case of a surprise inspection this
information must be treated as confidential and not communicated to any other person.
(b) The officer responsible for the balances to be inspected must be present at
all times the inspection team is carrying out its duties and the Chief of Inspection or his
representative and members of the inspecting team must particularly ensure that to
avoid blame for any shortage being directed at them, on no occasion are they left alone
with the cash balances.
(c) The inspecting team shall count all the cash on hand in the office being
inspected, including the contents of strong rooms, safes and strongboxes.
(d) The cash shall be counted in detail, except that in the case of the inspection
of the main stocks of currency, boxes, bags or packets of currency notes and coins may
be accepted if the inspecting team is satisfied that the seals of the Bank of Tanzania or
other original suppliers are unbroken.
(e) The balance of cash on hand shall be agreed or reconciled with the balance
in the relevant cash book.
(f) Any discrepancies must be noted for inclusion in the inspecting team's
report, together with the explanation of the discrepancy given by the officer responsible
for the balances and any significant discrepancy must be reported immediately by the
Chief of Inspection to the Inspector General.
Rules relating to conduct of inspection
2. (a) Having started an inspection of cash balances the inspecting team must not
leave them unattended and must continue until the inspection of those balances or
stocks is completed.
(b) If it is impossible to complete the inspection in one day, all strong rooms,
safes and strongboxes which have not been fully checked must be sealed by the
inspecting team and the seals must not be broken except in the presence of the
inspecting team.
(c) In the case of an inspection involving a bank balance, the inspecting team
will reconcile the bank balance shown in the cash book with the balance shown in the
latest bank statement on hand, listing unpresented cheques, credits not accounted for
and other adjustments for attachment to the inspecting team's report in support of the
bank reconciliation.
(d) The Chief of Inspection shall also request the officer responsible for the
bank account to ask the bank to send direct to the Chief of Inspection, a bank statement
and bank certificate of balance to the close of business on the working day immediately
previous to the date of the inspection.
(e) On receipt of such documents the inspecting team shall carry out an up-to-
date reconciliation of that latest bank balance using the information noted during the
inspection.
Reports of inspecting team
3. (a) The report of the inspecting team shall be prepared on the approved form
and signed by the Chief of Inspection.

342
 P.G.O. No. 130
(b) Any attachments to the report should be similarly signed. The report
should include any comment on matters arising from the inspection which the
inspecting team may consider relevant.
(c) The report shall be sent as appropriate to the Inspector General or
Commanding Officer who appointed the inspecting team.

343
 P.G.O. No. 131
CUSTODY AND SECURITY OF PUBLIC MONEY - HANDING-OVER
PROCEDURES
Duties of officer handing over
1. (a) Commanding Officers shall ensure that on every occasion on which cash,
receipt books, keys, etc., are handed over from one officer to another, the hand-over is
conducted in such a manner that there can be no doubt or ambiguity as to the items
handed and taken over.
(b) In every such case the officer handing over must ensure that all cash books,
registers, etc., are fully entered and balanced to the date of the hand-over, ruling off the
books after the latest entry. He/she must prepare in quintuplicate a handing-over
statement fully and correctly listing all balances, documents, etc., in his/her possession
which he/she is required to hand over.
(c) In particular the statements will record the following items, if applicable:
(i) cash and bank balances in words and figures;
(ii) the serial numbers of all fixed fee tickets;
(iii) the serial numbers of all unused, partly used and completely used
receipt and licence books;
(iv) details of strongrooms, safes and strongboxes, etc., and of their
keys including duplicates;
(v) the quantities and descriptions of sealed packets and other articles
of value;
(vi) any official seals, dies or stamps;
(vii) titles of books of regulations, rules and instructions; and
(viii) references of files and similar official documents.
Duties of officer taking over from another officer
2. (a) The officer taking over must check that all items listed on the statement are
actually produced and handed over to him/her and that they agree with the balances,
stocks, etc., shown in the relevant cash books and registers.
(b) In particular he/she shall, if applicable:
(i) check carefully and in detail all cash, fixed fee tickets, receipt
books, etc., comparing them with the balances and stocks in the relevant cash books and
registers;
(ii) check all entries and castings in the cash books since the last
payment to Accounts Department of the Force or bank and verify that all receipts
issued subsequent to that payment have been duly brought to account;
(iii) if a bank account is operated, call for a bank statement and
reconcile the bank balance with the relevant cash book;
(iv) check the balance of any standing imprest with the imprest
account and ensure that the total of cash on hand, completed vouchers, etc., agrees with
the amount of the imprest;
(v) ensure that the keys handed over to him actually operate the locks
which they purport to operate and that the locks and keys are in good order, that
duplicate keys have been properly deposited and that the strongrooms, safes and
strongboxes comply with the provisions of this paragraph;

344
 P.G.O. No. 131
(vi) check that sealed packets are in fact sealed and that they and
other items of value, etc., comply with their descriptions in the strongroom, safe or
strongbox register;
(vii) check that, prima facie, all books of regulations, instructions, etc.,
have been amended to date; and
(viii) enquire into the omission from the handing – over statement of
any items which on the basis of his/her experience he/she would normally expect to
receive in connection with the duty which he/she is taking over.
(c) When the officer taking over is satisfied as to the correctness of the
handing-over statement, he/she shall draw a bold line below the last entry and across
any unused part of the statement and all copies of the statement shall then be signed
and dated by both the officer handing over and the officer taking over.
(d) If the statement comprises more than one sheet, every sheet shall be signed
and dated by both officers.
Shortages and discrepancies found during hand-over
3. (a) If during the handing-over, shortages or discrepancies are noted between
the balances or stocks of cash, receipt books, etc., being handed over and those recorded
in the relevant cash books and registers, the full facts relating to the shortage or
discrepancy must be recorded in detail in the handing-over statement together with the
explanation of the shortage or discrepancy given by the handing-over officer.
(b) In the event of the shortage or discrepancy being other than of a very
minor nature, the officer taking over must make an immediate report to the
Commanding Officer or in the case of a hand-over between outgoing and incoming
Commanding Officers to the Inspector General who must forthwith investigate the
shortage or discrepancy, submitting his report to the Inspector General, or Accounting
Officer in the case of an investigation by the Inspector General.
Distribution of statements
4. On completion of the handing-over, the officers handing over and taking over will
each retain one copy of the handing-over statement, one copy will be sent to the
Commanding Officer, or in the case of a handing-over between outgoing and incoming
Commanding Officers to the Inspector General.
Procedure on illness or absence of officer
5. (a) If because of illness or for any other reasons an outgoing officer is unable
to hand-over his duties and responsibilities in person, he shall forward the keys of the
strong rooms, safes, strongboxes, and such other items in his custody to his
Commanding Officer by hand under sealed personal cover.
(b) The Commanding Officer must then appoint a Handing-over inspecting
team comprising at least two officers who will, on behalf of the outgoing officer, jointly
perform the hand-over duties prescribed in the foregoing paragraphs, signing the
handing-over statement in his stead.
(c) The procedure detailed herein shall apply where a key-holder is
unexpectedly absent from a duty which cannot be held in abeyance until his return.
Procedure where taking over cannot be made
6. If, for any reason, an incoming officer considers that the state of the records,
balances, security, etc., is such that he cannot conscientiously take them over, he must
immediately seek instructions orally from his Commanding Officer and promptly signal
the Inspector General a full report of the circumstances of the case.
345
 P.G.O. No. 131
Loss of accountable documents and action to be taken
7. (a) The action to be taken on the loss of accountable documents shall vary with
the nature of the documents concerned.
(b) A loss of stamps, fixed fee receipts or licenses, shall be treated as a loss of
cash.
(c) Loss of accountable documents as miscellaneous receipts, invoice orders,
which do not have a predetermined value but which nevertheless might be misused if
they fell into the wrong hands, this loss should be reported forthwith to the Inspector
Generals.
(d) A notice in a form approved by the Attorney General through the
Inspector General should be placed in at least one local newspaper, informing members
of the public not to accept documents of the serial numbers concerned.
(e) Where the loss of the documents was due to the negligence of an officer, the
Commanding Officer should require the officer responsible to pay for the cost of the
advertisement.

346
 P.G.O. No. 132
PAY AND ADVANCES – MISCELLANEOUS MATTERS
General
1. (a) “Pay” in this Order means the basic salary due to an officer by virtue of his
rank and appointment. It does not include allowances.
(b) Authority for the payment of an officer’s salary and necessary allowances
is automatically conveyed in the letter of an officer’s appointment/promotion and/or in
Force Orders, Part II.
(c) Authority for the payment of increments is conveyed by a “Change of
Salary Advice” form issued by the Ministry of Home Affairs (details of which are not
published in Force Orders).
(d) The incremental date for the Rank & File will be either 1st January or 1st
July; for inspectors and gazetted officers it will normally be the anniversary of their
appointment or date of promotion to their present rank.
(e) Disciplinary punishments involving a change in pay will be published in
part II of Force Orders and will be put into effect from the dates stated.
(f) Upon suspension of an officer he/she shall not be entitled to any salary, but
may be granted an alimentary allowance, the details of which will be conveyed
immediately by the Inspector General to his/her Commanding Officer.
(g) Upon interdiction of an officer he/she shall receive pay of not less than half
salary, details of which will be conveyed immediately by the Commanding Officer to the
Inspector General.
(h) These orders do not absolve an officer from complying with the terms and
conditions of Public Finances Act, Cap 348 R.E. 2002 and its Regulations.
Pay on Leave
2. (a) Leave pay may be paid up to the end of the month prior to the date on
which the officer is due to return from leave.
(b) Members of rank and file may be paid leave salary in advance subject to
Treasury arrangements.
Conduct of Pay Parade
3. (a) Personnel will be paraded to receive their pay at a convenient time within
the last three days of the month.
(b) The parade will normally be conducted by a Gazetted Officer, or if this is
not possible, by an Inspector i/c. Station or Unit.
(c) Each officer receiving pay must be permitted to check the amount paid to
him before he leaves the pay table and to make any complaints at that time.
(d) Where an officer is prevented from being present at a pay parade, he/she
shall be paid as soon after as is convenient. The payment of salary to one officer on
behalf of another is prohibited. Personnel sick in hospital should be paid by a visiting
officer.
(e) All deductions owed by a personnel shall be recovered at the pay table in
cash; this shall include disciplinary fines, adjustment of any previous overpayments and
canteen debts. Except for the recovery of canteen debts, a General Revenue Receipt
credited to respective code will be issued immediately to the individual. Recovery of
canteen debts will be paid to the canteen manager and official recoveries will be

347
 P.G.O. No. 132
forwarded to the Ministry of Public Security and Safety without delay. A return
showing details of official recoveries shall be forwarded in the following form :-
Name and Number
Amount Recovered.
E.R.V. No. and Date.
Head and Sub- head credited.
Nature of Recovery.
(f) The officer conducting the pay parade will sign the certificate at the foot of
the acquittance rolls and will be responsible for the correctness of payments entered
therein.
Payments or Stoppage
4. (a) Authority for the payment or the stoppage of any allowance to members of
the Rank and File is vested in Commanding Officers. This authority must be conveyed
in writing.
(b) No allowances is payable to an officer during his/her absence on leave
without pay.
(c) All allowances are payable during an absence due to sickness up to six
months. Only detective allowance will be payable indefinitely during such absence.
(d) No allowance is payable when an officer is under interdiction or
suspension.
(e) Except where stated otherwise, all allowances are paid monthly at the
approved rates.
5. Plain clothes allowance.
This is payable to all members of the C.I.D. with the approval of the Director of
Criminal Investigation.
6. Detective Allowance.
Payable to all members of the C.I.D. with approval of the Director of Criminal
Investigation. This allowance shall be payable in addition to plain clothes allowance.
7. Band Allowance
Payable to members of the Rank & File in the Police Band at the approved rates
8. Driver/Mechanic’s allowance.
Any member of the rank and file employed as an authorised driver will, on
passing the necessary trade test for driver/mechanics be eligible to receive this
allowance.
“Satisfactory service”, includes three years’ accident free driving but in special cases
Regional Commanders may, in consultation with the Force Transport Officer, award
satisfactory service in spite of accidents.
Payment of this allowance may be stopped or reduced by Regional Commanders in
addition to, or in lieu of, any other punishment or surcharge imposed on a
Driver/Mechanic arising from in discipline or vehicle accident.
9. Instructor’s allowance

348
 P.G.O. No. 132
Payable to members of the Force whilst employed on instructional duties at the
Police College or the Police Training Schools.
10. Dog and Horse Handler’s Allowance.
(a) Payable to Dog and Horse-Handlers whilst employed on such duties. The
Force Dog and Horse Master will advise Commanding Officers on those qualified to
receive this allowance.
(b) “Satisfactory service” means service without any serious charges arising
out of dog or horse-handling duties.
11. Bicycle Allowance.
Payable to all officers in accordance with Government Standing Orders
……………….. Commanding Officers may authorise payment of this allowance which
should be claimed by certified voucher.
12. Subsistence Allowance
Subsistence allowance will be paid as stated below:
(a) Recruits
This allowance may be paid to a recruit at the appropriate rates as laid
down by the Government to cover the period from the date the recruit is first accepted
until the date on which he is anticipated to arrive at the Police Training School. It will
be paid on a payment voucher. A confirmatory copy of the payment voucher will be
sent to the Commandant, Police Training School. This allowance may continue to be
paid to the recruit to over the period from the date of his/her arrival at the Police
Training school until the date on which he/she is finally accepted and attested, and
allocated a Force number.

(b) Other Officers

Subsistence allowance in terms of Government Standing Orders L.104 (c)
may be paid at the appropriate rates as laid down by the Government to officers (other
than recruit constables,) attending courses at recognised institutions. The Police
College, Dar es Salaam and Police Training School, Moshi are responsible for the
payment of this allowance to all officers attending courses at these two institutions from
the date such officers leave their stations up to the expected date of return to their
stations.

13. Disturbance Allowance

(a) All ranks of the Force, other than officers on temporary terms, may be
paid disturbance allowance at the current approved rate.
(b) Where an officer is transferred from one station to another on promotion,
his annual basic salary will be taken as being that of the post to which he has been
promoted.
(c) This allowance will not be payable when an officer goes on leave, but will
be payable if on his return from leave he is posted to a different station.
(d) This allowance will not be paid to members of the Force who are
transferred from one station to another:-
(i) on compassionate grounds;

349
 P.G.O. No. 132
(ii) at their own request;
(iii) because of misconduct;
(iv) within a town.
(e) Disturbance allowance will not be paid to an officer in respect of
field allowance when he moves from a field post.
(f) Disturbance allowance will be certified that transfer was not at the officer’s
own request and that it involved packing of personal effects.

350
 P.G.O. No. 134
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION FUNDS

Use of Funds
1. Criminal Investigation Funds shall be expended on the following purposes only :-
(a) The purchase of criminal information, vide paragraph 8.
(b) The reimbursement of C.I.D. Officers’ authorised investigation expenses,
vide paragraph 10.
(c) The payment of rewards, vide paragraph 11.
(d) The payment of fees for female searchers shall be at the rate prescribed by
the Inspector General of the Police.
(e) Expenses for packing exhibits.
(f) The payment of fees to non-Government vehicle examiners for the special
examination of motor vehicles in connection with criminal cases.
Payment and Accounting Procedure
2. To support expenditure under sub-paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) of
paragraph 1, a receipt in the under-mentioned form, should be obtained from the
person receiving the money:-
“RECEIVED: From Regional/District C.I.D. officer .........................
Region/District, shillings ...................... being a reward for information in Police
Case/Enquiry No. ..................................
Signature or Right Thumb-Print .......................”
Date .................................................................
Place .................................................. Paying Officer .........................”
3. In cases where a receipt cannot be obtained either because it is undesirable to
disclose the name of the informer or for some similar reason, a certificate, in the under-
mentioned form, will be made out and signed by the officer certifying the expenditure
and by the paying officer.
“CERTIFIED paid to .............................................................................. Shillings
................................. for information/service rendered in Police Case/Enquiry No. .
.......................................
Date ..................................... Paying Officer .........................................
Place ............................................ Certifying Officer ............................
4. At Police Station where no C.I.D. funds are held, application will be made to the
O/C. District or Regional C.I.D. officer for funds to meet expenditure in any particular
case.
5. Accounting shall be strictly and accurately carried out in accordance with the
procedure set out in Appendix “A”.
6. In the case of sub-paragraph (f) of paragraph 1 above, the officer requiring the
service will, in the first instance, issue a Local Purchase Order to the non-Government
Vehicle Examiner. On completion of the examination (or at monthly intervals in busy
stations), the examiner will return the Local Purchase Order, suitably endorsed to show
the cost of the services, supported, if he so desires, by a statement of account. The O/C.
Station will forward the bill and supporting Local Purchase Order to his O/C. District,

351
 P.G.O. No. 134
who will prepare a payment voucher and forward the voucher, in triplicate, to the
originating station. Payment may then be made through the Ministry of Public Security
and Safety
7. No other forms of C.I.F. expenditure may be incurred without reference to the
Director of Criminal Investigation.
Purchase of Criminal Information
8. Payment for criminal information may be made from the C.I.F. in accordance
with the following scale :-
Maximum Authorising Officer
Shs. 50,000/= O/C. Regional C.I.D. Units.
Shs. 200,000/= Regional Commanders.
Shs. 500,000/= Director of Criminal Investigation.
Over Shs. 500,000/= Inspector – General

9. Gazetted Officers to whom C.I.F. is allocated may make small advances to

members of the C.I.D. if they are satisfied that the money is definitely required to
connection with an investigation. Advances may not exceed Shs. 20,000/=, nor may more
than Shs. 50,000/= per month be advanced to any individual officer without permission
from the Regional Commander. All officers to whom advances are made shall be
required to provide accurate accounts of expenditure.

Reimbursement of Expenses
10. Minor investigation expenses by C.I.D. personnel may be reimbursed if, and only
if, the following circumstances apply:-
(a) The expenditure was incurred in an investigation which led to a conviction.
(b) The claimant can prove that the expenditure was necessary.
(c) The claimant can prove that he had already expended his monthly
detective allowance.
(d) The total reimbursement does not exceed the amount prescribed by the
Director of Criminal Investigation.
(e) All other claims for reimbursement shall be referred to the Director of
Criminal Investigation.

Rewards
11. The use of the C.I.F. in connection with rewards offered by Police is covered in
P.G.O. No.134
District C.I.D. Expenditure Returns
12. A Monthly Return of Expenditure, as at paragraph 3 above, supported by
receipts for each item of expenditure will be forwarded to Officers in Charge of
Regional C.I.D. Units by O/C. District. Final balances will also be signalled before the
Returns are dispatched.

352
 P.G.O. No. 134
APPENDIX “B”

(TO P.G.O. No. 133) Comment [u1]: SEE ATTACHED TXT FOR
FORMAT

REWARDS – PAYMENT OF, BY POLICE

1. Whenever an O/C. District considers that a reward should be offered for the
arrest of a wanted person, he should apply forthwith to his Regional Police
Commander, giving full reasons for his request.
2. The Regional Police Commander may authorise the offer of rewards up to and
including Shs. 50,000/=. Should the Regional Police Commander consider that a larger
reward is called for, he should apply forthwith to the Director of Criminal
Investigation, giving full reasons for his request. The latter may authorise an offer of
rewards up to and including Shs. 500,000/=. Rewards above this amount must be
authorised by the Inspector General.
3. The Regional Police Commander shall decide whether a reward may be
advertised by printed notices which shall be prepared and issued by the Forensic
Bureau for country-wide circulation. In cases of urgency, however, the Regional Police
Commander may arrange for such notices to be printed locally. The expense in
connection with local printing will be debited to the C.I.F. Reward notices should be set
out in the clearest terms in Kiswahili and, where local conditions so require,
translations made into other appropriate languages. The notices shall offer the reward
for information leading to the arrest of the wanted person(s).
4. O/C. District are responsible for seeing that reward notices are given the widest
possible circulation; copies shall be posted up in all Police Stations, Government Offices
and District Council Offices at least.

353
 P.G.O. No. 134
5. Copies of every reward notice issued locally shall be sent to C.I.D. Headquarters
for publication in the Police Gazette. In addition, one copy shall be placed in the
appropriate case file. The Director of Criminal Investigation will arrange for reward
notices to be announced over the Press.
6. Application for payment of reward shall be made to the Director of Criminal
Investigation on the appropriate case file. Payment will not normally be made unless an
arrest is effected, but Regional Commanders may recommend partial payment if the
circumstances appear to justify it.
7. The Director of Criminal Investigation will arrange payment from the C.I.F.
account and will inform all Regional Police Headquarters through the medium of the
Police Gazette that a reward has been paid and order the cancellation of the reward
notice. Regional Commanders shall then arrange to remove all relevant notices.

354
 P.G.O. No. 135
FORCE FUNDS

1. There are three main sources from which expenditure can be incurred in respect
of welfare demands:-
(a) Rank and File Welfare and Equipment Vote
This fund is approved and replenished annually in the estimates. It is
intended to cover expenditure in respect of equipment for police recreation rooms and
canteens and the provisions of social amenities generally. Expenditures of each year is
controlled by the Inspector General who may authorize the money to be issued to
commanding officers in which case the latter decide on how best to spend it. This fund is
subject to normal sort of control and accounting.
(b) Command Canteen and Welfare Fund
Each command will keep its own command canteen and welfare fund
income into which will derive from canteen rebate/profit. Expenditure is controlled by a
Chairman and a committee established under the provision of Police General Orders
Nos. 212 and 213. Funds are applied for the mutual benefit of all units served by the
committee, and may be extended, subject to ad hoc rulings from the Inspector General
to the granting of small loans for the purchase of various utility items, and grants for
deserving personal cases. Commanding Officers are responsible for the expenditure
connected with the fund and shall, for this purpose, open a Bank account to be known
as the Command Canteen and Welfare Fund. A half – yearly statement of account in
the form prescribed, will be forwarded to the Inspector General by the commanding
Officer concerned. The account will be subject to internal audit half-yearly.
(c) Police Recreation and Welfare Fund
This is a central fund managed and controlled by the Inspector General
who may nominate a committee to advise him. The fund is kept by the Quartermaster
and its objects are broadly the encouragement of sport and recreation in addition to
funds (a) and (d) in this P.G.O. The Inspector General may also, at his discretion direct
the application of money from this fund to any other cause which promotes the welfare
of the Force.
Income into this fund has usually derived from the sale of various items
discarded by Government, but the Inspector-General may also direct that any other
moneys received by the Force and which are not subject to parliamentary control, be
paid into this fund.
2. In addition to these three funds, the Force maintains:-
(a) Police Rewards Fund
(i) This fund is established by section 63 of the Police Force and
Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 and its income is laid down in the same section.
(ii) Commanding Officers will ensure that all moneys, received under
(a), (b), (c) and (d) as stated in Cap 322 are credited without delay, to the item – Police
Rewards Fund and, in the case of payments under (e) and (f) that the procedure laid
down in Police General Order No. 104 is followed. In the case of money recovered under
section 77 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002 where
they arise out of Police employed under the terms of section 72, they shall be credited to
the sub –head “Hire of Police” in the normal way. Where they arise out of Police
employed under the terms of sections 73 and 74 of the Police Force and Auxiliary

355
 P.G.O. No. 135
Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002, arrangement will be made for the submission of a
request to the President for a refund out of Revenue into the Fund.
(iii) Prosecuting Officers shall, where necessary, draw the attention of the
courts to section 44 (a) and (b) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322
R.E. 2002 and request an order for payment into the Fund.
(iv) Returns of payments into the Fund are no longer required.
(v) The fund is administered solely by the Inspector General and shall be
used in accordance with section 62 (4) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Police Services
Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002.
(vi) In cases of death however Commanding Officers will make an
immediate grant request from the Fund for funeral expenses of any deceased member
of the Rank and File, in accordance with the approved scale.
Grants under this paragraph will be paid to a near relative of the
deceased who has accepted responsibility for the funeral arrangements or if no such
relative can be found, then the actual cost of burial to an amount note exceeding the
appropriate grant will be charged against the Fund. In both cases, payment must be
fully receipted.
(b) Regional Police Commanders are authorised to approve applications for
the payment of grants from the Fund for the following purposes up to the maximum
shown :-
(i) To any member of the Rank and File discharged from the Force as
medically unfit for further service:-
Cash for the purpose of incidental expenses on the journey from his
Unit to his/her place of repatriation at approved rates.
(ii) To wives or families of deceased members of the Rank and File:-
Cash for the widow and for each child up to a maximum of four
children – to cover incidental expenses on the journey from the husband’s/wife’s Unit to
the place of repatriation.
(c) Application will be made to the Inspector General for any grant from the
Fund not covered by this General Order. The following are given as examples of the
purposes for which grants may be made:-
(i) Assistance of kinds, other than covered in this General Order, to the
wives/husband and families of deceased members of the Rank & File.
(ii) Contributions towards prizes to be given at athletic meetings,
assaults-at-arms and similar events organised by the Force or for its benefit.
(iii) Payments to members of the Rank & File as rewards for meritorious
acts or services in execution of duty, if such payments are not met from Government
Funds.
(iv) Expenditure for the benefit and advancement of authorised
recreation and sport and other branches of police activity organised within the Force.

356
 SECTION VI
BUILDINGS AND QUARTERS
Nos. 141 – 150

P.G.O. No. Titles

141. Barracks and Buildings – Use and Maintenance of
142. Fire Precautions
143. Inspections – Barracks
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150

367
 P.G.O No.141
BARRACKS AND BUILDINGS – USE AND MAINTENANCE OF

Care of Buildings

1. All Police buildings shall be kept clean and tidy and free from smells, dust and
cobwebs.

2. Latrines and drains shall be cleaned every day and disinfectant applied in liberal
quantities to floors and surrounding areas. Care shall be taken to ensure that
bacterial action is not stopped by the application of heavy concentrations of
disinfectant into septic tank systems.
3
Floors and verandas shall be scrubbed or polished at regular intervals.

4. All woodwork, particularly the doors and shutters in Rank & File quarters, shall be
painted, stained, polished or oiled as appropriate.

5. Fire appliances and buckets shall be painted red and the paint kept in fresh
condition. They shall be maintained in good order in accordance with P.G.O. No.
142.

6. Damage to police buildings shall be reported at once to the O/C. Station and by him
to the O/C. District. The latter will arrange for early repairs, and will report to his
Commanding Officer.

Compounds and Grounds

7. Police compounds and grounds shall be kept in immaculate condition at all times.
Trees should be planted and flower beds laid out. Perimeter hedges shall be grown
round all Police compounds and Commanding Officers should ensure that this is
done everywhere.

8. Grass and hedges shall be cut and flower beds tended.

9. All ditches and open drains shall be kept clear and clean.

10. Edges of paths shall be marked off with white stones, hedges or other suitable
materials.

11. Livestock, excepting only dogs, cats and poultry, shall not be kept in Police
compounds.

12. Poultry shall be kept in tidy, properly constructed fowl houses in areas approved by
the O/C. Station.

Furniture

13. All Government furniture on issue to Police Stations and buildings shall be entered
in the Property on Charge Register (P.F. 168).

14. Transfer of furniture from office to office without the permission of the O/C. Station
is forbidden.

368
 P.G.O No.141
15. All furniture shall be clean and polished. O/C. Stations are responsible for the good
order of all Government furniture issued to their Stations.

16. Every member of the Force is responsible for the good order of all furniture used by
him.

17. Damage to furniture, which shall include stains and loss of keys or component parts
of furniture, shall be reported without delay to O/C. Districts. The latter will arrange
repairs. O/C. Districts shall default officers who cause damage or loss by negligence
and may require them to pay for repairs or replacements.

Consumption of Electric Current

18. Electricity may only be supplied to selected Rank & File Quarters on the direct
authority of Police Headquarters. Members of the Inspectorate are required to pay
for their electricity and the Government may also require the Rank & File to pay for
the current they use in their Quarters.

19. Current will be supplied on the basis of one lighting point per room up to maximum
of three per quarter.

20. Bulbs will be supplied by the occupants and shall not exceed 60 watts in power.

21. Bulbs for offices, verandah and passages will be supplied by Government and shall
not be removed without permission from O/C. Stations. Verandas’ bulbs shall not
exceed 25 watts in power.

22. The strictest economy shall be exercised in the use of electric current. Unnecessary
lights in passages and offices shall not be left on at night.

23. All electric lights in Rank & File Quarters shall be switched off between
23.00 hours and 06.00 hours except:-

(a) in emergency;

(b) for periods not exceeding ½ hour to enable night duty men to dress and
undress;

(c) on Saturday nights and other special occasions when O/C. District and Units
may permit lights to be left on until midnight.

24. The use of electric irons from light fittings in Rank and File Quarters is strictly
forbidden. O/C. Districts should arrange for ironing facilities to be provided in a
suitable place with a separate meter. All charges arising there shall be met either by
the men or by the Canteen or Welfare Funds.

25. Unauthorised additions or alterations to electric light wiring or fittings are strictly
forbidden.

Occupants of and Visitors to Rank & File Quarters

26. Rank & File Quarters shall only be occupied on a permanent basis by Police
Officers, their wives, children, housekeepers and servants. No other persons shall
live in Police quarters without permission from the O/C. District or Unit.

369
 P.G.O No.141
27. Visitors shall not be allowed to stay in Police quarters after 22.00 hours unless
permitted to do so by the N.C.O. i/c the Lines.

28. Subject to the general responsibility of the O/C. Station or Units, each Police Officer
who occupies a quarter is responsible for the cleanliness of all the rooms in his
quarter and for the drains and grounds adjacent to it.

29. Beds and bedding shall be clean at all times. Bug-ridden beds and mattresses shall
not be allowed in Police quarters and any officer whose bed or bedding is found to
harbour bugs shall be defaulted and shall also be required to move the offending
articles from his quarter.

30. No member of the Rank & File shall be permitted to vacate a Police quarter until it
has been inspected by the O/C. Station. The latter will note and report any damage
and arrange repairs in accordance with paragraph 17. Damage to quarters or loss of
keys, fittings, etc., caused by negligence should be referred to the O/C. District/Unit
who will default the man responsible and may require him to pay for repairs or
replacement.

31. O/C. Stations shall ensure that all available Rank & File accommodation is used to
the best advantage and that unnecessary overcrowding is prevented. Large families
shall be given priority, followed by small families, married men without children
and finally single men. Under no circumstances may two families with children be
required to share one quarter. Over crowding, if unavoidable, shall be confined to
single men or married men without children.

370
 P.G.O No.142
FIRE PRECAUTIONS
General

1. Every member of the Force shall take the greatest care at all times to protect
Government buildings and property from damage by fire.

2. The occupant of every Police quarter and, in the case of flats, the senior occupant on
each floor of the building, is held responsible for ensuring that kitchen fires are
completely extinguished at night. Fires shall be raked over and extinguished with
water after use. Any Police Officer who fails to comply with this Order shall be held
responsible for any subsequent fire damage which may originate in his kitchen.

3. Smoking in any Police garage, building or store containing petrol, oil or other
inflammable substance or material is strictly forbidden.

4. (a) Commanding Officers shall ensure that an adequate number of fire points are
established and maintained in all Station and barrack areas. Each fire point
shall be equipped as follows:-

(i) 2 fire extinguishers;

(ii) 2 hand axes;

(iii) 2 felling axes;

(iv) 2 fire buckets filled with sand;

(v) 2 fire buckets filled with water; and

(vi) 4 fire hooks (in the case of Stations where thatched roofs still exist).

(b) In addition, every petrol and paint store shall be equipped with two foamite
extinguishers and four buckets filled with sand.

(c) Certain other buildings may require protection and shall be equipped at the
discretion of Commanding Officers with:-

(i) 1 Fire extinguisher;

(ii) 2 Buckets filled with water.

(d) If any fire point is not equipped to the scale laid down above, the
Commanding Officer concerned shall make good the deficiency, as the
provision and maintenance of fire fighting equipment is his responsibility.

5. All fire appliances shall be painted in red, with the word “FIRE” in white letters 3”
high painted on all fire buckets.

6. Fire extinguishers shall be suspended on a metal hook or fitted into a special holder
attached to the wall. Under no circumstances shall a fire extinguisher be wired or so
fastened to the wall that it cannot be removed immediately.

371
 P.G.O No.142
Fire Alarm

7. The alarm for fire shall be the continuous blowing of police whistles by whoever
discovers the fire; where applicable, this will be followed by the sounding by buglers
of the fire alarm call.
On hearing the alarm all ranks shall immediately:-

(a) put on boots and clothing (not necessarily uniforms);

(b) collect all fire fighting equipment in the vicinity;

(c) parade at the scene of the fire, or as laid down in local orders, under the
command of the senior officer present.

8. The senior officer present shall take command and detail men for the following
duties:-

(a) Call the fire brigade (if any) by the quickest possible means.

(b) Inform the nearest Gazetted Officer or Inspector.

(c) Search the affected building and make sure that all occupants are cleared.

(d) Check upon the occupants who have left the building and make sure none are
missing.

(e) Ensure that first aid and medical attention is made available to any injured
persons.

(f) Operate the fire extinguishers and appliances.

(g) Salvage arms, ammunition, Station and personal property.

(h) If manpower is available, cordon off the affected building and prevent
women and children from approaching or entering the building to search for
personal belongings.

(i) Take whatever precautions possible to prevent the fire from spreading to
adjacent buildings.

Fire Drill

9. Fire drill shall be carried out in every Police Station, building and barrack area at
least once a month. Commanding Officers shall lay down comprehensive Standing
Orders and shall ensure that all ranks know exactly what action to take in the event of
a fire.

10. Fire extinguishers which are due for a refill may be used on fire drills under the
supervision of a Gazetted Officer or Inspector.

11. Fire Appliances shall only be removed from established fire points on authorized
practices, or to deal with an outbreak of fire.

372
 P.G.O No.142
Mode of Operation of Fire Extinguishers.

12. (a) Soda-Acid Extinguishers - Strike the plunger firmly and direct the fluid at the
base of the fire. DO NOT use on fires involving electrical wiring, petrol, paint
or rubber.

(b) Foam Extinguishers – Lift the handle on the top, or if fitted with a wheel, turn
the wheel. Turn the extinguisher upside down and spray the foam on the top of
the fire.

(c) C.T.C. (Pyrene) Extinguishers – Turn the handle to the left and pull out the
pump handle. Work this handle in and out and direct the stream of liquid at the
base of the fire.

(d) C.T.C. (National Fire Protection) Extinguishers – Hold the extinguisher

upright and strike the knob hard. Direct the jet at the base of the flames.

N.B. – After using C.T.C. extinguishers in a confined space, open all windows, etc, to
allow fumes to escape.

Filling and Maintenance of Extinguishers

13. The maintenance of fire extinguishers is a responsibility of the Commanding Officer,

but Commanding Officers shall check to ensure that it is regularly carried out and that
extinguishers are refilled when necessary. The date of refilling shall be entered in the
Station Diary. Gazetted Officers shall examine all fire extinguishers at formal
inspections and shall ensure that the contents are not out of date.

14. When a fire extinguisher is due for refill, the Station personnel shall be paraded for
fire drill and taught the use of the extinguisher by discharging the contents on to an
imaginary fire. The refill shall then be inserted without delay.

15. If any difficulty is experienced in obtaining fire fighting equipment or in arranging

for its maintenance, the Regional Commander shall report the facts to the Inspector
General in order that appropriate action may be taken by Police Headquarters.

Investigation into Fires in Police Buildings

16. A thorough investigation shall be carried out into every case of fire in a Police
building, premises or vehicle and every effort shall be made to discover the cause of
the fire and the persons responsible for it. A Case File shall always be prepared and
submitted to the Inspector General within fourteen days. This investigation is
additional to, and not in substitution for, the formal inquiry required to be held under
the provisions of Government Standing Order No. Q. 51.

373
 P.G.O No.143
INSPECTIONS – BARRACKS
Weekly Barrack Inspections

1. A weekly barrack inspection of all police buildings, quarters and compounds shall be
carried out each Saturday morning at 09.00 hours as hereunder:-

(a) Class “A” and “B” Stations – by the O/C. District or, in his absence, any
other available Gazette Officer. If no Gazette Officer is available, by the O/C.
Station.

(b) Class “C” Stations – by O/C. Station.

(c) Field Force Units – by the Unit Commander.

(d) P.T.S. and all other formations not referred to above – in accordance with
local Standing Orders.

2. Weekly barrack inspections shall, wherever possible, be carried out by Gazetted

Officers.

3. A high standard of cleanliness shall be required on weekly barracks inspections.

Quarters shall be clean and tidy, but furniture and personal possessions should not be
removed therefrom. Doors of all rooms, kitchens and latrines, excepting only
occupied cells, armouries and stores shall be fully open for easy examination. Kits
shall only be laid out on the specific orders of a Gazetted Officer.

4. All members of the Rank & File, excepting only those on duty or on leave or sick
shall stand by their quarters in uniform. Married men shall ensure that their families
keep quiet during inspections.

Daily Barrack Inspections

5. (a) A brief daily inspection of barracks and compounds shall be carried out to
ensure that the proper standards of cleanliness and hygiene are observed.

(b) Attendance in barracks for daily barracks inspection is not compulsory. Men
who are present need not wear uniform. Those who are asleep after night
duty should not be disturbed; the remainder should stand to attention beside
their beds.

6. These daily inspections are a routine precaution to guard against ill health and
indiscipline. They should be carried out with the minimum of inconvenience to
barracks occupants. Inspecting officers should normally be Inspectors, Sergeant
Majors or Senior N.C.Os., but Commanding Officers may lay down their own
arrangements in Standing Orders.

374
 SECTION VII Comment [u1]: GENERAL OBSERVATIONS;
1. REMOVE DASH AFTER NUMBER/S EG. 8.-
(a). IT SHOULD READ 8.(a).
2. ALIGN LEFT FOR SUBHEADING AND
STORES REDUCE ITS SPACE.
3. NEW PGO SHOULD MOVE RIGHT, AND
BOLDED. HEADING OF NEW PGO SHOULD BE
Nos. 151 – 190 CENTRED AND SPACE INCREASED BELOW
AND ABOVE HEADING
P.G.O. No. Titles
151. Arms and Ammunition – Issue and Receipt of
152. Arms and Ammunition – Safe Custody of
153. Arms and Ammunition – Scale of Holding
154. Equipment – Bicycles
155. Equipment – Crowd Control Barriers
156. Equipment – Dead Boxes and Rubber Gloves
157. Equipment – Electric Torches
158. Equipment – Handcuffs
159. Equipment – Loud Hailers
160. Equipment – Photographic – Cameras & Videos
161. Riot Equipment – Respirators, Goggles, Shields, Riot Batons and
Helmets Riot
162. Riot Equipment – Tear Smoke Shells and Cartridges
163. Safes, Strong Rooms, Cash Boxes and Keys
164. Stores – Allocated Stores Register
165. Stores – Control and Records
166. Stores – General
167. Stores – Kit Sheets
168. Stores-Marking of Clothing & Equipment
169. Stores – Property on Charge Register
170. Stores -Stationery and Police Forms - Indenting Procedure
171. Stores – Stocks and Indents
172. Stores – Uniforms – Issue and Replacement of
173. Dress Regulations
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
186.
187.
188.
189.
190

375
 P.G.O.No.151
ARMS AND AMMUNITION – ISSUE AND RECEIPT OF Comment [U2]: New PGO. Align right and bold.
Increase space below and above heading

1. (a) Every Section and Unit issued with arms and ammunition shall maintain
Armoury Registers (P.F. 200) in both its Reserve and Working Armouries. (See also P.G.O.
No. 152).
(b) If necessary, O/Cs large Stations and Units may maintain two Registers. One
is to be used exclusively for the movement of arms and the other for ammunition.
(c) An accurate list, signed by a Gazetted Officer, of the contents of each
Armoury shall be pasted inside the cover of each Armoury Register.
(d) For the purpose of this Order “Arms and Ammunition” includes bayonets, riot
guns, signals cartridges, tear smoke grenades, shells and cartridges.

2. All movement of arms and ammunition in and out of Reserve and Working Armouries
shall be recorded in Armoury Registers at the time each movement takes place.

3. (a) Charge Room Officers will be responsible for the correct issue and receipt of
all arms and ammunition to and from Armouries which are located inside Classes “A” and
“B” Police Stations.
(b) Duty N.C.Os will be similarly responsible for issue and receipts to and from
Armouries located in Police Lines or Fields Force Camps.

4. Nothing shall be removed from any Police Armoury without the express permission of
the O/C. Station or other officer authorised to act on his behalf.

5. Nothing shall be removed or returned to a Station or Unit Armoury unless and until a
record of the removal or return has been entered in the Armoury Register by the Charge
Room Officer or Duty N.C.O. A separate entry is required in respect of each individual
weapon unless more than six are issued at any one time for drill, parades, etc. In the latter
event, one entry, giving the total number issued, will suffice.

6. The following rules shall apply to the issue and receipt of arms and ammunition and
tear smoke to and from Station and Unit Armouries:-
(a) Every individual issue shall be recorded and signed by the issuing officer and
acknowledged by signature by the receiving officer under the appropriate headings in the
Armoury Register.
(b) Every bulk issue for drill parades, etc, shall be similarly recorded and shall be
acknowledged by the signature of the senior officer of the party to whom the arms are issued.
(c) The return of all arms and ammunition to the Armouries shall similarly be
confirmed by the returning officer’s signature and acknowledged by the receiving officer in
the Register.

7. Arms and ammunition issued from Armouries shall be returned by the holders at the
earliest opportunity. Personnel on armed duty shall hand back their arms and ammunition as
soon as they finish their period of duty. No member of the Force, unless so authorised, may
take Station arms to his quarters.

8. The safe custody of arms and ammunition remains the personal responsibility of the
personnel to whom such arms and ammunition have been issued until such time as they are
returned to the Armoury. Armouries shall be reported, at once, to the O/C. Station for
immediate inquiries by him.

376
 P.G.O.No.152
ARMS AND AMMUNITION – SAFE CUSTODY OF Comment [U3]: New PGO. Align right and bold
number. Centre heading, and increase space above
and below heading
1. (a) All arms and ammunition on Station and Unit charge, with the exception of
revolvers on personal issue, shall be entered by totals in the Station or Unit Station Property-
on-Charge Register (P.F. 168).
(b) In addition, precise details of each individual weapon on charge, including
the body number and bolt number (if any) shall be entered in the appropriate space in the
Station Property-on-Charge Register.

2. (a) Every entry in the Register referred to in paragraph 1 shall be countersigned

by a Gazetted Officer.
(b) Unauthorised entries and alterations to entries are strictly prohibited.

3. Under no circumstances may arms/ammunition on charge be transferred from one

Station to another without covering approval from Police Headquarters.

4. Every O/C. Station and Unit is personally responsible for the safe custody,
maintenance and correct issue of all arms and ammunition held on charge by each Station or
Unit under his command.

5. (a) All arms and ammunition held on charge shall be kept in Station and Unit
Armouries which shall be securely locked at all times.
(b) Ammunition shall, if possible, be stored in locked containers or metal boxes
bolted or cemented to the floor.
(c) Wherever possible, Armouries shall be in Police Stations, not in the Lines.

6. Arms and ammunition issued to Stations and Units will be divided into:-
(a) a “Reserve Stock”, being all those arms and ammunition on Station or Unit
charge which are not in day to day use;
(b) a “Working Stock”, being the small quantity of arms and ammunition
required for current use.
(c) Reserve and Working Stock must be stored separately if possible in
separate Reserve and Working Armouries. Commanding Officers are responsible that other
suitable storage arrangements on the above lines are prescribed in Standing Orders for
Stations and Units which have not yet been provided with separate Armouries.

7. Two keys shall be provided for each Reserve Armoury and Working Armoury, arms
rack or receptacle used for the Storage of police arms.

8. All Reserve Armoury keys will be kept by the O/C. Stations and Units, unless
otherwise directed, and will be handed over by them to the next senior officer when they wish
to leave their Station or Unit.

9. (a) Working armoury keys will be kept in the following manner:-

(i) In Class “A” and Class “B” Stations:
One key will be held by the charge Room Officer or by the Duty
N.C.O. if the Armoury is in the Lines or some distance away from the Police Station. The
duplicate key will be kept in a sealed, glass-fronted box in a selected position in the Police
Station. Comment [U4]: Have consistency in spacing.
(ii) In Class “C” Stations: Second proof shows space here.

Both keys will be kept by the O/C. Station or other office authorised to act on his behalf
during his absence from the station.
(iii) In Field Force Camps:
(iv) In other Formations:

377
 P.G.O.No.152(cont’d)
(b) Regional Commanders will ensure that all Stations and Units are issued
with suitable Standing Orders covering the safe custody of Working Armoury keys.

10. When arms/ammunition are required in emergency and the original key(s) cannot be
found, the glass of the box in the Charge room or Guard Room shall be broken and the
duplicate key(s) extracted. A report will be sent immediately to the Commanding Officer
explaining why this action was necessary.

11. (a) Every Working Armoury located inside a Police Station shall be checked
for security by each Charge Room Officer as soon as he comes on duty. He shall, in
particular: –
(i) check all arms and ammunition against the Station or Unit
Working Armoury Register and certify in the Station diary that he has done so;
(ii) report any discrepancies, at once, to his O/C. Station;
(iii) ensure that the Armoury door is properly locked and that the key
is handed over to him by the out-going Charge Room Officer.
(b) Every Working Armoury located in Lines or in field Force camps shall be
similarly checked by each Duty N.C.O. when he comes on duty and an appropriate entry
shall be made to this effect in the guard Room Station Diary.

12. Whenever the O/C. of a Class “C” Station wishes to leave the immediate vicinity of
his station, he shall first check over the contents of his Armoury with the next senior officer
available in the Station and will then hand over both keys of the Armoury to him. Both
officers will then sign an entry in the Station diary confirming the hand-over. The same
procedure will be followed in the reverse as soon as the O/C. returns to his station.

13. All arms and ammunition shall be checked at barrack inspections and at all formal
inspections and visits by Gazetted Officers and O/C. Districts and Sub-Districts. Any
discrepancies shall be reported, at once, by telephone or telegram to the commanding Officer.

14. This Order will be read in conjunction with P.G.O. No. 151.

378
 P.G.O.No.153
P.G.O.No.153

ARMS AND AMMUNITION – SCALE OF HOLDING Comment [U5]: New PGO. Align right and bold
number. Increase space below and above heading

1. Stations and Units will hold stocks of arms and ammunition on Station charge as will
prescribed by the Inspector General from time to time.
2. Under no circumstances may arms or ammunition on Station or Unit charge be
transferred from one Station to another without covering approval from Police Headquarters.
3. When ammunition is expended it will be written off ledger charge by the use of an
Issue Voucher signed by the O/C. Station or Unit. Indents will be submitted to Regional
Headquarters for the replacement of expended ammunition to keep stocks at the authorised
holdings.

379
 P.G.O.No.154
EQUIPMENT – BICYCLES Comment [U6]: New PGO. Align right and bold
number. Increase space below and above heading
1. Bicycles shall be held on charge as follows:-
Class “A” Stations 10 per Station
Class “B” Stations 4 per Station
Class “C” Stations 2 per Station
Field Force Unit 2 per Unit
Regional\Unit Headquarters 2 per Region/Unit
Police Training School Moshi 6
Police Training School Zanzibar
Director of Criminal Investigation 4
Police Headquarters Dar es salaam 4
Police Headquarters Zanzibar 4
Quartermaster 2
Forensic Bureau 2

Issue
2. The issue of bicycles is controlled by the Quartermaster who shall maintain a register
of bicycles held on charge by Stations and Units. This register shall contain full particulars of
all bicycles issued, including frame numbers.
3 Every bicycle issued to a Station or Unit shall be taken on charge and entered in the
Property on Charge Register (P.F. 168). Bicycles shall not be transferred between Stations
and Units without authority from the Quartermaster.
4. Bicycles shall not be issued to individual officers except with the express permission
of the Commanding Officer and shall be used solely by personnel on duty and not for private
purposes.
Maintenance
5. O/C. Stations and Units shall be responsible for the good order of bicycles on their
charge and shall ensure that defective or damaged machines are not used until repairs have
been carried out. When repairs are necessary, bicycles on charge to Units in Dar es Salaam
will be sent to Police Main Stores. In the case of machines on charge to upcountry Units,
repairs will be effected locally and the cost debited to Maintenance & Running of Plant,
Vehicles & Equipment.
6. Bicycles must be kept clean at all times and shall be wiped over with a lightly oiled
rag to prevent rust.
Inspection
7. Bicycles shall be inspected once weekly by O/C. Stations and Units.
8. On formal inspections, the Inspecting Officer shall report the number of bicycles and
the condition of each one held by the unit inspected.
9. The Charge Room Officer, or other officer responsible for the custody of bicycles on
charge, shall inspect each bicycle before issue and on its return to his custody. He shall record
the issue and return of each bicycle in the Station Diary and shall also enter a report on its
condition.
Accidents
10. The provisions of P.G.O. No. 196 shall apply when a Police bicycle is involved in an
accident.
11. No bicycle shall be written off or offered for Board of Survey without prior approval
from the Quartermaster.
Bicycle Allowance
12. Bicycle allowances may be granted to personnel who necessarily use privately owned
machines on duty. The grant of such allowances shall be at the discretion of Commanding
Officers who, before authorising such grant, must satisfy themselves that the personnel
concerned will necessarily use his bicycle frequently and regularly on duty. Commanding
Officers must also ensure that allowances are not granted in such numbers as to over-
expended their allocation under Transport & Official Travelling.

380
 P.G.O.No.155
EQUIPMENT – CROWD CONTROL BARRIERS Comment [U7]: New PGO. Align right and bold
number. Increase space below and above heading

1. Collapsible steel crowd control barriers will be held on charge as hereunder:-

Dar es Salaam 150
Mwanza 70
Tanga 70
Arusha 50
Babati 20
Bukoba 30
Dodoma 30
Iringa 30
Kibaha 30
Kigoma 30
Lindi 30
Mbeya 50
Morogoro 50
Moshi 50
Mtwara 50
Musoma 30
Singida 30
Songea 30
Sumbawanga 30
Tabora 50

2. Barriers shall be used to block off streets during fires and for operations involving the
control of persons and traffic or for any other emergency. They shall, in particular, be used to
block roads and areas when searching for dangerous criminals.
3. When used to block off areas affected by fires, etc., barriers shall be placed end to end
across roads and pavements. They may, if necessary, be lashed together to prevent the crowd from
breaking through.
4. When used to block traffic, barriers shall be placed in accordance with the diagram below.
Sufficient space shall be left between Nos. 1 and 3 barriers for a vehicle to be stopped and
searched. No. 2 barrier shall be so placed that a vehicle entering the block is forced to the left hand
side of the road and compelled to stop.

OUT
No. 3 Barrier

No. 2 Barrier

No. 1 Barrier

IN

381
 P.G.O.No.155

5. Barriers shall always be manned by sufficient uniformed police to enforce the purpose of
the block. Red lights shall be placed on barriers which are put out at night. One P.C. (with a red
torch at night) shall stand at least 20 meters from either end of a block to warn approaching traffic
to slow down before reaching the barriers. The remainder of the police party, unless ordered
otherwise, shall be inside the block with arms at the ready, if carried.
6. Police on road block duty shall be specifically instructed whether or not to search vehicles
or persons, or both. Precise warning of the possible approach of armed personnel and careful
description of wanted criminals shall also be given. The Officer-in-Charge of the road block shall
record all such instructions and information in his notebook.
7. Passengers in vehicles which are to be searched will be ordered to alight and the search will Comment [U8]: Some words have been deleted.
not start until they do so. Plse note

8. Police on road block duty should be on the alert at all times. Traffic shall not be delayed
unnecessarily. Police on road block duties shall carry out their instructions with courtesy and
dispatch.
9. Barriers shall be assembled at the place of use. The method of assembly shall be practised
at regular intervals. One personnel shall hold up each end piece and a third shall fit the cross bar
into position and secure the locking clamps. All ranks shall be fully conversant with the assembly
and use of crowd control barriers.
10. Barriers shall be carefully stored in readiness for immediate use. The metal work, including
the locking clamps, shall be painted black. Clamps shall be well greased.

382
 P.G.O.No.156

EQUIPMENT – DEAD BOXES AND RUBBER GLOVES Comment [U9]: New PGO. Align right and bold
number. Increase space below and above heading

1. (a) One Dead Box, for the removal of corpses, will be held on Station charge
by each Class “A” and “B” Station. Additional boxes may be issued to Stations which handle
particularly large numbers of corpses.
(b) Dead Boxes (one per Station) will only be issued at the request of
Regional Commanders to Class “C” Stations which have particular need of them.
2. Dead Boxes shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition at all times and
shall be washed out with disinfectant after use and stored in a dry place.
3. Two pairs of heavy duty rubber gloves for handling corpses will be issued to each
Class “A”, “B” and “C” Station and an additional two pairs will be issued to Stations which
have more than one Dead Box.

383
 P.G.O.No.157

EQUIPMENT – ELECTRIC TORCHES Comment [U10]: New PGO. Align right and
bold number. Increase space below and above
heading

1. Electric torches shall be held on Station or Unit charge as follows and entered in
Property on Charge Registers (P.F. 168). Individual issues are forbidden:-

Hunter Torch *Beat Torch

Regional H.Qs. 3 -
Regional C.I.D. 6 2
Crime Intelligence Unit 1(each) - Comment [U11]: Plse note this. It is absent in
Dog and Horses Units 1 1 (per Handled) second proof

Field Force Units 3

Police Training School 5 20
Class “A” Stations 5 20
Class “B” Stations 2 15
Class “C” Stations 1 5
*Clipped to Belt.

2. Torches shall be carefully maintained in Station/Unit Stores when not in use.

Care shall be taken that unserviceable batteries are not allowed to corrode in torches. When
torches are not in use, batteries shall be removed. Torches which become unserviceable shall
be written off and an indent for replacements sent to Police Main Store, Dar es Salaam.

3. Economy shall be exercised in the use of batteries. O/C. Stations and Units are
responsible for the custody of battery stocks and shall not exchange old batteries for new
until the former are exhausted
.

384
 P.G.O.No.158
EQUIPMENT – HANDCUFFS Comment [U12]: New PGO. Align right and
bold number. Increase space below and above
heading
1. Handcuffs shall be oiled and kept free from rust and dirt. They shall be kept in
Station Armouries, with the exception of a small number sufficient for day- to -day use
which shall be hung up in the Charge Office.

2. All issues of handcuffs shall be entered in the Station Diary in accordance with the
provisions of P.G.O. No. 285, paragraph 4 (d).

3. Personal issues to individual officers are forbidden.

4. Keys shall be kept in handcuffs when the latter are not in use.

5. In no circumstances may handcuffs be issued to persons who are not police

officers.

6. Handcuffs which are found to be unserviceable will be returned by Units to their

Police Main Store which , upon receipt, will take action in accordance with paragraphs 57/64
of P.G.O No.166.

7. Handcuffs shall be distributed as follows:-

Class “A” Police Stations ---------------------- 40

Class “B” Police Stations ----------------------- 20
Class “C” Police Stations ---------------------- 10
Field Force Units ------------------------------- 40
Police Training School ----------------------- 20
C.I.D. Headquarters ---------------------------- 20
Crime Intelligence Unit Headquarters ------- 20

385
 P.G.O.No.159

EQUIPMENT – LOUD HAILERS Comment [U13]: New PGO. Align right and
bold number. Increase space below and above
heading
1.Portable electric loud hailers shall be held on charge as follows:-
Field Force Units ------------- 2 per Unit
Class “A” Police Stations ---- 2 per Station
Regional Headquarters ------ 2 per Region
Police Training School ------ 2

2. Loud hailers shall always be used on Riot Drill. They may also be used for crowd
and traffic control.
3. Commanding Officers shall ensure that loud hailers are carefully stored and not
used by unauthorised persons. They must also ensure that they are protected from dampness
and that they are suitably secured when transported in lorries or other vehicles.
4. Loud hailers must be inspected regularly, particular attention being paid to the
immediate removal of unserviceable batteries to prevent the mechanism being damaged by
corrosion.
5. Defective loud hailers shall be sent for repair to the nearest Signals Depot. Except
for the routine changing of batteries, no repairs will be undertaken or attempted other than at
a Signals Depot

386
 P.G.O.No.160

EQUIPMENT – PHOTOGRAPHIC – CAMERAS & VIDEOS Comment [U14]: New PGO. Align right and
bold number. Increase space below and above
heading
1. (a) Force cameras, videos and accessories on issue to Units and Stations SECOND PROOF SHOWS 1160 AS PGO
NUMBER PLSE NOTE
shall be taken on charge in the Property on Charge Register (P.F. 168).
(b) For the purpose of this Order, accessories will include camera and
video cases, exposure meters, flash equipment, proxar lens and focusing arms and, where
dark rooms are in operation, contact printers, tanks, dishes, etc.
2. Cameras shall be placed in the charge of and used only by trained Force
photographers, provided that Gazetted Officers may authorised other qualified members of
the Force to use police cameras when trained photographers are not available.
3. (a) All cameras and accessories shall be checked at frequent intervals by
Force photographers and by their immediate superiors. Special attention will be paid to lenses
to ensure that they are kept free from fungus.
(b) In addition, all cameras and accessories shall be inspected carefully at
all from all inspections.
4. All defects and damage shall be reported, at once, with full supporting
explanation in every case, via Commanding Officers to the Director of Criminal
Investigation.
5. Cameras or accessories which require lens cleaning or repairing shall be
forwarded to the O/C. Forensic Bureau. Under no circumstances may they be sent to local
firms for repair.
6. Expendable items such as flash bulbs, batteries, enlarger lamps, etc., will be
indented for, as required, from the O/C. Forensic Bureau. Local purchase, without prior
permission from the O/C. Forensic Bureau, is forbidden.
7. The Director of Criminal Investigations will draw up Standing Orders covering
the inspection and maintenance of photographic equipment on charge to Crime Intelligence
Unit personnel.

387
 P.G.O.No.161
RIOT EQUIPMENT – RESPIRATORS, GOGGLES, SHIELDS,
RIOT BATONS AND HELMETS RIOT Comment [U15]: New PGO. Align right and
bold number. Increase space below and above
Part I – Respirators heading
1. (a) Respirators shall be held on Station charge in accordance with the
authorised distribution scale laid down in Appendix “A”. Comment [U16]: Centre this subheading
(b) In addition, every Gazetted Officer and Inspector, except those under
training at the Police Training School, shall be issued with a personal respirator.
2. (a) Respirators held on charge by Field Force Units will be re-issued on a
temporary basis to all Unit personnel.
(b) Respirators held on charge by Police Stations will not be re-issued to
individual officers.
Containers Comment [U17]: This is subheading. Align left.
3. A container (bag or haversack) shall be issued with each respirator. Decrease space below

4. (a) Respirators on Station charge shall be removed from their containers

when not in use.
(b) Respirators on individual issue shall be kept in containers, but removed
for cleaning once per week.
5. Respirators shall always be grasped by the eye-pieces (which should be pressed
together) when removed from or returned to containers.
Storage Comment [U18]: This is subheading. Align left.
6. Respirators and containers held on Station charge shall be stored in single rows Decrease space below

on racks or shelves in Armouries or other suitable places of easy access (Charge Rooms,
etc.). They shall not be stacked on floors or anywhere exposed to damp. If stocks are
sufficient, each respirator should be labelled with the name of the officer who normally wears
it.
7. (a) O/C. Stations and Units shall carry out a weekly inspection of all
respirators held by them on Station or Unit charge, including those respirators on temporary
re-issue in accordance with paragraph 2 (a). They shall, in particular, ensure that all
respirators are fully protected from damp, corrosion and rust.
(b) All ranks are held personally responsible for the care and maintenance of
the respirators issued to them.
Cleaning Comment [U19]: This is subheading. Align left.
8. Respirators shall be carefully cleaned after use and the inside dried with a clean Decrease space below

cloth.
9. Misting of eyepieces should be prevented by an application of anti-dim
compound, or soap, or saliva, which should be wiped off with a clean, dry cloth.
Fitting Respirators Comment [U20]: This is subheading. Align left.
10. All ranks who have occasion to wear respirators shall use the following method Decrease space below

to ensure that their respirators fit correctly:-

(a) Put on the respirator.
(b) Adjust the elastic bands evenly so that a tight fit is obtained, with the pad
through which the elastic bands pass lying central at the back of the head.
(c) Place a stiff card over the holes in the metal filter and breathe in hard. If
fitted correctly, the face piece will collapse inwards. I fitted incorrectly; air will enter the face
piece and can be detected without difficulty.
(d) If necessary, re-adjust the elastic band.
Respirator Drill Comment [U21]: This is subheading. Align left.
11. Respirator drill will be carried out in accordance with Chapter VI in the riot Decrease space below

Manual.
Part II – Goggles Comment [U22]: Centre this and bold
12. Goggles will be held on Station and Unit charge on the scale laid down for
Respirators in Appendix “A”. Goggles will not be on personal issue to Gazetted Officers and
Inspectors.

388
 P.G.O.No.161
13. Storage, care and maintenance of goggles shall be carried out in accordance with
Part I of this Order.
14. Goggles, when carried, will be slung round the neck.
15. Goggles shall not be worn when T.792 tear smoke is used. Goggles shall not be
worn unless specifically ordered by the O/C. Unit and should normally be used when a Unit
is engaged in extensive movement.
Part III – Shields Comment [U23]: Centre this and bold
16. Riot Shields shall be held on Station charge in accordance with the authorised
distribution scale laid down in Appendix “A”. They will not be issued to individual officers.
17. Shields should normally be stored on racks near Respirators and Goggles, or in
other suitable places of easy access.
18. All shields shall be painted black and in Fields Force Units and Class “A”
Stations they shall carry large white numerals indicating the section number (see Riot Manual
– Chapter V, paragraphs 3 to 6).
Part IV – Riot Batons Comment [U24]: Centre this
19. (a) Riot Batons will be held on charge in Stations and Field Force Units in
accordance with the scale laid down in Appendix “A”.
(b) Riot Batons held on charge by Field Force Units will be re-issued on a
temporary basis to all Rank & File personnel and will be withdrawn when the holders transfer
elsewhere.

Helmet Riot Cromwell will be on station store charge.

APPENDIX “A”
(To PGO No. 161)

RIOT EQUIPMENT – SCALE OF ALLOCATION Comment [U25]: See attached text for format;
you have mixed it

Per cent of Station

Rank & File
Establishment

1. RESPIRATORS AND GOGGLES:

(a)Class “A” Stations 75
(b) Class “B” Stations 30
(c)Field Force Units 60
(d)Police Training School 180

2. SHIELDS:
(a)Class “A” Stations 40
(b)Class “B” Stations 20
(c)Field Force Units 40
(d)Police Training School 180

3. RIOT BATONS:
(a)Class “A” Stations 40
(b)Class “B” Stations 20
(c) Field Force Units 60
(d) Police Training School 80

4 HELMET RIOT CROMWELL:

(a)Field Force Unit 1 Per personnel 40
(b)Class “A” Station 20
(c)Class “B” Station 5
(d)Class “C” Station 5

389
 P.G.O.No.161

390
 P.G.O.No.162
RIOT EQUIPMENT – TEAR SMOKE SHELLS AND Comment [U26]:

CARTRIDGES Comment [U27]:

1. Tear smoke shells, cartridge and grenades on station and unit charge shall be stored
carefully in a dry armoury or in other secure, dry accommodation if the armoury is damp.
Whenever possible, they shall be stored in the air-tight metal canisters supplied by the
manufactures. Shell and grenades are particularly susceptible to damp and mildew can easily
form round the firing caps. Moisture causes serious deterioration and all possible steps shall,
therefore, be taken to keep equipment dry.
2. Shells and grenades shall not normally be removed from the water proof wrapping
supplied by the manufactures. Only a small emergency stock shall be unpacked and held in
readiness for immediate use.
3. Only a small emergency stock of grenades shall be fitted with detonators. Detonators
are liable to corrode inside the grenade and shall normally be stored in their own wrappings
near the grenades in the armoury.
4. C.P. guns shall be carried on Riot Drill practices, but not shells and grenades unless
firing is to take place. Continuous handling can cause damage. Grenades and shells shall be
carried in webbing haversacks when taken out by a Riot Unit.
5. The Quartermaster is responsible for the safekeeping and storage of all reserve stocks
of shells and grenades held at Police Main Store.
6. The Quartermaster is responsible that all grenades and shells held in Police Main
Stores are marked with the date of manufacture. He shall invariably issue oldest stock first
provided that he is satisfied that they are in good order.
7. Commanding Officers shall ensure that their oldest shells and grenades are fired off
on the courses laid down in P.G.O. No. 88.
Cleaning and Checking
8. The Quartermaster shall check all stocks of shells, grenades and respirators each
Monday morning and shall report any signs of deterioration to the Inspector General. The
check shall be recorded in the Armoury Diary.
9. O/C. Stations and Units, assisted in Regional Headquarter Stations by the armourers,
shall check once per week every shell, grenade, detonator and respirator held on charge. All
unpackaged rounds shall be wiped over with a dry cloth. Any signs of damp or deterioration
shall be reported, at once, to the Commanding Officer. Every such check shall be recorded in
the Station Diary.
10. Every Commanding Officer is responsible for the efficiency of his tear smoke
equipment. Respirators which appear to be in any way unserviceable shall be returned to
Police Main Store for exchange. Shells, grenades and detonators which are suspect shall be put
aside for practice firing and replacements obtained, at once, from the Quartermaster.

391
 P.G.O.No.163
SAFES, STRONG ROOMS, CASH BOXES AND KEYS Comment [U28]: New PGO. Align right and
bold. Increase space below and above heading

1. Every officer who is in charge of a strong room, safe or cash box is personally
responsible at all times for its secure custody.
2. Cash boxes should be secured to a table by screws through the base plate or built into
a wall or floor. Safes will be built into a wall or otherwise secured to the building in which
they are housed wherever this is practicable. The cost of replacement of the whole or any part
of a strong room, safe or cash box which has been damaged or lost through established
negligence may fall on the officer responsible.
3. The keys of all strong rooms, safes and cash boxes must be safeguarded by the
officers to whom they have been issued and any officer who, by negligence, loses a key or
otherwise compromises the security of any safe repository is liable to be surcharged with the
resultant cost of replacement keys, carriage, change of ward in lock, etc.
4. If any safe, cash box or key is lost or stolen, a Loss Report, in quadruplicate, must be
sent at once to Staff Officer (A) at Police Headquarters who will, without delay, inform the
Permanent Secretary to the Treasury.
5. (a) Although safes are normally issued by the Permanent Secretary to the
Treasury, who retains the duplicate keys, in any case where a safe is issued from another
source, the duplicate key will be handed over to Staff Officer (A) at Headquarters, who will
issue a receipt and, in turn, hand over the key to the Permanent Secretary to the Treasury
against his receipt. Under no circumstances may the officer in charge of a safe repository
retain possession of a duplicate key.
(b) No officer other than Staff Officer (A) shall apply to the Permanent
Secretary to the Treasury for the issue of duplicate keys and only Staff Officer (A) may
authorise the issue of a duplicate key to a member of the Force.

6. (a) Details of the contents of all strongrooms, safes and cash boxes should be
passed through a safe register (foolscap book), which will be in the following form and will
be maintained by the officer in charge:-

Date Serial Ref. To Item Date Signature of Comment [U29]: See attached text for format
Deposited No. Correspondence of Surrendered Receiver
Depositor

(b) Paragraph 6 (a) above does not apply to Crime Intelligence Unit
formations which will be covered by the Director of Crime Intelligence Unit’s Standing
Orders

7. (a) Every officer who permanently relinquishes control of a safe or cash box
shall obtain a receipt from the officer to whom he hands over the key. In addition, the
handing over of all keys of strong rooms, safes and cash boxes will be recorded in the
Handing Over Statement (Form 58) which is prepared in accordance with Financial Order
No. 290. Comment [U30]: DCP, CHECK IF THIS
(b) A receipt is not necessary when a safe key is relinquished for a short ORDER IS CORRECT!!

period. In such cases, the officer who takes possession of the key shall make an appropriate
entry in the Station Diary.

8. Staff Officer (A) shall keep a record of the exact whereabouts of every safe and no
safe shall be moved from the Unit to which it is allocated without reference to him. No safe
which has been issued by the Permanent Secretary to the Treasury may be moved from one
Unit to another without his authority. Staff Officer (A) will therefore refer all such requests to
him in the first place.

392
 P.G.O.No.164
STORES – ALLOCATED STORES LEDGER Comment [u31]: New PGO. Align right for
number and bold. Centre heading, increase space
1. Every Station and Unit authorised by Appendix “B” of P.G.O. No. 166 to hold stocks above and below heading
of unissued stores (uniforms, etc.) shall maintain an Allocated Stores Ledger in which all
such stocks shall be recorded.
2. For the purpose of this Order, “Allocated Stores” means stores (generally uniform and
equipment) held by certain authorised Stations and Units for issued as required. They do not
include:-
(a) property on Station or Unit charge (see P.G.O. No. 169),
(b) consumable Barrack Stores held by Stations and Units on issue from
Regional Headquarters
3. Entries in Allocated Stores Ledgers shall only be made by the person authorised to do
so by the O/C Station or Unit.
4. Allocated Stores Ledgers shall be maintained in accordance with the instructions
contained in P.G.O. No. 166.

393
 P.G.O.No.165
STORES – CONTROL AND RECORDS Comment [u32]: New PGO. Align right for
number and bold. Centre heading, increase space
above and below heading
Class “A” and “B” Stores
1. The following books and records will be maintained by Class “A” and “B” stores:-
(a) Allocated Stores Ledger: Serviceable Clothing & Equipment.
(b) Allocated Stores Ledger: Used Serviceable clothing & Equipment.
(c) Allocated Stores Ledger: Serviceable Miscellaneous Stores.
(d) Allocated Stores Ledger: Used serviceable Miscellaneous Stores.
(e) Box file: For vouchers recording issues and, if
applicable, the P.F. 48
(f) Box File: For vouchers recording receipts.
(g) P.F. 1 Book: For issues to Stations for which they are
responsible for clothing and equipping.
(h) P.F. 1 Book: For indents upon Regional or Main Stores.
(i) Tally Cards, S.F. 11: One for each item and each size of item
(j) P.F. 168: For recording all property on charge in Unit.

2. (a) Two box files will be kept for each of the above Ledgers, (including
duplicate P.F. 168 on out stations): one will be used to file issue vouchers and one for receipt
vouchers.
(b) Issue and Receipt vouchers will be numbered serially for each ledger, e.g.
Serviceable Clothing and Equipment Ledgers’ Issue vouchers will be numbered 1,2,3, etc.
Receipt vouchers 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., the same will apply to all other ledgers.
(c) Every item of stores issued to Main Stores or Class A and B Stores will be
taken on ledger charge (Serviceable or Unserviceable Ledger) and recorded on tally cards
(S.F. 11)
Other Stations Comment [u33]: Reduce space, this is
subheading. Align left and decrease space below

3. (a) Two box files will be kept for stores not taken on ledger charge, that is,
items which are not A Station Stores, i.e. Clothing, Equipment, Soap, Vim, Metal Polish, etc.
The receipt file for copy B of indent (P.F. 1), the issued file for copy A of issue (P.F. 1) when
surplus stores are returned.
(b) The two files will be maintained to support entries in P.F. 168, these again
for issue and receipt vouchers.
Stores for Manufacture Comment [u34]: Reduce space, this is
subheading. Align left and decrease space below

4. When stores are issued for manufacture of any item, the following action will be
taken:-
(a) Normal issue voucher will be made out for materials to be used and items
struck off ledger charge.
(b) Issue Voucher will be endorsed in RED INK “CERTIFICATE OF Comment [u35]: DCP. These are missing words
ISSUE” and signed by issuing officer. when compared to Old PGO. Plse confirm

(c) The manufactured item will be brought on ledger charge in the normal
manner, by certified Receipt Voucher.
(d) Both the issue voucher and receipt voucher will be cross referenced, i.e. the
issue voucher will be endorsed “See Receipt Voucher No......” and the receipt voucher will be
endorsed “See Issue Voucher No. ........”
Stores issued for maintenance of clothing or Stores, i.e. cottons, patching Comment [u36]: Align this sentence to the left.
material, mails, glue, etc. will be issued on certified issue voucher to the technician concerned. It is new para.
5. Upon receipt of stores and copies “A”, “B” and “D” of the P.F. 1 from Regional or
Main Stores, officer i/c Authorised Stores will take all items on charge as shown in col. 7. He
will endorse copies “A” and “B” with his receipt number, date and sign them. Copy A will
then be returned to the consignor. Copy “B” will be filed to support ledger entry col.8 first
being completed.

394
 P.G.O.No.165
6. Officers i/c Authorised Stores will take the following action when any item of
property on charge becomes unserviceable:-
(a) Withdraw it from use in Unit and strike it off P.F. 168 and take it on charge
in the unserviceable ledger.
(b) Make out P.F. 48 once per month, listing all such unserviceable property
from the unserviceable ledger concerned and submit in triplicate, together with a requisition
for replacements.
(c) Upon return of P.F. 48 (two copies) take action as endorsed thereon.
(d) Return one completed copy P.F. 48.
7. When items of unserviceable clothing and equipment are withdrawn from members
of the Force in exchange for serviceable articles, and on discharge or transfer, Officers i/c
Authorised stores will take the following action:-
(a) Destroy all clothing by burning (raincoats and boots excepted and except
as provided in P.G.O. No. 170, paragraph 20).
(b) Take on charge in the Used Serviceable Allocated Stores Ledger all items
of equipment, hardware (buttons, badges, etc.), boots and raincoats.
(c) Take further action as detailed in paragraph 6 (b), (c) and (d) above.
8. Officers i/c Authorised Stores will maintain a record of all replacement issues made
to each personnel, including those in specialist units, during each calendar year.
9. Stationery and consumable stores received from Regional Stores will not be taken
on Ledger charge but will be recorded on Tally Cards.
10. The page number given to an item in the Used Serviceable Allocated Stores,
Ledgers will be the same as for the similar item in the Serviceable Allocated Stores Ledger.
11. The column in the ledgers for recording Issue and Receipt Vouchers will be
endorsed with the references described in paragraph 5 above and not with the Sub-Unit’s
reference number.
12. All Commanding Officers are not authorised to make disposal orders for any item
irrespective of the original cost. Where Sub-nits submit proposals on P.F. 48 these should be
forwarded to the Inspector General to be processed for condemnation in accordance with the
Public Financial Regulations 2001,
13. The P.F. 1 is printed in quintuplicate. Copies “A”, “B”, “C”, “D” and “E”.
14. When used as a requisition, P.F. 1 will be completed and handled as follows:-
(a) All five copies will be made out.
(b) Copies “A”, “B”, “C” and “D” will be dispatched to the stores requested
to supply items.
(c) Copy “E” to remain in the Book.
15. The requisition having arrived at the issuing stores then becomes an Issue Note by
the issuing officer, whereon copies “A”, “B”, “C” and “D” will be handled as follows:-
(a) The Officer authorising issues will endorse in Col. 7 of copies “A” “B”
“C” the actual quantities issued. He will also sign, enter his issue voucher number and date in
spaces provided.
(b) Copies “A” and “B” will be dispatched to the Originator.
(c) Copy “D” will be placed in the package or box containing the stores.
When more than one package or box is used, the packages or boxes will be numbered 1, 2, 3,
etc. Copy “D” will be placed in No. 1.
(e) Copy “C” will be removed from the file and destroyed on receipt of the
signed copy “A” Col. 8 of copy “A” first being completed.
Units other than Authorised Stores Comment [u37]: Reduce space, this is
16. Sub-units will only hold (a) Consumable Stores which will be recorded on subheading. Align left and decrease space below

tally cards (S.F.11) (Stationery is included in this category), and (b) Items which are on
charge for the use of the Station, such items, as laid down in P.G.O. 165 will be recorded in Comment [u38]: Remove roman (a)
the property on Charge Register (P.F. 168).
Sub-unit will not hold in stock any items for subsequent issue, except Comment [u39]: Delete roman (b)
consumable stores.

395
 P.G.O.No.165
The following are the only stores documents to be maintained by sub- Comment [u40]: Delete roman (c)
units:-
(i) Property on Charge Register (P.F. 168); and
(ii) Tally Cards (S.F.11) one for each item of consumable stores held.
Regional Control of Stores Comment [u41]: Reduce space, this is
17. (a) Regional Headquarters will hold a duplicate copy of all sub-stations subheading. Align left and decrease space below

Property on Charge (P.F.168).

(b) All issues or withdrawals of stores will be entered in both copies of P.F.
168.
(c) The Regional Headquarters’ copy (P.F. 168) to be used as a means of
checking (by Regional Commanders when on inspection visits), that stations are keeping an
up-to-date account.

396
 P.G.O.No.166
STORES – GENERAL Comment [u42]: New PGO. Align right for
number and bold. Increase space above and below
heading and centre
Classes of Stores (R.187 PFR, 2001) Comment [u43]: DCP, is this number at the right
1. For the purpose of accounting, stores are of two classes:- place? Plse confirm
(a) Allocated Stores; Comment [u44]: Reduce space, this is
(b) Unallocated Stores subheading. Align left and decrease space below
Allocated Stores (R.187 (2) PFR, 2001)
2. These are stores, the cost of which is chargeable direct to the appropriate
Comment [u45]:
expenditure item for the work or service for which they are required and which are accounted
Comment [u46]: Reduce space, this is
for by quantity. subheading. Align left and decrease space below
Unallocated Stores (R.187 PFR, 2001)
3. These are of two kinds:-
(a) Those, the cost of which is not charged to an expenditure sub-head until Comment [u47]: Reduce space, this is
they are issued, the accounting operations being conducted through a suspense account. subheading. Align left and decrease space below
(b) Other standard stocks, the cost of which including freight, insurance,
packing and inspection charges, etc., is charged to a sub-head entitled “Purchases of Stores – Comment [u48]: Delete repeated word
Unallocated Stocks” in the estimates concerned.
4. Powers to write off under the Public Finances Regulations are now vested in the
Permanent Secretary Ministry of Public Security and Safety and Permanent Secretary
Ministry of Finance.
5. The Police Force normally does not hold reserves of Unallocated Stores hence the
force is not held responsible for the accounting, etc., of such Stores.
Store Accounts Comment [u49]: Reduce space, this is
6. Every Unit and formation having charge of Government stores must keep an subheading. Align left and decrease space below

account of their receipt and issue.

Accounting Procedure for Welfare Fund & Reward Fund Comment [u50]: Reduce space, this is
7. It is necessary to understand the different sources of moneys which support the subheading. Align left and decrease space below
Police Recreation & Welfare Fund and the Police Rewards & Fines Fund.
8. The Police Recreation & Welfare Fund is a private Police fund, not benefiting from
pubic money.
9. The Police Rewards & Fines Fund is a public fund which secures its funds from
public money.
10. It follows that all articles purchased out of the Police Recreation & Welfare fund
will be accounted for under local arrangements and must not be mixed up with the official
stores accounting system.
11. Articles purchased out of the Police Rewards & Fines Fund will be accounted for
officially in the same manner as any other Government stores.
Stores procedure and Accounting for all Signals Stores Comment [u51]: Reduce space, this is
12. The instructions given in these notes are to be strictly adhered to:- subheading. Align left and decrease space below

(a) Every Signals formation having stores/workshop facilities or operating as a

separate unit will maintain a general stores ledger into which all material and equipment
received and issued will be booked. Entries are to give details of relevant indent, issue note,
L.P.O., requisition or other reference numbers, copies of these latter documents being
suitably filed for easy reference. The ledger is to be maintained in conformity with financial
and Stores Regulations. Recovered equipment and suitable materials in good order are to be
issued back to store by voucher and taken on ledger charge. Goods recovered but unsuitable
for further use are to be boarded. Details of all items of major equipment are to be submitted
to the Chief Signals Officer for approval to board where they cannot be restored to
reasonably efficient use.
(b) All indents for stores, issues, recoveries or transfers of items are to be
made by use of Police Form P.F.1 which is a combined indent issue form, general action in
regard to these being as instructed thereon, and the reference “Police Stores” and “P.P.C.”
should be read as “Police Signals” and “C.S.O.” respectively. Storekeeping Officers will be
responsible for allocating local reference number in regard to indents, recovery or issue

397
 P.G.O.No.166
items. The details of the goods listed on the form will be directly related to all details entered
in the stores ledger. At no time will stores be issued without supporting documentation and
the necessary entries to the stores ledger will be carried out at the time of receipt or issue of
goods and not left to accumulate.
(c) Officers having charge of a regional or other workshop will maintain a
“Works” or “Jobs” register which will record brief details of all works accepted and
executed. Entries should be made immediately on receipt of notification of attention required
to apparatus or other work instructed to be carried out, or which has been planned, thus
giving an immediate index as to the extent of work on hand. Each job registered will carry a
sequential job number, a job card with related number being prepared at the time of entry and
kept on hand for use at the appropriate time. Unanticipated jobs occurring when an officer is
on tour require the preparation of a job card at location and numbering on return to base,
when appropriate entries will be made in the register. Work to be recorded will include all
installation, re-installation, recovery, maintenance, inspection and constructional work. Job
cards on completion will be filed either against station or individual equipment records as
appropriate.
(d) In view of the complexities of issuing equipment to specific officers or
formations and having regard to the maintenance requirements of the service, the following
procedure shall be adopted as appropriate:-
(i) The Regional or formation Signals Officer shall have all items of
major equipment (e.g. installations) issued to his charge.
(ii) The Regional or Formation Signals Officer shall issue, by means
of Form P.F. 1, to the O/C. District or Station and obtain his signature thereon for all items
comprising the installation. The Signals Officer will hold one copy in his office. The O/C. Comment [u52]: DCP, Old PGO reads “ the
District or Station shall similarly file one copy in his signals station records. signal officer will hold one copy in his stores records
file and one copy in the particular station file in his
(iv) In no case shall installations or major equipment be transferred office…..”Plse confirm !
from one signals or other formation to another without Headquarters’ authority.
(e) Consumable or non-recoverable goods and materials expended on
installation work shall be issued on Form P.F.1 separately to major equipment, this also
applies to re - installation work. Consumable stores for use in connection with maintenance
or construction job, the appropriate record being filed in the Station, equipments issued will Comment [u53]: DCP, Old PGO reads
be issued by means of Form P.F. 1, the process being generally as given in sub- paragraph “………jobs will be issued on Form P.F.1 and
related to the job or station job, the appropriate
(d). Tools and equipment for special maintenance and construction purposes may be issued record being filed in the station, equipment or special
against signature on Form P.F. 1 to the officer requiring them, copies of the issue vouchers work files. All tools and instruments issued will be
issued by means of Form P.F.1, the process……….”
being held in the appropriate office files.
(f) District, regional or other signals formations should each month indent
upon Signals Main Stores, Dar es Salaam, by means of Form P.F. 1 for all goods and
materials required for maintenance purposes. These should be submitted through the office of
the Chief Signal to Signals, Dar es Salaam, copy to Chief Signals Officer.
Arrangement of Ledgers (R.204 PFR, 2001) Comment [u54]: Reduce space, this is
13. The pages of all ledgers will be numbered consecutively. All ledgers will be subheading. Align left and decrease space below

indexed, the index being kept in the ledger, unless it is more convenient to have a separate
index.
Balancing of Ledgers (R.208 PFR, 2001) Comment [u55]: Reduce space, this is
14. Regional Commanders and O/C. Units will be responsible for checking and subheading. Align left and decrease space below

balancing all ledgers at the end of each financial year.

15. In ledgers where a separate column is provided for the purpose, the balance will be
inserted after each transaction on the same lines as that on which the transaction is recorded.
16. At the end of the year a line in red ink must be drawn immediately below the last
entry under each particular item of stock.
New Ledgers (R.206 PFR, 2001) Comment [u56]: Reduce space, this is
17. A new ledger will not be opened until the old one has become unserviceable. Errors subheading. Align left and decrease space below

in classification or arrangement must be rectified when a new ledger is opened.

18. The opening balances in the new ledger and the closing balances in the old ledger Comment [u57]: Change font type to Times
will be cross-referenced. Roman. Second proof does not show so.

398
 P.G.O.No.166
Tally Cards (R.211 PFR, 2001) Comment [u58]: Reduce space, this is
19. Tally Cards (S.F. 11) must be used in connection with each variety of article in subheading. Align left and decrease space below

store. Each tally card will be placed with the article to which it relates and fixed in such a
manner as to prevent its easy removal. The tally cards will be kept by the storekeeper and
must be posted and initialled immediately stores are received or issued.
20. Tally cards must not be ruled off. When an entry is made the balance must be
shown in the proper column.
21. The use of tally cards enables a check to be made with the entries in the ledgers and
minimises loss by theft, as it provides means of detecting forgery and comparing physical and
ledger balances.
Store Vouchers (R.212 PFR, 2001) Comment [u59]: Reduce space, this is
22. All vouchers supporting receipts in the ledgers will be filed together and given subheading. Align left and decrease space below

consecutive numbers. Issue Vouchers will be in book form and serially numbered.
23. Storekeepers will record on all vouchers and invoices the number of the ledger folio
on which each items entered.
Loan Register (R.260-262 PFR, 2001) Comment [u60]: Reduce space, this is
24. A register must be kept recording the issue and return of allocated stores on loan. subheading. Align left and decrease space below

Erasures and Alteration (R.213 PFR, 2001)

25. Erasures will not be made in any ledgers, registers, requisitions or vouchers. Comment [u61]: Reduce space, this is
Corrections must be made by drawing a line in red ink through the incorrect figures, the subheading. Align left and decrease space below
alterations in ledgers or on receipt vouchers being initialled by the officer i/c stores, and those
on issue vouchers by the officer receiving the stores.
Sources of Receipt of Stores (R.191 and 230 PFR, 2001) Comment [u62]: Reduce space, this is
26. Store receipts may be classified as follows:- subheading. Align left and decrease space below

(a) Stores imported.

(b) Local purchases.
(c) Transfers between stores.
(d) Conversion or manufacture.
(e) Return of stores.
Local Purchase Orders Comment [u63]: Reduce space, this is
27. The entries in the ledger will be supported by:- subheading. Align left and decrease space below

(a) the duplicate invoice;

(b) a copy of the payment voucher with a copy of Local Purchase Order
attached;
(c) Issue Voucher from the store from which the transfer is effected;
(d) a Receipt voucher (S.F. 4);
(e) a Delivery Note
28. For stores purchased locally a Local Purchase Order in triplicate, must be used. The
original and duplicate will be handed to the supplier, who will return the original to the
indenting officer when supplying the stores. The original will then be attached to the copy of
the Payment Voucher in support of the ledger entries. The triplicate copy will remain in the
file.
29. The officer i/c stores must certify on the Delivery Note that the stores have been
received and taken on charge in the stores ledger.
Local Purchase of Stores Comment [u64]: Reduce space, this is
30. The practice of ordering goods from local firms verbally or on scraps of paper is subheading. Align left and decrease space below

strictly prohibited.
31. Every order must be made by a properly completed L.P.O.
32. No goods shall be ordered by telegram or telephone for any reason.
33. All L.P.Os. shall be legibly signed.
34. Payment Vouchers for stores unsupported by L.P.O. will be returned to the drawer
under query and will not be paid until the requirements of the above orders have been met.
Receipt Vouchers (R.212 PFR, 2001) Comment [u65]: Reduce space, this is
35. Receipt Vouchers (S.F. 4) in respect of allocated stores will be prepared in subheading. Align left and decrease space below

duplicate. They will be signed by the officer depositing the stores and receipted by the officer

399
 P.G.O.No.166
i/c stores. The original will be retained by the Officer i/c stores and the duplicate handed to
the officer depositing the stores.
36. A line must be drawn immediately beneath the last item on all receipt vouchers.
Stores taken on Charge (R.189 PFR, 2001) Comment [u66]: Reduce space, this is
37. Stores must be taken on charge on the day on which they are received into store. In subheading. Align left and decrease space below

the case of bicycles, typewriters, instruments, etc., the manufacture’s number, model and any
other identification marks will be entered in the ledger.
Expendable Stores (R.189(a) PFR, 2001) Comment [u67]: Reduce space, this is
38. Expendable stores purchased in small quantities for immediate use, e.g. soap, subheading. Align left and decrease space below

brooms, dusters, crockery, glassware, etc., will not be taken on charge, but the following
certificate will be endorsed on the relevant payment vouchers:-
“Expendable and not taken on ledger charge”.
Issue of Stores Comment [u68]: Reduce space, this is
39. Stores may be issued for the following purposes:- subheading. Align left and decrease space below

(a) Works or other Government services.

(b) Transfers between stores.
(c) Conversion into manufactured articles.
(d) Sale.
(e) Loan.
(f) Destruction.
Issue Vouchers (R.215 PFR, 2001) Comment [u69]: Reduce space, this is
40. Issue of stores for any of the above purposes mentioned in paragraph 41 above must subheading. Align left and decrease space below

be supported by an Issue Voucher (P.F. 1). The officer i/c stores must show on the Issue
Voucher the services or work for which the stores are issued.
Requisitions (R.214 PFR, 2001) Comment [u70]: Reduce space, this is
41. All indents for stores handled by the Government stores. will be made out on a subheading. Align left and decrease space below

“Combined Requisition and Issue Note” in sextuplicate and dealt with as under:-
“A” This copy will be sent to Stores Department with copies “B”, “C”, “D” and “E”.
“B” Stores Department will retain this copy of proof or issue.
“C” Stores Department will return this copy to the Indenting Officer for verification
and signature that the stores have been correctly received and must be returned to the Stores
Department immediately the stores have been received.
“D” This copy will be sent to the Accountant-General with copy of Monthly Summary
of Stores Issued, which is prepared by the Government Stores.
“E” This copy will be priced and returned to the indenting Officer for retention and
checking with the Monthly Summary of Stores Issued.
“F” Indenting Officer retains this copy in the book as office copy.
Note:- When ordering non-standard items which do not appear in the stock and price list,
Indenting Officers should endorse the letters “PDI” clearly in the pencil at the top of the
form.
42. All indents for stores handled by Police Main Stores will be made out on Form
PF.1. Indents will be separated and grouped as follows:- Comment [u71]: Reduce space, second proof
“A” Clothing & Equipment. does not show so!

“B” Arms & Ammunition.

“C” Stationeries and barracks stores.
Any indents which combine any of these groups on one form will not be met.
43. Form P.F. 1 will not be used when ordering goods purchased on payment from
Police Main Stores or when ordering Books of Reference, but instead a letter will suffice.
Preparation and Signing of Issue Vouchers (R.214 PFR, 2001) Comment [u72]: Reduce space, this is
44. The articles issued will be entered on an Issue Voucher which will be signed by the subheading. Align left and decrease space below

Issuing Officer.
45. The Issue Vouchers will be prepared in triplicate. The original and duplicate will be
sent to the officer requisitioning the stores, who will return the original duly receipted.

400
 P.G.O.No.166
46. When stores are issued from Police Main Stores, the copy of the Issue Voucher
returned to Main stores must bear a certificate signed by the officer requisitioning the stores
to the effect that all non-expendable articles have been taken on charge.
47. A line must be drawn immediately beneath the last item on all Issue Vouchers.
Destruction or Sale of Stores Comment [u73]: Reduce space, this is
48. When condemned stores are destroyed or sold, the Issue Voucher must be supported subheading. Align left and decrease space below

by a certificate of destruction or a copy of the Account Sales as the case may be. Reference
to the authority must be quoted on the Voucher and, in the case of sales, a note must be made
of the number, date and amount of the counterfoil receipt.
Sale to be by Auction or Tender Comment [u74]: Reduce space, this is
49. When surplus or unserviceable stores are sold, the sale will be by auction or by subheading. Align left and decrease space below

tender after public advertisement, unless the approval of the Paymaster - General is obtained
for their being sold otherwise.
Surcharges for Losses and Deficiencies Comment [u75]: Reduce space, this is
50. Whenever the value of stores lost or deficient is recovered from an officer, the subheading. Align left and decrease space below

authority for the surcharge must be quoted on the Issue Voucher, together with the number,
date and amount of the counterfoil receipt.
FURNITURE, EQUIPMENT, ETC. Comment [u76]: Centre this and bold. Increase
Office Furniture space above and below heading

51. Regional Commanders and O/C. Units are directly responsible for its safe keeping Comment [u77]: Reduce space, this is
subheading. Align left and decrease space below
of all office furniture within their commands.
Equipment, Stationery, etc., Ledgers
52. Regional Commanders and O/C. Units will maintain stores ledgers for all reserve Comment [u78]: Reduce space, this is
stocks of equipment, stationery, etc., held by them. subheading. Align left and decrease space below
Inventories (R.190 and 266 PFR 2001)
53. The responsible officer must ensure that the inventories are amended from time to
time on receipt of new articles or whenever articles are written off, charged or transferred. Comment [u79]: Reduce space, this is
subheading. Align left and decrease space below
Such amendments will be initialled and dated.
Deficiencies (R.268 PFR, 2001)
54. In the event of any deficiencies due to loss, irregular removal or breakage, an Comment [u80]: Reduce space, this is
explanation will be furnished by the officer responsible for the custody of the articles and, if subheading. Align left and decrease space below
unsatisfactory, he will be surcharged with the amount of the loss. The explanation will be
submitted to Police Headquarters with the report of loss.
Removal of Articles (R.266 (4) PFR, 2001) Comment [u81]: Reduce space, this is
55. Articles will not be removed without the authority of Regional Commanders or subheading. Align left and decrease space below

O/C. Units.
Purchases from or by Officials Comment [u82]: Reduce space, this is
56. In no circumstances whatever may furniture or any other stores be purchased by or subheading. Align left and decrease space below
on behalf of Government from an official, nor may they be sold to an official, other than as a
purchaser at an auction.
Losses, Deterioration and Damage to Stores Comment [u83]: Reduce space, this is
57. The instructions regarding the procedure to be adopted when stores are lost, subheading. Align left and decrease space below

deteriorated or damaged are contained in the Public Finance Regulations 2001.

58. A quarterly return of all write-offs per the Public Finance Regulation 2001 must be Comment [u84]: DCP. Is this the proper word?
submitted to Police Headquarters, in triplicate, by the 20th of the month succeeding the end of Plse confirm
the quarter in which the write-off was authorised.
59. Losses, damage, etc., to stores other than minor items of stores will be reported to
Police Headquarters on the form shown in Appendix “A” to this Order. This form must be
submitted in quadruplicate. Similar action must be taken in every case of loss, damage or
deterioration, however small if fraud, theft or misappropriation is known or suspected.
60. No officer has discretion to withhold a report on any reportable loss, either known
or suspected, even if restitution has already been made. Reports will not be deferred to enable
restitution to be made.
61. When losses or deficiencies are written off, the stores in question will be issued on a
voucher and an appropriate entry made in the stores ledger.

401
 P.G.O.No.166
62. When stores are written off by an authorised officer he will, at the same time, issue
disposal instructions, e.g., sell by auction, destroy by fire, hand over to leper settlement, etc.
63. In the case of shortages in dispatch and shortages and breakages in transit, the full
quantity shown in the invoice, Receipt or Issue Voucher must be taken on charge. An Issue
Voucher will be prepared at once in respect of the shortage or breakage and an entry made in
the ledger. It is then necessary to determine the cause of the shortage or breakage and act as
follows:-
(a) Shortage in Dispatch: Comment [u85]: Reduce space below. Second
Make out an Issue Voucher (P.F. 1), in triplicate, and send two copies to the officer from proof does not show so. Note alignment of this text
and below. Should show like this
whom the stores were received. One copy will be signed and returned. The signed copy and
the triplicate copy will support the issue.
(b) Shortage and Breakages in Transit: Comment [u86]: Bold anf reduce space with
If a claim can be made against the transporter, or some other person, this should be done. It is below

the duty of the consignee to ensure that a claim is made and that the stores lost or broken are
written off. A Loss Report will be forwarded to Police Headquarters. Where the value of the
stores lost or broken cannot be recovered, the Loss Report will also be dealt with in the
manner set out above.

Comment [u87]: PGO NUMBER 167

PGO No. 168? MISSING. NUMBER 168 IS PART OF IT ONLY.
WHERE IS THE REST?

BOARDS OF CONDEMNATION STORES Comment [u88]: CENTRE THIS

Appointment of Boards (R.255 PFR, 2001) Comment [u89]: Reduce space, this is
1. The appointment of Boards of condemnation does not relieve Regional subheading. Align left and decrease space below
Commanders and O/C. Units of their responsibility for ascertaining by periodical stock-
taking that the balances shown in the ledgers are actually in stock.
SUPERVISION AND CONTROL OF STORES Comment [u90]: CENTRE THIS
Responsibility of Local Representatives Comment [u91]: Reduce space, this is
2. Regional Commanders and O/C. Units are directly responsible for the supervision subheading. Align left and decrease space below
and control of stores in their charge.
Inspection by Responsible Officer (R.176 PFR, 2001)
Comment [u92]: Reduce space, this is
3. Regional Commanders and O/C. Units will hold periodical inspections of each subheading. Align left and decrease space below
store and report thereon to Police Headquarters once a quarter. Inspection Reports will only
be submitted in respect of authorised stores as listed in Appendix “B”. No other stores will
be maintained or opened without written authority from Police Headquarters.
4. The inspection will include:-
(a) a test verification of the additions in the stores ledger and a comparison
of the ledger entries with the receipts and issues;
(b) a test comparison of the ledger balances with the actual stock;
(c) an inspection of the condition of the goods in stock and the manner in
which they are stored;
(d) an inspection of the store-rooms and yards, locks and fastenings.
5. The report will state:-
(a) the result of the findings in respect of paragraph 70, sub-paragraphs (a),
(b), (c) and (d).
(b) whether the ledgers are properly kept and entered up to date;
(c) whether vouchers, invoices and requisitions are properly filed;
(d) whether any stores are held in excess of requirements;
(e) the instructions issued to the officer responsible for the stores as a result
of the inspection;
(f) any recommendations regarding the improvement of the operation of the Comment [u93]: Reduce space, this is
store. subheading. Align left and decrease space below
Responsibility for the Protection of Stores

402
 P.G.O.No.166
6. Every official having charge of government stores is personally responsible for
safeguarding them and seeing that they are properly sheltered and protected.
Reports on Unserviceable Stores, etc. Comment [u94]: Reduce space, this is
7. Regional Commanders and O/C. Units will furnish to Police Headquarters at the subheading. Align left and decrease space below

end of each quarter:-

(a) a list of unserviceable stores;
(b) a list of stores held in excess of requirements.
HANDING OVER STORES, EQUIPMENT, ETC. Comment [u95]: CENTRE THIS
Handing Over Stores (R.248 PFR, 2001) Comment [u96]: Reduce space, this is
8. When an officer is about to proceed on leave or transfer he must check the stores in subheading. Align left and decrease space below
his charge with his successor and both officers must sign a certificate of Handing Over Stores
(S.F. 17). This certificate will be prepared in quadruplicate. One copy will be retained by the
incoming officer and 3 copies will be sent to the Regional Command, who will send 2 copies to
the Police Headquarters, retaining one at Regional Police Headquarters for reference. Comment [u97]: DCP. This is missing text
Report in Discrepancies found in old PGO. Plse confirm

9. (a) A detailed list of surpluses and deficiencies must be signed by both Comment [u98]: Missing text. Plse confirm. If
so align left and bold.
officers and attached to the certificate, together with an explanation of the discrepancies by
the outgoing officer.
(b) In the event of any omission to report deficiencies, the officer taking over
will himself be liable to be held responsible for all such deficiencies.
Board in Absence of Outgoing Officer Comment [u99]: Reduce space, this is
10. If the outgoing officer is unable to hand over personally, his successor will apply to subheading. Align left and decrease space below

Police Headquarters (in the case of Regional Commanders and other Headquarters
branches) or to the Regional Commander (in the case of O/C. Unit) for the purpose of
checking and handing over the stores. The incoming officer must be present during the
proceedings of the Board. The relevant certificate (S.F. 18), together with the list of
discrepancies, will be signed by the Board and the incoming officer.
Handing Over Stores Regulations Comment [u100]: Reduce space, this is
11. When handing over stores the outgoing officer will, at the same time, hand over to subheading. Align left and decrease space below

the incoming officer his copy of these Regulations.

TENDER BOARDS, TENDERS AND CONTRACTORS Comment [u101]: Centre this
Stores which may be obtained locally
Comment [u102]: Reduce space, this is
12. Local supplies consist of two distinct classes:- subheading. Align left and decrease space below
(a) Local product and manufactures.
(b) Imported articles required from time to time by Units and Formations in
such small quantities or at uncertain intervals as to render it expedient to obtain them locally Comment [u103]: Or is it produce…? Old PGO
rather than by direct importation. shows produce

Tender Boards Comment [u104]: Reduce space, this is

13. The Tender Boards in Tanzania are:- subheading. Align left and decrease space below

(a) CENTRAL TENDER BOARD

MINISTRY AND INDEPENDENT DEPARTMENTS TENDER BOARD
(b) REGIONAL TENDER BOARDS
(c) DISTRICT TENDER BOARDS
(d) LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY TENDER BOARDS
(e) PARASTATAL TENDER BOARDS
Applications to Tender Boards for Local Purchase Comment [u105]: Reduce space, this is
14. Application for local procurement shall be done using tender forms to be supplied subheading. Align left and decrease space below

by the appropriate tender board.

15. The tender documents shall be worded so as to permit and encourage competition
and such documents shall set forth clearly and precisely all the information necessary for a
prospective tenderer to prepare a tender for the goods and works to be provided.
16. Written contracts shall be entered for every contract as direct by the tender board.
17. Copies of all agreements and contracts will be sent to Police Headquarters. Comment [u106]: Reduce space, this is
Inability of Contractors to Supply subheading. Align left and decrease space below

403
 P.G.O.No.166
18. In the event of a contractor being unable to fulfil his contract, the Tender Board
may authorise purchase elsewhere. The contractor will be held responsible for paying any
excess over the contract price there by incurred. This will be stated in the agreement. Any
default or unsatisfactory service on the part of the contractor will be reported to the Board.
APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 166) Comment [u107]: Reduce font size, this is an
appendix

To: The Inspector General of Police, Comment [u108]: ‘To” to be placed properly.
Police Headquarters,
Dar es Salaam.
LOSS REPORT – STORES Comment [u109]: Centre this
The following loss/deterioration/damage of/to stores is reported in accordance with the
provisions of P.G.O. No. 166, paragraph 61:-
1. Department.
2. Station.
3. Store.
4. Date of occurrence.
5. Details of stores lost/deteriorated/damaged.
6. Original value of stores lost/deteriorated/damaged.
7. Vote from which stores were purchased and date of purchase.
8. Name of officer responsible for the custody of the stores.
9. Length of time stores lost/deteriorated/damaged were in his custody.
10. Name of officer responsible for the supervision of the store.
11. Name of any officer or other Government employee responsible for the loss.
12. Precise circumstances in which the loss/deterioration/damage arose.
13. Arrangements in existence for the safe custody of the stores.
14. Arrangements in existence for the periodical checking of the stores and whether
these had been regularly and properly carried out.
15. When the last check was made and by whom and to whom reported.
16. Whether the loss/deterioration/damage was contributed to or facilitated by the
negligence of any officer or other employee of Government.
17. Whether the loss has been reported to Police and if so, when.
18. The result of Police inquiries (a copy of the Police report should be forwarded
when available).
19. Whether the prosecution of any person has taken place and, if so, with what result
(a copy of the Magistrate’s judgement should be forwarded when available).
20. If the loss was caused by fire, whether any inquiry was held as required by
Government Standing Order (A copy of the inquiry findings should be forwarded when
available).
21. Action taken to prevent future losses of the kind reported.
Date .........................Signed ...................................
(To be forwarded in quadruplicate to Police Headquarters).

APPENDIX “B”
(To P.G.O. No. 166)

PARAGRAPHS 68/73 – SUPERVISION AND CONTROL OF STORES Comment [u110]: Increase this space below
Authority stores in the Force for which Regional Commanders will submit their inspection
reports in terms described in paragraph 68 are as follows:- Comment [u111]: Insert lines to this text. See
format

Name of Store Submitted to Headquarters by

Police Main Stores Dar es Salaam Quartermaster Police Main Stores
Dar es Salaam
Regional Store, Dar es Salaam Region R.P.C. Dar es Salaam Region

404
 P.G.O.No.166
Name of Store Submitted to Headquarters by
Regional Store, Morogoro Region R.P.C. Morogoro Region
Regional Store, Coast Region R.P.C. Coast Region
Regional Stores, Ruvuma Region R.P.C. Ruvuma Region
Regional Stores, Lindi Region R.P.C. Lindi Region
Regional Store, Kagera Region R.P.C. Kagera Region
Regional Stores, Kigoma Region R.P.C. Kigoma Region
Regional Store, Tabora Region R.P.C. Tabora Region
Regional Store, Mwanza Region R.P.C. Mwanza Region
Regional Store, Mara Region R.P.C. Mara Region
Regional Store, Shinyanga Region R.P.C. Shinyanga Region
Regional Store, Dodoma Region R.P.C. Dodoma Region
Regional Store, Singida Region R.P.C. Singida Region
Regional Store, Mbeya R.P.C. Mbeya Region
Regional Store, Iringa Region R.P.C. Iringa Region
Regional Store, Rukwa Region R.P.C. Rukwa Region
Regional Store, Tanga Region R.P.C. Tanga Region
Police Training School Moshi Store. Commandant, Police Training
School. Moshi
Regional Store, Arusha R.P.C. Arusha
Regional Store, Kilimanjaro R.P.C. Kilimanjaro
Regional Store, Manyara R.P.C. Manyara
Regional Store, Mtwara R.P.C. Mtwara
Police Zanzibar Store Commissioner of Police Zanzibar
Signals Stores, Dar es Salaam, and any other stores in
the field authorised by Chief Signals Officer to hold Chief Signals Officer
signals equipment
Railways Police Store, Dar es Salaam CO. TRC Police
TAZARA Police Store CO TAZARA Police
Police Vehicles Maintenance Unit Store, Dar es Salaam CO PVMU Dar es Salaam
Police Medical Unit Store, Dar es Salaam CO Police Medical Unit Dar es
Salaam
Police Air Wing Unit Store, Dar es Salaam CO Airwing Unit Dar es Salaam
Police Marine Unit Store, Dar es Salaam CO Marine Unit Dar es Salaam
Police Dog and Horse Unit Store, Dar es Salaam CO Police Dog and Horse Unit
Police Traffic Unit, Dar es Salaam CO Police Traffic Unit Dar es
Salaam
Airports Police Unit, Dar es Salaam CO Airports Police, Dar es Salaam
Police College Commandant, Police College
STPU CO STPU
FFU CO FFU

405
 P.G.O.No.167
STORES – KIT SHEETS Comment [u112]: New PGO. Align right the
number. Increase space below and above number

1. Every member of the Rank & File shall be issued with a Kit Sheet (P.F. 31D).
2. Accurate details of each personnel’s kit and a record of every increase, reduction and
exchange of kit shall be entered on the Kit Sheet.
3. The Commandant, Police Training School, will arrange for a Kit Sheet to be made out
and issued to each recruit before posting at the end of his training. Every effort shall be made
to issue full scales of kit in accordance with P.G.O. No. 172 and any deficiencies will be
made up as soon as possible by the O/C. Station or Unit to which the recruit is posted.
4. Kit Sheets will be maintained in the following manner:- Comment [u113]: Reduce space. Old PGo
(a) The initial issue, at commencement of training at the Police Training School, shows space

will be entered in Column 1 of pages 1-3. The Issuing and Receiving Officers will both sign
the certificate on the outside of the Kit Sheet.
(b) Every subsequent alteration to the initial issue recorded in column 1 will be
entered in the next vacant adjoining column as soon as it takes place. The last figure under
columns 1-11 will be the current total quantity of each item of kit on issue to the holder.
(c) Every increase and reduction referred to in (b) above will also be entered
under the appropriate headings on page 4 and will be certified by the Issuing Officer.
(d) All exchanges which do not increase or reduce the scale of kit on issue to the
holder will be entered on pages 5 to 7 and will be signed by the Issuing Officer.
5. (a) All entries in Kit Sheets shall normally be made by O/C. Stations or by
Gazetted Officers or Inspectors acting on their behalf.
(b) No member of the Rank & File may make any entry on P.F. 31D unless
specifically authorised to do so, in writing, by his Commanding Officer.
6. Every entry made in P.F. 31D is the responsibility of the officer who made it.
7. Erasures and alterations are forbidden.
8. All items of kit withdrawn in accordance with paragraph 4 (c) will be sent, with
duplicate Issue Vouchers, to the nearest authorised Store, vide P.G.O. No 171.
9. The kit of every member who leaves the Force will be withdrawn by the O/C. of the
discharging Unit. The latter will ensure that every item of kit entered in P.F. 31D that
complete withdrawal has been effected. He will then despatch the kit to the nearest authorised
Store with duplicate Issue Vouchers.
10. Commanding Officers will ensure that:- Comment [u114]: Reduce space, old PGO
(a) all kits withdrawn in accordance with paragraph 9 are checked against Kit shows so

Sheets.
(b) the duplicate copies of the Issue Vouchers are receipted and returned to the
originating Station,
(c) unserviceable items are disposed of in accordance with paragraphs 7-12 of
P.G.O. No. 172,
(d) serviceable items are taken on charge.
11. Kit Sheets will be destroyed when all action has been finalised.

406
 P.G.O.No.168
STORES-MARKING OF CLOTHING & EQUIPMENT Comment [u115]: New PGO. Align right and
bold. Centre heading and increase space below and
above heading
1. (a) Every item of clothing and equipment on personal issue shall be marked
before issue with the holder’s force Number and the date of issue.
(b) Clothing and equipment on Unit charge and issued on a temporary basis will
not be marked
2. Marking will be carried out in accordance with the procedure laid down in Appendix
“A”. Items not shown in Appendix “A” will not be marked. Inspecting officers will satisfy
themselves that all items of kit are marked in accordance with this Order.

APPENDIX “A” Comment [u116]: Check attached text. Some

(To P.G.O. No.168) words over lapping. Check format

Serial No. Item Item Position for marking item Method of marking
item
1. Belt, waist stable Centre: real inside Die stamped.
2. Belt, waist, web Centre: rear inside Painted black.
3. Blanket Across one corner White painted.
4. Boots, pair Centre instep underneath Die stamped.
5. Water bottle carrier Centre: inside top fastening Painted Black.
strap
6. Cartridge carrier web Centre: reverse side Die stamped.
7. Epaulettes Centre: reverse side Painted white.
8. Great coat Centre: between shoulders,
reverse side Painted white.
9. Haversack Inside flap at centre Painted black.
10. Hat, jungle, green Right side: inside just Painted black.
above Band
11. Holster, revolver, leather Centre of fixing loop, at Leather: die
web rear stamped, web
painted black.
12. Jersey Centre: Real hem, inside Painted white.
13. Kit bag Centre: outside on Painted black.
circumference of bag
14. Mess tin Centre: bottom, outside Die stamped.
15. Mosquito net Centre: between shoulders, Painted white.
reverse side
16. Overalls, blue Centre: between shoulders, Painted white.
reverse side
17. Respirator Buttom left fixing strap Painted white.
outside
18. Respirator bag Centre: inside flap Painted black.
19. Riot shield Centre: outside Painted black.
20. Shirts, white Centre: bottom hem, at rear Painted black.
21. Sling, rifle, leather 12 inches from bottom end, Die stamped.
inside
22. Sling, rifle, web 12 inches from bottom end, Painted black.
inside.
23. Sling, water bottle, Inside at centre Painted black.
haversack
24. Water-proof G/Sheet Inside front bottom corner Painted black.

407
 P.G.O.No.168
Serial No. Item Item Position for marking item Method of marking
item
diagonally
25. Trousers, khaki takron Centre of waist band at Painted black.
rear, inside
26. Water-proof coat Centre: between shoulders, Painted black.
inside
27. Skirt, blue Centre: waistband, at rear Painted white.
inside
28. Blouse, White Centre of bottom hem, at Painted black.
real inside
29. Brassiere, white Centre: right side, rear Painted black.
fastening tape, inside
30. Shoes black Centre: of sole at instep Die stamped.
underside
31. Hat, bowler (women) Centre: crown, inside Painted white.
32. Coat, W/proof Centre: between shoulders, Painted white.
inside
33. Pullover (women) Centre: Bottom hem, at Painted white
rear, inside
34. Brush, shoe Centre of woodwork on top Die stamped.
35. Haversack, blue Centre of flap, inside Painted white.
36. Bags, shoulders, navy Centre of flap, inside Painted white.
blue

408
 P.G.O.No.169
STORES – PROPERTY ON CHARGE REGISTER Comment [u117]: New PGO

1. Every Station and Unit shall maintain a property on Charge Register (P.F. 168) in which
shall be recorded every item of Government property held permanently on Station or Unit
charge, including arms and ammunition.
2. For the purpose of this P.G.O., "property held on Station or Unit charge" means all
Government property which has been issued to Stations and Units for current use. It does not
include:-
(a) Uniform and equipment on personal issue;
(b) allocated stores which have not yet been issued from authorised Police Stores
and are, therefore, entered, in Allocated Stores Ledgers (vide P.G.O. No. 164);
(c) property on temporary charge.
3. The Register is divided into sections lettered “A” – “H” and shall be maintained in
accordance with the instructions printed on the inside of the front cover.
4. Every entry or alteration in P.F. 168 shall be made and signed by the Gazetted Officer
or Inspector in charge of a District, Sub-District, Station or Unit as the case may be. Erasures
are forbidden.
5. Spare Register Sheets and Covers, all of which carry their own reference, may be
obtained on indent from the Government Printer.
6. P.Fs. 168A and 168B do not contain any “balance” column. Where it is found necessary
or desirable to show a running balance, there is no objection to using the column succeeding
any entry for this purpose, the world “balance” being written in at the top of the column. The
entries in such a column will be made in red, and must be complete and be endorsed with the
date on which the balance was struck.

409
 P.G.O.No.170
STORES-STATIONERY AND POLICE FORMS - INDENTING
PROCEDURE Comment [u118]: New PGO. Align right the
number. Increase space above and below heading

1. Quarterly indents for stationery and “Stock” Police Forms, as listed at Appendices “A”
and “B”, will be submitted via the Quartermaster to the Government Printer by the
following formations only:-
Regional Headquarters, Dar es Salaam.
Regional Headquarters , Mtwara.
Regional Headquarters, Lindi.
Regional Headquarters, Musoma Mara.
Regional Headquarters, Kibaha Pwani.
Regional Headquarters, Kigoma.
Regional Headquarters, Sumbawanga Rukwa.
Regional Headquarters, Iringa.
Regional Headquarters, Moshi Kilimanjaro.
Regional Headquarters, Babati Manyara
Regional Headquarters, Shinyanga.
Regional Headquarters, Singida.
Regional Headquarters, Songea Ruvuma
Regional Headquarters, Mbeya.
Regional Headquarters, Dodoma.
Regional Headquarters, Tanga.
Regional Headquarters, Arusha.
Regional Headquarters, Tabora.
Regional Headquarters, Bukoba Kagera.
Regional Headquarters, Mwanza
Regional Headquarters, Morogoro
Director, Criminal Investigation Dar es Salaam.
Zanzibar Police H.Q.
Commandant, P.T.S. Moshi
Marine Police Division H.Q. Dar es Salaam.
FFU Unit H.Q. Dar es Salaam.
Police Signals Division H.Q., Dar es Salaam.
Railways Police Division H.Q., Dar es Salaam.
TAZARA Police Division H.Q. Dar es Salaam
Police Medical Unit H.Q. Dar es Salaam.
Traffic Police Division H.Q. Dar es Salaam.
Airports Police Division H.Q. Dar es Salaam.
Stock Theft Prevention Police Division H.Q. Arusha
Office Supervisor, Police H.Q.
Police College, Dar es salaam
Police Band Unit Dar es Salaam.
Police Dog and Horse Unit H.Q. Dar es Salaam.
Airwing Police Division H.Q. Dar es Salaam

Sufficient stocks will normally be held to cover four months’ consumption.

2. All indents shall be made out as precisely as possible. Indents will be referred back
by the Quartermaster if he considers that excessive quantities have been ordered.
Supplementary indents should, if possible, be avoided.
3. (a) All accountable printed matter must be ordered on the special “Accountable
Printed Matter Requisition & Issue Note” which is available, printed matter
in any other form such as, for example, telegrams, letters, telephone, etc.,
cannot be accepted.
(b) When indenting for periodical supplies of non-accountable matter, the

410
 P.G.O.No.170
“Stationery Requisition & Issue Note”, which is available on demand from
the Government Press, must be used.
(c) Indents for the supplementary supplies of no-accountable matter and, in
particular, for such items as special printing, rubber stamps, etc., should be
ordered by letter/savingram addressed to the Government Printer, in
duplicate.
(d) The attention of all officers placing orders on the Government Press is
specifically drawn to the “Notes for Indenting Officers” which will be found
at the front of both the non-accountable and accountable sections of the
current Government Printer’s catalogue.
4. The Government Printer, upon receipt of the indents, will issue direct to the indenting
formation.
5. The Quartermaster will obtain from the Government Printer and hold sufficient
supplies of “Non-Stock” Forms, as listed in Appendix “C” to meet all normal
requirements. The formations listed in paragraph 1 will obtain supplies by quarterly
indent from the Quartermaster and will hold sufficient stocks to cover four months’
consumption.
6. Stations and Units in each Region will indent at regular intervals upon their Regional
Commanders for all “Stock” and “Non-Stock” Police Forms and stationery (as listed
in Appendices “A”, “B” and “C”). They should hold sufficient supplies for one
month. Regional Commanders may permit remote Stations and Units to hold more
than one month’s stock if regular supplies cannot easily be arranged.
7. The provisions of paragraph 2 apply to indents submitted to Regional Commanders.
APPENDIX “A”
(TO P.G.O. No. 170)
STOCK FORMS
All these forms will be stocked by Government Printer for distribution upon indent by districts:-
Stock Forms
P.F. 1 Police Indent Book.
P.F. 2 Case File Insert Sheet Statements (Ruled, Front page).
P.F 2A Case File Insert Sheet Statements (Ruled, Continuation Sheet)
P.F. 2B Ruled Investigation Diary Sheet.
P.F. 2C Case File Cover.
P.F. 3 Medical Examination Report.
P.F. 4 Report in case of Serious Crime.
P.F. 5 First Progress Report in Case of serious crime.
P.F. 6 Notice to Prosecutors and Witnesses.
P.F. 7 Bond and Bail Bond.
P.F. 8 Bond and Bail after Arrest.
P.F. 9 Charge Form.
P.F. 10 Mtu huyu anatakiwa.
P.F. 12 Inventory of Unclaimed Property.
P.F. 13 Report of Apprehension.
P.F. 14 Arms Storage Register.
P.F. 14A Elimination Finger Print form.
P.F. 14B Finger Print Form.
P.F. 15 Single Finger Print form.
P.F. 16 Court Exhibit Register.
P.F. 20 Detention Register.
P.F. 21 Surveillance Form Released Convict.
P.F. 22 Permit to convene an Assembly.
P.F. 25 Permit for a procession
P.F. 26 History Sheet C.I.D.
P.F. 28 Application to Convene a Public Meeting.
P.F. 31 Traffic Accident Report Book
P.F. 31A Finger Print Form (Member of Force).
P.F. 31C Medical History Book.
P.F. 31D Kit Sheet.

411
 P.G.O.No.170
P.F. 32 Offences against Discipline – Charge Sheet.
P.F. 32A Defaulters Charge Sheet (copy).
P.F. 33 Discharge Certificate.
P.F. 34 Record of Service Sheet – Officers and N.C.Os.
P.F. 36 Meal Order Form.
P.F. 37
P.F. 38 Receipt for top secret/secret documents.
P.F. 40 Sick Report Register.
P.F. 48 Application to Strike-off Unserviceable Stores.
P.F. 51 Station Diary.
P.F. 54 Warrant Register.
P.F. 55 Summons Register.
P.F. 57 Leave Register.
P.F. 58 Movement Order.
P.F. 59 Duty Register.
P.F. 59A Duty Book.
P.F. 60 Defaulter Record.
P.F. 61 Description of Report of Stolen/Recovered, etc., for Circulation in Police
Gazette.
P.F. 62 Patrol Book.
P.F. 63 Prisoners Property Receipt Book.
P.F. 65 Cash Bail Receipt Book.
P.F. 66 Warning Notices, Traffic.
P.F. 68 Cancellation or Amendments for Police Gazette.
P.F. 70 Crime Statistical Return form.
P.F. 71 Personal Particulars – Swahili/English.
P.F. 73 Monthly M.T. Inspection Report.
P.F. 75 Remand Form (C.R.O.)
P.F. 77
P.F. 78
P.F. 79
P.F. 86 Bicycle Report.
P.F. 89 Traffic Accident File Covers.
P.F. 90 Particulars of Road Accident.
P.F. 91 Record of Search by a Police Officer.
P.F. 92 Letter Asking for Driver’s Name/Address.
P.F. 93 Vehicle Inspection Report Book.
P.F. 94A
P.F. 94B
P.F. 95 Register of Range for Short Course
P.F. 99 Order for a Post Mortem Examination.
P.F. 101 Notice of Commission of Traffic Offence.
P.F. 102 Finger Print Result of Case C.R.O.
P.F. 103
P.F. 106 Motor Offence Speed Limit.
P.F. 107 Particulars of Motor Accident.
P.F. 108 Report of a Motor Offence.
P.F. 109 Notice of Intended Prosecution.
P.F. 110 Warning Notice re Vehicle Plates.
P.F. 114 Production of Documents, Traffic.
P.F. 115 Final Report Particulars of road Accident.
P.F. 118 Scenes of crime Articles for Examination Book.
P.F. 119 Scrap Metal Application for General License.
P.F. 120 Scrap Metal Application for Local License.
P.F. 122 Permit to Export Scrap Metal.
P.F. 124
P.F. 125
P.F. 126
P.F. 134 Index – stolen Bicycles.
P.F. 135 Index – Stolen Property.

412
 P.G.O.No.170
P.F. 136 Notice to Drivers for Production License.
P.F. 137 Exhibit Receipt Book.
P.F. 140 Certificate of competence.
P.F. 144
P.F. 145 Exhibit Label
P.F. 152 Dogs: Police, Record of Service.
P.F 153 Horses:- Police, Record of Service
P.F. 156
P.F. 157 Found Property Label.
P.F. 158 Notice to Drivers for Production License.
P.F. 159
P.F. 160
P.F. 161 Application for Appointment R/Const.
P.F. 162 Report Book.
P.F. 162A Minor Offence Docket.
P.F. 164 Repair/Receipt ticket: Clothing & Equipment.
P.F. 165 Dead Body Label.
P.F. 166 Valuable Property Envelope.
P.F. 167 Prisoner’s Property Label.
P.F. 168 Property on charge Register.
P.F. 168A Register of Operational and Training Equipment.
P.F. 168B General Inventory of Station Property on charge.
P.F. 168C Ammunition Register.
P.F. 168D Arms Register.
P.F. 168E Vehicle Register.
P.F. 168F Vehicle Register Motor Cycles and Trailers.
P.F. 168G Certificates of Monthly checking of Station Property.
P.F. 168H Handing Over Certificates.
P.F. 169
P.F. 172 Daily Report (A. Station).
P.F. 173 Weekly Report (B. Station).
P.F. 175 Promotion Qualification Report.
P.F. 177 Conference Book.
P.F. 179 Missing & Wanted Persons Register.
P.F. 180 Request to Government Chemist – Exam. Of Exhibit.
P.F. 181 Found and Unclaimed Property Receipt Book.
P.F. 183
P.F. 184 Application for Witness summons.
P.F. 185 Police Application form.(Maombi Form)
P.F. 186 Identification Parade Register.
P.F. 187 Visiting Officers Book.
P.F. 189 Inquest, (English).
P.F. 190 Re-engagement Agreement.
P.F. 191 Manpower statements.
P.F. 195 Certificate of Inspector – vehicles.
P.F. 196 Inquest Form B (Swahili)
P.F. 197 Control Room, Strength State.
P.F. 200 Armoury Register.
P.F. 201 Signals Check slip (sent).
P.F. 202 Signal Check slip (receipt).
P.F. 203 Engine/Battery Log Book.
P.F. 207 Supervision and control of stores, quarterly Return.
P.F. 208 Control Room Inward Message.
P.F. 209 Control Room Outward Message.
P.F. 210 Control Room Diary.
P.F. 212 Traffic Accident Statistical Card.
P.F. 212A Road Accident Report A
P.F. 212C Road Accident Report C
P.F. 212D Road Accident Report D
P.F. 214 Licensed Premises supervision Sheet.

413
 P.G.O.No.170
P.F. 217 Time Off Cards.
P.F. 218 Medical Form – Exam Recruits.
P.F. 219 Private Firearms (Disposal) Register.
P.F 220
P.F 221 Investigation Register
P.F 222
P.F. 223 Traffic Breath Test Record Form

APPENDIX “B”
(TO P.G.O. No. 170)

STOCK FORMS
ARMS AND AMMUNITION ORDINANCE FORMS:
USED BY POLICE

Form
A. Export License.
A.1. Import License.
D. Permits for Withdrawal of Arms and Ammunition, from Public Warehouse.
F.1. Visitors Firearms License.
G. Permit for Temporary transfer of Firearms and Ammunition.
H.1. Permit for sale or Transfer of Arms and Ammunition.
I. License to keep a Private Warehouse.
J. Register of Deposits and Withdrawals, Private Warehouse.
K. Permits to Deposit arms and Ammunition from Private Warehouse.
L. Permit for Withdrawal of Arms and Ammunition from Private warehouse.
M. Application for Withdrawal of Arms and Ammunition from a Private Warehouse.
N. Application for First Issue/Renewal of Arms License.
N.1. Visitors Firearm License.

APPENDIX “C”
(TO P.G.O. No. 170)

NON STOCK FORM LIST

Government does not stock these forms: Head of Departments shown in last column are responsible for
maintaining and ordering sufficient stocks of their forms from Government Printer. Through Assistant
Commissioner (D) at Police Headquarters, order to print must be accompanied by a Specimen copy of
the form.

Non-Stock Forms Department to Hold

Form
PF. 18A Certificate of Comparison of C.I.D
finger Prints
PF. 18B Criminal Records C.I.D
PF. 18C Criminal Record, prisons, C.I.D
Duplicate
PF. 19 Forensic Bureau folders C.I.D
PF. 23 Police Identity Certificate (Other H.Q. & P.T.S.
Ranks)
PF. 24 Certificate of Comparison C.I.D
Condemned Prisoner
PF. 29
PF. 41 Nominal Card C.A.R. C.I.D
PF. 42 Calibre Card C.A.R. C.I.D
PF. 43 Index Card C.A.R. C.I.D
PF. 69 Radio Log Book H.Q. C.S.O.

414
 P.G.O.No.170
Non-Stock Forms Department to Hold
Form
PF. 72 Signals Job Card H.Q. C.S.O.
PF. 74 Railway Crime Report TRC & TAZARA
Police
PF. 80 Index Cut Card C.I.D
PF. 81 Index Cross Reference Card C.I.D
PF. 82 Course Report, Police Training C.I.D
School
PF. 84 Serious Case File (C.I.D.) C.I.D
P.F. 102 Result of Case Form C.I.D
PF. 102A Result of Search Remand C.R.O. C.I.D
PF. 102B Result of Search Sentenced C.I.D
C.R.O.
PF. 102C Result of Search Miscellaneous C.I.D
C.R.O.
PF. 104 Service Register C.I.D & P.T.S
PF. 104A Record of Service Register R & H.Q. (A) P.T.S.
F.
PF.105 Signal Pads. H.Q. (A) P.T.S.
PF. 112 Pages for Photographic Register H.Q. C.S.O.
PF. 113 Normal Index C.I.D
PF. 128 Cross Reference Nominal Index C.I.D
PF. 128A Scenes of Crime Register C.I.D
PF. 129 Cross Reference Nominal Index C.I.D
C.I.D.
PF. 130 Cross Reference Nominal Index C.I.D
C.I.D.
PF. 131
PF. 132
PF. 138 C.I.D
PF. 139 C.R.O. Nominal Index Slips C.I.D
PF. 142 Registry Action Slip C.I.D
PF. 146 Extract Forms C.I.D
PF. 147 Photographic Processing Forms C.I.D
PF. 155 Identity Card: Police Supervisees C.I.D
PF. 171 Directions for making out C.I.D
Personal Particulars and Report
Crime
PF. 174 Reporting Pads C.I.D
PF. 174A Continuation Sheet C.I.D
PF. 176 Buildings – Index Card
PF. 182 Rank and File Annual HQ
Confidential Report.
PF. 192 Nominal Index Cards (CAR) C.I.D
PF. 198 Vehicle Costing Ledger Sheets C.I.D
PF. 199
PF. 201
PF. 202
PF. 204 C.I.D. File cover open C.I.D
PF. 205 C.I.D. file cover confidential C.I.D
PF. 206
PF. 213 Supervisee Dossier C.I.D
PF. 215
PF. 216 Certificate section 154A C.I.D

415
 P.G.O.No.170
Non-Stock Forms Department to Hold
Form
Criminal Procedure Act, 1985
PF 220 Secret file cover C.I.D
correspondence Firearms
license folder (C.A.R)

416
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
STORES – STOCKS AND INDENTS

1. There are two main stores in the Force, namely Police Main Stores at Kilwa
Road, Dar es Salaam, and Police Signals Stores at the Signals Depot, Dar es Salaam. The
former handles all items of police clothing and equipment except Signals stores which are
handled by the latter.

Authorised Police Stores Comment [u119]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading

2. All commands will carry out their own quartermastering and each will maintain
authorised stores.

Method of Stocking Stores Comment [u120]: Reduce this space, align left.
3. All command Stores will obtain their stocks in the following manner:- Its subheading

(a) By quarterly indent (P.F. 1) on Police Main Stores for all items of clothing,
equipment, general stores and arms and ammunition listed in appendices “A” – “D”.
(b) By separate quarterly indent (P.F. 1) on the Police Main Stores for all common
user items held by Government Stores and listed Appendix “E” (see also paragraph 10);
(c) By separate quarterly indent (P.F. 1) upon Police Signals Stores for all Signals
equipment.

In this connection, indenting officers who require items not listed in Appendix “E”
should first consult the Government Stores “Stock Classification & Catalogue”, a copy of
which is held in each Regional Headquarters, and will consult the Quartermaster by
memorandum if the required item is not stocked by government Stores.

4. Separate indents are required for each category of goods, i.e., Appendix “A”,
“B”, “C”, “D” and “E” and for Signals Stores. Catalogue Numbers shall be quoted
against every item on every indent.

5. All Stores are responsible that their indents provide for sufficient stocks to meet
the normal demands of the Stations and Units for which they are responsible for the
prescribed period (i.e. 4 months.
6. Every effort shall be made to avoid subsidiary indents which may only be
submitted in exceptional circumstances. Indents for excessive quantities or for
unnecessary items are forbidden.
7. All stores, except Field Force Unit Headquarters , Ukonga, will not hold stocks
in excess of four months’ and one month’s requirements respectively. Holdings of
clothing and equipment will be based on the number of personnel to be supplied and on
the authorised life of the item referred to in P.G.O. No. 172.
8. Holdings of Signals Stores will be controlled by the Chief Signals Officer.

Indents on Government Stores: Station and Miscellaneous Stores Comment [u121]: Reduce this space, align left.
9. The Quartermaster will prepare all indents on Government Stores in Dar es Its subheading

Salaam and will hold all funds allocated for purchase there from.
10. The Quartermaster will, as far as possible, indent on Government Stores in
accordance with the indents sent to him by Commanding Officers. He is, however,
authorised to make such alterations as he may consider necessary for the elimination of
wastage or excessive ordering and will inform indenting officers whenever he does so.

417
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
11. Government Stores will arrange for dispatch of goods to final destinations.

Method of Indenting on Stores

12. All Stores will be operated and maintained in accordance with P.G.O No. 165
and Public Finance Act and Regulations.

APPENDIX “A”
(TO P.G.O. No. 171)

CLOTHING

CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM

“B”
B. 1 Batons and thongs.
B. 2 Blankets, G.S.
B. 3 Boots, askari.
B. 4 Bags, Kit
B. 5 Badges, shoulder titles.
B. 6 Badges, Cap.
B. 7
B. 8
B. 9 Badges, Sergeant/Major
B. 10
B. 11
B.12 Badges, shoulder, W.P.
B. 13
B. 14 Beret, Blue.
B. 15
B. 16
B. 17
B. 18
B. 19
B. 20
B. 21 Belts,
CommentWaist leatherDCp. Is it stable or leather
[u122]:
B. 22
B. 23
B. 24 Brushes, Boots.
B. 25
B. 26
B. 27 Buttons, small.
B. 28 Buttons, trouser brown.
B. 29
B. 30
B. 31
B. 32 -
B. 33 Bags, shoulder Navy Blue, W.P.
B. 34
B 35 Blouses, white, W.P.
B. 36 Badges S/Major
B. 37

418
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM
“C”
C. 1 Caps, Women Police.
C. 2 -
C. 3 -
C. 4 Cloth American.
C. 5
C. 6 Coats, great.
C. 7 Coats, waterproof.
C. 8 Coats, waterproof, white
C. 9 Cords, dress.
C. 10
C. 11 Chevrons, 1-bar, large.
C. 12 -
C. 13 -
C.14 -
C. 15 -
C. 16 -
C. 17 -
C.18 -
C. 19 -
C. 20 -
C. 21
C. 22
C. 23 Coats, waterproof, W/Police
C. 24
C. 25 -
C. 26 Chevrons 2-bar large
C. 27 Chevrons 3-bar large
C. 28 Chevrons, 1-bar small.
C. 29 Chevrons, 2-bar small
C. 30 Chevrons, 3-bar small
C. 31 Chevrons, 4-bar small
C. 32 -
C. 33 Caps, blue, peak, Askari.
C. 34 Caps, blue, peaked white top.
C. 35
C. 36
C. 37 Cloth
“D”
D. 1
D. 2 Drill, khaki.
D. 4
D. 6 Drill, blue.
“E”
E. 1 Elastic, cotton, black.
E. 2 Epaulettes.
“F”
F. 1 -
F. 2 -
F. 3 -
F. 5 Frogs, leather.
F. 6 Frogs, trucheon leather.

419
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM
“G”
G. 1
G. 2 -
“H”
H. 2 -
H. 3 -
H. 4 -
H. 5 Hats, jungle, green.
H. 6
H. 7 -
H. 8 -
H. 9
“J”
J. 1 -
J. 2 Jersey, blue
J. 5 Jersey, Navy blue, W.P.
J. 6 -
“L”
L. 1 Lanyard, blue
L. 3 Laces, Boot, black pairs.
L. 4 Lanyard, revolver, navy blue.
L. 5
“N”
N. 1
N. 2
N. 3 Numerals.-Alphabetical
N. 4 Numerals, 0-9.
N. 5
N. 6 Nets: Mosquito, Bar Type.
“O”
O. 1 Overalls, blue
“P”
P. 2 -
P. 3
P. 6 -
P. 7 Pants, Cotton, W.P.
“R”
R. 1 to R. 13 Ribbon medal.
R. 14
R. 15 to R. 41 Ribbon medal.
R. 42
R. 43 to R. 54 Ribbon medal.
“S”
S. 1 Shirts, white, WP. II.
S. 2
S. 3
S. 5 -
S. 6 Searge, blue.
S. 7 Shoes, black, W.P.
S. 8 Slings, rifle leather.
S. 9 -
S. 10 Socks, blue, women police.

420
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM
S. 11
S. 12
S. 14
S. 15
S. 16 Shirts, khaki, takron
S. 17 Shirts, white.
S. 18 Shirts, L/sleeve.
S. 19
S. 20
S. 21
S. 22
S. 23
“T”
T. 1
T. 4 Thongs, leather baton.
T. 5 -
T. 6 Trouser, K.D.
T. 7
“W”
W. 1 Whistle, police.
V. 1 “E” E. 1 E. 2 Belts, waist,
pattern 37.
V. 1
“E”
E. 1
E. 2 Belts, waist, pattern 37.
E. 3 Bottles, water, pattern 37.
E. 4
E. 5
E. 6 Carriers, w/bott.
E. 7
E. 8 Haversack, web pattern 37.
E. 9 Pockets for compasses.
E. 10 Pouches, ammn., web, pattern 37.
E. 11 Pouches, wep, pattern 37.
E. 12 Pouches, web pattern 37.
E. 13 Slings, web.
E. 14 Strap shoulder, h/sack, R, pattern 37.
E. 15 Strap shoulder, h/sack, L. pattern 37.
E. 16 Strap supporting packs, pattern 37.
E. 17 Belt, waist, web, pattern 37.
E. 18 Braces, attachment, pattern 44.
E. 19 Braces, attachment, pattern 44.
E. 20 Bottles, water, plastic
E. 21 Cases, binoculars.
E. 22 Cases, binoculars, web, pattern 44.
E. 23 Cases pistol, web, pattern 44.
E. 24 Carriers, w/bottles, pattern 44.
E. 25 Frogs, bayonet, pattern 44.
E. 26 Haversacks, officer, pattern 44.
E. 27 Haversacks, all ranks, pattern 44.
E.28 Mess tins.

421
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM
E. 29 Pouches, amm., pistol, pattern 44.
E. 30 Pouches, basic right, pattern 44.
E. 31 Pouches, basic left, pattern 44.
E. 32 Poncho, ground sheet.
E. 33 Pockets, compass, pattern 44.
E. 34 Straps, shoulder, right, pattern 44.
E. 35 Straps, shoulder, left, pattern 44.
E. 36 Sheaths, matchet.
E. 37 Matchets, pattern 44.
G. “B”
G. B1. Batteries charger, family.
G. B3. Binoculars, 7 x 50.
G. B4. Batons, Riot
G. B5 Batteries, U. 11 for Pye Loud

Hailers.
G. B6. Batteries, hunter torch.
G. B7. Barriers, crowd control.
G. B8. Bulbs, hunter torch.
G. “C”
G. C1. Car bells, electric.
G. C2.
G. “D”
G. D4. Dye, black
G. “F”
G. F1. First – aid boxes
G. F2. First-aid kit.
G. F3. Flannelette, 4 x 2.
G. “G”
G. G1.
G. G2.
G. “H”
G. H1. Handcuffs.
G. H2. Heelballs.
G. “I”
G. I1. Ink, fingerprint.
G. “J”
G. J1. Jerricans, petrol.
G. J2. Jerricans, water
G. “L”
G. L1. Lamp, inspection.
G. L2. Lamp, anglepoise.
G. “M”
G. M1 Matchets.
G. “O”
G. O1. Oil, rifle.
G. O2. Oil, rifle Young.
G. O3. Linseed.
G. “P”
G. P1. Pads, fingerprint.
G. P2. Paint marking, black.
G. P3 Paint marking white.

422
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM
G. P4. Pockets, craft, Roneo.
G.”R”
G. R1. Rollers, fingerprint.
G. “S”
G. S1. Stencil figures, and L.
G. S2. Sheets, ground OP.
G. S3. Shield, wicker.
G. S4 Snake, bite kit.
G. S5. Stamps, steel marking steel or wood 0-9.
G. S6. Stamps, marking textile copper 0-9.
G. S7. Stencil, Zinc plate 2” 0-9.
G. “T”
G. T1. Torches, beat.
G. T2. Torches, Hunger com.
G. T3. Thread, S/maker.
G. T4. Thread, white.
G. T5. Thread, khaki.
G. T6. Thread, black.
G. T7. Transhailers.
G. “W”
G. W1. Watches, stop.
“W”
W. 1 Ammunition, Blank 303.
W. 2 Ammunition, Ball 303.
W. 3 Ammunition, Blank 38.
W. 4 Ammunition, Ball 38.
W. 5 Ammunition, Ball 22.
W. 6 Ammunition, Ball 9M/M.
W. 7 Ammunition, Dummy 303.
W. 8 Ammunition, 12-bore.
W. 9 Ballastite, 303.
W. 10 Bayonets, No. 1
W. 11 Bayonets, No. 4
W. 12 Books, target patching: (1) Black (2) Grey (3) S
W. 13 Bottles, oil.
W. 14 Bull’s eyes: (1) Black (2) Sand.
W. 15 Brushes, cleaning 303.
W. 16 Brushes, cleaning 22.
W. 17 Brushes, cleaning 9M/M.
W. 18 Cords, pull-through, single.
Cords, pull-through double. W. 20 Gauge, wire. W. 21. Gauge, group
22
W. 20
W. 21. Gauge, grouping range 22.
W. 22 Gun, Greener, 12-bore.
W. 23. Gun, Sterling, 9M/M.
W. 24. Gun, riot 11/2”
W. 25. Magazines, sterling gun 9M/M.
W. 26. Pistol, signal 11/2”.
W. 27. Goggles, anti-gas.
W. 28 Respirator, anti-gas
W. 29 Revolver, 38 Standard.

423
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM
W. 30 Rifles No. 1 303.
W. 31 Rifles No. 4 303.
W. 32 Rifles No. 2 22.
W. 33 Rod, cleaning revolver 38.
W. 34 Rod, cleaning rifle 22.
W. 35 Scabbard, No. 1.
W. 36 Scabbard, No. 4.
W. 37 Shell L.R.
W. 38 Shell S.R.
W. 39 Smoke tear gas, 3 way.
W. 40 Smoke tear gas, No. 9.
W. 41 Smoke tear gas, T. 792 112/2”
W. 42 Target papers: (1) Black.
(2) Grey
(3) Sand.
W. 43 Weight, pull -through.
W. 44 Revolvers, 38 (Pocket S.B. only).
4/3025 Axes, Felling, Head.
4/3027 Axes pick.
2/1403 Beds, Camp.
2/1401 Bath and Wash Canvas.
2/1401 Bath and Wash stand, Enamel.
2/0065 Bags, Kit.
4/0581 Bulbs, Torches.
4/0582 Buttons, Bone (Brown).
2/0088 Batteries, torch.
Blanco, white.
Blanco, Khaki.
1/3025 Buckets, Sanitary.
3/0460 Buckets, G. 1.
2/0460 Brooms, Hand (Bass).
2/0464 Brooms, Soft.
4/2420 Bells, Bicycle.
5/0575 Balls, naphthalene.
2/0481 Brushes, Lavatory.
2/0538 Brushes, Scrubbing.
2/0500 Brushes, Whitewash.
2/0473 Brushes, Paint.
2/0118 Brooms, Bannister.
2/0004 Baize, Green.
2/0001 Clock, Wall.
2/1405 Clock Table.
2/0115 Chair Camp.
2/0124 Cloth, American.
2/0815 Cloth Hessian.
2/0915 Cups, Drinking (Mugs).
2/0108 Cabinet, steel (4-Drawer).
2/0111 Canvas, Green.
2/0114 Drill, MP. 11.
2/0121 Drill, KD.
5/0712 Drill, Dungaree, Blue.
3/0406 Dust Bins.

424
 P.G.O.No.171
P.G.O.No.171
CLASS OR ITEM AND NUMBER ITEM
4/2172 Extinguishers, Fire.
5/0746 Flit (4 gall. Tins).
4/0526 Globes, Electric (60 watt).
2/0706 Globes, Red.
2/0705 Globes Lamp, Hurricane.
4/2453 Globes, Lamp, Pressure.
4/3667 Grips, Handle.
5/0740 Handles, Mattock.
2/0546 Jerricans, petrol
4/3700 Lamps Hurricane.
7/0241 Polish, Silver.
7/0242 Polish, Black, Kiwi.
4/2461 Pedals, bicycle.
3/0695 Padlocks and Keys (Yale 2”).
4/3075 Pans, Latrine.
5/0586 Polish, Mansion.
2/1505 Cords, Sash for Flag.
5/0605 Soap. Blue.
5/0611 Soap, toilet.
4/3962 Shoves,
5/0750 Spray Guns for Flit.
4/2470
4/2487
4/2422
4/2462
4/2472 Saddles, Bicycle.
4/2406 Axle, Bicycle.
4/2486 Chain, Wheel, Bicycle.
2/0204 Tape, White ½”
2/0209 Thread, White.
2/0208 Thread, Khaki.
2/0207 Thread, Black.
2/0235 Towels, Hand.
4/0580 Torches.
2/0970 Typewriters.
4/2479 Tubes, 28 x 11/2 Bicycle.
4/2440 Tyres, 28 x 11/2 Bicycle.
4/4130 Tape, measuring.
2/1418 Tents, 7 x 6, European.
2/1425 Tents, 10 x 8, Porters.
2/1426 Tents, 15 x 10.
2/1420 Tents, 10 x 8, Officers
2/1414 Tables, Canvas, Table, camp.
5/0640 Vim

425
 P.G.O. No.172
STORES – UNIFORMS – ISSUE AND REPLACEMENT OF
Part 1 - Gazetted Officers and Inspectors

Issue on First Appointment

1. (a) Officers on first appointment to Gazetted Rank or to the Inspectorate in
the Force are entitled on application to the Quartermaster to a initial issue of uniform, in
accordance with the scale laid down in Appendix “A”.
(b) Gazetted Officers and Inspectors (Women) will similarly receive
appropriate articles of dress sufficient for Working and Undress Uniform as per
Appendix “C”.
2. Tailoring will be done by the Quartermaster upon submission of relative
measurements.
3. Gazetted Officers and Inspectors on transfer from other Forces will also be
entitled to the free initial issue at the scales laid down in Appendix “A” from the
Quartermaster.

Replacement of Uniform
4. Every Gazetted Officer and Inspector is required to maintain his uniform in
immaculate condition at all times.
5. All items of Working Dress and Undress Uniform (including peaked caps with
silver braiding and gorget patches) listed at appendix “B”, may be obtained from the
Quartermaster.
6. Officers may also obtain uniform, Mess Kit and other equipment from the
Quartermaster.
7. Raincoats of official pattern may only be obtained from the Quartermaster, no
other pattern may be worn in uniform.
8. Swords may be obtained on loan from each Regional Headquarters and from
Police Main Store in Dar es Salaam.
9. Gazetted Officers and Inspectors may make their own tailoring arrangements
under the approval of the Quartermaster and are responsible that their uniform pattern,
materials and equipment conform precisely to the specifications laid down in Police
General Orders and to the standard patterns held by the Quartermaster.

Part II
Rank & File
Scale of Issue
10. Members of the Rank & File will hold a free issue of uniform and equipment in
accordance with the scale laid down in Appendix “B”. The scale of cleaning materials to
be issued is laid down in Appendix “D”.

11. Possession of articles of kit in excess of the appropriate authorised scale is

forbidden.

Scale for Recruits at the Police Training School Comment [u123]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading
12. Recruits at the Police Training School will be equipped in the following manner:-
(a) on first arrival at the Police Training school, prior to squadding, a
reduced scale of part-worn clothing, if available, will be issued in accordance with
Appendix “B”, Column “J”.

426
 P.G.O. No.172
(b) as soon as Recruits are “squadded” and finally accepted for training, the
full scale, as laid down in column (d) of appendix “B” will be issued.
(c) at the end of three months’ training, a partial issue of new uniform will
be made, culminating in a full issue of new uniform to the scale laid down in column (d)
of Appendix “B” before the Recruit finally passes out of the Police Training School.

Note: Recruits under training will wear khaki hats

Adjustment to Kits of Personnel on Transfer Comment [u124]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading
13. O/C. Districts, Stations and Units are responsible that all members of the Rank &
File under their command are provided with the correct scale of uniform.

14. They will ensure that the kits of all personnel who are about to leave on transfer
or who have just arrived on transfer are checked and the following action taken:-
(a) All items not required in the formations to which they are transferred will be
withdrawn before departure and returned to Regional Headquarters Store.
(b) All items required in the formations to which they are transferred and not
already in their possession will be issued on arrival.
(c) A record of all such issues and withdrawals will be made by the officers
responsible for them in the personnel’s Kit Sheets (P.F. 31 (D)), in the accordance with
P.G.O. No. 167.
(d) Officers in charge Districts and Stations, will ensure that the kit of a personnel on
transfer is inspected and unserviceable articles exchanged before the personnel leaves the
unit.

Issue to Recruits not at the Police Training School Comment [u125]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading
15. Recruits enlisted for special duty who do not proceed at once for training to the
Training School will be issued with the appropriate full scale of uniform.

Method of Issue Comment [u126]: Reduce this space, align left.

Its subheading
16. Every member of the Rank & File is held responsible at all times for the good
order of his kit and for the immediate replacement of worn or damaged items.
Replacement will be effected by application via the O/C. station to the appropriate
indenting authority, in accordance with P.G.O. No. 171.

17. Indents will be sent in to the nearest authorised Store (vide P.G.O. No. 171) at
monthly intervals. Additional indents may only be submitted in cases of genuine urgency.
All indents for replacement items shall be accompanied by the items to be replaced or by
a written explanation if any item cannot be produced.

Marking of Kit Comment [u127]: Reduce this space, align left.

Its subheading
18. Kit on personal issue shall be marked in accordance with P.G.O. No. 167 and
shall be checked carefully at Formal Inspections.

Normal Life of Clothing and Equipment Comment [u128]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading
19. The normal life of clothing and equipment on personal issue is laid down
in column (C) of Appendix “C”. Items which wear out before the stated period will only
be exchanged without penalty if the holder can produce a reasonable explanation to

427
 P.G.O. No.172
account for the excessive wear. Replacement on payment may be ordered if any item is
damaged or worn out as a result of misuse or neglect.
Conservation of Part-worn Clothing and Equipment Comment [u129]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading
20. All serviceable items of uniform and equipment withdrawn from members, of the
Rank & File shall be conserved for re-issue to Recruits at the Training School, in
accordance with paragraph 12. The following action will, therefore, be taken by all
formations:-
(a) all surplus part-worn items of uniforms and equipment will be sent to the
nearest class “A” Store. Shorts, trousers and socks shall be properly laundered by the
holders before handing in;
(b) all Stores will check over all part-worn items and will send all
serviceable items at quarterly intervals to the quarter master. Unserviceable items will be Comment [u130]: Insert this text, its missing
boarded and destroyed or disposed of in such manner as may be laid down by
Commanding Officers;
(c) the Quartermaster will re-check all part-worn items received at Main
Store and will arrange for laundering before re-issue to the Police Training School.
Web Equipment Comment [u131]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading
21. Web Equipment 44 Patt. Will remain on station charge. Issues to individuals will
be withdrawn before the individual leaves the stations on posting or discharge.
Care of Equipment Comment [u132]: Reduce this space, align left.
Its subheading
22. Web equipment 44 Patt. Is waterproofed in its manufacture. It will not be
scrubbed or blancoed. Web equipment 37 Patt. can be washed but not scrubbed.
Clothing/Equipment Leave Comment [u133]: Reduce this space, align left.
23. No item of clothing or equipment will be taken on leave. Personnel proceeding Its subheading

on leave will hand all items of clothing and equipment into their respective station store.

APPENDIX “A”
(TO P.G.O. No. 172)
UNIFORMS: GAZETTED OFFICERS AND INSPECTORS (MALE)
Free Initial Issue: Scale of
ITEMS GAZETTED INSPECTORS
OFFICERS Comment [u134]: Insert properly. See attached
Badge, Cap 1 1 text

Badge, Shoulder titles 1 pair 1 pair

Badges: Stars 3 1-A/Insp. Or 2 for
Insp.

Badges: Collar, left and right 1 pair 1 pair

Belt, Sam Browne 1 1
Boots, Black 1 pair 1 pair
Buttons, C.P.S., Large 4 4
Buttons, C.P.S., Medium 6 6
Buttons, C.P.S., Small 6 6
Cap, peaked (up to and including A.S.P.) 1 1
Cane, Black Leather 1 1
Coat, Waterproof 1 1

428
 P.G.O. No.172
Takron, Khaki, Trouser/Tunic/Shirt 2 pairs 2 pairs
Lanyard, C.P.S. 1 1
Socks, Black 2 pairs 2 pairs
Shoes, Black 1 pair 1 pair
Shirt White 1 1
Tie, Rayon, Black 1 1
Whistle 1 1
Gloves, white 1pair 1 pair
APPENDIX “B”
(TO P.G.O. No. 172)
Remarks

Women Police

Training P.T.S.
Traffic Police
N.C.O.s&PC

Recruits First
Item

C.I.D. Det.
Boat Crew
Life Years

Comment [u135]: DCP; Column (F). is it FFU

and STPU. Old PGO shows that. Plse confirm
Band

P.C.s
FFU

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H) (I) (J) (K)
Armbands, Blue, S.C. 2 - - - - - -
Batons and thongs 5 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1
Blankets G.S. One extra held
at cold Stns.
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
For issue in
cold weather.
Boots, askari 1 2 - 2 2 2 - 1 1
Bags, Kit 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Badges, Shoulder titles
12 1 - 1 1 1 - 1 -
(prs).
Badges cap 12 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1
Badges, Marksman Where
12 - - - - - - - - applicable 1
badge.
Badges, E/S. plated Where
12 - - - - - - - - applicable 1
badge.
Badges, S/Major S/M. 1 one
12 - - - - - - - - where
applicable.
Badges, Musician 12 - - 2 - - - - -
Badges, Bugler Where
12 - - - - - - - -
applicabe 1 pr.
Badges, shoulder WP.
- - - - - 1 - -
(prs.) 10
Badges, S.C. 12 - - - - - -
Beret, Blue Dog Handlers:
1 - - - - - 1 - -
2 each.
Brooches, medal 1 bar
- - - - - - -
3
Brooches, medal 2 bar 3 - - - - - - - -
Brooches, medal 3 bar 3 - - - - - - - -
Brooches, medal 4 bar 2 each where
3 - - - - - - - -
applicable.

429
 P.G.O. No.172
Remarks

Women Police

Training P.T.S.
Traffic Police
N.C.O.s&PC

Recruits First
Item

C.I.D. Det.
Boat Crew
Life Years
Comment [u135]: DCP; Column (F). is it FFU
and STPU. Old PGO shows that. Plse confirm

Band

P.C.s
FFU
Brooches, medal 5 bar 3 - - - - - - - -
Brushes, Button 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Brushes, Boots 1 - 2 2 2 2 2 1
Buttons, W.M. askari 12 7 7 7 7 8 7 -
Braid, Red FFU
person
1 - - - - - -
nel Comment [u136]: Insert 10” in the fifth column
only
Bags, Shoulder Navy blue 10 - - - - - -
Blouse, white W.P. S/M. one
1 - - - 3 - - whereapplicabl
e
Badges, S/Major II 12 - - - - - - - -
Shirts, white, drill 2 pairs issued
1 - - - -3 - - - - to S/Sgt and
SM
Trousers, Khaki Takron. 1 2 - 2 2 - - - -
Tunic, P.T. Women Police 1 - - - - - 1 - -
Trousers , white, Takron
1 - 2 - - 2 - - -
(prs)
Whistle, Police 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Vest, white, P.T. Cadets 1 - - - - - - - -
Nets, Mosquito *For Safari
5 - - - 1* - - - -
use only.
Belts, Waist, Web, 37 5 1 1 - 1 - - - - For daily use.
Bottles, water enamel, 37 5 1 - 1 - - - - -
Braces, Left, 37 5 1 - - - - - - -
Braces, Right, 37 5 1 - - - - - - -
Carriers, water Bottles, 37 5 1 - - - - - - -
Haversack, 37 5 1 - - - - - - -
Slings, Rifle 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Belts, Waist, Web, 44 5 - 1 - 1 - - - -
Braces, Attachment, 44 Officers serving
with FFU. Will
receive on loan
during period of
5 - - - 1 - - - - service with FFU.
44 Web
Equipment
contained in this
schedule.
Braces, Sets, 44 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Bottles, Water Alum.44 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Carriers, Water Bottle, 44 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Frogs, Bayonet, 44 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Haversack, Officers, 44 5 - - - 1 - - - -

430
 P.G.O. No.172
Remarks

Women Police

Training P.T.S.
Traffic Police
N.C.O.s&PC

Recruits First
Item

C.I.D. Det.
Boat Crew
Life Years
Comment [u135]: DCP; Column (F). is it FFU
and STPU. Old PGO shows that. Plse confirm

Band

P.C.s
FFU
Haversack, All ranks, 44 5 - - - 2 - - - -
Mess, Tin 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Pouches, Ammn. Pistol,
5 - - - 1 - - - -
44
Pouches, Basic Right, 44 5 - - 1 1 - - - -
Pouches, Basic Left, 44 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Poncho Cape/G. sheet 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Straps, Shoulder Right, 44 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Straps, shoulder Left, 44 5 - - - 1 - - - -
Sheaths, Matches 5 - - - 1 - - - -

APPENDIX “C”
To P.G.O. No. 172
UNIFORMS – GAZETTED OFFICER AND INSPECTORS (FEMALE)
Free Initial Issues: Scale of
ITEMS QUANTITY
Gazetted Inspectors
Officers
Badges, Cap 1 1

Badges, Shoulder 1 pair 1 pair

Badges, Stars 3 1-A/Insp.
2-Insp.
Badges, Collar, left and right 1 pair 1 pair
Badges, Shoulder, W.P. 1 1
Belts, Sam Browne 1 1
Buttons, C.P.S., Large 4 4
Buttons, C.P.S., Medium 6 6
Buttons, C.P.S., Small 6 6
Buttons, Inspectors, Large - -
Buttons, Inspectors, Medium - -
Blouses, white 3 3
Brooch, Medal As required As required
Brassiere, white 3 3
Caps, Women Police 1 1
Cane, black, leather 1 1
Coats, Waterproof 1 1
Lanyards, C.P.S. 1 1
Ribbons, Medal as required 3 per medal 3 per medal
Socks, black 4 pairs 4 pairs
Socks, white 4 pairs 4 pairs
Shoes, black 3 pairs 3 pairs
Shirts, white, S/Sleeve 2 pairs 2 pairs
Skirt, blue Takron 3 3

431
 P.G.O. No.172
ITEMS QUANTITY
Gazetted Inspectors
Officers
Tie, black 1 1
Tunic, blue, Linen 1 1
Bags, shoulder navy blue 1 1
Beret, blue 1 1
Shirts, white, L/Sleeve 1 1
Satin 5 yards 5 yards

432
 P.G.O. No.172
APPENDIX “D”
(To P.G.O. No. 172)

CLEANING MATERIALS – SCALE OF ISSUE

ALL Ranks C.I.D.
Soap 2 bars. Per month 2 bars Per month
Kiwi 1 tin per month 1 tin per month

Scale of issue of consumable items to stations:

Harpic: 1 tin per water toilet per 2 months.

Soap toilet: 2 tablets per wash basin per month.
Vim: 1 tin per station per month.
Polish Mansion: 2 tins per month – Regional HQ.
1 tin per month – “A” Stations
1 tin per 2 months – “B” Stations
1 tin per month – Traffic, Dar es Salaam.

Scale of issue of general consumable stores:

Kerosine: 3 pints per Hurricane lamp in use per week.

5 pints per pressure lamp in use per week.
Wick: 2 inches per Hurricane Lamp in use per week.
Rifle Oil: 4 gallons per 50 rifles per year.
Flannellette: 3 yards per rifle per six months.
Disinfectant, D.D.T. Strict control by Station Commanders

433
 P.G.O. No. 173
DRESS REGULATIONS
Part I
GAZETTED OFFICERS
1.
Ceremonial Dress Mess Dress:
Badgers, Gorget or collar Boots-Wellington
Badges of Rank
Belt-Sword. Cummerbund-dark blue
Boots-Wellington. Jacket – Mess.
Cap – Peaked Miniature Medals and
Gloves – White Decorations.
Medals and Decorations. Miniature Badges of rank on
Overalls. blue epaulettes
Sash – Blue. Overalls.
Spurs. Shirt – soft white with pearl

Undress: buttons and turn-down collar

Sword and Scabbard – Plated Spurs (Superintendents and above).
Sword Knot – Silver. Tie-Black Bow
Tunic – Full Dress
.
No. 1 Dress Undress
Badges, Gorget or collar As for No.1 Dress except that tunic
Badgers of Rank. takron khaki will replace takron blue,
Belt –Sam Browne and Frog (if sword shoes and socks (black), will replace
ordered). boots.
Boots – black .
Cane – Officers’ pattern (if sword not
ordered) Comment [u137]: Reduce this space. It a
continuation
Working Dress:
Lanyard and whistle Badgers – Gorget.
Medal ribbons (or medals if ordered) Belt Sam Browne
Shirt – Officers white Cane – Officers’ pattern
Shoulder titles (Assistant Commissioner and Cap peaked
below)
Sword – scabbard (black) and knot (if Lanyard and whistle
ordered)
Tie – black Medal ribbons
Tunic – blue takron Shoes –black
Shoulder title (Assistant
Commissioner and below)

Notes
(1) Badges and buttons will be worn as set out in Part II of this Order.
(2) On patrols, field operation or as ordered, black boots, will be worn as Working
Dress.
(3) Hats, double terrai, will be worn by FFU Units only.
(4) Helmet – Cromwell, will be worn in times of civil disturbance..

434
 P.G.O. No. 173
(5) Jerseys (jungle green) and trousers (khaki), may be worn during cold weather.
(6) Mackintosh, officers pattern, may be worn as required.
(7) Field force officers will wear web belts, black, as Working Dress and web
anklets, black, with trousers.

FFU officers will wear red shoulder tapes under the shoulder titles.

Gazetted Officers – Female

Ceremonial Dress Mess Dress:

Badgers, Gorget or collar Boots-Wellington
Badges of Rank
Belt-Sword. Cummerbund-dark blue
Shoes – black Jacket – Mess.
Cap – Peaked – Police- woman’s Miniature Medals and
Gloves – White Decorations.
Medals and Decorations. Miniature Badges of rank on
Overalls. blue epaulettes
Sash – Blue. Overalls.
Spurs. Shirt – soft white with pearl
Skirt – Blue Linen
Undress: buttons and turn-down collar
Sword and Scabbard – Plated Spurs (Superintendents and above).
Sword Knot – Silver. Tie-Black Bow
Full Dress – Blue Linen
.
No. 1 Dress Undress
Badges, Gorget or collar As for No.1 Dress.
Badgers of Rank. .
Belt –Sam Browne and Frog (if sword
ordered).
Boots – black
Cane – Officers’ pattern (if sword not ordered)
Cap – peaked – Police Woman’s Working Dress:
Lanyard and whistle Badges – Gorget.
Medal ribbons (or medals if ordered) Belt Sam Browne
Blouse – white
Shirt – Officers white Cane – Officers’ pattern
Shoulder tittles (Assistant Commissioner and Cap peaked – Policewoman’s
below)
Sword – scabbard (black) and knot (if ordered) Lanyard and whistle
Tie – black Medal ribbons
Tunic – blue linen Shoes –black
Shoulder title (Assistant
Commissioner and below)
Skirt – blue
Stockings – or socks, ankle –
blue
(1) Handbag, blue, will be carried as required.

435
 P.G.O. No. 173
(2) Takron Khaki shirt with blue beret may be worn on safari.

Inspectors
Mess Dress
As for Gazetted Officers, except that:
(1) Blue trousers, dinner suit pattern, and black shoes and socks will be worn.
(2) Normal size badges of rank (not miniatures) will be worn.

No. 1 Dress:
As for Gazetted Officers, except that:-
(1) Shirts and ties, blue linen will be worn
(2) Cane, Officer’s pattern, will be carried.

Working Dress
(1) As for Gazetted Officers, except that:
(2) Cane, Officers’s pattern, will be carried.

Notes
(1) The variation in dress for Gazetted Officers set out in the Notes of paragraph 1
will apply, mutatis mutandis, to the Inspectorate.
(2) Inspectors serving in the Band will wear Band Ceremonial Dress with peaked
cap.

Inspectors – Female
As for Gazetted Officers – Female.

Dress – Rank & File

Badges of rank Medal ribbons (or medals, if ordered)

Badges – other Numerals (Sergeant and below)
Belt Takron khaki shirt and trousers
Cap – peaked – Policewoman Shoulder titles
Boots – black
Lanyard and whistle

Notes

(1) Staff-Sergeants will wear Sam Browne belts. Comment [u138]: Adjust numbering
(3) Staff-Sergeant and Sergeant Major may wear shoes (black).
(4) FFU personnel will wear web belts except on ceremonial parades.
(5) FFU personnel will wear red shoulder tapes under the shoulder titles
(6) Blue jerseys will be worn as ordered
(7) Greatcoats may be worn as required.
(8) Short baton and frog will be worn as required.
(9) Hats, double terrain, will be worn by FFU only.
(10) Helmet, Cromwell, will be worn in times of civil disturbance.
(11) Berets will be worn at training establishments as ordered.
(12) Overalls, blue, issued to drivers, dog handlers and tradesmen will be worn only
on barrack duties.

436
 P.G.O. No. 173

Dress – Rank & File – Female

Working Dress

Badges of Rank on blue epaulettes Numerals

Badges – other Shoes – black
Blouse – white – with collar Shoulder titles
Caps –peaked – Policewoman’s Skirt – blue
Lanyard and whistle Socks – blue – ankle

Notes

(1) White shorts with collar and black ties will be worn for No. 1 Dress.
(2) Khaki shirt with blue beret may be worn on safari.
(3) Handbag, blue, will be carried as required.
(4) Blue jerseys will be worn as ordered.
(5) Mackintosh and Greatcoat may be worn as required.

Traffic Branch - Rank & File

Badges of Rank Medal ribbons ( or medals if ordered)

Badges – Other.
Belt – O.R. pattern. Numerals – Sergeant and below.
Boots – black. Shirt – white
Cap – peaked with white cover. Shirt – Shoulder titles
White
Lanyard and whistle Trousers – white

Notes
The variation in dress for Rank & File set out in the Notes to paragraph 5 will apply,
mutatis mutandis, to Traffic Branch personnel, except that:-

(1) Mackintoshes and trousers will be white in colour.

(2) White crash helmets and black leather leggings will be worn by motor cyclists.

Marine Unit
As for Rank & File, except when employed on marine duties:

Working Dress (Boat Duty)

Badges of rank Shirt – white
Badges- other Shoes – white canvas
Belt Trousers – white
Hat – marine Shoulder titles
Lanyard and whistle Socks – white
Numerals

Notes

437
 P.G.O. No. 173
The variations in dress for Rank & File set out in the Notes to paragraph 5 will apply,
mutatis mutandis, to Marine Division personnel.

Bandsmen
Ceremonial Dress

Badges of Rank Medal ribbons (or medals if ordered).

Badges- Bandsmen. Pouch- black, card.
Belt- blue sash Shoulder titles.
Boots- black. Trousers- blue with red stripe.
Cap - blue peak (white top) Tunic- white.
Dress - Cords Bugler. Wings- Bandsmen.

Notes

The variations in dress for Rank & File set out in the Notes to paragraph 5 will apply,
mutatis mutandis, to Bandsmen.

Part II

Uniform, equipment and accessories shall be in accordance with the specifications set out
in this Order.

Badges of Rank

Inspector General National Emblem surrounded by a

wreath with star above and crossing
swords below
Commissioner National Emblem surrounded by a
wreath with torch surrounded by a
wreath above with one star above
Deputy Commissioner National Emblem surrounded by a
wreath with torch surrounded by a
wreath above
Senior Assistant Commissioner National Emblem surrounded by a
wreath with one star above
Assistant Commissioner National Emblem surrounded by a
wreath
Senior Superintendent Torch surrounded by a wreath with one
star below
Superintendent Torch surrounded by a wreath
Assistant Superintendent Three Stars
Inspector Two Stars
Assistant Inspector One Star
Probationary Assistant Inspector One Star
Sergeant-Major Crossing Swords Surrounded by
wreath
Staff Sergeant Three chevrons, white metal/cloth

438
 P.G.O. No. 173
with a torch surrounded by a wreath
above
Sergeant Three chevrons, white metal/cloth
Corporal Two chevrons, white metal/cloth

Note: Badges of rank, except chevrons and other metal badges will be worn on a navy
blue cloth background cut to the shape of the badge except where worn on blue
epaulettes.
Crown- St. Edward’s pattern .
Star, Gazetted Officer – Bath Star pattern. Comment [u139]: Align thesetwo lines to your
left.

Force Badges will be worn:- Comment [u140]: Align left. See format of text
(a) on the peaked cap – medium size;
(b) on the hat, double terrai – medium size;
(c) on the beret – medium size;
(d) on the turban – medium size;
(e) on the riot helmet – medium size;
(f) on the white crash helmet – medium size;
(g) on the mess dress lapel – small size;
(h) on the collar of No. 1 Dress tunic – small size (Gazetted Officers only).

Badges – Other Comment [u141]: CENTRE THIS

Force Numerals. As per sealed pattern, in white metal. Comment [u142]: Plse INSERT FULL STOP
Literacy Badge – English White metal “E” of sealed pattern. AT END OF EACH SENTENCE!

Marksman’s Badge Crossed rifles in white metal of sealed pattern.

Bugler’s Badge White metal bugle of sealed pattern.
Bandsman’s Badge White metal Bandsman’s Badge of sealed pattern.
Marine Hat cap Band Black ribbon embroidered “Tanzania Police” of sealed
pattern. Comment [u143]: TEXT TO BE LIKE THIS
Epaulettes – Band Dark blue felt embroidered with white piping, of sealed ONE. SECOND PROOF SHOWS DIFFERENT
FORMAT!!
pattern
Epaulettes – Mess Kit – Officers Dark blue barathea with miniature button of sealed pattern
Epaulettes – Women Police Dark blue, of sealed pattern
Shoulder Tape – Field Force Red tape encircling shoulder strap under shoulder titles. To be
worn by members of Field Force only, with all dress except
No. 1 Comment [u144]: Note; some deleted words
Shoulder tape Light blue tape worn as by Field Force
Shoulder Tape – Inspector White tape worn as by Field Force on all dress

Belt, Bandsman
Blue sash to Force pattern.

Belt, O.R.’s pattern

Black leather, nickel plated furnishings; completed with sword front in the case of
Gazetted Officers when carrying sword.

. Belt, Sam Browne

Black leather, nickel plated furnishings, completed with sword frog in the case of
Gazetted Officers when carrying sword.

439
 P.G.O. No. 173

Belt, Sword, GO: Ceremonial Dress

Dark blue webbing 1¾” wide with black Morocco leather slings 1” wide with buckles
and swivels chromium plated, or nickel silver.

Berets
Blue, sealed pattern.

Boots
Balmoral front, black lace with plain toe-cap.

Boots, Wellington
Half Wellington boots - black leather or box calf.

Buttons
Tanzania Police Force of sealed pattern in three sizes – Large, Medium and Small.

Cane, G.O. pattern

Black leather with carrying thong; of sealed pattern.

Cap Ornaments

Inspector General Two rows of oak leaf silver

lace on peak
Commissioner and Deputy Two rows of oak leaf silver
Commissioner lace on peak
Senior Assistant Commissioner One row of oak leaf silver
and Assistant Commissioners lace on peak
Senior Superintendents and One row 3/8” silver
Superintendents embroidery edged with
silver cord on peak

Cap, peaked
Universal pattern dark blue cloth with hinged spring in front, chin strap of black patent
leather ⅜” wide affixed with small buttons; Cap band of plain black mohair, except for
the ranks of Superintendent and above who will wear black oak leaf bands. The peak will
be plain black patent leather, except for officers of the rank of Superintendent and above.
Force badge (medium size) worn in front, bottom of badge just above level of chinstrap.

Dress cords, Buglers

As per standard pattern.

Gloves
White string.

Gorgets
(a) Inspector General. Dark blue serge 1½” long, pointed Comment [u145]: Note position of text. Second
and Commissioner at top with one vertical roll of three proof does not show numbers eg ¼ etc. plse insert

silver embroidered oak leaves, small

silver button ¾” from point of patch.
(b) Deputy Commissioner. As for commissioner but with silver

440
 P.G.O. No. 173
ornament of twisted ½” from point
of patch.
(c) Senior Assistant
Commissioner and Assistant
Commissioners. As for Commissioner with one Comment [u146]: Note position of text
Vertical row of silver tracing braid.

Greatcoat Comment [u147]: Remove number

Blue, sealed pattern.

Hats Comment [u148]: Remove number

Hat, Double Terrai
Khaki, with blue puggaree, sealed pattern.

Hat, marine
Blue , sealed pattern, worn with white cover.

Hat, WP
Blue, sealed pattern

Helmets Comment [u149]: Remove number

Helmet, Crash
White, sealed pattern.

Helmet, Cromwell
Sealed pattern. Grey plastic material.

Jersey, Blue Comment [u150]: Remove number

All wool, crew neck, long sleeves as per standard pattern.

Tunic, Khaki Comment [u151]: Remove number

Takron Khaki: Single-breasted fastening with four large buttons centre front; seam centre
back with vent: two patch breast pockets with centre back flaps and two lower pockets 9”
deep, 8” wide at top and 10½” wide at bottom: straight pocket flaps 3¼” deep: all button
pockets fastened with medium size buttons: pointed cuffs 6” deep at points and 3” deep at
seams, slit and fastened with three small buttons; eyelets to hold Force collar badge.
Fitted shoulder straps fastened with two small buttons.

Web Equipment Comment [u152]: Remove number

1937 pattern. Belts, rifle sings, bayonet frogs and anklets will be dyed black. 1944 pattern
will not be dyed black.
Women Police Comment [u153]: Centre this, remove number
(a) Beret
Blue: standard pattern.

(b) Blouse
Open neck, short sleeves, single breasted with four buttons fastening. Two breast
pockets with double centre pleat and centre pointed flaps with centre button and corner
press-stud fastenings. (Gazetted Officers and Inspectors heavy quality white poplin:
Other Ranks white drill).

441
 P.G.O. No. 173
[c] Cap, peaked
Navy blue felt with Force badge medium size.

(d) Greatcoat
Light weight navy blue melton cloth double breasted hall belt, back inverted pleat.

(e) Handbag
Blue, standard pattern.

(f) Gym Tunic

Blue cotton, sleeveless Square neck, shaped to waist with flared skirt to reach 2”
above end of knee Worn without belt.

(g) Jersey
Navy blue wool crew neck, long sleeves.

(h) Mackintosh
Navy blue single texture, shower – proof gaberding, single bleasted, raglan
sleeves, belted. Lined with navy blue cotton. To reach 2” below skirt hem.

(i) Shirt
White poplin, long sleeved with semi-still collar worn with black tie
White short-sleeved with soft collar, to be worn with jersey.
Khaki, short-sleeved with soft collar for safari wear.

(j) Shoes
Black lace, Oxford front, plain toe-cap.

(k) Skirt
Navy blue with side zip fastening. Straight style with inverted pleat and front and
rear. inserted pockets at either side of centre front, openings to be parallel with
skirt waistband. Length ¼ way from knee to ankle. Comment [u154]: Second proof shows /.
Working dress navy blue linen, six gores with slight fullness. Single patch pocket Remove it

right front opening parallel with skirt band.

Khaki for safari, similar pattern to (b) above.

(l) Socks
Navy blue ankle.

(m) Tunic
Navy blue drill. Single-breasted, fastening with four large buttons centre front.
Seam centre back with vent. Two patch breast pockets with centre back flaps and
two lower pockets with straight pocket flaps; all button pockets fastening with
medium size buttons. Pointed cuffs 5” deep at point and ½” deep at seams, slit
and fastened with three small buttons. Eyelets to hold force collar badges. Fitted
shoulder straps fastening with small buttons.

442
 SECTION VIII

COMMUNICATIONS AND FORCE TRANSPORT

Nos. 191 – 210

P.G.O. Title

191. Radio – Installation of

192. Signals – General Procedure

193. Signals – ‘Immediate Action’ Radio Messages – ‘P’ System

Signals – Radio Equipment – Care and Attention
194.

195. Telephone
Transport-Accidents to Police Vehicles
196.

197. Force Transport-Control and Use of

198. Transport Motor - Drivers Duties

199. Transport Motor- Maintenance of

200.

201.

202.

203.

204.

205.

206.

207.

208.

209.

210.

441
 P.G.O.No.191
RADIO – INSTALLATION OF
1 Police radio transmitters will not be installed or removed from one Station to
another without the authority of the Chief Signals Officer.

2. The Chief Signals Officer is responsible to the Inspector General for the installation
of all police radio equipment. He is authorised by the Inspector General to decide all
matters connected with the siting of sets, aerials, generators, etc., after prior
consultation with Commanding Officers, particularly on questions of security. In the
event of disagreement, both the Chief Signals Officer and the Regional Commander
concerned shall refer the matter to the Inspector General for a final decision. Under
no circumstances may the Chief Signals Officer’s installation instruction be changed
or modified in any way without prior reference to the Inspector General.

3. All requests for the installation of new equipment, or for the transfer of existing
equipment, shall be submitted through Commanding Officers to Police
Headquarters.

442
 P.G.O.No.192
SIGNALS – GENERAL PROCEDURE

1. The working of radio stations is governed by international agreement. These

instructions are laid down to ensure that the police radio system operates efficiently
and in compliance with international practice.

2. O/C. Stations will be held responsible for the efficient working of their radio
stations and will ensure that the greatest care is taken of all signals equipment. They
will report failures or pending failures immediately to the nearest Signals Officer or
Engineer.

3. All police officers will make themselves fully conversant with the simple procedure
for radio telephony set out in Appendix “A”. As a general rule qualified Signallers
will only be posted to Stations using Wireless Telegraphy.

4. O/C. Stations and Units will familiarise themselves with the procedure for keeping
plant in efficient running order. Regional or other Signals Branch personnel will
assist. Failure to carry out normal maintenance will inevitably lead to a breakdown
of local communications and will entail serious consequences for those responsible.

5. O/C. Stations and Units will be responsible for seeing that signal records and returns
are properly maintained as laid down in paragraphs 20 to 24.

6. Speedy and efficient handling of messages is essential during transmission and

unnecessary working time will be avoided. Personnel will remember that there is
secrecy when using the H/F system and that, messages may not be overheard by
casual radio listeners. They are also reminded that signals from H/F radio telephone
stations can be received far a field by stations well outside the Territory.

7. Personnel using radio stations are prohibited from: -

(a) discussion of personal affairs;

(b) discussion of other persons’ private affairs;

(c) the transmission of private messages;

(d) the use of indecent, offensive or abusive language;

(e) the exchange of any unnecessary signals or comments;

(f) communication with stations outside the Force network unless authorised by
Force Headquarters or in connection with an emergency.

Contravention of any of the above is in direct conflict with the terms of the licence under
which the radio station is permitted to work.

8. The only form of message permitted will be in the approved form (see paragraph 10)
and will relate to official business only.

9. The use of the Force Wireless System by Government Departments will be limited to
those messages authorised by the respective Commanding Officer from time to time.
Private messages can only be accepted in emergency when police or medical help is
needed.

443
 P.G.O.No.192
Form of Messages

10. All messages sent or received are to be recorded on PF. 105. No other form will
be used. Messages will be typed or printed in block letters by hand. The
minimum number of words is to be used in each signal in order to reduce
transmission time. Brevity without loss of intelligence is essential. Messages will
normally be written in Swahili but where necessity arises, English may be used.
11. The following addresses will be used on the Force network: -

Office Telegraphic Addresses

Swahili English

The Inspector General Dar es Salaam MKUUPOLISI IGP

Commissioner of Police Zanzibar POLISI ZANZIBAR COMZNZ

Regional Commanders POLISI[MKOA] RPC

Township, District and Other Stations POLISI[WILAYA] POLICE

Police Training School, Moshi CCPMOSHI DEPOLICE

Commanding Officer, Field Force Unit GHASIAKUU FFUHQ

Field Force Unit Unit GHASIA[MKOA] FFU

Director, Criminal Investigation Unit UPELEKUU CIDCOM

Regional C.I.D. UPELE[MKOA] CIDREG

District C.I.D. UPELE[ WILAYA] CRIME

Forensic Bureau UPELEKUU CIDCRO

TAZARA Police POLISITAZARA TAZARAPOL

Stock Theft Prevention Unit Arusha MSAKOKUU STPU

Main Stores, Dar es Salaam GHALAKUU STORES

Signals H.Q., Dar es Salaam SIMUKUU SIGCOM

Signals Depot, Dar es Salaam SIMUDEPOTDSM SIGDEP

Regional and District Signals SIMU[MKOA/WILAY SIGPOL

A]

Traffic Police Head Quarters TRAFFICKUU TRAFFICHQ

TRC Police POLISIRELI RAILPOL

444
 P.G.O.No.192
Central Arms Registry UPELKUU CIDHQ

Police College, Dar es Salaam POLISICHUODSM POLCOLL

Police Medical Unit AFYAKUU MEDHQ

Police Marine Unit WANAMAJIKUU MARINEHQ

Dog and Horse Unit MBWAFARASIKUU DHHQ

Air Wing Unit POLISIANGA POLAIRWING

Airports Unit POLVNDEGE APHQ

12. The originator will enter the message priority and will sign the form giving date
and time in the space provided at the foot of the message and the office of origin.
The sender will enter message transmission check number, words, date and time of
handing in. The sender will also enter the time and date sent in the appropriate
space at the foot of the message, together with his initials when the message is
cleared.

13. Message Priorities are: -

Normal

All signals are to be marked with this priority when of routine importance only.
These will be transmitted as and when possible and are intended for delivery
during office hours only. The priority indicator letter “N” will be inserted on the
message form. Normal signals requiring immediate action will conclude with the
words “treat as urgent”.

Immediate

This priority is only to be given to messages requiring immediate action and

delivery at all hours where this is possible. It will be confined to urgent police
matters; e.g., first warning messages and matters on which urgent action must be
taken within 24 hours. Immediate signals on administrative matters may only be
initiated by Commanding Officer. Such signals take precedence over “NORMAL”
signals. The priority indicator “IMM” will be inserted on the message form.

Emergency

These signals take priority over all other messages and are for delivery before any
other messages by whatever means are available. All circuits will be cleared
immediately it is known that emergency traffic is pending and until transmission is
completed. Such messages will deal only with disasters, air or rail crashes, civil
disturbance and other major incidents. All such messages will be addressed or
repeated to Inspector General. All officers are authorised to use this prefix but may
be called upon to justify their action. The priority indicator is “EMG”.

14. (a) The sender of a message will transmit the following in sequence in respect
of all messages: -

445
 P.G.O.No.192
Priority.

Office of origin.

Message Number.

Words.

Date.

Time handed in.

Service Instructions (if any).

To.

The Text.

From

(b) This procedure will also be followed for Radio – Telephony messages and a
specimen message is given hereunder: -

Spoken Explanation

(a) Normal Priority prefix “N”

(b) Tabora Office of origin

(c) One zero Message Number

(d) Words three six Number of words in address,

text and signature

(e) Date one five Date – 15th

(f) Time zero nine three five Time of handing in 0935

(g) Route via Victor Two zero Service instruction

(h) Break Spoken as quoted

(i) Compolice Dar es Salaam Addressee

(j) Break Spoken as quoted

(k) Tango alpha brave oblique one nine confidential Text

papers air dispatched meet

(l) Break Spoken as quoted

(m) Provcom From

446
 P.G.O.No.192
The above, as copied on the message form would appear: -
N TABORA 10 36 15 0935 ROUTE VIA V20=
TO COMPOLICE DAR ES SALAAM = TAB/19 CONFIDENTIAL
PAPERS AIR DESPATCHED MEET = PROVCOM

15. Received messages will record all the information transmitted and will be
completed by the receiver entering the time and date of receipt with his initials at
the foot of the message form.

Numbering

16. Stations other than Control stations will adopt a simple form of check numbering.
OUT messages will carry a daily number series, commencing with No. 1 and rising
in sequence. This number will be inserted on the message form by the sending
officer at the radio. Received messages will carry only the check number as
transmitted to the receiving station. Control stations and main centres carrying
regular operating staff will use the normal international numbering procedure.

All Station Signals

17 “All Station Signals” will only be dispatched when there is genuine need for rapid
circulation of stolen property, descriptions, etc.

Immediate Action Radio Messages “P” System

18. Emergency circulation of Stations in connection with the fresh pursuit of wanted
criminals will be carried out in accordance with P.G.O. No. 193.

Wireless Telegraph Procedure

19. Telegraph signallers will follow these instructions, as applicable, in addition to

those instructions given in Part III of the Police Manual of Radio Communication
Procedure for the working of wireless stations.

Records and returns

20. Messages – Copies of both inward and outward messages (P.F. 105) will be
retained on separate files at the signals station. Two copies of inward messages
will normally be made. The original will be delivered to the addressee and the
carbon copy filed on the received message file. In the case of outward messages,
the original copy handed in for transmission will be retained.

Log Book

21. Every radio station will maintain a radio log book (PF. 69) into which brief
particulars of all workings and of all messages handled are recorded, including any
other matters of radio importance.

Signals Registers

22. Signals Registers will be maintained by all Control radio stations and certain other
stations carrying considerable traffic to enable the rapid checking and tracing of

447
 P.G.O.No.192
messages. All messages IN and OUT will be recorded in the Register. PF. 201 will
be used for OUT messages and PF. 202 for IN messages. Spaces are provided for
the message number, time sent or received and station to or from.

Engine and Battery Log Sheet

23. Details of hours of running, fuel, oil and distilled water consumption will be
recorded daily on PF. 203, in duplicate. Copies will be submitted each month to
Regional or Signals Headquarters as instructed.

Radio Message Traffic Returns

24. A monthly return of all traffic will be prepared at every radio station giving the
total of “IN”, “OUT” and “THROUGH” messages handled in telegram form by
radiotelegraphy or radiotelephony on either H/F or VHF systems

25. The return shall be prepared in duplicate by the officer i/c the radio station who
will forward the original copy to the Regional Signals Officer, or, where there is no
Signals Officer, to the Regional Commander. Where it is more convenient, the
return may be signalled. Copies of returns are to be retained in the radio station
file.

26 Regional Signals Officers will submit a monthly return by post to the Chief
Signals Officer of all traffic handled by each station within their Regions. Such
returns should be received at Police Headquarters not later than seven days after
the end of the month to which they refer.

27. Regional Returns should be compiled in the manner indicated on the pro forma
below: -

POLICE SIGNALS TRAFFIC RETURN

..................................... Region for ............................... 20 ........

Station H/F or Messages Messages Messages Total

VHF “In” “Out” “Through”

Security Classified Signals/Telegrams

28. All signals or telegrams which contain security-classified information must be sent
in cipher or code in accordance with current security instructions. The originator is
personally responsible that the text of the signal/telegram is encrypted or encoded
before despatch to the transmitting office.

29. Every encrypted or encoded message shall be prefixed by the letter “X” followed
by the abbreviation authorised for the Despatching Headquarters as laid down by
P.G.O. 13 e.g., “XTHQ = R.P.C. Tanga, and this prefix should be followed by the
serial number of the message.

30. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to ensure that messages are encrypted/
encoded accurately and sent without delay. Formal acknowledgement shall be sent
immediately in clear by signal/telegram after the receipt and correct decoding of
every encrypted/encoded message.

448
 P.G.O.No.192
31. Encrypted and encoded messages shall normally be dispatched over the Police
Radio Network, but may be sent through the post office or Cable and Wireless
Limited if transmission by Police Radio is not possible.

32. Originators and recipients of encoded/encrypted messages must ensure that in no

circumstances whatever is the encoded version of the message retained with the
clear version. As soon as the originator of an encoded/encrypted message has
delivered the encoded/encrypted version to Police Signals/Post Office/Cable and
Wireless Limited, any copy of the encoded message retained by the originator shall
be destroyed by burning. Similarly, the recipient shall destroy the
encoded/enciphered message immediately it has been decoded/ deciphered and
receipt acknowledged to the originating office.

33. The originating office and the receiving office shall, in every case, paraphrase the
text of the message after coding/decoding and the paraphrased version only shall be
filed. In every case the exact transcription will be burned immediately a paraphrased
version has been made. The utmost care must be taken to destroy by burning all
rough notes and working copies made during the encoding/decoding of messages.

34. Paragraphs 28-33 inclusive shall be read in conjunction with Section “J” – “Cipher
Security” of the Security Instructions issued by the Ministry of Home Affairs dated
2nd January, 1960.
APPENDIX “A”
To P.G.O. No. 192

RADIO TELEPHONE PROCEDURE

Networking

1. Control Station: Every radio network will have a Control station in charge and
stations will promptly obey all instructions given by the Control which has to
manage the working of all the group stations and to regulate the clearing of traffic.

2. State of net: The control station will direct the working state of its net according to
traffic conditions. These are

NET DIRECTED This means that substations will work only to and from Control or
between given substations by permission of Control.

NET FREE This means that substations are permitted to work with each other without
going through control.

The state of the net will be broadcast by Control calling as follows:-

“ALL STATIONS” (repeated 3 times) “FROM CONTROL”,

“NET DIRECTED” or “NET FREE” (as the case may be):

“CONTROL OUT”

Substations must keep a note of the state of the net.

449
 P.G.O.No.192
3. Radio Schedules: These will be maintained punctually. The irregular keeping of
schedules seriously impairs the efficiency of the system and causes serious delays to
traffic. Any schedules which may be required will be arranged from Police
Headquarters or by the local Signals Officer to fit in with the working of other
networks

4.. Call Signs: All H/F stations will be allocated a call sign. Normally, these will not be
used by fixed stations when working radio-telephony. They are, however, available
for use where security calls for it or when it is necessary for a station to revert to the
use of telegraph. Mobile H/F stations employing common user frequencies will
employ their allocated call signs at all times. Where call signs are not used by fixed
H/F stations, place names will be employed. Place names will always be used by
VHF radio telephone stations. Call signs will be used by VHF mobile
radiotelephone stations working on common use frequencies. Lists of call signs will
be distributed to all radio stations

5. (a) Calling: Control stations will always use the call sign “CONTROL” unless it
is necessary to identify itself when it will add its place name to the word
“CONTROL”, e.g., “CONTROL MWANZA”. After identification has been
established, it will cease to use its place name. Before effecting a call,
stations will carefully listen out to see that other stations are not busy. If
stations are busy, then such stations wishing to call must wait until the
completion of working before making their calls. The only exception to this
rule will be in cases of “EMERGENCY” messages, when calls may be made
to establish communication as quickly as possible. Calling is to be carried out
as follows: -

(i) Control from Tarime over;

(ii) Tarime from Control loud and clear over.

(iii) Control from Tarime (gives message) over.

(iv) Tarime from Control ROGER message over.

(v) Control from Tarime go ahead over.

(vi) Tarime from Control (gives message) over.

(vii) Control from Tarime ROGER out.

(viii) Geita from Control message over.

(ix) Control from Geita wait.

(x) Control from Geita go ahead.

(xi) Geita from Control (gives message) over.

(xii) Control from Geita say again address over.

(xiii) Geita from Control I say again address ........ over.

(xiv) Control from Geita ROGER out.

450
 P.G.O.No.192
(xv) Control standing by, etc.

Where call signs are used they will be employed instead of place names in
the manner given in the above example. Typical call sign examples are: -

(i) ZOU37 spoken in full as ZULU OSCAR UNIFORM THREE

SEVEN or spoken in brief as: -

UNIFORM THREE SEVEN

(ii) ZOV591 spoken in brief as VICTOR FIVE NINE ONE.

(b) All station call: Where control wishes to pass a message to all its stations,
will call as follows:-

All Stations (repeated 3 times) “from Control”.

“Net Directed” – pause – “Stand by for ‘All Station’ Message”

After a suitable pause Control will broadcast the message.

Acknowledgement of the message will be obtained by Control calling all

stations in his net in turn as follows: -

(i) “Geita from Control acknowledge”

(ii) “Control from Geita Roger out”

(iii) “Maswa from Control acknowledge”

(iv) “Control from Maswa say again all after .......”

(v) “Maswa from Control wait out”

(vi) “Musoma from Control acknowledge”

(vii) “Control from Musoma Roger”

(viii) “Mwadui from control acknowledge”

(ix) “Control from Mwadui Roger”, etc., etc.

(x) “Maswa from control 1 say again ........ over”

(xi) “Control from Maswa Roger out”

(c) Multiple Call: When control wishes to pass a message to some of its stations,
it will call as follows: -

“Multiple Call” (repeated 3 times) “Geita, Musoma, Shinyanga

from Control.

“Net directed” – pause – “Stand by for Multiple Message”.

After a suitable pause, Control will broadcast the message.

451
 P.G.O.No.192
Acknowledgement will be obtained by stations replying in the order
as addressed as follows:-

“Control from Geita Roger out”

“Control from Musoma Roger out”

“Control from Shinyanga say word after word”

Control will reply to Shinyanga as follows:-

“Shinyanga from Control (repeats the word after) over”

“Control from Shinyanga Roger out”

“Control standing by”

The foregoing procedure will only be used if it is known that satisfactory

signals can be received by all the stations concerned. If there is any doubt,
then Control will have to ascertain the quality of his signals from the stations
concerned before transmitting his message by working each station in turn.
Only Control stations will address Multiple Call messages.
Mobile Stations
6. The general procedure laid down in this Order for the working of radiotelephone
stations will be followed. Unless a mobile station has become “static” it will not
normally record or number its messages. Messages received from the mobile station
by a fixed station will be given a check number on receipt by the receiver. The call
signs as allocated will, on all occasions, be used by mobile stations to avoid any
ambiguity of identity as they may move from place to place.
Radio Telephone Voice Procedure
7. Speaking: voice messages must be spoken in such a way as to ensure maximum
intelligibility to the receiver. The following are important: -

(a) Rhythm;

(b) Speed;

(c) Volume;
(d) Pitch

(a) Rhythm: Any phrase spoken in ordinary conversation has a natural rhythm
which assists intelligibility. Rhythm must be preserved when the phrase is
spoken on voice and the following rules must be obeyed: -

(i) the message must spoken in short complete phrases that make sense
and not word by word, e.g.: -
“Rations will be brought up / as soon as point Y is reached”
NOT
Rations will be/brought up as/soon as point/Y is reached”

452
 P.G.O.No.192
NOR
“Rations/will/be/brought/up/as/soon/as/point/Y/is/reached”

(ii) Care must be taken to avoid interjections such as “er”, “ah”, etc,
between words

(b) Speed

(i) The speed of speech must be constant throughout

(ii) The user is to speak steadily at a medium dictation speed when

transmitting a message. If a user speaks too fast his speech will not be
copied or will be unintelligible, and, if too slowly, will waste valuable
time and cause exasperation.

(iii) The less important words must not be hurried.

(iv) If the message is being written down by the receiver, pauses between
the transmission of phrases must be longer.

(c) Volume

(i) The user must speak louder than in ordinary conversation, but must
not shout.

(ii) No word must be stressed more than another and every word must be
spoken equally loudly. The voice must not fade away on the last
syllable.

(iii) The mouth must be close to the microphone and the distance between
the two kept constant. This applies particularly when dictating and is
the cause of much so-called fading with the loss of words.

(d) Pitch

High-pitched voices transmit better than those of lower pitch. The voice must
be pitched higher than usual but not to the degree of discomfort. It is essential
for a user to make sure that his throat is cleared and not congested before
sending. This applies to nasal catarrh which affects the pitch of the voice.
The pitch at the end of each word or phrase should be slightly raised.
Figures
8. Figures sent by voice are preceded by the word “figures” except when using them in
call signs or in the service instructions of messages and are spoken as follows: -

(a) 0 = ZERO

1 = WUN, with emphasis on the “N”

2 = TWO, with sharp “T” and long “OO”

3 = THUH-REE, with short “U”, slight rolling of the “R” and long “E” as in spree.

453
 P.G.O.No.192
4 = FO-WER, with long O as in foe.

5 = FI-YIV, with long “I” in FI and short “I” in YIV as in the word give.

6 = SIX, with emphasis on “X”

7 = SEV-EN, two distant syllables

8 = ATE, with long “A”

9 = NINER, with long “I” and emphasising the “N”s.

(b) If the originator of a message writes in the text, for example “SIXTEEN” instead of
“16”, this will be transmitted as a word and not as digits;

(c) If there is any difficulty in sending figures, the sender may spell out each figure, e.g.:-

2130 can be sent by saying: -

Figures: TWO 1 spell Tango Whiskey Oscar

Figures: ONE 1 spells Oscar November Echo

Figures: THREE 1 spell Tango Hotel Romeo Echo Echo

Figures: ZERO 1 spell Zulu Echo Romeo Oscar

Phonetic Alphabet

9. Whenever it is necessary, the letters in a message will be spoken as follows: -

A ALPHA J JULIET S SIERRA

B BRAVO K KILO T TANGO
C CHARLIE L LIMA U UNIFORM
D DELTA M MIKE V VICTOR
E ECHO N NOVEMBER W WHISKEY
F FOXTROT O OSCAR X X-RAY
G GOLF P PAPA Y YANKER
H HOTEL Q QUEBEC Z ZULU
I INDIA R ROMEO

No other phonetic alphabet will be used.

Cypher and Mixed Figures and Letters

10. Groups forming the above will be sent by the “Words Twice” procedure.

Punctuation Marks

11. The use of punctuation marks is to be avoided as far as possible. However, where
their use is essential, they will be limited to: -

454
 P.G.O.No.192
FULL STOP

COMMA

APOSTROPHE

HYPHEN OR DASH

OBLIQUE STROKE OR FRACTION BAR (/)

BRACKETS SENT BEFORE OR AFTER

The above will be sent as spoken.

Working Abbreviations

12. The following will always be used during the course of message exchanges to
reduce working time:

Proword Meaning
ACKNOWLEDGE Acknowledge receipt of my message.
ADDRESS Used before spelling out an address.
ALL AFTER, ALL
BEFORE, ALL Used when asking for a repetition or verification;
BETWEEN also in conjunction with the proword “WRONG”
when reading back.
BREAK Indicates beginning of address, text or signature.
CHECK Read back my transmission that I may see that it is
correct.
CORRECT You are correct.
CANCEL This transmission is in error. Disregard it.
CORRECTION Cancel the last word or phrase sent, or cancel the
word or phrase indicated and substitute ....(used by
the sender in cases of incorrect sending).
FETCH Used to Indicate to whom the caller wishes to speak.
FOR Used by a substation indicating message for another
substation.
FORMAL Indicator offering formal message.
FROM .... TO ....... Used to identify part of a message.
GO AHEAD Meaning send your message.
I SAY AGAIN I am about to repeat my last transmission or a part
thereof.
I SPELL I will spell the next word or words (spell the words
phonetically and then repeat normally)
I VERIFY That which follows has been verified at your request
and is repeated.
LISTENING Used to indicate that the message is awaited.
LOUD AND CLEAR Used to reply to report signal, meaning signals very
good, perfectly intelligible.
MESSAGE Used when offering a message.
MESSAGE FROM Used when relaying a message.
MESSAGE PASSED Used by a relaying station to indicate that message
has been cleared.

455
 P.G.O.No.192
Proword Meaning
NOTHING HEARD No signals heard.
OUT Communication finished. Watch maintained.
OUT TO YOU Communication finished. I am about to call another
station.
OVER End of transmission; waiting reply from you.
READ BACK Used when sender requires message to be repeated
back to him.
READABLE Used to report signals. Means signals fairly good.
RELAY THROUGH Used by control to instruct substation.
RELAY TO Instruction to relay a message.
REPORT SIGNAL Used by control signal ascertain signal strengths
ROGER Message received
ROGER ON Message received so far. Carry on.
SAY AGAIN Repeat all your message
SAY ALL AFTER Repeat the message after word indicated
SAY WORD AFTER Repeat the word after the word indicated.
SPEAKING Used to indicate person speaking.
STANDING BY Used by Control to indicate that Control is free to
receive calls.
THROUGH ME Send your message to me. I will clear it.
TIME SIGNAL Am about to send a time signal.
VERIFY Check text with originator and send correct version.
VERY WEAK Used to report signal. Means voice communication
impossible.
WAIT Indicating a pause of a few seconds. Other stations
not to interrupt.
WAIT OUT Used by control station only, indicating wait and do
not answer until I tell you.
WILCO Instructions will be carried out.
WORD AFTER Used when making a repetition or verification.
WORD BEFORE Used when making a repetition or verification.
WORDS TWICE Say every word or phrase twice, or used to indicate
that every word or phrase will be sent twice. Used
when conditions are difficult.
WRONG What you have just said is wrong. The correct
version is ....... Used in conjunction with read back
procedure.
ASSUME CONTROL Used by Control when appointing a substation to
assume control.

Reporting Signal Quality

13. The following prowords are to be used in describing signal quality: -

Proword
Meaning

LOUD AND CLEAR

Signal very good; perfectly readable.

READABLE
Signal fairly good; readable.

VERY WEAK

456
 P.G.O.No.192
Proword Meaning
Signal very weak; voice communication impossible.

NOTHING HEARD
No signals heard.

INTERFERENCE
Used to report interference in conjunction with the words “slight” or “heavy”

DISTORTED
Used in conjunction with the appropriate prowords.

457
 P.G.O.No.193
SIGNALS – ‘IMMEDIATE ACTION’ RADIO MESSAGES – ‘P’
SYSTEM
1. O/C. Stations engaged in the fresh pursuit of wanted criminals are responsible that
any information in their possession which might lead to an arrest is sent out at
once, if possible by telephone or radio to

(a) any nearby Police Station which might have a chance of effecting
interception;

(b) Regional Headquarters, at the same time giving details of the Stations
already warned (vide sub-para. (a) above).

2. Regional Headquarters will then be responsible for warning any other Station in
the Region which might usefully participate in the operation.

3. Regional Commanders will notify Police Headquarters, at once, if they consider

that information should be circulated to all or certain Regions and Stations. Action
will then proceed in accordance with paragraph 6 onwards. Regional Commanders
will ensure that such action is taken only under the direction of a responsible
officer.

4. The Director of Criminal Investigation may intervene at any time with overriding
instructions if he considers that partial or total operational control should be
exercised by Police Headquarters (i.e., during Territorial manhunts, etc).

5. All messages sent by radio or telephone in compliance with paragraphs 1-4 will be
known as “P” Messages and will be prefixed by that classification.

Territorial Network

6. (a) Every Regional Headquarter Station will observe a 3-minute listening

period each hour commencing on the hour (e.g. 0800 –0803) on frequency
8010 k/cs. MCW transmission type A.2 only will be used.

(b) Police Headquarters’ Radio Station will maintain a continuous watch on

8010 k/cs. For the acceptance of “P” messages, except during the 3 minute
listening periods.

(c) At the commencement of the hourly listening period Police Headquarters’

Radio Station will transmit a tuning call of 30 seconds’ duration to enable
Regional Stations to tune their receivers. The tuning signal will comprise a
repetition of the Headquarters Station call-sign, followed by the time and
transmission check number (a number transmitted for recording in
Regional Headquarters’ logs to confirm that the listening period has been
observed), followed by QTC indicating “I have a message” or QRU “I
have no message.”

(d) Police Headquarters’ radio will first transmit any “P” Messages it may
have, after which Regional Headquarters' Stations may send any “P”
messages on hand.

(e) Call signs will be transmitted in alphabetical/numerical sequence.

Regional Headquarter Stations addressed will acknowledge receipt of
messages by sending “R” followed by their call sign, or “N” followed by

458
 P.G.O.No.193
their call sign when not received for a repeat.
(f) Police Headquarters’ Radio will be in sole control and will record all
messages transmitted by Regional Stations. Where necessary, Police
Headquarters’ Radio will relay any such messages to any Regional
Stations addressed which have been unable to use this net (3865 Kc/s) for
normal traffic addressed which have been unable to copy the message on
first transmission.

(g) Stations are forbidden to use this net (8010Kc/s) for normal traffic or two-
way working.

7. Regional Network – Regional Commanders will lay down local Standing Orders
for the relaying of any “P” messages over their Regional networks.

459
 P.G.O.No.194
P.G.O.No.194
SIGNALS – RADIO EQUIPMENT – CARE AND ATTENTION

1. Communications are vital in times of emergency and form an essential part of police
organisation. All radio equipment must always be kept in full working order. This
applies particularly to mobile and pack sets as well as other apparatus not always
directly in the keeping of an authorised Signals Branch officer

2 Police officers of all ranks are responsible for the safe custody, proper care and use
of all radio sets entrusted to them whether these are of a fixed, mobile or pack set
type.

3 Wireless sets at Regional Headquarters, major centres or Signals Depots are

normally the responsibility of the local Signals Branch officer, but this fact in no
way reduces the liability of other officers to observe paragraphs 1 and 2 of this
Orders. Sets will not be opened at any time other than by an authorised Signals
Branch officer except to exchange or remove batteries.

4. The local Signals Branch officer will be advised immediately by officers in charge
should their wireless sets or equipment become faulty. Where it is convenient or
practicable, faulty mobile, portable or pack set apparatus will be returned to the
Signals Branch workshop by the Unit concerned as soon as possible

5. Signals Officers or Engineers i/c will be responsible for issuing local standing
instructions at smaller fixed stations for the proper running of engines, including
refuelling procedure, the maintenance of batteries and for any special instructions
required for the use of any particular equipment. Instructions will be suitably framed
and posted in a prominent position adjacent to the apparatus. These are to be strictly
headed to by all concerned.

6. Pack and portable sets will normally be held in store at the Signals Workshop.
Where this is not practicable, such equipment will be held locally in store by the
O/C. Station or Unit. Equipment will only be issued from store when actually
required and will be returned thereto immediately the requirement ceases. Officers
in charge of equipment will maintain an issue register, detailing the type of
equipment issued or returned, giving the date and time in each case. The condition
of the apparatus and any losses sustained will be noted also.

7. Stores containing pack, portable and mobile sets will be kept securely locked. A key
for emergency access will be kept in a glass panelled cabinet in a readily accessible
position.

8. Officers in charge of pack, portable and mobile sets will ensure that: -

(a) sets are stored in a dry room and not in direct sunlight;

(b) sets when placed in store immediately have their batteries removed;

(c) batteries are placed on charge for the prescribed time and rate as laid down
by the Signals Branch officers;

(d) sets are not left in the vicinity of batteries which are being charged;

(e) batteries when charged are placed apart from the sets;

460
 P.G.O.No.194
P.G.O.No.194
(f) any external moisture on batteries is carefully wiped away. Terminals
showing signs of corrosion should have same carefully scraped away and be
lightly vaselined. Distilled water only shall be added to batteries requiring
same prior to charging and in accordance with instructions laid down by the
Signals Branch officer;

(g) all sets are personally inspected at least once a week and at all formal
inspections. Sets will be switched on and tested and officers will satisfy
themselves that the sets are in good working order with batteries fully
charged in readiness for immediate use;

(h) a section of the radio set issue register (ref. Paragraph 6) is set aside for
inspection notes and signed by the officer responsible for the inspection;

(i) All sets are carefully packed when carried in vehicles to prevent unnecessary
bouncing and damage when in transit. Pack sets will be carried in an upright
position and every care is to be taken that accessories are not damaged or
lost;

(j) all sets are carefully dusted or wiped over after use, or weekly when in store.

9. Users of mobile radio sets are to exercise care in their use particularly when these
are worked from vehicle batteries. Headlights are not to be left burning when a
vehicle is stationary or parked at night time. Where it is evident that a battery is
almost discharged (empty) and the vehicle has to remain stationary, the driver will
run his engine with the ammeter showing a good charge indication for the
following periods:

15 minutes engine running

30 minutes engine off

15 minutes engine running

30 minutes engine off

The foregoing instructions will rarely apply to vehicles fitted with heavy duty
electrical equipment. Sets are to be switched off on completion of a tour of duty by
the radio operator or by the driver if there is no operator.

10. Drivers will take every care when washing vehicles to see that water is not
splashed into radio sets or their fittings. Where it is suspected that water has
entered any set, this fact is to be immediately reported to the Signals Branch officer
and the set switched off, otherwise serious damage may result. Any moisture
finding its way onto any sets will be immediately wiped off with a clean duster.

11. When a vehicle fitted with radio is sent to the workshop for repair and the driver is
not remaining with the vehicle throughout the period of the repair, the radio
equipment must be removed from the vehicle by a signals Branch officer or other
authorised person before it enters the workshop. In the event of an authorised
person not being available, the senior officer will carefully unclip the removable
set units and retain them in safe storage. Where more than one set is involved,
labels are to be attached to the sets indicating from which vehicles they were
removed. Sets will always be re-fitted to the original vehicles from which they

461
 P.G.O.No.194
P.G.O.No.194
were removed.

12. When a radio-fitted vehicle completes a tour of duty it should be coupled to a

battery charger where provided unless it is fitted with heavy duty electrical
equipment.

13. It will be the driver’s duty, when cleaning his vehicle, to see that the radio set units
are carefully dusted with a clean, dry cloth and lightly polished where required.

14. O/C. Stations are responsible for seeing that the station radio sets, engines and
batteries are used and maintained strictly according to instructions laid down by
the Signals Branch. Cabinets and fittings will be carefully dusted and polished
daily by Station staff.

15. Notification of all damage to, or loss of, equipment will be reported immediately to
the Regional Commander and confirmed by written report detailing the nature and
time of the damage or loss, with copies to the local Signals Branch Officer and to
the Chief Signals Officer.

462
 P.G.O.No.195
TELEPHONES
Installation

1. (a) All applications for the installation of telephones, internal telephones and
switchboards will be referred by Commanding Officers (by signal if necessary)
to the Chief Signals Officer at Police Headquarters and no installations may
take place until his approval has been received. In addition, the Chief Signals
Officer will handle all correspondence with the Tanzania Telecommunication
Company Limited and other mobile service providers in respect of all police
telephones in Dar es Salaam.

(b) Commanding Officers are responsible that: -

(i) telephones are not allocated to officers who do not have a definite
need of them for the efficient execution of their duties;

(ii) the minimum number of telephones compatible with efficiency are

installed in officers’ quarters;

(iii) unnecessary movement of telephones between quarters and offices is

prevented, in this connection every effort should be made in the
interest of economy to persuade Housing Committees to allocate a
suitable number of houses for permanent occupation by police
officers;

(iv) unnecessary bedroom extensions are not permitted in officers’

quarters;

(v) telephones are removed, at once, from quarters vacated by police

officers if no longer required within the terms of sub-paragraphs (i)
and (ii) above.

(c) The Chief Signals Officer will supply the Inspector General with half-yearly
returns (January 1st and July 1st) giving exact details of all police telephones
and the names of the officers to whom they are allocated.

Use of Telephones

2. (a ) Trunk calls will on no account be made except in connection with matters of

an urgent nature which cannot be communicated by mail or wireless. Demands
for trunk calls and the duration of such calls must be kept to a minimum.

(b) All matters affecting Police Stations must be referred in the first instance to
Regional Commanders in the usual manner. O/C. Stations will not make trunk
calls to Police Headquarters unless the circumstances are exceptional.

(c ) Trunk calls will not be made by individual officers direct to Police

Headquarters on personal matters such as leave, pay, uniform etc., in any
circumstances. All such matters will be communicated through the proper
channels, i.e., through O/C. Stations and Regional Commanders

463
 P.G.O.No.195
(d) Priority trunk calls may be made in cases of extreme emergency by O/C.
Stations. Officers making such calls must be prepared to justify them and, will
be liable to pay the cost of any unnecessary calls.

(e) All outgoing trunk calls will be recorded in the Trunk Calls Register referred
to below.

(f) Private trunk calls made through Force telephones (including house
telephones) are forbidden except in emergency. An officer who has to make a
private trunk call will ascertain from the Exchange the amount payable on the
termination of the call and will pay this amount to the O/C. Station. An E.R.V.
will be obtained and the receipt number entered against the relevant entry in
the Trunk Call Register.

Personnel Authorised to make Trunk calls

3. Trunk calls through Police telephones will only be made by the following:-

(a) Gazetted Officers;

(b) Inspectors;

(c) O/C. Stations;

(d) Officers on Charge Room duty, if none of the above officers is available;

(e) Member of the Rank & File who are specifically authorised to do so by a
Gazetted Officer or O/C. Station; or

(f) Any police officer in an emergency.

Trunk Call Register

4 A Trunk Call Register (T.F.N. 551) will be maintained at every police formation
where there is a telephone. The Register will be maintained by the switchboard
operator or, where there is no switchboard, by the Charge Room Officer who will
ensure that accurate details are recorded in respect of each trunk call made from the
Station. Trunk Call Registers will also be maintained for all direct line telephones in
offices and houses. At the end of each month a copy of this Register will be sent to
the Commanding Officer who holds the warrant for the payment of the respective
telephone account.

Payment of Telephone Accounts

5. When the telephone accounts are received for payment, Commanding Officers will be
responsible for checking entries in the Register against the accounts and similar
action will be taken in respect of direct line telephones in offices and houses.
Telephone accounts will then be certified, if correct, and paid. Should any
discrepancies arise between the Register and accounts, Commanding Officers will
institute immediate enquiries with O/C. Station or other telephone holder concerned
to explain the discrepancies. If it is shown that such discrepancies are due to
inaccuracies on the part of the Telephone services providers, the accounts will be
queried with the Telephone Accounts Office in Tanzania. If the account has already
been paid, a request will be made for the refund of the sums in dispute.
Economy

464
 P.G.O.No.195
6. Commanding Officers are responsible that strict economy is exercised in the use of
police telephones. They will, therefore, subject all telephone accounts to the most
careful scrutiny and will:

(a) satisfy themselves that all the installations referred to in the accounts have
been properly authorised in accordance with paragraph 1 (a);

(b) query any calls, both trunk and local, which appear to be excessive and
institute disciplinary proceeding against officers who make improper use of
telephones;

(c) review the number of calls made on each installation, including extensions
from switchboards and order the removal of any telephone which is not fully
used on official business.

7. All officers who have occasion to use police telephones and O/C. Police Formations
at all levels are personally responsible that telephones are not used unnecessarily and
that there is strict compliance with this Order

APPENDIX “A”
To P.G.O. No. 195

TRUNK CALL REGISTER (T.F.N. 551)

Date Name, Rank, No. of No. called Duration Private or Remarks or Receipt
Time Officer making call of call Official No. where required
.
..
.
.

465
 P.G.O.No.196

TRANSPORT-ACCIDENTS TO POLICE VEHICLES

1. When any accident occurs involving a Force vehicle (including a motor cycle), the
driver of the vehicle will report the accident, without delay, to:-

(a) the O/C. of the nearest Police Station; and to

(b) the officer to whose charge the vehicle is allocated.

If the driver of the vehicle is unable to take this action himself (e.g. on account of
injury), it will be taken in lieu by his passenger or by the first member of the Force
available to do so.

2. The O/C. District or Station receiving the report of the accident is responsible for
the proper investigation of the accident, in accordance with established procedure
(see P.G.O. No. 250).

3. The OC. District or Station will, without delay inform his Regional Commander and
the Inspector General of Police , by signal, giving the following brief details of all
accidents:-

(a) P.T. number and make;

(b) Time, date and place;

(c) Injuries involved (fatal, serious or minor); and

(d) Damage to vehicle (extensive or minor).

If the vehicle is on charge to another Region, the Regional Commander concerned

will also be informed.

4. (a) When an accident occurs to a Force Vehicle (including a motor cycle), it is

necessary to submit a separate report to Government in addition to the normal
police investigation into the accident.

(b) Accident reports dealt with by this paragraph will only be submitted where:-

(i) a private vehicle, plant or property is involved, irrespective of the

extent of the damage;

(ii) injury to any person occurs;

(iii) value of the assessed damage to the Force vehicle exceeds Shs.
300,000/=.

(c) Accident reports will be submitted on Form TFN. 80 “Accident Report-P.T.

Vehicles and Plant”, in quadruplicate, to the Inspector General of Police
through the Regional Commander within 72 hours of the time of the accident.

(d) Regional Commanders will give their comments in para. 9 of Form TFN. 80
and shall include any recommendations for surcharge.

466
 P.G.O.No.196
5. If there is reason to suppose that a claim might be made on Government for damage
caused in the accident, the investigator of the accident will submit P.F. 90, in
quadruplicate, to accompany the Accident Report (TFN.80).

6. An estimate of the cost of repairs to the vehicle will be obtained from E. and M.
Workshops, Ministry of Infrastructure, and will be forwarded to the Inspector
General of Police. The submission of Forms TFN. 80 and P.F. 90 will not be
delayed on this account.

7. Where a claim is to be preferred against a driver or owner of a civilian vehicle

involved in an accident with a Force vehicle, a written estimate in the form shown in
Appendix “A” will be obtained from E. and M. Workshops, Ministry of
Infrastructure.

8. The Staff Officer (Transport) at Police Headquarters is responsible for the

submission of Form TFN. 80 and supporting documents to the Ministry of Public
Security and Safety on behalf of the Inspector General of Police. Copies will also be
sent to the Ministry of Infrastructure and to the Ministry of Finance.

9. The O/C. District will decide whether the driver of the Force vehicle should be
prosecuted, according to the result of the investigation and if so, will take action
accordingly without delay. The principle to be followed in this regard is given in the
following paragraph. In cases of doubt, reference will be made to the Regional
Commander. If the driver is prosecuted, the result of the case, together with a copy
of Magistrate’s judgment, will be forwarded to the Inspector General of Police and
to the Regional Commander of the Region in which the vehicle is held on charge
immediately upon the conclusion of the trial.

10. Police drivers are in no way exempt from the provisions of the law and will be
prosecuted if they commit traffic offences. If prosecution is not justified, the O/C.
District investigating the accident must decide whether any damage done was due to
neglect or other cause punishable under the Police Disciplinary Code and will report
his findings to the Regional Commander.

11. In any disciplinary proceedings arising out of an accident where damage has been
caused to Government property, the officer awarding punishment, in the event of
conviction must inform the defaulter that the punishment does not include any claim
that may be made in respect of the cost of repairs to the vehicle. A copy of the
charge sheet and of the tribunal proceedings will be sent to the Inspector General of
Police.

12. A member of the Force driving a Force vehicle without authority may be held liable
for any damage to the vehicle, regardless of whether or not he was to blame for the
accident and, in any case, will be defaulted.

When a police driver is involved in an accident under circumstances prejudicial to

him, the Regional Commander shall suspend the driver from driving duties
forthwith and take steps to curtail the payment of drivers’ allowance for such period
as the circumstances require. In serious cases of negligence, the discharge of the
driver may become necessary.

Submission of Accident Reports when a private vehicle is being used on duty

14. An accident report on Form TFN. 80 (suitably amended as necessary) will be

submitted by any police officer who is involved in a traffic accident whilst on duty

467
 P.G.O.No.196
or driving duty, even though he was using a private vehicle, if, having regard to the
circumstances set out in para. O, an accident report would have been required had
the officer been driving a Force vehicle.
APPENDIX “A”
To P.G.O. No. 196

EXAMPLE OF COST OF REPAIRS TO PT. 521

The following are the details of the cost of repairs to P.T. 521 involved in an accident.

Shs. Cts

Spares 245 94

Labour 50 00

295 94

If the cost of repair is to be recovered from any person the following charges should be
added.

Total cost of repair 295 94

20% Supervision charges 59 19

10% Agency fees 29 59

384 72

468
 P.G.O.No.197
FORCE TRANSPORT-CONTROL AND USE OF
Control

1. All Force vehicles, including motor cycles, are controlled and allocated by Police
Headquarters.

2. Allocation of vehicles will be made to:-

(a) Regional and Unit Commanders;

(b) Field Force Units.

All such vehicles will be under the direct control of Regional Commanders
who will be responsible for their supervision and correct use.

3. (a) Regional Commanders will issue the vehicles referred to in paragraph 1(a)
on charge to Stations and Formations under their command, but will not
allocate vehicles on personal issue unless specifically authorised by the
Inspector General of Police.

(b) Regional Commanders may not transfer or re-allocate vehicles issued to

Field Force Units, but in the event of an emergency, they may temporarily
detach a vehicle or vehicles for other duties. In every such case, the Field
Force driver will accompany his vehicle and both will be returned to their
Unit at the earliest opportunity.

4. Vehicles will not be re-allocated or exchanged outside a Region without the prior
approval of the Inspector General of Police.

Use

5. Police vehicles, if available, will always be used for all official journeys. All
mileage claims in respect of official journeys carried out in private vehicles must
be countersigned with the words “I certify that no police vehicle was available”
and Commanding Officers will refuse payment on claims which are not so
endorsed.

6. All police vehicles will be kept in authorised police garages or special police
parking areas when not in use. They may not be kept at officers’ homes, except in
special circumstances and with the authority of a Commanding Officer.

7. Police vehicles will not be used for unofficial or private purposes, nor for
unnecessary journeys. Unauthorised passengers will not be carried.

8. Unnecessary use of Force transport and the use of heavy vehicles when light
vehicles are available are both forbidden. Officers in charge of Formations at all
levels are directly responsible for ensuring that this Order is obeyed without
deviation and that vehicles are used economically and to the best advantage.

9. As a general rule, police vehicles will only be driven by authorised Force drivers or
by other officers so authorised by the Gazetted Officer responsible for the vehicle.
Police vehicles will not, under any circumstances, be driven by officers who do not
hold a valid driving licence of the appropriate class. Provisional driving licence
holders may drive police vehicles only when under official instruction.

469
 P.G.O.No.197
10. No police vehicles will be driven at an excessive speed, except in emergency or in
pursuit of offenders or for other justifiable reasons.

11. Pet animals and livestock will not be carried in police vehicles unless they are in a
cage or other suitable container.

12. Police vehicles will not be used for transporting police personnel between their
quarters and office or Station or other place of work unless so authorised by a
Commanding Officer or O/C. District.

13. Pillion passengers will not be carried on police motor cycles except in emergency
or with the authority of a Gazetted Officer.

14. (a) The authorised maximum load for vehicles will not be exceeded.

(b) The number of persons to be carried in Force vehicles, excluding the driver,
will be as prescribed by the manufacturer

15. (a) Every journey carried out by each Police vehicle must be authorised, before
the vehicle’s departure, by one of the following officers:-

(i) Gazetted Officers;

(ii) Inspectors;

(iii) Staff Sergeant and RSM;

(iv) Charge Room Officers (see (b) below); or

(v) M/T. Branch N.C.O.s in charge of M/T. Sections

(b) Charge Room Officers who authorise journeys in accordance with (a) above
will record the following details in the Station Diary at the times of their
occurrence:

(i) The number of the vehicle used;

(ii) Number, rank and name of driver;

(iii) The purpose of the journey;

(iv) Time of departure; and

(v) Time of return.

16. (a) Every Police vehicle will be provided with a Motor Vehicle Log Book
(Form E.M.I. (A))

(b) The officer authorising each journey shall sign in the appropriate space in
the Log Book (Form E.B.I. (A)) before the vehicle departs, Under no
circumstances may any vehicle be used until the signature of the authorising
officer has been obtained.

(c) Drivers will complete two copies of Form E.M.I. (A) giving the required
details of every journey.

470
 P.G.O.No.197
(d) At the end of each calendar month all completed top copies of Form E.M.I.
(A) will be removed from the Log Books and will be sent to Commanding
Officers by the officers to whom the vehicles are allocated. Duplicate copies
will remain in the Log Books.

(e) Commanding Officers will ensure that all completed Forms E.B.I. (A) are
filed after scrutiny in the appropriate vehicle files at their Headquarters.
(These forms are not required by Police headquarters).
Officers to whom vehicles are allocated will scrutinise all log Books at
(f)
frequent intervals and at the end of each month in order to calculate the
degree of use and efficiency of each vehicle and its driver. They will initial
the last page in each Log Book to show that this has been done.
Vehicle History File

17. A Vehicle History File will be maintained at Police Headquarters for every Force
vehicle. A similar file will also be maintained at each Unit where Force vehicles
are held and a third file will be maintained at each Regional Police Headquarters.

18. All correspondence concerning the record, operation and maintenance of a

vehicle will be filed in the Vehicle History File.

19. When a vehicle is transferred from one Command to another, the Unit Vehicle
History File will be transferred with the vehicle and in the case of inter-Regional
transfers; the Regional Headquarters file will be transferred to the Headquarters
of the receiving Region.

20. Vehicle History Files held in Regions will be destroyed three months after the
date on which the vehicle is disposed of after a Board of Survey upon it.

21. (a) Officers to whom vehicles are allocated will submit duplicate monthly
returns on each vehicle on Form M.V.R.I. to their Commanding Officers.
Returns will cover each completed calendar month and will reach
Commanding Officers before the 15th of the month.

(b) Form M.V.R.I. will be completed, in full, except for the sections dealing
with:-

(i) grease, water, etc.,

(ii) drivers’ wages,

(iii) tyres, tubes, spares and replacements,

(iv) total debits.

22. (a) Commanding Officers will submit the original of each Return to Police
Headquarters, reaching there before the 25th of the month and will file the
duplicate.
Commanding Officers will ensure that Monthly Returns are submitted in
(b)
respect of every vehicle allocated to their Command from the date of
allocation until withdrawal from the Command or written-off by a Board
of Survey.

471
 P.G.O.No.197
23 The Log Book Form E.M.I. (A) and Form M.V.R.I. are Territorial Forms
obtainable on indent by Commanding Officers from the Government

472
 P.G.O.No.198

TRANSPORT – MOTOR – DRIVERS DUTIES

1. Police drivers will be responsible for the cleanliness and good order of their
vehicles and for the safe custody of the tools and equipment issued to such
vehicles.

2. Police drivers will be responsible for carrying out the maintenance tasks laid
down in P.G.O. No. 199.

3. Police drivers will report, without delay, any defect which comes to notice. They
will not attempt to carry out any repair or adjustment other than those authorised
except as an emergency measure when on safari.

4. Police drivers will at all times:-

(a) drive in a safe and proper manner obeying all traffic rules and regulations
giving the approved driving signals;

(b) drive courteously and set a good example to the general public

(c) ensure that overalls will only be worn for maintenance work); boots will
have composition soles;

(d) prevent any unauthorised person from tampering with their vehicles;

(e) ensure that loads do not exceed the maximum authorised load for their
vehicle and are properly distributed to ensure the safety of their vehicle;

(f ) ensure that the vehicle log book is correctly maintained as laid down in
P.G.O. No. 197;

(g) report immediately any accident however slight in which the vehicle may
be involved.

5. Police drivers are forbidden to:-

(a) allow any unauthorised person to drive a police vehicle;

(b) drive any vehicle which is known to be defective or damaged;

(c) carry any unauthorised passenger or unauthorised load;

leave the vehicle unattended on any road;
(d)

(e) smoke on duty or in the vicinity of their vehicle;

use any vehicle without the journey being authorised in the vehicle log
(f)
book and without making a covering entry in the Station Diary.

6. Police drivers who are not qualified signallers are forbidden to interfere with the
wireless equipment in their vehicles at any time. The wireless is a part of the
vehicle and drivers are responsible for its safe custody.

473
 P.G.O.No.198
7. Police drivers may drive non-Government vehicles of the class to which their
licence applies

474
 P.G.O.No.199
TRANSPORT-MOTOR –MAINTENANCE OF

1. Commanding Officers are responsible for the maintenance and efficient operation of
all Police transport attached to their commands. O/C. Stations and Units are, in turn
directly responsible for the care, use and safe custody of all vehicles allocated to
them.

2. The regular maintenance and cleaning of vehicles will be carried out by drivers.
O/C. Stations and Units will ensure by regular inspection that vehicles are left clean,
lubricated and mechanically efficient. They will also ensure that log books and all
necessary returns are maintained and submitted accurately and promptly.

3. Police drivers will be responsible for carrying out the following maintenance tasks:-

Daily, before Use

(a) Clean vehicle inside and out. Extreme care must be taken when the vehicle
is fitted with radio equipment.

(b) Check engine oil and top up if necessary to correct level on dip stick,

(c) Check water and top on if necessary.

(d) Check tyres for correct pressure and inflate, if required, including spare tyre.
Remove any nails and stones from treads, and examine walls for wear and
tear.

(e) Test horn, windscreen wiper and correct positioning of rear mirror.

(f) Test all lights, including braking lights at rear to ensure they are working
correctly

(g) Tighten all wheel nuts.

(h) Test brakes.

(i) Check tools and equipment.

(j) Check log book.

After Use

(a) Refill with petrol, oil and water if required.

(b) Complete log book.

Weekly

(a) Check water level in battery and top up with distilled water if necessary.
Care must be taken not to overfill the cells of the battery.

(b) Clean battery terminals and grease slightly. Check for loose connections.

(c) Check brake fluid level in reservoir and top up if necessary. Only the

475
 P.G.O.No.199
specified type of fluid will be used.

(d) Clean engine; check radiator hose (upper and lower) for leaks and fan belt
for tension and wear and tear.

(f) Check level of oil in gear-box if dip stick provided.

(g) Clean chassis; tighten up all nuts and bolt and check for corrosion.

h) Inspect springs and shock absorbers.

(i) Examine vehicle for oil leaks.

(j) Inspect wiring and insulation of the electrical system and check that spare
fuses are in position.

4. Drivers who have passed a special police course in driving and maintenance may
make the following additional adjustments:-

(a) Clean sparking plugs and make necessary adjustments.

(b) Adjust fan belt, clutch pedal movement, brake pedal movement and other
minor parts.

(c) Replace faulty lamp bulbs.

5. All other repairs and adjustments will only be done by Public Works Department
Workshops or by approved garages where no Public Works Department facilities
exist.

6. Vehicles will be regularly serviced on a monthly basis or more often as may be

required. When a vehicle is sent to the Public Works Department Workshop for
monthly service, M.T. Monthly Log Sheet and Mechanical Inspection Report (Form
R. 104(B)) will be completed and the original copy sent to Headquarters with the
vehicle monthly returns (see paragraph 21, P.G.O. No. 197).

7. Maintenance will be carried out in accordance with vehicle manufacturers’

specifications and the driver will remain with the vehicle while it is being serviced.
He will see that no points of servicing are overlooked and report any omissions to
his officer in charge.

8. Action will be taken to ensure that any faults in a vehicle are detailed, in writing, to
the workshop at the time it goes in for maintenance. A copy of such details will be
placed in the Vehicle History file.

9. Permission to effect repairs costing more than Shs. 2,000,000/= in Public Works
Department Workshops or approved garages will first be obtained from the
Inspector General of Police.

10. Officers to whom vehicles are allocated will inspect all vehicles under their control
once a week. They shall place a record of their inspections in the Vehicle History
file.

Cleaning Materials

476
 P.G.O.No.199
11. (a) A monthly issue of cleaning materials will be made to each

Vehicle in accordance with the scale shown at Appendix “A” to this Order.

(b) Supplies of cleaning materials will be obtained by Commanding Officers in

bulk from the Quartermaster and will be included in the quarterly indent for
store, clothing, etc. (para. 6 of P.G.O. 171 refers).

(c) Cleaning materials will be issued by Commanding Officers on a monthly

basis to O/C. Stations and Units for distribution to specific vehicles.

APPENDIX “A”
To P.G.O. No. 199

CLEANING MATERIALS-SCALE OF ISSUE PER VEHICLE PER MONTH

Vehicles

½ lb. Mutton Cloth

lb. Cotton Waste.

pint Kerosene.

1/3 tin Car Polish (1 tin every 3 months).

Motor Cycles and Trailers

¼ lb. Mutton Cloth.

½ lb. Cotton Waste.

1/6th tin Car Polish (1 tin every 6 months).

NOTE: Mutton cloth only to be used for cleaning paintwork, etc., cotton waste to be
used for cleaning engine and other oily parts.

477
 SECTION IX
STAFF WELFARE
Nos. 211 – 220

P.G.O. No. Titles

211. Health Precautions

212. Welfare – Canteens.

213. Welfare Committees and Sub-Committees

214.

215.

216.

217.

218.

219.

220.

479
 P.G.O. No.211

HEALTH PRECAUTIONS
General Precautions

1. The greatest care must be exercised by all ranks to guard their health against infectious and
contagious diseases.

2. Commanding Officers will coordinate with the Police Medical Unit to ensure
implementation of the police health programmes in their respective areas of jurisdiction.

3. Each Commanding Officer should ensure adequate supply of essential health facilities.
These supplies will essentially be obtained from the headquaters of the Police Medical Unit
Dar es Salaam.

Infectious and Contagious Diseases

4. (a) The attention of all ranks in the Force is drawn to national policies, strategies and
guidelines on infectious and contagious diseases such as policies on HIV/AIDS,
Malaria, Tuberculosis and Cholera which were promulgated by the government to
assist the people in their efforts to fight the spread of such diseases.

(b) With regard to HIV/AIDS, Commanding Officers should ensure that efforts are made
in all components of the Force to promote and implement the National Strategies and
Guidelines in their respective commands. This should be done through education,
awareness programmes, and voluntary testing among other initiatives.

(c) The Inspector General will continue to issue circulars on how efforts to curb the
spread of infectious and contagious diseases such as HIV/AIDS and its effect should
be sustained in the Force.

480
 P.G.O. No.212
WELFARE – CANTEENS
General

1. Organised police canteens shall be maintained and operated wherever there are large
concentrations of Rank & File. This applies particularly to each Regional HQ., and the
P.T.S. As a general rule, Regional Field Force personnel should share the District police
canteen unless the Regional Commander considers that separate canteens are more desirable.

2. All canteens shall be under the direct control of Commanding Officers who are entirely
responsible for dealing with contracts and contractors and for ensuring that each canteen is
operated to the best advantage of the members of the Force it serves.

3. Canteens shall provide for the sale of items it considers desirable.

Management

4. Each canteen shall be controlled by a Canteen Committee, made up as follows :-

(a) In Regional Headquarters

CHAIRMAN Commanding Officer

(ex-officio)

Vice Chairperson The O/C. of the Regional Field Force Unit or another Gazetted
Officer or Inspector appointed by the Commanding Officer
(ex-officio)

Secretary/Treasurer An Inspector of any rank to be appointed by the Chairperson.

(ex-officio)

Rank & File members At least four (or more at the Commanding Officer’s discretion)
members of the Rank & File to be elected by popular vote at the
annual general meeting or any other general meeting of the members
of the canteen.

(b) Elsewhere

CHAIRMAN A Gazetted Officer appointed by the Commanding Officer.

(ex-officio)

Secretary/Treasurer An Inspector of any rank to be appointed by the Chairman.

Rank & File members At least four (or more at the Commanding Officer’s discretion)
members of the Rank & File to be elected by popular vote at the
annual general meeting or any other general meeting of the members
of the canteen.

5. Rules governing the operation of a canteen and the conduct of its members shall be drawn
up by the Committee and approved by the majority of members at a general meeting. Such

481
 P.G.O. No.212
rules shall be ratified by the Commanding Officer and a copy shall be exhibited on the
Canteen Notice Board.

6. The Chairman in Committee may appoint a canteen manager. The duties of such manager
shall be included in the canteen rules. Any servant paid from canteen funds shall obey the
lawful orders of the manager. If the manager is not paid from canteen funds he/she shall be
eligible to receive an annual honorarium at the discretion of the Committee and with the
approval of the Chairman.

7. Canteen Committees shall ensure that canteen premises, furnishing and equipment are
maintained in a clean, sanitary and serviceable condition.

8. The Chairman shall exercise unremitting supervision over the management of the canteen.
He/she shall ensure that the Committee meets monthly and that a general meeting of
members is held during the last quarter of each year.

Canteen Contracts

9. A canteen may be operated either as a departmental monopoly or by contract.

10. Where a canteen is operated as a departmental monopoly, the prices of goods sold shall be
fixed from time to time by the Chairman of the Committee and shall be published on the
canteen Notice Board. Prices shall be fixed as low as is economically possible and shall not
exceed those prevailing in the local market. Stocks which have been purchased wholesale
shall not be offered at a profit exceeding 10 per cent of cost. All purchases and sales of
goods by the canteen shall be recorded in the accounts of the Canteen Fund.

11. Prior to establishing a canteen on the contract system, the Chairman shall call for tenders
from prospective contractors. It shall be a condition of any such contract that articles are
sold by the contractor at prices agreed to by the Chairperson in Committee and that such
prices shall not exceed current local retail prices. The approved scale of charges shall be
scrutinized from time to time by the Chairman in Committee and a copy of the current
approved price list shall be exhibited on the canteen Notice Board.

Credit Facilities

12. Credit facilities shall be arranged by canteen chairmen on the understanding that all credit
granted to the members will be guaranteed by the canteen Committee and shall be
recoverable (as a last resort) from the Command Canteen & Welfare Fund.

13. All purchases from canteens shall be made by cash or by credit noted in such form as may
be authorised by the authorized by the Chairman. Purchase of clothing or other expensive
articles on credit is forbidden.

14. Canteen chairmen, in consultation with their Committees, shall authorise the maximum
amount of credit, which shall not exceed one –third of gross salary to be permitted to each
canteen member.

15. Under no circumstances shall canteen contractors or managers allow any member to exceed
his authorised credit. They are also forbidden to lend money or extend any kind of
unauthorised credit facility.

Accounting Procedure

16. Canteen chairmen shall ensure that canteen funds are only used for necessary and desirable
purposes and are empowered to countermand any expenditure which has been approved by
482
 P.G.O. No.212
the committee, but which they consider to be undesirable.

17. The Honorary Secretary and Treasurer shall keep an account of all finance concerning the
operation of the canteen. All expenditure and receipts of money shall be entered in a cash
book and such transactions shall be supported by receipts.

18. An account (to be known as the Unit Canteen Account) shall be opened with a reputable
bank or as a Savings Account with a Post Office.

19. A monthly statement of each canteen account as at the last day of the month shall be
prepared by the Honorary Secretary and Treasurer and examined by the committee each
month. The committee shall satisfy themselves that such statement is accurate, shall ratify it,
and shall have a copy displayed on the canteen Notice Board.

20. A half-yearly statement of the accounts of the canteen fund as at the 30th June and 31st
December shall be prepared by the Honorary Secretary and Treasurer yearly. Such statement
shall be in the form set out in Appendix “A”. This statement shall be produced to the
committee who shall examine it and satisfy themselves as to its accuracy. The Chairperson
shall forward a copy to his Commanding Officer.

Collection of Canteen Debts

21. All canteen debts shall be payable to the canteen and not to the Contractor.

22. Canteen chairmen shall arrange for all authorised canteen debts to be collected from
members at the pay table on pay day each month. Particular care shall be taken to try and
arrange full settlement of outstanding accounts of members posted on transfer elsewhere.

23. (a) If any canteen member posted on transfer to another Command is unable to settle his
debts to the canteen before his/her departure, the canteen Committee shall notify the
Commanding Officer who will, if funds permit :-

(i) pay the debt to the canteen from his/her Command Canteen & Welfare Fund;

(ii) send details of the debt to the Commanding Officer of the command to which
the debtor has been transferred to and ask for reimbursement.

(b) The Commanding Officer of the Command to which the debtor transfers will then:-

(i) arrange for reimbursement from his/her own Canteen & Welfare Fund to the
Canteen & Welfare Fund of the command from which the debtor transferred;

(ii) collect the debt which is now transferred to his/her own Canteen & Welfare
Fund and limit or withhold credit until full settlement is made.

24. Commanding Officers will arrange between themselves for the settlement of outstanding
canteen debts of personnels who have transferred if their Command Canteen & Welfare
Funds are insufficient for the procedure set out in para 23.

Disposal of Canteen Profits

25. Individual canteens are only permitted to retain the smallest possible proportion of their
surplus profits necessary for normal canteen expenses and improvements. Commanding
Officers shall ensure that the main profit balance from each canteen is paid into the credit of
their Command Canteen & Welfare Funds, which shall be organised and operated in
accordance with paras. 26-29.

26. The following Commands shall each maintain a Command Canteen & Welfare Fund into

483
 P.G.O. No.212
which shall be paid all surplus profits earned by their respective canteens

COMMAND CONTRIBUTING CANTEENS

Dar es Salaam All canteens in the command except those operated by the
Field Force and the Railways Division

All other Regional/Unit commands All canteens in the command.

Field Force in Dar es Salaam,

Railways Division Police in Dar es
Their own canteens.
Salaam, P.T.S. Moshi,
Police College.

27. Command Canteen & Welfare Funds will be administered by Command Welfare
Committees in accordance with P.G.O. 213. They shall be used for the good of all Units
served by each welfare Committee and, in particular, for approved welfare projects which
cannot easily be charged to the Police Welfare Vote.

28. In addition, Welfare Committees may approve small loans from their Command Canteen &
Welfare Funds to members of the Rank & File for the purchase of radios, bicycles, etc., and
shall lay down suitable terms for repayment provided that :-

(a) the Fund can afford to make loans;

(b) the Committee is satisfied that the prospective borrower can afford to pay back the
loan and that suitable repayment arrangements can be made;

(c) the borrower’s canteen credit facilities (if any) granted in accordance with para. 14,
are reduced by the amount of each monthly installment until the whole loan is
cleared.

29. Each Commanding Officer affected by paragraph 26 shall open and maintain an account (to
be known as Command Canteen & Welfare Fund) with a reputable bank or the Post Office
and will be held personally responsible for accounting in the proper manner for all receipts
and disbursements to and from the Command Canteen & Welfare Fund and from supplying
the Inspector General with a half – yearly state of account, as at the 30th June and 31st
December, in the form set out at Appendix “A”.

30. Certain canteens, such as the P.T.S., which serve a large number of personnel, may well
accumulate profits in excess of the welfare needs of that particular command. In such
circumstances the Commanding Officer may be required by the Inspector General to donate
suitable sums for welfare work in other Commands.
APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O 212)

PART I

Those Stations where the canteen is out to contract shall maintain a simple revenue and expenditure
account as under:-

484
 P.G.O. No.212
Revenue Expenditure

To: Receipts from Contractor Shs. Cts. By: Purchases Shs. Cts.
___ ___ Balance C/D ______ ______
___ ___

To: Balanced B/D. Shs. Cts. Shs. Cts.

PART II

Those Stations where the canteen is NOT out to contract shall maintain the following accounts:-

Trading Account

Shs. Cts. Shs. Cts.

To: Stock as @ By: Sales

Purchases Stock as @
Balance (Gross
Profit)
___ ___ ___ ___

Profit and Loss Account

Shs. Cts. Shs. Cts.

To: Salaries By: Trading Account

(Gross Profit)
General Expenses
Balance (Net Profit)
_____ ______ ______ ______

Balance Sheet

Liabilities Shs. Cts. Assets Shs. Cts.

Sundry Creditors Cash in Hand

Cash in Bank
Accumulated funds as Sundry Debtors
per last
Stock as @
Balance Sheet
Add/Deduct
_____ ______ ______ ______
Profit/Loss by
Balance Sheet

485
 P.G.O. No.212

486
 P.G.O. No.213
WELFARE COMMITTEES AND SUB-COMMITTEES
PART I

Introduction

1. Provision is made in this Police General Order for an organised Force welfare system to
serve the needs of the Inspectorate and Rank & File.

2. Welfare Committees will be set up in each command and in other large formations and
representatives of Welfare Sub-Committees covering all Districts and other small Units
will serve on them.

3. These Committees and Sub-Committees are of great importance to the well-being of the
Force. They are the medium through which all police officers (except Gazetted Officers)
and their families can make known their needs to their Commanding Officers and through
them to the Inspector General.

4. Commanding Officers must ensure that their Committees’ and Sub-Committees function in
accordance with this order and that the Committee and Sub-Committee members are
taught their responsibilities and duties.

5. Precise terms of reference for Committees and Sub-Committees are laid down in
paragraphs 11 and 20.

6. Under no circumstances may Committees or Sub-Committees hear, consider or discuss any

matters affecting discipline, transfers, promotions, pay and allowances, or any other thing
which in the opinion of the Chairman does not fall with the permitted terms of reference.

7. The formation of wives’ Sub-Committees is also necessary and is dealt with in greater
detail in paragraph 28.

8. (a) Every Commanding Officer is responsible that his Command allocation of police
welfare money is administered in accordance with this General Order and is
expended in strict compliance with Government General Orders. The Police Welfare
Grant has been approved by Parliament and must, therefore, be handled as a
Government Vote.

(b) Expenditure should normally be confined to the purchase of furniture, radios, sports
equipment and similar Substantial items. Other incidental expenses of a less
permanent nature should be financed through the Command Canteen Fund, in
accordance with P.G.O. No. 212.

(c) As a general rule all welfare equipment shall be purchased by Committee Chairmen
for distribution through their Sub-Committee Chairmen, but the latter may be
authorised to do so in exceptional circumstances.

PART II

WELFARE COMMITTEES

Organization

9. A welfare Committee shall be organised and maintained in every Regional Command and
in certain other large formations listed in Appendix “A”.

Membership

487
 P.G.O. No.213
10. (a) Committees will normally be composed of the following members:-

Regional Commands Other Formations.

Chairperson Chairperson
Secretary – Ex-Officio. Secretary – Ex-Officio

Two representatives of each Sub-Committee. 1 Inspector

One Lady Member

1 Sergeant Major or Sergeant

3 Constables
1 Lady Member.

(b) Each Chairperson may appoint such further additional members as may appear
necessary to serve the needs of his command.

(c) The Lady Members should normally be wives of Gazetted Officers or Inspectors.
They are responsible for ensuring that views and complaints of the wives of
Inspectors and Rank & File receive due consideration by the Committee.

Terms of Reference

11. The duties of each Welfare Committee shall be :

(i) to consider all matters put forward by Sub-Committee representatives;

(ii) to discuss and consider all matters affecting the welfare of all members of the
Inspectorate and Rank & File in the area served by the Committee and to make
whatever recommendations seem sensible and desirable.

(iii) to consider and approve the allocation and expenditure of Welfare Funds
throughout the area served by the Committee.

Chairperson, Special Powers

12. Each Chairperson is vested with the following powers and responsibilities :-

(i) He/she shall control the accounting and expenditure of all Welfare Funds allocated
to his/her Command by the Inspector General.

(ii) He/she may refuse to disburse welfare funds if he/she considers any
recommendation by his Committee to be extravagant or unwise.

(iii) He/she may exclude from consideration by his/her Committee any matter which he
considers to be outside its terms of reference.

(iv) He/she may veto any majority decision of his/her Committee if he/she considers
such decision to be improper, undesirable or outside the Committee’s forms
reference.

(v) He/she may order the replacement of any Committee member who appears to

488
 P.G.O. No.213
him/her to be unable to discharge his/her duties and responsibilities on the
Committee.

(vi) He/she may in special case of urgency, approve the expenditure of Welfare Funds
without reference to his/her Committee.

Appointment of Committee Members

13. (a) The Chairperson is an ex-officio appointment and will normally be the
Commanding Officer of the Region or Formation, as laid down in Appendix “A”.

(b) The secretary and Lady Member are appointed by the Chairperson. The Secretary
shall not have a Vote.

(c) (i) In Regional Commands all the other Committee Members will be the
elected representatives of the various Welfare Sub-Committees (see also
paragraph 27).

(ii) In other Formations, the Members will be elected by the personnel they
represent.

Term of Office

14. Members who are elected to serve on Welfare Committees shall normally serve for one
year, but may be re-elected for subsequent terms of office. Committee election shall be
held in January each year.

Frequency of Meetings

15. (a) The minimum frequency of Committee meetings is laid down in Appendix “A” but
chairperson may order such additional meetings as may appear desirable.

(b) Every effort shall be made (including the provision of police transport) to ensure
that all Committee Members attend the meetings.

Transaction of Business

16. (a) The chairperson shall be responsible for arranging the meetings of his/her
Committee.

(b) Official Agenda are not obligatory, but Members should prepare, in advance,
adequate notes on all matters they propose to raise at the meetings.

(c) Every decision shall be taken by vote. The chairperson may exercise an additional
casting vote when the Committee'’ voting is equally divided.

(d) The chairperson shall ensure that all matters discussed at his Committee meetings
are properly recorded in official minutes and that each meeting takes due note of
the action taken on the minutes of its previous meeting.

Implementation of Committee’s Recommendations

17. Each Chairperson shall consider the minutes of his Committee and shall take whatever
action he considers desirable and within his power to implement his Committee’s
recommendations. He shall then submit one copy of the minutes to the Inspector General
(with copies to the Chairperson of each Sub-Committee represented on his Committee
and to any other interested officers) after having recorded below the last minute his
comments on each item of the minutes, indicating :-

489
 P.G.O. No.213
(a) what action he has taken;

(b) what action he recommends if he/she feels unable to take action himself;

(c) which items he/she does not support with reasons.

(d) Chairpersons are responsible for ensuring that all Committee minutes are
Submitted to the Inspector General with the least possible delay.

PART III

WELFARE SUB-COMMITTEES

Organisation

18. A Welfare Sub-Committee shall be organised and maintained in every police district and
by certain other units as laid down in Appendix “B”.

Membership

19. (a) Sub-Committees will normally be composed of the following members:-

Chairperson (ex-officio).

One Inspector,

One Sergeant Major or Sergeant - Representing the various Stations and

Units served

One Corporal – appointed by the Sub-Committee.

Three Constables

(b) Each Chairperson may appoint such further additional members as may appear
necessary to serve the needs of his command.

(c) A Lady member may also be appointed by the Chairperson if the latter considers
that she can present the views and complaints of Inspectors’ and Rank & File
wives for consideration by the Committee.

Terms of Reference

20. The duties of each Welfare Sub-Committee shall be :-

(a) to discuss and consider all matters affecting the welfare of all members of the
Inspectorate and Rank & File in the District or Unit served by the Sub-Committee
and to make whatever recommendations appear sensible and desirable;

(b) to make such recommendations and representations as may appear appropriate for
the allocation of funds for welfare and sporting equipment.

Chairperson’s Special Powers

21. The Chairperson is vested with the special powers laid down in paragraph 12(c) – (e).

Appointment of Committee Members

22. (a) The Chairperson is an ex-officio appointment and will normally be the O/C.

490
 P.G.O. No.213
District or Unit, as laid down in Appendix “B”.

(b) The Lady Member (if any) will be appointed by the Chairperson and may vote.

(c) The other members will be elected by the personnel they represent. Chairperson
should ensure that all Stations and Units with an establishment of ten or more
police officers are represented on the Sub-Committees.

Term of Office

23. Sub-Committees elections shall be held in January each year. Serving members may stand
for re-election if they so desire.

Frequency of Meetings

24. Sub-Committees shall normally meet once a month. Every effort shall be made (including
the provision of police transport) to ensure that all members attend the meetings.

Transaction of Business

25. (a) The Chairperson shall be responsible for arranging the meetings of his/her Sub-
Committee and for ensuring that it meets at least once a month.

(b) The provisions of paragraph 16 (a) to (d) shall apply equally to Sub-Committees.

Implementation of Sub-Committee Recommendations

26. (a) Each Chairperson shall consider the minutes of his/her Sub-Committee and shall
take whatever action he/she considers desirable and within his/her power to
implement the Sub-Committee’s recommendations. He/she shall then Submit two
copies of the minutes to his/her main Committee Chairperson (who will usually be
his Commanding Officer) after having recÿÿded beÿÿw the last minute his/her
commÿÿts on each item of the Minutes, indicating :-

(a) (i) what action he/she has taken;

(ii) what action he/she recommends if he/she feels unable to take action
himself;

(iii) which items he/she does not support, with reasons

(b) The main Committee Chairperson will examine the minutes of each Sub-
Committee meeting and will enter below the Sub-Committee Chairperson’s
recommendations his/her own instructions regarding further action. He/she will
then return one copy to the Sub-Committee Chairperson and retain one copy for
filing and consideration (if need be) at the next meeting of his/her Committee.

(c) When the Sub-Committee Chairperson receives his/her next Sub-Committee

meeting. Minutes from the main Committee Chairperson, he/she will :-

(i) complete all out standing action;

(ii) bring up the completed minutes for consideration at his/her next Sub-
Committee meeting.

Sub-Committee Representation on Main Welfare Committee

27. Two representatives of each Sub-Committee (excluding the Chairperson) will serve on the
main area welfare Committee. They should be elected by Sub-Committees in January of

491
 P.G.O. No.213
each year.

PART IV

MISCELLANEOUS

Wives’ Committees

28. Every Commanding Officer should endeavour to organize informal wives’ welfare Sub-
Committees to consider family welfare and make appropriate recommendations to their
area welfare Committees and Sub-Committees. Provision has been made in this General
Order for the appointment of Lay Members to both Committees and Sub-Committees.
There may be some initial reluctance to participate in this work. It is essential, therefore,
that the aims and objects of the scheme should be explained in detail to the Inspectorate
and Rank & File so that they may encourage their wives to join in. All they need do is
meet together at regular intervals under the chair of a senior Gazetted Officer’s or
Inspector’s wife and discuss improvements to housing, living conditions, cooking, water
and sanitary amenities, medical facilities, children’s welfare and any other matters
connected with their daily life, in order that their views and complaints can be passed on
to the Police Welfare Committees and Sub-Committees.

29. Commanding Officers are responsible for ensuring that a sufficient number of Gazetted
Officers’ and Inspectors’ wives undertake this work and that at least a proportion of the
Rank & File’s wives meet with them at regular intervals to discuss their problems and
complaints.

492
 P.G.O. No.213
APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 213)

POLICE WELFARE COMMITTEE ORGANISATION

Formation(s) served by a welfare Committee Chairperson Frequency of

meetings

1. Each Regional command except Dar es Salaam, and R.P.C. At least once a
including Field Force units, C.I.D., Railways Police quarter.
Division, and stock Theft personnel.

2. Dar es Salaam District including the band and the R.P.C. At least
women police, police headquarters, C.I.D., Crime
Intelligence Unit headquarters, signals headquarters
and criminal records office, but excluding the Field
Force and railways police divisions personnel.

3. All Field Force units in Dar es Salaam. C/Field Force Once a month.

4. Railways Division units in Dar es Salaam O/C. TRC Once a month

Police/TAZA
RA Police

5. Police Training school (staff and recruits) Commandant, Once a month

P.T.S.

6. Marine Unit O/C. Once a month

7. Police College Commandant, Once a month

P.C.

493
 P.G.O. No.213
APPENDIX “B”(TO P.G.O. No. 213)
POLICE WELFARE SUB-COMMITTEE ORGANIZATION

Formation(s) served by a welfare Sub- Chairperson Frequency of

Committee meetings

1. Each police district (excluding Dar es The O/c. District. Monthly.

Salaam).

2. Each police unit in Dar es Salaam The O/C. Unit Monthly

3. Each Field Force unit (except in Dar es O/C. Unit Monthly

Salaam

4. The Band Director of Music Monthly.

5. Railways police Units in Tanga, Tabora and O/C. Unit Monthly.

Mwanza`

494
SECTION X
CRIME AND INVESTIGATION
Nos. 221 – 270

P.G.O. No. Title

221. Fugitive Offenders, Extradition, Mutual Assistance In Criminal

Matters And Crime Proceeds

222. Mutual Assistance and Crime Proceeds

223. Confiscated Property – Disposal of

224. Crime and Incidents – Serious

225 Dead Bodies

226 Entry and Search

227 Investigation – Charges

228 Investigation – Dying Declarations and Depositions

229 Investigation - Exhibits

230. Investigation – Finger Prints

231. Investigation – Identification by Photographs

232. Investigation – Identification Parades

233. Investigation – Missing Persons

234. Investigation – Photographs

235. Investigation - Scenes of Crime Section

236. Investigation – Statements

237. Investigation – Sub Judice Cases

238. Investigation – Wanted Persons

239. Diplomatic Immunities – Embassies, High Commissions

240. Juveniles – Treatment of

495
 P.G.O. No. 221

FUGITIVE OFFENDERS, EXTRADITION, MUTUAL

ASSISTANCE IN CRIMINAL MATTERS AND CRIME
PROCEEDS

PART I
ARREST – FUGITIVE OFFENDERS -GENERAL PROVISIONS
General
1. The procedure governing the arrest and extradition of the various categories of persons
who are wanted by the Police Forces of other countries are set out in detail in the paragraphs
that follows in this order.
2. Under no circumstances shall any person be handed over to the Authorities of any
other country unless and until:-
(a) the full legal procedure as set out in this order has been complied with;
(b) the Case File has been seen by the Director of Criminal Investigation and the
Court proceedings initiated by the Director of Public Prosecutions; and
(c) the offender has appeared before a Magistrate and there is no order against his
being surrendered.
PART II
FUGITIVE OFFENDERS (PURSUIT) ACT, CAP. 57 R.E. 2002.
3. (a) The hot pursuit and arrest by members of the Police Forces of adjoining
territories of fugitive offenders who have fled into Tanzania from these countries is permitted
by the Fugitive Offenders (Pursuit) Act.
(b) Under the provisions of this Act the Minister responsible for legal affairs if he
is satisfied that reciprocal arrangements have been made in adjoining countries may define
the area in Tanzania into which the police of such adjoining countries may enter when in
pursuit of an offender and within which they may pursue and arrest that offender. This is
done through a Government Notice published in the gazette.
(c) The intention of this Fugitive Offenders (Pursuit) Act, Cap. 57 R.E 2002 is to
facilitate the immediate pursuit of an offender over the boarder of one territory and into
another in order to effect an arrest. The pursuit must be immediate.
(d) Under no circumstances may any Police Officer cross the front into a
neighbouring territory in order to arrest a wanted person who has been resident there for
some time. All such cases shall be referred at once to the Director of Criminal Investigation
and no action will be taken without his express direction.
4. At present, the following countries have reciprocal arrangements with Tanzania under
the provisions of this Act:
The Republic of Kenya – Fugitive Offenders (Pursuit) (Kenya and Uganda) Order,
through Government Notices Nos. 101 of 1938, 178 of 1947, 161 of 1957 and 222 of 1962.
Powers of Pursuit
5. (a) The Kenya Police – Members of the Kenya Police Force are permitted to enter
Tanzania in pursuit of an offender within the limits of the geographical area defined as
follows :-

496
 P.G.O. No. 221
“Only within the area lying between the Kenya-Tanzania border and an imaginary line
drawn from Tanga along the railway line to Arusha; thence along the Arusha-Makuyuni road
to Makuyuni; thence along the Makuyuni-Oldeani road to mile 47; thence along the
Ngorongoro-Ol Bal Bal (Serengeti Plains)-Kenya border (Ol Puss Imoru) road to the point
south of Loliondo where the road to Banagi Hill joins it; thence along the Banagi road to
Banagi Hill; thence along the Ikoma-Natta-Buhemba-Busegwe road to Busegwe, and thence
along the Mwanza-Musoma road to Musoma”.
(b) The Uganda Police – Members of the Uganda Police are permitted to enter
Tanzania in pursuit of an offender within the area in the Territory lying between the
Uganda/Tanzania border and an imaginary line drawn fifty miles distant from the border.

(c) Any member of the Tanzania Police Force or the Police Forces of the adjoining
countries operating under the provisions of the Laws set out above must wear uniform when
in pursuit of an offender.
Procedure on Arrest
6. Any member of the Tanzania Police or of any adjoining Police Force who pursues and
arrests a fugitive offender in any of the areas of neighbouring countries set out in para. 5 shall
deliver the offender without delay to the police of the territory in which the arrest was made.
The Police of that territory will immediately bring the offender before a Magistrate with a
view to his being surrendered to the territory from which he has fled.
PART III - THE EXTRADITION ACT, CAP. 368 R.E. 2002
General
7. The surrender of fugitive offenders (not covered by the Fugitive Offenders (Pursuit)
Act, Cap. 57 R.E. 2002) to and from Tanzania and other countries in the world is essentially
governed by the Extradition Act, Cap.368.
8. Part II of the Act elaborates procedures for extraditable offences. The Act applies only
where an agreement has been made with any country with respect to the surrender to that
country of any fugitive criminal, pursuant to an order of the Minister responsible for legal
affairs published in the Gazette, subject to any conditions, exceptions and qualifications
which may be specified in the order.

Procedure under Part II of the Extradition Act for the Arrest of an Offender who has
fled from Tanzania to another country
9. The arrest of an offender who has fled from Tanzania to another country will be sought
in accordance with the procedure set out in para 11.
10. When O/C. Station is satisfied that a fugitive has committed an offence listed in the
Schedule to the Act in his station, he shall:-
(a) lay a complaint or file a charge under section 128 of the Criminal Procedure
Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 before a Magistrate having local jurisdiction;
(b) call the witnesses who know the facts of the case before a Magistrate who will
record their depositions in precisely the same manner as if he were holding a proceedings
with a view to committal, except that the accused is not present. The evidence in these
depositions must raise a strong or probable presumption that the accused committed the
offences charged;
(c) give the Magistrate a full description of the accused and also as much
information as possible as to his exact whereabouts in the territory to which he has fled so as
to facilitate his identification, location and arrest.

497
 P.G.O. No. 221
11. If the Magistrate is satisfied that an offence is disclosed against the accused, he will
issue a warrant of arrest under Section 130 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 and at the
conclusion of the hearing will then forward the record to the Registrar of the High Court.
12. The Magistrate will forward an authenticated copy of the record to the Director of
Public Prosecutions who, after examining the depositions, will arrange for the original
depositions and warrant to be authenticated with the public seal of Tanzania.
13. The O/C. Station will at the same time submit a full report of the particulars of the case
and police action taken to the Regional Police Commander and the Director of Criminal
Investigation. If it is anticipated that the fugitive offender may abscond before that territory is
in possession of the authenticated warrant, an application will be included in the report that
the police in the territory to which the fugitive has fled should be requested to apply for a
provisional warrant of arrest pending the arrival of the authenticated warrant and other
documents.
14. After the warrant and other documents have been authenticated, they will be forwarded
for execution by the Tanzania Government to the territory to which the accused has fled.
15. The O/C. Station should then take steps to ensure that an identifying witness and escort
can be made available at the shortest possible notice to proceed to that territory if required.
16. On the arrest of the fugitive in the territory to which he has fled, the Magistrate or
Judge before whom he is taken, will commit him to prison to await his return, if he is
satisfied that the fugitive has been properly identified and that the evidence against him raises
a strong or probable presumption that he committed the offence mentioned in the warrant.

PART IV – THE ARREST OF AN OFFENDER WHO HAS FLED TO TANZANIA

FROM ANOTHER COUNTRY
17. Part II of the Act deals with the surrender between countries which, by reason of the
Act, may seek surrender of fugitives from each other.
18. The jurisdiction conferred by the Act is not exercised in the territory from which the
fugitive has fled, but in the territory to which he has fled and from which it is desired to
obtain his surrender. This is important because it is only Courts having magisterial powers
which can exercise jurisdiction under the Act when surrender from Tanzania is required. It is
essential to ensure that Magistrates who are requested to take action under the provisions of
this Act are, in fact, vested with the necessary powers.
Provisional Warrant of Arrest
19. Whenever any Police Officer receives information by telegram, signal or any other
means, that a fugitive offender from a country covered by this Act is in his station area, he
shall inform the senior officer present in the nearest Police station who shall, in turn, inform
the Regional Commander by the quickest possible means. If there is a danger of the fugitive
offender absconding before the authenticated warrant can be obtained, the Regional
Commander shall nominate an officer to obtain a provisional warrant for the fugitive arrest in
terms of Section 13 of the Act. Such Provisional warrant may, subject to the provisions of
Section 13 of the Act, be issued by a Magistrate on the sworn information of a Police Officer,
or other person who is able to state on oath that from information which he has received, he
believes that the fugitive offender has committed an offence on which his surrender can be
ordered, and that a warrant of arrest for the offence has been issued in the country, in which
the offence is alleged to have been committed.
20. If the senior officer in the Police Station considers that there is insufficient time to
inform the Regional Commander, he shall himself obtain a provisional warrant of arrest and
inform the Regional Commander of his actions at the earliest opportunity.

498
 P.G.O. No. 221
NOTE: There are no powers to effect arrest without warrant of a fugitive offender
under Section 14 (f) of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 unless either a provisional
warrant of arrest is in force, or the authenticated warrant has been backed by the Magistrate
in whose jurisdiction the fugitive offender is hiding.
21. The senior officer in the Police Station orÿÿhe officer nominated by the Reÿÿonal
Commander will then take all necessary steps to effect the arrest of the fugitive offender and
produce him immediately before the Magistrate issuing the provisional warrant of arrest. On
the issue of a provisional warrant, the O/C. Station or other officer shall immediately signal
the following information to the Director of Criminal Investigation:-
(a) particulars of accused (full name and aliases), offence and territory;
(b) date and place of arrest (if effected immediately after issue of the warrant).
22. If the arrest is not effected until some time after the issue of the provisional warrant,
the Director of Criminal Investigation will be informed by signal.
23. It should be noted that the Magistrate will discharge a person arrested under a
provisional warrant unless the original warrant is produced and endorsed within such
reasonable time as may under the circumstances seem requisite.
24. The Director of Criminal Investigation on receipt of the information from the O/C.
Station or other nominated officer, shall take all necessary steps to hasten the receipt of the
authenticated warrant, identifying witness and escort from the neighbouring territory
concerned . If the warrant of arrest is not received within seven days from the date of the
original remand, the officer will produce the fugitive offender before the same Magistrate and
make application of or a further seven days’ remand, informing the Magistrate that the
warrant has not yet been received from the Police Force of the country seeking the fugitive.
25. On receipt of the authenticated warrant, the O/C. Station or other officer nominated by
the Regional Commander shall produce the fugitive before the Magistrate remanding, or if
there has been no previous remand, before the Magistrate having jurisdiction in the area in
which the fugitive is residing. The Magistrate, if satisfied that the warrant was issued by a
person having lawful authority to issue the same, may endorse such warrant, and if satisfied
on oath by the identifying witness that the prisoner is the person name or otherwise described
in the warrant, may order the prisoner to be returned to the territory in which the warrant,
may order the prisoner to be returned to the territory in which the warrant was issued and for
that purpose to be delivered into the custody of the persons to whom the warrant is addressed,
and to be held in custody and conveyed to the neighbouring territory in which the warrant
was issued, there to be dealt with according to Law. The O/C. Station shall then hand the
prisoner over to the escort from the neighbouring Police Force, and make arrangements for
their departure.
26 The departure of the prisoner and escort from Tanzania shall be reported by signal to
the Director of Criminal Investigation.

PART V – THE ARREST OF AN OFFENDER WHO HAS FLED FROM TANZANIA

TO ANOTHER COUNTRY
27 An O/C. Station who has reason to believe that a person who has committed an
offence in Tanzania has fled to any of the countries covered by the Act shall at once inform
the Regional Commander, who will nominate either the O/C. Station or some other officer to
take the following action :-
(a) Swear information before any Resident Magistrate charging the accused with
the offence and obtain a warrant of arrest thereon in the ordinary manner as if the accused
were in Tanzania. All such warrants should contain a full description of the person wanted
and an endorsement showing whether bail is to be accepted and, if so, the amount thereof.

499
 P.G.O. No. 221
(b) Ensure that the warrant is sealed with the seal of the Subordinate Court and
signed by the Resident Magistrate issuing it.
(c) Signal CIDPOL, Dar es Salaam, giving the following information :-
(i) Full name and aliases of fugitive.
(ii) Offence set out in warrant.
(iii) Court issuing warrant.
(iv) Address in neighbouring territory where fugitive is residing (this must be as
complete as possible)
(d) Forward the warrant, together with the Case File, to the Director of Criminal
Investigation for onward transmission to the Attorney – General who will advise whether or
not the case is a proper one to be dealt with under the Extradition Act.
28. The Director of Criminal Investigation on receipt of the signal referred to in para. 27
(c), shall immediately consult the Attorney General and decide whether immediately to
request the neighbouring Police Force to apply for a provisional warrant of arrest or await the
arrival or the Police Case File.
29. Should the Attorney General decide that the case is a proper one for authentication of
the warrant, he will forward the warrant to the Minister for Justice for authentication.
30. As soon as the warrant has been authenticated, it will be returned to the Director of
Criminal Investigation who will either :-
(a) forward it to the territory in which the accused is under arrest on a provisional
warrant (see para 28) and inform the O/C. Station or other officer who originated the warrant,
by signal, that the warrant has been sent and that he should send the identifying witness and
escort to the Police Station of the area where the fugitive is on remand; or
(b) return it to the originating Station pending information from the police of the
neighbouring territory in which the fugitive is, or is believed to be residing, that he has been
arrested. When the Director of Criminal Investigation receives information that the arrest has
been effected, he will instruct the O/C. Station, to forward the identifying witness, with escort
and warrant to the Police Station arresting the fugitive.
31. The Police of the territory to which the accused has fled may then produce the warrant
to a Magistrate duly appointed for the purpose of the Act, who may endorse it for execution
within his jurisdiction.
32. The offender, on arrest or if already on remand, will normally be produced before the
Magistrate. The person identifying the prisoner will normally give evidence on oath that he is
the person named in the warrant and the Magistrate should then order the prisoner to be
returned to Tanzania. The escort may then proceed with the prisoner back to Tanzania and on
arrival will immediately produce him before the O/C. Police Station or other nominated
officer, who will at once take him before the Magistrate who issued the original warrant and
inform CIDPOL by signal.

PART VI – EXTRADITION – ARREST OF FUGITIVE OFFENDERS IN FOREIGN

COUNTRIES AND SURRENDER OF FUGITIVE OFFENDERS TO FOREIGN
COUNTRIES

33. The surrender of an offender who has fled to a foreign country from Tanzania (or vice
versa) is a lengthy procedure and will only be considered in criminal cases of a serious
nature.

500
 P.G.O. No. 221
34. All such Case Files will be referred to the Director of Criminal Investigation for
perusal by the Attorney General who will issue detailed advice in each case.

501
 P.G.O. No. 222
MUTUAL ASSISTANCE AND CRIME PROCEEDS
PART I
MUTUAL ASSISTANCE IN CRIMINAL MATTERS ACT, CAP. 254 R.E. 2002
1 (a) The procedure governing involvement of Police Officers in mutual assistance
in criminal matters is detailed in the orders that follow in this part.
(b) Mutual assistance in criminal matters involves:-
(i) the obtaining of evidence, documents or other articles;
(ii) the provision of documents and other records;
(iii) the location and identification of witnesses or suspects;
(iv) the execution of requests for search and seizure;
(v) the making of arrangements for persons to give evidence or assist in
investigations;
(vi) the forfeiture or confiscation of property in respect of offences;
(vii) the recovery of pecuniary penalties in respect of offences;
(viii) the interdicting of dealings in property, or the freezing of assets, that
may be forfeited or confiscated, or that may be needed to satisfy pecuniary penalties imposed,
in respect of offences;
(ix) the location of property that may be forfeited, or that may be needed to
satisfy pecuniary penalties imposed, in respect of offences; and
(x) the service of documents.
2. Only Police Officers of or above the rank of corporal are allowed to deal with mutual
assistance matters.
Request for Mutual Assistance by Tanzania
3. If during investigation it appears that important evidence in relation to the case cannot
be obtained within Tanzania, the matter shall immediately be referred to the Director of
Criminal Investigations.
4. If the Director of Criminal Investigation determines that the matter should be pursued,
he may refer it to the Director of Public Prosecutions or use other available alternatives.
Mutual Assistance for other countries
5. If during a search in accordance with a warrant issued in terms of the Mutual
Assistance in Criminal Matters Act a Police Officer finds a thing which he believes on
reasonable grounds to be relevant to the proceedings or investigation in the foreign country,
he may seize the thing wholly or partly and hand it over immediately to his superior officers.
6. (a) The Director of Criminal Investigation will be informed immediately of such
seizure and upon being informed the Director of Criminal Investigation shall issue
appropriate orders with respect to custody pending a direction in writing from the Attorney –
General as to the manner in which the thing is to be dealt with.
(b) If written directions are not received from the Attorney General within 21 days
the Director of Criminal Investigation will issue disposal instructions with regard to the
seized thing to be implemented immediately.
7. A Police Officer who executes a search warrant in accordance with paragraph 3 to this
order shall, as soon as practicable after the execution of the warrant, give to the person

502
 P.G.O. No. 222
searched, or to the owner or occupier of the land or premises searched, or leave in prominent
position on such land or at premises, as the case requires, a notice setting out-
(a) the name and rank of the Police Officer;
(b) the name of the Magistrate who issued the warrant and the day on which it was
issued; and
(c) a description of anything seized and removed in accordance with the warrant.
8. A Police Officer acting in accordance with paragraph 3 to this order shall be guided by
the provisions of P.G.O. 226 in conducting the search.
9. Execution of mutual assistance search warrants prohibits a Police Officer to carry out a
search by way of an examination of a body cavity of the person searched.
PART II - THE PROCEEDS OF CRIME ACT CAP 256 RE 2002
10. Under this part of this order proceeds of crime means any property that is derived or
realised, directly or indirectly, by any person from–
(a) the commission of any serious offence;
(b) any act or omission which;
(i) occurred outside the United Republic;
(ii) related to narcotic drugs and psychotropic substances; and
(iii) would if they had occurred in the United Republic, have constituted an
arrestable offence or a serious narcotic drugs and psychotropic substances offence.
(c) The responsibility of the Police Force is to investigate or monitor the disposal of
property derived or realised by any person from the commission of an offence.
11. Where property is suspected of being a proceed of crime and is seized the Director of
Criminal Investigation or other officer authorised by him in writing shall arrange for the
property to be kept and shall ensure that all reasonable steps are taken to properly preserve it.
12. After the seizure has taken place, the Director of Criminal Investigation will refer the
matter to the Attorney General for application of an interdiction or a forfeiture order in
respect of the property seized. Where the application is refused the Director of Criminal
Investigation shall direct a Commanding Officer responsible to arrange for the property to be
returned to the person from whom it was seized as soon as practicable.
13. Monitoring of suspected crime proceeds by police is normally done under a Court
order following an application by the Director of Public Prosecutions. Under no circumstance
will the existence of a monitoring order be disclosed to any person (including a Court of law)
other than a member of the Force in the performance of his duties.
14. In any case, where a Police Officer is required by a Magistrate to disclose the existence
of a monitoring order, such officer shall draw the attention of the Magistrate concerned of the
provisions of Section 66 of the Crime Proceeds Act, Cap. 256 RE 2002 which prohibits
disclosure of such information.
15. The Director of Criminal Investigation will without delay communicate to the
Attorney General any information of a monitoring order made in relation to an offence
committed in a foreign country.

503
 P.G.O. No. 223
CONFISCATED PROPERTY – DISPOSAL OF

1. All property for which a Court Order of forfeiture is made becomes the property of
Government. Property in the custody of the police which is the subject of an order of
forfeiture should be disposed of in accordance with the provisions of this order.
Arms and Ammunition
2. Arms and ammunition which are confiscated by Court order shall be dealt with in
accordance with the instructions contained in P.G.O. No. 276.
Explosives
3. Confiscated explosives pending disposal shall be stored in a safe place after
consultation with the local Inspector of Explosives. Explosives shall normally be destroyed
by dumping in deep water, but where this is not possible the disposal shall be carried out
under the directions of an Inspector of Explosives.
Dangerous Weapons
4. Application should be made to a Magistrate for a destruction order to dispose of
confiscated weapons in the hands of the police. In suitable cases, officers will forward the
weapons to the Director of Criminal Investigation for inclusion in the Police Museum.
Economic and Organized crimes
5. Forfeiture Orders are made by a Court under Section 60 (5) of the Economic and
Organised Crime Control Act, Cap. 200 R.E. 2002 and the Court may, under this Section,
give directions for the disposal of such property.
Bribes
6. Forfeiture Orders are made under Section 17 of the Prevention of Corruption Act,
Cap. 329 R.E 2002. This Section provides that all monies so forfeited shall be paid into the
treasury and shall form part of the general revenue. P.G.O. No. 241 shall also apply.
Property Seized by Police under the Criminal Procedure Act or any other law
7. Property seized by the police under the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 or any other
law and confiscated by a Court shall be dealt with in accordance with the Criminal Procedure
Act, Cap. 20 or the applicable law.
Dangerous Drugs and Poisons
8. Where poisons and dangerous drugs are confiscated, the officer having charge of
them should obtain a Court Order authorizing him to hand them over to the nearest Medical
Officer for disposal.
Stolen Property and Suspected Stolen Property
9. Stolen and suspected stolen property seized by the police will be disposed of in
accordance with the provisions of Section 43 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act,
Cap.322 R.E.2002 if the owner(s) cannot be traced.
Unclaimed Property
10. Police Officers are required to take charge of all unclaimed moveable property and to
furnish an inventory and description of it to a Magistrate. The Magistrate shall give an Order
for the detention of such property and cause a notice to be posted outside the Police Station
listing such property and calling on persons who may have a claim to it to establish it within
six months of the issue of the notice. Where property remains unclaimed, the property may be
sold by order of the Magistrate and once half of the proceeds of such sale credited to the
Police Rewards Fund, such proportion of the balance as the Magistrate may direct paid to the

504
 P.G.O. No. 223
finder and the balance paid to the general revenue of Tanzania. P.G.O. No. 304 shall also
apply.
Exhibits Register
11. The O/C. Station shall ensure that Column 6 and Column 9 of the Exhibits Register
are completed in all the circumstances mentioned in this Order. The signature of the officer
disposing of the property shall always be recorded in Column 13.
Storage of Confiscated Property
12. Confiscated property shall be disposed of expeditiously. It shall be retained in the
Police Exhibit Store pending disposal. In cases where the Court is responsible for its disposal
and has no suitable place in which to store it, then the property may be stored in a Police
Exhibit store and dealt with under the provisions of P.G.O. No. 229 insofar as safe custody
and labelling only is concerned.

505
 P.G.O. No. 224
CRIME AND INCIDENTS – SERIOUS

1. Commanding Officers are directly responsible to the Inspector General for:-

(a) the effective policing of the areas for which they themselves are responsible;
(b) exercising personal supervision wherever and whenever necessary over the
prevention and detection of crime;
(c) ensuring that the investigation and prosecution of cases is effectively and
efficiently carried out.
2. Commanding Officers are required to visit without delay every serious incident
within their commands unless they are satisfied that their personal attendance is either
unnecessary or impracticable.
3. O/C. Regional and District C.I.D. units are required to attend personally at the scene
of all murders, armed robberies and other crimes of a very serious nature unless specifically
exempted there from by their Commanding Officers.
4. O/C. Districts and Stations will similarly attend at scenes of crime and other incidents
of a serious nature, including serious nature, including serious traffic accidents, fires and
disasters, unless physically unable to do so.
5. O/C. Traffic Sections will attend all serious traffic accidents.
6. All officers to whom this order applies will take all necessary steps to ensure that
they are in touch with their headquarters during their absence at the scene of an incident or
crime.

506
 P.G.O. No. 225
DEAD BODIES

PART I
1. In urban areas a Police Officer who finds a dead body in the open or in enclosed
premises in circumstances where death is due, or is suspected to be due, to reasons other than
natural causes, shall send a message to the nearest Police Station by the quickest possible
means. The officer awaiting the arrival of an investigating officer shall:-
(a) not disturb the body which should be left in the position in which it was found;
(b) remain with the body and, if possible, cover it up;
(c) ensure that the area around the body is not disturbed;
(d) cover any footprints without disturbing them;
(e) search for weapons in the immediate vicinity of the scene but shall not touch
or remove them;
(f) collect together any witness there may be at the scene.
2. In rural areas at some distance from a Police Station, a Police Officer who finds a
dead body in similar circumstances as set out above, shall take the same steps as set out for
the finding of a body in urban areas, except that if there is likely to be considerable delay in
obtaining an investigating officer, he shall first send a message to the nearest Police Station
or Local Government Authority and then take steps to investigate the circumstances of the
death himself.
3. On receipt of a report at a Police Station of the finding of a body in suspicious
circumstances, the O/C. Station will take immediate action as provided for in P.G.O. No. 311.
4. At the scene, the investigating officer shall endeavour to establish the cause of death.
If he is of the opinion that the person has met his death by unnatural means, i.e.
(a) has committed suicide; or
(b) has been killed accidentally; or
(c) had died in circumstances which suggests that an offence may have been
committed, he shall :-
(i) arrange for photographs to be taken of the scene and body before the
body is searched or moved in any way.
(ii) record a description on the state and position of the body in relation to
its surroundings and other circumstances having a bearing on the case;
(iii) search the scene for weapons or other evidence and make a precise
record of the articles found and their position in relation to the body;
(iv) carefully search the body and make a complete list of any articles
found thereon or coming into possession of the police in connection with the case. These
articles will be detailed in the officer’s notebook and subsequently entered in the Report
Book and Case File. If the body has already been searched and articles and/or clothing
removed before the arrival of Police they will be taken over by the officer against an itemised
receipt, a signed copy of which will be retained by him;
(v) collect together all witnesses to the incident and record their names
and particulars in his notebook;

507
 P.G.O. No. 225
(vi) at the scene of any suicide, make a thorough search for any letter left
by the deceased. Such letter will be put in as evidence at the inquest, but in no circumstances
are the contents to be divulged to the Press;
(vii) take all necessary steps to have the body identified. If identification
before removal is not possible, the body shall be fingerprinted and photographed in the
clothes in which it was found and as far as possible in a lifelike and natural position. The
photographs will show one full face and one in profile. The negatives, with one print, and the
fingerprint forms will be dispatched to the Forensic Bureau. Other copies of the photographs
will be attached to a description which shall be circulated to neighbouring Police Stations.
(viii) before removal of the body from the scene, cause a Dead Body Label
(P.F. 165) to be tied to the ankle or other suitable part of the body.
(ix) cause the body to be removed to a public mortuary, Police Station or
other suitable place, if possible in a dead box pending a post-mortem examination.
5 When a body is found and there are no suspicious circumstances, the officer at the
scene will telephone or send word to the nearest Police Station and take the following :-
(a) Note the exact locality in which the body was found;
(b) Stand by the body until the arrival of the stretcher or dead box to remove it;
(c) Convey the body to the nearest Police Station and report to the Charge Room
officer on duty;
(d) Inform the District Commissioner.
6. If, after preliminary investigation, it appears to the police that a person has died either
a violent or unnatural death or has died in prison or police custody, the O/C. Station
concerned shall, without delay, cause notice of the death in the Form “B” to the Inquests Act,
Cap. 24 R.E.2002, to be sent to the Coroner having local jurisdiction to hold an inquest,
stating any particulars concerning the cause of the death disclosed by the investigation and
giving an opinion as to whether or not the death is due to any unlawful act or omission.
7. The Coroner, on receipt of Form “B” and after considering whether an investigation
into the circumstances of the death is necessary may, by written order in the Form “C” to the
Inquests Act, Cap. 24 R.E.2002, require any Government medical officer or in the absence of
such officer, any other medical practitioner, within his jurisdiction, to make an examination
of the body and to report thereon.
8 In cases of emergency where it would be impracticable for the O/C. Station to secure
a Coroner’s order, the O/C. Station may exercise the authority conferred on a Coroner in
paragraph 7, above (P.F. 99).
9 The medical practitioner, upon receipt of Form “C” is required by the Inquests Act,
Cap. 24 R.E.2002 to carry out immediately an examination of the body with a view to
determining the cause of death and to ascertain the circumstances connected therewith.
10 Where a post-mortem examination is ordered the investigating officer shall:-
(a) attend, and inform the pathologist of any information surrounding the
person’s death which may assist in his examination of the body;
(b) ensure that the body is properly identified to the pathologist performing the
post-mortem, if possible by a person who witnessed the fatal injuries being inflicted or,
failing that, by the person or Police Officer who first discovered the body;
(c) cause all clothing to be removed from the body in his presence and such
clothing will be treated in the same way as articles found on the deceased and full details
recorded in his notebook. Details of any marks, particularly of a transitory nature, e.g., damp
patches, will also be entered in his notebook and subsequently transferred to the Case File.

508
 P.G.O. No. 225
Any articles which are out required as exhibits, shall be handed over to a person entitled to
them, or disposed of in accordance with P.G.O. No. 306.
11 At the conclusion of the post-mortem examinaÿÿon the medical practitioner is
required to submit a report, in writing, in the Form “C” of the Inquests Act, 24 Cap. R.E.2002
to the Coroner who issued the Post-Mortem Order. This form sets out the cause of death and
is signed and dated by the medical practitioner. One copy is forwarded to the O/C. station
concerned who will, on receipt of the copy of Form “C” arrange with the Coroner for a
suitable date for the Inquest.
PART II
POST MORTEM EXAMINATIONS AND INQUESTS
Inquests
12 Coroners are not bound by rules of evidence and the police, when acting as Coroner’s
Officers must collect and present all available information likely to assist the Coroner in
deciding on the cause of death.
13 When, during an inquiry, it becomes apparent from the evidence that an offence has
been committed in respect of the matter being inquired into by the Coroner and if he is of the
opinion that the grounds are sufficient to warrant criminal proceedings, he is required by
Section 8 (1) of the Inquests Act, Cap. 24 R.E.2002 to stay the Inquest until the result of such
proceedings is known.
14 Where an Inquest has been stayed by the Coroner to enable criminal proceedings to
take place and such criminal proceedings have resulted in some person or persons being
convicted, acquitted, discharged or if a Nolle Prosequi has been entered, the Coroner may :-
(a) re-open the Inquest and hear additional evidence or take cognizance of
depositions recorded in such criminal proceedings and thereby arrive at conclusions on which
to base his finding; or
(b) if he is of the opinion that no public benefit is likely to result from further
inquiries, certify his opinion to that effect on the proceedings, close the Inquest under Section
28 of the Inquests Act, Cap. 24 R.E.2002 and forward a copy of the proceedings to the
Director of Public Prosecutions
15 Where the Coroner reaches a finding of murder by person or persons unknown a
copy of the proceedings must be forwarded to the Inspector General in accordance with
Section 28 of the Inquest Act, Cap. 24 R.E.2002.
17 The Railway Administration will be given sufficient warning to enable them to be
represented at any inquiry into the death of any person caused by railway accident.
17 A request for adjournment will be made in all cases where deaths are due to mining
activities until an inquiry under the Mining Act, Cap. 123 R.E 2002 has been completed.
18 An Inquest cannot normally be held without a body. The fact that a person is reported
missing in circumstances giving rise to suspicion is not in itself sufficient to warrant an
Inquest. Where, however, there is evidence to establish beyond any doubt that a person has
met his/her death but the body cannot be recovered, then an Inquest may be held (e.g.
drowning at sea).
Exhumation
19 A Magistrate’s Order in accordance with Section 5 of the Inquests Act, Cap. 24
R.E.2002 must be obtained before an exhumation may be carried out. A witness should be
present to identify the grave and, if possible, the body. It is essential that a medical officer be
present at the disinterment. Where death by poisoning is suspected, specimen of the earth
immediately adjacent to the corpse or coffin should be taken and sealed in jars which will be
labelled to show from which position relevant to the corpse or coffin it was obtained, e.g.

509
 P.G.O. No. 225
“above”, “below”. Where it is the opinion of the Police Officer or medical officer that the
transportation of a corpse from its place of interment to the mortuary might be injurious to
public health the post-mortem examination will be conducted at the graveside and the body
be re-interred. In all cases where it is necessary to transport should be used and on no account
should requests be made for the use of medical ambulances. Expenses incurred in the
transport of corpses should be met from the Police Transport and Travelling Vote.

510
 P.G.O. No. 226
ENTRY AND SEARCH
PART I
General
1. The entry and search of premises shall only be effected, either: -
(a) on the authority of a warrant of search; or
(b) in exercise of specific powers conferred by law on certain Police Officers to
enter and search without warrant.
(c) Under no circumstances may police enter private premises unless they either
hold a warrant or are empowered to enter under specific authority contained in the various
laws of Tanzania.
Entry and search with warrant
2. (a) Whenever an O/C. Station, O/C. C.I.D. Unit or investigating officer
considers it necessary to enter private premises in order to take possession of any article or
thing by which, or in respect of which, an offence has been committed, or anything which is
necessary to the conduct of an investigation into any offence, he shall make application to a
Court for a warrant of search under Section 38 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E.
2002. The person named in the warrant will conduct the search.
(b) If the search is to be made between the hours of sunset and sunrise, the
Magistrate shall be asked to authorise the execution of the warrant at any hour of the day or
night (Section 40 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.
(c) Where an officer referred to in (a) above receives information or has reasons
to believe that a person wanted in connection with the commission of a criminal offence is in
any building, he shall apply to the local Magistrate for a Warrant of Arrest.
(d) Where anything is seized in pursuance of search the officer seizing the thing
shall issue a receipt acknowledging the seizure of that thing, bearing the signature of the
owner or occupier of the premises or his near relative or other person for the time being in
possession or control of the premises, and the signature of witnesses to the search, if any.
(e) Police Officers are reminded that Section 38(4) of the Criminal Procedure
Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, states that whoever, being empowered by law to order, authorise or
conduct the search or any person, place, building, vessel, carriage or receptacle, vexatiously
and without having reasonable grounds for doing, orders, authorises or conducts such search
is guilty of an offence and upon conviction is liable to a fine not exceeding three thousand
shillings or imprisonment for a term not exceeding one year.
PART II
Entry and search without warrant
3. If a Magistrate cannot be found, or delay in obtaining a warrant of search is likely to
prejudice the investigation of a case, entry for the purpose of search may be effected without
warrant under specific Sections of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.322
R.E.2002 and of certain other Acts, provided that the conditions set out in the law are
fulfilled in every case.
4. (a) The main legal provisions covering entry for the purpose of search without a
warrant are contained in Section 34 (1) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act,
Cap.322 R.E.2002, as quoted hereunder: -
“Whenever a Police Officer not being lower in rank than a Assistant
Inspector has reasonable grounds for believing that anything necessary of or the purposes of
an investigation into any alleged offence which he is authorised to investigate may be found

511
 P.G.O. No. 226
in any place within the limits of any place or Police Station of which he is in charge, or to
which he is attached, and that such thing cannot in his opinion be otherwise obtained without
undue delay, such officer after recording in writing the grounds of his belief and specifying in
such writing so far as possible the thing for which search is to be made, any, notwithstanding
the provisions of Section 38 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, search or
cause to be searched for such thing in any place within the limits of such police station”.
NOTE: “Reasonable grounds for believing” is a question for the Court to decide, having
regard to all the circumstances on which the officer bases his belief.
(b) Where officer acts under the provisions of Section 34 (1) of the Police Force
and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.322 R.E.2002 as quoted above, he must issue a search order
on P.F. 91 and, if practicable, conduct the search in personÿÿÿÿ he cannot do so and there is
no officer of or above the rank of Assistant Inspector present at the time, he may, after
recording, in writing, his reasons for so doing, require any Police Officer to make the search
and he shall deliver to such officer an order, in writing, on P.F. 91 specifying the place to be
searched and, so far as possible, the thing in such place.
(c) Copies of every order made under Section 34 (1) shall be sent to the nearest
Magistrate as soon as possible.
5. The powers of entry and search without a warrant contained in Section 34 (1) of the
Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.322 R.E.2002 are governed, so far as their
provisions may apply, by Sections 40, 43 and 44 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E.
2002. These are the Sections which govern the time at which a search warrant may be
executed, the manner of its execution and the detention of the property seized. These Sections
are quoted below: -
(a) “SECTION 40, CRIMINAL PROCEDURE ACT CAP. 20 R.E. 2002.
Every search warrant may be issued and executed on any day (including
Sunday) and may be executed between the hours of sunrise and sunset but the Court may,
upon application by a Police Officer or other person to whom it is addressed permit him to
execute it at any hour”.
(b) “SECTION 43, CRIMINAL PROCEDURE ACT, CAP. 20 R.E. 2002
(i) Whenever any building or other place liable to search is closed, any
person residing in or being in charge of such building or place shall, on demand of the Police
Officer or other person executing the search warrant, and on production of the warrant, allow
him free ingress thereto, afford all reasonable facilities for a search inside and allow him free
egress from it.
(ii) If ingress into or egress from such building or other place cannot be
so obtained, the Police Officer or other person executing the search warrant may proceed in
the manner prescribed by Section 19 or Section 20,
(iii) Where any person in or about such building or place is reasonably
suspected of concealing about his person any article for which search should be made, such
person may be searched. If such person is a woman, the provisions of Section 26 shall be
observed. Section 26 provides that if a woman is to be searched, the search shall be made by
another woman with strict regard to decency”.
NOTE: For further elaboration of (ii) above, see paragraphs 8 and 9 of this order.
(c) “SECTION 44, CRIMINAL PROCEDURE ACT, CAP. 20 R.E. 2002
(i) When any such article is seized and brought before a Court, it may
be detained until the conclusion of the case of the investigation, reasonable care being taken
for its preservation.

512
 P.G.O. No. 226
(ii) If any appeal is made, or if any person is committed for trial, the
Court may order it to be further detained for the purpose of the appeal or the trial.
(iii) If no appeal is made, or if no person is committed for trial, the Court
shall direct such article to be restored to the person from whom it was taken, unless the Court
sees fit or is authorised or required by law to dispose of it otherwise”.
6. Where a search is conducted under Section 34 of the Police Force and Auxiliary
Services Act, Cap.322 R.E.2002 or under Section 38 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20
R.E. 2002, the police are bound by Sub-Section 34 (6) of the Police Force and Auxiliary
Services Act, Cap.322 R.E.2002 to permit the occupant, or some other person on his behalf,
to attend at the search, if they so with.
Entry and Search to Effect an Arrest without a warrant
7. Whenever possible a Police Officer shall arrest under warrant, but in an emergency,
or where a warrant cannot be obtained without undue delay, he may arrest without a warrant,
if legally employed to do so. Powers of arrest without warrant are as follows: -
“SECTION 14 – CRIMINAL PROCEDURE ACT, CAP. 20 R.E. 2002”
Any Police Officer may, without an order from a Magistrate and without a warrant,
arrest:-
(a) any person who commits a breach of the peace in his presence;
(b) any person who wilfully obstructs a Police Officer while in the execution of
his duty, or who has escaped or attempts to escape from lawful custody;
(c) any person in whose possession anything is found which may reasonably be
suspected to be stolen property or who may reasonably be suspected of having committed an
offence with reference to such thing;
(d) any person whom he finds lying or loitering in any highway, yard, or other
place during the night and whom he suspects upon reasonable grounds of having committed
or being about to commit an offence or who has in his possession without lawful excuse any
offensive weapon or house breaking implement;
(e) any person for whom he has reasonable cause to believe a warrant of arrest
has been issued;
(f) any person whom he suspects upon reasonable grounds of having been
concerned in any act committed at any place out of Tanzania which, if committed in Tanzania
, would have been punishable as an offence, and for which he is, under the Extradition Act
Cap. 368 or otherwise, liable to be apprehended and detained in Tanzania;
(g) any person who does any act which is calculated to insult the national
emblem or the national flag;
(h) any person whom he suspects of being a loiterer”.
“SECTION 28 OF THE CRIMINAL PROCEDURE ACT CAP. 20 R.E. 2002”
Additional powers of arrest are given to any officer in charge of a Police station who
may arrest or cause to be arrested without warrant:
(a) any person found taking precautions to conceal his presence within the limits
of such station under circumstances which afford reason to believe that he is taking such
precautions with a view to committing an arrest able offence;
(b) any person within the limits of such station who has no ostensible means of
subsistence or who cannot give a satisfactory account of himself,
(c) any person who is by repute an habitual robber, house breaker or thief, or an
habitual receiver of stolen property, knowing it to be stolen or who by repute habitually

513
 P.G.O. No. 226
commits extortion or in order to commit extortion, habitually puts or attempts to put persons
in fear of injury”.
8. Should a criminal against whom a warrant of arrest is in force, or who is suspected
to have committed an offence for which a Police Officer could arrest him without a warrant,
enter, or is in any building or place, then that Police Officer may, under Section 19 of the
Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 after fulfilling certain conditions, enter that
building or place, if necessary, by force.
9. Section 19 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 is quoted hereunder:
“(1) If any person acting under a warrant of arrest, or any Police Officer having
authority to arrest, has reason to believe that the person to be arrested has entered into or is
within any house or place, that person or Police Officer shall demand of the person residing
in or being in charge of the house or place admission into that house or place, and the person
residing in or in charge of it shall allow him free entrance into and afford all reasonable
facilities for a search, within that house or place.
(2) If entrance into that house or place cannot be obtained under the preceding Sub-
Section, it shall be lawful in any case for a person acting under a warrant, and in any case in
which a warrant may issue, but cannot be obtained without affording the person to be arrested
an opportunity to escape, for a Police Officer to enter such place and search within it, and in
order to effect an entrance into the house or place, to break open any outer or inner door or
window of any house or place, whether that of the person to be arrested or of any other
person or otherwise effect entry into such house or place, if after notification of his authority
and purpose and demand of admittance duly made, he cannot otherwise obtain admittance,
subject to Sub-Section (3).
(3) If any such house or place is in an apartment in the actual occupancy of a woman
(not the person to be arrested) who, according to custom, does not appear in public, such
person or Police Officer shall, before entering such apartment, give notice to the woman that
she is at liberty to withdraw and shall afford her every reasonable facility for withdrawing,
and may then break open the apartment and enter it.”
Search to be Planned
10. When the warrant of search or arrest has been issued, the Police Officer to whom the
warrant is directed shall plan the search operation in advance, due consideration being given
to the following: -
(a) the object of the search;
(b) the situation of the house or premises to be searched;
(c) the character of the occupants of the house or premises; and
(d) if the property for which search is being made is such that it can be thrown
out of the windows on the approach of the search party, or if it is likely that any person on the
premises will try and escape, the search party must be of such strength as to permit the
cordoning of the house or place to be searched and the personnel placed in such positions that
they can see the windows and doors of the premises and prevent the escape of any person
therein.
Method of Effecting Entry
11. The officer-in-charge of the party, or the Police Officer about to search, may at his
discretion request a local leader or two responsible inhabitants of the area to accompany the
search party, unless the circumstances are such that there is no time to secure their services.
12. When the premises to be searched is a dwelling house, the officer-in-charge of the
search party shall knock, identify himself, give notice of his authority and the business on
which he has come and demand admittance in a firm but Courteous tone. If admittance is

514
 P.G.O. No. 226
refused or the demand ignore, the officer, after two or three attempts to gain normal
admittance, may effect an entrance into the premises by breaking open any outer door or
window.
13. When entry is required in order to search for evidence which may be destroyed by
the occupants, the officer-in-charge of the search party will proceed in accordance with para.
12, except that he may break it at once if his first demand for admittance is refused or
ignored. Where possible, the warrant of search or other authority should be shown to the
occupant.
14. Where entry is required in order to effect the arrest of a dangerous or armed criminal
or where it is believed the occupants are armed or desperate and armed resistance may be
offered, adequate precautions must be taken to reduce the risk of injuries or loss of life. The
officer-in-charge of the police party will normally proceed in accordance with para. 13, but
may break in without giving advance warning if he considers that it would be too dangerous
to do otherwise. The speed with which entry is to be obtained will depend upon the degree of
danger to be expected from the occupants.
15. Providing that if any such place is an apartment in the sole occupancy of a woman
(not being the person to be arrested) who, according to custom, does not appear in public,
such Police Officer shall, before entering such apartment, give notice to the woman that she
is at liberty to withdraw and shall afford her every reasonable facility for withdrawing and
may then break open the apartment and enter it.
16. It is to be noticed that the police have the same powers for breaking open inner
doors and windows to effect entry as they have for breaking open outer doors and windows.
Method of Effecting a Search of Premises
17. Whenever a house or premises is to be searched, it is essential that the search should
be thoroughly carried out with as little inconvenience to the occupants as possible and that no
unnecessary damage is done to property, and that the search is so conducted that full
advantage may be made of the evidence which may be found. The search will be conducted
having regard to the following points: -
(a) Where entry is gained to the house or place, the occupier shall be informed
of the reasons for the search and shown the search warrant (if the search is by virtue of a
warrant). He should then be asked if he has the articles or person for which the search is
being made on the premises. The officer should make a note of the reply in his notebook.
(b) The services of the local leader or two independent witnesses, who should
be present throughout the search, should be obtained. This is to ensure that he or they may be
in a position to give supporting evidence if anything incriminating is found and to refute
allegations that the search was roughly carried out and property damaged.
(c) The occupier of the house should be asked if he has any jewellery or money
on the premises. If he has, he should be asked to produce them and if they are not the
property for which search is being made) they should then be retained by the occupier on his
own person. This will effectively prevent any subsequent allegations that money, watches or
jewellery were stolen by a member of the search party.
(d) The search should be methodically carried out to ensure that no part of the
premises is missed.
(e) When all the rooms of the building have been searched, the outhouses,
roofs, gardens, tops of trees, etc., should then be searched.
(f) If anything incriminating is found, a note shall be made of the place, i.e.,
cupboard, box, etc., in the officer’s notebook. This is necessary as it may be subsequently
alleged that the article was found in the room of a lodger or some other person or, possibly,
planted in the house by an enemy. The officer finding the article should also note the

515
 P.G.O. No. 226
approximate position of the article in relation to a window or door which is accessible from
the outside.
(g) Care should be exercised when conducting a search to ensure that no
damage is done to property and that property is not unnecessarily disturbed. Where, for
instance, clothing, etc., is removed from cupboards or boxes, it should be replaced as it was
before commencement of search before leaving premises.
18. On completion of the search, a search report will be made out at the scene, giving
details of all articles seized, a copy of which shall be handed to the occupier.
19.The search report shall state clearly that nothing other than the articles enumerated on the
report were taken away and that no damage was done. The occupier should be asked if he is
satisfied that the search was conducted in proper manner and, if he replies in the affirmative,
the fact should be stated in the search report. The Police Officer conducting the search, the
occupier of the premises, if he is willing, having been asked, the local leader or two
responsible inhabitants should sign the report.
Search of vessel, boat, aircraft or vehicle
20.Police Officers are also empowered by the Section 25 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap.
20 R.E. 2002 to stop, detain and search vessel, boat, aircraft or vehicle. The Section states as
follows:-
(1) Subject to the provisions of Sections 50 and 51 of this Act (CPA), any Police Officer may
do any or all of the following things namely, stop, search and detain:–
(a) any vessel, boat, aircraft or vehicle in or upon which there is reasonable cause to suspect
that there are:–
(i) any stolen goods;
(ii) any things used or intended to be used in the commission of an offence;
(iii) without lawful excuse, any offensive weapons, an article of disguise or any article
prohibited under any law;
(b) any person who is reasonably suspected of having or conveying in any manner any of the
articles mentioned in paragraph (a).
(2) Subject to the provisions of Subsection (3), if at the expiry of the time referred to in
Section 50 for interviewing a person no application for extension of time is made or if the
application is made and refused, the vessel, boat, aircraft, vehicle, or the person, as the case
may be, shall be released and in the case of the latter, any goods seized from him shall be
restored to him.
(3) Where the time for interviewing a person is extended pursuant to an appropriate
application referred to in Subsection (2), a Magistrate shall, where it is necessary, order that
any vessel, boat, aircraft or vehicle be detained in order to facilitate further investigation or
for use as an exhibit in Courÿÿproceedings.

516
 P.G.O. No. 227
INVESTIGATION –CHARGES

1. (a) When an accused person who has been arrested without a warrant is brought
before a Magistrate, a formal charge, containing a statement of the offence with which the
accused is charged, shall be signed and presented by the Police Officer preferring the charge.
(b) Charges to be laid before the subordinate Courts will be drawn up on P.F. 9,
in duplicate, with particular care and in accordance with the following instructions :-
(i) Name, tribe/nationality; address, age and occupation of accused will
be entered in the space at the top of P.F. 9.
(ii) The statement of offence will be set out in ordinary language following the
words used in the Section of the law, as far as possible avoiding technical terms, e.g.,
“Assaulting a Police Officer in the due execution of his duty, contrary to Section 243 (b) of
the Penal Code, Cap.16 R.E. 2002”.
(iii) The particulars of the offence(s) will be set out in ordinary language, avoiding
technical terms, e.g.,
“John s/o Salim ................... did assault (or resided) (or wilfully obstructed) one ...............
officer at the time acting .....................”.
(iv) Each count will be numbered separately and will contain the
statement of offence and the particulars of the offence.
(v) The signature of the prosecutor and the Date and Station will be
entered at the foot of the charge form.
(vi) The duplicate copy of the charge (P.F. 9) will be filed in the Case
File or Minor Offence Docket (vide para. 7 (g) of P.G.O. No. 286).
2. O/C. Districts and Stations shall ensure that :-
(a) The particulars of the offence contain sufficient factual details to support the
charge;
(b) The particulars of the offence refer only to the charge;
(c) The charge and the particulars of the offence form the sole basis for each
prosecution (i.e. prosecuting officers must confine themselves to proving the offence alleged
in the charge).
3. (a) Officers will comply with the provisions of Section 138 of the Criminal
Procedure Act, Cap. 20. Particular attention is to be given to the following points :-
(i) The necessity of specifying in every theft charge the owner of each
article of stolen property and the value thereof.
(ii) Where there is a Section specifying the penalty, it must be quoted in
the charge as well as the Section defining the offence.
(iii) State the time of the offence where this is an essential element of the
charge bearing in mind the definition of “night” under Section 5 of the Penal Code, Cap.16
R.E. 2002 .
(iv) Care must be taken not to omit the words “with intent to defraud (or
deceive)” under such charges as false pretences.
(v) In framing charges in respect of escapes from lawful custody, the
Courts require that the circumstances in which the accused escaped should be set in the

517
 P.G.O. No. 227
charge, e.g., whether on remand, under Court warrant, after lawful arrest and before being
brought to Court, or after conviction by a Court.
(vi) In cases of causing grievous bodily harm, the nature of the harm
suffered by the complainant must be set out in the charge, e.g., fractured left forearm, etc.
(vii) Charges falling within the scope of Sections 266 to 275 of the Penal
Code, Cap.16 R.E. 2002 (both inclusive), must contain a reference to section 265 of the Penal
Code, Cap.16 R.E. 2002 similarly where theft is an element of any other charge, e.g.,
burglary, then a reference must be made in the charge to section 265 of the Penal Code,
Cap.16 R.E. 2002.
(viii) Where the charge alleges intent to commit a felony, the felony must
be specified, e.g., breaking and entering a dwelling house with intent to commit rape.
(b) Where one act constitutes a number of different charges, for example, one act
amounting to manslaughter killing more than one person, each killing will be a separate count
and the charges will be cumulative. An example would be robbery where the articles stolen
were rough and uncut diamonds. The offender would be committing the offence of robbery
and the offence of being in unlawful possession of diamonds.
(c) A person who wounds another in order to steal will be charged with robbery
and, in the alternative, with unlawful wounding. Thus, if the Magistrate considers that the
evidence is insufficient to prove theft, a conviction may be entered on the alternative charge
of unlawful wounding. The correct method of presenting such a charge is to charge the major
offence first (i.e., robbery) and then state in the charge sheet that the second offence of
unlawful wounding is alternative by inserting the words “IN THE ALTERNATIVE”
immediately before the second count. This will make it clear to the Court that the charges are
alternative and the prosecutor may go further, wherever necessary, and point out to the Court
that if a conviction is entered on an alternative count no conviction should be entered on any
other count charged in the alternative. If the case goes on Appeal, and the Appellate Court
considers that one of the other alternative charges by reasons of an acquittal by the Lower
Court. Where it is open to a Court to convict for a minor offence under Sections 181-187 of
the Criminal Procedure Act, the minor offence should never be charged in the alternative.
(d) When it is proposed to bring two or more charges against an accused and one
of the charges requires the Director of Public Prosecution's consent, the remaining charges
are not to be proceeded with until the director of public prosecution's instructions have been
obtained. The covering letter or summary forwarded to the Director of Criminal Investigation
with the Case File must state the nature of any other charges which may be pending.
(e) An accused person may be charged under Section 311 of the Penal Code,
Cap.16 R.E. 2002, with the offence of receiving or retaining.
(f) Where a person commits arson with an intention to kill or a reckless
indifference to the possibility that death will follow, the charge will be murder. If the death
was caused only in furtherance of the intent to commit arson and there is no question of a
reckless indifference to the possibility that death will follow, the Case File will be submitted
to the Director of Criminal Investigation for advice as to the charges to be laid. Where a
person sets fire to occupied premises and there is evidence that he intended to kill someone,
even though he does not do so, the charge will be attempted murder and a second charge of
arson will be added. Where a person is injured as a result of arson, a charge of unlawful
wounding contrary to Section 222 will be added, provided the evidence so warrants, to the
charge of attempted murder and to the charge of arson.

518
 P.G.O. No. 228
INVESTIGATION – DYING DECLARATIONS AND
DEPOSITIONS
Dying Declarations
1. A dying declaration is a statement made by a dying person as to the facts and
circumstances which is likely to cause his death. In accordance with Section 35A of the
Evidence Act, Cap. 6 R.E. 2002 such statement is admissible in evidence in any proceedings
in which the cause of death of the person making the statement comes into question and is
admissible whether the person was or was not at the time the statement was made, in
expectation of death.
2. Any Police Officer who is satisfied that a dying person wishes to make such a
declaration shall, if time permits, request a Magistrate to attend and take the declaration.
3. If the Police Officer is of the opinion that the attendance of a Magistrate cannot be
secured in time he will himself record the declaration.
4. The Police Officer shall record the declaration in his notebook or on a statement form
(P.F. 2A) in the declarant’s own words.
5. The declaration should be taken down in the language in which it is made and, if it is
not a continuous statement but was given in answer to questions, the exact questions and
answers should be noted.
6. When a declaration has been recorded, the Police Officer will read it over to the
declarant and ask him to sign it by a signature or thumbprint.
7. The Police Officer will then himself sign the declaration as well as any other person
who was present and heard it.
8. A dying declaration may be recorded by any person, although it is preferable that it
be taken by a Magistrate or a Police Officer.
9. The person, if any, accused of causing death need not be present when the declaration
is made, but if he is present, the injured person should be given the opportunity of identifying
him and anything said by the accused person should also be recorded.
Depositions of Persons Dangerously Ill
10. Section 252 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, provides that :-
“Whenever it appears to any Magistrate that any person who is dangerously ill or
hurt and not likely to recover is able and willing to give material testimony relating to any
offence, and it is not practicable to take such persons evidence in accordance with the
provisions of this Act, the Magistrate may take in writing, a statement on oath or affirmation
of such person and shall record therein his reason for taking the same and the date and place
when and where the same was taken and shall subscribe the same and certify that it contains
accurately, the whole of the statement made by such person and shall preserve such statement
and file it for record, provided that where the statement is that of a person who by reason of
immature age or want of religious belief ought not, in the opinion of the Magistrate age or
want of religious belief ought not, in the opinion of the Magistrate, to be sworn or affirmed,
the statement may be taken without oath or affirmation”.
11. Where any person is under a charge or has been committed for trial in respect of an
offence to which such statement is expected to relate, reasonable notice shall be given of the
intention to take such statement both to the prosecutor and to such person. If such person is in
custody, he may and shall if he so requests, be brought by the officer in whose charge he is,
under an order, in writing, of the Magistrate, to the place where the statement is to be taken.
(Section 253 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002).

519
 P.G.O. No. 228
12. Every such statement, duly subscribed and certified by the Magistrate, in the
manner required in paragraph 10, shall, without further proof, be admissible in evidence at
any summary trial, preliminary inquiry or trial before the High Court, in which the accused
person is charged with the offence to which such statement relates provided that :-
(a) the Court is satisfied that the person who made such statement is dead, or
that his attendance cannot be procured without delay, expense or inconvenience which in the
circumstances of the case would be unreasonable;
(b) the accused person received notice of the intention to take such statement as
provided in paragraph 11 above and had or might have had, if he was chosen to be present,
full opportunity of cross-examining the deponent. (Section 255 of the Criminal Procedure
Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.)
13. The law on the subject is contained in Sections 252 – 255 of the Criminal Procedure
Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.
14. Such depositions will be admitted in evidence on :-
(a) proof that the deponent is dead or that for any other sufficient cause his
attendance cannot be procured;
(b) proof that reasonable notice, in writing, of the intention to take such
deposition had been given to the person against whom it was proposed to be entered in
evidence and that such person had both the right and opportunity to cross examine the
deponent.

520
 P.G.O. No. 229
INVESTIGATION - EXHIBITS

Classification of Exhibits
1. Exhibits for the purposes of this Order include :-
(a) stolen property and any property the possession of which may be the
subject of a Criminal prosecution;
(b) objects which may connect a person with an offence or incident, such as
articles bearing fingerprints, footprints particles of dust, blood stained clothing, hairs and
fibres;
(c) instruments with which an offence is committed, such asguns, knives,
cartridges;
(d) documents which are relevant in the investigation of an offence.
2. (a) The police are responsible for each exhibit from the time it comes into the
possession of the police, until such time as it is admitted by the Court in evidence, or returned
to its owner, or otherwise disposed of according to instructions;
(b) The proper identification and safe custody of an exhibit is initially the
responsibility of the officer-in-charge of the investigation. The chain of evidence as to its
discovery and subsequent custody will be reduced to as few persons as possible and the
Police Officer who first obtained possession of the exhibit will produce it in Court;
(c) Nothing in this order relieves the O/C. Station of his responsibility for
ensuring intelligent supervision of the safe custody of exhibits and should he consider it
necessary, he will issue special instructions or take additional precautions to ensure the safe
custody of any particular exhibit.
Handling of Exhibits
3. Exhibits are vital evidence, their preservation or loss will depend upon the manner
in which they are handled and examined. The Police Officer first at the scene of a crime or
incident in an urban area or near a Police Station shall ensure that exhibits are not touched
and that the scene is kept intact until the investigating officer arrives.
4. (a) On arrival at the scene of a crime or incident, one of Police Officer’s
primary duties is to protect exhibits. He shall not handle exhibits unless it is absolutely
necessary to move them to a place of safety to prevent interference until the arrival of the
investigating officer. Exhibits on which there may be fingerprints shall be handled with the
greatest care.
(b) If the scene of crime is in the open and the weather is bad, the Police
Officer shall take steps to protect any exhibit, particularly footprints, by covering them with a
box, empty carton, bucket or some such covering.
(c) If a Police Officer is obliged to move an exhibit to a place of safety, he shall
record exact particulars of his actions in his note book in accordance with paragraph 6 (f) of
P.G.O. No. 282.
(d) In isolated areas where experienced investigating officers are not available,
the Police Officer first at a scene of a crime or incident will as far as possible take action in
accordance with para. 5.
5. The investigating officer shall take such steps as he considers necessary on arrival
at the scene of a crime or incident to :-
(a) photograph the scene and the position of exhibits;

521
 P.G.O. No. 229
(b) call in a fingerprint expert to examine the scene and exhibits;
(c) search for further exhibits by making a systematic search at the scene and if
necessary, take further photographs;
(d) take measurements for a plan;
(e) take notes concerning the circumstances in which exhibits are found;
(f) remove exhibits to a place of safety or guard them in site.
6. Very strict precautions will be taken when handling articles which might bear a
fingerprint at scenes of crime which are not visited by fingerprint experts. For example :-
(a) a tumbler or similar article shall be handled with one finger on the rim and
a thumb under the base;
(b) a piece of glass shall be handled by the edges without touching the flat
surfaces;
(c) a bottle shall be handled with one hand on the rim of the opening and the
other hand under the base;
(d) a knife shall be handled with one finger (or cork if too sharp) at the end of
the blade and a finger of the other hand at the end of the handle;
(e) a firearm shall be so handled that no fingerprint evidence is in any way
disturbed. Under no circumstances may a firearm be picked up by placing a pencil or piece of
wood up the barrel as this may interfere with material evidence. Generally a firearm shall not
be unloaded, but strict security precautions will be taken to avoid accidents. No attempt will
be made to try the mechanism or discharge the weapon;
(f) a suspect vehicle shall be immediately impounded and left in safe custody
under cover until it has been examined. It may be necessary to examine the vehicle where it is
found in order to avoid loss or damage to evidence (fingerprints, etc.);
(g) when searching the clothing or person of a suspect special attention shall be
paid to trouser flies, turn-ups, edges of cuffs or inside folds of rolled up shirt sleeves, the
inside of pockets and footwear. These shall be examined for stains or marks or adhering
matter. Attention shall be paid to fingernails and hands.
7. (a) Exhibits which bear or may bear any fingerprint, mark, or any other surface
impression which might be of value as evidence, shall not be wrapped in a handkerchief,
paper or other material nor handled with gloves. Every care shall be taken to preserve
exhibits intact while in transit to the police station.
(b) Exhibits for scientific examination should be wrapped separately and never
allowed to come into direct contact with each other.
Labelling of Exhibits
8. The investigating officer shall attach an Exhibit Label (P.F. 145) to each exhibit
when it comes into his possession. The method of attaching labels differs with each type of
exhibit. In general, the label shall be attached so that there is no interference with any portion
of the exhibit which requires examination.
9. In some cases a stick-on label will be required; for example, on tumblers, bottles,
china or pieces of glass. Care must be taken to ensure that the label does not cover any
suspect mark or print.
10. A tie-on label shall be attached to clothing. The string should be passed through a
button hole or a piece of thread attached to the side of the garment clear of any evidence of
stains or marks. The position of labels on clothing shall be such that, when the garment is
folded, the label hangs on the outside and can be seen without unfolding the garment.

522
 P.G.O. No. 229
11. Exhibit Labels shall be attached to documents with paper clips, pins shall not be
used. Documents shall be folded, marked with numbers or other inscriptions.
12. Exhibit Labels shall always be attached to the exhibit itself and not to any wrapping
which may be used while transporting the exhibit from one place to another.
13. If the exhibit is a quantity of powder or liquid, i.e. bhang, sugar, flour, alcohol, etc.,
it will, if possible, first be weighed together with its container, before being placed in the
exhibit store.
14. (a) The registered number on the Exhibit Label shall be the Case File or Minor
Offence Docket number.
(b) In addition, the exhibit register serial number will also be entered on the
Exhibit Label.
15. Whenever an exhibit is passed from the custody of one officer to that of another, the
officer who hands over the exhibit shall record in the presence of the latter officer the name,
rank and number of the officer to whom he hands over the exhibit and the date and time of
the handing over on the back of the Exhibit Label (P.F. 145).
Recording of Exhibits
16. Particulars of each exhibit shall be recorded in columns 1 to 5 of the exhibits
register (P.F. 16) by the O/C. Station or other Police Officer deputed by a commanding
officer to keep the register, as soon as the exhibit has been brought to a station.
17. (a) Column 6 of the Exhibit Register shall be completed by the officer who
receives and places the exhibit in the store for safe custody.
(b) Any movement of an exhibit after it has been placed in the store shall be
recorded in Columns 7 to 11 of the Register.
(c) Column 12 shall be completed when the exhibit is finally handed into Court
against receipt on P.F. 137.
(d) Column 13 shall be completed when the exhibit is returned to the owner or
destroyed by the O/C. Station as having no value or on the order of a Court or the owner.
18. (a) Each exhibit in a crime or incident shall be recorded under a separate item
number in column 4 of the exhibit register, except in the case of a number of identical
exhibits which may be recorded in one entry and the quantity only recorded (for example, 20
tins of milk of the same brand and size recovered in a theft case at the same place and time).
(b) A black line shall be drawn below the last exhibit entry of each case,
allowing for sufficient space to record the movement of exhibits.
Custody of Exhibits
19. The keys of the exhibits store will be kept by the O/C. Station or by an officer
specifically nominated by him and the holder will be responsible for the contents of the store,
provided that in no case will be key be held by an officer below the rank of Sergeant Major
unless otherwise provided in local Station Standing Orders.
20. Valuable exhibits, such as jewellery and cash, shall be sealed in a Valuable Property
Envelope (P.F. 166) and kept in the safe or cash box. Particulars shall be entered in the safe
or cash box register as the case may be.
21. Special arrangements shall be made by the O/C. Station to store petrol, kerosene
and all explosive or dangerous exhibits.
22. Arms and ammunition shall, where possible, be stored in the Police Station
Armoury.

523
 P.G.O. No. 229
23. Animals, where possible, will be retained by their owners, provided full particulars
such as colour, marking, brand marks, etc., have been recorded and, if practicable,
photographs taken. Before returning an animal to the owner, an undertaking, in writing, will
be obtained from him by the investigating officer, that they will produce the animal when
called upon to do so. If animals are retained in police custody they will be placed in the
Government pound. When an animal is suffering from an injury or disease, the Magistrate
will be asked to give instructions regarding its disposal.
24. Exhibits which are too bulky to be placed in the exhibits store shall be kept in a safe
place. All other exhibits shall be kept in the exhibits store.
25. Perishable exhibits which cannot easily be preserved until the case is heard, shall be
brought before the Magistrate, together with the prisoner (if any) so that the Magistrate may
note the exhibits and order immediate disposal. Where possible, such exhibits should be
photographed before disposal.
26. When an exhibit is temporarily removed from and returned to the exhibits store, an
entry shall be made in the Exhibits Register (P.F. 16).
Packing of Exhibit
27. When an exhibit is taken or sent any distance, it shall be carefully packed to avoid
interference with evidence. The officer responsible for packing an exhibit shall satisfy
himself that the method chosen is adequate to prevent :-
(a) loss during transit;
(b) contamination from packing or outside sources;
(c) damage from jolting or crushing;
(d) damage from leakage, escape, ignition, corrosion or explosion.
28. (a) When an investigating officer requires the pathological or chemical
examination of an exhibit, he will arrange for its dispatch and collection and shall prepare
P.F. 180 in duplicate, and submit to the Pathologist/Government Chemist.
(b) In the case of exhibits for handwriting, ballistic, finger, palm or footprint
examinations, Parts I & II of P.F. 118 will be completed and parts II & III forwarded to the
Forensic Bureau with the exhibit. Part I shall remain in the book as a record. On completion
of the examination by the Forensic Bureau Part III of P.F. 118 will be returned to the
originating Station endorsed with the result of the examination. It will then be filed in the
Case File and entries made in the Investigation Diary, showing date of dispatch, date of
return and the number of the P.F. 118.
(c) It is the duty of the investigating officer to pack, seal and dispatch an
exhibit by the most suitable method, bearing in mind its value. An exhibit destined for
analytical examination which is of a perishable nature, will be dispatched by the quickest
method, usually by hand of a Police Officer who has a special responsibility in this
connection.
(d) If the exhibit is dispatched by post, it will be registered. The registration
receipt number will be entered in the Investigation Diary and the receipt itself posted on the
copy of the covering letter or the P.F. 180.
(e) An officer bringing an exhibit to Dar es Salaam will be instructed to report
on arrival to the O/C. Forensic Bureau, who will arrange for the officer and exhibit to be
conveyed to the Pathologist/Chemist. If an exhibit can suitably be returned by post, the
escorting officer will be instructed to return to his Station immediately. He will, in this event,
be given a receipt for the exhibit or his marching order will be endorsed certifying safe
receipt or otherwise of the exhibit and stating the method proposed for its return.
(f) Examinations, as indicated, are undertaken by the following laboratories:-

524
 P.G.O. No. 229
(i) Bloodstains, seminal stains, and all pathological inquiries to the
senior pathologist, medical laboratory, Dar es Salaam.
(ii) Drugs, traditional medicines, poisons, including arrow poisons,
viscera (where poisoning is suspected) to the Government Chemist, Medical Laboratory, Dar
es Salaam.
(iii) Finger, palm and footprints, handwriting, ballistics, to the
Forensic Bureau, C.I.D., H.Q., P.O. Box 9094 Dar es Salaam.
29. Each exhibit shall be packed separately.
30. Wax seals shall be placed on the wrapping of each exhibit in such a manner as to
prevent interference with the wrapping unless the seal is broken. Each person who takes over
an exhibit in its packing shall examine the seals and ensure that they are intact when he
receives it.
31. It is most important that a complete record of every person who handles an exhibit
is maintained. This evidence may be required to prove in Court that there has been no
interference with the exhibit from the time it comes into the hands of the police until it is
produced in evidence in Court. This record shall be made on the Exhibit Label (P.F. 145).
Each officer who takes over an exhibit shall also make a record in his note book of the date,
time and place, and the person from whom he took it over. He shall obtain a receipt in his
note book for the exhibit when he hands it over.
32. (a) Exhibit for pathological or chemical examination shall only be forwarded
under cover of P.F. 180.
(b) Where expert examination is required of any other exhibit, a report giving
concise details of the case and description of the exhibit shall be forwarded, together with the
exhibit. A copy of the report will be sent by hand of escort or by separate post.
33. A typed list of case exhibits shall always be included in every Case File.
Final Disposal of Exhibit
34. (a) When exhibits are admitted into evidence by a subordinate Court or
examining Magistrate, the prosecutor is responsible for preparing and submitting a Court
Exhibit Receipt on P.F. 137 to the Magistrate and for obtaining that Magistrate’s signature on
the receipt during or immediately on the termination or the trial or preliminary Inquiry.
(b) The prosecutor is responsible for ensuring that the relevant receipt serial
number is entered in Column 12 of the Court Exhibit Register on his return to the Police
Station.
(c) A receipt will not be removed from the book in which it is bound and
investigating officers will check receipt serial numbers against the relevant entries in the
Court Exhibit Register. When not in use, receipt books will be kept under lock and key.
35. Where the Court orders the disposal of an exhibit by police, the prosecutor is
responsible for returning the exhibit to the Police Station and handing it over to the O/C.
station. A record will be made by the prosecutor in the exhibit register in column 12 of the
Court order. The directions of the Court will be carried out by O/C. Station.
36. In cases where the Court declines to give directions as to disposal, the exhibit will
be returned to the exhibits store by the prosecutor and the O/C. Station will seek instructions
from the Regional Commander.
37. Exhibits to which paragraphs 34, 35 and 36 are not applicable shall be returned to
the owner unless the Court otherwise directs, or transferred to the Found Property Register, if
ownership is in doubt. The final handing over of an exhibit will, without exception, be carried
out by the O/C. Station. A person receiving the exhibit will sign the exhibit register at
Column 13.

525
 P.G.O. No. 229
Retention of Exhibits in Undetected Cognisable Offences
38. In undetected cognisable cases, exhibits shall be retained indefinitely unless the
Regional Commander otherwise directs.

526
 P.G.O. No. 230
INVESTIGATION – FINGER PRINTS
NOTE: The authority to take finger prints of persons in lawful custody is contained in Section
35 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.322 R.E.2002 and Section 59 of the
Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002. A copy of Section 35 and Section 59
respectively are attached at Appendix “A”.
1. The O/C. Stations shall take or cause to be taken on Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B) the
finger prints of any person who :-
(a) is in lawful custody charged or convicted with/of an offence;
(b) is the subject of a Police Supervision Order.
2. The O/C. Station shall, on the detention of a person (not yet tried), take or cause to be
taken the finger prints of that person on P.F. 14B as follows :-
(a) IN CASES FOR TRIAL BY SUBORDINATE COURTS
One copy of P.F. 14B, together with the P.F. 75, completed in full, shall be
submitted to the Forensic Bureau without delay. If it is desired to ascertain the number of
previous convictions, of an accused person by signal, the letter “T” will be endorsed in red in
the top left hand corner of the finger print form. If, as a result of the reply from the Forensic
Bureau it is decided to send a prisoner to the High Court for trial, the O/C. Station will
submit a further set of finger prints on the finger print form, quoting the relevant T.C.R.O.
number and requesting a certificate of previous convictions.
(b) IN CASES FOR TRIAL BY HIGH COURT
Two copies of Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B), marked on the top left hand
corner in red “H.C.”, together with the P.F. 75 completed in full, will be forwarded to the
Forensic Bureau, without delay.
3. Whenever a person has been brought to trial and convicted before a subordinate
Court and provided that person’s finger prints have not been recorded in accordance with
paragraph 2 of this Order, the O/C. Station shall, without delay, take or cause to be taken, the
finger prints of that person on Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B) and shall submit same to the
Forensic Bureau, together with P.F. 75, the result of Case Form (P.F. 102) and the Committal
Warrant where applicable.
4. Where there is reason to believe that a person detained or convicted has a previous
conviction(s) in a country outside Tanzania, the O/C Station shall take or cause to be taken
two extra copies of that person’s finger prints on form P.F. 14B for each country in which the
conviction is suspected.
Single Finger Prints – Action taken by O/C. Station
5. When a person is in custody charged with :-
(a) breaking and entering; or
(b) theft of or from a motor vehicle; or
(c) any offence, and it is suspected that the accused has previous convictions for
offences at (a) and (b) above;
an additional set of his finger prints will be taken on the Single Finger Print Form
P.F. 15 and forward with the Finger Print Form P.F. 14B to the O/C. Forensic Bureau in
accordance with paragraphs 2 and 3 of this order.
The only entries to be made on the Single Finger Print Form P.F. 15, are :-
(i) name of person;
(ii) T.C.R.O. number (if known);

527
 P.G.O. No. 230
(iii) date;
(iv) station;
(v) signature of officer taking finger prints.
6. Where a person who is not a Tanzanian national by origin is detained or convicted,
two extra copies of the finger prints on Form P.F. 14B, endorsed with the country of origin of
the person, shall be forwarded to the Forensic Bureau. For the purpose of this Order a person
is also considered not to be a Tanzanian national by origin if he became a Tanzanian national
by naturalisation.
7. Any person refusing to have his finger prints taken in accordance with paragraph 1
shall be charged with an offence C/S. 35 (2) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act,
Cap.322 R.E.2002, and after such conviction reasonable force may be used to record his
finger prints.
8. Finger prints shall be recorded in the manner laid down in Appendix “B” of this
Order. The officer who records the finger prints shall ensure that the person whose finger
prints have been recorded, signs or laces his right thumb impression in the appropriate place
on the back of the finger print form (P.F. 14B). He shall then place the prisoner’s right fore
finger impression in the appropriate place below the signature or the thumb impression.
Procedure at Forensic Bureau on Receipt of finger print form (P.F. 14B)
9. On receipt of Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B) the O/C. Forensic Bureau shall cause
search to be made in the finger print records and take action in accordance with the following
paragraphs.
Finger Prints of Persons in Lawful Custody (not yet tried)
10. (a) If no record of previous convictions is traced the Station will be notified
by:-
(i) result of Search Form (P.F. 102A) in duplicate;
(ii) result of Case Form (P.F. 102) bearing Case File number, name of
accused and temporary T.C.R.O. Number.
(b) If a previous record is traced the O/C. Forensic Bureau will forward to the
Station :-
(i) result of Search Form (P.F. 102A) in duplicate;
(ii) result of case form (P.F. 102) bearing Case File Number, name of
accused and T.C.R.O. Number;
(iii) the person’s record (P.F. 18B);
(iv) a copy of the person’s previous convictions on P.F. 18C;
(v) a Thermofax copy of P.F. 18C in respect of all persons who have
had more than one previous conviction.
Finger prints of persons brought to trial and convicted
11. (a) If no record is traced, the station will be informed by result of search form
(P.F. 102B) in duplicate.
(b) If a previous record is traced, the O/C. Forensic Bureau will notify the
Station and prisons authority by :-
(i) result of Search Form (P.F. 102B) in duplicate;
(ii) copy of the person’s convictions on P.F. 18C.
Action by O/C. Forensic Bureau on Receipt of Single Finger Print Form (P.F. 15)

528
 P.G.O. No. 230
12. On receipt of Single Finger Print Form P.F. 15, the O/C. Forensic Bureau will cause
it to be classified under the “Two Hand System” and file it in a regional index.
Action by O/C station on Receipt of P.F.’s 102A/102B/18B/18C from Forensic Bureau
13. (a) ON CONVICTION
(i) Where no previous conviction was traced
Obtain copy of Committal Warrant (where applicable) and submit the same
via the Regional C.I.D. Officer to the Forensic Bureau, together with a Result of Case Form
(P.F. 102 received from F.B.) completed in full. The duplicate copy of Form 102A shall be
sent to the O/C. of the prison to which the prisoner is committed, together with the original
Committal Warrant.
(ii) Where a previous record was traced
Obtain a copy of the Committal Warrant (where applicable) and submit
same via the Regional C.I.D. Officer to the Forensic Bureau, together with the result of Case
Form (P.F. 102 received from F.B.). The duplicate copy of Form P.F. 102A and the
convictions on P.F. 18C shall be sent to the O/C. of the Prison to which the prisoner is
committed, together with the original Committal Warrant, If the accused has more than one
previous conviction, the Thermofax copy of P.F. 18C shall be handed to the Magistrate for
retention on the Court file.
(b) ON ACQUITTAL OR DISCHARGE
The Result of Case Form (P.F. 102 received from F.B.) will be endorsed
with result of case and will be returned to the Forensic Bureau, together with any other
documents received from the Forensic Bureau, viz., P.F. 18B or 18C.
Denial of Previous Convictions
14. (a) On denial of previous convictions in a Subordinate Court the prosecuting
officer shall :-
(i) request a remand;
(ii) cause a further set of the prisoner’s finger prints to be taken on
Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B) and submit the same to the Forensic Bureau with a request for a
certificate of previous convictions.
(b) On receipt of finger prints and request as at (a) (ii) above the O/C. Forensic
Bureau shall prepare and dispatch by airmail a certificate of from Station on Finger Print
Form (P.F. 18A) and the second set of the finger prints received from Station of Finger Print
Form (P.F. 14B).
Proofs of previous convictions
15. Previous convictions are proved by the production of a certificate of previous
convictions (P.F. 18A), together with a set of finger prints on the finger print form (P.F. 14B)
which have been searched at the Forensic Bureau. The finger prints on the Finger print form
(P.F. 14B) must be produced by the persons who took the finger prints.
Prisoners Sentenced to Death
16. Where a person is convicted and sentenced to death, the Gazetted Officer on duty in
the High Court at the time sentence is passed shall :-
(a) take immediately on the Finger Print form (P.F. 14B) a set of the finger
prints of the person sentenced;
(b) complete the Result of Case Form (P.F. 102) received from the Forensic
Bureau;

529
 P.G.O. No. 230
(c) obtain the copy of the Committal Warrant;
(d) dispatch the forms referred to in (a), (b) and (c) above to the O/C. Forensic
Bureau.
NOTE: On no account will these be delayed until the end of the Sessions.
Criminal Appeal or Revision
17. If on appeal or revision the original sentence is revised, the Forensic Bureau shall
notify the Station concerned of such revision.
General
18. RECORD FORM (PF. 18B) AND PREVIOUS CONVICTIONS FORM (PF. 18C)
(a) Under no circumstances will Criminal Record Form (P.F. 18B) or the
Previous Convictions Form (P.F. 18C) be handed into the Court as exhibits. Neither will any
entries, alterations or additions be made to the Record Form (P.F. 18B).
(b) Finger prints of persons acquitted or discharged will not be retained by the
Forensic Bureau, but will be destroyed and a note made in the Finger Print Register by the
O/C. Forensic Bureau on receipt of such information.
(c) Finger prints of persons against whom no legal proceedings are instituted
shall be destroyed by the Forensic Bureau.
(d) Finger Print Forms etc. will not be forwarded to any Bureau or place outside
Tanzania except through the O/C. Forensic Bureau, Dar es Salaam.
(e) Finger prints of accused persons submitted to the Forensic Bureau for search
require no covering letter.
(f) Finger Prints of other than accused persons submitted to the Forensic Unit
e.g member of Force, vetting for Government or other institutions etc. must be accompanied
by a covering letter.
(g) Where the T.C.R.O. number is known this should always be quoted.
(h) All communications concerning finger prints, records, photographs, Police
Gazette, etc., will be addressed to the O/C. Forensic Bureau, P.O. Box 9094, Dar es Salaam.
(i) All correspondence in respect of deportees, expelled persons, supervisee,
prisoners’ finger prints, prisoners’ photographs, pervious convictions, criminal revisions,
liberations etc., will always be conducted under the T.C.R.O. number reference.
Death of Registered Criminals
19. When the death of a registered criminal is known, the O/C. Station will forward this
information attached with the finger prints to the Forensic Unit quoting the relevant T.C.R.O.
No. and the circumstances of death.
Contracted fingers and finger prints of dead persons
20. Cut blank finger print forms into strips along the “Fold” lines – do not cut away the
numbers and designation of the digits. Place the first strip (right hand) in position in
the “spoon” by loosening the winged nut and pushing up the clamp. The top of the
strip will then be inserted under the clamp while the bottom of the strip is inserted in
the flange on the spoon. Push the strip into the “spoon” until the space provided for the
right thumb is in position when the winged but must be tightened until the clamp holds
the strip firmly. Ink the right thumb with the roller. Place the thumb within the curve
of the spoon and press it down on to the paper firmly. The winged nut should then
again be loosened and the strip pushed through until the second space is in position.
When both hands have been taken, the strips must be pasted in position on a blank
Finger Print Form.

530
 P.G.O. No. 230

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 230)
SECTION 35 POLICE FORCE AND AUXILIARY SERVICES ACT, CAP.322 R.E.2002: POWER TO TAKE FINGER
PRINTS, PHOTOGRAPHS, ETC OF ACCUSED OR CONVICTED PERSONS

“(1) Any Police Officer in charge of a police station or any Police Officer
investigating an offence may take or cause to be taken measurements or, prints of the hand,
fingers, feet or toes of, or recordings of the voice or, photographs of, or samples of the
handwriting, of any person who is charged with an offence, whether such person is in lawful
custody of the police or otherwise where such measurements, prints, recordings, photographs
or samples, as the case may be, are reasonably believed to be necessary for the identification
of the person with respect to, or for affording evidence as to the commission of an offence for
which he is in custody or charged.
(2) Any Police Officer in charge of a police station or any Police Officer
investigating an offence may take or cause to be taken measurements prints of the hands,
fingers, feet or toes, recordings of the voice, photographs, or samples of the handwriting, of
any person who is not charged with any offence where such measurements, prints,
recordings, photographs or samples, as the case may be, are reasonably believed to be
necessary for facilitating the investigation of any offence.
(3) No person who is in lawful custody or who is charged but not in lawful custody,
shall be entitled to refuse or object to having his measurements, prints, recordings,
photographs or samples of his handwriting taken, and where he so refuses or objects, the
Police Officer concerned may take such reasonable steps, including the use of reasonable
force, as may be necessary to secure that the measurements, prints, recordings, photographs
or samples, as the case may be, are taken.
(4) Any person who refuses to have his measurements, prints, recordings
photographs or samples taken as required under Subsections (1) and (2) is guilty of an
offence and shall be liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding ten thousand shillings or to
imprisonment for a term not exceeding twenty-four months or to both such fine and
imprisonment.
(5) Subject to the provisions of Subsection (10), a person having the custody of
measurements, prints, recordings, photographs or samples and each person having the
custody of copies of measurements, prints, recordings, photographs or samples shall destroy
them–
(a) in the case of a person who is in lawful custody upon a charge of
committing an offence -
(i) if the prosecution of that person is not proceeded with; or
(ii) where the prosecution is proceeded with, but he is acquitted,

531
 P.G.O. No. 230
(b) in the case of a person referred to in Subsection (2), if those measurements,
prints, recordings, photograph or samples, as the case may be are no longer required for the
purpose of facilitating the investigation.
(6) There shall be established at a place to be approved by the Minister responsible
for criminal investigations, an office to be known as the Criminal Records Office for the
preservation, comparison, and indexing of fingerprint forms.
(7) The Criminal Records Office shall, subject to the general supervision of the
Inspector-General, be under the control of a senior Police Officer, expert in comparison of
fingerprints, who shall be appointed from time to time by the Attorney-General by notice
published in the Gazette.
(8) Completed fingerprints forms shall be seen to and preserved at the Criminal
Records Office.
(9) All fingerprint forms shall be of the prescribed pattern.
(10) Notwithstanding the provisions of Subsection (5), it shall be lawful to retain all
records obtained pursuant to Subsections (1) and (2) of this Section in respect of any person
with regard to whom a removal order under the Township (Removal of Undesirable Persons
Ordinance or an expulsion order under the Expulsion of Undesirable Persons Act, Cap. 39
R.E. 2002 has been made and has been cancelled or rescinded.
SECTION 59 CRIMINAL PROCEDURE ACT, CAP. 20 R.E. 2002: POWER TO TAKE
FINGERPRINTS, PHOTOS, ETC., OF SUSPECTS
“(1) Any Police Officer-in-charge of a Police Station or any Police Officer
investigating an offence may take or cause to be taken measurements, prints of the hand,
fingers, feet or toes of, or recordings of the voice or, photographs of, or samples of the
handwriting of any person who is charged with an offence, whether such person is in lawful
custody of the police or otherwise where such measurements, prints, recordings, photographs
or samples, as the case may be, are reasonably believed to be necessary for the identification
of the person with respect to, or for affording evidence as to the commission of an offence for
which he is in custody or charged.
(2) Any Police Officer in charge of a Police Station or any Police Officer
investigating an offence may take or cause to be taken measurements, prints of the hands,
fingers, feet or toes or recordings of the voice, photographs of or samples of the handwriting,
of any person who is not charged with any crime where such measurements, prints,
recordings, photographs or samples, as the case may be, are reasonably believed to be
necessary for facilitating the investigation of any crime.
(3) No person who is charged or who is not charged with any crime shall be entitled
to refuse or object to having his measurements, prints, recordings, photographs or samples
taken, and where he so refuses or objects, the Police Officer concerned may take such
reasonable steps, including the use of reasonable force, as may be necessary to ensure that the
measurements, prints, recordings, photographs or samples, as the case may be, are taken.
(4) Any person who refuses to have his measurements, prints, recordings,
photographs or samples taken as required under Subsections (1) and (2) is guilty of an
offence and shall be liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding ten thousand shillings or to
imprisonment for a term not exceeding twenty-four months or to both such fine and
imprisonment.
(5) Subject to the provisions of Subsection (10), a person having the custody of
measurements, prints, recordings, photographs or samples and each person having the
custody of copies of measurements, prints, recordings, photographs or samples shall destroy
them:-

532
 P.G.O. No. 230
(a) in the case of a person who is in lawful custody upon a charge of
committing an offence;
(i) if the prosecution of that person is not proceeded with; or
(ii) where prosecution is proceeded with, but he is acquitted.
(b) in the case of a person referred to in Subsection (2), if those measurements,
prints, recordings, photographs or samples, as the case may be, are no longer required for the
purpose of facilitating the investigation.
(6) There shall be established at a place to be approved by the Minister responsible
for criminal investigations, an office to be known as the Criminal Records Office for the
preservation, comparison and indexing of fingerprint or forms.
(7) The Criminal Records Office shall, subject to the general supervision of the
Inspector General of Police, be under the control of a senior Police Officer, expert in
comparison of fingerprints who shall be appointed from time to time by the Attorney-General
by notice published in the Gazette.
(8) Completed fingerprint forms shall be sent to and preserved at the Criminal
Records Office.
(9) All fingerprint forms shall be of the prescribed pattern.
(10) Notwithstanding the provisions of Subsection (5), it shall be lawful to retain all
records obtained pursuant to Subsections (1) and (2) of this Section in respect of any person
with regard to whom an expulsion order under the Expulsion of Undesirables Act, Cap. 39
R.E. 2002 has been cancelled or rescinded.”

Appendix “B”
(To P.G.O. No. 230)
FINGER PRINTS AND PALM PRINTS
TAKING OF FINGER PRINTS

533
 P.G.O. No. 230

Apparatus and Material

1. A plate on which to spread the ink. This can be either:

(a) a polished metal plate, about 4 in. by 12 in. mounted on a stout wooden block;
or,
(b) a piece of plate glass of similar dimensions.
2. A roller for distributing the ink.
3. Finger print ink.
4. A supply of finger print forms.
5. A supply of benzine, petrol or other spirit.
6. Dusters and rags for cleaning purpose.
7. Table or Stand: For the average prisoner the height of the table of stand on which
finger prints are taken should be about 3ft. 6in. The top must be smooth and level and the
edges square cut. A wooden box can be used to raise the level of an ordinary table to the
necessary height.
Inking the plate

(a) Squeeze a few small drops of ink from the tube at intervals along the central
of the place and thoroughly roll them until a thin coated film of ink is spread evenly over the
whole surface of the plate. Lift the roller at the end of the forward and backward movement
of the rolling operation, instead of making contact with the place.
(b) If the trial print is faint add more ink. If too much ink has been spread on the
plate some can be taken off by placing a sheet of paper on it and passing the roller over.
(c) The ink must be of such thickness that when the fingers are lightly rolled
over the plate prints, without fog and with black and sharp lines are obtained.
(d) The screw cap of the ink tube must be replaced immediately after use.
(e) The plate and roller will be thoroughly cleaned immediately after use. Dirty
apparatus gives bad results.
Preparation of the fingers

(a) The fingers of prisoners will first be examined and sweat and dirt wiped off
with a duster moistened with petrol or other spirit. Perspiration on the fingers prevents the
ridges taking the ink.
(b) When the skin is hard and dry soak the fingers well in warm water and wipe
very lightly without thoroughly drying.
Position of the finger print form

(a) Fold the finger print form at the first line marked “Fold”. Place the upper part
face-up on the table, and fold the part below it face-down so that the crease is tight up to the
edge of the table. The form can be kept in position by a small weight.
(b) After the prints of the right digits have been taken, the form should be folded
at the second line marked “Fold”, and the upper part of the form placed face upwards on the
tale.
(c) When the prints of the left digits have been obtained, the whole form is
placed on the table ready for the plain impressions.
TAKING OF IMPRESSIONS

534
 P.G.O. No. 230
Rolled impressions

(a) The operator stands at the end of the table, the subject facing it.
(b) The finger to be impressed is rolled in contact with the inked plate so that its
inner surface, from one side of the finger nail to the other and from the tip to the first joint is
coated with ink. The inked finger is then fully rolled into contact with the paper so as to
record the complete pattern. Pressure must not be applied except to ensure that the skin
makes proper contact with the paper so as to record the complete pattern. Pressure must not
be applied except to ensure that the skin makes proper contact with the inked plate and with
the paper. The operator’s forefinger should be lightly laid on the tip of the digit. The subject’s
arm should be at right angles to the plate and bent at the elbow.
(c) The thumb and fingers are rolled in opposite directions – the thumb inwards
towards the body and the fingers outwards from the body. With hard and dry hands it is
sometimes necessary to roll the finger twice on the inked plate before taking an impression,
but this must be done with caution.
(d) If the impression is placed immediately above the line marked “Fold” there
will be ample space for another print above it should the first one be in any way defective.
(e) Do not roll the digit over the same part of the plate without first re-rolling the
plate.
Plain impressions

(a) “Plain” impressions are obtained by taking each hand in turn and placing the
palmer surface of the four fingers simultaneously on the inked plate (so that the flexure of the
end joint of the little finger comes to the edge of the plate). This operation is repeated on the
finger print form. The prisoner’s hand must not be arched, but be quite flat with the fingers
together.
Palmar impressions

(a) Palm prints must disclose the ridge pattern over the whole surface.
(b) Palm impressions can best be obtained by using the palmar printer.
(c) Clean the palm thoroughly and apply a film of ink by running the roller over
the hand. The centre surface must be inked as the print must show the ridge pattern over the
entire palmar surface.
(d) The base of the fingers is placed on the paper above the roller, gently pressed
to ensure proper contact and then pushed forwards and outwards from the body with the
fingers and thumb fully stretched slightly apart.
(e) A sheet of paper of foolscap size is sufficient to contain the palmar
impressions of both hands side by side.

535
 P.G.O. No. 231
INVESTIGATION – IDENTIFICATION BY PHOTOGRAPHS

General

1. Photographs may be used for two purposes :-

(a) to trace a criminal or missing person whose identity is known;

(b) to establish the identity of a person who has committed an offence.

2. Photographs must not be used to establish identity if :-

(a) the suspect is in custody or detained; or

(b) the suspect is known and can be readily arrested and put up on an
identification parade.

3. There are two methods of identification of a criminal by photographs:-

(a) when single photographs of the suspect(s) are held;

(b) when the suspect’s photograph is thought to be contained in the Bad

Character Album.

Procedure for Identification by Single Photographs

4. (a) When police hold a photograph of a suspect who is not in custody or

detained and who cannot be readily arrested, the photograph may be
shown to the witness, together with not less than eight other photographs
of persons of a similar appearance. In no circumstances may witness be
shown a single photograph.

(b) Photographs bearing names or any form of identification on the front or

back will not be shown to witnesses.

(c) The officer conducting the photographic identification parade will enter
the total number of suspects’ photographs displayed and the number of
other photographs displayed under heading 3 of the Identification Parade
Register (P.F. 136).

(d) The photographs will be placed before the witness and no attempt will be
made to influence his judgment.

(e) The parade will be terminated as soon as a satisfactory identification has

been made. The photographs will then be placed out of sight of the
remaining witnesses and the suspect should be arrested and put up on a
normal identification parade before the remaining witnesses, in
accordance with P.G.O. No. 232.

(f) All the photographs shown to witnesses will be safely retained for
production in Court, if necessary.

Procedure for Identification by Bad Character Album

5. (a) If no known photographs of the suspect are available, the witness may be

536
 P.G.O. No. 231
shown the Bad Character Album. Photographs will not bear any form of
identification marks and their positions on the album page will not be
marked or numbered.

(b) The album will be placed before the witness and no attempt made to
influence him.

(c) The proceedings will be terminated as soon as a satisfactory identification

has been made. The album will then be placed out of sight of the
remaining witnesses and the suspect should be arrested and put up on a
normal identification parade before the remaining witnesses, in
accordance with P.G.O. No. 232.

6. (a) When an identification parade is held by either the single photograph

system or the album of Bad Character system, the system used will be
entered under heading 3 of the Identification Parade Register.

(b) As each witness is called to examine the photographs, the name of the
witness, together with the result and any comments made by the witness
will be recorded in the second column of heading 4.

(c) At the conclusion of the parade, the conducting officer will check and
sign each entry in the space provided.

(d) The duplicate sheet will be removed from the register and placed in the
Case File or Minor Offence Docket.

537
 P.G.O. No. 232
INVESTIGATION – IDENTIFICATION PARADES
1. When it is necessary to ascertain whether a person detained in police custody can
be recogniSed by witnesses, the police must ensure that the proceedings are so
conducted that unfairness to the person concerned cannot afterwards be alleged,
otherwise the value of the identification as evidence will depreciate considerably.
At the same time the witnesses should be given full opportunity to make their
identification in the most suitable conditions, and the officer-in-charge of the
parade should ascertain from them the circumstances of the case and so conduct
the parade that the witnesses’ ability to identify is adequately tested. Thus they
may be allowed to hear the persons speak, or see them with their hats on or off, or
from the back or front, or in movement or in such other way as will give a
reasonable opportunity of identification.

2. Identification parades shall be conducted as far as possible in accordance with the

following rules :-

(a) The officer-in-charge of the case will make the preliminary arrangements
for the parade and shall enter the number of persons attending the parade
and the suspects in the space provided under Head No. 3 in the
Identification Parade Register (P.F. 186). He will enter the names of the
witnesses under Head No. 4 of the register in the order in which they are
to be called. A duplicate copy of all entries in the register will be made by
inserting a sheet of carbon paper between the original and duplicate
pages.

(b) Although the officer-in-charge of the case may be present, he will take no
part in conducting the parade. The officer conducting the parade must be
an officer unconnected with the case and, whenever possible, a Gazetted
Officer. Officers below the rank of Assistant Inspector are not permitted
to conduct Identification Parades.

(c) At a reasonable time prior to the parade, the officer-in-charge of the case
will inform the suspect that he will be put up for identification. Any
objections raised by the suspect will be noted and communicated by the
officer-in-charge of the case to the officer conducting the parade before it
is held.

(d) If the suspect desires the attendance of a solicitor or friend, arrangements

must be made for him to attend the parade if he wishes to do so. The
person so attending will be required to remain in the background,
observing only and saying nothing.

(e) The place selected for the parade should have a good light. No
unauthoriSed persons will be permitted to attend or witness the parade.

(f) The witnesses will be assembled under the charge of a Police Officer who
has no connection with the case in a room or place out of sight and
hearing of the parade, from which they can be called to the parade by the
officer conducting it.

(g) The witnesses will not be allowed to see or hear the suspect before he is
put up for identification, nor should they be assisted by any description or
photograph of him, or in any other way.

538
 P.G.O. No. 232
(h) Officers who made the arrest or who took part in the investigation will
not be sent to bring or notify witnesses to attend the parade and will not
communicate with them before the parade is held.

(i) Arrangements will be made to ensure that witnesses have no opportunity

to see, or be seen by; any of the persons to be paraded.

(j) There is no objection to the suspect being put up for identification in the
clothing he was wearing when the offence was committed (providing that
such clothing does not show stains, marks, or tears which patently
distinguish his clothing from that of other persons on the parade).
Alternatively, the suspect may be put up for identification in the clothing
he was wearing when arrested.

(k) Persons selected to make up the parade should be of similar age, height,
general appearance and class of life. Their clothing should be in a general
way similar.

(l) The persons selected for the parade must not be known to the
complainant or the identifying witnesses as identification would then
have little value.

(m) Police Officers will not be used to make up the parade unless the case is
one in which a Police Officer is concerned as a suspect.

(n) There should be eight or more persons on the parade for one suspect; ten
or more for two suspects. If there are more than two suspects, more than
one parade will normally be held, with different personnel being used to
form each parade.

(o) When the officer conducting the parade has arrived and has taken charge
of the proceedings, the suspect will be brought on to the parade. The
officer conducting the parade will explain the purpose of the parade and
will ask the suspect if he has any objection to any person participating in
the parade. Any objection raised by the suspect will be noted in the
Identification Parade Register and immediate steps taken to replace those
persons to whom the suspect objects. The suspect will then be invited to
stand where he pleases in the line. The position he selects will be noted in
the Register.

(p) Great care must be taken that the suspect is not wearing handcuffs or
anything else that might distinguish him from the others. No attempts at
disguise will be permitted.

(q) The first witness will be called to the parade by the officer conducting it,
who will explain the purpose of the parade in the hearing of those on
parade and invite him or her to point out by touching any persons he or
she identifies. Under no circumstances shall the witness be touched or led
during his or her examination of the parade.

(r) If the witness requires any person on the parade to walk, talk, see him
with his hat on or off, this may be done but the whole parade must be
asked to do likewise.

539
 P.G.O. No. 232
(s) The officer conducting the parade will note carefully in his Identification
Parade Register any identification or degree of identification made and
any material circumstances connected therewith including any wrong
identification, and any remark or objection made by the suspect. He shall
ask the witness who makes, the identification; “In what connection do
you identify this person?” and shall similarly record precise details of the
witness’s reply. No other questions are permissible.

(t) On leaving the parade, the witness will be conducted to a place where he
or she is out of sight and hearing of the parade and cannot communicate
in any way with other witnesses waiting or members of the Force and
will remain there under the charge of a Police Officer, who has no
connection with the case, until the parade is finished.

(u) Subsequent witnesses will be brought into the parade and handled in
accordance with the same procedure set out in sub-paras. (q) – (t) above.

(v) At the conclusion of the parade, a photograph if possible, will be taken of

the parade for production in Court. Care should be taken that those on the
parade and witnesses are treated with patience, consideration and
courtesy.

(w) The officer conducting the parade will finally check his entries in the
identification Parade Register and will sign in the space provided. The
original copy will remain in the Register and the duplicate removed and
filed in the Case File.

3. The officer who conducts an Identification Parade may be required to give

evidence as to the conduct and result of the parade in any Court cases that may
follow. Reference may be made to the copy of P.F. 186 completed at the time of
the parade.

4. The officer-in-charge of the case will give evidence of the preliminary

arrangements of the parade.

5. Interpreters employed at the parade will be called to give evidence as to what

happened on the parade. Such evidence will be purely of a formal nature that he
attended an Identification Parade on a certain date and acted as interpreter
between the officer conducting the parade and the witnesses on the one hand, and
between the officer conducting the parade and the defendant on the other hand
that he interpreted faithfully everything that was said to him. His evidence in
chief will stop at this point.

6. Care should be taken to ensure that no one is injured during identification.

540
 P.G.O. No. 233
INVESTIGATION – MISSING PERSONS
1. Whenever a person is reported missing at a Police Station, full particulars of the
circumstances and a comprehensive description of the missing person shall be
obtained. A record of the report shall be entered in the Report Book.

2. If there is no reason to suspect foul play, duties shall be warned to keep watch for
the missing person. All possible inquiries shall be made and the police shall keep
in close touch with known relatives and friends of the missing person.

3. O/C. Stations will take the following action if a missing person is still untraced
after 48 hours:-

(a) Enter full particulars of the missing person, in triplicate, in the Missing &
Wanted Persons Register (P.F. 179). The top copy shall be left in the
Register for record purposes; the second and third copies shall be extracted
and posted up on the Station and Administration Notice Boards for the
information of the police and general public.

(b) Send a “Missing Persons Telegram” to Regional C.I.D. and all Stations
within the Region which might be able to assist in the search for the
missing person. The telegram will be prefixed with the letters “MPT”,
followed by the heading numbers and particulars of the missing person as
recorded in the Missing & Wanted Persons Register. The Regional C.I.D.
Officer will be responsible for wide circulation outside the Region should
he consider it necessary.

4. O/C. Stations who receive a Missing Persons Telegram (vide para. 3 (b) above)
shall copy the contents of the telegram, in triplicate, into the Station’s Missing &
Wanted Persons Register, extract two copies and post them on the Police and
Administration Notice Boards (vide para 3 (a) above). They shall then take all
possible action to trace the missing person.

5. The O/C. of the station which traces the missing person shall send a signal or
telegram informing the O/C. Station who circulated the original Missing Persons
Telegram. The letter shall similarly inform all Stations on the circulation list and
make a note on the appropriate page in the Missing & Wanted Persons Pegister that
the missing person has been traced. He will then remove the two copies of P.F. 179
from the Police and Administration Notice Boards and destroy them.

6. (a) O/C. Stations receiving reports of missing persons shall make all possible
effort to obtain photographs for circulation to those Stations which have
already been circularised by Missing Persons telegrams (vide para. 3 (b)
above).

(b) O/C. Stations who obtain photographs shall send them by the quickest
possible means direct to the Forensic Bureau, accompanied by a copy of
the relevant Missing Persons Telegram which will be endorsed with the
Police Stations circularised.

(c) CO. Forensic Bureau will send the three copies of the photograph to each
station circularised.

(d) Each O/C. Station who receives photographs shall then affix one copy to

541
 P.G.O. No. 233
the entry in the Missing & Wanted Persons Register and the remaining two
copies on each of the Notices posted up on the Police and Administration
Notice Boards.

7. Lost children found by the police shall be kept in the Station until a claimant
appears. If the child remains unclaimed for 24 hours, a telegram giving all
available particulars shall be circulated to neighbouring Stations. A report shall be
made to the District Commissioner if the child is still unclaimed after 48 hours.

8. O/C. Stations shall remove Missing & Wanted Persons Notices (on P.F. 179) from
Police and Administration Notice boards one month after posting thereon, unless
they consider that a particular Notice should remain for a longer period.

9. Missing & Wanted Persons Registers shall be maintained with care and accuracy
and shall be examined at all forms of inspection.

542
 P.G.O. No. 234
INVESTIGATION – PHOTOGRAPHS

Law

1. The power to take photographs of accused or convicted persons is contained in

Section 35 (1) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.322 R.E.2002
which reads as follows :-

“Any officer-in-charge of police or any Police Officer of or above the rank of

Assistant Inspector or any Police Officer in charge of a police station or police post
may take, or cause to be taken, in his presence, for the purposes of investigation,
the measurements, photographs, foot-prints and casts thereof, palm prints and
finger prints of any person in lawful custody or who is subject to police
supervision”.

Section 59(1) of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, reads:

“Any Police Officer-in-charge of a police station or any Police Officer

investigating an offence may take or cause to be taken measurements, prints of the
hand, fingers, feet or toes of, or recordings of the voice or, photographs of, or
samples of the handwriting of any person who is charged with an offence, whether
such person is in lawful custody of the police or otherwise where such
measurements, prints, recordings, photographs or samples, as the case may be, are
reasonably believed to be necessary for the identification of the person with respect
to, or for affording evidence as to the commission of an offence for which he is in
custody or charged.”

2. The Commissioner of Prisons has agreed to permit photographers attached to

Regional C.I.D. Units to photograph certain prisoners in first class Prisons.
Regional C.I.D. Officers will therefore make local arrangement with the officers in
charge of such Prisons to photograph all prisoners convicted of any offence set out
in Appendix “A” in accordance with paragraph 5 of this Order.

3. Photographs should, if possible, be taken of criminals as they normally appear

when at large, that is to say, in their ordinary clothing and with their hair as it
usually appears, rather than in prison clothes and with their hair short.

4. In addition, Regional C.I.D. Officers will ensure that arrangements are made to
photograph supervisees in accordance with paragraph 10 of P.G.O. No. 358. For
this reason, prisoners should be photographed as soon after conviction as possible
and before prison formalities relative to dress and haircutting are instituted.

Method of Photographing

5. (a) Use the appropriate camera, and the name board- camera mount. The lens
is to be fitted over the camera lens and the camera attached to one end of
the camera mount by means of the screw.

(b) Set the distance as required for normal conditions outside.

(c) The name board at the other end of the mount will show the following
details written in white chalk, using block capitals :-

543
 P.G.O. No. 234
STATION

DATE

T.C.R.O. No.

CASE FILE No.

(d) The name board will be placed against the subject’s chest so as to appear
in the lower half of the photograph.

N.B. Care must be taken to avoid holding the board too high under the
chin, forcing the head back, as this will result in distortion of the face in
the photograph.

(e) Using the finder, align the camera so that the subject’s head and the
number board can be seen, then expose.

(f) Full face and profile photographs will be taken of each criminal. The
profile should be that side of the face which bears the most characteristics
or marks. If the criminal wears glasses, full photographs will be taken
with the subject wearing glasses and another without glasses.

(g) As each criminal is photographed, his name and T.C.R.O. No. will be
entered on the photographic processing form (P.F. 147) in strict rotation.

Processing of Films

6. O/C. Stations will forward complete films to the Regional C.I.D. Officer for
developing and the preparation of prints. Where this is not possible owing to lack
of a darkroom, films shall be sent to the Forensic Bureau for the necessary
processing and supply of photographic prints. The film will be forwarded with the
requisite pro forma (P.F. 147).

7. Six prints will be made from each negative processed at the Regional C.I.D.
darkroom. Three copies and the negative will be sent to the Forensic Bureau, two
copies will be sent to the O/C. Station or O/C. C.I.D. from whence the film
originated and one copy will be retained by the Regional C.I.D. Officer.

8. The CO. Forensic Bureau will issue a replacement film to the Regional C.I.D. on
receipt of 12 negatives and 3 photographic copies of each, providing the
photographs show a T.C.R.O No, or are endorsed with same.

9. Where the film is sent direct to the Forensic Bureau for processing, three sets of
prints will be sent to the originating O/C. Station or O/C. District C.I.D., together
with a replacement film. The O/C. District C.I.D. or O/C. Station will forward
one copy to the Regional C.I.D. Officer.

N.B. If all or any of the photographs or the P.F. 147 do not carry the T.C.R.O.
No. (permanent to temporary), all six photographic copies and negatives will be
returned to the originating station for endorsement. After endorsement, three
copies and the negative will be returned to the Forensic Bureau.

Photographic Records

544
 P.G.O. No. 234
10. The CO. Forensic Bureau will file away the negative and one print in T.C.R.O.
No. order in the photographic Section and two prints will be filed on the
criminal’s P.F. 18B. The O/C. District C.I.D., on receipt of the two prints, will
paste one copy in the District C.I.D. photographic album and the second copy in
the criminal’s dossier P.F. 26 where one exists or, if he considers it necessary,
display the photograph on the notice board for all station personnel to see. The
regional C.I.D. officer shall paste his copy of the photograph in the regional
C.I.D. photographic album. Should further copies be required, application should
be made to the CO. Forensic Bureau giving the criminal’s T.C.R.O. Number.

Photographic Album

11. A photographic album will be maintained by all Regional, District and Divisional
C.I.D. Units. In compiling the album, the following rules will be observed :-

(a) Only photographs of convicted persons, as set out in paragraphs 2 and 3

above, shall be placed in the album.

(b) The pages will be numbered consecutively.

(c) The photographs will be arranged eight to a page in two lines of four.

(d) The front of the page only shall be used.

(e) Photographs on each page will be lettered underneath (A to H) and a

separate index kept accordingly.

(f) Photographs should bear only the T.C.R.O. No. and Case File numbers
and on no account should bear names.

(g) Only the full 2 ¼ x 2 ¼ photographs shall be pasted in the album.

(h) Where, in the past, a photograph has been taken showing a name, this
will be blocked out.

(i) An index of names may be kept but this should be entered in the album.

Photographs other than Prisoners

12. All films of scenes of accident, crime, murder, etc., shall be submitted to the
Forensic Bureau for processing by Stations and Units which are not provided with
adequate darkroom facilities.

13. One film should be used for each Scene of Crime and should not include anything
else. Photographic enlargements will be returned to Stations, together with a
certificate and replacement film. Negatives will be filed in the Forensic Bureau.

14. Each such film must be accompanied with a P.F. 147 completed in full and must
be sent direct to the Forensic Bureau in a separate registered packet (postage
paid) and not by bulk mail.

545
 P.G.O. No. 234

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 234)

1. All breaking offences, e.g. burglary, house breaking, shop breaking, warehouse
breaking.

2. False pretences, Sections 302, 304 and 305 of the Penal Code.

3. Receiving stolen property, or property unlawfully obtained, Sections 311, 312

and 313 of the Penal Code.

4. Stealing from motor vehicles.

5. Robbery, Sections 285 and 286 of the Penal Code.

6. All persons with three or more previous criminal convictions.

7. Sexual offences

8. Terrorism offences

9. Drugs offences

10 All other offences which carry statutory minimum sentences of imprisonment.

546
 P.G.O. No. 235
INVESTIGATION-SCENES OF CRIME SECTION
1. The Scenes of Crime Section is maintained and administered within the
establishment of the Forensic Bureau to identify and handle finger print
impressions and marks found at scenes of crime.

2. The Scene of Crime Section shall maintain an index of finger prints (two handed
system) of all habitual criminals and persons convicted of offences against
property (Chapter XXVI of the Penal Code) and kindred offences.

Finger prints found at or received from scenes of crime will be checked

against the index of finger prints.

Action on Report of Crime where Latent Impressions suspected

3. When a breaking offence or other serious crime is reported and the officer
visiting the crime in accordance with P.G.O. No. 311, paragraph 3, considers that
latent impressions are likely to be found on the scene he will inform the Regional
Crime Officer accordingly.

4. The Regional Crime Officer will:-

(a) visit the scene, in accordance with paragraph 3 of P.G.O. No. 224,

(b) arrange for the submission of exhibits as in paragraph 5 of this Order,

(c) where exhibits, either due to their bulk or immovability, cannot be sent
for examination, the regional crime office will photograph the exhibit and
latent impression in accordance with paragraph 6 of this Order,

(d) where the circumstances or seriousness of the crime or the technical

difficulties of photography are beyond the resources of the regional crime
officer he will, after ensuring safe custody of the scene and exhibits,
consult with the Director Criminal Investigation, by the quickest possible
means. The Director of Criminal Investigation, will arrange for assistance
from the Scenes of Crime Section.

Submission of Exhibits

5. All exhibits, bearing finger impressions, except when immovable or of excessive

bulk, shall be sent to the Scenes of Crime Section, Forensic Bureau, for
examination and comparison. They will be: –

(a) packed in accordance with pages 14-20 of the British Home Office
pamphlet “Notes on Finger and Palm Prints”, which is on issue to all
Sections;

(b) accompanied by P.F. 118 properly completed;

(c) correctly labelled and in such a manner that the label will not foul the
latent impression;

(d) accompanied by finger and palm prints (P.F. 14A) of all persons who had
legitimate access to the exhibits and the finger prints of all known

547
 P.G.O. No. 235
suspects;

(e) dispatched under escort of a Police Officer.

Photographic action at scene by Regional Crime Office or Scenes of Crime Officer

6. (a) The details of every scene visited will be entered in the Scene of Crime
Register (P.F. 129).

(b) Each case will be allocated a consecutive number for the year and will be
prefixed by the Regional abbreviation and the letters P.F. – e.g.,
N.R./F.P./1.62.

(c) Each complete impression found at the scene will be given an individual
letter which will follow the allocated case number as in (b) above – e.g.
N.R./F.P./1/62/A – N.R./P.F./1/62/B. This reference will be neatly
printed in ink on a gummed label which will be attached to the exhibits in
close proximity to the relative impression. This label will be initialled by
the Police Officer taking the photograph and, where possible, by the
owner of the article whose attention will be drawn to the latent
impression.

(d) When the object is bulky or immovable, an entirety photograph will be

taken showing the position of the labels referred to in (c) above and,
when possible, of the whole exhibit.

(e) The impression will then be photographed in accordance with the

instructions issued with each finger print camera.

(f) The film(s) or negatives will then be dispatched to the Forensic Bureau
by registered mail (NOT BULK MAIL), or by escort of a Police Officer,
together with P.F. 118 completed in full and with the finger impressions
of all persons said to have legitimate access to the exhibits (P.F. 14A)
and, where known, with the T.C.R.O. numbers and names or finger prints
of suspects.

Action by Scenes of Crime Section in Forensic Bureau

7. The scenes of crime Section will on receipt of exhibits, films or negatives, of an

exhibit said to bear latent impressions :-

(a) register each case in P.F. 129 and give a consecutive number for the year;

(b) immediately after examination and comparison with elimination prints1

and with the two handed finger print index, submit the result on the
detachable portion of P.F. 118 to the Regional Crime Officer concerned.

Routine Comparison of Impressions by Forensic Bureau

8. All finger print forms (P.F. 14B) of criminals charged or convicted of breaking
and kindred offences after routine search in the Main Collection will be passed to
the Scenes of Crime Section for comparison with impressions found at scenes of
crime.

1 Prints of suspects

548
 P.G.O. No. 235
Action by Scenes of Crime Section on Identification of Impressions

9. When identification is made either in the two handed finger print index or in the
Scenes of Crime collection, the O/C. Station and Regional Crime Officer
concerned will be immediately informed by signal. If the person is identified for an
offence committed in a District other than in the District in which he is in custody,
both Districts and Regional Crime Officers will be informed.

Action when Prisoner denies the crime for which he has been Identified

10. (a) When a prisoner denies the crime for which he has been identified, the
O/C. Station will :-

(i) request the Forensic Bureau to prepare a report under Section 154
(b) of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E.2002;

(ii) submit on finger print form (P.F. 14B) two sets of accused’s finger
prints (care must be taken to ensure that the officer taking these
prints will later be available to give evidence at the Court
proceedings).

(b) The O/C. Forensic Bureau will instruct an expert to prepare the report and
forward it to the O/C. Station concerned, together with the exhibit(s), if
any, and the P.F. 14B of the accused.

Proving Expert’s Report and Exhibits in a Case

11. (a) To prove an expert’s report, it is necessary to prove first the exhibits, then
the finger print form (P.F. 14B) after which the report may be put in as
evidence.

(b) The Court or accused may wish to call the expert who signed the report. In
this event the O/C. Station concerned will request an adjournment in order
to arrange with the CO. Forensic Bureau a date when the expert will be
available to give evidence.

Action by O/C. Station – Result of Case

12. In every case where identification has been made, the result of the prosecution
will be sent to the CO. Forensic Bureau quoting the F.P. Number.

Safe Custody of Exhibits

13. All exhibits bearing unidentified impressions will be retained in the scenes of
crime Section for two years.

14. Valuable articles such as silver plate, etc., or articles which the complainant
specifically requires will be returned to the station on request. An entirety
photograph will be taken prior to dispatch.

549
 P.G.O. No. 236
INVESTIGATION – STATEMENTS
General

1. (a) Any Police Officer is authorized, under section 32 (3) of the Police Force
and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.322 R.E.2002, Cap. 322, to record any
statement from any person whom he has reason to believe has any
knowledge which will assist in an investigation.

(b) The procedure for handling statements is amplified in Part IIB of the
Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.

(c) Any Police Officer shall inform a person of his name, rank and station of
work before recording any statement from a person.

PART I

Recording of Statements of Witnesses

2. All statements recorded by Police will be recorded on P.F. 2A and commence as

follows :-

Date, time and place statement commenced .....................................

Statement of .................................................................. (full name)

Occupation ......................................................................................

Residing at .........................................................................................

Race/Tribe/Nationality ........................................................................................

Religion ...............................................................................................

Age ................................................................................................

Declaration under Section 34B(2) (c) of the Evidence Act, Cap.6 R.E. 2002 as
follows:-
This statement (consisting of…………………..page signed by me,) is true to the
best of my knowledge and belief and I make it knowing that, if it is tendered in
evidence, I shall be liable to prosecution for perjury if I have wilfully stated in it
anything which I know to be false or do not believe to be true.
Made at ………………………on the………………..day of………………
(Signed)………………………

When recording a statement from a person who is a foreigner, particulars of his/her

passport, visa, resident permits and other Immigration certificates should be
recorded.

3. No blank spaces or separate paragraphs are permitted and where alterations,

deletions or additions are made to the statement they will be initialled by the
person making the statement and the officer recording it. The statement of each
witness will be recorded on a separate statement form (P.F. 2A), both sides being

550
 P.G.O. No. 236
used, but further statements taken from the same person must be recorded on fresh
form and numbered in serial order.

4. Every statement should, if possible, include the following details :-

(a) Witness’s account of the incident in question, date, time and place and also
clearly what he/she saw, did, etc., and who was present;

(b) Witness’s account of what action he/she took as a result of the incident,
etc., e.g., chased the accused, stating the distance and who assisted; called
for assistance;etc.

(c) Full description of those concerned in the incident;

(d) Witness’s previous knowledge of any of the exhibits and what he/she did
with them.

(e) Witness’s previous knowledge of the accused, if any.

(f) Witness’s previous knowledge of other witnesses etc., relationship, if any

and so on; and

(g) Witness’s estimate of resistances when relevant.

5. When a statement is recorded on more than one page the person making it will sign
in the left margin at the foot of each page.

6. (a) Every statement will end with the following certificate :-

“Statement read over and found to be correct”.

The certificate will be immediately below the end of the statement so that
insertions may not be made. Immediately following this certificate the
signature of the recording officer will be affixed to the left side and his
name. Number and rank will be printed thereon. The signature of the
person making the statement will be affixed on the right hand side. If a
witness was present at the recording of the statement, then that witness’s
signature must follow the last signature.

(b) Where an interpreter has been used, his signature will be affixed to the end
of the statement immediately below that of the person making it, together
with a note of the language or dialect used.

(c) If the person making the statement is illiterate, his right thumb print will be
affixed and finger print ink will be used. The finger impression must be
clear.

(d) The recording officer will comment on the witness’s reliability and value
immediately below the certificate mentioned in sub-paragraph (a) for
example, integrity, honesty, hazy on details, liable to get flustered, etc.

(e) Statements shall be recorded in English or in Kiswahili. An official

English translation shall be made if the statement is recorded in a language
other than English and Case File is required for perusal by the Director of
Public Prosecutions.

551
 P.G.O. No. 236
(f) The recording officer will enter the date and time of any break(s) in
statement-taking in the margin of the statement form opposite the point in
the statement where the break(s) occurred and add a brief note of the
reason for the break(s).

PART II

Questioning of Witness who may be implicated

7. If a Police Officer, while questioning a witness suspects that such person may
possibly be involved in the offence under investigation, he shall at once stop his
questioning, inform the person that he is a suspect and caution him or her in the
following manner:-

(a) proceed to caution the suspect in the manner prescribed in paragraph 8(a)
below, and

(b) he may then ask such further questions which in his opinion may elicit any
useful information regarding the author of the crime under investigation.

Recording of Statements from suspected persons

8. (a) If Police Officer during the taking of a statement from a witness comes to
conclusion that such person has committed an offence but that the exact
nature of the offence is not clear, the Police Officer will immediately
suspend the taking of the statement and will caution the person in the
following words :-

“It is my duty to warn you that whatever you say from now onwards will
be taken down in writing by me and may be used in evidence”.

Should the person then intimate that he wishes to continue with his
statement, the Police Officer shall record the following caution in the
statement immediately at the point where the caution was administered :-

“I have been warned by ............................. that I am not obliged to say

anything unless I wish to do so but whatever I say will be taken down in
writing and may be given in evidence”.

He will then continue to record the statement which will be written in the
prisoner’s own words.

(b) When the Police Officer has finally made up his mind to charge the person
with a particular offence, he will cease recording the prisoner’s statement
and will formally charge the accused in simple language and caution him
in the following words ;-

“Do you wish to say anything in answer to the charge? You are not obliged
to say anything unless you wish to do so, but whatever you say will be
taken down in writing and any be given in evidence”.

(c) The charge and caution will then be written into the statement at the point
where the caution was administered as follows :-

552
 P.G.O. No. 236
“I am charged with .............................. (offence) and have been warned by
..............................(Police Officer’s rank and name) that I am not obliged
to say anything unless I wish to do so, but whatever I may say will be
taken down in writing and may be given in evidence”.

(d) Should the prisoner then intimate that he wishes to continue with his
statement, the Police Officer will record whatever the prisoner has to say.

PART III

Recording of Statements from arrested and accused persons

9. As soon as a Police Officer on duty away from his police station has made up his
mind to arrest a person, he shall tell that person the reason for his arrest and shall
immediately caution him in the following words :-

“I am a Police Officer. You are not obliged to say anything, but anything you say
may be used in evidence”.

10. The officer will record any reply made by the prisoner in his note book,
regardless of admissibility.

11. When the arrested person has been brought to the Police Station and a Police
Officer comes to the conclusion before he has taken any statement from him/her
that there is sufficient evidence to proceed on a particular charge or charges, he
will formally charge the prisoner, inform him/her of the charge in simple
language and caution him/her in the following words :-

“Do you wish to say anything in answer to the charge? You are not obliged to say
anything unless you wish to do so, but whatever you say will be taken down in
writing and may be given in evidence”.

12. Should the prisoner then intimate that he/she wishes to make a statement the
Police Officer shall record the charge and caution on a statement form as follows
:-

“I am charged with .................... (offence) and have been warned by

............................................ (Police Officer’s name and rank) that I am not
obliged to say anything unless I wish to do so, but whatever I say will be taken
down in writing and may be given in evidence”.

The Police Officer will then record whatever the prisoner wishes to say.

13. In no circumstances may arrested persons be interrogated in private premises.

General rules for recording cautioned statements

14. In accordance with Section 53 of the CPA, where a person is under restraint, a
Police Officer shall not ask him any questions, or ask him to do anything, for a
purpose connected with the investigation of an offence, unless –
(a) the Police Officer has told him his name and rank;
(b) the person has been informed by a Police Officer, in a language in
which he is fluent, in writing and, if practicable, orally, of the fact that he is under

553
 P.G.O. No. 236
restraint and of the offence in respect of which he is under restraint; and
(c) the person has been cautioned by a Police Officer in the following
manner, namely, by informing him, or causing him to be informed, in a language
in which he is fluent, in writing in accordance with the prescribed form and, if
practicable, orally –
(i) that he is not obliged to answer any question asked of him by a
Police Officer, other than a question seeking particulars of his name and address;
and
(ii) that, subject to this Act, he may communicate with a lawyer,
relative or friend.

15. Having recorded the statement, the Police Officer shall read it over to the prisoner
and ask him if he has any correction to make. The prisoner shall then be asked to
sign at the end of the statement and at the foot of every page thereof. He shall also
be asked to initial any alterations. The Police Officer shall also countersign the
statement.

16. If the prisoner making the statement cannot write, he shall affix his thumb-print at
the end of the statement and at the foot of every page hereof.

17. When two or more persons are apprehended for the same offence and a statement
is taken separately from one of the persons apprehended, his statement should not
be read to the other person apprehended, but each of such persons should be
furnished with a copy of such statement and nothing should be said or done to
invite a reply. If any such person is unable to read or understand the language in
which a statement is written, it may be read to him in a language which he
understands by a person other than a member of the Force. If any such person
desires to make a statement in reply, the procedure described in paragraphs 6 to
12 shall be followed.

18. A standard guide for Police Officers who have occasion to question or record
statements from suspects or accused persons is provided by the Judges’ Rules.
These Rules are set out with a simple explanation thereon in Appendix “A”.

19. (a) Section 32 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.322
R.E.2002 gives police the following powers to enforce the attendance of
witnesses :-

(i) If the offence is cognisable

Any Gazetted Officer or Inspector making an investigation into an

offence may, in writing, require the attendance before himself of
any person whom he has reason to believe has any knowledge
which will assist in such investigation and such attendance may be
required at any Police station in the district in which the person
resides or for the time being, is found.

(ii) If the offence is non-cognisable

Action at (i) above can only be taken after obtaining a specific

written authority in each case from a Magistrate or Justice of the
Peace, or from the Attorney General or any person empowered by
the Attorney General to grant such authority.

554
 P.G.O. No. 236
(b) Any person who has been required to attend as above who fails to attend or
who having attended refuses to give his correct name and address, and to
answer all questions that may be lawfully put to him shall be guilty of an
offence, provided that no person may be required to answer any question,
the answer to which may tend to expose him to any criminal charge,
penalty or forfeiture.

(c) Any Police Officer may record any statement made to him by any such
person, whether such person is suspected of having committed any offence
or not, but before recording any statement from a person whom such
Police Officer has decided to charge or who has been charged with
committing any offence, such Police Officer shall warn such person that
any statement made may be used in evidence, provided that any such
statement shall, whenever possible, be recorded in writing and signed by
the person making it after it has been read to him in a language he
understands and he has been invited to make any corrections he may wish.

Importance of this Order

20 This Order, which should be read in conjunction with P.G.O. No. 246, is of very
great importance. Every Police Officer should have a thorough knowledge of its
provisions and all members of the Rank & File should be lectured thereon at
frequent and regular intervals.

PART IV
Duration of Interview or Interrogation

21. The basic period available for interviewing a person is four hours commencing at
the time when he was taken under restraint in respect of the offence. (Section 50
(1) (b) CPA).

22. The basic period available for interviewing may be extended for a period not
exceeding eight hours by a Police Officer or Magistrate for a good cause. If a
Police Officer extends the period he shall inform the person concerned (Section
51 CPA).
APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 236)

These guidelines are formulated for the purpose of explaining to Police Officers engaged in
the investigation of crime the conditions under which the Courts would be likely to admit
in evidence, statements made by persons suspected of or charged with criminal offences
and to ensure that any statements tendered in evidence should be a purely voluntary
statement and therefore admissible in evidence, i.e. that the interrogation of persons in the
course of a criminal investigation is carried out by the police in absolute fairness to the
person involved and in due deference to the principles of justice.

Rule 1. When a Police Officer is endeavouring to discover the author of a crime,

there is no objection to his putting questions in respect thereof to any person or
persons, whether suspected or not from whom he considers any useful information
can be obtained.

Rule 2. Whenever a Police Officer has made up his mind to charge a person with a
crime, he should first caution such a person before asking him any questions, or

555
 P.G.O. No. 236
any further questions, as the case may be.

Rule 3. Persons in custody should not be questioned without the usual caution
being first administered.

Rule 4. If the prisoner wishes to volunteer any statement the usual caution should
be administered. The caution should result to information that the person is not
obliged to say anything and end with the words “may be given in evidence”.

Rule 5. The caution to be administered to a prisoner when the charge is read to him
should be in the words set out in paragraph 8 (b) of P.G.O. No. 236.

Care should be taken to avoid any suggestion that his answers can only be used
AGAINST him, as this may prevent an innocent person making a statement
which might assist to clear him of the charge.

Rule 6. A statement made by a prisoner before there is time to caution him is not
rendered inadmissible in evidence merely by reason of no caution having been
given, but in such a case he should be cautioned as soon as possible.

Rule 7. A prisoner making a voluntary statement must not be cross-examined, and

no questions should be put to him about it except for the purposes of removing
ambiguity in what he has actually said. For instance, if he has mentioned an hour
without saying whether it was morning or evening, or has given a day of the week
and date of the month which do not agree, or has not made it clear to what
individual or what place he intended to refer in some part of his statement, he may
be questioned sufficiently to clear up the point.

Rule 8. When it is intended to charge two or more persons with the same offence
before the Courts and statements are taken separately from the persons to be
charged, the police should not read the statement(s) to the other person(s) to be
charged but each of such persons should be furnished by the police with a copy of
such statement(s).

If the person to be charged is unable to read or to understand the language in

which any such statement is written it should be read to him in a language he
understands by a person other than a Police Officer. Nothing should be said
or done by the Police Officer to invite a reply. If the person to be charged
desires to make a statement in reply the usual caution should be administered.

Rule 9. Any statement made in accordance with the above Rules should, whenever
possible be taken down in writing and signed by the person making it after it has
been read to him and he has been invited to make any corrections he may wish.

Comments on the Guidelines

Rule 2. The caution to be given at this stage will be the caution set out in
paragraph 8 (a) of this Order because the person concerned has not yet had the
charge read out to him. But as soon as the Police Officer has made up his mind to
charge the person with the commission of a particular offence that person must be
cautioned in the manner set out in paragraph 8 (b) of P.G.O. No. 236.

Rule 3. This rule is not intended to encourage or authorise the questioning or cross-
examination of a person in custody-that is to say, under arrest or detention, in a
police cell or Charge Room or in a prison-after he has been cautioned on the

556
 P.G.O. No. 236
subject of the crime for which he is in custody and long before this Rule was
formulated and since it has been the practice for the Judge not to allow any answer
to a question so improperly put to a person in custody after the caution has been
administered. For instance, a person arrested for theft in a dwelling house may,
before the charge is read out to him, say: “I have hidden the property away”, and
after caution he would properly be asked: “Where have you hidden it?” This rule is
intended to apply to such a case and so understood is not in conflict with or does
not qualify Rule 7, which prohibits any question upon a voluntary statement except
such as is necessary to clear up ambiguity.

Rule 4. The term “prisoner” used in this rule and in Rules 5,6, and 7 is
synonymous with the term “person in custody”.

Rule 5. With regard to the form of caution, the words in rule 5 are applicable only
when the charge is read out to the prisoner and have no application when a violent
or resisting prisoner is being taken to a police station.

In any case (see Note on Rule 2) before the charge is read out, the usual caution
is, or should be :-

“You are not obliged to say anything, but anything you say may be given in
evidence”.

Rule 6. If the person giving the statement is illiterate and cannot sign his name, he
must be invited to set his thumb-print at the foot of each page of his statement. It is
advisable that any witnesses present at the giving of the statement also sign at the
foot of each page of the statement as an indication that they were present, within
hearing distance and can vouch for the accuracy of the statement as recorded and
read over to the person who gave it.

N.B: Whenever the word “should” appears in the Rules, it is best to construe it as
meaning “must”.

Various examples

1. Where a Police Officer said to the prisoner who was suspected of the murder of her
child, that “if she did not tell him where it was she might get herself into trouble
and that it would be the worse for her”, a statement thereupon made by her to the
Police Officer was rejected.

2. But a statement made to a Police Officer, after he had told the prisoner the nature
of the charge against him and that he need not say anything to incriminate himself,
but what he did say would be taken down and used as evidence against him, was
held to be admissible.

3. Where a Police Officer in the course of a conversation between himself and the
prisoner respecting the subject matter of the charge (and immediately before
apprehending the prisoner) said to the prisoner, “I must know about it”, it was held
that the use of this expression made by the Police Officer did not render a
statement there upon made by the prisoner inadmissible. (But the use of such
words, which are open to interpretation as a threat, is NOT to be encouraged).

4. Where a Police Officer said to the prisoner who was suspected of having stolen the
complainant’s purse, “Now is the time for you to take it back to her (the
complainant)”, it was held that the use of these words by the Police Officer did not

557
 P.G.O. No. 236
render inadmissible a statement subsequently made to him by the prisoner to
induce him to confess.

5. The fact that a prisoner’s statement is made by him in reply to questions put to him
(by a Police Officer) after he has been taken into custody does not of itself render
the statement inadmissible in evidence.

6. Where one of two prisoners in custody (on a joint charge) voluntarily made and
signed a statement implicating the other, and such statement was read over to the
prisoner implicated, and the latter, after being cautioned, made a confession which
was taken down in writing and signed by him, it was held that the statement of the
one prisoner and the confession of the other might be given in evidence upon the
trial of the later.

7. Where the prisoner (whilst in prison awaiting her trial) was questioned by a Police
Officer without being cautioned and the Court was of opinion that such questions
had been put to her for the purpose of entrapping her into making admissions, her
answers were held to be inadmissible.

The basic principle in the questioning of persons was accurately summarised by

Cockburn, L.C.J. in 1870 :-

“You may ask a man a question with an honest intention to elicit the truth and
ascertain whether there are grounds for apprehending him, but, with a foregone
intention of arresting him, to ask him questions for the main purpose of getting
anything out of him, is a very improper proceeding”.

558
 P.G.O. No. 237
INVESTIGATION – SUB JUDICE CASES
1. No investigation shall be undertaken in the first instance into reports alleging that an
offence has been committed in connection with matters arising from legal
proceedings which are sub judice.

2. All such reports shall be referred through proper channels to the O/C. District, who
shall seek advice from the Court before which the proceedings are pending or from
the Director of Public Prosecutions through the Director of Criminal Investigation
as to whether or not an investigation should be under-taken.

3. Sections 102 to 114 A Chapter XI of the Penal Code, Cap. 16 R.E. 2002 are the
offences contemplated as being within the scope of this Order.

559
 P.G.O. No. 238
INVESTIGATION – WANTED PERSONS
Definition

1. For the purposes of this Order “Wanted Person” means any person who is alleged,
on reasonable grounds, to have been concerned in the commission of any
cognisable offence and for whom a warrant of arrest has been issued or applied.

Registering and circulation of wanted person’s description

2. The O/C. of the Station which receives the first report of an offence for which a
person is wanted will take the following action as soon as the criminal’s identity
is known or as soon as an adequate description has been obtained and, in any
case, not later than 48 hours after the issue of a warrant of arrest :-

(a) Apply for a warrant of arrest,

(b) Enter the full particulars of the wanted person and the offence or reason
for which the person is wanted under the appropriate heading, in
triplicate, in the Missing & Wanted Persons Register (P.F. 179). The top
copy will be left in the Register, the second copy posted on the Police
Station Notice Board and the third copy forwarded to the Forensic
Bureau,

(c) Enter full particulars on P.F. 10 (Mtu huyu anatakiwa) and distribute to
local authorities in the District,

(d) Send a “Wanted Person Telegram” (by telegraph or signal) to the

Forensic Bureau, Regional C.I.D. Headquarters and to all police stations
within the region which might be able to assist in the search for the
wanted person, The telegram/signal will be prefixed with the letters
“WPT”, followed by the heading numbers, giving particulars of the
wanted person as recorded in the register. When the C.R.O. number of
the wanted person is known, this will be quoted. The list of Police
Stations circulated will be entered in the Register. The Regional C.I.D.
Officer will be responsible for wider circulation outside the Region
should he consider it necessary.

3. The O/C. Station receiving a “WPT” will :-

(a) enter the particulars of the wanted person and the offence or reason for
which he is wanted under the appropriate headings, in triplicate, in the
missing & wanted persons Register (P.F. 179);

(b) leave the top copy in the Missing & Wanted Persons Register;

(c) post the second copy on the Police station notice board;

(d) post the third copy on the Administration Notice Board;

(e) ensure that all persons arrested are checked against the wanted &
Missing Persons Register.

4. The CO. Forensic Bureau will be responsible for any wider circulation of the
description of a warrant person through the medium of the police Gazette.

560
 P.G.O. No. 238
Descriptions will be issued on name cards on the reverse of which will appear, if
available, a photograph of the wanted person.

Photographs of wanted persons

5. (a) When the identity of a wanted person is established, endeavours will be

made to obtain a photograph from his friends, acquaintances or from the
home of the wanted person.

(b) When the wanted person is not known, but the complainant or eye
witnesses think they can recognize a photograph, investigating officers
should follow the procedure laid down in P.G.O. No. 231 (“Investigation
– Identification by Photographs”).

6. Where a photograph is obtained, it will be sent by the quickest possible means to

the Forensic Bureau, accompanied by a copy of the relevant “Wanted Persons
Telegram” on which will be endorsed the names of Police Stations circulated.

7. The Forensic Bureau will send all stations circulated three photographs of the
wanted person. The receiving stations will affix one photograph to the relevant
entry in the Wanted Persons Register and one photograph to the Wanted Persons
Notice posted on the Police Notice Board.

8. Whenever the Forensic Bureau receives a photograph of the wanted person, after
publication of the name card the photograph will be published in a later Police
Gazette quoting the reference to the name card. O/C. Stations, on receipt of the
Police Gazette showing the photograph of the wanted person, will cut out the
photograph and paste it on the reverse of the wanted person’s name card already
received from the Forensic Bureau, in accordance with para. 4.

Procedure on arrest of wanted person

9. (a) The O/C. Station, on receipt of a “WPT” advising him of the arrest of a
wanted person will, where the wanted person is not required by the
arresting station, arrange for an escort and identifying witness to deliver
the warrant of arrest for endorsement to the Magistrate in whose area of
jurisdiction the arrest was made and will then take over custody of the
prisoner.

(b) Where the subject of a “WPT” is in custody and wanted by more than one
station for criminal offences, the CO. Forensic Bureau will inform the
Director of Criminal Investigation who will advise the stations concerned
on the order in which outstanding cases are to be tried.

(c) Where the subject of “WPT” is traced by the Forensic Bureau and found
to be in :-

(i) prison custody;

(ii) police custody,

the OC. Forensic Bureau will signal all stations concerned and circulated
and will then inform the Director of Criminal Investigation who will
direct further action.

561
 P.G.O. No. 238
Cancellation of wanted person notice

10. Whenever a wanted person is arrested :-

(a) by a Station other than the Station originating the “WPT”, the O/C. of the
Station affecting the arrest will advise, by signal or telegram, the O/C.
Station at which the person is wanted. This signal will be repeated to the
Forensic Bureau who will, by notice in the Police Gazette, cancel the
wanted notice;

(b) by the Station originating the “WPT”, the O/C. Station will advise the
Forensic Bureau by signal or telegram. The Forensic Bureau will then, by
notice in the Police Gazette, cancel the wanted notice.

11. Each O/C. Station receiving notice of the arrest of a wanted person, as set out in
para. 10 above will cancel the appropriate entry in the Wanted Persons Register
by writing “Arrested” diagonally across the page and quoting thereon the
reference of the notification of arrest. The two copies of P.F. 179 posted on the
Police and Administration Notice Boards will be removed and destroyed.

12. The CO. Forensic Bureau, on receipt of information of a wanted person’s arrest,
will cancel the name card in the Police Gazette, provided that such person was
arrested in connection with the case for which publication was made. If he is
arrested on another charge, the publication in the Police Gazette will not be
cancelled until arrest is effected.

13. O/C. Stations will then remove the name card from the index and destroy it. O/C.
C.I.D. Units will retain only those name cards which carry photographs.

Index to be kept by Forensic Bureau

14. CO. Forensic Bureau will maintain an index of all wanted persons. The index will
be divided into Sections to allow for carding by name, by known aliases and
distinguishing features.

562
 P.G.O. No. 239
DIPLOMATIC IMMUNITIES – EMBASSIES, HIGH COMMISSIONS

1. Regional Commanders will ensure that all ranks are made fully conversant with the
provisions of the Diplomatic and Consular Immunities and Privileges Act, Cap.356 R.E.
2002.

Immunity

2. The following persons are immune from suit and legal process:-

(a) Representatives in the United Republic of foreign sovereign powers.

(b) Any person for the time being recognised by the Government of the United
Republic as the head of mission in Tanzania of any foreign sovereign power,
whether he is known by the title of High Commissioner for that country or by any
other title.

(c) Any member of the diplomatic staff of a mission performing duties substantially
corresponding to those performed by any member of the diplomatic staff of a
mission of a foreign sovereign power.

(d) Any member of the family of a head of a mission or of a member of the

diplomatic staff of a mission.

(e) A member of the domestic staff of a head of mission.

(f) Any other person who the Minister has conferred immunity by an Order pursuant
to Section 9 or 13 of the Act.

Personal Immunity

3. Persons mentioned in paragraph 2 enjoy personal immunity from both civilian and criminal
proceedings and cannot be compelled to give evidence in Courts.

Inviolability

4. The premises of Consular or Missions, their residencies, archives, furnishings property and
means of transport are likewise immune from search requisition, attachment or execution.

Consular Immunities and Privileges

5 (a) Consular Officers:-

A consular officer is only immune from legal proceedings in respect of things

done or omitted to be done by him in the course of his official duties.

(b) Inviolability:-

Consular archives and official correspondence are inviolable.

(c) Evidence in Courts:-

A Consular Officer or employee is not compelled to give evidence in the Courts

in respect of any matter contained in his archives or official correspondence.

563
 P.G.O. No. 239
Fiscal Privileges

6. Members of the Diplomatic and Consular Corps are exempted from taxes, rates and fee in
accordance with Section 9 which reads:-

“(1) The Minister may, by Order published in the Gazette, or by directions–

(a) make such provisions as he thinks fit in order to facilitate any immunity from
taxes, rates or fees to which any person is entitled by reason of his being the
envoy of a foreign sovereign power accredited to the United Republic, or his
being a member of the family or a servant of such envoy or a member of the
diplomatic staff of such envoy or of such member's family, or by reason of the
provisions of Section 5, 6, 7, 8, 15 and 16 or Order made under Subsection (1) of
Section 13 and may in such Order or directions declare the extent of such
immunity in respect of any person or class of persons and as to whether or not
any particular tax, duty, rate or fee is included therein or excluded therefrom; and
where any such declaration is made it shall, (in the case of any person to whom
an Order made under Subsection (1) of Section 13 refers) subject to the
provisions of the Fourth Schedule, be conclusive;

(b) grant any person or class of persons to whom Section 9 or Section 10 refers
immunity from taxes, duties and rates upon–

(i) the person concerned; or

(ii) the movable property of such person; or

(iii) so much of the income of the person concerned as is derived directly

from the holding of his office, or from the payment of any fees imposed
by law.

(2) It is hereby declared that no immunity to which paragraph (a) of Subsection

(1) refers and no immunity granted under paragraph (b) of Subsection (1) shall be
construed as exempting any person from compliance with the formalities in
respect of the importation of goods which are prescribed in any law relating to
customs; and every such immunity shall be subject to compliance with such
conditions as the Commissioner of Customs and Sales Tax may prescribe for the
protection of the revenue.”

7. However, every person enjoying diplomatic immunities and privileges conferred under the
Act must have comprehensive insurance in respect of any motor-vehicle in his possession
or use.

8. Arms licences must be applied for and dealt with in accordance with the relevant
regulations except for the waiver of fees.

Service of Process

9. No attempt should be made to effect service of process, whether civil or criminal, on High
Commissioner, Embassy or Consulate premises.

Exclusion from Immunity

10. (a) A member of the official or domestic staff of a Mission (Embassy or High
Commission) who is a Tanzania citizen is excluded from immunity except in

564
 P.G.O. No. 239
respect of things done or omitted to be done in the course of the performance of
his official duties.

(b) The members of his family, as such, are entirely excluded from immunity.

(c) Consular officers and employees in their personal capacity are excluded from
immunity from arrest and legal process and may be required to give evidence in
the Courts. This includes situation where a person with immunity decides to enter
into an agreement of a commercial nature in his private capacity.

Proof of Immunity

11. A certificate issued by the Minister responsible for Foreign Affairs shall be regarded as
conclusive proof of entitlement to diplomatic immunity.

12. Names of those entitled to diplomatic immunity will be published from time to time in the
Government Gazette, but this does not constitute proof of immunity.

13. Green and gold identity cards marked “Tanzania Government Diplomatic Identity Card”
will identify such person. These cards are not issued to consuls.

14. Diplomats or Consuls’ cars may well carry plates designated “C.D.) or “C.C.” but this is
not required by law, and such plates are not to be considered as in any way proof of the
identity or status of the occupant of the vehicle.

Police Action

15. (a) Where it is established by the police that a member of the diplomatic body has
committed a criminal offence, this offence will be investigated and a summary of
the facts will be submitted to the Director of Criminal Investigation immediately
after the completion of the investigation. The Director of Criminal Investigation
will notify the ministry of responsible for Foreign Affairs and the Director of
Public Prosecutions. Depending upon the circumstances, a request will be made
to the Ambassador concerned either to waive the diplomatic immunity in respect
of the accused person, or to warn him that future misconduct may entail criminal
proceedings. Where diplomatic immunity is waived, the police must be in a
position to proceed with the prosecution. It is therefore, essential that the initial
investigation is complete.

(b) Where an offence is committed by a servant of the diplomatic body and that
servant is a Tanzania citizen and at the time of the commission of the offence was
not engaged in his official capacity, then the case will be investigated and the
accused charged in the same manner as any other member of the public. These
cases will be reported to the Director of Criminal Investigation in the same
manner as a serious crime. The Director of Criminal Investigation will notify the
ministry responsible for Foreign Affairs.

(c) Where an offence is committed by a servant of the diplomatic body who is a

Tanzania citizen and who, at the time of the commission of the offence, was
performing his official duties, then the procedure to be followed will be as in sub-
paragraph (a).

Security

16. It must be remembered that the police have a special duty to take all appropriate steps to

565
 P.G.O. No. 239
protect the premises occupied by members of the diplomatic body against any intrusion or
damage and to prevent any disturbance of the peace which would impair their dignity

Traffic Violations

17. Although a diplomatic/consular official is immune from prosecutions, in a country ruled by

rule of law, it is still important to warn the violator of traffic law of the dangers of his
actions and allow the official to proceed once the traffic police is satisfied that his
identification is in order. In any aggravated case, a detailed memorandum of the
circumstances should be forwarded to the Director of Criminal Investigation through the
Commanding Officer Traffic Unit. The appropriate authorities will be notified of the
incident.

18. If the official is stopped for driving under influence of alcohol or drug, the primary
consideration shall be to see that the official is not a danger to himself or the public. Based
upon a determination of the circumstances, the following options are suggested.

(a) Take him to a telephone so that he can call a relative or a friend to come pick him
up.

(b) Arrange for transportation to his home or office.

(c) The official may be voluntarily transported to the station or other location where
he can recover sufficiently to enable him to proceed safely.

19. The official shall not be handcuffed or subjected to any sobriety test. At best, this is a
sensitive situation. Treat the official with respect and courtesy, and impress upon him that
your actions and primary responsibility are to care for his safety and the safety of others.
Officers will submit a detailed memorandum to their Officers in Command describing the
incident.

566
 P.G.O. No. 240
JUVENILES – TREATMENT OF
General

1. The following paragraphs provide guidelines on this order when dealing with
juveniles in enforcement and custody situations.

2. All members of the Force should acquaint themselves with established procedures
for handling both criminal and non-criminal juvenile incidents as defined in the
Children and Young Persons Act, Cap. 13 R.E. 2002 and this order.

3. Officers should always endeavor to take measures that will effect positive changes
in the juvenile offenders and such measures should be consistent with the law,
safety and security interests of the community.

4. An officer dealing with a juvenile who has committed a criminal act or a violation
should use the least coercive, reasonable alternative consistent with preserving
public safety and order.

Responding to Juvenile Offenders.

5. An officer when dealing with a juvenile should use any of the four general
alternatives:

(a) Give verbal warning for minor offenses;

(b) Divert the juvenile to a social welfare or service agency normally referred
to as fit institution or person, if the contact does not constitute criminal
behavior;

(c) Take the juvenile into temporary custody and with immediate effect
surrender the child to the care of a nearby remand home of fit institution or
person approved by the social welfare department in the locality. In this
event:

(i) the officer will write a referral to the Social Welfare Department to
notify it of the event the juvenile is involved.

(ii) that agency may choose to handle the situation in a counseling

environment, or refer the case to the juvenile Court system.

6. The following considerations should guide an officer in making a decision on the

option to be taken with regard to a juvenile offender:

(a) The Nature of the Alleged Offenses. Minor offences and violations may be
diverted from the criminal system by using a verbal warning. If
exceptional circumstances exist, runaways and liquor law violators should
be referred to the Social Welfare Department, or fit institutions. These
violations often indicate an underlying problem for which the juvenile may
need counseling programs and supervision. Delinquent acts requiring the
attention of the Juvenile Court, include all such acts that, if committed by
an adult, would be serious offences; all delinquent acts involving weapons;
all serious gang-related delinquent acts; all delinquent acts involving
aggravated assault and battery; all delinquent acts committed by juveniles
on probation, community service or parole or by those with a case

567
 P.G.O. No. 240
pending; and all repeated delinquent acts within the preceding 12 months.

(b) The alleged offender's record, if known.

(c) The availability of community based rehabilitation programs.

Protective Custody and Release of a Juvenile.

7. An officer may take a juvenile into protective custody in the following

circumstances:

(a) Where, if the juvenile were an adult, the juvenile could be arrested without
a warrant;

(b) Where the juvenile's condition or surroundings reasonably appear to be

such as to jeopardise the juvenile's welfare;

(c) Where the Juvenile Court, by order endorsed on the summons has ordered
that the juvenile be taken into temporary custody;

(d) When a warrant has been issued by a juvenile Court for the arrest of a
juvenile; or,

(e) Where an order for custody has been issued by the superintendent of the
Approved School.

8. Once a juvenile is taken into police custody he should be taken, when possible, to
the juvenile facility without delay. A juvenile in custody requiring medical
treatment should be provided with the required service as a matter of priority.

9. The officer shall take all reasonable steps to notify the juvenile's parent, guardian,
or other person responsible for the juvenile of the custody situation.

10. A juvenile may be detained at the police station for a period up to four hours for
purposes of determining identity provided the officer handling the juvenile ensures
that the juvenile is not mixed with adults.

11. The Social Welfare Department must be consulted when problems of identity of
persons to take physical responsibility of the juvenile in custody occur.

12. If, at the end of the four-hour period, no reasonable disposition has been arranged
and no other option under the law is available (such as remand to the care of a fit
institution or person), then the juvenile may be released on his/her own
recognizance. Under no circumstances shall a juvenile be detained beyond 24
hours from the initial time of custody without a temporary hold release plan.

13. If a juvenile is taken into protective custody, the officer shall take all reasonable
steps to notify the parent, guardian, or other responsible person of the custody as
soon as possible. In most cases the juvenile shall be released to the custody of the
juvenile's parent or other responsible person in this state, except:

(a) Where the Court has issued a warrant of arrest against the juvenile; or

(b) Where the officer has probable cause to believe that the welfare of the
juvenile or others may be immediately endangered by the release of the

568
 P.G.O. No. 240
juvenile.

14. If an officer does not wish to release the juvenile because of concerns for the
welfare of the juvenile or others, the officer must contact the Social Welfare
Department or its representatives who will determine if the circumstances warrant
continued custody of the juvenile.

15. If the juvenile will be lodged in a remand home or in a shelter care facility, the
remand home or the said facility should produce the juvenile before a juvenile
Court within twenty four hours to be dealt with in accordance with the law.

16. When an officer lodges a juvenile in either a remand home or a shelter care facility
or any other approved facility, the incident report must be done prior to the officer
going off duty, and the report forwarded to the Officer in charge prior to the start
of the next business day. A custody report will be completed, including the
pertinent circumstances of the incident or custody, and a copy will be delivered to
the person in charge of the remand home or shelter care facility or any other
approved facility as the case may be.

17. Only juveniles, 10 years old or older, may be taken into protective custody or
placed into a temporary holding cell. They shall be kept out of sight and sound, and
physically separate from adult prisoners, and from other juveniles of a different
gender.

Interviews of Juveniles.

18. When a juvenile has been taken into custody for a crime:

(a) the officer will advise the juvenile of juvenile system procedures and legal
rights as required by the Children and Young Persons Act, Cap. 13 R.E.
2002 and Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 prior to conducting
any interviews, and:

(b) The juvenile may confer with parents or guardian at the juvenile's request
or if the officer believes that it would be in the best interest of the
investigation.

19. (a) No more than two officers shall be directly involved in the interrogation at
any one time.

(b) The mere presence of three or more officers in a field situation is not
prohibited, but when practical, the number of officers shall not exceed the
number necessary to control the situation at hand.

20. Interrogations should not last longer than is necessary to gain adequate information
on the matter being investigated and to identify the juvenile. The officer shall
assess the situation with the following factors considered before continuing a
lengthy interview:

(a) Age of the juvenile,

(b) Maturity of the juvenile,

(c) Location of the interview, and

569
 P.G.O. No. 240
(d) Gravity of the offence.

21. Juveniles shall be allowed breaks for personal necessities such as access to the
restroom.

22. In order to minimise disruption at school and cooperate with school officials,
members who interview or arrest a student in school are expected to cooperate with
school authorities and the student's parents, and comply with procedures
established by the school involved.

Photographing and Fingerprinting Juveniles.

23. A child or youth may be photographed or fingerprinted:

(a) Pursuant to a search warrant.

(b) Upon remand to a juvenile Court.

(c) Upon consent of both the child and parent after being advised that they are
not required to give consent.

(d) Upon consent of parent alone if child is under 10 years of age, and original
photographs and fingerprints are delivered to the parent.

(e) Upon order of the Court.

24. Fingerprint and photograph files or records of juveniles shall be kept separate from
adults.

25. Fingerprint and photograph files or records of juveniles shall be disclosed only to
the following:

(a) Public agencies for use in a criminal investigation only when the
information is pertinent to a specific investigation.

(b) The Social Welfare Department and juvenile Court.

(c) Social workers and counselors responsible for the care of such juvenile.

(d) The parties to the proceeding and their counsel.

(e) The victim or a witness.

26. Fingerprint and photograph files or records of juveniles shall be sent to the F.B.
same as adult files and records.

27. Fingerprint and photograph files and records of a juvenile shall be destroyed when
the juvenile Court orders expunction of record.

Traffic Violations of Juvenile Offenders

28. Juveniles charged with traffic violations shall be arrested or issued a notification
generally in the same manner as an adult, but with the exceptions indicated in the
procedure below.

570
 P.G.O. No. 240
(a) All juvenile traffic offenders shall be taken to Traffic Court in the same
manner as adults provided that their proceedings are conducted in
accordance with the law regarding protection of juveniles.

(b) If a juvenile is arrested for an offence an offence, the arresting officer

shall:

(i) Issue a citation for the charge;

(ii) Complete a custody report; and,

(iii) Either release the juvenile to a parent or guardian, or lodge the

juvenile in accordance with custody policy.

571
 SECTION XI
POLICE DUTIES – GENERAL
Nos. 271 – 350

P.G.O. No. Title

271. Arms Licensing

272. Arrest and Search
273. Aircraft Crashes and Missing Aircraft
274. Arms – Issue and Use of - by Police
275. Arms – Storage of Private Arms in Police Stations
276. Arms & Ammunition - Unclaimed/Confiscated/Surrendered
277. Availability – Gazetted Officers and Inspectors
278. Availability of Officers – Duty officers
279. Beats
280. Books – Duty Book (PF.59A) and Duty Roster (PF. 59)
281. Books – Investigations Register
282. Books – Notebook
283. Books – Official Diaries
284. Books – Station Diaries
285. Books-Summons Register
286. Case Files and Minor Offence Dockets – Preparation of
287. Charge Rooms - Operation of
288. Duties-Hours of – For Rank & File
289. Duties – Parade of
290. Escorts-Specie, Explosives, Force Arms & Ammunition
291. Guards on Government offices
292. Information-Communication of
293. Information – Correct Channels of
294. Information-Release To Press and Radio
295. Licensed Premises – Auctioneers
296. Licensed Premises – Cinemas and Theatres
297. Licensed Premises - Explosive Magazines and Stores
298. Licensed Premises – Local Liquor
299. Licensed Premises – Private Arms Warehouses
300. Licensed Premises – Second-Hand Dealers and Scrap Metal
301. Licensed Premises – Supervision of
302. Patrols – Rural

579
303. Patrols and Visits-By Senior officers
304. Property – Unclaimed
305. Public Collections and Appeals for Money
306. Raids – Drugs and Prevention of Illicit Traffic in Drugs
307. Raids – Gaming
308. Raids – Unlawful Local Liquor
309. Reports – Report Book
310. Report – Daily and Weekly
311. Reports – Immediate Action on Receipt of
312. Report – Refusal of Police Action on
313. Security – Alarm Signals
314. Security – Attack – On – Station Exercises
315. Security – Emergency Turn-Out
316. Security – Protection of V.I.P.S
317. Security – Regional Exercises
318. Security – Road Block Exercises
319. Warrants (Civil) of Arrest
320. Warrants (Criminal) of Arrest and Search

580
 P.G.O. No. 271
ARMS LICENSING
General

1. This Order deals with all aspects of arms licensing and is issued by the Inspector
General as directive to Licensing Officers under Regulation 12 (1) of the Arms and
Ammunition Regulations, as amended from time to time.

First application to license residents’ specified firearms

2. Any person other than a visitor wishing to license a specified firearm for the first
time will be instructed to fill in four copies of the prescribed Application Form
(Form “N”) and submit four copies of passport size photographs. No fee will be
accepted at this stage and applicants will be told to await further notification. The
import licence is to be attached.

3. (a) The Licensing Officers (normally the O/C. District) will arrange for the
application to be processed in accordance with the law by his office, and
will involve local authorities particularly the District Security and
Defence Committee.

(b) The O/C. District will submit the application and the recommendations of
the District Security and Defence Committee to the Regional
Commander who will arrange for the meeting of the Regional Security
and Defence Committee to scrutinise the application.

(c) At the Regional level:

(i) if the applicant is a citizen and the application is for a rifle or

shotgun, the Regional Commander shall have the final say on the
matter as long as he involves the Regional Security and Defence
Committee;

(ii) if the Application is for a pistol and in all other applications by

non-citizens or corporate bodies, the Regional Commander
shall submit the application with the recommendations of the
Regional Security and Defence Committee to the Director of
Criminal Investigation for final decision.

4. If the application is not approved, the Licencing Officer will at once inform the
applicant by letter, retaining a copy of the correspondence in his office together
with the application form.

5. If the application is approved, the Licensing Officer will at once send the
completed Application Form to the Central Arms Registry (C.A.R.)

6. The C.A.R. will make out a licence book and send it with the Application Form to
the originating Licencing Officer, at the same time advising the applicant that his
licence is ready for collection at the Police Station where he originally applied.

7. The Licencing Officer will then take the following action :-

(a) Issue withdrawal permit (Form “L”).

(b) Physically check the firearm and verify that the description recorded in

581
 P.G.O. No. 271
the application form (Form "N”) and licence book is correct.

(c) Collect the prescribed license fee from the applicant.

(d) Make out the Licence Fee Receipt, in quadruplicate.

(e) Paste white copy of the Receipt onto the appropriate space in the Licence
Book.

(f) Retain blue copy of the Receipt for production to the Permanent
Secretary, Ministry of Public Security and Safety, Dar es Salaam, when
he pays in the license fee.

(g) Paste pink copy of receipt onto the appropriate space on the application
form and send it to the C.A.R., together with the original import licence
(Form “A.1”) and blue copy of withdrawal permit (Form “L”) where
issued.

(h) Leave straw coloured copy of Receipt in the Receipt Book.

(i) Hand over the Licence Book to the applicant.

(j) Pay in the License Fee, supported by the blue copy of Receipt to the
Permanent Secretary, Ministry of Public Security and Safety, Dar es
Salaam.

(k) Send the application form to the C.A.R. within twenty-four hours.

First applications to license residents’ unspecified firearms

8. Any person wishing to license a firearm and who is unable to give precise
particulars at the time of application will be instructed to fill in two copies of the
application form (Form “N). No fee will be accepted at this stage and applicants
will be told to await further notification. The Licencing Officer will arrange for the
original copy of Form “N” to be processed.

9. If the application is not approved, action will be taken as in paragraph 4. If the

application is approved, the Licencing Officer will so advise the applicant and
hand to him the duplicate copy of Form “N” on which shall be endorsed the words
“Processed and Approved”, and signed by the authorised officer. At the same time,
the applicant will be requested to forward Form “N” to the private warehouse
dealer from whom he intends to purchase the firearm or from where the firearm is
deposited.

10. On receipt of Form “N” the dealer should enter particulars of the firearm
purchased and produce the firearm and application form to the nearest Licencing
Officer who will then take the following action :-

(a) Issue transfer permit (Form “H”).

(b) Physically check the firearm and verify that the description recorded in
the application form is correct.

(c) Collect the prescribed licence fee from the dealer/owner.

582
 P.G.O. No. 271
(d) Make out the licence fee receipt in quadruplicate.

(e) Hand the white copy of the receipt to the owner/dealer.

(f) Retain the blue copy of the receipt for production to the Permanent
Secretary, Ministry of Public Security and Safety, Dar es Salaam, when
he pays in the licence fee.

(g) Paste the pink copy of the receipt onto the appropriate space on the
application form and send it to the C.A.R., together with a blue copy of
transfer permit.

(h) Leave straw coloured copy of the receipt in the receipt book.

(i) Instruct the dealer to forward the white copy of the receipt together with
the firearm to the new owner and also instruct the dealer to take all
precautions to ensure safety of firearms in transit.

(j) Instruct the dealer to inform the owner of the firearm that the Firearm
License folder will be sent direct to him (the owner) by the Central Arms
Registry, Dar es Salaam.

Renewal of firearms licences

11. Persons who apply to renew their licenses will be instructed to fill in one copy of
the application Form (Form “N”).

12. The Licencing Officer will then :-

(a) instruct the applicant to produce his old licence, pointing out that renewal
cannot take place until he does so ;

(b) if an applicant produces his old license, he should be instructed to make a

written request for a duplicate, explaining the circumstances of his loss
and providing full details of the firearm as on Form “N”. The Licencing
Officer will then collect Shs. 5,000/= for rifles and Shs. 10,000/= for
pistols being the fee for a duplicate licence, and issue a Firearm License
Receipt marked “duplicate licence , and issue a Firearm Licence Receipt
marked “duplicate” and past pink copy on the application and forward to
the C.A.R., Dar es Salaam. The C.A.R. will send a duplicate license
folder to the Licencing Officer who will request the applicant to re-apply
in the normal way for renewal;

(c) physically check the firearm and see whether the brand, number, type and
calibre correspond to the details entered on the new application form and
on the arms license ,

(d) check the owner’s name and address as recorded on page one of the
License Folder. If it has changed, enter the new address in “Changes of
Address” Section at page two. Where all the space in this Section as
already been used, paste in a new “Changes of Address” slip over the
original entry. (This applies to Firearms Licence Folders Numbered from
C.A.R. 1 to C.A.R. 30,000. In Folder s Number over C.A.R. 30,000 the
“Change of Address” space is on page 1.);

583
 P.G.O. No. 271
(e) collect the prescribed license fee from the applicant;

(f) make out the licence fee receipt in quadruplicate;

(g) paste white copy of the receipt in the space provided in the Licence
Book;

(h) retain blue copy of the receipt on the appropriate space on the application
form and send it to the Permanent Secretary, Ministry of Public Security
and Safety, Dar es Salaam, when he pays in his licence fee;

(i) paste pink copy of receipt on the appropriate space on the application
form and send it to the C.A.R.;

(j) leave straw copy of receipt in the Receipt Book;

(k) hand over the License Book to the applicant;

(l) pay in the license fee, supported by the blue copy of the receipt to the
Permanent Secretary, Ministry of Public Security and Safety, Dar es
Salaam;

(m) send the application form to the C.A.R. within twenty-four hours.

(n) (Note: When batches of application forms are forwarded they must be
in Receipt serial number order).

Renewal of arms license for previous years

13. Authorised officers, when re-licencing, will ensure that the weapon was licenced
for the previous year. Where the weapon was not licenced, a license receipt for
each year that the weapon remained unlicenced will be issued. In addition, a
penalty of 50 per cent of the licencing fee may be collected, but Regional
Commanders are authorised to waive the penalty (see paragraph 21). If the firearm
has been deposited in a public or private warehouse during previous licencing
years, the question of previous licence and 50 per cent penalty does not arise.

Advance renewals

14. Firearms licences may be renewed before the next licencing periods, i.e. before
30th September of each year, but authorised officers will endorse the licence :-

“Validity expires
on.............................................................................................................”

(The date being the 30th June of the following license period).

In the absence of the endorsement, the licence renewed in advance is liable to be

treated according to the law as having expired on the 30th June next and the
licencee may be penalised.

Refusal to issue or renew arms licenses

15. (a) The law on powers to refuse to issue or to renew arms licenses if found at
Regulation 12 (5) of the Arms & Ammunition Act, Cap. 223 R.E. 2002

584
 P.G.O. No. 271
which is quoted below

“12 (5) An authorised officer shall have power to refuse to issue or to

renew an arms license to any person without assigning any reason and
shall, save in the case of an authorised officer acting under paragraph (c)
of Regulation 3, report every such refusal to the central office. Such a
refusal shall be subject to appeal to the Minister for Public Security and
Safety”.

When an authorised officer decides that a licence should not be renewed,

he will endorse his decision and the reason for it on the application form
and will send it to the C.A.R. In such cases the authorised officer will not
collect any fee and will advise the applicant to deposit the weapon or
surrender it to the police for destruction if it is in unsafe condition.

(b) Where an authorised officer refuses an application for the first issue of
an arms licence, his reasons for so refusing shall be endorsed on the
duplicate copy only of the application form. This is essential in order that
full information may be supplied to the Ministry of Public Security and
Safety in the event of an appeal against the refusal.
Comment [U1]: Align left and Reduce
Applications to license visitors’ firearms space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
16. Any visitor, wishing to licence a firearm will be instructed to fill in one copy of the
Visitors Firearms Licence Application Form N.1 (Note: the application need not be
processed).

17. The Licensing Officer will then take the following action :-

(a) Examine the applicant’s Visitor’s Pass, passport or travel documents.

(b) Issue withdrawal permits (Form L) and ask the applicant to produce the
original to the Officer i/c Public Warehouse (Customs).

(c) Collect the prescribed license fee from the applicant, i.e USD 120 or its
equivalent.

(d) Make out a Visitor’s Licence Book.

(e) Make out the license fee receipt in quadruplicate, inserting the word
“Visitor” against the C.A.R. number. Validity should be extended for a
period of six months from the date of issue of the receipt.

(f) Paste white copy of the receipt in the appropriate space of the licence
book.

(g) Proceed as in paragraph 7, sub-paragraphs (f), (g), (h), (i), (j) and (k).

(h) Inform the applicant that the validity of the visitor’s arms licence will
expire in six months’ time from the date of issue of the Firearm Licence
Receipt and that he should either export the weapon within the validity
period of his licence or get it renewed for a further period of six months.
Comment [U2]: Align left and Reduce
Applications by members of the Force space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.

585
 P.G.O. No. 271
18. Applications from members of the Force for permission to possess a firearm shall
be processed in exactly the same way as an application from a member of the
public, and the following rules will apply :-

(a) Pistols and Revolvers.

Issue of a license to possess a pistol or revolver will only be considered if

the applicant holds a Government issued revolver which can be suitably
replaced by the weapon he wishes to licence.

(b) Rank & File.

Members of the Rank & File may be issued with licenses for shotguns if
they are suitable persons, but licences for rifles will only be considered
for those with long service.
Comment [U3]: Align left and Reduce
Applications for a license by a body of persons space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
19. Under Regulation 12 (23) provision is made for the issue of a licence to a body of
persons (e.g., Banks, Companies, etc.). Where such applications are received they
shall be processed in the normal way and then referred to the Director of Criminal
Investigation by the Regional Commanders for consideration by the Inspector
General. Renewals shall be dealt with in accordance with paragraphs 11 and 12.
The conditions imposed by the Inspector General before issuing arms licences to a
body of persons, whether corporate or incorporate, are as follows :-

(a) That there exist facilities for the safe custody of firearms to the
satisfaction of the Regional Commander.

(b) That the license will, in every case, be issued in favour of the chief
executive of the body submitting the application and the responsibility
for the safe custody, etc., of that weapon will rest with the officer who,
for the time being, holds such post.

(c) The use of the weapon by any other responsible official of the company,
etc., may be authorized by means of temporary transfer permits in
accordance with the provisions of Regulation 16 of the Arms and
Ammunition Regulations.

(d) Regional Commanders, when submitting applications, will ensure that

their recommendations include a comment on the safe custody of the
weapon and that the chief executive of the body is fully aware that the
safe custody of the weapon is his responsibility.
Comment [U4]: Align left and Reduce
Licence fees space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
20. (a) (i) First Issues – Firearms being licenced for the first time after
importation into Tanzania are subject to the fees set out in
Regulation 12 (10) of the Arms and Ammunition Regulations
which read as follows :-

“(a) in respect of a firearm owned by a person ordinarily

resident in Tanzania–

586
 P.G.O. No. 271
(i) Shs. 10,000/- for a pistol;

(ii) Shs. 5,000/- for a rifle;

(iii) Shs. 5,000/- for a shotgun.

(b) in respect of a firearm owned by a person not ordinarily

resident in Tanzania, US $ 120 for six months for any type of
firearm.”

(ii) Transfer Fees - Firearms which have been properly transferred

from one person to another must be re-licenced in the name of
the new owner, who shall be required to pay both the licence fee
and the transfer fee of Shs. 5,000/=.

(iii) Re-licensing Arms withdrawn from storage – Firearms

withdrawn from deposit in a licensed warehouse must be
licenced for the current licencing year. Full fees will be charged,
but not penalties.

(iv) Duplicates – Duplicates of licences lost or destroyed may be

issued on application to the C.A.R. and on payment of a fee of
Shs. 5,000/= (Regulation 12 (20)).

(v) Renewals – Any renewal of a license for which application is

made after 30th April in any licencing year is subject to the same
fees as set out in paragraph 20 (a) above. Comment [U5]: Reanrrange space in line 2
for consistency. Second proof shows space.
(vi) Penalties – Any renewal of a licence for which application is
made after 30th September in any licencing year is subject to the
additional penalty fee prescribed under Section 13 (3) of Cap.
223, (R.E 2002) i.e. fifty per centum of the prescribed fee.

(b) Free Issues – Firearms

Licenses will be issued free of charge in the following circumstances, and

the licences concerned endorsed accordingly:-

(i) In respect of a revolver or pistol if such weapon is issued to a

military or Police Officer and forms part of his regulation
equipment.

(ii) In respect of one shot gun and two rifles being the personal
property of a personnel of the Wildlife Department responsible
for wildlife management while such officer is employed in the
service of the Wildlife Department of the
Tanzania Government.

(iii) All rifles which are the property of the TPDF Safari and Rifle
Club.

(iv) In respect of firearms which are the property of the Trustees of

the Tanzania National Parks, whether or not such firearms are
in the possession of the said trustees.

587
 P.G.O. No. 271
(v) In respect of shot guns issued by the Government to Local
Authorities.

(vi) In respect of firearms which are the property of members of the

Diplomatic and Consular Corps (this does not apply to
Honorary Consulars).

NOTE: Firearms which are the property of the Tanzania Government do

not need to be licenced.
Comment [U6]: Align left and Reduce
Waiving of Penalty for late renewals space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
21. No penalty late renewal will be imposed on persons who apply for their licences
before 1st October. In addition, the penalty normally imposed on persons who
apply after 30th September may be waived at the discretion of Regional
Commanders and certain other authorised officers* on the production of
satisfactory evidence that there is a legitimate excuse for the delay in application.
Every decision to waive the penalty shall be endorsed on the Application Form by
the responsible officer. Licencing Officers who are not themselves authorised to
waive the penalty will submit the Application Forms to their Regional Commander
for endorsement when they consider that the penalty should not be imposed.

*NOTE: Regional Commanders should approach the Inspector General if they

consider that any of their O/C. District should be granted discretionary powers to
waive the penalty because they handle particularly large numbers of licence
applications.
Comment [U7]: Align left and Reduce
Prosecution for failure to renew space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
22. The Arms and Ammunition Act, Cap. 223 R.E.2002 provides for the prosecution
of persons who have failed to comply with the Act and its regulations. Prosecution
should only be instituted in case of gross neglect or attempted evasion of licencing
requirements. Doubtful cases will be referred to the Director of Criminal
Investigation for advice.
Comment [U8]: Align left and Reduce
Firearms which may remain unlicenced space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
23. The only occasion when a firearm may remain unlicenced is when it is kept either
at a public or private arms warehouse (see also paragraph 20 (a) (iii)). Firearms
deposited in approved strong rooms or in Police Stations under the provisions of
P.G.O. No. 275 must, in law, be licenced.
Comment [U9]: Align left and Reduce
Validity of Firearms Licence space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
24. A licence issued under the Arms and Ammunition Act, Cap. 223 R.E. 2002 expires
on the 30th June following the date of commencement of the validity of the licence.
When a first licence is issued, the authorised officer will inform the holder of the
date of its expiry; for example, if a firearms licence is issued on the 24th June and
expires on the 30th June of the same year, then the licencee is required to renew the
licence on the 1st July of that year.
Comment [U10]: Align left and Reduce
Application Form “N” space, between this and the next
sentenceÿÿThis is a subheading.
25. Form “N” contains a declaration as to whether or not the applicant has suffered a
previous conviction. It is not intended that the applicant shall enter detailed

588
 P.G.O. No. 271
particulars of his previous convictions. It shall suffice if he simply states that he
has been criminally convicted, giving dates or date. The authorised officer will,
however, question the applicant as to the nature of the conviction(s) and should his
questioning reveal that he is not a suitable person to possess a firearm, then the
application will be refused under Regulation 12 (5) of the Arms & Ammunition
Regulations. Authorised officers will be guided by the following :-

(a) A person with a recent conviction for poaching would not ordinarily be
considered for a rifle or a shotgun.

(b) Further inquiry would be necessary as to the suitability of an applicant

for an arms licence who admits to a previous conviction of violence;
although a conviction for a minor traffic offence would not in itself prove
a bar to the issue of an arms licence.
Comment [U11]: Align ÿÿft and Reduce
Licence Books space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
26. (a) Licence Books (Form “F”) will only be issued by the Central Arms
Registry and will be allotted and completed in strict number rotation.
Visitors’ Firearms Licence Books (Form “F 1”) will be issued by
authorised officers.

(b) The C.A.R. number allotted to a firearm is transcribed clearly in the

space provided on the licence. When corresponding with the Central
Arms Registry on the subject of firearms, the C.A.R. number of that arm
must be quoted in the body of the letter. Once a C.A.R. licence book has
been allotted to a firearm, it can never be re-allocated.

(c) The book must be returned to the Central Arms Registry when the owner
of a firearm leaves Tanzania and exports his firearm. The same will apply
when the owner of a firearm hands in the arm for destruction or where
the owner of a firearm reports the loss or theft of a weapon.

(d) In the event of loss of the folder or in cases where it is so mutilated or

defaced as to be unserviceable, a duplicate must be obtained from the
C.A.R.
Comment [U12]: Align left and Reduce
Permanent transfer of firearms space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
27. Authorised officers, when dealing with applications for the permanent transfer of
firearms to a new owner, will take the following action :-

(a) Check that the firearm in question is licenced for the current year.

(b) Check that the processing of the application has been successful and the
applicant possesses a letter of authority to this effect.

(c) Check that the applicant is in possession of the written consent of

transfer/sale signed by the owner.

(d) Have applicant complete the Application Form (Form “N”).

(e) Collect the prescribed transfer fee (Shs. 5,000/= or 10,000/= as applicable

(f) Make out, in triplicate, a transfer permit (Form “H”), hand original to

589
 P.G.O. No. 271
new owner and enter particulars of permit in space provided at the
beginning of the Licensc Book.

(g) Enter name and address of new owner in the space provided on Page 2 of
the Licence Book for C.A.R. Nos. over 30,000; for C.A.R. Nos. 30,000
and under use “Particulars of Licence Holder” slips.

(h) Collect the prescribed licence fee from the applicant.

(i) Make out the licence fee receipt in quadruplicate.

(j) Paste the white copy of the receipt onto the appropriate space of the
Licence Book.

(k) Retain the blue copy of the receipt for production to the Permanent
Secretary, Ministry of Public Security and Safety, Dar es Salaam, when
he pays the licence fee.

(l) Paste the pink copy of the receipt onto the appropriate space on the
application form and send it to the C.A.R., together with blue copy of
transfer permit.

(m) Leave the straw copy of the receipt in the Receipt Book.

(n) Hand over the Licence Book to the applicant.

(o) Pay the licence fee, supported by the blue copy of the receipt to the
Permanent Secretary, Ministry of Public Security and Safety, Dar es
Salaam.
Comment [U13]: Align left and Reduce
Bulk importation of firearms and ammunition space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
28. The power to grant licences for the importation of arms and ammunition is
contained in Section 4 of the Arms and Ammunition Act, Cap. 223 R.E. 2002. The
Minister for Public Security and Safety, under Section 2 of the Arms &
Ammunition Act (Delegation of Powers) has delegated his powers to the Senior
Police Officer stationed in each Region. Regional Commanders in each Region
therefore are empowered to issue import permits (Form “A.1” to the Schedule of
the Regulations).

29. (a) Arms and ammunition may only be imported at the ports set out in
Regulation 6 (2) of the Arms and Ammunition Regulations. These ports
are as follows :-

Arusha Lindi Mwanza Tirene Bay

Bagamoyo Longido Mwaya Tukuyu

Bukoba Mbamba Bay Ngara Tunduma

Dar es Salaam Mbeya Pangani Kilwa

Kigoma Moshi Kisesye Mosi

590
 P.G.O. No. 271
Mtwara Musoma Tanga

(b) Authorised officers will ensure that firearms imported from Kenya or
Uganda are supported by export permits from these countries. On receipt
of an application for the importation or a firearm from Kenya or Uganda,
the Licensing Authority will consider each case as an application to
possess a firearm in Tanzania and if it is decided that the firearm will be
licensed, an import permit will be issued to the applicant and the Central
Arms Registry and Licensing Authorities of the countries concerned must
be informed accordingly.

30. The following procedure will be adopted when arms and ammunition are imported
into Tanzania :-

(a) All arms and ammunition arriving at the port of entry which have not
already been registered into the Territory must be deposited in a
public warehouse, i.e. Customs.

(b) The owner of the firearms or ammunition shall then complete form “B”
to the Schedule to the Act, making application to the customs officer for
the registration of such arms and ammunition.

(c) The Customs Officer should then register the arms and ammunition in the
Public Warehouse Register (Form “C”), the arms and ammunition in the
meantime will be retained in the public warehouse.

(d) The owner/importer will present Form “B” to the authorised officer at the
nearest Police Station.

31. The authorized officer on receipt of Form “B” will take the following action :-

(a) Advise the owner/importer to complete the application Form “N” in the
case of visitors form “N1”.

(b) Follow the procedure under paragraph 16 in the case of bona fide visitor.

(c) Follow the procedure under paragraphs 2-6 (inclusive) in respect of

residents.

(d) Where ammunition is imported by a person who already possesses a

firearms licence issued in Tanzania the authorised officer may issue Form
“L” on production of the current arms licence. Duplicate copies of all
import permits issued shall be forwarded to the C.A.R.
Comment [U14]: Align left and Reduce
Export space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
32. When the owner of a firearm and/or ammunition leaves Tanzania permanently
taking his firearm/ammunition with him, he shall, in accordance with the law,
obtain an export licence (Form “A”) from an authorised officer.

33. When receiving applications for an export licence, authorised officers shall :-

(a) make a physical check of the firearms and/or ammunition against the

591
 P.G.O. No. 271
Licence Book;

(b) ensure that the firearm in question has been licenced for the current year.
If it has not been so licenced, the reason should be stated in brief on the
export licence;

(c) prepare an export licence (Form “A”) in triplicate;

(d) hand original to the applicant;

(e) forward duplicate to the C.A.R. with the Licence Book;

(f) retain triplicate copy of export licence in the Export License Book;

(g) ensure that the applicant is in possession of an import permit to the

territory concerned where the firearm is to be exported to Kenya or
Uganda;

(h) not to issue an export permit without prior reference to the Central Arms
Registry where the firearms is to be exported outside Tanzania.

34. The Regulations do not exempt air rifles and air pistols, whatever their calibre. All
such firearms will, therefore, continue to be subject to a licence. AIR RIFLES
AND AIR PISTOLS must, therefore, be licenced in the usual way.

35. (a) The amount of ammunition which can be held or acquired must be stated
exactly on every licence.

(b) In normal circumstances the following shall be considered reasonable

quantities of ammunition to be held with various firearms at any time :-

Normal maximum holding of ammunition at any

Firearm one time Comment [U15]: Insert rows and Columns
properly and neatly according to PGO.

Pistol or Revolver 25 Rounds

Rifle of above 22 calibre 200 Rounds

22 Rifles 1,000 Rounds

Shotgun 500 Rounds

Air Rifles 5,000 Rounds

36.. Authorised Officers may endorse firearms licences for the purchase and retention
of a larger quantity of ammunition when they are of the opinion that the request
made by the owner of the firearm concerned is reasonable and should indicate the
reason, i.e. Professional Hunter, Member of Gun Club, etc.

37. This endorsement must be made in the licence on one of the pages titled

592
 P.G.O. No. 271
“ENDORSEMENTS AND LIMITATIONS” and NOT on the first page of the
licence. The entries on this page should remain unaltered.
Comment [U16]: Paras 38 -40 space is too
38. Persons applying for permits to purchase 12 bore and 16 bore ammunition for the big. Reduce for consistency
purpose of shooting any game bird, or animal, should be required to produce their
bird licence and/or minor game licence in addition to their firearms licence. The
officer issuing the permit to purchase will endorse the permit
to purchase accordingly.

39. For the information of authorised officers, shot sizes for gauge 12 and 16 bore are
normally graded from the smallest size up to solid shot.

40. Where a person in possession of a licence to own a firearm dies, the firearm
should be deposited in the nearest Police Station or public or private warehouse.

593
 P.G.O. No. 272

ARREST AND SEARCH Comment [U17]: New PGO.Align right and

Bold. Increase space between PGO number and the
heading. Increase space after heading and first
subheading
1. This Order deals with search immediately after arrest and flows from the provisions
of Section 24 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap 20 R.E.2002 which is quoted as
follows:

“Whenever a person is arrested–

(a) by a Police Officer under a warrant which does not provide for the taking of
bail, or under a warrant which provides for the taking of bail but the person
arrested cannot furnish bail; or

(b) without a warrant, or by a private person under a warrant, and the person
arrested cannot legally be admitted to bail or cannot furnish bail, the Police
Officer making the arrest or, when the arrest is made by a private person,
the Police Officer to whom that private person makes over the person
arrested, may search such person and place in safe custody all articles, other
than necessary wearing apparel, found upon him.”

The meaning of this Section is that when a Police Officer arrests any person for a
minor offence the arrested person need not be searched. However those arrested for
warrant offences and placed under restraint for further processing may be searched.
Note the search procedure in the Police Station is set out in P.G.O. No. 357.

2. Every prisoner searched after arrest in accordance with paragraph 1 above shall be
searched again on arrival at the Police Station.

3. It is a good policy that male prisoners be searched by a male Police Officer unless
circumstances are such that no male Police Officer is available when the arrest is
taking place.

4. Female prisoners shall be searched by a policewoman or other female out of sight of

the public and their property handed over to the Police Officer who arrested them.
Comment [U18]: Align left and Reduce
Method of search space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
5. (a) When a Police Officer wishes to search a prisoner, he shall first of all order
him to stand with his feet apart and his hands above his head at the full
stretch of the arms.

(b) He shall always stand behind the prisoner to carry out the search. He must
not allow the prisoner to lower his hands during the search. He must never
stand in front of a prisoner while searching, for fear of attack.

(c) Search shall begin from the head and work down. The prisoner’s hat should
be searched first, then his hair, mouth and pockets. The searching officer
shall then run his hands all over the outside of the prisoner’s clothing, so
that he may detect anything hidden underneath. He should finally, if
necessary, search the prisoner’s shoes and socks. Only if there is reason to
believe that the prisoner is hiding a weapon or piece of evidence under his
clothing or in his body, may he be stripped for a thorough body search.
Body searches must be carried out with the utmost decency, NOT in view of
the public. They should, whenever possible, be carried out inside a Police

594
 P.G.O. No. 272
Station or any other suitable facility in place.
Comment [U19]: Reduce this space
6. The officer carrying out the search shall :-

(a) take possession of any weapon, poison, drug, matches or other articles
which might be used as weapons;

(b) take and carefully preserve any articles or documents or suspected stolen
property which may have a connection with any offence;

(c) enter in his note book an accurate list of all property he takes from the
prisoner, provided that he is accompanied by at least one other Police
Officer who can guard the prisoner for him. He must not make any such list
if he is alone, in case his prisoner escapes;

(d) not take possession of any money or other harmless property belonging to a
prisoner, except as provided by paragraphs. (a) and (b) above.

(e) hand over every article or property taken from any prisoner, together with
the prisoner, to the officer on charge room duty at the nearest police station.
Comment [U20]: Align left and Reduce
Method of holding prisoner space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
7. (a) In making an arrest the Police Officer making the arrest shall actually touch
or confine the body of the person being arrested unless there is a submission
to the custody by word or action.

(b) If the person to be arrested forcibly resists the endeavour to arrest him, or
attempts to evade the arrest, the Police Officer may use all means necessary
to effect the arrest provided that the person arrested shall not be subjected to
more restraint than is necessary to prevent his escape.

(c) The following male prisoners arrested with or without warrant shall be
restrained using approved instruments of restraint (if available) :-

(i) those arrested for any serious offence;

(ii) dangerous criminals;

(iii) those likely to escape; and

(d) if the officer effecting an arrest is not provided with any

instrument of restraint, he must take great care to prevent his
prisoner’s escape on the way to the police station. He must not in
any circumstances release his hold on the prisoner until he is
inside the Charge Room.
Comment [U21]: Reduce space
(e) The following instruments of restraint may be used to restrain prisoners:

(i) handcuffs,

(ii) body Belt with Iron Cuffs (For members of the Force),

(iii) body Belt with Leather Straps (For women),

595
 P.G.O. No. 272
Comment [U22]: Check spacing of this
(iv) ankle Straps, and, sentence. Second proo shows big gap
before A.
(v) leg Irons, Locking type (For Male Prisoners).

(d) Each of the instruments mentioned above will be used depending on the
circumstances of each case and in accordance with instructions to be issued
by the Director of Criminal Investigation.
Comment [U23]: Align left and Reduce
Handing over of prisoners space, between this and the next sentence.
This is a subheading.
8. After arrest and search, prisoners shall be taken to the nearest Police Station and
handed over as expeditiously as possible. Once they are handed over to the nearest
Police Station those who are eligible to bail should be informed of the right to bail
and should be allowed to communicate with their relatives or lawyers in respect of
the fact that they are at a Police Station following an arrest. This is in accordance
with Section 54 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E.2002 which provide
that:

“(1) Subject to Subsection (2), a Police Officer shall, upon request by a

person who is under restraint, cause reasonable facilities to be provided to
enable the person to communicate with a lawyer, a relative or friend of his
choice.

(2) A Police Officer may refuse under Subsection (1) for the provision of
facilities for communicating with a person being a relative or friend of a
person under restraint, if the Police Officer believes on reasonable grounds
that it is necessary to prevent the person under restraint from
communicating with the person for the purpose of preventing:–

(a) the escape of an accomplice of the person under restraint; or

(b) the loss, destruction or fabrication of evidence relating to the

offence.”

Thus only for legitimate reasons communication with a lawyer or relative may be
refused as stated in Section 54 quoted above.

596
 P.G.O. No. 273
AIRCRAFT CRASHES AND MISSING AIRCRAFT Comment [U24]: New PGO; Align right and
Bold. Increase space between PGO number and the
1. This P.G.O. is divided into three parts as follows:- heading. Increase space after heading and first
subheading

Part I - Action to be taken immediately on receipt of information that an air

crash has taken place.

Part II - Police action to be taken at the scene of the crash.

Part III - Police action in connection with searches for missing aircraft.

Part I
Action to be taken immediately on Receipt of Information that an Air Crash has taken
Place

2. Any Police Officer receiving information that an aircraft accident has taken place will
carry out the following action without delay:-

(a) Ensure that fire and ambulance services have been notified.

(b) Arrange for all available police personnel to proceed to the scene as
quickly as possible.

(c) Notify the senior Police Officer present of the situation.

(d) Proceed himself to the scene of the accident.

3. The senior Police Officer present on the station will proceed to the scene as quickly
as possible, and having himself assessed the nature of the accident will send a first-
warning message to his Regional Police Commander repeating this to Police
Headquarters.

4. Should the initial report indicate that air crash has taken place in difficult terrain, the
senior Police Officer present on the Station will be responsible for making the
necessary preliminary arrangements for all available police personnel to proceed to
the scene and in this connection care must be taken to see that adequate medical and
signals facilities accompany the police party at the outset.

5. On receipt of the first-warning message referred to above, the Regional Commander

or his deputy will visit the scene, and where it is likely that access to the crash will be
difficult, he should, if possible, accompany the police party at the outset.

Part II
Police Action to be taken at the scene of the Crash Comment [U25]: Decrease space, it is a
subheading
6. On arrival at the scene of an air crash the senior Police Officer present will ensure
that the following action is taken :-

(a) An incident post is established in which a record can be made of all persons
killed or injured and of all diplomatic mail, mail bags, personal property and
freight recovered and from which information can be supplied to persons
entitled to receive it.

(b) Where appropriate, organize traffic control in the vicinity of the crash in

597
 P.G.O. No. 273
order to ensure that ambulances and other essential traffic are not held up.

(c) Organize the removal of all bodies to a mortuary or other suitable place.

(d) See that the area is kept clear of sight – seers.

(e) Establish a guard on the wreckage until such time as the Civil Aviation
authorities release him from this commitment.

7. When the Regional Commander or his deputy arrives on the scene, he will ensure that
the incident post is working properly and that all necessary information is being
recorded. In this latter respect it is important that as much of the following
information as possible is obtained at the outset :- Comment [U26]: Reduce space

(a) Details of the make, nationality and registration marks of the aircraft.

(b) The locality of the crash, quoting wherever possible map references from
the gridded airport crash maps which are obtainable from local airport
staffs.

(c) The date and approximate time of the crash.

(d) The apparent nature of the accident if not a crash.

(e) Description of injuries to persons.

(f) Names of persons killed or seriously injured.

(g) Names of pilot and crew.

(h) Names and addresses of any survivors.

(i) Names and addresses of any witnesses.

(j) The exact location of any part of the aircraft found at a distance from the
actual scene of the crash.

(k) General weather conditions prevailing at the time of the accident and, if
possible, details of the direction of the wind.

8. The Regional Commander will ensure that regular progress reports are submitted to
Police Headquarters by the fastest available means and that these are repeated where
applicable to local airport staffs who have facilities for transmitting them to the
Directorate of Civil Aviation.

9. Where crashes have occurred at sea and where police launches are available, these
will be placed at the disposal of a appropriate port authorities in order that as much
use can be made of them as is practicable, In every other respect, action should be
taken to provide similar services in the case of crashes at sea as must be provided in
respect of crashes elsewhere.

10. Where a crash has taken place in difficult terrain or at some considerable distance
from an established airport, it is important to ensure that the following information is
passed to the Tanzania Civil Aviation Authority representative as quickly as possible
:-

598
 P.G.O. No. 273
(a) Type and registration mark of aircraft.

(b) Nationality of aircraft.

(c) Name of the owner or hirer, if any, of the aircraft.

(d) Name and captain of the aircraft.

(e) Date and time of the accident.

(f) The last point of departure of the aircraft.

(g) The intended destination of the aircraft

(h) The location of the aircraft to some easily identifiable geographical point.

(i) The number of persons killed.

(j) The number of persons seriously injured.

(k) The apparent nature of the crash, including information as to whether it

occurred at take-off, in flight or on landing.

(l) Nature of the flight.

(m) Brief particulars of damage to the aircraft.

(n) Whether there was fire in the air or on the ground.

(o) Total crew carried.

(p) Total passengers carried.

(q) Weather conditions at the time and the place of the crash.

11. When sending information on these points by signal it is only necessary to quote the
appropriate letter, followed by the information required, e.g. “J.4” would mean that
four persons had been seriously injured.
Comment [U27]: Reduce space
Part III: Search for Missing Aircraft

12. Any Police Officer receiving information that an aircraft is believed to be missing will
notify his Regional Commander with the least possible delay. On receipt of this
information the Regional Commander will :-

(a) alert all units under his command;

(b) open his operations Room;

(c) inform the Regional Commissioner and the senior medical officer in the
region;

(d) initiate a search for the missing aircraft in accordance with the resources at
his disposal and the information available to him.

599
 P.G.O. No. 273
13. The Regional Commander will ensure that search parties are in touch with his
operations room by radio and that regular situation reports are submitted by them. He
will signal any positive information received to the appropriate authorities repeating
such signals to Police Headquarters.

14. The Regional Commander will ensure that search parties are properly equipped with
water, food, medical supplies, equipment and bedding and any special equipment
appropriate to the nature of the operation. He will also ensure that they are in possession
of the necessary ground to air recognition strips and that the persons in command of
search parties are fully conversant with the visual code for air/ground communication
details which are given at Appendix “B” hereto.

15. Details of air fields on the aeronautical telecommunications network which can
communicate direct with the Civil Aviation Authority and the National Search and
Rescue Co-ordination Centre in Dar es salaam are listed at Appendix “A”.

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 273) Comment [U28]: This is an appendix, I
AIRFIELDS ON THE AERONAUTICAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATION WITH have reduced the font size to 8. Please note
THE REGIONAL CIVIL AVIATION REPRESENTATIVE AND THE NATIONAL SEARCH AND RESCUE CO-
ORDINATION CENTRE, DAR ES SALAAM.

Dar es Salaam Mtwara

Tabora Mbeya

Tanga Moshi

Arusha Songea

Dodoma Mwanza

Iringa (Nduli)

APPENDIX “B” Comment [U29]: Use attached correction

(To P.G.O. No. 273) of the table/Appendix.Insert that one.Yuor
SIGNAL CODES FOR COMMUNICATING FROM GROUND SEARCH PARTIES TO SEARCH AIRCRAFT codes are wrong!!

No. Message Code Symbol

600
 P.G.O. No. 273
1. Operation is ended. LLL

2. We have found all personnel. LL

II
3. We have found only some personnel.
—
II
4. We are not able to continue. Returning to base. XX
→________
5. Have divided into two groups. Each proceeding in direction in
←
indicated.

6. Information received that aircraft is in this direction → →

7. Nothing found. Will continue search. NN

Ground search parties are expected to carry prepared signal panel kits for use with the
Codes above. These are additional to any portable radio equipment which may be
carried.

601
 P.G.O. No. 274
ARMS – ISSUE AND USE OF BY POLICE Comment [U30]: New PGO; Align right and
Bold. Increase space between PGO number and the
heading. Increase space after heading and first
Issue of Arms and ammunitions subheading
Comment [U31]: Align left and Bold. Decrease
1. Duties shall normally be armed as follows space. This is a subheading
Comment [U32]: This text is wrongly
(a) (i) Beat Duties arranged. Please note the attached extract
and insert
Short batons only
(ii) Traffic Duties

(iii) Guards on official residences

(b) (i) Ceremonial guards on Government

houses

(ii) Treasury Escorts

(iii) Prisoners’ Escorts on long

journeys. Arms and ammunition as
considered appropriate
(iv) Prisoners’ Escorts not travelling
in police transport.

(c) Sentries and Night Guards on

Government Offices.

(d) Rural Patrols.

(e) Railway Escorts escorting specie and

explosives.

(f) Riot Units. In accordance with

instructions laid down in
the Riot Manual.

2. Field Force patrols are not affected by paragraph 1 above. O/C. Field Force Units
may arm their patrols as they consider necessary.

3. Commandant, Police Training School, will not permit unqualified personnel to carry
ammunition.
Comment [U33]: Decrease space, this is
Use of Arms by Police subheading

4. Each officer issued with arms and ammunition shall ensure that such arms and
ammunition are properly handled and used in accordance with the laid down
procedures. This is because each officer is personally accountable and responsible
for any improper use of weapons under his care and control.

5. (a) In no circumstances where firearms are used is a Police Officer allowed to

open fire with the direct intention of causing death.

(b) In no circumstances is a Police Officer allowed to use more than the

602
 P.G.O. No. 274
minimum force necessary to carry out his duties.

6. Police Officers are empowered by Section 29 of the Police and Auxiliary Services
Act, Cap.322, R.E. 2002 if other reasonable options fail, to use arms against :-

(a) any person in lawful custody charged with or convicted of a felony when
such person is escaping or attempting to believe he/she cannot otherwise
prevent the escape and has given a warning to such person that he is about
to use such arms against him and such warning is unheeded; (NOTE: In
this connection “lawful custody” includes “lawful arrest” even though the
formal charge has not yet been laid);
Comment [U34]: Reduce space
(b) any person who :-

(i) by force, rescues or attempts to prevent the lawful arrest of any

other person;

(ii) by force, prevents or attempts to prevent the lawful arrest of any

other person ;
Comment [U35]: Reduce space
7. Police Officers are also entitled to use arms in the following circumstances :-

(a) When it is essential for effecting an arrest of a person who is armed with a
lethal weapon.

(b) When it is essential for defence of another person who may be seriously
injured or killed by an assailant armed.

(c) When it is essential for self-defence.

8. In the cases mentioned above, when firearms are used, they should not be used with
the aim of killing or inflicting a serious injury and should be directed, when feasible,
at the legs only.

9. Force is usually used as explained in Appendix A to this Order.

10. This Order is of the greatest importance and every Police Officer must know it
thoroughly. Commanding Officers will ensure that all ranks are regularly examined
on the provisions of this Order.
11. An immediate report by telegram or signal must be made to the Inspector General
whenever a police firearm is discharged, whether accidentally or otherwise. A Case
File must also be prepared and submitted to the Inspector General within seven days
of the incident, in accordance with P.G.O. No. 311.

603
 P.G.O. No. 274

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 274)

USE OF FORCE CONTINUUM Comment [U36]: Appendix, reduce font

size to 8 for the whole text. Centre the
heading
Purpose.

1. This appendix provides officers with a source of reference on the use of force.

2. All officers who are authorised to carry weapons shall become familiar with the
following guidelines dealing with the use of force continuum.
Comment [U37]: Align left, this is a
Continuum of Force Defined. subheading

3. The Force Continuum is a graphic description of the escalation and de-escalation

of force used by police personnel in response to actions taken by a suspect or
offender. It serves to illustrate the legal duty of an officer to use only reasonable
force in response to the threat reasonably perceived by the officer.

4. The appropriate level of force that may be used by a Police Officer to control a
person depends upon the particular circumstances in which the officer finds him or
herself at the time the force is used. Important factors to consider when
determining the level of force that may be applied to control a situation include the
age, size, fitness, experience, skill level, relative strength, and number of the
officer(s) and suspect(s) involved in an incident.

(a). Application of the Model. When dealing with suspects and offenders,
officers should attempt to apply the Force Continuum, starting at the
lowest appropriate level. The mere presence of uniformed police personnel
may be enough to control a suspect's actions. Should aggression or
resistance escalate, the officer should respond with the level of force
appropriate to control the situation. If a suspect's aggression or resistance
de-escalates, the officer should correspondingly decrease the level of force
used to control the situation. Ideally, an officer should use the lowest
appropriate level of force reasonably likely to allow the officer to maintain
secure control over a situation.

(i) If control is lost, the officer must escalate to the level of force
necessary to regain and maintain control. It is important to
recognize that a situation may require an officer to start at the
highest level, or to skip levels due to suspect actions. By properly
applying the Continuum of Force concept, officers will respond
lawfully by using only the force necessary to control a situation.

(ii) The various component parts of the Force Continuum are

illustrated and discussed in greater detail below.

5. (a) The Force Continuum is divided into six specific component parts:

(i) Threat Assessment,

(ii) Level of Resistance,

604
 P.G.O. No. 274
(iii) Method of Force,

(iv) Control Techniques,

(v) Considerations of Force Escalation/De-escalation, and

(vi) Justification.

(b) The above listed component parts are explained in greater detail below.

6. (a) Threat Assessment: The term "threat" is used to describe any person
capable of causing physical injury, serious physical injury or death. The
threat must exhibit the following elements to justify the use of force:

(i) Intent;

(ii) Means; and

(iii) Opportunity.

(b) A person who is not a threat may be compliant or may be undecided on

whether to comply or not.

7. Level of Resistance:

(a) Static. Examples of this level of resistance include when the threat refuses
to comply with commands by continuing to possess a weapon in a non-
threatening way, balking, becoming dead weight, or grasping onto a solid
object.

(b) Active. Examples of this level of resistance include when the threat
physically resists the officer's verbal commands and/or attempts to gain
physical control by pulling away, attempting to run, or powering through a
control hold, or holding a weapon in a threatening way when commanded
to drop it.

(c) Ominous. Examples of this level of resistance include when the threat
demonstrates the willingness to engage in combat through verbal
challenge, threats and/or aggressive behavior.

d. Lethal. Examples of this level of resistance include when the threat

possesses both the intent and the means to inflict serious physical injury or
death. The means can be with a weapon or an empty hand. Examples: The
threat uses a deadly weapon (handgun, knife, shank) or a dangerous
weapon (lead pipe, broken bottle, tire iron) to inflict or attempt serious
physical injury or the threat inflicts serious injury through superior size,
strength or combative skill.

8. Level of Force: The following words and phrases describe important points along
the Force Continuum:

(a) Presence. The officer's arrival on the scene. In the majority of situations,
the known presence of police personnel is enough to control a subject's
actions.

605
 P.G.O. No. 274
(b) Verbal Commands. The questioning of a subject, the attempt to persuade a
subject, or giving a direct order to a subject. An officer's tone of voice and
attitude, the clarity of directions, and choice of words are factors which
bear on the effectiveness of a verbal command.

(c) Physical contact. Directing a subject by touch or controlling a subject with

an escort hold. If the use of a verbal command is not effective, or is not
likely to be effective in controlling an individual, an officer may need to
resort to the use of physical contact to maintain or regain control. This
force may range from a gentle but firm hold of a person's arm to the use of
escort/control holds. Once a person complies, the force used is reduced in
proportion to the compliance and is maintained at a level necessary to
maintain control. If an officer is unable (or if the officer believes that he or
she will be unable) to control a subject by use of hand controls, the officer
is justified in using a higher level of force.

(d) Physical control. Includes the use of pressure points, joint manipulation
techniques or physical control holds. If the use of a physical contact is not
effective, or is not likely to be effective in controlling an individual, an
officer may need to resort to the use of physical control to maintain or
regain control.

(e) Serious Physical control. Includes the use of focused blows and impact
weapons.

The baton is a defensive weapon that is designed for striking. The use of
the baton is proper to overcome force of resistance and arrest oppression.

All officers are required to only carry officially issued baton once the
officer has satisfactorily completed an approved training session regarding
the use of the baton. Training on the use of a baton shall be documented in
the officer's training file.

(f) Deadly Force. Includes the use of any force readily capable of causing
death or serious physical injury under the circumstances in which it is
used.

9. Method of Force: In addition to proficiency ineffective verbal communication,

members should maintain proficiency in the following methods of the use of force:

(a) Control Holds/Takedowns. Physical control through application of

compliance holds or takedowns to control the threat on the ground.

(b) Restraints. Chain or handcuffs, flex ties, leg straps/cords. Proper use for
cooperative handcuffing (standing) and uncooperative handcuffing
(kneeling/prone) and high risk handcuffing (felony prone).

(c) Searching. Stop and Frisk, cursory check for weapons, handcuffed
standing, kneeling and prone.

(d) Baton. Straight baton, expandable steel Baton, or other approved crowd
control equipment. Proper use of flashlight as a defensive tool.

(e) Blocks, Stances and Strikes. Closed fist/open hand blocks, interview
stance, combat stance, closed fist strikes, open hand strikes, front kick,

606
 P.G.O. No. 274
angle kick, rear kick, leg sweeps, knee and elbow strikes.

(f) Personal Defence. Defenses against: body holds, chokes, headlock, grabs
and handgun retention and disarming techniques. Proper use of handcuffs
as a defensive weapon. Evasive tactics and techniques for knives and other
edged weapon threats.

(g) Disarmament. Techniques to disarm a suspect and/or to retain a handgun.

(h) Custody and Transportation. Removal of a threat from the suspect vehicle,
placing of a Threat in a patrol vehicle, and removal of a combatant from a
patrol vehicle.

10. Considerations of Force Escalation/De-escalation: The totality of the

circumstances reasonably known to a Police Officer at the time force is used
affects the appropriate level of force the officer may use in response to a threat.
Among the important issues that may affect the determination of what level of
force is appropriate in a given situation are the following:

(a) Has the threat had the opportunity to comply with commands, if
commands were possible and appropriate?

(b) Is the current course of action achieving control or compliance?

(c) Does the threat warrant the risk of injury to yourself or the threat?

11. Basic Principles of Justification.

(a) If the level of force is justified, the implement (or delivery system) used is
of no significance.

(b) If the level of force is justified, the degree of injury the threat may sustain
is of no significance.

(c) The threat always dictates the degree of force to be used. Therefore, the
threat is responsible for any injury the threat may incur while resisting.

(d) It is incumbent on the officer to overcome the threat's resistance as quickly

as possible to control the threat and the situation. Comment [U38]: This is the end of the
Appendix. Please note!!

607
 P.G.O. No. 275
ARMS – STORAGE OF PRIVATE ARMS IN POLICE STATIONS Comment [U39]: New PGO.Align right and
Bold. Increase space between PGO number and the
1. Under Regulation 15 (1) of the Arms and Ammunition Regulations, a person who heading. Increase space after heading and first
subheading
does not wish to licence his firearms or who has been refused a license or whose
licence has been revoked, may deposit the firearm with any authorised officer or
in a public or private warehouse until he is able to sell or export the firearm,
provided that where a firearm is deposited with an authorised officer, such
deposit shall be on such terms as the Inspector General may direct.

2. The conditions under which the above mentioned unlicensed arms may be
accepted for police storage are as follows :-

(a) Arms will only be accepted at Class “A” and “B” Stations provided that
suitable storage space is available.

(b) Storage will be for a maximum period of six months entirely at owner’s
risk. No fee will be charged.

3. In view of the lack of suitable storage space in Police Stations, persons seeking
police storage facilities for unlicensed arms shall be advised, in their own
interests, to arrange for storage in a private warehouse. If they are uÿÿilling to do
so, their arms may then be accepted in Class “A” and “B” Police Stations,
provided that :-

(a) there is suitable storage space available, and

(b) they agree to the conditions set out in paragraph 2, with particular
reference to the maximum period of storage.

4. Every person who is permitted to deposit arms and ammunition with the police
for storage must complete and sign three copies of the Arms Storage Receipt
(P.F. 14), giving the following particulars :-

(a) Type of firearm;

(b) Calibre;

(c) Make;

(d) Maker’s number; and

(e) C.A.R. number.

5. Police Officers receiving such arms will ensure that these particulars correspond
exactly with those entered on P.F. 14 and will then sign the Receipt in the space
provided. The original Storage Receipt will be removed from the Receipt Book
and handed to the depositor. The duplicate will be forwarded to the Central Arms
Registry and the triplicate copy retained in the Receipt Book.

6. (a) Every depositor who applies for the withdrawal of his arms from police
storage, will be required to produce his copy of the Storage Receipt and
to sign the three corresponding serially numbered copies of the
Removal Receipt before the arms are handed over to him. The original
Removal Receipt will be handed to the depositor. The duplicate will be
forwarded to the Central Arms Registry and the triplicate retained in the

608
 P.G.O. No. 275
Receipt Book.

(b) Care will be taken to ensure that Removal Receipts always agree n
every way with their relating Storage Receipts.

7. Regional Commanders and O/C. Districts will keep a careful check on unlicensed
firearms in police storage and will take all possible action, with the assistance of
the Central Arms Registry, to ensure that owners withdraw their arms within six
months of deposit.
Comment [U40]: REDUCE SPACE, ITS
Storage of licensed firearms in Police Stations SUBHEADING

8. Under regulation 3 of the Arms & Ammunition (Safe Custody) Regulations,

published as G.N. 75 of 1954: Comment [U41]: Reduce space

“(1) It shall be lawful for any person to deposit with the officer - in
- charge of any police station described in the Schedule hereto any
licensed firearm or ammunition on such terms and conditions as
the said Police Officer may direct.

(2) It shall be lawful for any such Police Officer or any Police
Officer under his immediate supervision to possess for any period
any firearm or ammunition deposited with him in accordance with
the preceding paragraph notwithstanding that such firearm or
ammunition has been left with him for a period longer than the
period for which it is deposited.
Comment [U42]: Second proof shows
SCHEDULE smaller font size for this text. Plse correct
this. It is not aa appendix
Regulation 3 (1)
The Police stations at Arusha, Dar es Salaam (Central), Dodoma, Iringa, Kigoma,
Lindi, Mbeya, Morogoro, Moshi, Mwanza, Tabora and Tanga”.

9. The procedure set out in paragraphs 1-7 will apply equally to persons who wish to
deposit licensed arms in police storage at the Stations listed above.

10. All firearms must be licensed on removal from storage unless they are to be
deposited in a public or private warehouse.

609
 P.G.O. No. 276
ARMS & AMMUNITION -
UNCLAIMED/CONFISCATED/SURRENDERED Comment [U43]: Insert new PGO number;
align number to the right. Center the
1. (a) Particulars of all “found” firearms and/or ammunition which come into heading, and increase space between
number and below heading.
police possession shall be recorded in the Found and Unclaimed Property
Register, P.F. 53.

(b) Arms which are confiscated by order of the Court, or surrendered by the
owner to the police, will be entered in the Private Firearms (Disposal)
Register, P.F. 219 (specimen at Appendix “A”).

2. O/C. Stations will take the following action on receipt of arms under the provisions
of paragraph 1 :-

(a) Check the firearm to ensure that it is unloaded and that the magazine is
empty. Comment [U44]: Reduce space for
consistency, second proof shows space
here.
(b) Enter the particulars of the firearm/ammunition in the appropriate Station
Register (P.F. 53 or PF. 219).

(c) Attach a Property Label (PF. 157) to the firearm/ammunition with the
following particulars endorsed thereon :-
Comment [U45]: Decrease indent here
(i) Make, Maker’s Nos., C.A.R. No. (if any). (former (d) to (j). This is an elaboration of
(c)). Plse note the changed in numbering.
(ii) Owner’s name and address (if known).

(iii) Reason for disposal.

(iv) Licence No. (if known).

(v) Date handed into Police Station and by whom.

(d) Place the firearm/ammunition in the Police Station Armoury.

(e) Obtain the Licence Book from the owner, if the firearm is registered.

(f) Within 48 hours, inform the O/C. District, in writing, of the particulars of
the firearm/ammunition, the reason for deposit and whether application
of appeal to the High Court has been field by the owner.

(g) Retain the firearm/ammunition in safe custody until he receives orders

for its disposal from the O/C. District, vide paragraph 6.
Comment [U46]: Align left, reduce space,
Firearms/ammunition – found property this is a subheading

3. The general procedure to be followed when firearms/ammunition are found is set

out under P.G.O. No. 304, but the provisions of paragraph 2 of this Order shall
also apply.
Comment [U47]: Align left, reduce space,
Firearms/ammunition confiscated by Order of the Court this is a subheading

4. Where firearms/ammunition are confiscated or forfeited to the Republic on a Court

Order, except as the result of a case brought under the Fauna Conservation
Ordinance (see paragraph 17), it shall be the responsibility of the Court Prosecutor
appearing in the case to take possession of the firearm/ammunition from the Court

610
 P.G.O. No. 276
Clerk and immediately to hand such firearm/ ammunition and Court Order over to
the O/C. Station, against an entry in the Station Diary and minute sheet of the Case
File or Minor Offence Docket.
Comment [U48]: Align left, reduce space,
Firearms/ammunition handed in for destruction this is a subheading

5. Persons wishing to surrender their firearms/ammunition because they no longer

desire to licence them may hand them into the nearest Police Station. In such cases,
the O/C. Station will take over the firearms and ammunition and licence book(s)
and obtain the owner’s written consent to destruction. He will then follow the
procedure set out under paragraph 2 of this Order.
Comment [U49]: Align left, reduce space,
Disposal this is a subheading

6. O/C. Districts, when inspecting or visiting their Stations will :- Comment [U50]: Reduce space for
consistency
(i) check all firearms/ammunition deposited at the Station in terms
of paragraphs 3,4, and 5 above.

(ii) withdraw firearms/ammunition held at the Station in terms of

paragraphs 3, 4, and 5 above, together with all relevant Court
orders and other documents for deposit in District
Headquarters;

(iii) make an entry in the appropriate Columns of the Private

Firearms (Disposal) Register (PF. 219).

(b) Firearms/ammunition for disposal (unclaimed property) under the

provisions of Section 10 (iii) of P.G.O. No. 304 will be treated as in sub-
paragraphs (a) and (b) above and the relevant receipt will be recorded in
the Station Found and Unclaimed Property Register (P.F. 53).

7. O/C. Districts, on their return to their Headquarters, will enter the particulars of
ammunition and every firearm in the District Headquarters’ Station Found and
Unclaimed Property Register or the Private Firearms (Disposal) Register and
deposit the arms/ammunition in the Armoury until they can conveniently arrange
for their transfer to Regional Police Headquarters. The documents relating to the
arms/ammunition will be locked away in a secure place.

8. Regional Commanders receiving firearms from their subordinate formations shall

immediately deposit such arms/ammunition in their Regional Headquarters’
Armouries where the particulars of each firearm will be entered in the Private
Firearms (Disposal) Register (PF. 219). Any relevant document.

9. (a) At regular intervals, all Commanding Officers will check the number of
firearms held in the Armoury and, if a reasonable number is held, will
take the following action: - a number of them are held will forward, Comment [U51]: Remove these words
under escort, to the Quartermaster, Police Main Stores, Dar es Salaam, all which have been highlighted and
bolded…”take……...will..” refer Old PGO.
shotguns, rifles, pistols and revolvers which are considered under this
order.. Any relevant documents will accompany the firearms (see
paragraphs 4 and 5).

(b) The Quartermaster will:

(i) destroy all ammunition and unserviceable arms to which this

611
 P.G.O. No. 276
Order refers using approved procedures including using gun
cruncher. Destruction will in every case, be carried out by a
Gazetted Officer acting under the personal instructions of the
Regional Commander and will be witnessed.

(ii) Forward to the Director of Criminal Investigation, Central Arms

Registry, the following documents in respect of every firearms
destroyed in accordance with sub-paragraph (b) above :- Comment [U52]: Reduce this space

1. written consent to destroy (see paragraph 5);

2. Licence Book;

3. Destruction Certificate in the form set out at Appendix “B”.

(c) Commanding Officers, before destroying or forwarding

arms/ammunition to which paragraph 4 of this Order applies, will satisfy
themselves that either :-

(i) no appeal has been Field; or

(ii) if Field, it was not successful.

10. The Quartermaster, on receipt of firearms as set out in paragraph 9 will take the
following action :- Comment [U53]: Reduce space

(a) Check each firearm against its relevant documents.

(b) Enter the particulars of every weapon in the Private Firearms (Disposal)
Register (PF. 219) and enter his disposal recommendation under Column
5 of the Register

(c) Place the relevant documents in a secure place pending final disposal of
the firearms.

11. At quarterly intervals, the Quartermaster shall produce the Private Firearms
(Disposal) Register to the Commissioner, Finance and Administration who will
finally examine the arms and ammunition listed therein and will direct in the
appropriate space in the Register how the Quartermaster should dispose of each
item held by him (i.e., destroy , take on charge, cannibalise, sell, etc.).
Comment [U54]: Reduce space
12. The Quartermaster will then :-

(a) destroy all those firearms/ammunition recommended for such by the

Commissioner (Administration and Finance);

(b) take on charge those firearms/ammunition as instructed by the

Commissioner (Administration and Finance).

13. On completion of the action in paragraph 14, the Quartermaster will enter the
necessary disposal particulars in PF. 219 and endorse the relevant documents
which will then be sent to the Director of Criminal Investigation.

14. The Director of Criminal Investigation, on receipt of the documents referred to in

paragraphs 9 (d) and 13 will cause an entry to be made on the relevant index

612
 P.G.O. No. 276
cards of the Central Arms Registry as to the disposal of the weapon.

Firearms confiscated under the provisions of the Wildlife Conservation Act, Cap. 283. R.E.
2002.

15. The following action by Police Officers is required in connection with cases
where firearms are confiscated under the provisions of the Wildlife Conservation
Act, Cap. 283. R.E. 2002 Section 76 requires that:- Comment [U55]: Missing text; cross check.
There is no continuity /flow of words.
Confirm!!
In such cases, it is the duty of the Police Prosecutor to give particulars of each
firearm so confiscated and handed over to the Director of Wildlife to the O/C.
District, who will at once inform the Central Arms Registry of all particulars of the
firearms, in writing, as follows :-

(i) Name of licensee.

(ii) Make, calibre and type.

(iii) C.A.R Number

(iv) Maker’s number.

(v) Brief particulars of the Court Order.

APPENDIX “A” Comment [U56]: This is an appendix. Use

(To P.G.O. No. 276) font size 8. Format text as shown in the
attachment
PRIVATE FIREARMS (DISPOSAL) REGISTER (P.F. 219)

1 2 3 4 5 6
serial (a) Description Owner’s Received by Disposal – Signature of
and calibre of name and Police by Method and Disposal
firearms/Quantity address, if Consent or date forwarded Officer
of ammunition; known Court Order, to higher
of Found; formation or
(b) Maker’s
method/date
number; From whom;
and by whom
(c) C.A.R. Date. disposed.
number

1. Rifle 303 10 J. smith, Consent To Armoury – J. Snooks, RPC

rounds 303 Twiga Rail 1.2.60.
PS Oleani
Farm, ASP. Jones
X. 54321
EXAMPLE Oldeani. 1.1.60.
“A” 1234
REGIONAL
LEDGER 2. Pistol 9 mm J. Smith, Consent Dumped in J. Snooks, RPC
Twiga Lake Dukuti
A. 20 PS Oleani
Farm, 1.2.60
5678 Oldeani. 1.1.60.

EXAMPLE 1. .303 J. Smith, Consent Cannibalised

“B” Q.M.S. Twiga for spares
X. 54321 RPC, N.R.
Farm,

613
 P.G.O. No. 276
LEDGER 1234 Oldeani. 10.3.60. 13.3.60.
R. Brown, ASP
P. Copper,R. Brown, ASP
D.C.P.
Quartermaster

APPENDIX “B”
(To P.G.O. No. 276) Comment [U57]: This is an appendix. Use
FIREARMS/AMMUNITION – CERTIFICATE OF DESTRUCTION font size 8. Format text as shown in the
attachment
I certify that the firearms/ammunition mentioned below have/has been destroyed by me by
dumping into ................................... on ...........................
1. Type of firearm .................................. Calibre ..................................................
Make ................................ Maker’s No.........................................................
Name of ex owner................................... C.A.R. No...........................................
2. Type of ammunition ..................... No. of rounds ...............................................
Name of ex owner.....................................................................................
Witness (1) .................................. ......................................................................
Witness (2) ...........................................................

Date .................................................. Signature of Officer…………………

Item (1) refers to Serial No. .................... in PF. 219 of ..........................Region

Item (2) refers to Serial No...................... in PF. 219 of ..........................Region

614
 P.G.O. No. 277
AVAILABILITY – GAZETTED OFFICERS AND INSPECTORS Comment [U58]: New PGO. Align right and
Bold. Increase space before and after
heading

1. Gazetted Officers will not leave their Regions, Districts, or Station areas without
authority. This rule may only be varied in emergency.

2. Leave of absence will normally be requested and authorised as hereunder :-

Comment [U59]: Insert rows and

Requested by Authorized by Columns. See attached text for example.
Should appear as in attachment.
(a) Commanding Officers Inspector General of Police or Commissioner of
Police (Administration and Finance) or
Commissioner (ZBR)

(b) O/C. Districts

O/C. Field Force Units Regional C.I.D., and Regional Commanders
Signals Officers

(c) O/C. Stations O/C. District

(d) Police Headquarters staff Senior Assistant Commissioner, Headquarters

(e) Gazetted Officers and Inspectors notCommanding Officers

included in (a) and (b)

3. Regional Commanders will not leave their headquarters for more than 24 hours without
informing Police Headquarters of the dates and details of their proposed itineraries.
They will also keep the Regional Commissioners informed of their movements.

4. O/C. Districts will similarly inform the Regional Commanders and District
Commissioners of their movements when leaving their headquarters for
periods exceeding 24 hours.

5. All Gazetted Officers, Inspectors and O/C. Stations will be available on call at all times.

6. Officers’ Availability Books will be maintained at all Stations. O/C. Districts will ensure
that these are properly maintained and that appropriate Standing Orders are issued
governing their use.

7. All Gazetted Officers and Inspectors will be responsible for ensuring that particulars of
their whereabouts and/or telephone numbers after office hours are recorded in the
Officers’ Availability Book whenever they are absent from their office or quarters.

8. Headquarters staff and Officers and Inspectors serving in branches in Dar

es Salaam will report their whereabouts in accordance with paragraph 7 to
the Duty Officer, Police Headquarters, and will acquaint themselves with
Standing Orders issued on the subject by the Police Headquarters.

615
 P.G.O. No. 278

AVAILABILITY OF OFFICERS – DUTY OFFICERS Comment [U60]: New PGO. Align right and
bold PGO number. Increase space above
Duty Officers and below heading
Comment [U61]: This is a subheading,
1. Members of the public living in the bigger towns and settled areas should always be align left and reduce space size.
able to get in touch with a Gazetted Officer without difficulty or delay. Furthermore,
a Gazetted Officer should always be available to deal with any special case or sudden
emergency.

2. Regional Commanders will therefore arrange, by Standing Order, for a Duty Gazetted
Officer to be always available on immediate call at each Class “A” station. Regional
C.I.D. and Crime Intelligence Unit Gazetted Officers can take their turn as Duty
Officers provided that there is no interference with their normal duties.

3. Duty Officers shall be available at the end of a telephone in office or at home

throughout their period of duty (normally 24 hours). The may go out for short
periods to private houses provided that they can be contacted at once by telephone
but may not go to dances, cinemas, restaurants, etc. they are personally responsible
for ensuring that they can be contacted immediately by every Police Station for
which they are responsible during their duty period.

4. As a general rule the Duty Officer should only be called out if the Gazetted Officer
directly concerned with the matter in hand is not immediately available, but Regional
Commanders may vary this arrangement if they so desire. They may also use their
discretion as to the manner in which they comply with paragraph 2, provided that
they ensure that a Gazetted Officer is always available on immediate call. Comment [U62]: Space this para and the
next. Second proof shows it is joined. Ie
para 4 and 5.
5. Officers’ name boards (available from Police Main Stores) shall be placed on the
Charge Room counter of every Police Station with the title, name, office and home
telephone numbers of the following officers shown thereon :-

Class “A” Station :

Regional Commander.

O/C. District.

Regional C.I.D. Officer or O/C. District C.I.D. (whichever is more

appropriate).

O/C. Station.

Duty Inspector (or other suitable alternative).

Duty Gazetted Officer.

Comment [U63]: Aligh left, second proof
Class “B” Station : does not show so. Should be like “Class A”
sub heading.
Regional Commander.

O/C. District.

O/C. District C.I.D.

616
 P.G.O. No. 278
O/C. Station.

Class “C” Station :

Regional Commanders.

O/C. District

O/C. Station.
Comment [U64]: New (different para.)
Charge Room Officers shall be instructed to draw the attention of members of the Align left and space it.
public to these boards if they cannot make themselves properly understood because of
language difficulties.
Comment [U65]: Align left and reduce
Headquarters’ Duty Officer in Dar es Salaam space.Subheading.

6. In addition to arrangements laid down in paras. 1 to 5, a Headquarters’ Duty Officer

will be appointed by the Staff Officer Headquarters’ to cover each public holiday of
24 hours’ duration and each week-end. Every officer below the rank of Assistant
Commissioner serving in Dar es Salaam, excepting only technical officers and those
officers serving under the command of the Regional Commander, Dar es Salaam, will Comment [U66]: Delete “and the”
be required to take his turn on a Duty Roster which will be issued by the Staff
Officer, Headquarters.

7. Headquarters’ Duty Officers are responsible that appropriate action is taken on every
matter which is referred to them and will also be available for call by Dar es
Salaam Police Stations if the normal Dar es Salaam Duty Officer (appointed in
accordance with para. 2) cannot be located.

8. No officer will be excused from his duty unless he can satisfy the Staff Officer,
Headquarters, that he is genuinely unable to undertake it.
Comment [U67]: Align left and reduce
C.I.D. H.Q. Duty Officers space.Subheading

9. The Director, Criminal Investigation is responsible that Duty Officers are available to
handle all C.I.D. and Crime Intelligence Unit matters outside office hours.

10. This P.G.O. in no way reduces the obligation of every Gazetted Officer to notify his
whereabouts at all times in accordance with the provisions of P.G.O. No. 277.

617
 P.G.O. No. 279
BEATS Comment [U68]: New PGO. Align right and
bold the PGO number. Increase space
The beat system above and below heading “BEAT”.
Comment [U69]: Align left and reduce
1. All built-up areas, and particularly urban areas, shall be patrolled and protected by space.Subheading
an organised police beat system.

2. For the purpose of this Order “every Station” means only those Police Stations
which are responsible for build-up areas and, therefore, operate a full scale beat
system.

3. The term “beat” means a small urban area with predetermined boundaries which
can be patrolled effectively by one constable. Beats may vary in size according to
the number of streets to be patrolled, the density of the population, the type of
buildings, the business carried out and the nature of the locality.

4. A separate system of day beats and night beats will be provided for with more
intensive beat coverage during the hours of darkness.

5. The precise boundaries of every day and night beat shall be laid down in Station
Standing Orders and approved by the Regional Commander. Two large-scale day
beat and night beat maps shall be posted in an accessible position in each Station
Charge room showing, in colour, the boundaries of each day and night beat and the
precise route to be followed by each beat constable.

6. Every Station shall be provided with a set of Beat Cards covering each day beat and
night beat. Each card shall contain :-

(a) full information about the beat and precise instructions as to how it should be
patrolled; Comment [U70]: Note the inserting of
numbers (a) and (b)
(b) a map showing the area of the beat and the route to be followed by the beat
constable.

A specimen Beat Card is attacÿÿÿÿat Appendix “A” for general guidancÿÿ

Comment [U71]: Increase space above
Beÿÿ dÿÿy subheading> Second proof does not show
space. Decrease space below subheading.
7. All beaÿÿconstables will be paraded by the Charge RooÿÿOfÿÿcer outside thÿÿr
Station Charge Room 15 minutes before they are due to go on duty to receive
instructions and information. This period will not count as duty. They will be
inspected by the Duty Inspector or N.C.O., or if neither is available, by the Charge
Room Officer, to ensure that they are properly dressed and provided with
notebooks, truncheons and other necessary equipment. They shall then be briefed
and supplied with full information regarding wanted persons, stolen vehicles, vacant
houses, buildings requiring special attention, etc. Instructions shall then be issued as
to whether the beats shall be walked by the right or by the left in accordance with
para. 9. O/C. Stations are directly responsible that the provisions of this paragraph
are properly carried out.

8. The standard period of beat duty shall be 6 hours; variations are only permissible in
exceptional circumstances on the authority of an O/C. District.

9. Beats should normally be patrolled “by the right” or “by the left”, although other
arrangements may be made if special circumstances so require. To patrol a beat “by
the right” means to follow the set route laid down on the Beat Card with the right

618
 P.G.O. No. 279
shoulder always pointing inwards towards the buildings along the edge of the
pavement or road. To patrol “by the left” means to follow the reverse procedure, i.e.
with the left shoulder pointing inwards.

10. No beat constable shall leave his beat without permission unless either :-

(a) he is called away by a sudden emergency such as a fire, accident or serious

crime. In such a case he shall return to his beat as soon as possible and shall
enter in his notebook the time of leaving, and time of return; or

(b) he has been properly relieved by another constable. If an expected relief

fails to appear, the constable awaiting relief will telephone the Charge
Room Officer and ask for permission to leave his beat. Absence from a beat
without permission is a serious offence which may entail dismissal if
repeated more than once or if a serious preventable offence occurs while a
constable is absent without due cause.

11. Every beat constable is required to know the precise location of :-

(a) doctors;

(b) hospitals and clinics;

(c) fire brigades, fire alarms and hydrants;

(d) public telephones;

(e) Government Departments.

12. Every constable shall patrol his beat in accordance with the following rules :-

(a) Patrol at a steady walking speed of 21/2 miles per hour.

(b) Walk on the outside edge of the pavement during the day and along the
inside at night.

(c) Neither loiter nor gossip and shall walk his beat continuously and regularly
with his eyes and ears open and his mouth shut.

(d) Move smartly and shall neither slouch nor appear slovenly.

(e) Answer all questions with civility and good temper.

(f) Act quietly and discreetly and shall out interfere with other persons without
due cause. When required to take action, he shall do so with firmness and
discretion.

(g) Pay strict attention to the premises on his beat and shall ensure that doors
and windows are properly shut of barred and that other places through
which a thief might gain entry are securely closed up.

(h) Generally carry out his duty in accordance with the instructions laid down
in Appendix “B”.

619
 P.G.O. No. 279
Beat supervision Comment [U72]: Align left and reduce
space.Subheading
13. Every station shall group its beats into a Section or Sections. A “Section” means a
group of beats which can be supervised effectively by one N.C.O. In the larger
towns, two or more Sections may be necessary. The N.C.Os specifically responsible
for beat supervision shall be known as “Section N.C.Os”.

14. Supervision of beats is necessary at all times and shall be carried out as effectively
as possible commensurate with the number of N.C.Os and Inspectors available.
Supervision of night beats is of particular importance. O/C. stations shall ensure in
particular that N.C..s are not wasted on unimportant duties. In the bigger stations
N.C.O.s should always be made available for beat supervision duty.

15. Section N.C.O.s shall constantly visit and patrol all the beats for which they are
responsible, and they shall do so at uncertain intervals and in uncertain order. They
shall keep awake and ensure that the beat duties are also awake and patrolling their
beats in the proper manner. They shall meet the beat duties at specified points and
shall deal with any reports or other matters raised by the beat constables. They shall
also sign and check each beat constable’s Conference Book in accordance with
paragraphs 18-23 below.

16. Section N.C.O. shall report any dereliction of duty to the O/C. Station. They shall
not ignore or excuse an offence committed or apparently committed by a beat
constable.

17. An effective beat system is an essential police service to the public. Gazetted
Officers and Inspectors are equally responsible for the supervision of beats at
regular and frequent intervals. Under no circumstances shall beat supervision be left
entirely to N.C.Os.
Comment [U73]: Align left and reduce
Conference Books space.Subheading

18. Every member of the Inspectorate and the Rank & File, excepting only Field Force
Unit, Signals, Crime Intelligence Unit and C.I.D. personnel, shall be issued with a
Conference Book (PF. 177) which shall be carried at all times on duty.

19. Whenever an Inspector, N.C.O. or P.C. on duty meets another Inspector, N.C.O. or
P.C. who is also on duty, he shall enter the date and time of the meeting in such
officer’s Conference Book and shall sign it. He shall then make a similar entry in his
own book and shall require the officer he has met to sign it.

20. Inspectors and N.C.Os on supervision duty are responsible that every check carried
out by them on sentries, patrols, beat duties, etc., is properly recorded in the
Conference Books.

21. Failure to record a meeting in both Conference Books is a serious disciplinary

offence.

22. Conference Books shall be examined by senior officers at regular intervals and at all
formal inspections.

23. Completed Conference Books shall be handed over to the O/C. Station for
immediate destruction.

620
 P.G.O. No. 279

APPENDIX “A”
(To P.G.O. No. 279)
Comment [U74]: This a heading. Second
SPECIMEN BEAT CARD proof is not centred. Plse centre the
heading.Decreas font size to 8. It is an
No. 1 DAY BEAT ROUTE appendix.
Starting from the junction of “A” and “D” Streets, along “D” Street, into “C” Street, into “E Comment [U75]: The ruote should appear
Street, into “B” street to its junction with “D” Street and back along “B” Street into “E” Street like in attached text. What appears is
wrong!!Nore recommended font size.
to its junction with “A” Street and back along “E” Street into “B” Street to its junction with
“F” Street and back along “B” Street into “E” Street, into “C” Street, into “F” Street to its
junction with “A” Street and back along “F” Street into “C” Street, into “G” Street, into “B”
Street to its junction with “F” Street and back along “B” Street into “G” Street, into “A” Street
to the junction of “A” Street and “D” Street.

BEAT MAP

“A” STREET

“ B” STREET

“C” STREET

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Starting point.

APPENDIX “B”
(To P.G.O. No. 279)

THE DUTIES OF THE BEAT CONSTABLE

1. Each constable on his tour of duty is on his own and must normally act on his own
initiative and responsibility. He is responsible for dealing properly and effectively
with anything which may occur and no definite limit can be assigned to the range of
his work. Every beat constable is therefore required to perform his duty in
accordance with the provisions of the paragraphs set out hereunder.

621
 P.G.O. No. 279
2. He must acquire complete knowledge of his beat, including the location of
telephones, the residences of doctors, veterinary officers and nurses and positioning
of hydrants. Comment [U76]: Refer to attached text. 1-
6 are already in the attachment. Plse note.
3. He should know the names of all roads in his district and be able to direct the public
to the nearest hospitals, the railway station, bus stops, hotels and main roads from
his district to other towns in addition to places of interest in his own locality.

4. It is his duty to help the public and he should reply to any inquiry with civility and
do his best to assist the inquirer.

5. He should at all time keep his attention on his work, walking smartly at a pace
which will enable him to comply with his instructions as to his beat.

6. When he sees a crowd, he should ascertain the cause, as his assistance may be
required or his intervention necessary. His duty is to see that the highway and side
roads are not obstructed either by people or things, should an obstructing crowd
form, those responsible should be requested to move on and their names and
addresses taken if necessary.
Comment [U77]: Reduce font size, this is
7. Any case of fighting or assault must be stopped and those concerned prevented from an appendix to para 38
renewing the attack. If necessary, the principals may be arrested and taken to the
nearest Police Station. Should the assault be of a minor nature, it is usually wiser to
leave it to those concerned to take any proceedings they may think fit.

8. In a case of threatening or abusive language the offender should be advised to desist

and his name and address should be taken, he should also be warned that he will be
reported and may be prosecuted.

9. If a larceny is reported, particulars should be noted, the facts accurately ascertained

and, if necessary, immediate action should be taken. However, the constable should
not act precipitately in cases where ownership may be doubtful.

10. Vagrants, beggars and suspicious-looking strangers should be tactfully observed,

bearing in mind that their carelessness or malice may cause injury to property.

11. If wilful damage has been done to property, the constable should try to make the
perpetrator amenable to justice. Empty house, street lamps, factory windows and
road signs are often damaged by children or irresponsible people and the constable
should prevent all forms of this kind old damage. He should note all property that
appears to have been damaged recently and should ascertain the cause and the
owner.

12. Using his powers of observation, he should be able to detect anything unusual and
should inquire into it. Particular attention should be paid to telephone kiosks.

13. If a building appears to be in a dangerous condition; if there has been a subsidence

or any other injury in the highway; if there is waste of water due to a burst water
pipe or other cause; if fumes arise apparently from a fused electric cable or if any
condition or happening is, or seems likely to become, dangerous to the public, the
appropriate authority and/or owner should be informed as soon as possible by
telephone or messenger so that the defect may be remedied as soon as possible. The
constable should remain to warn and regulate motor or foot traffic so that the danger
zone is kept clear.

622
 P.G.O. No. 279
14. The constable is responsible for the security of property on his beat and his powers
of observation must be exercised. At night he should see that doors and windows
within his reach are secure and, if any are insecure, the occupier should be aroused
and informed.

15. Empty houses, particularly those empty for short periods, should be regularly
inspected. Lock-up premises require special attention as, in addition to the danger of
their being broken into for the purpose of stealing, there is risk of fire arising from
carelessness on the part of their daily occupants.

16. Any unusual lights or noises in premises at night should be investigated. If

necessary, assistance should be summoned and the premises surrounded so as to
capture unlawful visitors. Ladders left outside premises offer a means of easy access
to upper windows, so the presence of ladders necessitates extra police vigilance.

17. The regular examination of premises, particularly during the night, is therefore
obligatory on a policeman who must, at all times, be prepared to meet a
housebreaker or burglar in action.

18. Attention must be paid to any person who appears to be drunk. Although it is not an
offence to get drunk, a drunken person in the public highway or other public place
or on licensed premises is committing an offence. If he is incapable, he should be
taken in charge for his own safety unless his friends (if any) will take the
responsibility. If he is disorderly, the constable may have to arrest him to ensure the
preservation of order. If he is in charge of a vehicle, the constable must take action
in the interests of the public safety. If there is doubt whether the person is drunk or
ill, a doctor should be sent for as the condition of such a person may be due to
illness or injury.

19. Obscene or indecent language should be stopped in the interests of public decency.
The offender is usually made amenable by summons. The same applies to obscene
writings which should be obliterated after procuring a witness and taking a copy of
the words, etc., written down or drawn. In the case of deliberately indecent
acts, especially indecent exposure, the offender should be arrested and brought to
the Station as it is likely that other similar acts have been committed by him. Minor
indecent acts may be dealt with by summons. Prostitutes, who usually keep to
particular localities, may be moved on if any obstruction is caused but, apart
from obstruction, they should not be arrested unless a definite breach of the law has
occurred and unless there is evidence to support a prosecution. The fact that a
woman is a known prostitute does not, in itself, justify police interference.

20. If a fire occurs in premises or on property, he should immediately give the alarm and
send for the Fire Brigade. His duty at a fire is to save life, protect property and keep
order.

21. In street and other accidents, he must render all assistance in his power and make
use of his knowledge of First Aid. If required, a doctor or ambulance should be
called and relatives of those taken to hospital should be informed. Full particulars of
accidents must be noted and duly reported.

22. Cases of nuisance or danger to health arising from bad smells, dead animals, etc.,
should be investigated and particulars noted for report to the relevant authority,
having first requested the owner or occupier to remove the cause of the nuisance.

623
 P.G.O. No. 279
23. Other nuisances on the highway such as the throwing of fireworks, lighting of
bonfires, discharging of firearms, etc., must be dealt with and reported if necessary.

24. The constable should stop traffic to allow school children to cross the road in safety
and, when possible, he should be near a school when the children are due to arrive
and leave.

25. Blind or old people should be helped across the road and assisted into or out of
vehicles.

26. A note should be made of the condition of any animal cruelly treated and, if
necessary, a T.S.P.C.A. representative or veterinary officer contacted to relieve the
animal of its suffering. A certificate should be obtained in any case of an animal
being destroyed.

27. Stray dogs should either be taken to the pound or dealt with according to Station
Standing Orders.

28. Outbreaks of disease amongst stock or of rabies must be reported immediately and
any unlawful movement of diseased cattle checked.

29. Lost property will claim his attention; losses will be reported to him and found
articles brought to him. He should take particulars so that correct information may
be circulated to all Police Stations and should refer his inquirers to the nearest Police
Station.

30. A lost child should be taken to the nearest Police Station and, if possible, the
relatives informed without delay. If no information is available about his home or
relatives, a description should be circulated by telephone to other Police Stations as
the relatives will probably contact the police for assistance in finding the lost child.

31. Street hawkers and persons using the footway or roadway for purposes other than
passage can be moved on as causing an obstruction. They may also be committing a
breach of the law or contravening some local by-law, in which case a report must be
made.

32. Places of refreshment should be watched from time to time to ensure that they are
conducted in an orderly manner.

33. The beat constable should not enter licensed premises unless some good reason
justifies his presence there.

34. Places of entertainment also need attention in respect to order and in the interests of
the safety of the public. Any over-crowding, obstruction of passages or exits or
neglect of the prescribed safety regulations should at once be brought to the notice
of the manager and reported in due course.

35. Traffic or point duty is usually distinct from beat duty, but at times a member of the
Force on beat or patrol may be directed to perform such duty at definite places for
specified periods. He should therefore accustom himself to giving correct traffic
signals in a smart manner; slovenly signals will give the public a poor opinion of the
Force. His signals should be distinct and clearly indicate his directions to the traffic.
While on point duty, he must be decided and definite and ensure that his signals,
given as officially prescribed, are obeyed. He should not, however, enter into

624
 P.G.O. No. 279
argument with anyone and must not lose his temper.

36. Damaged vehicles must be removed from the highway as soon as possible. The
driver usually takes this responsibility, the constables affording what assistance he
can. Abandoned vehicles must be reported to a Police Station. Vehicles parked for
unduly long periods must also be reported if the drivers are contravening the parking
laws.

37. During his beat or patrol, a constable is liable to inspection at any time by one or
more of his superior officers. To each he should report verbally anything which has
occurred on his beat since he was last inspected, remembering that such officers are
also responsible, in a police sense, for what occurs on his beat. He is sent there to
represent law and order and they, whilst they also represent the same safeguards of
the public, are responsible that he performs his duties in a proper manner.

38. When he has finished his tour of duty, he should report, in writing any occurrences
or offences that may have come to his notice during his period of duty. From the
entries in his notebook, he will be able to report such items, including the particulars
of any breaches of the law for which the offenders are liable to prosecution and
regarding which his superiors have to decide whether prosecution will be instituted. Comment [U78]: Plse note; end of
appendix.

625
 P.G.O. No. 280
BOOKS – DUTY BOOK (PF.59A) AND DUTY ROSTER (PF.
59) Comment [U79]: New PGO. Align right he
number, bold it. Increaes space below and
Part I – Duty Book (P.F. 59A) above the heading.

1. Every O/C. Station is personally responsible for the preparation of his Station
duty plan so that every member of the Rank & File serving under his command
is employed to the best advantage. The Duty Book (P.F. 59A) will be used for
this purpose.

2. Duty Books shall be maintained in every Police Station and by all other
formations which operate on pre-arranged duty plan.

3. (a) In Class “B” and “C” Stations, all Rank & File will be recorded in
the Duty Book. Comment [U80]: Decrease space, second
proof shows so.
(b) The same procedure will apply to Class “A” Stations, except that :-

(i) C.I.D. and Crime Intelligence Unit duties will not be

recorded in the Station Duty Book;

(ii) separate Duty Books for traffic staff will be maintained in

those Class “A” Stations which have a Traffic Gazetted
Officer.

4. Duty Books will be made up not less than 24 hours and not more than 7 days
in advance and shall be kept in the Charge Room. Suitable Duty lists will be
extracted for posting in Barracks, Guard Rooms, etc., so that all ranks may
know the duties they are required to perform.

5. Duty Books shall be prepared as follows :-

(a) All the essential routine Station duties and commitments shall be
entered in the first Column irrespective of manpower availability to
cover all of them.

(b) The duty periods will be shown in the second Column.

(c) The numbers (and names if so desired) of the members of the Force
selected for duty will be entered in the upper half of the space
opposite the duty to be performed, in the appropriate Columns
(headed MONDAY, TUESDAY, etc.).

6. The lower half of the space opposite each duty in the Columns headed
MONDAY, TUESDAY, etc., will be used to record, in red ink, details of
duties actually performed. There are always last-minute alterations to pre-
arranged duty programmes duty to sickness, absence, etc., and it is most
important that senior officers should know exactly what police coverage has
been provided at any given time. The following symbols will be used for this
purpose :-

√ - Duty performed as shown in Duty Book.

x - Duty as shown in Duty Book not performed.
a - Absent.
s - Sick.

626
 P.G.O. No. 280
c - Changed to other duty.
r - Rest day.
P.C. 50 - Absent and replaced by P.C. 50.
ax - Absent and not replaced.
sx - Sick and replaced by P.C. 50
c√ - Changed to other duty and replaced by P.C.
50.
P.C. 50 - Changed to other duty and not replaced
r√ - Rest Day and replaced by P.C. 50
rx - Rest Day and not replaced.

Comment [U81]: Please copy the attached

7. A specimen page is shown below for guidance :- text for verification. The shown table is not
correct.Copy the attached text

Specimen Page

DUTY PERIOD:

FROM TO MONDAY TUESDAY

CHARGE ROOM OFFICE 0001 0800 Sgt. 50 Sgt. 50

√ √

CHARGE ROOM OFFICE 0800 1600 Sgt. 51 Sgt. 51

√ √

CHARGE ROOM OFFICE … 1600 2359 Sgt. 52 Sgt. 52

√ s√ Sgt. 54

No. 1 BEAT … … … 0001 0600 P.C. 1. P.C. 1

√ A x

No. 1 BEAT … … … 0600 1200 P.C. 2 P.C. 2

√ √

No. 1 BEAT … … … 1200 1800 P.C. 3 P.C. 3

√ √

No. 1 BEAT … … … 1800 2359 P.C. 4 P.C. 4

√ √

627
 P.G.O. No. 280
No. 2 BEAT … … … 0001 0600 P.C. 5 P.C.5

√ √

No. 2 BEAT … … … 0600 1200 P.C. 6 P.C. 6

r √ P.C. 10 √

No. 2 BEAT … … … 1200 1800 P.C. 7 P.C. 7

√ √

No. 2 BEAT … … … 1800 2359 P.C. 8 P.C. 8

c x c √ P.C. 11

Comment [U82]: Reduce space, this is

Part II – Duty Roster (P.F. 59) subheading

8. The O/C. of every Station and Unit will maintain a Rank & File Duty Roster (P.F.
59) in which a daily record will be kept of all duties performed sicknesses,
absences, etc. This record is necessary so that Officers – In-Charge can arrange a
fair allocation of duties when they make up their Duty Books (P.F. 59A).

9. The code letters shown hereunder will be used in the Duty Roster. Blue-black ink
will be used for all entries, except night duties (1800 to 0600 hours) which will be
entered in red :-

Comment [U83]: Adjust font size. The

B = Beat Duty second proof shows different. Please use
the normal text font size.
G = Guard Duty

SD = Station Duty (includes

Orderlies)

P = Patrol

SL = Sick in Lines and Sick Leave

H = Hospital

A = Absent without leave

R = Rest day

C = Absent on Course

Additional code letters may also be used to suit local circumstances.

628
 P.G.O. No. 281
BOOKS – INVESTIGATIONS REGISTER Comment [U84]: New PGo. Align right for
numbering; and bold. Increase space above
1. An Investigations Register (P.F. 169) as at Appendix “A” attached to this Order, and below heading
shall be maintained by every O/C. Station and O/C. C.I.D. Unit.

2. Every report dealt with as a Case File, Minor Offence Docket or Traffic File, in
accordance with P.G.O. No. 281, will be entered in the Investigations Register by
O/C. Stations.

3. It is the responsibility of every O/C. C.I.D. Unit to ensure that details of all cases,
inquiries and First Crime Reports (PF. 4) received or take over by them are
recorded in the Unit’s Investigations Register.
Comment [U85]: Reduce space here
4. Entries shall be made in the following manner :-

(a) In the first Column: the serial number of the investigation, commencing
with the first investigation reported on the 1st January of each year and
concluding with the last investigation reported on the 31st December of
the same year. This Serial Number shall be obtained from Column 15 of
the Report Book.

(b) In the second Column: the Report Book number of the report under
investigation.

(c) In the third Column: the exact time of the Report Book entry.

(d) In the fourth Column: brief details of the offence report under
investigation, e.g., attempted suicide, theft, discharge of Force firearm,
sudden death.

(e) In the fifth Column: a brief note of the date the file is to be brought up,
remand dates, date of P.I or trial and any other brief note that O/C.
Station wishes to make.

(f) In the sixth Column: location of file, e.g., whether with District C.I.D.,
Director of Criminal Investigation, Director of Public Prosecutions,
State Attorney or with an investigating officer of the Station.

(g) In the seventh Column: the result and date of the investigation.

5. Entries shall be written neatly and legibly and shall be in ink in Columns 1, 2, 3
and 7. Pencil entries may be made in Columns 4, 5 and 6.

6. Inspecting and visiting officers shall examine the Investigations Register to ensure
that it is properly maintained.

7. The Investigations Register shall be preserved for two years.

APPENDIX “A” Comment [U86]: Have attached the proper

(To P.G.O. No. 281) appendix for copying. Plse observe that.

629
 P.G.O. No. 281
INVESTIGATIONS REGISTER
(P.F. 169) Comment [U87]: Misplaced text!!

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Report Book No. Date of

of report under Report
Investigation Offence or B.U. File Result and
investigation Book Entry
Serial No. Inquiry Date
Notes Holder

630
 P.G.O. No. 282
BOOKS – NOTEBOOK Comment [U88]: New PGO; Align right,
bold. Increase space below PGo number
1. Every member of the Force shall be issued with an official police notebook, and a and below Heading
Personal Description Aid (PF. 171) which must be carried in the notebook.

2. The rank, number and name of the owner shall be written in block letters on the
inside cover of the notebook.

3. Notebooks shall always be carried by all ranks on duty.

4. In criminal cases, accuracy is of such importance that a Police Officer must not
trust to his memory, but must enter at once in his notebook sufficient particulars of
every incident or occurrence of which he is likely to be called upon to give
evidence. Descriptions of persons and scenes of crime shall be noted down in
accordance with the procedure laid down in the Personal Description Aid (PF.
171).
Comment [U89]: Align left and Decrease
Rules for keeping notebook space below subheading.

5. (a) Entries shall be made in indelible pencil.

(b) Each entry shall commence with particulars of the date, time and place at
which it was made.

(c) No blank spaces, alterations or writing between lines are permitted.

(d) No page or portion or a page may be torn out from a notebook. Officers
who lose or deface their notebooks will be defaulted and required to pay
the cost of replacement.

(e) When a statement is recorded, it shall be written down in the actual

words used by the person making it.

(f) Nothing may be rubbed out. If correction is necessary, brackets shall be

put round the incorrect entry which must not be crossed out and the
correction written as a new entry.

(g) A line shall be drawn from the last words of each entry to the right hand
side of the page.

(h) No loose pieces of paper may be kept in the notebook, except for one list
of doctors, hospitals and useful telephone numbers.

(i) Nothing of a private nature may be entered in the notebook.

(j) Currency notes, unless they are exhibits which must be handed over to
the Charge Room Officer as soon as possible, may not be kept inside a
notebook.
Comment [U90]: Align left and Decrease
Entries to be made space below subheading. Increase space
above subheading. Second proof shows the
6. The following particulars, together with details of any other occurrence dealt with space is little
or brought to the attention of the holder and which may seem to be of importance,
shall be carefully and accurately recorded in the notebook:-

631
 P.G.O. No. 282
(a) The full name and address, age, sex, race/tribe and occupation of every
complainant, witness, suspect, offender or person arrested. The license
number, place of issue and expiry date shall also be given with the
personal particulars of persons connected with traffic cases.

(b) Brief particulars of every arrest carried out and every process executed
by the holder.

(c) Exact particulars of fires, accidents, serious crimes or other events

requiring action by the holder.

(d) Every warning given by the holder to any member of the public over a
breach of the law.

(f) The discovery or receipt by the holder of any property while on duty.

(g) The number and particulars of any exhibits handed over or in any way
coming into the holder’s custody, together with the names of the persons
who gave him the exhibits and of the persons to whom he hands over
such exhibits.

(h) The fact that he saw any person or persons in suspicious circumstances,
even though he did not have to arrest them.

(i) The reason for and time of leaving and return to his beat if such was
necessary during his period of duty.

(j) Descriptions of wanted persons and stolen property shall be entered at the
back of the notebook, starting from the last page and working forwards.

(k) Names and descriptions of persons wanted for major crimes in his district
or area.
Comment [U91]: Align left and Decrease
Reference to notebook when giving evidence space below subheading.

7. (a) Police Officers, when giving evidence, will always be in possession of

their notebooks and should refresh their memories from them prior to
going into Court.

(b) With the permission of the Trial Judge or Magistrate, the holder may (in
order to refresh his memory only and not for the purpose of quoting any
entry verbatim) refer to the notes relevant to the case being tried.

(c) If it is desired that the contents of the notebook relevant to the case being
tried be put in as evidence and the notebook contains information relating
to other cases or secret matters, the Police Officer should inform the
Bench who may then arrange to copy or extract the relevant entries so
that the notebook can be returned to the holder without compromising
irrelevant material.
Comment [U92]: Align left and Decrease
Inspection of notebooks space below subheading.

8. (a) O/C. Districts and Stations shall examine and initial the notebooks of all
ranks under their command at regular intervals and ensure that they are

632
 P.G.O. No. 282
properly maintained.

(b) Notebooks shall be preserved by the holder for two years and must be
produced at formal inspections, together with the notebook in current use.

(c) Notebooks may only be shown to Police Officers or to persons so

authorised by a Gazetted Officer, Magistrate or Judge.

633
 P.G.O. No. 283
BOOKS – OFFICIAL DIARIES Comment [U93]: New PGO. Align right and
bold.Increase space above and below
1. Every Gazetted Officer, Inspector and Sergeant-Major shall keep an Official Diary. heading

2. Diaries will be kept in English or Kiswahili. Entries will be made daily.

3. Brief notes of the following shall be recorded in Official Diaries :-

(a) Hours of attendance at office outside normal routine hours.

(b) Special duties or investigations performed.

(c) Details of patrols, visits to Stations and night rounds.

(d) Interviews.

(e) Defaulter Parades.

(f) Parades and exercises attended.

(g) Attendances in Court.

(h) Inspections.

(i) Any other duties performed outside the office, e.g., Regional
Commissioners’ Conference, etc.

(j) Mileage of each duty journey in non-Government vehicles.

(k) Any other items of interest.

4. An advance record of forthcoming engagements or duties may be kept in the

margin of the diary.

5. Diary entries must be in sufficient detail to enable every officer to refer back at any
time for a full record of his duties and activities.

6. Official diaries will be produced for scrutiny at all formal inspections by O/C.
Districts and Commanding Officers. Should an officer be absent from the Station
at the time of inspection, his diary will be left in the office for inspection.

7. Gazetted Officers who are required to check diaries will be held responsible that
all prescribed duties, visits, patrols and inspections are carried out. They shall
report any dereliction of duty via the usual channels to their Commanding Officers.

8. Completed official diaries will be retained for one year.

634
 P.G.O. No. 284
BOOKS – STATION DIARIES Comment [U94]: New PGO. Align right and
bold. Increase space above and below
1. Station Diary (PF. 51) shall be maintained in the Charge Room of every Police heading
Station and at any other place of duty as directed by a Commanding Officer. Comment [U95]: INCREASE SPACE
BTWEEN 1 AND 2. Second proof shows no
space in btween
2. The officer of Charge Room duty shall be responsible for maintaining the Station
Diary.

3. The Station Diary shall be written up in ink and shall contain an accurate and
complete record of everything which takes place in the Station or Station area
concerning police administration, excluding events which are recorded in other
official Station books or records.

4. Entries concerning the following events shall be recorded in the Station Diary :-

(a) The going on or off duty of all guards, sentries, patrols and all other
personnel on any other duty.

(b) The departure of the O/C. Station from the Station and the name of the
Police Officer acting as O/C. Station during his absence. The return of
the O/C. Station shall also be recorded.

(c) Visits to prisoners in cells and to any guards and sentries by the Charge
Room Officer or any other officer.

(d) The issue and return of handcuffs, bicycles, torches, riot equipment and
other Station property, except arms and ammunition.

(e) In Mobile Police Stations only, brief particulars of every entry made in
the Mobile Police Station Report Book (vide General Order No. 7).

5. Entries shall be made in the following manner :-

(a) In the first Column of the serial number, each entry shall be given a serial
number commencing at midnight and finishing with the last entry at 2359
hours.

(b) In the second Column any cross-reference to previous entries or entries in

other official police books.

(c) In the third Column the exact time of entry ; the twenty-four hour clock
times shall be used. Cross-references to other entries in the Station Diary
will be made with the Station Diary entry number placed over the date. A
reference to entry No. 513 of 15th November, 2004 would therefore read
:-

_ 513__
15.11.04

(d) In the fourth Column a brief but accurate record of the event being
recorded. Comment [U96]: decrease this space for
consistency
(e) In the fifth Column the signature of the officer making the entry.

635
 P.G.O. No. 284

6. All references to N.C.Os. and Constables shall include their rank and Force number.

7. Entries shall be neat and legible and, if possible, in English. Pencil entries are
forbidden.

8. Entries shall be made in chronological order and without delay.

9. No entry already made may be altered, deleted or added to and no entry may be
made between lines of completed entries. No erasures may be made.

10. If a completed entry requires amendment or addition, a fresh entry shall be made
under a new serial number and cross-referenced to the previous entry. A marginal
note in red ink shall be recorded against the original incorrect entry.

11. No blank spaces shall be left between entries or on any line in an entry. A line shall
be drawn from the last word of each entry to the right hand side of Column 4.

12. At 2359 hours daily a single red ink line shall be ruled across the page below the last
entry. The date of the following period shall be written in red ink in block capitals
immediately below this line in the centre of the page. The subsequent entry shall be
written on the line immediately below the date.

13. The last entry for the month shall be that which is recorded before midnight on the
last day of the month. A double red line shall be ruled across the page below this
entry.

14. (a) When the Charge Room duty changes hands, an entry shall be made in the
following form and shall be signed by both the relief and the relieving
Police Officer :-

“I handed over duties in the Charge Room to Constable ...................................

No. .............................................................................................. with the following arms an
ammunition …........................................................................
all Government property and Station equipment on charge, cash in hand, Shs. ........................
the following prisoners in custody ............................................”

(b) All deficiencies of arms and ammunition, property on charge, cash, or

prisoners in custody will be recorded. The Police Officer handling over
shall not leave the Station until the foregoing entries, temporarily relieving
him of responsibility, have been made and signed by himself and his relief.
At Stations which are not open for twentyfour hours of the day, the Police
Officer closing the Station will make an entry recording the time he closed
the Station. The next entry will record the time of the opening of the
Station.

15. The O/C. Station shall check the Station Diary at least once a day between 0800
hours and 0900 hours and shall make an entry to that effect in red ink.

16. Inspecting and visiting officers shall examine the Station Diary and ensure that it is
properly maintained. They will also examine entries in connected registers in
conjunction with the Station Diary.

636
 P.G.O. No. 284
Comment [U97]: Note: Second proof reads
17. A copy of these rules shall be affixed to the front cover of each Station Diary in wrong PGO number. It has a number on
current use. top. Plse delete it.

18. Station Diaries shall be preserved for two years and shall then be destroyed.

637
 P.G.O. No. 285
BOOKS-SUMMONS REGISTER Comment [U98]: New PGO. Align right and
Bold. Increase space below and above
1. Every O/C. Station shall maintain separate Summons Registers (PF. 55) for heading
“Summons to Witnesses” and “Summons to Accused”.

2. Every Witness (and Complainant) Summons and Summons to Accused Persons

delivered to the police for service shall be entered in the appropriate Summons
Register. Civil summonses shall not be entered. A separate Register for traffic
summonses may be maintained at Class “A” Stations at the discretion of
Commanding Officers.

3. Entries in Summons Registers will be serially numbered from 1st January to 31st
December and shall be made, without delay, and in accordance with the following
procedure :-

(a) Each summons will be given a serial number in Column 1 and the
summons will then be stamped with the Station stamp in the right top
corner with the Register serial number endorsed thereon.

(b) Particulars of each summons shall be recorded in Columns 2, 3, 4, 8, 9

and 11 as soon as it has been received from the Court.

(c) The officer handing over the summons for service will enter the
appropriate particulars in Column 5 and sign his name in Column 6.

(d) The officer receiving the summons for service shall sign for its receipt in
Column 7.

(e) As soon as a summons is served, the name of the officer by whom it was
served and the date and time of service shall be recorded in Column 10
and the duplicate copy of the summons returned to the Court of issue
properly endorsed by the serving officer.

(f) When a summons has not been served, the word “unserved” will be
entered in Column 10 and the date on which the two copies of the
summons are returned to the Court of issue shall be recorded in Column
12.

4. The signature of the Court clerk and seal of the Court will, if possible, be obtained
in Column 13. Where summonses are returned to the Court of issue by letter, it
will be sufficient to quote the letter reference in Column 13 but in such cases a
receipt must be obtained from the Court clerk and Field in a safe place.

5. A summons which has been issued to a person who has moved to another district
will be returned to the Court of issue under cover of a letter, giving the residence
(if known) of the person named thereon. The Court will be requested to
acknowledge receipt and an entry will be made in Column 12 and the
correspondence reference quoted in Column 13.

6. O/C. Stations and Districts are directly responsible that :-

(a) summons registers are correctly maintained, and that entries are up to
date at all times;

(b) Summonses are served without unnecessary delay;

638
 P.G.O. No. 285
(c) Duplicate copies of served summonses and both copies of unserved
summonses are returned to the Court of issue before the date of hearing;

(d) The provisions of Sections 91-99 inclusive and Section 145 of the
Criminal Procedure Act, Cap 20 R.E. 2002 are strictly observed;

(e) Summonses pending service are kept in safe custody.

7. Inspecting Officers shall pay particular attention to Columns 10, 12 and 13 in the
Summons Register and shall ensure that the final disposal of every summons is
properly entered.

639
 P.G.O. No. 286
CASE FILES AND MINOR OFFENCE DOCKETS –
PREPARATION OF Comment [U99]: New PGO; Align right and
bold. Increase space below and above
Reports to be dealt with as Case Files heading
Comment [U100]: Sub heading, align left
1. A Case File (PF. 2C) shall be used for each of the following classes of report:- and decrease space

(a) Offences under the Penal Code Cap 16 R.E.2002 other than:-

(i) non-cognizable offences;

(ii) offences under Sections 176 and 177;

(iii) simple thefts and breakings where the total value of the
stolen property does not exceed Shs. 100,000/=;
(iv) minor assaults, under Section 241, between persons of the same
race, provided that no one is detained in hospital.

(b) Offences under the following statutes:-

(i) Drugs and Prevention of Illicit Traffic in Drugs Act, Cap. 95

R.E. 2002;

(ii) Mining Act, Cap. 123 R.E. 2002;

(iii) Pawn brooking (Prohibition) Act, Cap. 175 R.E. 2002;

(iv) Auctioneers Act, Cap. 227 R.E. 2002;

(v) Goldsmith & Silversmith Act, Cap. 228 R.E. 2002;

(vi) Public Order Act, Cap. 385 R.E. 2002;

(vii) Medical Practitioners and Dentists Act, Cap. 152 R.E. 2002;

(viii) Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002;

(ix) Local Government (Urban Authorities) Act 1982;

(x) Local Government (District Authorities) Act, Cap.287 R.E.

2002.

(xi) Second-hand Dealers & Scrap Metal Dealers Ordinance, Cap.

354.

(xii) Trade Unions Act, Cap. 244 R.E. 2002;

(xiii) Societies Act, Cap. 337 R.E. 2002; and

(xiv) Prevention of Corruption Act, Cap. 329 R.E. 2002.

(c) Sudden and Unnatural Deaths.

Comment [U101]: DCP. CONFIRM THESE
(d) Discharge of Arms or Tear Smoke by Police (except inquiries). WORDS. OLD PGOR READS “ excluding
practices…” please confirm!!

640
 P.G.O. No. 286
(e) Escapes from Lawful Custody.

(f) Riots, Unlawful Assemblies and Serious Affrays.

(g) Loss of Government Property on police charge exceeding Shs.

50,000/= in value.

(h) Any complaint made against police.

(i) Any other important inquiry into offences (except inquiries into
traffic accidents) which the O/C. Station considers should be
made the subject of a Case File.

2. Cases not falling within the categories set out in paragraph 1 will be dealt with as a
Minor Offence Docket in accordance with Part II of this Order.
Comment [U102]: Align left, decrease
Officers responsible for the preparation of Case Files space, this is a subheading

3. Case Files shall be prepared by O/C. Stations or by such other officer as may be
detailed by Regional Commanders or O/C. Districts.
Comment [U103]: Align left, decrease
Preparation of Case File Jackets (PF. 2C) space, this is a subheading

4. (a) Each officer who is responsible for the preparation of a Case File shall
ensure that every File Jacket is correctly filled in, numbered and
registered in the Station Investigations Register (PF. 221).

(b) All relevant details required on the Case File Jacket shall be neatly and
correctly recorded after verification of all the information available.
Whenever there is any doubt, the record shall be entered in soft pencil
and completed in ink when the facts have been verified. This will apply
particularly in cases where there is some doubt at the outset as to the
correct offences and Section of the law.
Comment [U104]: Align left, decrease
Registering of Case Files space, this is a subheading

5. Every Police Station will maintain an Investigations Register (PF. 221) in

accordance with P.G.O. No. 281. All Case Files, Minor Offence Dockets and
Traffic Files will be entered in this Register by the officers responsible for their
preparation. The final disposal of each case will be shown in the last Column of
the Register by the following letter(s) :- Comment [U105]: INCREASE SPACE

Comment [U106]: INCREASE FONT SIZE.

C - Convicted. TO BE REST OF THE TEXT
A - Acquitted.
U - Undetected.
T - Transferred to another Police Station.
NFA - No further Action (i.e. refused).
NOD - No Offence Disclosed.
D - Discharged under Section 38, Penal Code.
OD - Other Discharges.

641
 P.G.O. No. 286
Comment [U107]: Align left, decrease
Numbering of Case Files space for the subheading

6. Every report which necessitates the opening of a Case File, Minor Offence Docket
or Traffic File will be allocated a running investigation serial number in Column 15
of the Report Book, in accordance with para 19(g) of P.G.O. 309. These
Investigation Serial Numbers will also be the permanent reference number of the
Case Files, Minor Offence Dockets and Traffic Files opened in connection with the
reports to which the Investigation Serial Number refer. These Investigation Serial
Numbers will be entered in the first Column of the Investigation Register (PF.
169). Case File numbers will be prefixed by the Police Station code letters,
followed by an oblique stroke, the letters “CF” and another oblique stroke. An
oblique and the last two figures of the year will follow the number, (e.g.
DC/CF/1/04 = Case File No. 1 of 2004 of Central Police Station, Dar es Salaam).
Comment [U108]: Align left, decrease
Contents of Case Files space below the subheading

7. The contents of each Case File shall be numbered in blue pencil and arranged in
order in the file by the officer responsible for its preparation, in accordance with
the following procedure :-

(a) On the right side of the Case File :-

(i) The First Information Report (PF. 162A) shall not be numbered.

(ii) Investigation Diary (PF. 2B) shall be numbered A, A1, etc and
placed next to the First Information Report; The investigation
diary shall remain permanently in the file.

(iii) The Statements of the Complainants (if any) shall be numbered

B, B1, etc and placed next to the Investigation diary.

(iv) The Sstatement of the Witnesses shall be numbered (as far as

possible in chronological order) C, C1 etc and placed as folios C’
CI etc next to the statements of the Complainants.

(v) The Statement(s) of the Accused shall be numbered D, D1 etc.,

and placed next to the witness’s statements.

(vi) Documents and Plans including medical reports, post-mortem

reports, Criminal Record Certificates, etc., shall be numbered E,
E1 etc. and placed next to the statement(s) of the accused.

(vii) Exhibits kept under lock and key shall not be numbered, but shall
be recorded in the Case File index sheet.

(viii) Documentary Exhibits which need not be kept under lock and
key in accordance with P.G.O. No. 228 and can be conveniently
included in the Case File, (i.e., documents, etc.) shall be
numbered F, F1 etc., and placed next to the documents and plans.

(ix) The Charge Sheet duplicate copy (if any) shall be numbered G
etc and placed next to the exhibits.

(x) Miscellaneous Correspondence and Telegrams, etc., shall be

642
 P.G.O. No. 286
numbered H, H1 etc., and placed next to the Charge Sheet.

(xi) An Index Sheet listing all folios contained in the right hand side
of the Case File shall be placed (and remain permanently) on top
of the last folio, but shall not be numbered. If additional folios
are added subsequently to the file, the index sheet will be moved
so that it is still on top of the last folio on the right hand side of
the Case File.

(xii) The Covering Report will be placed (and remain permanently) on

top of the index sheet and shall not be numbered. It will always
remain in this position, immediately opposite the minute sheet
for easy reference by officers examining the Case File.

(b) On the left side of the Case File :-

The Minute Sheet only will be placed on the left hand side of the
Case File.
Comment [U109]: Align left, this is
Preparation of Case File documents subheading.decrease space with sentence
below
8. The various documents referred to in the previous paragraph 7 shall be prepared in
the following manner :-

(a) The First Information Report (PF. 162A):

The First Information Report shall be prepared and used in accordance

with P.G.O. No. 311.

(b) Statements:

All statements shall be recorded on Form PF.2B in accordance with P.G.O.

No. 236.

(c) Documents and Plans:

Documents and plans shall be Field in separate envelopes and the contents
listed on the envelope.

(d) Charge sheet:

Charge Sheets shall be prepared in accordance with P.G.O. No. 227.

(e) The Investigation Diary (PF. 2B):

Every officer who is in any way connected with the investigation shall record in the
Investigation Diary a concise, accurate and up-to-date record of all action taken by
him in connection with the investigation, including inter alia a record of telephone
calls, visits, correspondence, interviews, interrogations, etc.

(f) Covering Report:

The officer responsible for each Case File shall draw up a covering report,
presenting in chronological order the history of the case and of the investigation,
and summarising the evidence collected during the investigation. The covering
report may be long or short, depending on the gravity and complexity of the case

643
 P.G.O. No. 286
(or incident) and shall provide a clear, concise, accurate account of the whole case
or incident. Each covering report shall be inserted on top of the Investigation Diary
on the right hand side of the Case File.

(g) The Minute Sheet:

The instructions and comments of the officer to whom completed Case Files are
submitted by investigating officers shall be recorded on the minute sheet, together
with any recommendations for consideration by higher authority. The minute sheet
shall always be attached to the left hand side of the Case File.
Comment [U110]: Cemtre this
Submission and Examination of Case Files
Comment [U111]: reduce space, align left,
Preliminary examination this is a subheading

9. (a) Except in Stations commanded by N.C.Os who are themselves responsible

for the preparation of all Case Files, every Case File shall be submitted
within forty eight hours of opening for preliminary examination to either :-

(i) the O/C. District, if the File originates in the Station in which the
O/C. District has his Headquarters; or

(ii) the O/C. Station, in Stations where the O/C. District is not
immediately available.

(b) Gazetted Officers and Inspectors who carry out the preliminary
examination referred to above shall in every case, direct on the Case File
minute sheet what further action should be taken and when the Case File is
to be re-submitted to them for further examination.

(c) Unnecessary delays in the preliminary examination of Case Files shall be

avoided. Officers responsible for this duty must ensure that another
experienced officer deputies for them if they are liable to be absent from
their Stations for any length of time.
Comment [U112]: reduce space, and slign
Examination on completion left, this is subheading

10. Except as set out in para 13, or when Court action is already pending, every Case
File shall be submitted to the O/C. District for examination by him not later than
one month after opening (or earlier if possible), with one of the following entries
made therein, either:-

(a) the result of the case if Court action has concluded; or

(b) a report (on the Case File Minute Sheet) covering the progress of the
investigation, is still unsuccessful, if there still appears to be a reasonable
chance of success; or

(c) a recommendation (on the minute sheet with full supporting reasons) that
the Case File should be closed because inquiries appear to be at a dead end
with no further chance of success.

11. The O/C. District shall examine all Case Files submitted to him and will either:-

(a) file each completed Case File at his District Headquarters if Court action

644
 P.G.O. No. 286
has concluded after ensuring that all exhibits have been correctly
disposed of and that all C.R.O. slips have been returned to the
Identification Bureau; or

(b) ensure that Case Files to be sent for Preliminary Inquiry are submitted to
the Regional C.I.D. Officer for perusal and advice as soon as the
investigation is completed and, on the conclusion of any committal
proceedings submit the Case File, without delay, and in no case later than
forty eight hours after the date of committal, to the Director of Criminal
Investigation for onward transmission to the Director of Public
Prosecutions through State Attorney in charge of Zones; or

(c) order further inquiries if he considers further investigation necessary and

shall in every case direct when the Case File is to be sent back to him for
ex-examination; or

(d) submit the Case File to Regional Headquarters if he requires advice from
his Regional Commander or Regional C.I.D. Officer and cannot obtain
such advice by telephone or signal (this sub-paragraph does not refer to
application for state Attorney’s advice. The procedure for this is set out
in para. 13(b)); or

(e) order the Case File to be closed if no further useful action appears
possible and the case does not fall within the categories of offences set
out in paragraph 11 (f); or

(f) submit each unsolved Case File dealing with any of the categories of
crime listed hereunder to Regional Headquarters not later than two
months after opening and request directions or further action or authority
to close the case if no further useful action appears possible :- Comment [U113]: reduce this space,
second proof shows big space below

(i) Offences against the State.

(ii) Murder and other culpable homicides.

(iii) Riots unlawful assemblies and serious affrays.

(iv) Unnatural offences involving different races.

(v) Discharge of firearms by police

(vi) All offences in which firearms, explosives or acid

have been used.

(vii) Corruption.

(viii) All types of robbery.

(ix) Counterfeiting.

(x) Serious forgeries.

(xi) Theft or loss of Government money or property.

645
 P.G.O. No. 286
(xii) Escapes or rescues from lawful custody.

(xiii) All cases of sudden or unnatural death, other than

those the facts of which show without doubt that no
offence has been committed.

(xiv) Rape, in which more than one race or juveniles are

concerned.

(xv) Sabotage.

(xvi) Serious assaults on members of the Police Force.All

such Case Files may only be closed on the written
instructions of the Regional C.I.D. Officer who, in
cases of doubt, will forward the file to the Director
of Criminal Investigation.
Comment [U114]: align left, this is sub
Subsequent handling of important unsolved Case Files heading, reduce space below

12. (a) All important unsolved Case Files must be sent within two months to
Regional Headquarters in accordance with paragraph 11 9F). All such
files will be examined by the Regional Commander (or by the Regional
C.I.D. Officer acting on his behalf), who shall direct what further action
should be taken. The Case File shall be re-submitted to Regional
Headquarters at monthly intervals thereafter until either successful results
are achieved or the Regional Commander directs that the case may be
closed.

(b) The final disposal of all closed Case Files shall be in accordance with
paragraph 14.
Comment [U115]: align left, this is sub
Exceptional cases heading, reduce space below

13. If legal advice is necessary, the Case File shall be sent, without delay, via the
Regional C.I.D. Officer to the representative of the Director of Public
Prosecutions, excepting only cases (including traffic cases) in which prosecution
of a Police Officer is contemplated. All such Case Files shall be sent via Regional
Commanders to the Director of Criminal Investigation who shall submit them to
the Inspector General;
Comment [U116]: align left, this is sub
Custody and disposal of Case Files heading, reduce space below

14. Convicted and closed Case Files will be dealt with as follows :-

(a) Murder and Treason

Comment [U117]: (i) and (ii), aling more to
(i) Convicted cases. Case Files will be forwarded to C.I.D. the left. they are sub para’
Headquarters for storage in January each year.

(ii) Unconvicted cases. Case Files will be retained by the Regional

C.I.D. Officer for one year from the date of closing. During this
period he shall examine the file every six months with a view to
ascertaining whether any further lines of inquiry will prove of
value. After one year, the file will be forwarded to C.I.D.

646
 P.G.O. No. 286
Headquarters, Dar es Salaam, for storage.

(b) Offences punishable with 7 years or more (excluding murder and

treason) Comment [U118]: This is subheading; bold
it and align to the left
(i) Convicted cases. Case Files will be sent to District
Headquarters and retained there for one year and will then be
destroyed by fire by the O/C. District.

(ii) Unconvicted cases. Case Files shall be retained by the

originating Police Station for one year from the date of closing
and shall be examined at regular intervals by the Regional
C.I.D. Officer and O/C. District. After one year the files will be
retained for a further year. During this period he will examine
the file at six-monthly intervals, He will then forward the file to
C.I.D. Headquarters, provided that he considers that no
further action in the case is possible. The file will be stored in
C.I.D. Headquarters for five years after closing and will then be
destroyed by fire.
Comment [U119]: sub heading, align to
(c) Offences punishable with less than 7 years imprisonment the left and bold, reduce spae for below

(i) Convicted cases. Case Files will be sent to District

Headquarters and retained there for one year and will then be
destroyed by fire by the O/C. District.

(ii) Unconvicted cases. Case Files will be dealt with in the manner
laid down in Para. 14 (b) (ii), with the exception that files will
be stored in C.I.D. Headquarters for three years after closing
and will then be destroyed by fire.
Comment [U120]: This is subheading; bold
(d) Offences punishable with less than 3 years imprisonment it and align to the left

(i) Convicted cases. Case Files will be sent to District

Headquarters and retained there for one year and will then be
destroyed by fire by the O/C. District.

(ii) Unconvicted cases. Case Files will be retained by the

originating station for one year from the date of closing and will
then be destroyed by fire by the O/C. District.

Part I

Minor Offence Dockets

15. (a) Every offence which is not the subject of a Case File in accordance with
Part I of this Order shall be dealt with as a Minor Offence Docket.

(b) If no supporting statements or case papers are necessary to the successful

prosecution of the case, the investigation officer will record details of the
investigation in the relevant space on the First Information Report Form
(PF. 162A) and the form shall be taken to the Court by the Prosecuting
Officer.

647
 P.G.O. No. 286
(c) If supporting case papers are necessary, they shall be placed inside the
First Information Report Form (PF. 162A) which shall be folded down
the centre and converted into a file jacket.
Comment [U121]: Sub heading, align left
Officers responsible for the preparation of Dockets and reduce space

16. Minor Offence Dockets shall be prepared by O/C. Stations or such other officers as
may be detailed by Regional Commanders or O/C. Districts.
Comment [U122]: Sub heading, align left
Preparation of dockets and reduce space

17. (a) Each officer who is responsible for the preparation of a Minor Offence
Dockets shall ensure that every docket is correctly filled in, numbered
and registered in the Station Investigations Register (PF. 221).

(b) All relevant details required on the Minor Offence Docket shall be neatly
and correctly recorded after verification of all the information available.
Whenever there is any doubt, the record shall be entered in soft pencil
and completed in ink when the facts have been verified. This will apply
particularly in cases where there is some doubt at the outset as to the
correct offence and Section of the law.
Comment [U123]: Sub heading, align left
Registering Minor Offence Dockets and reduce space

18. All minor offence dockets will be entered in the Station Investigations Register in
accordance with the procedure laid down in Para. 5 of this order.
Comment [U124]: Sub heading, align left
Numbering of Minor Offence Dockets and reduce space

19. All Minor Offence dockets will be numbered in accordance with the procedure laid
down in Para. 6 of this order, except that each Minor Offence Docket Number will
be prefixed by the letters “DK” (e.g., DC/DK/2/04= Minor Offence Docket No. 2 of
2004 of Central Police Station, Dar es Salaam.
Comment [U125]: Sub heading, align left
Contents of docket and reduce space

20. The contents (if any) of each docket shall be neatly prepared and Field in such a
manner that the case can be easily understood and presented in Court without
difficulty.
Comment [U126]: Sub heading, align left
Submission and examination of Dockets and reduce space

21. (a) Except in minor Stations commanded by N.C.Os who are themselves
responsible for the preparation of all Minor Offence Dockets, every docket
shall be submitted within forty eight hours to the O/C. Station, or other
officer authorised to act on his behalf, unless required for prosecution.

(b) The officer who carries out the examination referred to above shall, in every
case, direct on the docket or minute sheet what further action should be
taken and when the docket is to be re-submitted for further examination.

(c) Unnecessary delays in the examination of dockets shall be avoided. O/C.

Stations responsible for this duty must ensure that another officer or
inspector deputises for them if they are liable to be absent from their station
for any length of time.

648
 P.G.O. No. 286
Comment [U127]: Sub heading, align left
Examination on completion and reduce space

22. Every docket shall be submitted to the O/C. Station for examination by him not later
than seven days after opening (or earlier, if possible) with one of the following
entries made therein:-
Comment [U128]: Before (a) insert word
(a) the result of the case if Court action has concluded; …”either”…..
Comment [U129]: Before (b) insert word
(b) a brief report covering the progress of investigation if still unsuccessful …”or”
provided there still appears to be a reasonable chance of success; or
Comment [U130]: Before (c) insert word
(c) a recommendation that the docket should be closed because inquiries …”or”
appear to be at a dead end with no further chance of success.
Comment [U131]: Reduce space, the
(d) The O/C. Station shall examine all dockets submitted to him and will: second proof shows space

either (i) order further inquiries;

or (ii) direct that the case should be closed if he is satisfied that no

further useful police action is possible.
Comment [U132]: Sub heading, align left
Custody and disposal of Minor Offence Dockets and reduce space

23. All Minor Offence Dockets on which action is completed will be retained by the
originating station for at least three months and will then be destroyed by fire on
the instructions of the O/C. District in January of each year.

649
 P.G.O. No. 287
CHARGE ROOMS - OPERATION OF Comment [U133]: New PGO, align right
and bold. Increase space below and above
General rules heading
Comment [U134]: Decrease space below.
1. A Charge Room shall be maintained in every Police Station. Align left. This is a subheading.

2. (a) Class “A” and “B” Station Charge Rooms shall be kept open and manned
day and night on a permanent basis.

(b) Class “C” Station Charge Rooms may be closed down at night if so
authorized by a Regional Commander in Station Standing Orders,
provided that a constable shall always be on duty in the Charge Room to
answer emergency night calls and to guard prisoners who are not already
guarded in accordance with Para. 9 (c) (ii). Members of the Force on this
duty may be permitted to sleep in the Charge Room if, and only if, there
are no prisoners in the cells.

3. Charge Rooms shall be clean and tidy at all times. Furniture shall be neatly arranged
and restricted to an efficiently minimum quantity. Books and disused records, etc.,
may not be stored in Charge Rooms.

4. Smoking in the Charge Room is forbidden.

5. Only officers on duty or with official business may enter the Charge Room.

6. Officers who have business in the Charge Room shall leave it as soon as their
business is terminated.
Comment [U135]: Reduce space, align left,
Charge Room Officers this is subheading

7. Every charge room shall be manned by a Charge Room Officer (C.R.O.) who shall
be in command of the Charge room and directly responsible to the O/C. Station for
the efficient discharge of all Charge Room duties and responsibilities. All ranks
using the Charge Room shall be subject to the orders of the Charge Rooms Officer.

8. Charge Room Officers are required to carry out work of considerable responsibility.
Only Staff Sergeants and above or English – speaking N.C.O.s should normally be
employed on this duty during each day in Class “A” and “B” Stations.

9. The following officers only will be employed on full-time Charge Room duties :-
Comment [U136]: Reduce space with
(a) Class “A” Stations below, subheading

(i) One Charge Room Officer.

(ii) A maximum of two constables as assistants to the Charge Room

Officer.

(iii) One constable on cell duty if the cells are occupied.

Comment [U137]:
(b) Class “B” Stations
Comment [U138R137]:
(i) One Charge Room Officer

(ii) One constable on cell duty if the cells are occupied

650
 P.G.O. No. 287
Comment [U139]: Reduce space with
(c) Class “C” Stations below, subheading

(i) One Charge Room Officer

(ii) One constable on cell duty if prisoners are detained in cells in the
Lines, (i.e. not in or immediately adjacent to the Police Station). Comment [U140]: Reduce space with
below.
10. Charge Room Officers are required to comply with the provisions of all Police
General Orders which specifically affect them and shall, in particular :-

(a) record all reports in the Report Book in accordance with P.G.O. No. 309;

(b) ensure that immediate action is taken by the appropriate officer to deal with
each report received in the Charge Room;

(c) deal with all messages received by the Charge Room and report same to the
appropriate officer so that necessary action can be taken without undue
delay;

(d) maintain the Station Diary in accordance with P.G.O. No. 284;

(e) maintain all other official Charge Room books and records in accordance
with Police General Orders;

(f) hold the keys of the cells and supervise the detention of all prisoners therein
in accordance with P.G.O. No. 353;

(g) pay particular attention to the security of Station armouries and to the arms
and ammunition contained therein in accordance with P.G.O. No. 152;

(h) issue such arms and ammunition from the Station Armoury as may be
authorized by the O/C. Station;

(i) ensure that all arms issued from the Station Armoury are properly returned
without delay;

(j) check all beat and other duties when they parade outside the Charge Room
at the beginning and end of their duty periods and report any irregularities to
the O/C. Station;

(k) take charge of all prisoners’ property, exhibits, lost and found property and
any other property handed in to the Charge Room until such time as the
O/C. Station assumes responsibility therefore; and

(l) generally ensure that proper discipline is maintained in the Charge Room
and that no breach of Police General Orders or Station Standing Orders
occurs therein. Comment [U141]: Increase space for
consistency with other text
Handing over Charge Room duty Comment [U142]: This is subheading, bold
and align left, reduce space with below
11. Charge Room Officers shall normally remain on duty for eight hours. They shall not
leave the Charge Room at the end of their duty period unless and until they have
handed over full responsibility to their reliefs.

12. Each relieving Charge Room Officer, as soon as he arrives on duty and before the

651
 P.G.O. No. 287
outgoing Charge Room Officer leaves the Charge Room, shall at once :-

(a) check all prisoners in the cells and make sure that all are accounted for, in
accordance with Para. 13 (a) of P.G.O. No. 353;

(b) check the working armoury together with all arms and ammunition
contained therein, in accordance with Para. 11 (a) of P.G.O. No. 152;

(c) check all prisoners’ property, exhibits, lost and found property and any
other property which has been received in the Charge Room and not yet
handed over to the O/C. Station;

(d) check the accuracy of the Charge Room clock and make sure that the
telephone is in working order;

(e) check every thing else for which he is held responsible under Police
General Orders.

When he is satisfied that all is in order, he will make an entry to that effect in the
Station Diary and will then assume responsibility for the Charge Room, armoury,
prisoners, etc. The outgoing Charge Room Officer may then go off duty.

13. If a relieving Charge Room Officer is not satisfied that all is in order, he shall refuse
to accept responsibility for the Charge Room and shall at once report to the O/C.
Station. Both the relieving and outgoing Charge Room Officers shall then remain in
the Charge Room until the O/C. Station completes his investigation and directs that
the hand-over should proceed

652
 P.G.O. No. 288
DUTIES -HOURS OF - FOR RANK & FILE Comment [U143]: New PGO. Align right,
bold. Increase space above and below
General Standards heading
Comment [U144]: Subheading, reduce
1. Every Police Officer shall be liable for duty at any time and shall perform whatever space and align left
period of duty is ordered, irrespective of the duration of such duty.

2. (a) Every member of the Rank & File shall normally be required to perform 8
hours of duty in each 24 hours period. Drill parades and lectures will count
as duty.

(b) In addition, Commanding Officers shall provide, by Standing Orders, for a

suitable number of off-duty members of the Force in every Station and Unit
to stand by in the Lines in case of emergency.

3. Without prejudice to paragraph 1, certain specific duties shall normally be carried

out, as follows :-

(a) Beat Duty – 6 hours continuous.

(b) Static Guards – 8 hours split duty. Sentries will not remain on duty for more
than 2 hours at any one time.

(c) Short Patrols – 6 hours continuous.

(d) Charge Room Duty in Class “A” and Class “C” Stations - 8 hours
continuous.

(e) Charge Room Duty in Class “C” Stations - 12 hours continuous (0600
hours to 1800 hours) unless varied by Station Standing Orders to suit local
conditions.

4. O/C. Stations shall arrange for Charge Room Officers to be relieved during meal-
times and may permit officers on night duty in Class “C” Stations to sleep between
2200 and 0600 hours if the premises are reasonably secure. This will be the subject of
local Standing Orders.

5. Long Distance Patrols shall be carried out as ordered with no set period of daily duty.

6. Routine 8-hour duty periods shall commence at 0001 hours, 0800 hours and 1600
hours, 6-hour periods shall commence at 0001 hours, 0600 hours, 1200 hours and
1800 hours. Only members of the Force on special or emergency duty shall be sent
out at other times.
Comment [U145]: Reduce space this is a
Duties by Women Police subheading

7. Police Women shall perform those duties normally required of a Police Officer with
the following exception:-
(a) Night shift, except when called out or retained on duty for a specific
purpose;
(b) After-dark street patrol, except when under protective cover;
(c) Anti-riot or other duty where undue violence may arise; except when
connected with women or children;
(d) Whole-time clerical or sedentary duties.
8. Police Women, when available, should be required to perform the following duties:-

653
 P.G.O. No. 288
(a) Searching of females and their apartments;
(b) Escort of females;
(c) Supervision of females in police custody, including visits to them in cells;
(d) Interviewing female complaints in sexual offences;
(e) Interviewing children, e.g., lost children, children found begging or
committing other offences;
(f) Duties at school crossing and instruction of schoolchildren in elementary
road safety; and
(g) In the case of female Prison staff and, subject to availability; to be present in
Court when female accused are prosecuted or when females are called to
give evidence.
9. Police Women should normally perform all duties in uniform, but may perform
specified duties in plain clothes at the discretion of the O/C District or District C.I.D.

654
 P.G.O. No. 289
DUTIES – PARADE OF Comment [U146]: New PGO. Align left and
bold. Increase space
1. All members of the Rank & File who are about to go out on duty shall first be
paraded for inspection by the officer on Charge Room duty. In special cases,
Commanding Officers may arrange for these inspections to be carried out in the
Lines by the senior N.C.O.

2. The officer on Charge Room duty or senior N.C.O. (or O/C. Station or Unit if he so
desires) shall then inspect the duties after calling them to attention. He shall then :- Comment [U147]: Reduce space

(a) inspect each member of the Force and make sure that he is clean and well
turned out; any offender shall be defaulted;

(b) inspect all arms and ammunition and ensure that they are carried in
compliance with current Orders;

(c) check that each member of the Force has his notebook and conference
book;

(d) give out any special instructions re wanted persons, stolen property, etc.,
or any particular information which should be passed to members of the
Force on beat duty; and

(e) details each member of the Force to his particular duty, as laid down in the
Duty Book, and make sure that each member of the Force understands
what is required of him.

655
 P.G.O. No. 290
ESCORTS-SPECIE, EXPLOSIVES, FORCE ARMS &
AMMUNITION Comment [U148]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space below and above
Escorts for specie heading
Comment [U149]: Subheading, align left
1. An escort will always be provided for a consignment of specie on request. When air and reduce space
or water transport is used, the consignment will be escorted to the aircraft or ship
and handed over to the captain. It will be met also on arrival and escorted to its final
destination. No charge will be made for specie escorts.
Comment [U150]: Subheading, align left
Escorts for explosives and reduce space

2. An escort will be provided for explosives on the following occasions :-

(a) All bulk imports dispatched up-country by rail

(b) Bulk issues (100 cases or more) from Dodoma magazine.

Comment [U151]: Subheading, align left
Escorts for arms and ammunition and reduce space

3. Force arms and ammunition will always be escorted when in transit. Under no
circumstances will issues from, or withdrawal by Main Stores be effected without
an escort. This also applies to inter-unit transfers.
Comment [U152]: Subheading, align left
Strength of escort and reduce space

4. (a) The strength of any escort is the responsibility of the officer detailing it.
He should take into account :-

(i) the size of the consignment;

(ii) the route;

(iii) number of days spent on the journey;

(iv) type of transport; and

(v) reliefs.

(b) Manpower shall not be wasted on routine escort duty and, whenever
possible, use should be made of officers proceeding along the escort
route on leave, transfer or normal patrol duty.
Comment [U153]: Subheading, align left
Rationing of escorts and reduce space

5. The officer detailing the escort will ensure that the latter are in possession of
sufficient rations, or cash in lieu, to last them until their return to their Unit.
Comment [U154]: Subheading, align left
Instructions to escorts and reduce space

6. A Movement Order (PF. 58) will be completed by the officer detailing the escort
and the following instructions and information shall be specifically included :-

(a) All containers must be sealed before they are taken over by the escort
from the consignor or issuing officer.

656
 P.G.O. No. 290
(b) Only the number of containers will be signed for by the escort. The
detailed contents are not their responsibility.

(c) In the case of arms, the body numbers must be shown on the
Movement Order and will be signed for by the escort.

(d) Before the escort can stand down, a receipt for the intact delivery of
the consignment must be obtained from the consignee or receiving
officer.

(e) Action to be taken to safeguard consignment en route, especially by

night.

(f) The action to be taken in the event of a breakdown of transport.

(g) The name of the consignee or receiving officer.

(h) Details of arms to be carried by escort and when they may be used to
protect consignment. When considered necessary, magazines will be
charged with five rounds. The bolt will remain closed and no round
will be placed in the breech chamber. Safety catches will be applied.
In the case of officers armed with revolvers, five rounds will be loaded
in the cylinder. The chamber under the hammer will not be loaded in
the 12 o’clock position. The balance of seven rounds will be retained
in the pouch.

(i) System of relief on long journeys – rest periods.

Comment [U155]: Subheading, align left
Detailing of escorts and reduce space

7. (a) The O/C. District to whom the application for an escort is made will
normally be responsible for detailing the escort. He should consult his
Regional Commander if he does not have sufficient members of the
Force available.

(b) In the case of bulk transhipment of explosives ex Dar es Salaam Port,

the O/C. Railways & Dar es Salaam Zone Police will be responsible
for the provision of escorts.

657
 P.G.O. No. 291
GUARDS ON GOVERNMENT OFFICES Comment [U156]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. Police guards shall be provided for those Government offices which definitely heading
need to be guarded. Regional Commanders are responsible for deciding, in
agreement with their Regional Commissioners, which Government offices require
guards and how they shall be guarded. Care shall be taken to avoid wasting
valuable manpower on unnecessary guards.

2. Regional Commanders will ensure that suitable Standing Orders are issued in all
Stations which are required to provide regular guards on Government offices.

3. Guards on Government offices will normally be armed with a rifle and five rounds,
in accordance with P.G.O. No. 274.

4. Guards shall remain alert throughout their period of duty and shall not sit or lie
down unless specifically permitted to do so in Station Standing Orders (during the
night, etc).

5. When a guard comes on duty, he shall examine the premises, windows, safes and
anything else entrusted to his care and shall not permit the guard (if any) he is
relieving to go off duty until he has satisfied himself that all is in order.

6. Under no circumstances shall any guard leave his post until he is relieved. Guards
shall always report to the nearest Charge Room when they go off duty and an entry
shall be made in the Occurrence Book.

7. Officers on patrol will check guards on Government buildings to ensure that they
comply with the provisions of this order and any relevant station Standing Orders.

658
 P.G.O. No. 292
INFORMATION-COMMUNICATION OF
1. All information communicated to, or in the possession of, the police is to be
regarded as confidential. All ranks (including civilian staff) are forbidden to copy,
précis, or extract from official documents or any portion thereof for their private
use or for the use of any other persons, including the press, without official
sanction. This prohibition shall also apply to information received verbally or by
telephone or radio.

2. Section 4 and 5 of the National Security Act, Cap.47 R.E. 2002 reads as follows ;

Section 4 - Communication of certain information

(1) “Any person who has in his possession or under his control any code,
password, sketch, plan, model, note or other document, article or information,
which relates to or is used in a protected place or anything in such a place, or
which has been made or obtained in contravention of this Act, or which has
been entrusted in confidence to him by any person holding a public office, or
which he has obtained or to which he has had access owing to his position as
a person who holds or has held such office or as a person who is or was a
party to a contract with the Government or a specified authority or a contract
the performance of which in whole or in part is carried out in or in relation to
a protected place, or as a person who is or has been employed by or under a
person who holds or has held such an office or is or was a party to such a
contract, and who:–

(a) uses the same in any manner or for any purpose prejudicial to the
safety or interests of the United Republic; or

(b) communicates the same to any person other than a person to

whom he is authorised to communicate it or to whom it is in the
interests of the United Republic his duty to communicate it; or

(c) fails to take proper care of, or so conducts himself as to endanger

the safety of, the same; or

(d) retains the sketch, plan, model, note, document or article in his
possession or under his control when he has no right or when it is
contrary to his duty so to do, or fails to comply with any lawful
directions with regard to the return or disposal thereof,

shall be guilty of an offence and liable on conviction to imprisonment for a

term not exceeding twenty years.

(2) Any person who has in his possession or under his control any sketch,
plan, model, note or other document, article or information, relating to
munitions of war and who communicates it directly or indirectly to any
person in any manner for any purpose prejudicial to the safety or interests of
the United Republic shall be guilty of an offence and liable on conviction to
imprisonment for a term not exceeding twenty years.

(3) Any person who receives any code, password, sketch, plan, model, note or
other document, article or information, knowing or having reasonable
grounds to believe at the time when he receives it that the same is
communicated to him in contravention of the provisions of this Act, shall,

659
 P.G.O. No. 292
unless he proves that the communication thereof to him was against his wish,
be guilty of an offence and liable on conviction to imprisonment for a term
not exceeding twenty years.

(4) Any person who communicates to any person other than a person to
whom he is authorised by an authorised officer to communicate it or to whom
it is in the interests of the United Republic his duty to communicate it, any
information relating to the defence or security of the United Republic shall be
guilty of an offence and liable on conviction to imprisonment for a term not
exceeding twenty years.

(5) For the purposes of Subsection (4) "information relating to the defence or
security of the United Republic" includes information relating to the
movements or locations of the Defence Forces or the Police Force, the steps
taken to protect any vital installations or protected places, and the acquisition
or disposal of munitions of war”.

Section 5 - Protection of classified information.

(1) “Any person who communicates any classified matter or causes the
leakage of such classified matter to any person other than a person to whom
he is authorised to communicate it or to whom it is in the interests of the
United Republic his duty to communicate it shall be guilty of an offence and
liable on conviction to imprisonment for a term not exceeding twenty years”.

(2) In a prosecution for a contravention of Subsection (1) it shall be no

defence for the accused person to prove that when he communicated the
matter he did not know and could not reasonably have known that it was
classified matter.

3. Every Police Officer must clearly understand that the provisions of the above
Section also apply to him when he has left the service and that he will be subject to
the penalties provided in the Act if he wrongly communicates information whether
he is still in the Force or not.

4. Under no circumstances may Police Officers make any public statement, whether
verbal or in writing, concerning political matters, either inside or outside Tanzania
, or concerning the policy and affairs of the Police Force or the Government. The
attention of all ranks is drawn to the provisions of Government General Orders Q.
35 and 36 :-

“No officer may write or give broadcast talks on questions which can properly be
called political or administrative, though he may furnish signed articles upon other
subjects of general interest. These restrictions apply also to officers’ families”.

“No officer, whether on duty or on leave of absence, is to allow him to be

interviewed on questions of public policy, or on matters affecting the defences and
military resources of Tanzania”.

5. The contents of Police Orders and Instructions and confidential information

covering raids, seizures, the extent and progress of investigations and similar
matters shall not be passed to the Press or to the public.

Communications from Official records

660
 P.G.O. No. 292
6. No person outside the Force shall be shown official documents, registers or records
without the sanction of a commanding Officer. Police Files shall not be passed to
outside departments. Case Files may be passed to the Director of Public
Prosecutions in conformity with P.G.O. No. 286. Copies of accused’s and
witnesses’ statements may only be handed to the accused or his/her advocate in
conformity with P.G.O. No. 245.

Communications to the Press and broadcasting officials

7. Information concerning the occurrence of ordinary crimes, disasters, fires and

similar incidents of a public nature may be communicated to accredited members
of the Press and /or broadcasting officials by Gazetted Officers and Inspectors in
Stations where no Gazetted Officer is available. Such information shall be limited
to a concise statement of the facts covering the following points :-

(a) Nature of occurrence – theft, rape, murder or other crime, vehicle

accident, sudden death, fire, etc.

(b) Place and time of occurrence.

(c) Arrests, if any. No names to be given but the number of persons arrested
and whether European, Asian or African, male or female, adult or
juvenile, may be stated.

(d) Names and addresses and fate of persons involved, for example persons
killed, injured, taken to hospital, etc. (see also note under (e) (ii) below).

(e) Name of complainants except :-

(i) in cases of rape and sexual offences;

(ii) when the complainant specifically requests that his or her name
should not be divulged.

NOTE: Police accept the obligation to give first information to next of kin in cases
of death and serious injury and names and addresses of deceased persons should
not be given to the press until this has been done. Next of kin who cannot be
contacted by direct means should be informed by telegram or telephone via the
District nearest their address. A reasonable period should be allowed for the
message to reach its final destination before the names and addresses of the
deceased are passed to the Press, bearing in mind that the information cannot be
published until the next day’s newspapers and radio news broadcast. It is
unnecessary to delay press releases until confirmation has been received that the
next of kin have received the information.

8. Accredited press representatives at the scene of an incident shall be allowed

reasonable facilities to obtain information for themselves. They are required to
obey the orders of the police on duty and shall only pass inside police cordons with
the consent of the senior Police Officer present. Junior officers shall not engage in
argument with Press representatives but shall refer them without unnecessary
comment to the senior Police Officer present at the scene. Comment [U157]: Check spacing of this
para. Second proof not proper. Not
consistent with rest of text
Report on accidents
Comment [U158]: Subheading, bold, align
left and reduce space

661
 P.G.O. No. 292
9. Applications for information concerning road accidents received from insurance
companies or their properly authorised legal representatives shall be dealt with by
the Gazetted Traffic Officers and O/C. District as follows :-
Comment [U159]: Consistency of
(a) (i) In cases where no criminal offence is disclosed or where there numbering absent. Not aligned properly.
is insufficient evidence to institute proceedings, the applicant
may be supplied with the factual particulars of the case on P.F.
90 at a prescribed fee. Such reports can only be given if the
particulars are already in the possession of the police and
special inquiries to secure particulars will not be undertaken.

(ii) No responsibility will be accepted for the accuracy of the

names and addresses supplied to the police by the witnesses
and persons involved in accidents.

(iii) Postage on all letters shall be prepaid.

(b) If criminal proceedings are being instituted no information can be

disclosed except on the order of the Court in which the case is pending.
This shall also apply to inquest proceedings.
Comment [U160]: Subheading, bold, align
Reports on fire left and reduce space

10. Applications from insurance companies or from affected property owners for
information arising from fires will be dealt with in the same manner as for road
accidents set out in paragraph 9 above, except that the information will be set out
in the form of a letter. No fee will be paid.
Comment [U161]: Subheading, bold, align
Certificates re theft to insurance companies left and reduce space

11. (a) In accordance with the terms of certain insurance policies, it is

incumbent upon the insured person to report to the police the theft of
any property which is covered by a policy. In such cases, the person
concerned may ask for a certificate from the police that he has, in fact,
reported the theft.

(b) Applications of this nature will be dealt with by O/C. Districts. The
certificate issued in such cases will be set out in accordance with the
following pro forma :-

“I certify ....................... (name of complainant) reported to this station on

....................... (date) that the under-mentioned property has been stolen from him
:- (List property reported stolen)

(Signed) ...................................... O/C. District”.

NOTE: It must be clearly understood that this certificate is not evidence that the
report made to the police by the complainant is accepted by the police as genuine.

(c) A copy of the certificate shall be Field in the Case File or minor
Offence Docket.

12. Requests are sometimes received from insurance companies, solicitors and
interested parties for a copy of the statement made to the police by a person
insured with them. Statements made to the police are confidential documents and

662
 P.G.O. No. 292
the contents of these will not be disclosed nor may copies be supplied. There is,
however, no objection to the witness who made a statement being given a copy on
request.

663
 P.G.O. No. 293
INFORMATION – CORRECT CHANNELS OF Comment [U162]: New PGO. Bold the
numbering. Increase space above and
1. Every Police Officer is responsible that every item of criminal or security below the heading
information, however trivial, is passed on without delay to his immediate superior.

2. If any Police Officer, whether on or off duty, notices anything suspicious or

unusual, he shall record the facts in his notebook and, if possible, report at once by
telephone to his O/C. Station and ask instructions. If no telephone is available he
shall report as soon as possible to the nearest Police Station. This order in no way
limits a Police Officer from taking immediate action by arrest or investigation if he
considers that such action is necessary.

3. (a) As a general rule, everything of importance shall be reported as follows:-

(i) Every member of the Rank & File shall report to his O/C.
Stations, or next senior officer available if the O/C. Station is
absent

(ii) Every O/C. Station shall report to his O/C. District.

(iii) Every O/C. District shall report to his Regional Commander.

(iv) Every Regional Commander shall report to Police

Headquarters.

(b) Crime Intelligence Unit Officers stationed in Regional Headquarters’

shall report to the Officer in Charge Intelligence. Those stationed
elsewhere will report to the O/C. CID.

(c) Officer in charge Intelligence shall report everything of importance

direct to their Regional Crime Officers (in order that the latter may keep
their Regional Commanders informed.

4. Information shall be channelled without delay to those entitled to receive it. All
concerned must be kept fully informed of what is happening in the areas under
their control. Commanding Officers in particular shall ensure that Regional
Commissioners, District Commissioners and members of other Government
Departments are advised of all matters affecting them.

5. Any officer who withholds information or delays its transmission is liable to

severe punishment.

664
 P.G.O. No. 294
INFORMATION-RELEASE TO PRESS AND RADIO Comment [U163]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. The following officers ONLY are authorised to release information on police matters to heading
the Press:-

(a) The Inspector General On all matters affecting Force policy and
security.

(b) Director, Criminal Investigation Crime reports, wanted person notices and
appeals to the public in connection with crime,
accidents, etc.

(c) Chief of Public Relations Police Routine Press notices affecting the whole Force.
Headquarters

(d) Regional Commanders Routine Press notices affecting a particular

Region.

2. All Press and radio releases shall normally be typed or written. Verbal releases are only
permissible in emergency and shall always be confirmed, in writing, at the earliest
opportunity.

3. All releases shall be issued under the title (without signature) of the Inspector General of
Police. Individual titles and signatures are forbidden.

4. This Order shall be read in conjunction with P.G.O. No. 292. Under no circumstances
shall official police information be divulged to the media or to members of the public by
officers who are not authorised to do so

665
 P.G.O. No. 295
LICENSED PREMISES – AUCTIONEERS Comment [U164]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. Auctioneers, other than “itinerant auctioneers”, are required by Section 4 (1) of the heading
Auctioneers Act, Cap. 227, to obtain a license from the District Officer or Revenue
Officer of the district in which he resides or has or intends to establish as his
principal place of business.

2. An “itinerant auctioneer” means a person who is without any fixed place of business
and who satisfies the District Officer that he sells or offers for sale movable property
of native manufacture or not exceeding one hundred shillings in value.
Comment [U165]: Align left, reduce space,
Kinds of licence Subheading

3. Licences are of two kinds :-

(a) General – which authorize the licensee to carry on the business of an

auctioneer anywhere in Tanzania.

(b) Local – which authorise the licencee to carry on the business of an

auctioneer only within the district named in the licence
Comment [U166]: Align left, reduce space,
Form of licence Subheading

4. Licences shall be in one of the forms in the First Schedule to the Act. Annual
licences shall expire on the 30th day of June in each year and half yearly licences
shall expire on the 31st day of December or the 30th day of June next following the
date of issue.
Comment [U167]: Align left, reduce space,
Register of licenses issued Subheading

5. (a) The licencing authority shall keep a register of all persons to whom licences
are issued by him.

(b) O/C. Station will record the name and address of all licenced auctioneers
within his Station area in the Supervision of Licenced premises register (PF.
214), in accordance with P.G.O. No. 301. Every routine check made on an
auctioneer shall be recorded in this Register.
Comment [U168]: Align left, reduce space,
Restrictions on acceptance and sale of property Subheading

6. (a) Every licenced auctioneer, on the request of the owner, is obliged to accept
for sale, all property which he is not prohibited by law from selling, which
may be offered to him for sale in the town or at the place where he carries on
his business as an auctioneer. He cannot be required to sell the property with
which he has been entrusted sooner than seven days after he has accepted it
for sale, but having regard to the sale of other property with which he has
been entrusted, shall sell the property within such time as the owner may
require or as soon thereafter as is possible.

(b) An auctioneer may sell the property of more than one owner at the same
sale, provided that the goods are allotted consecutively and in such manner
that no owners’ goods may become mixed with the goods of any other
owner.

(c) An auctioneer’s licence shall not authorise the sale of intoxicating liquor or

666
 P.G.O. No. 295
of anything for the sale of which a license is required.
Comment [U169]: Align left, reduce space,
Display of licence Subheading

7. Every licenced auctioneer before the beginning of an auction and during the whole
time of such auction shall display in a conspicuous manner a ticket or board
containing his true and full name and residence, painted, printed or written in large
letters, publicly visible and legible.
Comment [U170]: Align left, reduce space,
Records to be kept by licenced auctioneers Subheading

8. Every auctioneer shall keep in his usual place of business, or if he has no such place,
in the place where he holds an auction, a record of all properties offered to him for
sale by auction during the period of his licence.
Comment [U171]: Align left, reduce space,
Duties of police to give information regarding property stolen etc. Subheading

9. (a) O/C. Stations receiving information of the loss, theft or fraudulent disposal
of any identifiable or valuable property, will obtain a full description of the
property and circulate it to all auctioneers in their station area. It is of the
utmost importance that dated lists of identifiable or valuable property should
be supplied to auctioneers as soon as possible after the theft, loss, etc., has
been reported.

(b) O/C. Stations are responsible that all licenced auctioneers within their
Station areas are visited as a matter of routine at least once per month. The
inspecting officer shall provide himself with recent lists of identifiable
property, stolen or lost, and shall check same against the articles entrusted to
the auctioneer for sale and against his books.
Comment [U172]: Align left, reduce space,
Auctioneers’ responsibility to police Subheading

10. (a) A licenced auctioneer shall permit a Police Officer to inspect any article
entrusted to him for sale and shall give all information in his possession in
regard to any article and shall disclose the name and address of the person
from whom he received the article.

(b) At any time during the holding of an auction, the auctioneer shall, if so
required by a Police Officer, produce his license for inspection.

(c) All records kept by an auctioneer shall be open to inspection by any Police
Officer not lower than the rank of Assistant Inspector.

667
 P.G.O. No. 296
LICENCED PREMISES – CINEMAS AND THEATRES Comment [U173]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. Cinemas, theatres and other premises licenced for public entertainment shall be heading
visited by an officer of the rank of Inspector or above at least once every month. A
record of every visit shall be made in the supervision of Licensed Premises Register,
in accordance with the provisions of P.G.O. No. 301.

2. Visiting officers shall ensure that the premises are the subject of a current licence.
They shall inspect the building and make certain that the requirements of the licence
are being fulfilled. Special attention shall be paid to safety precautions and, in
particular, to :-
(a)
entrances and exits which must be kept entirely clear of obstruction, open
freely and conform to the conditions of the licence;
(b)
over-crowding;
(c)
the indication of all exits by dim lights which must be illuminated during all
performances;
(d)
gangways in which persons are not permitted to stand or sit;
(e)
fire-fighting equipment which must be maintained in good working order;
(f)
fire precautions which must be carried out, particularly in the projection
room; and
(g)
back up generator in case of power failure.

3. Visiting officers will also ensure that the provisions of the Municipal or Township
By-laws with regard to the control of places or public entertainment are fully
understood and followed by the management.

4. Should a contravention be noted, no action shall be taken inside the premises unless
the offence be such as calls for immediate action in the interest of public security.
The visiting officer will call on the manager at his office and inform him of the
offence and then report the matter to the O/C. Station. The visiting officer will also
ensure that :-

(a) members of the public awaiting entrance to the cinema or theatre behave
themselves in a seemly manner and that behaviour which may lead to breach
of the peace does not take place;

(b) no obstruction shall be caused on the public highway outside the entrance
when members of the public are entering or leaving such cinema or theatre;

(c) the passage of traffic to and from the cinema or theatre is at all times
unimpeded.

668
 P.G.O. No. 297
LICENSED PREMISES - EXPLOSIVE MAGAZINES AND
STORES Comment [U174]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. Explosives can only be legally stored in one of three ways :- heading

(a) In a “Licensed Magazine”

Detonators in quantities of over 10,000lb or other explosives in quantities, of 1,000 Ib stored

in a magazine constructed in accordance with the conditions prescribed by the Commissioner
for Mines. Section 28, Explosives Act, Cap.45 R.E.2002.

(b) In a “Licensed Store”

Detonators in quantities of 10,000 lb. or less, or other explosives in quantities of 1,000 Lb.
Or less may be stored in any building which has been licensed for the storage of explosives
by the Commissioner for Mines or an Inspector of Mines. (Section 28, Explosives Act, Cap.
45 R.E. 2002).

(c) In “Storage Boxes”

Detonators not exceeding 1,000 in number of explosives not exceeding 100 Ib stored in
storage boxes of a type approved by the Commissioner for Mines at such places as may be
approved by the Inspector of Mines. (Section 28, Explosives Act, Cap. 45 R.E. 2002)
Comment [U175]: Align left, reduce space,
General Subheading

2. In no circumstances may detonators be stored with or kept in the vicinity of any

other explosives, excepting safety fuses.

3. In the case of magazines and stores, a copy of the license must be displayed in the
building for reference by an inspecting officer. (Section 37, Explosives Act, No. 56
of 1963). ’

4. A register of all issues and receipts of explosives must be kept by owners of

magazines and stores. This register may be kept in the building or at the owner’s
business premises. (Section 37, Explosives Act, Cap. 45 R.E. 2002).
Comment [U176]: Align left, reduce space,
Magazines Subheading

5. An explosives magazine may only be erected under license and in accordance with a
permit in writing issued by the Commissioner for Mines and in accordance with
plans and specifications approved by him.
Comment [U177]: Align left, reduce space,
Safety measures to be observed in the case of magazines Subheading

6. (a) Every magazine should be surrounded on all sides by an earth bank as high
as the eaves and at least 3ft. in thickness as the top.

(b) The bottom of the inner slope shall not be less than 3ft. or more than 6ft.
from the walls except at the entrance which should be either in a broken line
or shall be protected by an outer earth wall.

(c) The whole area should be surrounded by an adequate fence, which shall not
be more than 3ft. from the bank, of a pattern approved by the Commissioner
for Mines, through which access shall be obtained by means of a gate which

669
 P.G.O. No. 297
when not in use shall be kept securely locked.

(d) The outer gate of every magazine, as well as the door, shall be indicated by
means of the word “HATARI” and underneath the words “BARUTI-
EXPLOSIVES” or “BARUTI – DETONATORS” as the case may be.

(e) Every magazine shall comprise of at least two compartments, namely, a

lobby communicating directly with the outside, to be used for the receipt and
issue of explosives, and a storage room to which access can be gained only
from the lobby.

(f) A reliable maximum-minimum thermometer shall be kept in the storage

room of every magazine and should the temperature at any time exceed 35º
Centigrade (or 95º F.) the owner or person in charge shall forthwith report to
an Inspector of Mines.

(g) At least one pair of magazine shoes with rubber, felt, or rope soles shall be
kept in the lobby of every magazine, and no person shall enter the storage
room of any magazine except when he is wearing such shoes.
Comment [U178]: Align left, reduce space,
Licensed stores Subheading

7. The specifications for these are not laid down in law but construction and location
plans are subject to approval by the local Inspector of Explosives. Specifications
required for walls, roofs, doors, locks and hinges are the same as for magazines, but
only one door with not less than two locks is needed. Earth mounds and fences are
not essential but may be required in certain circumstances by the Commissioner
for Mines. Some earlier stores have sloping C.G.I. or aluminium sheets, with
expanded metal below. The sheets must be firmly anchored to prevent removal from
outside and roof timbers and expanded metal must be securely bonded to the walls.
Comment [U179]: Align left, reduce space,
Storage boxes Subheading

8. Wooden storage boxes must be approved by the local Inspector of Explosives. Places
containing the storage boxes must be substantial and secure, but boxes must be
cemented in or secured by chains to the building and kept locked. Mounds and
fences are not essential. Approved boxes built of steel with Chubb-type fastenings,
used in some prospecting operations, can be kept in less secure buildings, provided
that the legs of the box are embedded in concrete or chained to an immovable object.

9. Every explosives magazine and store shall be inspected externally at least once per
quarter by the O/C. District or by an Inspector nominated by him. The location of
every licensed explosives magazine and store in each Station area shall be recorded
in the Supervision of Licensed Premises Register, P.F. 214, in accordance with
P.G.O. No. 301. Every routine visit made to magazine or store shall be recorded in
the Register.

10. Officers inspecting explosives magazines or stores will pay particular attention to the
following points :-

(a) The grounds for a distance of 40 yards on all sides of the building shall be
kept absolutely clean and clear and free from long grass and vegetation.

(b) The earth banks and fences are in a good state of repair.

670
 P.G.O. No. 297
(c) The outer door of the building is securely locked by a minimum of two
locking systems.

(d) Roofing sheets are firmly anchored.

In the case of magazines, the gate in the perimeter fence is securely locked.

The building generally is in a good state of repair.

11. In addition, Regional Commanders will arrange for regular surprise checks to be
carried out on the registers and contents of explosives magazines by officers not
below the rank of Assistant Superintendent. The latter will acquaint themselves with
the safety precautions set out in Sections 36 and 37 of the Explosives Act, Cap 45
R.E.2002 before entering any explosives magazine.

12. Inspecting officers will at once report any breaches of the law and any defects in the
security of the building and will record there observations in the supervision of
Licensed Premises Register. O/C. Districts will inform the local Inspector of
Explosive of any breaches of law or defects in security affecting explosives.

671
 P.G.O. No. 298
LICENSED PREMISES – LOCAL LIQUOR Comment [U180]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. The Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap. 77 R.E. 2002 is applicable to the whole of heading
Tanzania. (See G.N. 372/62 of 31.8.62)

2. The Licensing Authority in a Local Authority concerned. All District Councils are
appointed Licensing Authorities for the respective areas within their jurisdiction.
(See G.N. 377/62)

3. O/C. Districts, when dealing with applications forwarded to them by Licensing

Authorities, will consider the following points :-
(a)
Character of applicant.
(b)
Financial and social stand of applicant
(c)
Situation and state of premises to be licensed, i.e. are the premises properly
equipped and accessible.

O/C. Districts, after inquiring into the points set out in this paragraph will submit written
recommendations to the Licensing Authority.

4. The location of every urban liquor premises within the Station area shall be recorded
in the Supervision of Licensed premises register (P.F. 124), in accordance with
P.G.O. No. 301.

5. O/C. Stations will visit all liquor premises within their urban areas at least once a
week and, in addition, they will ensure that such premises are regularly visited by
patrols during licensing hours. Every visit by O/C. Stations shall be recorded in the
Supervision of Licensed Premises Register.

6. All ranks will familiarise themselves with the Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap. 77 R.E.
2002.

7. Every Police Officer has authority to enter without warrant at any hour of the day or
night any premises licensed under the Intoxicating Liquor Act or any place in respect
of which he has reasonable grounds to suspect that illegal drinking or gambling is
taking place therein or dissolute or disorderly characters are resorting thereto
(Section 27 (3) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002.

672
 P.G.O. No. 299
LICENSED PREMISES – PRIVATE ARMS WAREHOUSES Comment [U181]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. Person who wishes to keep a private warehouse for arms and ammunition is required heading
by Section 16 of the Arms & Ammunition Act, Cap. 223 R.E. 2002 to obtain a license.
Comment [U182]: Align left, reduce space,
Mode of application for licence Subheading

2. Applications for the grant of a private warehouse license received by O/C. Districts
shall be referred to Regional Commanders together with the recommendation of the
O/C. District and District Commissioner concerned. The Regional Commander will
inquire into the character of the applicant and the suitability of the premises which the
applicant proposes to construct or convert into an arms warehouse.

3. Regional Commanders, when considering the suitability or premises to be licensed,

will be guided by the following :-

(a) The building to be sold construction, having a reinforced concrete roof and a
door made of steel.

(b) The need for a warehouse in the area having regard to :-

(i) the local population and number of firearms;

(ii) the presence of any other private warehouse in the same area.

4. Regional Commanders after completion of their inquiries as set out in paragraph 2 will
forward the application to the Director of Criminal Investigation together with a plan
of the proposed warehouse (or proposed conversion of an existing building) and a
report giving the following information:-

(a) Full trading name of applicant, form of trade and recommendation as to his
suitability to trade in arms and ammunition.

(b) Description of the building which it is intended to use as a private warehouse,

stating its position in relation to the main premises.

(c) Maximum quantity or arms and ammunition of all types which it is intended
to store.

(d) Any special conditions which are recommended to be attached to the license.

(e) An accurate description of the location, i.e. plot, block number of the
premises for publication in the Gazette.

(f) The recommendations of the respective Regional Commissioner and District

Commissioner.
Comment [U183]: Align left, reduce space,
Action by D.C.I. on receipt of application Subheading

5. The Director of Criminal Investigation on receipt of the application and report, vide
paragraph 4, will seek the approval of the Inspector General and advise the Regional
Commander concerned of the result.
Comment [U184]: Align left, reduce space,
Action by the Regional Commander if application approved Subheading

6. The Regional Commander, if the application is approved, will inform the applicant

673
 P.G.O. No. 299
provided the building is constructed or converted, as the case may be, in accordance
with the details set out in the application, a licence will be issued. On completion of the
construction or conversion to the satisfaction of the Regional Commander the applicant
shall be required to pay the prescribed licence fee to the nearest Revenue Officer/Sub-
Accountant and to produce the E.R.V. to the Regional Commander, who will inform
the Director of Criminal Investigation of the particulars of the E.R.V. The Director of
Criminal Investigation, in turn, will arrange for the designation of the private
warehouse to be published in the Tanzania Gazette. On publication of the notice in the
Gazette, the Regional Commander concerned will issue to the applicant a private arms
warehouse licence on Form 1 to the schedule of the Arms & Ammunition Regulations.

7. The Regional Commander will be responsible for informing the O/C. Station of new
licences issued and the O/C. Station will enter particulars of the licensed premises in
the Station Licenced Premises Register (PF. 214).
Comment [U185]: Align left, reduce space,
Records to be kept by private arms warehouses Subheading

8. A person licensed to keep a private arms warehouse is required by Section 17 of the

Act to keep a register of deposits and withdrawals in the prescribed form. Every entry
in such register shall :-

(a) be made at the time of or immediately after the deposit or withdrawal;

(b) be dated;

(c) be numbered consecutively;

(d) contain particulars of the arms and ammunition in respect of which they are
made by reference to the marks and numbers stamped and registered in
pursuance of the provisions of the Arms and Ammunition Act;

(e) contain a reference to the permit authorising the deposit or withdrawal;

(f) be signed by the licencee and contain such other particulars as may be
prescribed by law.
Comment [U186]: Align left, reduce space,
Deposits Subheading

9. Section 18 of the Arms & Ammunition Act requires that arms or ammunition shall be
deposited in a private warehouse except on written application in the prescribed form
and in accordance with a permit signed by the senior Gazetted Officer for the time
being available at District Headquarters.
Comment [U187]: Align left, reduce space,
Withdrawals Subheading

10. Sections 18 and 19 of the Arms & Ammunition Act Cap.223 R.E 2002 require that :-

(a) no arms or ammunition shall be withdrawn from a private warehouse except

on written application in the prescribed form and in accordance with a permit
signed by the senior Gazetted Officer for the time being available at district
Headquarters;

(b) permits to withdraw arms or ammunition from a private warehouse shall

only be granted in the following cases :-

674
 P.G.O. No. 299
(i) where the withdrawal is for the purposes of a sale or transfer, in
which case the permit for the sale or transfer and the arms license of
the purchaser or transfer must be produced by the applicant,
provided that where such sale or transfer is of gunpowder or caps to
a local authority or to a person acting on behalf of the local
authority, the production of the permit for the sale or transfer shall
be sufficient;

(ii) for the purpose of export, in which case any licence or permit
required must be produced;

(iii) for the removal from one private warehouse to another, or to a

public warehouse; and

(iv) for the purpose of exhibition in such premises as may be specified in

the permit.
Comment [U188]: Align left, reduce space,
Supervision Subheading

11. (a) O/C. District will exercise close supervision over private arms warehouses in
accordance with paragraph 4 (g) of P.G.O. No. 301 and will ensure that the
licensee’s records are kept in accordance with paragraph 8 of this Order.

(b) Any infringement of a license shall be reported to the Regional Commander by

the O/C. District

675
 P.G.O. No. 300
LICENSED PREMISES – SECOND-HAND DEALERS AND
SCRAP METAL Comment [U189]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
1. The Scrap Metal and Second-hand Dealer Ordinance has as its object the heading
control and regulation of dealings in scrap metal and second-hand goods and has
been framed to assist the police to control theft of these goods.
Comment [U190]: Align left, reduce space,
Definitions Subheading

2. Under Section 2 of the Ordinance, the goods to which this ordinance applies are
defined as follows :-
(a) “Scrap metal” includes any old metal, second-hand metal, any partly
manufactured metal goods, any defaced or old metal goods, but does not
include gold, silver or metals of the platinoid group.
(b) “Second-hand goods” means any second-hand goods which the president
declares to be second-hand goods in Section 3 of the Ordinance and
includes second-hand component parts, spaces and accessories of any
such Second-hand goods. The President, by virtue of the second-hand
Goods (Declaration) Order, 1957, declared the following to be second-
hand goods for the purpose of the Ordinance :-
(i) Bicycles and bicycle spare parts

(ii) Sewing machines.

(iii) Motor vehicle spare parts.

(iv) Non-ferrous wire.

(v) Metal ingots and metal type (printers).

(vi) Locomotive and rolling stock spare parts.

(vii) Brass taps.

(viii) Water meters.

(ix) Stop cocks.

(x) Non-ferrous joints and unions.

(xi) Non-ferrous piping

3. A person who wishes to deal in any scrap metal or second-hand goods is required
by Section 4 of the Second-hand Dealers and Scrap Metal Ordinance, to obtain a
license.

4. Licenses issued under this Ordinance are of two types :-

(a) A General License issued by the Director of Criminal Investigation,

vide General Notice 540/57; and

(b) A Local License issued by the District Commissioner of the District in

which the premises of the applicant are situated.

676
 P.G.O. No. 300
Comment [U191]: Align left, reduce space,
Mode of application for licences Subheading

5., Application for the grant or renewal of a General or Local License shall be made
on PF. 121, in duplicate, to the nearest Sub-Accountant. The appropriate fee
should accompany the application.

6. On receipt of the application, PF. 121 and fee, the Sub-Accountant will complete
Part I of PF. 119 or PF. 120, dependent upon the type of license required, and in
the case of an application for :-

(a) a General License – forward a copy of the PF. 121 and PF.121 and
PF. 119 to the O/C. District in which the applicant intends to carry on
his business as a scrap metal dealer; or

(b) a Local License – forward a copy of the PF. 121 and PF. 120 to the
District Commissioner.
Comment [U192]: Align left, reduce space,
General licenses Subheading

7. (a) O/C. District, on receipt of PF. 121 and PF. 119 from the Sub-
Accountant, as provided for in paragraph 6 (a) above, will inquire into
the character of the applicant and the suitability of the business
premises to be used by him and report to the Regional C.I.D. Officer
in accordance with the pro forma set out in Appendix “A”.

(b) In the case of renewals, it will be sufficient for the O/C. District to
endorse the application “Recommended” provided the licensee has
properly conducted his business during the previous year. The
application and license should then be forwarded to the Regional
C.I.D.

8. The Regional C.I.D. Officer, on receipt of the papers set out in paragraph 7 (a)
and (b), after checking the antecedent history of the applicant, will forward the
papers to the Director of Criminal Investigation for consideration.

9. The Director of Criminal Investigation will consider each application and will
issue licenses to suitable applicants in accordance with the Scrap Metal and
Second-hand Goods Regulations, 1957. He will also maintain a record of all
General Licenses issued. Licenses will be sent to Regional C.I.D. Officers for
onward transmission to licensees.

10. Regional C.I.D. Officers will be responsible for informing O/C. Stations of new
licenses issued and O/C. Stations will enter the particulars of the licensed
premises in the Station Licensed Premises Register PF. 214.
Comment [U193]: Align left, reduce space,
Local licenses Subheading

11. The O/C. District, on receipt of PF. 121 from the District Commissioner, will
inquire into the application and submit to the District Commissioner a brief report
on the points set out in Appendix “A”.
Comment [U194]: Align left, reduce space,
Records to be kept by licensed dealers Subheading

12. Every licensed dealer is required by Section 13 of the Ordinance to keep a record
in the prescribed form, and to correctly and legibly enter therein in English and

677
 P.G.O. No. 300
Kiswahili within twenty-four hours of purchase or sale, the following details :-

(a) An account of all scrap metal or second-hand goods which come into
his possession or under his control. The account will show :-

(i) the name of the person who purchased, acquired or received

the articles;

(ii) the date and time of the transaction;

(iii) the consideration (cash or kind) for the transaction;

(iv) the name, address and occupation of the person from whom
the articles are obtained.

(b) An account of all scrap metal or second-hand goods which he may sell
or dispose of, or which otherwise ceases to be in his possession or under
his control. The account will show :-

(i) the date and time of the transaction;

(ii) the name, address and occupation of the person to whom he

sold, disposed or parted with possession or control of the
articles.

(iii) The licensed dealer shall require every party to such

transactions to sign the entry or affix his left thumb print
thereto.
Comment [U195]: Align left, reduce space,
Restriction on dealing Subheading

13. Under Section 15 of the Ordinance no licensed dealer may deal in any scrap
metal or second-hand goods :-

(a) except between the hours of 8 a.m. and 6 p.m.;

(b) with no person apparently under the age of 16;

(c) with no person who does not produce to the dealer reasonable proof of
his identity and bona fides;

(d) on any other premises other than those specified in his license

(e) provided that the foregoing shall not apply to any single transaction of
purchase or acquisition of scrap metal exceeding 200 lb. in weight.
Comment [U196]: Align left, reduce space,
Restriction on removal of identification marks Subheading

14. No licensed dealer shall disfigure or in any way change the form or shape of, or
remove or deface, any number or identification mark on any scrap metal or
second-hand goods within fifteen days after acquiring the possession or control
of such scrap metal or second-hand goods, except with the written permission of
a Police Officer not below the rank of Assistant Superintendent.

678
 P.G.O. No. 300
Comment [U197]: Align left, reduce space,
Supervision of licensees Subheading

15. (a) O/C. District will exercise close supervision over scrap metal dealers in
accordance with paragraph 4 (d) of P.G.O. No. 301 and will ensure that
dealers’ records are kept in accordance with paragraph 12 of this order.

(b) Any infringement of a license shall be reported to the Director of

Criminal Investigation by the O/C. District.
Comment [U198]: Align left, reduce space,
Export and import of scrap metal Subheading

16. O/C. Districts, provided that they are not below the rank of Assistant
Superintendent, may on application, issue, “Certificates of Lawful Possession”,
PF. 122, to the holder of a General License who wishes to import or export scrap
metal. Care must be taken to ensure that the scrap metal in respect of which the
application is made, is, in fact, in the lawful possession of the licensee.

APPENDIX “A” Comment [U199]: Appendix; Note font size

(To. P.G.O. No. 300) reducing

(a) What is the composition of the premises on which business is to be

conducted? Are they part of applicant’s shop, a shed at the back or a
number of rooms?

(b) Are the premises inhabited?

(c) What is the situation of the site; is it in a commercial or industrial area?

(d) Has applicant a godown in which to keep his non-ferrous metal?

(e) Has he a yard or site to store the metal, if so, what is the approximate
size of the site?

(f) Is scrap metal dealing a sideline of the applicant or does it form his
main source of income?

(g) Are other goods to be stored on the premises on which he intends to

keep scrap metal?

(h) What is his character, has he any previous convictions?

(i) Estimate his capital, is he able to produce a banker’s reference?

679
 P.G.O. No. 301
LICENSED PREMISES – SUPERVISION OF Comment [U200]: New PGO number; align
right, bold and increase space above and
1. O/C. Districts are responsible for exercising supervision over the following types below heading
of licensed premises :-

(a) Hotels, lodging houses and cafes.

(b) Local liquor premises

(c) Cinemas.

(d) Scrap metal, second-hand and bicycle dealers.

(e) Pawnbrokers.

(f) Explosives magazines.

(g) Private arms warehouses.

2. Every O/C. Station with licensed premises in his area shall maintain a loose-leaf
file of Licensed Premises Supervision Sheets (PF. 214) on which shall be recorded
the particulars of all inspections of the premises concerned. One page (Form PF.
214) in the file shall be used for each licensed premises and each type of premises
shall be grouped together.

3. All licensed premises listed in the file shall be visited by an officer authorized to
inspect such premises at least once per month, except where otherwise stated
below. The visiting officer shall at once report to his senior officer any apparent or
suspected breaches of the law observed by him during his visits.

4. Visiting officers are responsible for the following main duties :-

(a) Hotels, lodging houses and cafes

Section 60 (1) of the Intoxicating Liquors Act, Cap. 77 R.E. 2002

authorises any Police Officer to inspect any premises licenced to sell
intoxicating liquors. Inspecting officers should check for bad characters,
wanted persons, prostitutes, etc., and note and report any contravention of
the laws.

(b) Local liquor premises

Under the Intoxicating Liquors Act any Police Officer is authorized to

inspect any building licenced to sell local liquor. Inspecting officers
should report drunkenness, rowdyism, or any indication that the premises
are used as a habitual meeting place for undesirable persons. (See P.G.O.
No. 298).

(c) Cinemas

Cap. 230 Sections 15, empowers all Police Officers to inspect cinemas.
Inspecting officers should ensure that fire appliances, etc., are in order,
that there is no over-crowding and that the entrances and exits are not

680
 P.G.O. No. 301
obstructed. (See also P.G.O. No. 296).

(d) Scrap metal, second –hand and bicycle dealers

Section 18 (1) of Cap. 345 empower any officer of the rank of Assistant
Superintendent of Police or above to inspect these premises. Inspecting
officers should check the list of stolen property with the dealers’ stock on
hand and sales register to ascertain whether any stolen property has
passed through their hands. (See also P.G.O. No. 300).

(e) Explosives magazines - Quarterly

Section 55 of Cap. 224 empowers any Police Officer of or above the rank
of Inspector to inspect these premises. Inspecting officers should check
the contents of magazines against the Magazine Register and report any
inaccuracies and examine the building of security and report deterioration
in construction. (See also P.G.O.297).

(f) Private arms warehouses - Quarterly

Under the Arms & Ammunition Act, there is no specific right of entry
without warrant. Under Section 16, a licensing officer (any Gazetted
Police Officer or Administrative Officer) has an implied right of entry.
Inspecting officers should check the contents of the warehouse against
the Private Ware-house Deposit & Withdrawal Register and report any
inaccuracies. The building must be examined for security and any
deterioration in construction reported. (See also P.G.O. No. 299).

5. The duties of the visiting officers set out in paragraph 4 above are in some cases
amplified by other General Orders. Regional Commanders shall, in addition, issue
such Standing Orders as they may deem necessary for the proper supervision of
licensed premises in their region.

681
 P.G.O. No. 302
PATROLS – RURAL Comment [U201]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space above and below
General heading
Comment [U202]: Sub heading, align left,
1. Each Police Station is responsible for the protection and security of a Section of the and reduce space
country. It can only discharge this responsibility by providing regular patrols which
will visit every village and populated area and maintain close contact with the
people. Regional Commanders shall, therefore, ensure that every Station is provided
with a schedule of Patrols (embodied in Station Standing Orders) which shall
normally be followed without deviation. These patrols will correspond to the
ordinary beat system used to police built-up areas.

2. The following paragraphs lay down the organization of patrol schedules and normal
patrol routine to be followed by all Stations.

(a) six-hour patrols round the populated areas in the immediate vicinity of the
Station;

(b) medium and long-distance patrols of one day or several days’ duration.

3. Additional patrols shall be laid down for Stations which are responsible for large
well-populated areas.

4. The Patrol Schedule shall be prepared as follows :-

(a) A map shall be provided for each patrol with the patrol route marked on it.

(b) A detailed patrol instruction, showing authorized travel time, stopping

points, visiting books, etc., shall be typed out in English and Kiswahili. The
time to be taken between various villages and points on each patrol route
shall be shown for all six-hour patrols and, if possible, for the longer patrols
also.

(c) A number shall be allocated to each patrol.

5. Each Patrol Schedule should be made out in the following form :-

(a) Six-hour patrols

Patrol No. 1 – Duration – 6 hours.

x-hours Leave Station.

x + ½ hour Arrive Village “A” sign visiting book.

x + 2 hours Arrive village “B”

x + 3 hours Arrive local authority H.Q. “C”. sign visiting book.

Thirty minutes rest.

x +4 ½ hours Arrive Village “D”

x + 5 hours Arrive Mission “E”

682
 P.G.O. No. 302
x + 6 hours Return to Station.

(b) Long-distance
patrols

Patrol No. 3 duration 3 days

x-hours Leave Station.

1st day Visit Village “A”; Village “B”, Village “C” and sleep at
Village “C”

2nd day Visit Mission “A”, Mission “B”, Mission “C” and sleep
at Mission “C”.

3rd day Visit village “X”, Village “Y” and Village “Z” and sleep
Village “Z”.

4th day Return to Station.

NOTE: A “Visiting Book” (PF. 187 – small size) will be kept at all main patrol points
(P.G.O. No. 303 refers)

6. A book or file or schedule Patrols with the route instructions and map of each
patrol shall be kept in the Charge Room of all stations. Individual copies shall also
be prepared and taken out by the officer-in-charge of the patrol.

Routine patrol procedure

7. Regular patrols should be sent out into all populated areas, in accordance with
station patrol schedules referred to in paragraph 1. Long-distance patrols shall
consist of at least two members of the Force. Short six-hour patrols in the
immediate vicinity of police stations shall be carried out in much the same manner
as a beat duty. Visits shall be paid to all villages, local authorities, estates and
missions on patrol routes.

8. Local Authorities shall be questioned, a note made of all serious sickness in the
area and requests for government assistance, etc. All possible help shall be
rendered on the spot by police patrols or by the O/C. Station receiving the report

9. Every Police patrol shall be commanded by the senior member thereof, who shall
be detailed as officer-in-charge of the patrol by his O/C. District or station before
the patrol goes out. If, for any special reason, an officer-in-charge of a patrol is not
nominated, the senior member of the patrol will automatically assume command.
Officer –in-charge of patrols are held responsible for the actions, discipline and
good behaviour of the members of the Force under their control.

10. (a) Patrols shall normally only be armed where circumstances deem this
advisable, e.g., when operating in game-infested areas or in areas where
armed raiders are operating (i.e. cattle thieves). O/C. Stations will
include particulars in patrol instructions as to the arms and ammunition to
be carried. In such cases, the members of the Force will be armed with

683
 P.G.O. No. 302
rifles each. Rifles shall not be loaded, except in an emergency.

(b) Every Police Officer is personally responsible for the care and security of
the arms and ammunition carried by him on patrol.

Arms shall never be left unguarded. During the night stops, each member
of the Force shall sleep with his rifle beside him.

11. Regulation patrol dress shall be worn, in accordance with P.G.Os. The wearing of
civilian clothes or shoes on patrol is forbidden.

12. Members of the Force on patrol should observe health precautions and where
malaria is an issue O/C. Districts, Stations and patrols are responsible that the
tablets are taken in accordance with the prescribed preventive dose.

13. Police patrols shall not, under any circumstances, accept quantities of free food and
hospitality from members of the public. Rations should be purchased or carried as
required. Where it is necessary to public transport, ferries, or porters, payment
must be effected promptly. Reimbursement will be made by the O/C. District,
provided details are included in the Patrol report and supported by some form of
evidence of payment.

14. Before any patrol leaves a Station, the O/C. District or Station shall :-

(a) nominate the Officer-in-charge of the patrol to make out Patrol

Instruction Form (PF. 62) which will remain in the police patrol Book.
The Book will be carried by the officer-in –charge of the patrol in a
canvas cover and must be kept in a clean condition and in a good state of
repair;

(b) explain the purpose of the patrol and ensure that all concerned know the
period, route and purpose of the patrol;

(c) check the patrol’s firearms and equipment;

(d) record the date and time of departure in the station diary.

15. Every officer-in-charge of a patrol is responsible that :-

(a) the patrol follows the route entered out the Patrol order;

(b) the date and time of arrival at and departure from each village, local
authority, etc., is entered in the appropriate space on the Patrol Order,
supported by the signature of the local leader etc.;

(c) everything of interest is recorded in his notebook; particular attention

should be paid to requests for assistance on any matter, e.g., sickness, etc.

16. At the condition of each patrol, the officer-in-charge of the patrol shall complete
his patrol report and hand in the patrol book to his O/C. Station, who will endorse
the report with action he has taken, if necessary, to remedy any request or
complaint made in the report. O/C. Stations will then extract the report from the
patrol book and file it in numerical order in a cover kept for this purpose. These
reports will be examined by O/C. Districts and other officers on inspection of the
Station. Information of particular interest will be passed, at once, to the District

684
 P.G.O. No. 302
Administration Officers and to regional police headquarters.

17. Regular checks shall be made on patrols. Senior officers and N.C.O.s who go out
to check on a patrol should note where the patrol is due to be at any given time and
should, if practicable proceed direct to that point and wait for the patrol to arrive.
Long-distance patrols cannot easily adhere to a time-table, but six hour patrols
must be made to follow their time schedules.

18. Patrols must be varied and members of the Force shall not be sent out too often on
the same patrol. Scheduled patrols can be interspersed with other types of patrols
whenever necessary

685
 P.G.O. No. 303
PATROLS AND VISITS-BY SENIOR OFFICERS Comment [U203]: New PGO. Align right
and bold. Increase space below and above
1. All O/C. Districts and all General Duties Gazetted Offices and Inspectors serving heading
under their command shall patrol the areas for which they are responsible at
frequent and regular intervals. In addition to the formal inspection programme laid
down in P.G.O. No. 47 the following regular series of visits shall be paid to all
Police Stations:-

(a) The District Headquarters’ station shall be visited once every 24 hours. One
visit shall be made between 0100 and 0500 hours each week.

(b) Every other Station in the district shall be visited as often as possible and at
least once per month unless exempted therefrom by a Commanding Officer.
A proportion of these visits shall be made between 2200 and 0500 hours.

2. Such officers shall perform at least two foot patrols per week in urban areas. Beat
duties and static guards shall be checked during these patrols.

3. Officers visiting Police Stations shall check and initial the principal books, inspect
the cells and pay a brief visit to the grounds and barracks to ensure that everything is
clean and tidy. Anything of interest or any fault shall be noted in the Visiting
Officers’ Book (PF. 187) and explained to the O/C. Station or senior member of the
Force present.

4. All visits will be entered in the Visiting Officers’ Book (PF. 187) which will be
maintained at all Stations and Field Force Guard Rooms and also at places where
police are permanently or semi-permanently on duty, e.g., State House, Government
Offices, etc. Visiting Books may also be placed at premises which require frequent
supervision by patrols and beat duties. Night visits by Gazetted Officers and
Inspectors between 2200 and 0600 hours will be entered in red ink.

5. Commanding Officers are responsible for ensuring that all General Duties Gazetted
Officers and Inspectors under their command carry out sufficient long-distance foot
patrols, if possible in the company of their own members of the Force, to enable
them to reach all populated areas in their District and, at the same time learn the
geography of their Districts.

6. Uniform shall be worn on patrol, except that night visits to District Headquarter
Stations by Gazetted Officers may be made on plain clothes after 2200 hours.

7. Details of every visit and patrol shall be entered in Officers’ Diaries. Patrols shall be
shown as “foot”, “mobile”, etc.

8. There shall be no departure from the prescribed programme of visits and patrols,
except :-

(a) when an officer is on tour;

(b) when engaged on emergency duties or protracted Court work;

(c) with the permission of a Regional Commander. Normal pressure of routine

work is not an acceptable excuse for non-compliance with this Order.
Comment [U204]: Reduce space, align left
Field Force officers for subheading

686
 P.G.O. No. 303
9. Commandant Field Force Unit and all Field Force Gazetted Officers shall visit the
barracks under their command at least once per week between 0100 and 0500 hours
and check that duties are alert. Regular visits shall also be made at other times.
Comment [U205]: Reduce space, align left
Crime Intelligence Unit and C.I.D. Officers for subheading

10. Crime Intelligence Unit and C.I.D. Officers, who visit Stations on inquiries, or for
any other purpose, shall record such visits in the Station Visiting Officers’ Book.
Comment [U206]: Reduce space, align left
O/C. Station for subheading

11. Every O/C, Station shall carry out a daily patrol or at least one hour’s duration in the
commercial and residential areas near his Police Station. Two such weekly patrols
shall be performed between 2000 and 0100 hours and 0100 and 0500 hours
respectively.

12. He shall regularly patrol the whole areas under his charge and make himself known
to the local inhabitants.

13. Uniform shall always be worn on patrol.

14. In addition, O/C. Class “C” Stations shall accompany their members of the Force on
at least two long-distance foot patrols per month.

687
 P.G.O. No. 304
PROPERTY – UNCLAIMED Comment [U207]: New PGO. Align right,
bold and increase space below and above
1. Every Police Officer, whether on or off duty, shall take charge of all unclaimed heading
movable property handed to him (by other persons) or found by him. If handed to
him, he shall obtain the full name and address of the finder and enter the full
description of the property in his notebook whilst still in the presence of the finder
who will sign or place his thumb-print against the entry. Particulars of any money or
valuables will be carefully noted. The property shall then be handed over to the O/C.
of the nearest Police Station.

2. O/C. Stations are personally responsible for the receipt and safe custody of every
item of found or unclaimed property handed in to their Stations.

3. Exact details of every item of found or unclaimed property coming into police
possession shall be recorded in the Found & Unclaimed Property Register (PF. 53)
and disposed of in accordance with this Order.

4. Found or unclaimed property handed to a Police Station by a member of the public

or member of the Force shall be received by the O/C. Station or, in his absence, by
the Charge Room Officer who shall :-

(a) enter brief details and estimated value of the property in the Report Book
and in the Found & Unclaimed Property Register.

(b) Give the person or Police Officer who hands in the property a Found &
Unclaimed Property Receipt (PF. 181) and enter the receipt number under
Heading 2 in the register;

(c) Label the property with a Property Label (PF. 157) on which details of the
property and register serial number shall be entered, and place the property
in the property store for safe custody;

(d) Seal up any small valuable property in a valuable property Envelope, (PF.
166) and lock it up in the Station safe or each box;

(e) Pay any found cash in to the nearest Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant for
the credit of “Deposits-Unclaimed Property, Sub-head 428/03”. Obtain a
E.R.V. for it which shall be filed away for safe custody in a file to be kept
for that purpose. Enter the E.R.V. number in Column 9 of the Register;

(f) Prepare, at once, a duplicate special inventory (PF.12) of any perishable

property or other property, the immediate sale of which would be of benefit
to the owner, and forward same to the local Magistrate recommending the
immediate sale of the property. On return of the duplicate copy from the
Magistrate the property shall be return of the duplicate copy from the
Magistrate the property shall be sold by auction if possible and the proceeds
paid in to the nearest sold by auction if possible and the proceeds paid in to
the nearest old by auction if possible and the proceeds paid in to the nearest
Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant for the credit of “Deposits-Unclaimed
Property, Sub-Head 428/03”. An E.R.V. shall be obtained for it and this will
be filed away for safe custody. The E.R.V. number and a note that the
property has been sold shall be entered under Heading 9 in the Register;

Post a conspicuous notice outside the Police Station specifying such

property and calling upon the claimants to apply within six months;

688
 P.G.O. No. 304
Report in writing to his O/C. District if the value of the property exceeds
Shs. 50,000/= and where the property consists of arms or ammunition,
report to the Director of Criminal Investigation through his Regional
Commander and O/C. District.

5. The O/C. Station will submit a monthly duplicate inventory of all found property on
PF. 12 to the local Magistrate. A triplicate copy shall be forwarded to the Regional
C.I.D. Officer, who will forward it to the Identification Bureau. The inventory will
include the following information :-

. (a) Found Property Register Number;

(b) Date property found.;

(c) Description of property found;

(d) Estimated value; and

(e) Condition.

If sold, method of disposal, cash received and the E.R.V. details.

All inventories (PF. 12) will be numbered consecutively starting at “1” each year
and carefully filed for future reference. A note of the inventory number will be made
in the Found & Unclaimed Property Register against each item of property included
in the inventory.

6. The Magistrate, on receipt of the inventory (PF. 12), is required by Section 44 of the
Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002 to detain or give
orders for the detention of any such property and shall cause a notice to be posted in
a conspicuous place at his/her Court and at the Police Station within his jurisdiction,
specifying such property and calling upon any person who may have a claim thereto
to appear and calling upon any person who may have a claim thereto to appear and
establish his claim within six months from the date of the notice.

7. All found and unclaimed property shall be held in the Police Station for six months
unless otherwise ordered by the Magistrate or unless it is claimed within that
period. If it is not claimed within six months, it shall be sent to District Police
Headquarters where the O/C. District shall arrange for the sale by public auction,
provided that a Magistrate may, if he thinks it expedient, order the destruction of the
property and provided further, that if such property be a firearm or ammunition, the
Director of Criminal Investigation will be informed of the particulars of the weapon
and the weapon or ammunition will be kept in the police armoury until instructions
are received for its disposal.

8. If the Magistrate is of the opinion that the value of the property is clearly in excess
of Shs. 50,000/= he shall cause a notice to be published in the Tanzania Gazette,
setting out the particulars of the property and the date by which any person is to
establish his claim thereto, such date being the same date as prescribed by the
Magistrate in the notice which he causes to be published locally.
Comment [U208]: Reduce space, align left
Return of property to owner if claim is established for subheading

9. The greatest care shall be taken to check claims to property in police possession.
Nothing shall be handed over until the O/C. Stations is satisfied that the claimant is

689
 P.G.O. No. 304
the real owner. In case of doubt the claimant shall be advised to establish his claim
before the Magistrate. If any person shall establish his title to such property within
six months to satisfaction of the O/C. Station or O/C. District, it shall be delivered to
him forthwith. When a person establishes a claim to cash which has been deposited
with the Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant in accordance with para. 4 (e) of this
Order, the O/C. Station shall prepare a payment voucher form (TP.5) debiting
“Deposits-Unclaimed Property, Sub-Head 428/03” and quoting full details of the
original E.R.V. number. The O/C. Station shall then take the claimant to the
Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant with whom the original money was deposited and
shall witness repayment. The E.R.V. shall be attached to the payment voucher.
Comment [U209]: Reduce space, align left
Disposal of property if unclaimed by owner for subheading

10. If title to property in police possession is not established within six months, it shall
be disposed of as follows :-

(a) Where the Magistrate orders sale by auction of the property it shall be
forwarded to the O/C. District, together with a list of the items showing :-

(i) register serial number of each article;

(ii) brief description of items; and

(iii) an entry that the property has been sent to the O/C. District for sale
shall be made under Heading 9 of the register.

(b) Where the Magistrate orders destruction of any item that item shall be
destroyed by the O/C. Station and an entry made to that effect under
Headings 8 and 9 in the register.

.(c) Firearms and ammunition will be retained in the police armoury pending
instructions from the Inspector General for disposal.

11. O/C. District, on receipt of the property and inventory shall arrange for a licensed
auctioneer or Court broker to sell by public auction the items so listed. The O/C.
District may put a reserve price on any item which he considers exceeds Shs.
150,000/= in value.

12. At the conclusion of the sale, the auctioneer shall be requested to furnish to the O/C.
District a list of the property sold showing itemised prices obtained and shall hand
over the proceeds of the sale less 10 per cent commission charges.
Comment [U210]: Reduce space, align left
Disposal of proceeds form auction sales of unclaimed property for subheading

13. The O/C. District shall draw up a paying-in and Remittance slip (TP.12) crediting
the proceeds from the auction sale as follows :-
(a)
One-half to: Head: Deposits. Sub-Head: Police Rewards & Fines
(b)
One-half to: Head: Revenue. Sub-Head: Miscellaneous Sundries-
(c)
And pay the proceeds in to the local Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant. A
E.R.V. will be obtained and Field in the appropriate district Headquarters
file together with a copy of the itemized list and auctioneer’s statement. The
E.R.V. number will be entered in Column 9 of the register.

690
 P.G.O. No. 304
Comment [U211]: Reduce space, align left
Reward to finder of property for subheading

14. The law provides that the Magistrate may direct that a proportion of the sum
credited to the General Revenue of Tanzania resulting from the sale of unclaimed
property may be paid to the finder of the property. Where the Magistrate so directs,
the O/C. Station will advise the O/C. District, who will raise a payment voucher in
the name of the finder debiting “Head: Revenue, Sub-Head: Miscellaneous
sundries” quoting the date and amount and the E.R.V. number, obtained from the
Revenue Officer/Sub- Accountant when paying in the proceeds of the auction sale
of the property and the page number of the auctioneer’s inventory Field in the
District Headquarters file. The voucher should then be handed to the Revenue
Officer/Sub-Accountant for payment to be made to the finder.
Comment [U212]: Reduce space, align left
Disbursal of money paid into revenue on deposit for subheading

15. Where money or the proceeds from the sale of perishable property have been placed
on deposit with the Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant in accordance with paragraph
4 (e) and (f) of this Order, the O/C. Station shall, at the expiration of six month from
the date of finding of the property, forward to the Inspector General of Police for
onward transmission to the Ministry, the E.R.V. obtained when depositing proceeds
of sale, together with a letter giving the following information :-

(a) Police Station selling the property;

(b) Date of sale;

(c) Description of property sold and reasons;

(d) Requesting that the disposal of the proceeds be disbursed in accordance

with Section 44 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322
R.E. 2002

16. Should the finder have been paid a part of the proceeds from the sale, then the O/C.
Station must include in his letter particulars of the amount paid to the finder and the
voucher number and date. One receipt of this letter, the Ministry will disburse the
amount at the rate of one-half of the proceeds of the sale to the Police Rewards &
Fines Fund and the balance to General Revenue

691
 P.G.O. No. 305
PUBLIC COLLECTIONS AND APPEALS FOR MONEY Comment [U213]: New PGO. Align right,
bold. Increase space above and below
1. A person who wishes to organize an appeal for or collection of money in any public heading
place is required by Section 177 (5) of the Penal Code, Cap. 16 R.E. 2002 to obtain
a written permit.

2. Section 177 (5) and the proviso thereto state :-

“(5) Every person who, without the prior consent in writing in that behalf of the
District Commissioner, or, in the case of any municipality or township, the Police
Officer in charge of the police in such municipality or township, collects, or makes
any appeal for, subscriptions of money in any public place in such district,
municipality or township, for any purpose, shall be guilty of misdemeanour:

Provided that paragraph (5) of this Section shall not apply to :-

(a) any person who, or the duly authorised representative of any organisation
which has received the written consent of the Inspector General of Police to
collect or make any appeal for subscriptions of money for religious or
charitable purposes, or

(b) any person authorised to collect or make any appeal for subscriptions of
money under the provisions of any law including any by law in force in
Tanzania ;

(c) Provided further that for the purposes of paragraph (5) of this Section, the
definition “public place” in Section 5 of this Code shall not be deemed to
include any recognized place of religious worship”.

3. “Public Place” is defined in Section 5 of the Penal Code as follows :-

“Public place” or “public premises” includes any public way and any building, place
or conveyance to which, for the time being, the public are entitled or permitted to
have access either without any condition or upon condition of making any payment,
and building or place which is for the time being, used for any public or religious
meetings, or assembly or as an open Court”.

4. O/C. Districts may approve applications for appeals and collections at flag days,
provided that the latter is limited to a municipal or township area and has no
political connections.

5. All applications which appear to have political connections will be forwarded to the
Inspector General through Regional Commanders with appropriate comments.

6. Applications for Territorial appeals and/or collections shall similarly be referred to

the Inspector General through Regional Commanders.

7. All applications with the object of raising money for schools will be referred to the
Regional Education Officer for his comments before approval.

8. The following conditions will be considered when dealing with applications :-

(a) The applicant should represent a charitable or religious organisation of good

local repute commanding the respect and sympathy of a large section of the
community.

692
 P.G.O. No. 305
(b) The sole object of the appeal must be to raise money for a charitable or
religious purpose which is of genuine benefit to a Section of the community.
“Charitable” should be construed in its widest sense and may include
educational, cultural and recreational projects and appeals for fire and flood
relief, etc.

9. When a number of charitable organisations apply at the same time to hold a public
collection, the organisation likely to benefit the largest number of people should be
given priority.

10. Care should be taken to space out flag days, etc., so that there is a reasonable
interval between each. Organisations will generally be restricted to one day a year
for an appeal or collection.

11. Police Officers should not grant applications in the following cases :-

(a) When the period between the receipt of the application and the date of the
proposed appeal/collection is insufficient.

(b) Where there is reason to suspect that there may be intimidation or

compulsion by those making the collection or appeal.

(c) Where the money to be collected or the appeal to be made is for the
personal benefit of the applicant.

(d) Where the collecting organisation makes or wishes to make a series of

appeals and it is not likely to publish regularly its accounts in such a manner
that subscribers, whether members of the organisation or not, can as certain
how the money is used.

(e) Where the collecting organisation is making a single appeal for a specific
purpose and the authorising officer is not satisfied that proper accounts will
be kept.

(f) Where, in the case of a society, the purpose for which the money is
collected or the appeal is made is not a purpose within the objects of the
society.

693
 P.G.O. No. 306
RAIDS – DRUGS AND PREVENTION OF ILLICIT
TRAFFICKING IN DRUGS Comment [U214]: New PGO. Bold and
increase space below and above heading
1. (a) Every Police Officer who has reason to suspect that any premises are
being used for storing or use of narcotic drugs and psychotropic substances shall make an
immediate report to his O/C. District or to the O/C. Station if the O/C. District is not
immediately available.
(b) The list of drugs and psychotropic substances covered by the Act is
presented in Appendix “A” to this order
2. (a) When an O/C. District or O/C. Station receives information relating to
offences under the Drugs and Prevention of Illicit Traffic in Drugs Act, Cap 95 R.E. 2002, he
shall apply to the Magistrate for a search warrant under the Act or shall instruct another
Gazetted Officer or Inspector to do so. Unauthorised applications for warrants are forbidden.
(b) Officers i/c. District Headquarter Stations will always refer to the O/C.
District, if available, before taking action under this paragraph.
3. Officers of or above the rank of Assistant Inspector may exercise the powers
contained in Section 34 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E. 2002,
and raid without a warrant if a Magistrate is not available or if, for any other valid reason, it
is considered essential that the premises should be raided before a search warrant can be
obtained, provided that the conditions laid down in the two Sections when a Magistrate is not
available and when delay in searching for one would prejudice the chances of a successful
raid.
4. O/C. District and O/C. Stations are responsible that raids are carried out by raiding
parties of sufficient strength to take effective action. They must invariably refer to a superior
officer before taking action if they consider either that their resources are inadequate or that a
case is of such importance that they should not take action without reference to higher
authority.
5. (a) Every police raiding party shall be commanded by a Gazetted Officer or
an Inspector or by the O/C. Station. Under law, the officer who is named in the warrant shall
personally take charge of the raiding party.
(b) Officers in charge of police raiding parties shall exercise strict control of
all those taking part and shall prevent any abuse of power. They shall also check all members
of raiding parties before and after raids take place to ensure that they are not carrying money
or valuable articles on their person.
6. Police carrying out dangerous drugs raids shall make every effort to collect all
available evidence against the owners or occupants. Any opium or other dangerous drug and
any utensils used to contain the same, together with any books or other documents suspected
to be connected with the use thereof, shall be seized by the officer-in-charge or the raiding
party and handed to the O/C. of the nearest police station. Care shall be taken to preserve
wrapping, containers, etc., which may bear finger prints. O/C. Stations are responsible that all
seized articles handed over to them are labelled, recorded and stored as exhibits in
accordance with P.G.O. No. 229.
7. Any person either found committing, or who is believed on reasonable grounds to
have committed an offence under the Act, shall be arrested, searched, escorted to the nearest
Police Station and charged before a Magistrate. Bail may be granted in accordance with the
provisions of P.G.O. No. 351.
8. Under the Act, any Police Officer may arrest without warrant any person who has
committed, or attempted to commit, or is reasonably suspected by the officer of having
committed or attempted to commit, an offence against the Act, if he has reasonable grounds

694
 P.G.O. No. 306
for believing that person will abscond unless arrested, or if he does not know and cannot
ascertain such person’s name and address.
9. (a) Dangerous drugs and other material suspected to be dangerous drugs which
have been seized during police raids shall not be sent for analysis until the persons accused of
possession or ownership have been brought before a Magistrate.
(b) If the accused pleads guilty, analysis will not be necessary.
(c) If the accused pleads not guilty the prosecuting officer shall ask for a remand
to enable him to arrange for analysis.
10. (a) The drugs requiring analysis, together with any connected utensils or
containers, shall be forwarded by the O/C. Station, properly packed, labelled and escorted in
accordance with P.G.O. No. 229.
(b) The Government Chemist will, in due course, return the exhibits and the
result of the analysis to the O/C. Station concerned.
(c) The O/C. Station will then arrange for the prosecution to proceed and will
produce exhibits and the analyst’s report as evidence.
11. No member of the Inspectorate or Rank & File may enter any premises suspected to
contain dangerous drugs, except :-
(a) on the instructions of a Gazetted officer;
(b) under a valid warrant;
(c) in pursuit of a person whose arrest he may legally effect; and
(d) to prevent the commission of a cognizable offence.
12. Under no circumstances may any member of the Rank & File, unless acting under
the direct orders or a Gazetted Officer, enter any premises suspected to contain dangerous
drugs or cause another person to enter therein in order to verify information that illegal drug
traffic is in progress.
13. All dangerous drug warrants shall be returned to the Magistrate as soon as they are
executed and, in any case, not later than ten days after issue.
14. Regional Commanders are responsible for the detection and
suppression of illegal drug traffic within their commands. They shall
use all means at their disposal to detect persons who possess or sell
dangerous drugs in contravention of the law.

695
 P.G.O. No. 306

APPENDIX “A”(To P.G.O. No. 306) Comment [U215]: Appendix. Note the font
size to be put
LIST OF NARCOTIC DRUGS INCLUDED IN SCHEDULE I TO THE SINGLE
CONVENTION ON NARCOTIC DRUGS, 1961
(Section 23(3))
1. Acetorphine (3-O-acetyltetrahydro-7a-(1-hydroxy-1-methylbutyl)-6,14-endoetheno-
oripavine)
2. Acetyl-alpha-methylfentanyl (N-[1-(a-methylphenethyl)-4-piperidyl]acetanilide)
3. Acetylmethadol (3-acetoxy-6-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenylheptane)
4. Alfentanil (N-[1-[2-(4-ethyl-4,5-dihydro-5-oxo-1H-tetrazol-1-yl)ethyl]-4-
(methoxymethyl)-4-piperidiny]- N-phenylpropanamide
5. Allylprodine (3-allyl-1-methyl-4-phenyl-4-propionoxypiperidine)
6. Alphacetylmethadol (alpha-3-acetoxy-6-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenylheptane)
7. Alphameprodine (alpha-3-ethyl-1-methyl-4-phenyl-4-propionoxypiperidine)
8. Alphamethadol (alpha-6-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenyl-3-heptanol)
9. Alpha-methylfentanyl (N-[1(a-methylphenethyl)-4-piperidyl]propionanilide)
10. Alpha-methylthiofentanyl (N-[1-[1-methyl-2-(2-thienyl)ethyl]-4-
piperidyl]propionanilide)
11. Alphaprodine (alpha-1,3-dimethyl-4-phenyl-4-propionoxypiperidine)
12. Anileridine (1-para-aminophenethyl-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester)
13. Benzethidine (1-(2-benzyloxyethyl)-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester)
14. Benzylmorphine (benzylmorphine)
15. Betacetylmethadol (beta-3-acetoxy-6-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenylheptane)
16. Beta-hydroxyfentanyl (N-[1-(beta-hydroxyphenethyl)-4-piperidyl]propionanilide)
17. Beta-hydroxy-3-methylfentantyl (N-[1-(beta-hydroxyphenethyl)-3-methyl-4-
piperidyl]propionanilide)
18. Betameprodine (beta-3-ethyl-1-methyl-4-phenyl-4-propionoxypiperidine)
19. Betamethadol (beta-6-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenyl-3-heptanol)
20. Betaprodine (beta-1,3-dimethyl-4-phenyl-4-propionoxypiperidine)
21. Bezitramide (1-(3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-(2-oxo-3-propionyl-1-
benzimidazolinyl)-piperidine)
22. Cannabis (Indian Hemp) and cannabis resin (resin of Indian Hemp)
23. Catha edulis (khat)
24. Clonitazene (2-para-chlorbenzyl-1-diethylaminoethyl-5-nitrobenzimidazole)
25. Coca Leaf
26. Cocaine (methyl ester of benzoylecgonine)
27. Codoxime (dihydrocodeinone-6-carboxymethyloxime)

696
 P.G.O. No. 306
28. Concentrate of poppy straw (the material arising when poppy straw has entered into a
process for the concentration of its alkaloids when such material is made available in
trade)
29. Desomorphine (dihydrodeoxymorphine)
30. Dextromoramide ((+)-4-[2-methyl-4-oxo-3,3-diphenyl-4-(1-pyrrolidinyl)butyl)-
morpholine)
31. Diampromide (N-[2-(methylphenethylamino)-propyl]propionanilide)
32. Diethylthiambutene (diethylamino-1,1-di-(2-thienyl)-1-butene)
33. Difenoxin (1-(3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-phenylisonipecotic acid)
34. Dihydromorphine
35. Dimenoxadol (2-dimethylaminoethyl-1-ethoxy-1,1-diphenylacetate)
36. Dimepheptanol (6-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenyl-3-heptanol)
37. Dimethylthiambutene (dimethylamino-1,1-di-(2-thienyl)-1-butene)
38. Dioxaphetyl butyrate (ethyl-4-morpholino-2,2-diphenylbutyrate)
39. Diphenoxylate (1-(3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid
ethyl ester)
40. Dipipanone (4,4-diphenyl-6-piperidine-3-heptanone)
41. Drotebanol (3,4-dimethoxy-17-methylmorphinan-6ß,14-diol)
42. Ecgonine, its esters and derivatives, which are convertible to ecgonise and cocaine
43. Ethylmethylthiambutene (3-ethylmethylamino-1,1-di-(2-thienyl)-1-butene)
44. Etonitazene (1-diethylaminoethyl-2-para-ethoxybenzyl-5-nitrobenzimidazole)
45. Etorphine (tetrahydro-7a-(1-hydroxy-1-methylbutyl)-6,14-endoetheno-oripavine)
46. Etoxeridine (1-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-ethyl]-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid
ethyl ester)
47. Fentanyl (1-phenethyl-4-N-propionylanilinopiperidine)
48. Furethidine (1-(2-tetrahydrofurfuryloxyethyl)-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid
ethyl ester)
49. Heroin (diacetylmorphine)
50. Hydrocodone (dihydrocodeinone)
51. Hydromorphinol (14-hydroxydihydromorphine)
52. Hydroxypethidine (4-meta-hydroxyphenyl-1-methylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid ethyl
ester)
53. Isomethadone (6-dimethylamino-5-methyl-4,4-diphenyl-3-hexanone)
54. Ketobemidone (4-meta-hydroxyphenyl-1-methyl-4-propionylpiperidine)
55. Levomethorphan ((-)-3-methoxy-N-methylmorphinan)
56. Levomoramide ((-)-4-[2-methyl-4-oxo-3,3-diphenyl-4-(1-pyrrolidinyl)-
butyl]morpholine)
57. Levophenacylmorphan ((-)-3-hydroxy-N-phenacylmorphinan)
58. Levorphanol ((-)-3-hydroxy-N-methylmorphinan)
59. Metazocine (2'-hydroxy-2,5,9-trimethyl-6,7-benzomorphan)

697
 P.G.O. No. 306
60. Methadone (6-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenyl-3-heptanone)
61. Methadone intermediate (4-cyano-2-dimethylamino-4,4-diphenylbutane)
62. Methyldesorphine (6-methyl-delta-6-deoxymorphine)
63. Methyldihydromorphine (6-methyldihydromorphine)
64. 3-methylfentanyl (N-(3-methyl-1-phenethyl-4-piperidyl)propionanilide)
65. 3-methylthiofentanyl (N-[3-methyl-1-[2-(2-thienyl)ethyl]-4-piperidyl]propionanilide)
66. Metopon (5-methyldihydromorphinone)
67. Mirungi
68. Moramide intermediate (2-methyl-3-morpholino-1,1-diphenylpropane carboxylic acid)
69. Morpheridine (1-(2-morpholinoethyl)-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid ethyl
ester)
70. Morphine
71. Morphine methobromide and other pentavalent nitrogen morphine derivatives,
including in particular the morphine-N-oxide derivatives, one of which is Codeine-N-
oxide
72. Morphine-N-Oxide
73. MPPP (1-methyl-4-phenyl-4-piperidinol propionate ester)
74. Myrophine (myristylbenzylmorphine)
75. Nicomorphine (3,6-dinicotinylmorphine)
76. Noracymethadol ((±)-alpha-3-acetoxy-6-methylamino-4,4-diphenylheptane)
77. Norlevorphenol ((-)-3-hydroxymorphinan)
78. Normethadone (dimethylamino-4,4-diphenyl-3-hexanone)
79. Normorphine (demethylmorphine) or (N-demethylated morphine)
80. Norpipanone (4,4-diphenyl-6-piperidino-3-hexanone)
81. Oxycodone (hydroxydihydrocodeinone)
82. Oxymorphone (14-hydroxydihydromorphinone)
83. Para-fluorofentanyl (4'-fluoro-N-(1-phenethyl-4-piperidyl)propionanilide)
84. PEPAP (1-phenethyl-4-phenyl-4-piperidinol acetate ester)
85. Pethidine (1-methyl-phenylpiperidine-1-carboxylic acid ethyl ester)
86. Pethidine intermediate A (4-cyano-1-methyl-4-phenylpiperidine)
87. Pethidine intermediate B (4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester)
88. Pethidine intermediate C (1-methyl-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid)
89. Phenadoxone (6-morpholino-4,4-diphenyl-3-heptanone)
90. Phenampromide (N-(1-methyl-2-piperidinoethyl)-propionanilide)
91. Phenazocine (2'-hydroxy-5,9-dimethyl-2-phenethyl-6,7-benzomorphan)
92. Phenomorphan (3-hydroxy-N-phenethylmorphinan)
93. Phenoperidine (1-(3-hydroxy-3-phenylpropyl)-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid
ethyl ester)

698
 P.G.O. No. 306
94. Piminodine (4-phenyl-1-(3-phenylaminopropyl)-piperidine-4-carboxylic acid ethyl
ester)
95. Piritramide (1-(3-cyano-3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-(1-piperidino)-piperidine-4-carboxylic
acid amide)
96. Proheptazine (1,3-dimethyl-4-phenyl-4-propionoxyazacycloheptane)
97. Properidine (1-methyl-4-phenylpiperidine-4-carboxylic acid isopropyl ester)
98. Racemethorphan ((±)-3-methoxy-N-methylmorphinan)
99. Racemoramide ((±)-4-[2-methyl-4-oxo-3,3-diphenyl-4-(1-pyrrolidinyl)-butyl]-
morpholine)
100. Racemorphan ((±)-3-hydroxy-N-methylmorphinan)
101. Sufentanil (N-[4-(methoxymethyl)-1-[2-(2-thienyl)-ethyl]-4-
piperidyl]propionanilide)
102. Thebacon (acetyldihydrocodeinone)
103. Thebaine
104. Thiofentanyl (N-(1-[2-(2-thienyl)ethyl]-4-piperidyl]propionanilide)
105. Tilidine ((±)-ethyl-trans-2-(dimethylamino)-1-phenyl-3-cyclohexene-1-
carboxylate)
106. Trimeperidine (1,2,5-trimethyl-4-phenyl-4-propionoxypiperidine); and
107. The isomers, unless specifically excepted, of the drugs in this Schedule
whenever the existence of such isomers is possible within the specific chemical
designation;
108. The esters and ethers, unless appearing in another Schedule, of the drugs in
this Schedule whenever the existence of such esters or ethers is possible;
109. The salts of the drugs listed in this Schedule, including the salts of esters,
ethers and isomers as provided above whenever the existence of such salts is possible.

APPENDIX “B” (To PGO No. 306)

LIST OF NARCOTIC DRUGS INCLUDED IN SCHEDULE II TO THE SINGLE

CONVENTION ON NARCOTIC DRUGS, 1961
1. Acetyldihydrocodeine
2. Codeine (3-methylmorphine)
3. Dextropropoxyphene (a-(+)-4-dimethylamino-1,2-diphenyl-3-methyl-2-butanol
propionate)
4. Dihydrocodeine
5. Ethylmorphine (3-ethylmorphine)
6. Nicocodine (6-nicotinylcodeine)
7. Nicodicodine (6-nicotinyldihydrocodeine)
8. Norcodeine (N-demethylcodeine)
9. Pholcodeine (morphinylethylmorphine)

699
 P.G.O. No. 306
10. Propiram (N-(1-methyl-2-piperidinoethyl)-N-2-pyridylpropionamide)
11. The isomers, unless specifically excepted, of the drugs in this Schedule whenever the
existence of such isomers is possible within the specific chemical designation;
12. The salts of the drugs listed in this Schedule, including the salts of the isomers as
provided above whenever the existence of such salts is possible.

APPENDIX “C” (To PGO No. 306)

LIST OF PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES INCLUDED IN SCHEDULE I TO THE

CONVENTION ON PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES, 1971
Note: The names printed in capital in the left-hand Column are the International Non-
proprietary Names (INN). Other non-proprietary or trivial names also given where no INN has
yet been recommended or when such names are commonly applied to the substances. Also
under international control are the salts of the substances listed in this Schedule, whenever the
existence of such salts is possible.

INN Other non- Chemical name

proprietary or
trivial names
BROLAMFETAMINE DOB (±)-4-bromo-2,5-dimethoxy-a
methylphenethylamine
CATHINONE (-)-(S)-2-aminopropiophenone
DET 3-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl]indole
DMA (±)-2,5-dimethoxy-a-methylphenethylamine
DMHP 3-(1,2-dimethylheptyl)-7,8,9,10-tetrahydro-
6,6,9-trimethyl-6H-
dibenzo[b,d]pyran-1-ol
DMT 3-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]indole
DOET (±)-4-ethyl-2,5-dimethoxy-a-phenethylamine
ETICYCLIDINE
(+)-LYSERGINE PCE N-ethyl-1-phenylcyclohexylamine
LSD, LSD-25 9,10-didehydro-N,N-diethyl- 6-methylergoline
MDMA (±)-N,a-dimethyl-3,4-(methylene-
dioxy)phenethylamine
mescaline 3,4,5-trimethoxyphenethylamine
4-methylaminorex (±)-cis-2-amino-4-methyl-5-phenyl-2-oxazoline
MMDA 2-methoxy-a-methyl-4,5-
(methylenedioxy)phenethylamine
N-ethyl MDA (±)-N ethyl-a-methyl-3,4-
(methylenedioxy)phenethylamine
N-hydroxy MDA (±)-N-[a-methyl-3,4-
(methylenedioxy)phenethyl]hydroxylamine
parahexyl 3-hexyl-7,8,9,10-tetrahydro-6,6,9-trimethyl-6H-
dibenzo [b,d]
pyran-1-ol
PMA p-methoxy-a-methylphenethylamine
PSILOCYBINE psilocine

700
 P.G.O. No. 306
INN Other non- Chemical name
proprietary or
trivial names
psilotsin 3-[2-
(dimethylamino)et
hyl]indol-4-ol
3-[2-
(dimethylamino)ethyl]indol-
4-ol dihydrogen phosphate
POLICYCLIDINE PHP, PCPY 1-(1-phenylcyclohexyl)pyrrolidine
STP, DOM 2,5-dimethoxy-a,4-dimethylphenethylamine
TENAMFETAMINE MDA a-methyl-3,4-(methylenedioxy)phenethylamine
TENOCYCLIDINE TCP 1-[1-(2-thienyl)cyclohexyl]piperidine
tetrahydrocannabin
ol, the following
isomers and their
stereochemical
variants:
7,8,9,10-tetrahydro-6,6,9-trimethyl-3-pentyl-
6H-dibenzo[b,d]
pyran-1-ol
(9R,10aR)-8,9,10,10a-tetrahydro-6,6,9-
trimethyl-3-pentyl-6H
-dibenzo[b,d]pyran-1-ol
(6aR,9R,10aR)-6a,9,10,10a-tetrahydro-6,6,9-
trimethyl-3-pentyl-
6H-dibenzo[b,d]pyran-1-ol
(6aR,10aR)-6a,7,10,10a-tetrahydro-6,6,9-
trimethyl-3-pentyl-6H-
dibenzo[b,d]pyran-1-ol
6a,7,8,9-tetrahydro-6,6,9-trimethyl-3-pentyl-6H-
dibenzo[b,d]
pyran-1-ol
(6aR,10aR)-6a,7,8,9,10,10a-hexahydro-6,6-
dimethyl-9-methylene 3-pentyl-6H-dibenzo[b,d]
pyran-1-ol
TMA (±)-3,4,5-trimethoxy-a-methylphenethylamine

APPENDIX “D” (To PGO No. 306)

LIST OF PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES INCLUDED IN SCHEDULE II TO THE

CONVENTION ON PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES, 1971

INN Other non-proprietary or Chemical name

trivial name
AMFETAMINE amphetamine (±)-a-methylphenethylamine
DEXAMFETAMINE dexamphetamine (+)-a-methylphenethylamine
FENETHYLLINE
7-[2-[(a-
methylphenethyl)amino]

701
 P.G.O. No. 306
ethyl]theophylline
LEVAMFETAMINE levamphetamine
levomethampheta-
mine (-)-(R)-a-methylphenethylamine
(-)-N,a-
dimethylphenethylamine
MECLOQUALONE 3-(o-chlorophenyl)-2-
methyl-4(3H)-quinazolinone
METHAMFETA-
MINE methamphetamine (+)-(S)-N,a-
dimethylphenethylamine
METHAMFETAMINE methamphetamine racemate (±)-N,a-
RACEMATE dimethylphenethylamine
METHAQUALONE Mandrax 2-methyl-3-o-tolyl-4(3H)-
quinazolinone
METHYLPHENIDATE Methyl a-phenyl-2-
piperidine acetate
PHENCYCLIDINE PCP 1-(1-
phenylcyclohexyl)piperidine
PHENMETRAZINE 3-methyl-2-
phenylmorpholine
SECOBARBITAL 5-allyl-5-(1-
methylbutyl)barbituric acid
delta-9-tetrahydro- cannabinol (6aR,10aR)-6a,7,8,10a-
and its stereochemical variants tetrahydro-6,6,9-trimethyl-
3-pentyl-6H-
dibenzo[b,d)pyran-1-ol

APPENDIX “E” (To PGO No. 306)

LIST OF PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES INCLUDED IN SCHEDULE III TO THE

CONVENTION ON PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES, 1971
INN Other non-proprietary Chemical name
or trivial name
AMOBARBITAL 5-ethyl-5-isopentylbarbituric acid
BUPRENORPHINE 21-cyclopropyl-7-a[(S)-1-hydroxy-1,2,2-
trimethylpropyl]-6,14-
endo-ethano-6,7,8,14-
tetrahydro-oripavine
BUTALBITAL 5-allyl-5-isobutylbarbituric acid
CATHINE (+)-(R)-a-[(R)-1-aminoethyl] benzyl alcohol
CYCLOBARBITAL 5-(1-cyclohexen-1-yl)-5-ethylbarbituric acid
GLUTETHIMIDE 2-ethyl-2-phenylglutarimide
PENTAZOCINE (2R,6R,11R)-1,2,3,4,5,6-hexahydro-6,11-

702
 P.G.O. No. 306
dimethyl-3- (3-methyl-2-butenyl)-2,6-methano-3-
benzazocin-8-ol
PENTOBARBITAL 5-ethyl-5-(1-methylbutyl)barbituric acid

APPENDIX “F” (To PGO No. 306)

LIST OF PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES INCLUDED IN SCHEDULE IV TO THE

CONVENTION ON PSYCHOTROPIC SUBSTANCES, 1971
INN Other non- Chemical name
proprietary or
trivial name
ALLOBARBITAL 5,5-diallylbarbituric acid
ALPRAZOLAM 8-chloro-1-methyl-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo[4,3-a][1,4]
benzodiazepine
AMFERPRAMONE 2-(diethylamino)propiophenone
BARBITAL 5,5-diethylbarbituric acid
BENZFETAMINE benzphetamine N-benzyl-N,a-dimethylphenethylamine
BROMAZEPAM 7-bromo-1,3-dihydro-5-(2-pyridyl)-2H-1,4-benzodiazepin-2-
one
BUTOBARBITAL butobarbital 5-butyl-5-ethylbarbituric acid 7-chloro-1,3,-dihydro-3-
hydroxy-1- methyl-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-benzodiazepin-
2-one dimethylcarbamate
(ester)
CAMAZEPAM 7-chloro-1,3-dihydro-3-hydroxy-1-methyl-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
dimethylcarbamate (ester)
CHLORDIA-
ZEPOXIDE 7-chloro-2-(methylamino)-5-phenyl-3H-1,4-benzodiazepin-
4-oxide
CLOBAZAM 7-chloro-1-methyl-5-phenyl-1H-1,5-benzodiazepin-
2,4(3H,5H)-
dione
CLONAZEPAM 5-(o-chlorophenyl)-1,3-dihydro-7-nitro-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
CLORAZEPATE 7-chloro-2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-5-phenyl-1H-1,4-
benzodiazepine-3-
carboxylic acid
CLOTIAZEPAM 5-(o-chlorophenyl)-7-ethyl-1,3-dihydro-1-methyl-2H-thieno
[2,3-e]-1,4-diazepin-2-one
CLOXAZOLAM 10-chloro-11b-(o-chlorophenyl)-2,3,7,11b-tetrahydro-
oxazolo-
[3,2-d][1,4]benzodiazepin-
6(5H)-one
DELORAZEPAM 7-chloro-5-(o-chlorophenyl)-1,3-dihydro-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-
2-one
DIAZEPAM 7-chloro-1,3-dihydro-1-methyl-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-
2-one
ESTAZOLAM 8-chloro-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo[4,3-a][1,4]benzodiazepine
ETHCHLORVYNOL 1-chloro-3-ethyl-1-penten-4-yn-3-ol

703
 P.G.O. No. 306
ETHINAMATE ETHYL 1-ethynylcyclohexanol carbamate ethyl 7-chloro-5-(o-
LOFLAZEPATE fluorophenyl)-2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-
1H-1,4-benzodiazepine-3-
carboxylate
ETILAMFETAMINE N- N-ethyl-a-methylphenethylamine
ethylamphetam
ine
FENCAMFAMIN N-ethyl-3-phenyl-2-norbornanamine
FENPROPOREX (+-)-3-[(a-methylphenethyl)amino]propionitrile
FLUDIAZEPAM 7-chloro-5-(o-fluorophenyl)-1,3-dihydro-1-methyl-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
FLURAZEPAM 7-chloro-1-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl]-5-(o-fluorophenyl)-1,3-
dihydro-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
HALAZEPAM 7-chloro-1,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-2H-
1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
HALOXAZOLAM 10-bromo-11b-(o-fluorophenyl)-2,3,7,11b-tetrahydro-
oxazolo-
[3,2-d] [1,4]benzodiazepin-
6(5H)-one
KETAZOLAM 11-chloro-8,12b-dihydro-2,8-dimethyl-12b-phenyl-4H-[1,3]
oxazino[3,2-
d][1,4]benzodiazepine-
4,7(6H)-dione
LEFETAMINESPA
LOPRAZOLAM (-)-N,N-dimethyl-1,2-diphenylethylamine-6-(o-
chlorophenyl)-
2,4-dihydro-2-[(4-methyl-1-
piperazinyl) methylene]-8-
nitro-
1H-imidazo[1,2-
a][1,4]benzodiazepin-1-one
LORAZEPAM 7-chloro-5-(o-chlorophenyl)-1,3-dihydro-3-hydroxy-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
LORMETAZEPAM 7-chloro-5-(o-chlorophenyl)-1,3-dihydro-3-hydroxy-1-
methyl-
2H-1,4-benzodiazepin-2-
one
MAZINDOL 5-(p-chlorophenyl)-2,5-dihydro-3H-imidazo[2, 1-a)isoindol-
5-ol
MEDAZEPAM 7-chloro-2,3-dihydro-1-methyl-5-phenyl-1H-1,4-
benzodiazepine
MEFENOREX N-(3-chloropropyl)-a-methylphenethylamine
MEPROBAMATE 2-methyl-2-propyl-1,3-propanediol-dicarbamate
METHYLPHENO-
BARBITAL 5-ethyl-1-methyl-5-phenylbarbituric acid
METHYPRYLON 3,3-diethyl-5-methyl-2,4-piperidine-dione
MIDAZOLAM 8-chloro-6-(o-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-4H-imidazo[1,5-a]
[1,4]benzodiazepine
NIMETAZEPAM 1,3-dihydro-1-methyl-7-nitro-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
NITRAZEPAM 1,3-dihydro-7-nitro-5-phenyI-2H-1,4-benzodiazepin-2-one

704
 P.G.O. No. 306
NORDAZEPAM 7-chloro-1,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-benzodiazepin-2-one
OXAZEPAM 7-chloro-1,3-dihydro-3-hydroxy-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-
2-one
OXAZOLAM 10-chloro-2,3,7,11b-tetrahydro-2-methyl-11b-phenyloxazolo
[3,2-d][1,4]benzodiazepin-
6(5H)-one
PEMOLINE 2-amino-5-phenyl-2-oxazolin-4-one± 2-amino-5-phenyl-
4-oxazolidinone)
PHENDIMETRA-
ZINE (+)-(2S,3S)-3,4-dimethyl-2-phenylmorpholine
PHENOBARBITAL 5-ethyl-5-phenylbarbituric acid
PHENTERMINE a,a-dimethylphenethylamine
PINAZEPAM 7-chloro-1,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-1-(2-propynyl)-2H-1.4-
benzo-
diazepin-2-one
PIPRADOL a,a-diphenyl-2-piperidinemethanol
PRAZEPAM 7-chloro-1-(cyclopylmethyl)-1,3-dihydro-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
PROPYLHEXE-
DRINE N,a-dimethylcyclohexane ethylamine
PYROVALERONE 4'-methyl-2-( 1-pyrrolidinyl)valerophenone
SECBUTABARBITAL 5-sec-butyl-5-ethylbarbituric acid
TEMAZEPAM 7-chloro-1,3-dihydro-3-hydroxy-1-methyl-5-phenyl-2H-1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
TETRAZEPAM 7-chloro-5-(1-cyclohexen-1-yl)-1,3dihydro-1-methyl-2H-
1,4-
benzodiazepin-2-one
TRIAZOLAM 8-chloro-6-(o-chlorophenyl)-1-methyl-4H-s-triazolo[4,3-a]
[1,4]benzodiazepine
VINYLBITAL 5-(1-methylbutyl)-5-vinylbarbituric acid

APPENDIX “G”
(To PGO No. 306)

SECOND SCHEDULE
____________
Act No. 31 of 1997 Sch.
TABLE I TABLE II
Ephedrine Acetic anhydride
Ergometrine Acetone
Ergotamine Anthranilic acid
Lysergic acid Ethyl ether
1-phenyl-2-propanone Phertylacetic acid

705
 P.G.O. No. 306
Pseudoephedrine Piperidine
The salts of the substances listed in this Table The salts of the substances listed in this
whenever the existence of such salts is Table whenever the existence of such salts
possible. is possible.

________
THIRD SCHEDULE
_________
PROHIBITED PLANTS
(Section 2(1))
1. Cannabis
2. Coca bush.
3. Papaver somniferum (opium poppy).
4. Papaver setigerum.

706
 P.G.O. No. 307
RAIDS – GAMING Comment [U216]: New PGO. Bold it, and
align right. Increase space above and below
1. Every Police Officer who has reason to suspect the existence of a gaming activity heading
contrary to the Gaming Act 2003 shall make an immediate report to his O/C. District or to the
O/C. Station if the O/C. District is not immediately available.
2. (a) When an O/C. District or O/C. Station receives information that gaming is
taking place in any building, he shall make inquiries and if he has reason to believe that he
building is being used contrary to the Gaming Act 2003, he shall apply personally to the
Magistrate for a search warrant under the Act. Unauthorized applications for warrants are
forbidden.
(b) Officers i/c. District Headquarter Station will always refer to the O/C.
District, if available, before taking action under this paragraph.
3. Officers above the rank of Assistant Inspector may exercise the powers contained in
Section 34 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 R.E.2002 and raid
without a warrant if a Magistrate is not available if, for any other valid reason, it is
considered essential that the premises should be raided before a search warrant can be
obtained, provided that the conditions laid down in the two Sections under reference are
completely fulfilled. These powers may only be used when a Magistrate is not available and
when delay in searching for one would prejudice the chances of a successful raid.
4. O/C. Districts and O/C. Stations are responsible that raids are carried out by raiding
parties of sufficient strength to take effective action. They must invariably refer to a superior
officer before taking action if they consider either that their resources are inadequate or that a
case is of such importance that they should not take action without reference to
higher authority.
5. Every police raiding party shall be commanded by a Gazetted Officer or an Inspector
or by the O/C. Station. Under law, the officer who is named in the warrant shall personally
take charge of the raiding party.
6. Offices in charge of police raiding parties shall exercise strict control of all those
taking part and shall prevent any abuse of power. They shall check all members of raiding
parties before and after raids take place to ensure that they are not carrying money or valuable
articles on their person.
7. Police carrying out gaming raids shall make every effort to collect all available
evidence against the gaming house-keeper. All unauthorised gaming paraphernalia and stake
money shall be seized and rent receipts shall, if possible, be secured as evidence that the
occupier, as tenant, is the keeper. All seized articles (including stake money) shall be handed
over to the O/C. Station by the officer-in-charge of the raiding party as soon as he returns to
Station for labelling, recording and storage as exhibits in accordance with P.G.O. No. 229.
8. Any person seen by any Police Officer committing an offence under the Gaming Act
during the course of a raid shall be arrested with a view to prosecution.
9. Any Police Officer may arrest without warrant any person found gaming in any public
place contrary to law and may seize all instruments or appliances for gaming found in such
public place or on the person of those arrested. No attempt shall be made to arrest street
gamblers unless the police are in sufficient strength to take effective action. Beat constables
observing street gambling shall report back to their Station by the quickest possible means
and the senior officer available in the Station shall at once send out enough members of the
Force to carryout the arrest.
10. No member of the Inspectorate or Rank & File may enter any gaming house except :-
on the instructions of a Gazetted Officer;
under a valid warrant;

707
 P.G.O. No. 307
in pursuit of a person whose arrest he may legally effect.
11 Under no circumstances may any member of the Inspectorate or Rank & File, unless
acting under the direct orders of a Gazetted Officer, enter a suspected gaming house or cause
another person to enter therein in order to verify information that gambling is in progress.
12. All gambling warrants shall be returned to the Magistrate as soon as they are executed
and, in any case, not later than ten days after issue.
13. Regional Commanders are responsible for the detection and suppression of gambling
within their Commands. They shall use all lawful means at their disposal to detect gambling
houses and prosecute the keepers
.

708
 P.G.O. No. 308
RAIDS – UNLAWFUL LOCAL LIQUOR Comment [U217]: New PGO, Bold, align
right and increase space above and below
1. Every Police Officer who has reason to suspect that any premises are being used for heading
the unlawful manufacture, storage or sale of local liquor shall make an immediate report to
his O/C. District or to the O/C. Station if the O/C. District is not immediately available.
2. (a) When an O/C. District or O/C. Station receives information relating to
offences under the Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap 77 R.E. 2002 he shall apply personally to the
Magistrate for a search warrant or shall instruct another gazetted officer or Inspector to do so.
Un- authorised applications for warrants are forbidden.
(b) Officer i/c. District Headquarter Stations will always refer to the O/C.
District, if available, before taking action under this paragraph.
3. Officers of or above the rank of Assistant Inspector may exercise the powers
contained in Section 34 of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 2002 and
raid without a warrant if a Magistrate is not available or if, for any other valid reasons, it is
considered essential that the premises should be raided before a search warrant can be
obtained, provided that the conditions laid down in the two sections under reference are
completely fulfilled. These powers may only be used when a Magistrate is not available and
when delay in searching for one would prejudice the chances of a successful raid.
4. O/C. Districts and O/C. Stations are responsible that raids are carried out by raiding
parties of sufficient strength to take effective action. They must invariably refer to a superior
officer before taking action if they consider either that their resources are inadequate or that a
case is of such importance that they should not take action without reference to higher
authority.
5. (a) Every police raiding party shall be commanded by a Gazetted Officer or an
Inspector or by the O/C. Station. As a general rule, the officer who applied for the warrant
shall personally take charge of the raiding party.
(b) Officers in charge of police raiding parties shall exercise strict control of
all those taking part and shall prevent any abuse of power. They shall check all members of
raiding parties before and after raids take place to ensure that they are not carrying money or
valuable articles on their person.
6. Police carrying out unlawful local liquor raids shall make every effort to collect all
available evidence against the owners or possessors. When any stills or large tubs of mash are
seized but are too heavy to move to the nearest police station, only sufficient fittings and
apparatus should be removed to prove the offence in Court. The condensing tube of the still,
any bottles or liquor from every immovable container shall always be collected. The
remainder of the apparatus shall be placed under guard and the officer-in-charge of the
raiding party shall inform the Magistrate and ask for further instructions on its disposal.
7. (a) Local liquor and suspected local liquor which has been seized during police
raids shall not be sent for analysis until the persons accused of possession or ownership have
been brought before a Magistrate.
(b) If the accused pleads guilty, analysis will not be necessary.
(c) If the accused pleads not guilty the prosecuting officer will
arrange for either :-
(i) the attendance of expert witnesses who can state that the liquor in
question is known to them as one of the liquors included in the definition;
or (ii) the analysis of the suspected local liquors.
8. (a) The liquor requiring analysis shall be forwarded by the O/C. Station,
properly packed, labelled and escorted in accordance with P.G.O. No. 229.
(b) The Government Chemist will, in due course, return the exhibits and the
result of the analysis to the O/C. Station concerned.
(c) The O/C. Station will then arrange for the prosecution to
proceed and will produce exhibits and the analyst’s report as evidence.
9. No member of the Inspectorate or Rank & File may enter any premises suspected to
contain illegal local liquor, except :-
(a) on the instructions of a Gazetted Officer;

709
 P.G.O. No. 308
(b) under a valid warrant
(c) in pursuit of a person whose arrest he may legally effect;
(d) to prevent disorder, drunkenness and other offences in accordance with the
Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap. 77 R.. E.. 2002.
(e) These powers will normally be exercised by Inspectors only.

10. Under no circumstances may any member of the Rank & File, unless acting under the
direct orders of a Gazetted Officer, enter any premises suspected to contain illegal local
liquor, or cause another person to enter therein, in order to verify information that illegal
local liquor dealing is in progress.

11. All warrants issued under the Intoxicating Liquor Act, Cap. 77 R.E. 2002 shall be
returned to the Magistrate as soon as they are executed and in any case not later than 10 days
after issue.
12. Regional Commanders are responsible for the detection and suppression of illegal
local liquor dealings within their commands.

710
 P.G.O. No. 309
REPORTS – REPORT BOOK Comment [U218]: New PGO. Align right,
bold and increase space below and above
1. (a) Report Book (PF. 162) shall be maintained in the Charge Room of every heading
Police Station and shall not normally be removed therefrom.

(b) In addition, Report Book for traffic reports shall be maintained by every
Traffic Branch attached to Class “A” Stations.

2. Reports shall be received and recorded in the Report Book by the officer on Charge
Room duty under the general direction of the O/C. Station. The latter is held
responsible that every report is recorded correctly and that all action required under
the various headings in the Report Book is taken and recorded.

3. Every report made to every Police Station, whether verbally or in writing, shall be
recorded in the Report Book, irrespective of whether the report is of a trifling nature
or does not disclose evidence of any offence. No report shall be refused or not
recorded.

4. (a) Every report made to every Police Station shall be entered in the Report
Book as soon as it is received.

(b) All necessary police action shall be taken as soon as a report is made and
shall not be delayed while the report is being recorded.

(c) Delay in recording a report is permissible ONLY in emergency when

urgent police action is necessary to prevent the commission of an offence,
the escape of criminals, or to bring medical aid to injured persons, etc.

5. A Police Officer who receives any report, or takes any action which renders a report
necessary, shall cause an entry to be made in the Report Book at the earliest possible
opportunity.

6. Every report made of any offence or incident which has occurred outside the
jurisdiction of the Station where the report was made MUST be accepted and
recorded in that Station’s Report Book. Necessary steps to transfer the case to the
responsible Station may be taken only after all immediate action has been taken by
the Station receiving the original report. Only the following reports shall be
transferred :-

(a) Reports which disclose or appear to disclose an offence;

(b) Sudden death; and

(c) Traffic accidents.

Any other report which, in the opinion of the O/C. Station where the report was
made, should be transferred. Reports so transferred shall be accepted without
question by the receiving O/C. Station.

7. The following details shall also be recorded in the Report Book :-

(a) Police action taken on the receipt of EACH and EVERY report Column 6.

(b) Particulars of EVERY person accused of an offence, whether process is by

arrest or summons – Column 10.

711
 P.G.O. No. 309
(c) Action finally taken against EVERY person accused of an offence –
Columns 12 and 17.

(e) Reasons for the release by police without prosecution or ANY person under
arrest – Column 17.

The final disposal of EVERY report. NO OMISSIONS ARE

PERMISSIBLE – Column 17.

8. Reports may be made verbally in person, or by telephone or in writing. The

substance and relevant details of each report shall be recorded in the Report Book in
the following manner :-

(a) Verbal Reports in person or by telephone shall be recorded with due regard
to paragraphs 12-18 of this Order. Care must be taken to obtain all the
relevant details, particularly details of the name and address of the
informant. If the report relates to the commission of an offence or to any
serious matter the informant shall be invited to call at the Station to sign
the entry in the Report Book. If the informant refuses to call, a note to the
effect shall be made below the report in Column 5 of the Report Book and
the officer receiving the report shall sign it.

(b) Written reports received at a Station shall be transcribed into the Report
Book. A note shall be made below the report in Column 5 of the Report
Book to the effect that the report was in writing and not in person. The
Police Officer recording the report in the Report Book shall mark on the
written report the date and time of receipt, the manner of delivering it, the
name and address of the person delivering it (if practicable) and the Report
Book serial number. Written reports shall be Field in a Written Report File
for eventual inclusion in any investigation papers.

(c) The substance or important details of any report, whether the report is made
in person or by telephone or in writing, shall be recorded in the Report Book
(In any criminal offence arising from a report, full details shall be recorded
in the written statement of the person making the report). Examples of the
Form the record in Column 5 of the Report Book should take are contained
in the written instructions in the front of every Report Book.

9. The following reports shall be recorded in the Report Book :-

(a) Every cognizable and non-cognizable offence.

(b) Offences allegedly committed within the district served by the Police
Station of which the first intimation received is by way of a warrant or
summons sent for execution.

(c) Complaints of offences referred by the Courts to the police for

investigation.

(d) Every arrest carried out by a Police Officer or a member of the public. In
this connection, details of all subsequent arrests relating to an offence which
has already been recorded the Report Book shall be entered, if space
permits, in Column 6 of the original offence entry. If there is insufficient
space in Column 6, details of subsequent arrests shall be recorded as new

712
 P.G.O. No. 309
reports, cross-referenced to the original offence entry and vice versa.

(e) Every raid carried out in the areas for which a Station is responsible. The
officer-in-charge of the raid is responsible for making the report.

(f) Complaints made to Police Officers on duty by members of the public.

(g) Complaints made to Police Officers on duty by members of the public.

(h) Sudden and unnatural deaths.

(i) Missing persons.

(g) Traffic accidents

(h) Accidents to police vehicles or police launches.

(j) Injuries or accidents to members of the public or Police Officers.

(k) Requests for medical or other assistance.

(l) Fires.

(m) The discharge of a police firearm, whether accidental or not.

(n) Lost or found property.

(o) Lost or damage of police or other Government property

(p) Any complaint made by a member of the public.

(q) Any other matter reported by a member of the public to the police.

10. Every report entered in the Report Book shall be given a Serial Number, starting at
1 on 1st of January each year.

11. The following rules shall be observed for the numbering of reports :-

(a) When two or more persons are concerned in a single offence, such as house-
breaking or unlawful assembly, ONE report only shall be recorded and
ONE serial number allotted to it.

(b) When a subsequent report relating to a previous report discloses the

commission of other offences, then an entry shall be made in the Report
Book for EACH such offence and a separate serial number shall be allotted
to EACH REPORT.

(c) If the subsequent investigations into a report disclose that other additional
offences unconnected with the report have been committed by the
person(s) mentioned in that report, then additional entries shall be made in
the Report Book for EACH such offence and a separate serial number shall
be allotted to each. In every case, the original report number shall be
quoted.

12. Every report shall be entered in chronological order and the day, date, time and
place the report was made shall be entered in the appropriate Column. Reports must

713
 P.G.O. No. 309
be concise and accurate. Unnecessary details shall be avoided.

13. Every person making a report shall be questioned closely by the officer on Charge
Room duty to ensure that all relevant facts have been disclosed.

14. Every report must be read over to the person who made it before he or she is asked
to sign it. Any correction made by the informant shall be entered in red ink and
initialled by him or her before the report is signed.

15. (a) Every report made verbally at a Station relating to the commission of an
offence shall be signed by the person making the report in Column 5 of the
Report Book.

(b) Every other report made to the police shall, if possible, be signed by the
person making the report.

(c) If the person making a report cannot write, his thumb-print or finger prints
shall be placed at the bottom of the report and countersigned by the officer
on Charge Room duty.

(d) If the person making the report refuses to sign, a note of such refusal shall
be made with any reasons at the end of the entry in Column 5.

(e) Every report shall be signed by the officer who recorded in the Report
Book. Rank and number shall be recorded.

(f) If an interpreter is used, he shall also sign the report.

16. (a) No interpolations, deletions and other corrections may be made to any
report after it has been signed.

(b) If any mistakes are subsequently discovered in a report or if a report is

found to be false, an entry shall be made in the Report Book as a separate
report. The original number ONLY (e.g., Ref. R.B. No. ..........................)
shall be given in Column 1 of the Report Book. A new serial number shall
not be allotted. An entry will be made in Column 17 of the original entry
giving a reference to the fresh entry.

17. The following entries shall be made when recording reports in the Report Book :-

(a) Serial number;

(b) Date and time the report was made;

(c) Particulars of the informant; and

(d) Concise particulars of the report. All relevant information must be obtained
from the informant in the following order :-

(i) Date the incident report occurred;

(ii) Where it occurred.;

(iii) Description of the incident;

714
 P.G.O. No. 309
(iv) Description, race or tribe, names and addresses, if known, of any
persons alleged to have committed any offence in connection with
the report. Each suspect shall be numbered;

(v) Brief summary and estimated total value of all property stolen or
found;

(vi) Description of any injuries;

(vii) An exact itemized list of property reported lost with a brief

description and estimated value of each item; and

(viii) Any other relevant particulars.

(e) A note at the end of the report in Column 5 if the informant appears to be
unduly excited, intoxicated, or has been injured, or if his clothing is
disordered, or if there is anything unusual about the informant’s appearance
or behaviour.

18. The following immediate action shall be taken by the officer on Charge Room duty
as soon as he has recorded details of a report :-

(a) Note in Column 6 of the Report Book the immediate steps taken by him and
the Police Officers to deal with the report.

(b) Record the particulars of each person accused of an offence in Column 10.
If there is more than one accused, a number shall be given to each, starting
from 1 for each report:

(i) Ali s/o Mohamed

(ii) Binti d/o Rajabu

(iii) Sheikh Salim Obedi

(v) These numbers’ without further particulars of names and addresses

shall be used in Columns 8-15.

(c) Show in Column 12 which of the arrested person are detained in cells or
released on bail.

19. The O/C. Station or the officer investigating the report will, as soon as possible, fill
in the details required in the remaining columns of the Report Book. He will :-

(a) Classify any criminal offence disclosed in Column 7. This will be inserted
in soft pencil in the first instance and inked in on the final disposal of the
case;

(b) Draw a red line down the left-hand side of all entries in Column 5 referring
to cognizable offences;

(c) draw a red line down the left-hand side of all entries in Column 5 referring
to cognizable offences;

(d) record the action taken against each accused in Column 12: the immediate

715
 P.G.O. No. 309
disposal of every arrested person shall be shown in this Column or in
Column 17;

(e) note details of instructions given or action taken to deal with each report in
Column 6;

(f) insert the required cross-reference to the Bail Book, Prisoners’ Property
Receipt Book, Exhibits Register in Columns 12, 13, and 14;

(g) allocate an Investigation Serial Number in Column 15 whenever a Case

File, minor offence docket, or traffic file is opened. Serial numbers will start
at 1 on January 1st of each year and run in strict sequence to December 31st.
Stations which maintain Traffic Report Books will prefix all traffic
investigation serial numbers with the letters “TF”;

(h) note final disposal of every report in Column 17;

(i) pending final disposal of any report, make a pencilled entry in Column 17
showing progress. The words listed below shall be used when making such
temporary entries :-
Comment [U219]: RE WRITE; SEE
“Case File forward for instructions to .............................................” ATTACHED EXTRACT FOR FORMAT
“Under investigation”
“Awaiting hearing of Date not fixed or
fixed for ......................... (date)”
“Preliminary Inquiry – Fixed for ...................... (date)”
“Awaiting trial in :-
High Court
Or
Magistrates’ Court
Or
Date not fixed or
Local Court
fixed for ........................... (date)”.

Any existing circumstance which does not fit in with above shall be made the
subject of an appropriate entry. Pencilled entries will be made in soft pencil
and will be rubbed out once they cease to apply.

20. Finally the O/C. Station shall record details of the disposal of each report in Column
17. The following record only shall be made in this Column:

(a) (i) When the O/C. District or O/C. Station has decided that the report
should be treated as trivial, false or civil (i.e. in accordance with para.
2 (a) of P.G.O. No. 312) and that no further action is necessary
........................ N.F.A.

(ii) When a report obviously does not contain any reference to an offence
(i.e. lost property, accidental fires, accidents etc.)

716
 P.G.O. No. 309
(b) When the O/C. District or O/C. Station has decided that no offence has been
disclosed (see also paragraph 2 (a) of P.G.O. No. 312) ......................................
N.F.A.

(c) In cases where convictions and/or acquittals and /or discharges in the Courts
are returned :-

“Convicted on .................................................... and sentenced to

............................................................................. (give date and sentence)”

“Acquitted on ...................................................... (give date)

“Discharged on ..................................................(give date) at .............................................

(give place)”.

All acquittals shall be entered in red ink.

(d) In cases transferred to another Station, an entry :-

“Transferred to .......................................... on .............................................. (give station to

which transferred and date)”, shall be made.

(e) In cases closed undetected “Closed Undetected”.

(f) In cases in which the Attorney-General has entered a nolle prosequi: - “Closed
– nolle prosequi entered”.

(g) In cases when accused is dead or dies during the investigation or during the
Court proceedings or is found insane :- “Closed – accused dead” or “found
insane”

(h) In cases when a person is brought before a Court under the Mental Diseases
Act, Cap. 98 R.E. 2002 :- “Certified insane” or “Discharged”.

(g) In cases where a person is arrested by a Police Officer on a warrant not

issued on police application: - “Transferred to Court”.

21. (a) The officer authorising an entry in Column 17 shall sign that entry at the
earliest opportunity.

(b) Every entry of “No further action” and “No offence disclosed” (vide para 20
(a) and (b)) shall be countersigned by a Gazetted Officer at the earliest
opportunity.

(c) In the case or reports which obviously do not disclose offences, such as
losses of identity cards, accidental fires, accidents, etc., no entries shall be
made in Columns 7-14 and 16.

(d) Interim action and final disposal of every report must be shown in the Report
Book.

22. (a) When a case is transferred from the station which received the original
report, a copy of the relevant Report Book entry and the Investigation Diary
or Diaries, together with any other papers and exhibits shall be sent to the
Station responsible for the investigation.

717
 P.G.O. No. 309
(b) An exact copy of the original report shall be recorded in the Report Book of
the Station to which the report has been transferred and a note of the transfer
entered Column 6. All relevant Columns shall be completed. A new Report
Book serial number shall be allotted.

23. Reports recorded in Mobile Police Station Report Books, in accordance with P.G.O.
No. 20 will be dealt with in the following manner :-

(a) Cases which are handed over for prosecution or further investigation by a
Mobile Police Station to the District Police Station before the Mobile Police
Station finishes its operations in the district, will be treated as transferred
cases, in accordance with paragraph 22 above. An entry “Case transferred on
......................... to ............................... Police Station” will be made in
Column 6 of the mobile police station Report Book and all further action will
be recorded in the police Station Report Book.

(b) All other cases handed over by a Mobile Police Station to the District station
on its departure from the district will be dealt with as follows :-

(c) The mobile police station Report Book will be handed over to the O/C.
District and will be retained by him until the Mobile Police Station returns to
his District.

(d) The total number of cases, excluding those referred to in (a) above, in the
mobile police station Report Book will be shown under Column 5 of the
district station Report Book by an entry “........................... (number) of Case
Files ...................... Minor Offence Dockets and ...................... Traffic files
handed over by ................................ (name) O/C. Mobile Police Station”.
Report particulars will not be copied into District Station Report Books.
Investigation serial numbers will be allocated to each case, in accordance
with paragraph 19 (g) and will be entered as a block (e.g., 14-25) under
Column 15 of the Report Book.

(e) The investigation serial numbers, which have been allocated in accordance
with (ii) above, will be shown in Column 15 against each corresponding
entry in the mobile Police Station Report Book.

(f) All subsequent action on these cases will be recorded on the Mobile Police
Station Report Book and no further details will be shown in the District
Station Report Book.

24. (a) At 0800 hours each morning, O/C. Districts and stations shall examine all
entries made in the Report Book during the last twenty four hours and shall
ensure that all the prescribed entries are made. They will initial the Report
Book below the last entry when satisfied that all is in order.

(b) O/C. Districts and visiting and inspecting Gazetted Officers shall examine
every entry made in the Report Book. They shall, in particular, check the
cross references to other official books and shall ensure that the correct police
action has been taken on every recorded report. Reasons for the release of
prisoners by police without prosecution shall always be checked. The Report
Book shall always be initialled by the inspecting officer.

25. Copies of entries in the Report Book shall not be furnished to any person without
the consent of the O/C. District. All entries in a Report Book shall be treated as

718
 P.G.O. No. 309
confidential.

26. In no circumstances may members of the public who come to the police to
give reports be kept waiting unnecessarily. Reports shall be taken in the order they
are made EXCEPT that reports of the recent commission of any serious crime or of
any severe accident or disaster shall be given immediate preference. The public shall
be treated with utmost Courtesy and their reports and complaints given careful
attention by all ranks.

27. The following shall be recorded as very serious disciplinary offences and may entail
dismissal of the offenders :-

(a) Failure or refusal to record a report.

(b) Unjustifiable delay in recording a report.

28. Report Books shall be destroyed five years after the date of the last entry

719
 P.G.O. No. 310
REPORT – DAILY AND WEEKLY Comment [U220]: New PGO, bold, align
right and increase space below and above
1. (a) A daily report, on Form PF. 172, shall be prepared, in quadruplicate, by the heading
O/C. every Class “A” and “B” Station. Each report shall contain a brief extract of EVERY
entry in the REPORT BOOK for each 24 hour periods (0800-0759 hours) referring to major
incidents and offences for which a Case File or Minor Offence Docket must be opened ,
excepting only those entries listed in para. 2. One copy of the report will be dispatched each
day (or as quickly as possible if daily dispatch is impossible) to C.I.D. Headquarters,
Regional Headquarters and O/C,. District.
(b) A Weekly Report on Form PF. 173 covering each 7 day period, Monday
0800-Monday 0759, shall similarly be prepared by the O/C. of class “C” Stations and copies
sent to C.I.D. Headquarters, Regional Headquarters, District Headquarters and Sub-District
Headquarters.
2. The following types of reports will not be included in the Daily and Weekly
Reports:-
(a) Traffic offences, except those connected with accidents and drunken and
dangerous driving.
(b) Simple assaults.
(c) Nuisances.
(d) Only the Daily and Weekly totals of such reports shall be shown at the
bottom of Forms PF. 172 and PF. 173, e.g.
Traffic offences 48
Simple assaults 9
Nuisances 2
3. Daily and weekly Reports shall be made out on Forms PF. 172 and PF. 173 in the
following manner :-
(a) (i) in the first two Columns of the Daily Report enter the Report Book
number and time the report was made; and
(ii) In the first three Columns of the Weekly Report enter the report
book number and date and time the report was made.
(b) In the third column (fourth column for Weekly Report) enter and underline
the classification of the Report (e.g., theft, fire, suicide, etc.) then given very brief particulars
of each report. Unnecessary words must be avoided and only the basic facts of each report
shall be given. Names of persons, places and addresses shall be in block letters.
Understandable abbreviations as set out at Appendix “A” may be used.
(c) In the fourth column (fifth column for Weekly Report) show the number of
persons arrested in connection with each report.
4. (a) Daily reports, in triplicate, shall be typed in Swahili/English at 0800 hours
each morning and shall be signed by the O/C. District or O/C. Station.
(b) Weekly Reports (in quadruplicate) shall be typed in Swahili/English.
They should only be written in ink or indelible pencil if no typewriter is available and shall
be signed by the O/C District or O/C Station.
5. Stations with nothing in their Report Books to enter in their Daily and Weekly
Reports will send in a Nil Return on Form PF. 172 or 173.
6. Wherever possible, clerks or Inspectors shall be detailed to make out the Daily and
Weekly Reports.

720
 P.G.O. No. 310
7. (a) Regional Commanders shall make suitable local routing arrangements for
Daily and Weekly Reports. In some cases it may be advisable or necessary to route the Police
Headquarters copy through regional headquarters.
(b) Some stations, by reason of bad weather or poor communications, will not
be able to send through their Daily and Weekly Reports on time. If delay is likely to be
protracted and radio is available, details for the Daily and Weekly Reports will be sent by
signal to Regional Headquarters for typing and onward transmission to C.I.D. Headquarters.
(c) Regional Commanders are responsible that all possible steps are taken to
copy with this order. They may however, except any Class “C” Station which clearly cannot
submit Weekly Reports within a reasonable time.
(d) Subject to the inescapable modifications referred to in this paragraph,
Daily and Weekly Reports must be prepared and dispatched on time or at least with the
minimum of delay.
8. Daily and Weekly Reports shall be examined with care by Regional Commanders
and by O/C. Districts and Sub-District. They should query any case of failure or apparent
failure to take proper action and shall, in particular, call for special reports on any item which
appears to be of special interest or which has not been dealt with to their satisfaction.
9. Daily and Weekly Reports shall be preserved for one year and then destroyed.
10. Specimen Daily and Weekly Reports are attached at Appendices “B” and “C” for
guidance.

APPENDIX “A” Comment [U221]: See attached Appendix

as example. An appendix should cover full
(To P.G.O. No. 310) page.

A Africa INJ Injury

ARB Arab J Juvenile

Comment [U222]: The codes are wrongly
ASN Asian KD Kenya arranged. See attachment.

AMM Ammunition LET Killed

ARM Firearm M Letter

ACC Accused MATL Male

BICY Bicycle MOT Material

BG Bag MZE Motive

CO Comorian MV Maize

CASL Casualties MC Motor vehicle

COF Coffee PROP Motor cycle

CAL Calibre PRS Property

CTS Cents RPT (S) Pairs

CON Confesses, Confession, etc. REG Report(s)

721
 P.G.O. No. 310
COMPL Complainant RADIO Registered

DEPT Department REV Wireless set

DEP Deposition RECD Revolver

DRV Driver S/MACHINE Received

D Dead SRS Sewing machine

E European SLT Serious

ENQ Enquiries SG Slight

EXPL Explosives SHS. Shotgun. S.B.D.B.

ENV Envelop(e) ST Shillings

F Female SUG Street

FL Floor T Sugar

1st First T FL Tanzania

2nd Second TV Top floor

GRAM Gramophone T/BOY Total value

G FL Ground floor U Turn boy

HRS Hours V Uganda

HD Head W Value

HSE House WATCH/W With

H/Bag Hand bag WATH/P Wrist watch

HOSP Hospital WIT(S) Pocket watch

INFN Information YRS Witness (es)

APPENDIX “B” Comment [U223]: See example of

attachement. Font sixe, text, arrangement
(To P.G.O. No. 310) etc

(PF. 173)

TANZANIA POLICE
WEEKLY REPORT
Report at GEITA STATION for week ending Monday, 6th July, 2004

722
 P.G.O. No. 310

Serial No. Date Time Reports No. of Arrests

of Report

42 29/6 1235 hrs GAMING.

1200 hrs. D/C. No. A. 2345 arrested 3 A.
Ms. SIKUKUU ST. which reads :- At 1200
3. A.Ms.
hrs Det. Cons. No. A. 2345 arrested three
African males who were gambling in
SIKUKUU STREET.

44 1/7 1330 hrs. THEFT.

E.F. reports h/bag from m/v HIGH
STREET. 1200 hrs. T/V.92-, which reads :-
European female reports theft of handbag
from motor vehicle in HIGH STREET at1 A.J.
1200 hrs. total value Shs. 92/=

48 2/7 1600 hrs. SHOP-BREAKING.

ASN. Shop 6 HIGH ST., Prop T/V.
1,800/= Prop. Rec’d. which reads :- Arab
ARB. M.
male, arrested for breaking into Asian shop
in HIGH STREET. Property total value
Shs. 1,800/= stolen and recovered.

51 5/7 2199 hrs. MURDER.

A.F.J. knife, a.m. 26th KIJU VILL. Mot.
Sex. C.I.D. Inv. Which reads :- African girl
ARB. M.
murdered by stabbing on morning of 26th at
KIJU VILLAGE. Motive Sex. Accused
Arab male arrested C.I.D. investigating.

APPENDIX “C”
(To P.G.O. No. 310)

TANZANIA POLICE
DAILY REPORTS
Reports as Msimbazi Station for 24 hours ended 0759 hrs, on 6.7.04

Serial No. of Time Brief particulars of report and offence disclosed No. of Arrests
Reports

1083 1015 THEFT. 1 AJ.

PAULINE JONES, E. H/bag snatched 0915 –
KICHWELE ST. T/V. 120,000/-

723
 P.G.O. No. 310
1084 1130 ACCIDENT. 1 ARB M.
Taxi and bicycle SIKUKUU cyclist ROBERT
BERTIL 16 yrs. KD.

1087 1400 FIRE

SELEMAN DEVJI Shop. LIVINGSTONE ST.
Gutted, T/V. 20,000/= 1 A.F. Inj.

1088 1910 EXPLOSION.

XX Explosive Store. ILALA Minor damage,
No. Casl.

1092 0700 BURGLARY. 1 ASN. M.

JAMES R. SMITH, E. House, 26 CAMERON
ROAD Watches, suits, silverware stolen T/V..
100,600/=

724
 P.G.O. No. 311
REPORTS – IMMEDIATE ACTION ON RECEIPT OF Comment [U224]: New PGO. Bold, align
right and increase space above and below
General heading
Comment [U225]: Subheading, align left,
1. Regional Commanders and O/C. Districts, Sub-Districts and Stations are reduce space below,
particularly responsible that :-
(a) immediate action is taken to deal with every report made at each Police
Station under their control;
(b) immediate action under proper supervision is taken with available police
resources to investigate crime, incidents, accidents etc., and to protect life and property;
(c) early notification of serious crimes and incidents is passed without delay
to their superior officers.
2. O/C. Districts, Sub-Districts and Stations are responsible for ensuring that each
report is dealt with quickly by a specific officer and that Case Files or Minor Offence
Dockets are opened in accordance with P.G.O. No. 286.
3. Preliminary investigations into all crime and incidents referred to in this order shall
be handled where possible by a Gazetted Officer, unless the Regional Commander orders
otherwise. Under no circumstances may N.C.O.s be left to handle preliminary investigations.
O/C. Districts shall ensure that a Gazetted Officer or an Inspector proceeds to the scene as
soon as the first report is received. Regional Commanders will be informed if no Gazetted
Officer or Inspector is available so that they can send help from elsewhere.
PART I
Immediate action on receipt of a report Comment [U226]: Subheading, align left,
reduce space below,
4 (a) Charge Room Officers are responsible for the receipt and recording (in
the Report Book) of every report made to Police Stations and for initiating immediate action
thereon by the appropriate officer.
(b) They will discharge their responsibility in the following manner :-
(c) When any person wishes to make a report at a Police Station, the Charge
Room Officer will record all relevant details in the Report Book in accordance with P.G.O.
No. 309.
(d) If any report refers or appears to refer in any way to the commission of
an offence or to any accident or incident which may require police investigation, the Charge
Room Officer, before recording the report in the Report Book will insert a first Information
Report Form (PF. 102A) and a sheet of carbon paper immediately below the left-hand page
of the Report Book. He will then record the report in the Report Book, writing with sufficient
firmness to ensure that a clear carbon copy of the report is made in the First Information
Report Form.
(e) The Charge Room Officer will then remove the First Information Report
form from the Report Book and will pass it at once to the inspector on duty (or to the O/C.
Station if there is none) for immediate action by him.
5. (a) As soon as the Duty Inspector (or O/C. Station) receives the First
Information Report form from the Charge Room Officer, he will start immediate
investigations, provided that he considers that he can handled the case or incident with his
own resources, and provided further that it does not fall within the categories of incidents or
crimes listed in Appendix “A”.
(b) If the duty inspector considers that he cannot deal with the report
himself, or if the report refers to an incident or crime listed in Appendix “A”, he will refer the
First Information Report without delay to this O/C. Station or O/C. District or Sub-District, or
to such other officers may be authorised to act on their behalf.

725
 P.G.O. No. 311
6. O/C. Stations, Sub-Districts or Districts, are then responsible for informing their
superiors in accordance with paragraphs 7 and 9 of this Order if the incident or crime falls
within the categories listed in Appendix “A” and for directing what further action should be
taken. They will either :-
(a) Return the First Information Report to the Duty Inspector with written
instructions thereon to continue the investigation if the case is not too complex and they
consider that the Duty Inspector should handle it himself;
(b) refer the first information report to the O/C. C.I.D. Unit (if any) and
direct him to take over the case, if they consider that specialised C.I.D. investigation is
necessary; or,
(c) take over the investigation themselves.
Notification of serious incidents and crimes
7. (a) As soon as a report is received of any serious incident or crime listed in
Appendix “A”, the O/C. Station receiving the report will endeavour to find out all the
available facts from the person reporting to him and will, at once, send a First Warning
Message, giving a bare outline of the facts of the report. All such messages are to be prefixed
by the words :-
“First warning message .......................” Comment [U227]: Remove roman (b) here

and the following format should be used when and where possible and
applicable :- Comment [U228]: This is continuation of
earlier para. Align left.

(i) type of crime; Comment [U229]: Note continuity of

letters. Second proof does not show so.
(ii) race of victim;
(iii) race of offender;
(iv) place of offence;
(v) date of offence;
(vi) whether accused arrested or known;
(vii) value of property involved;
(viii) motive, if offence against person; and
(ix) if victim or offender is notable or notorious, his status should
be quoted.
(b) First Warning Message will be sent by telephone, telegram of other
available means to :- Comment [U230]: REMOVE ROMAN (C)
HERE, insert (b)
(i) District Headquarters; and
(ii) Regional Headquarters (for the attention of the Regional
Commander and the Regional C.I.D. Officer).
(c) On receipt of a First Warning Message, the Regional has been made, as Comment [U231]: DCP??? Old PGO. (no.
provided for in paras. 5 and 6, and the facts are found to be in variance with those in the First 314) Reads……….Commander shall add
any useful comments he can make and
Warning Message, then a second warning message will be sent giving the true facts with the then re-transmit the message to the
same distribution as for the First Warning Message. Director of Criminal Investigation….”The
rest of the text has been repeated in para 8
8. When the preliminary investigation has been made, as provided for in paras. 5 and Plse confirm
6, and the facts are found to be in variance with those in the First Warning Message, then a
Second Warning Message will be sent giving the true facts with the same distribution as for
the First Warning Message.

726
 P.G.O. No. 311
9. As soon after the preliminary investigation as possible, and in no case later than 48
hours after receipt of the initial report, a First Crime Report (PF. 4) in the case of serious
crime, or a First Incident Report in the case of incidents in letter form, shall be prepared by
the investigating officer giving a full account of the crime or incident and sent by airmail or
quickest possible means to :-
(a) District Headquarters;
(b) Regional Headquarters (for information of the Regional Commander and
the Regional C.I.D)
(c) Director of Criminal Investigation.
In the case of the First Incident Report the Regional Commander will forward his
comments or recommendation.
Supervision of preliminary action and investigation Comment [U232]: Subheading, align left,
reduce space below,
10. Personal supervision by responsible Police Officers of preliminary police
investigations or other action is vital. Therefore :-
(a) Regional Commanders and Regional C.I.D. Officers will proceed to the
scene of (or to the Police station concerned with) those incidents or serious crimes listed n
Appendix “A” if they consider that their presence there is desirable;
(b) O/C. District, Sub - districts and District C.I.D. Units are required to
visit the scene of (or the Station concerned with) any of the incidents or serious crimes listed
in Appendix “A” as soon as possible after notification thereof; provided that they may
request exemption from their Regional Commanders or O/C. District respectively if the
nature of the crime or incident, the distance involved, travel difficulties, etc., renders
immediate departure impossible or unnecessary;
(c) O/C. Stations are required to visit the scene of all incidents and serious
crime listed in Appendix “A” occurring in their Station area, unless specifically exempted
therefrom by their O/C. District or Sub-District.
PART II
Special emergency investigation procedure
11. In time of emergency or civil unrest, demi-political offences and incidents may
become so numerous that police can no longer initiate early and thorough investigation into
each one. In such circumstances, priority must clearly be given to the more important cases,
leaving those of lesser importance until time and staff can be made available. When, and only
when, a Regional Commander considers that he can no longer carry out normal investigations
shall he arrange for the following procedure to be adopted by all his stations :- Comment [U233]: Reduce space with
below line
(a) As soon as possible after the First Warning Message has been sent out, in
accordance with para. 7 of this Order, and not later than 48 hours after receipt original report,
the O/C. of the District shall send to the Director of Criminal Investigation, with a copy to his
Regional Commander by the quickest possible means, a clear assessment of the report,
setting out :-
(b) the facts so far elicited by the investigation;
(c) the police and administration views on the gravity or otherwise of the
case;
(d) the likelihood or otherwise of an investigation proving fruitful;
(e) a recommendation as to whether full-scale investigation should be pursued, at
once, or should be left in abeyance until staff can be made available to tackle it, or whether an
investigation should not be instituted at all.

727
 P.G.O. No. 311
In such cases, a First Crime Report (PF.A) will not be required (see para 9). Comment [U234]: DCP??These are
missing words from old PGO. Is it
12. The Director of Criminal Investigation will consult the Director of Public deliberate?
Prosecutions as soon as he receives the report and will, in due course, send telegraphic
instructions both to the Regional Commander and the O/C. District, indicating what further
action should be taken.
13. It is emphasised that this procedure will only take effect when the police can no
longer carry out full investigations into every case.

APPENDIX “A” (P.GO. No. 311)

SCHEDULE OF SERIOUS CRIME AND INCIDENTS
Category “A”
INCIDENTS :-
(1) All civil disturbances, including inter-racial or religious conflicts.
(2) Disasters (aircraft, railway, shipping, flood, etc.)
(3) Any incident where police have had caused to discharge any force,
firearms, or tear smoke in the maintenance of law and order.
(4) Any other incident where large numbers of police are involved, including
units of Field Force.
(5) Incidents of public significance, involving a prominent personality of any
race, including a senior government servant.
(6) Any other incident which, having regard to the circumstance or
personalities involved, it is considered should be brought to the notice of the Inspector General.
Category “B”
SERIOUS CRIME
(1) All offences punishable by death, attempted murder and manslaughter.
(2) Cases of major political or public significance.
(3) Cases which by law require the President’s or Director of Public
Prosecutions’ consent or sanction.
(4) Rape, in which more than one race or juveniles are concerned and
defilement.
. (5) Unnatural offences, in which more than one race or juveniles are concerned
(6) Robbery.
(7) Extortion when the alleged offender is a government servant or a member
of the East African Community.
(8) All cases of theft of police property and all cases of theft or Government or
East African Community.
(9) Property in excess of Shs. 1,000,000/= in value and all thefts in which
government servants are suspect.
(10) All thefts of postal matter and Post Office frauds.
(11) Forgery and uttering of a serious nature.
(12) Coining offences.
(13) Sabotage.
(14) Malicious damage, i.e. damage which seriously interferes with or which is
likely to interfere with any public service.

728
 P.G.O. No. 311
(15) Offences under the Mining Act, Cap. 123 R.E. 2002, involving the illegal
possession and trafficking in diamonds or gold
(16) All criminal offences committed by foreigners, including juveniles.
(17) Thefts of arms and ammunition and explosives.
(18) Serious assaults on members of the Police Force.
. (19) Rescues of prisoners from custody of Police, Prisons and Local Authorities
(20) Any crime of such interest that it is considered the Inspector General should
be aware of the facts. Comment [U235]: DELETE ONE
SENTENCE, IT HAS BEEN REPEATED.
(21) All breakings of major significance irrespective of the value of the property Have already been removed here
stolen.
(22) Arson by night, in which a charge of murder or attempted murder might
arise.

729
 P.G.O. No. 312

REPORT – REFUSAL OF POLICE ACTION ON Comment [U236]: New PGO. Align right
number. Centre heading. Increase space
1. Every report received by the police shall be investigated if it reveals that an offence below and above heading
has been or may have been committed. Under no circumstances may an
investigation be withheld because a report appears at first sign to be false or
frivolous.

2. (a) When, however, an investigating officer is satisfied beyond all reasonable

doubt that no offence has been committed or that the report he is
investigating is false trivial or frivolous, or that it is suitable for civil and
not criminal proceedings, he shall suspend further investigation and refer
the case papers to his O/C. District. Urgent cases may be referred by radio
or telephone.

(b) The O/C. District shall then decide whether or not further investigation is
needed and shall direct accordingly. If necessary, he shall refer the case
papers to the O/C. Regional C.I.D. who may consult the Regional
Commander if he requires further guidance.

3. When an O/C. Station is advised by the O/C. District that further police action is
unnecessary, he shall inform the complainant that the police do not intend to
proceed but that he is still at liberty to lay his complaint before a Magistrate.

4. The decision to refuse further police action shall be entered in Column 17 of the
Report Book in accordance with paragraph 20 of P.G.O. No. 312.

5. A Police Officer shall not use police powers to settle civil claims or private disputes
and that officers in charge should take action whenever a Police Officer is found
contravening this order.

730
 P.G.O. No. 313
SECURITY – ALARM SIGNALS Comment [U237]: New PGO. Align right,
bold, increase space below and above
Emergency stand – to heading
Comment [U238]: Subheading, align left,
1. The signal for emergency stand - to in all Police Stations and Lines shall be the reduce space below,
sounding of an electric siren or hand klaxon or, if neither is available, the
continuous beating of the Station gong.

2. All ranks hearing the alarm shall immediately :-

(a) put on uniform and headgear, with riot helmet slung on the left
shoulder;

(b) parade as laid down in Standing Orders;

(c) draw arms and ammunition and take up position again as laid down in
Standing Orders.
Comment [U239]: Subheading, align left,
Fire alarm reduce space below,

3. The alarm for fire shall be the continuous blowing of police whistles by whoever
discovers the fire, followed, if possible by the fire alarm sounded on bugles.

4. All ranks hearing the alarm shall immediately :-

(a) put on boots and clothing (not necessarily uniform);

(b) collect all fire-fighting equipment in the vicinity;

(c) parade at the scene of the fire under the command of the senior officer
present, who shall take steps to put out the fire in accordance with
P.G.O. No. 142.
Comment [U240]: Subheading, align left,
Standing orders reduce space below,

5. Regional Commanders shall ensure that all Stations and Lines under their
command are provided with comprehensive Standing Orders detailing action to be
taken on the sounding of these alarms.

731
 P.G.O. No. 314

SECURITY – ATTACK –ON –STATION EXERCISES Comment [U241]: New PGO. Align right.
Increase spce below and above heading
1. Regional Commanders are responsible that all Stations, Lines, Camps and other
police installations under their command are provided with workable and up to
date “attack-on-station” defence schemes.

2. They shall, in addition, ensure that :-

(a) every Station is provided with an adequate alarm;

(b) all ranks are familiar with the alarm and know what to do when it is
sounded;

(c) regular “attack-on-station” exercises are held by every Station and

Unit under their command.

3. Routine practice “attack-on-station” exercise shall be held at least once per

quarter by every Station and Unit under the personal supervision of a Gazetted
Officer.

4. Occasional surprise practice alarms shall be sounded by Gazetted Officers and

O/C. Districts when visiting Stations on patrol or informal inspection.

5. The sounding of the “attack-on-station” alarm shall always be recorded in the

Station Diary with a brief note on the efficiency and speed of the turn-out.

732
 P.G.O. No. 315

SECURITY – EMERGENCY TURN-OUT Comment [U242]: New PGO. Bold, align

right, increase space below and above
1. O/C. Stations are responsible that sufficient numbers of police are sent at once to heading
the scene of all serious crimes, fires and other serious incidents to :-

(a) control crowds;

(b) cordon off areas;

(c) direct traffic;

(d) prevent looting and unauthorized entry to burning or damage

premises;

(e) ensure that there is no interference with police investigation teams,

firemen, doctors, etc., on duty at the scene;

(f) generally protect life and property.

2. As soon as an O/C. Station receives a report of a serious crime, fire or serious

incident, he will at once take all possible action to comply effectively with
paragraph 1 and will, at once :-

(a) muster whatever members of the Force who are immediately available
and send them to the scene;

(b) turn out the Field Force , if available, in his area;

(c) if no Field Force personnel are available, organize whatever

additional reinforcements can be provided from his own resources and
dispatch them to the scene;

(d) notify his Regional Commander;

(e) ask his Regional Commander for reinforcements if he cannot take

effective action with the resources at his immediate disposal.

3. Field Force Units are available for immediate call-out at all times and must be
used without hesitation, particularly in built-up areas.

4. Regional Commanders will issue suitable Standing Orders governing the turn-out
of Field Force Units stationed in their Region

733
 P.G.O. No. 316
SECURITY – PROTECTION OF V.I.Ps Comment [U243]: New PGO. Bold number.
Increase space below and above heading
1. Every Commanding Officer is generally responsible to the Inspector General for
the effective passage of the President and all Very Important Persons (V.I.Ps) living
in or passing through their respective commands. Regional Commanders will take
such security measures as may be ordered by the Inspector General and will in
every case satisfy themselves that adequate protection is given to the President
and/or V.I.P. whilst in or passing through their commands.

2. Details regarding implementation of protective security measures will be issued by

Inspector General from time to time.

734
 P.G.O. No. 317
SECURITY – REGIONAL EXERCISES Comment [U244]: New PGO. Bold.
Increase space below and above heading
1. Regional Commanders shall hold half-yearly Regional Security Exercises based
on realistic situations devised by them, to practise all or part of :-

(a) the Police Action scheme;

(b) the Internal Security Scheme;

Comment [U245]: Delete (e), align this text
with particular emphasis on the manning of vital points. In addition, to the left, to be like 1 above.
“Attack-on-Station” and “Blocking” exercises (vide P.G.O. NO. 314
and P.G.O. No. 318) shall also be practised.

2. Care shall be taken to ensure that these exercises neither cause alarm nor interfere
in any way with the public.

3. The following shall take part :-

(a) all Stations within easy reach of Regional Headquarters;

(b) Field Force Units;

(c) All District Headquarters’ Stations, together with any other nearby
Stations which can be usefully included;

(d) All available Special Constables.

4. Regional Commanders must decide for themselves what type of exercise is

appropriate to each of their districts. Full scale exercises will usually be necessary
for important districts such as Moshi and Iringa, but small communications’
revealed by these exercises.

5. Operation Rooms shall always be fully manned during exercises and particular
attention shall b e paid to police communications systems and to operation room
efficiency. Immediate action shall be taken to rectify any faults or shortcomings
revealed by these exercises.

6. O/C. Districts and Field Force Units shall forward written reports on all security
exercises to their Regional Commanders and the latter shall submit half-yearly
regional appreciations to the Inspector General. Special mention shall be made of
any parts of the schemes which have been found to be unworkable or unsound.

7. These exercises may be organized in conjunction with those required under P.G.O.
Nos. 318, 314 and 313

735
 P.G.O. No. 318
SECURITY – ROAD BLOCK EXERCISES Comment [U246]: New PGO. Bold.
Increase space below and above heading
1. Regional Commanders shall ensure that every District is provided with a set
Security Scheme, laid down as a Standing Order with the following aims and
objects :-

(a) to prevent the entry of criminals, bad characters, etc., into the District
Headquarters’ town.

(b) To prevent the exit of wanted persons, prison escapees, etc., known to
be inside the District Headquarters’ town.

(c) To prevent the entry and/or exit of wanted or suspected persons across
the frontier (Frontier Stations, only, concerned)

2. Regional Commanders are responsible that their schemes are workable and up to
date and that practice “blocking” operations are held, at least one per quarter by
all concerned. Only District Headquarter Stations and Stations near the frontier are
affected by this Order.

736
 P.G.O. No. 319
Comment [U247]: New PGO. Bold.
WARRANTS (CIVIL) OF ARREST Increase space below and above heading

1. Most Magistrates Courts have their own process servers who will normally execute
all civil warrants of arrest. In special cases when no process sever is available, a
Magistrate may direct the police to execute a civil warrant.

2. Execution of civil warrants of arrest will be effected in accordance with paras. 1-13
of P.G.O. No. 320.

3. Particulars of civil warrants will normally be entered in Station Warrant Books

(PF. 54), but Commanding Officers will arrange for separate Criminal and Civil
Warrant Books to be kept in Stations which habitually execute a substantial
number of civil warrants.

4. Plaintiffs in civil cases are required to deposit an amount with the Magistrate to
cover the estimated costs of process. O/C. Stations will, therefore, keep a detailed
statement of costs incurred n the execution of civil warrants of arrest. These will
include the following charges :-

(a) Hire of Police ;

(b) Transport - G.N. 2606 of 1959; Comment [U248]: This is wrong11 See
attached format!!
(b) Subsistence expenses; and

(c) Rations to prisoners (P.G.O. No, 356).

5. A Judgment debtor may be arrested in execution of process at any hour and on any
day and shall, as soon as practicable, be brought before the Court. Provided firstly,
that for the purpose of making an arrest of a Judgment debtor no dwelling house
shall be entered after sunset and before sunrise. Provided, secondly, that no outer
door of a dwelling house shall be broken unless such dwelling house is in the
occupancy of the Judgement debtor and he refuses or in any way prevents access
thereto, but when the officer executing the civil warrant has duly gained access to
any dwelling house, he may break open the door of any room in which he has
reason to believe the Judgement debtor is to be found. Provided thirdly, that if the
room is in the actual occupancy of a woman who is not the Judgement debtor and
who, according to the customs of the country, does not appear in public, the officer
executing the civil warrant shall give notice to her that she is at liberty to withdraw
and, after allowing her reasonable time to withdraw, may enter the room for the
purposes of making the arrest.

6. Whenever a police officer is detailed to execute a civil warrant of arrest for the
payment of money and the Judgment debtor wishes to pay, in full, the amount
(Judgment and costs) set out in the warrant, the officer shall immediately release
the debtor and hand the money and warrant over to his O/C. Station who will make
the necessary entry in Column 10 of the warrant of Book and send the money and
warrant to the Court of issue. The signature of the Court clerk and seal of the Court
must be obtained in Column 12.

7. O/C. Stations, when returning executed or unexecuted civil warrants to the Court

737
 P.G.O. No. 319
of issue, will attach to the warrant a statement of costs as set out in para 4 of this
Order for the information of the Magistrate.

738
 P.G.O. No. 320
Comment [U249]: New PGO. Bold.
WARRANTS (CRIMINAL) OF ARREST AND SEARCH Increase space below and above heading

1. The particulars of every warrant of arrest and warrant of search received by a

Station and directed to that Station for execution shall be recorded in the Warrants
Book (PF. 540) which will be maintained by the O/C. Station.

2. The warrant shall be stamped in the right hand top corner with the Station stamp and
the Warrant Book number entered thereon.

3. Columns 1 to 9 of the Book shall be completed when the warrant is first received
and Columns 10 to 12 when the warrant is executed or returned to Station/Court
unexecuted.

4. O/C. Stations are personally responsible for the safe custody of all warrants from
the time of issue until final return to Court. They may only permit their subordinate
officers to hold warrants when actively engaged n their execution.
Comment [U250]: Subheading, align left,
Warrants of Arrest reduce space below,

5. A warrant of arrest may be directed to one or more police officers, or to one police
officer or all other police officers of the area within which the court issuing the
warrant has jurisdiction, or generally to all police officers of such area.

6. A warrant which has been issued against a person who has moved to another district
will be returned to the court of issue under cover of a letter giving the residence of
the person named thereon. The court will be requested to acknowledge receive any
an entry will be made in Column 11 and the correspondence reference will be
quoted.

7. When a warrant is handed over for execution, the signature of the officer receiving
the warrant will be entered under Column 9.

8. The Police Officer who executes a warrant of arrest shall immediately, after
execution, endorse on the back of the warrant the words “Executed at
........................................... (place) on .................................. (date) at
............................................. (time) by ...................................... (number, rank and
name of person executing)” and sign it.

9. An entry shall be made in the Report Book as soon as a warrant of arrest is either
executed or returned to court unexecuted. Only a brief cross reference entry is
necessary if the warrant relates to a previous entry in the Report Book, otherwise
full details of the execution will be recorded.

10. As soon as a warrant is executed, Column 10 in the Warrant Book will be

completed and the warrant returned to the court of issue properly endorsed by the
executing officer. Should circumstances permit, the signature of the court clerk and
seal of the court will be obtained in Column 12. Where warrants are returned to
court by letter, it will be sufficient to quote the letter reference but in such cases a
receipt must be contained from the court clerk and Filed in a safe place.

739
 P.G.O. No. 320
11. If the person named in the warrant cannot be traced within fourteen days of receipt
of the warrant, it shall be returned to the court of issue by the O/C. Stations, and
Columns 11 and 12 completed

12. Warrants pending execution shall be placed in an envelope to be affixed to the

inside cover of the Warrant Book.

13. Both the register and warrants will be frequently checked by the O/C. District who
will ensure that the provisions of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E.2002,
Sections 100 to 117 are complied with.
Comment [U251]: Subheading, align left,
Warrants of Search - Receipt of warrant reduce space below,

14. Particulars of every warrant of search shall be entered in the Warrant Register of the
Station where the premises to be searched are situated.

15. A warrant of search which is received by one station and concerns premises situated
in another station area shall be returned to the court of issue with a covering letter and
a receipt obtained from the court clerk. Columns 11 and 12 will be completed by the
O/C. Station.
Comment [U252]: Subheading, align left,
Execution of warrant reduce space below,

16. Search warrants shall be executed in accordance with P.G.O. No. 226. The procedure
set out in paragraphs 1-7 and 9-13 of this Order will also apply, except that :-

the Police Officer in charge of the party which executes a warrant of search
shall, on completion of the search and before he leaves the premises
searched, endorse on the back of the warrant :-

“Executed at ........................ (place) on ........................ (date) at

............................... (time) by ..................................... list number, rank and
name of all police in search party).

The following articles have been seized :-

and sign it. The owner or occupier of the premises searched shall then be
requested to sign a statement in the following words which shall be recorded
below the statement mentioned approve :-

“I am satisfied that only the above articles have been removed from the
premises by the police search party”.

If he refuses to sign this statement a record to that effect shall be made at the
back of the warrant by the officer-in-charge of the search party. A copy of the
list of seized articles shall be given to the owner or occupier of the premises
if he so requires.

As soon as practicable, the executed warrant of search shall be returned to the

issuing court and the property seized produced before the Magistrate for his
inspection. Formal application shall then be made to retain the property

740
 P.G.O. No. 320
pending completion of investigations vide Section 44 of the Criminal
Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.
Comment [U253]: Subheading, align left,
Unexecuted warrants reduce space below,

17. Unexecuted warrants of search will be returned to the Court of issue against receipt
and Columns 11 and 12 of the register will be completed.

741
 SECTION XII
POLICE BAIL AND BOND, PRISONERS MANAGEMENT AND
SUPERVISION OF OFFENDERS
Nos. 351 – 370
P.G.O. No. Title
351 Bail or Bond – Release On
352 Prisoners – Communication With
353 Prisoners – Custody of
354 Prisoners – Escort Of
355 Prisoners – Foreign Nationals – Arrest and Custody of
356 Prisoners – Police Witnesses – Feeding of
357 Prisoners – Property of
358 Supervision of Habitual Criminals – On Court Order
359 Supervision of Habitual Criminals – Without Court Supervision
Order
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370.

751
 PGO No. 351
BAIL OR BOND – RELEASE ON
1. Bail is a recognisance or bond taken by a duly authorised person to ensure the appearance
of an accused person at an appointed place and time to answer to the charge made against him. Bail
may be granted by a Court and, in some cases, as set out below, by the O/C. of a Police Station.
2. A prisoner may be released on his own bond or one or more sureties may be required in
addition to his own bond. Such sureties are termed “bails” or “bailsmen” and they are responsible in
the amount fixed for the prisoner’s attendance in Court. Usually, two householders are accepted as
“bails” provided the police officer is satisfied that they are able to honour the sums in which they are
bound. A person bailed to appear is by law in the custody of his sureties and they may arrest him
either with or without warrant if they fear his escape and bring him before a Magistrate, thereby
clearing themselves of their obligation.
3. Sections 30 (2), 34 and 123 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, deal with the
release by certain police officers of prisoners charged with offences other than the offences of
murder or treason on bail/bond. Where police officers are given a clear direction in law in the matter,
i.e., where the word “may” is used as in Section 123, bail should not normally be refused save in the
following circumstances :-
(a) Where there is reason to believe that the accused will abscond.
(b) Where there are good grounds for believing that after such release, either the course of the
investigation or the witnesses will be interfered with. A mere suspicion or fear alone is not sufficient
to oppose bail on these grounds. It is necessary to have evidence available supported by affidavits for
production in court at a later date should an appeal be lodged against a police officer’s refusal to
grant bail.
(c) Where the accused has a long record of previous convictions.
(d) Where there are reasonable grounds for believing that a breach of the peace is likely to
occur if the accused is released on bail.
(e) Where there are reasonable grounds for believing that the person will attempt to take his
own life or do some serious injury to himself.
(f) Where reputable guarantors are not forthcoming.
4. Police officers are to be careful to note, however, that special instructions apply to the
granting of bail under sections 30 (2) and 34 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.
5. With regard to Section 30 (2) there are two conditions present for the granting of bail :-
(a) The ascertainment of the prisoner’s true name and residence.
(b) The execution of a bond with or without sureties.
6. In section 34 (1), bearing in mind the use of the word “shall” in the sub-section, it will be
seen that there are two conditions governing the release of prisoners who cannot be produced before
a court within twenty four hours of their arrest, viz :-

752
 PGO No. 351(cont’d)

(a) The offence must not appear to the officer concerned to be of a serious nature.
(b) The prisoner must be in a position to execute a bond for a reasonable amount with or
without sureties.
7. (a) A person arrested on warrant shall not be released on bond or bail unless an order
to that effect has been endorsed on the warrant of arrest by the court issuing such warrant. The
endorsement shall state :-
(i) the number of sureties;
(ii) the amount in which they and the person for whose arrest the warrant is issued are
to be respectively bound; and
(iii) the time at which he is to attend before the court.
(b) Whenever security is taken under this paragraph, the officer to whom the warrant is directed
shall forward the bond to the court issuing the warrant. Section 103 of the Criminal Procedure Act,
Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.
8. (a) A person arrested without a warrant may be released on bail/bond in accordance
with para 1 and provided that the following conditions are met :-
(i) If he is person of property he may be released on his own bond.
(ii) If he is not a person of property he may be released on his own bond with one or
more sureties.
(iii) If the person arrested has neither sureties nor property, the O/C. Station shall insist
on cash bail.
(b) The amount of bail shall be sufficient to ensure the appearance in court of the person
arrested, but shall not be excessive.
Cash Bail
9. (a) Cash Bail Receipt Books will be taken on charge in the register of accountable
counterfoil books and issued to O/C. Stations. Unused receipt forms will be included in the monthly
return of unused counterfoils, as submitted to the Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant.
(b) O/C. Stations, when bail money is deposited, will complete Part I of the receipt and hand
the original to the depositor.
(c) As soon as possible thereafter, the bail money will be paid in to the Revenue Officer/Sub-
Accountant, crediting “Deposits-Bail Money” Code 443-15. Part II of the receipt form will then be
completed and the E.R.V will be posted on the reverse of the triplicate copy. The duplicate will be
placed in the case file.
(d) Repayment of bail deposit will be effected by a payment voucher on production of the
original cash bail receipt which will accompany the voucher. The voucher will be debited to
“Deposits – Bail Money” Code 443 – 15. Part III of the receipt will then be completed and the
signature of the bailee obtained thereon.
(e) Should the bailee fail to surrender his bail, a warrant of arrest will be obtained from the
Court. The bail money will remain on deposit with the Revenue Officer/Sub-Accountant.
(f) The contents of the Bond and Cash Bail receipt forms must be explained, in Swahili if
necessary, to each person released on bail. It must be made clear that the sum deposited is in no
sense a penalty or fine, but is taken solely to ensure appearance before the court and that the whole
sum will be returned to him on the fulfilment of the obligation.
10. O/C. Stations are responsible for discharging “Bailsmen” from all bail/bond liability in
respect of cases which are not taken to court.

753
PGO No. 351(cont’d)

754
 P.G.O. No.352
PRISONERS – COMMUNICATION WITH
1. No member of the public, with the exception of those persons enumerated in the following
paragraphs, shall be permitted to interview prisoners in cells.
2. In special cases, such as the detention of juveniles, relatives may be permitted to interview a
prisoner on compassionate grounds, BUT ONLY WITH the permission of a Gazetted Officer or
O/C. Station if no Gazetted Officer is available.
3. (a) By arrangement with the officer-in-charge of the case, the following person may also
be permitted to interview prisoners in cells :-
(i) Advocates and their accredited clerks.
(ii) Consular authorities, if one of their nationals is under detention.
(b) All such interviews are subject to the following conditions:-
(i) The prisoner shall be asked by the police if he wishes to be interviewed and the interview
shall not be permitted if the prisoner does not want it;
(ii) The interview shall be held at a time and date which does not in any way interfere with police
investigations;
(iii) Interviews shall always be held in the view of a police officer, but only within his hearing if
the prisoner or interviewer so requests;
(iv) An advocate’s clerk must produce a written authority from his principals before he may be
granted an interview;
(v) An advocate’s interpreter has no right to an interview unless he is also employed as a clerk
and produces a written authority from the advocate who employs him; and
(vi) If an advocate is briefed by a prisoner’s friends or relatives without his knowledge, the
prisoner shall be so informed by the police in order that he can request or refuse an interview as he
sees fit.
4. Letters shall not be accepted or delivered to prisoners in police custody, nor shall prisoners be
permitted to dispatch letters. O/C. Stations will, however, arrange for the transmission of all
reasonable verbal messages from prisoners to their friends or relatives.
5. No person shall be permitted to speak with or pass any message or articles to any prisoner on
the way to or from Court, or while present in Court.

755
 P.G.O. No.353

PRISONERS – CUSTODY OF
Responsibility for Custody or Prisoners
1. (a) The Charge Room Officer is responsible for the safe custody of all prisoners in cells
and no prisoner shall be removed from cells except with his permission.
(b) The Duty N.C.O. is responsible to the Charge Room Officer for the safe custody of prisoners
detained in cells located in Police Lines, etc.
(c) No prisoner shall be removed from cells wherever they may be located without prior
permission from the Charge Room Officer.
Record of Detention
2. (a) A Detention Register (PF. 20) shall be maintained at every Station and in the Guard
Room of every Lines with cells in which prisoners are detained.
(b) As soon as a prisoner is to be detained in a police cell, the Charge Room Officer, assisted
where necessary by the O/C. Station, shall, be sent at once, under escort, for medical examination by
a Government doctor or dresser.
(c) Insensible persons taken into police custody will not be placed in cells until examined by the
senior officer available in the Station and the latter will take steps to ensure the attendance of a
doctor or dresser in cases where medical attention or removal to hospital appears necessary. This
does not, however, apply to intoxicated prisoners who will be detained in cells unless the O/C.
Station considers medical attention necessary.
Segregation in Cells
4. (a) Females:-
(i) Female prisoners shall be placed by the O/C. Station in the personal custody of a
policewoman, or if none is available, a suitable police officer’s wife, unless, having regard to the
character of the prisoner or the offence with which she is charged, there is a need to accommodate
her in a police cell;
(ii) Female prisoners shall not be detained in cells in which a male prisoner is confined. Cells
occupied by females shall, if possible be screened to ensure reasonable privacy;
(iii) When female prisoners are removed from cells to perform their ablutions or, if they complain
of illness, a policewoman or, if none is available, a suitable female, must be called in attendance;
(iv) Police officers will not enter a cell in which a female prisoner is detained unless accompanied
by a responsible adult female or by a second police officer;
(v) O/C. Stations will ensure that not less than two police officers are together on Police Station
duty whenever a female is detained in the cells;

756
 P.G.O. No.353(cont’d)

(b) Juveniles:-
(i) Juvenile prisoners shall not be confined in cells unless, having regard to the character of the
prisoner or the offence with which they are charged, it is considered absolutely necessary to detain
them in a cell; and
(ii) When juveniles are detained in cells the O/C. Station will take steps to ensure, as far as
practicable, that the juvenile is not confined with an adult prisoner.
(c) Dangerous and Lunatic Prisoners: –
Dangerous, lunatic and latter class prisoners shall, if possible, be confined in separate cells;
Maximum Number of Prisoners in any one Cell
5. (a) Under normal practice, two prisoners should not normally be confined together in one
cell. Compliance with this rule is sometimes impracticable due to lack of cell space, but every effort
shall be made to observe it, particularly when only a few prisoners are under detention (e.g. if their
are two cells and four prisoners to be detained, three prisoners will be detained in one cell and one in
the other).
(b) O/C. Stations are responsible that police cells do not become dangerously overcrowded and
will, whenever possible, arrange for the transfer of excess prisoners to another police station or
temporarily to other secure accommodation in the Lines or in the Local Authority lock-up, etc. An
adequate police guard shall always be placed on prisoners who are detained outside recognised
police cells. O/C. Stations will, at once, report all cases of dangerous overcrowding of cells to their
O/C. Districts and the latter will ensure that suitable alternative detention arrangements are made.
Record of Prisoners’ Movements
6. The Charge Room Officer, O/C. Station or Duty N.C.O. in the case of prisoners detained in
Lines, shall record the exact time of every prisoner’s removal from, and return to, cells in the
Detention Register. Visits to latrines inside the Station building need not be recorded. It is a very
serious offence to remove a prisoner from cells without recording the removal in the detention
register.
7. Whenever a prisoner is transferred from the Police Station cells to cells in the Lines, a record
of such removal shall be entered by the Charge Room Officer in the appropriate column of the
Station Detention Register and the prisoner’s particulars shall then be transferred to the Lines
Detention Register to be maintained by the Duty N.C.O. The same procedure shall be followed in
reverse whenever a prisoner is transferred back from the cells in the Lines to the cells in the Police
Station.
Record of Prisoner’s Final Departure from Police Custody
8. (a) When a prisoner finally leaves police custody, the date, time and reason for his
departure shall be entered under the appropriate headings in the Detention Register and a red ink line
drawn diagonally from left to right through the entry referring to that prisoner to signify his release
from custody. If the prisoner return to police custody after the entry recording his detention has been
closed, a new entry shall be made in the Detention Register.
(b) Where the prisoner is known to have a previous criminal record and/or there are reasons to
believe that he is recalcitrant or likely to attempt escape or to be in any way a difficult prisoner, the
officer i/c. Prisons into whose custody he is committed will be advised accordingly. Similar action
will be taken if the prisoner is concerned in a serious crime.
Hourly Inspection of Prisoners in Cells
9. The Charge Room Officer or Duty N.C.O. shall visit and inspect all prisoners in cells once
per hour and shall record each visit in the Station Diary stating number of prisoners under detention
and whether or not everything is in order.

757
 P.G.O. No.353(cont’d)
Special Cell Inspection of Prisoners who are Insensible through Intoxication
10. Any person in cells who is insensible through intoxication will be visited at least once every
half-hour by the Charge Room Officer or duty N.C.O. Each visit will be the subject of an entry in
the Station Diary.
Daily Cell Inspection by O/C. Station
11. The O/C. Station shall inspect all cells each morning at 0800 hours and make sure that no
prisoners are unlawfully detained. He shall ensure that no prisoner is normally detained for more
than 24 hours without an appearance before a Magistrate. In Class “A” Stations he shall examine
cells again after prisoners have gone to court and check all persons remaining therein against the
entries in the station and Lines Detention Registers. He shall, at once, report details of any prisoner
detained in cells for more than 24 hours to his O/C. District and ask for instructions. Every effort
shall be made to avoid detention in excess of 24 hours.
Custody of Cell Keys
12. The Charge Room Officer or Duty N.C.O. shall retain all cell keys in his personal possession
while on duty. He shall only surrender the keys to his relief or to an N.C.O. or other senior officer
who is authorised to visit the cells.
Handing over Charge Room Duty and Cells
13. (a) When Charge Room Officer finishes his tour of duty he shall hand over custody of all
prisoners detained in cells to his relief. The latter shall check all prisoners detained in cells in the
station and lines against the entries in the Detention Registers. If the cells in the Lines are too far
from the Police Station to permit a quick visual examination, he will check by telephone with the
Duty N.C.O. and ensue that all prisoners are accounted for. When he is satisfied that all is in order,
he shall enter the total number of prisoners in the Station Diary and assume responsibility for them.
He shall then take over the keys of the Station cells from the outgoing officer against an entry in the
Station Diary.
(b) When the Duty N.C.O. responsible for the safe custody of prisoners detained in cells located
in Police Lines finishes his tour of duty, he shall hand over custody of such prisoners to his relief.
The latter shall check the prisoners against the entries in the Detention Register and when satisfied
that all is in order, he shall enter the total number of prisoners in the Lines Station Diary and assume
responsibility for them. He shall then take over the keys of the cells from the outgoing duty N.C.O.
against an entry in the Station Diary.
Prisoners to Latrines
14. If no cell latrines are available, prisoners shall be taken under escort, as set out under P.G.O.
No. 354, to the nearest latrine inside the Station. Prisoners arrested for serious crimes or prisoners
who might possibly be violent or dangerous shall not be taken outside their cells to obey calls of
nature; in such cases a latrine bucket, with a cover, shall be placed inside the cell. An adequate guard
must be provided whenever buckets are taken in and out of cells.
Violent Prisoners
15. (a) The O/C. Station, or, if absent, the Charge Room Officer, shall arrange for a
continuous watch to be kept on the following classes of persons detains in cells:-
(i) Those known or reputed to be violent, dangerous, or to have attempted suicide or
escape.
(ii) Special cases at the request of a senior officer.
(b) Strict precautions shall be taken to guard against escapes from cells which are not completely
secure and which either contain dangerous or violent prisoners, or are crowded with prisoners who
might attempt to break out when the cell doors are opened. In all such cases, O/C. Stations are
responsible that adequate police guards are posted on the cells.

758
 P.G.O. No.353(cont’d)
Sick Prisoners
16. (a) Prisoners who appear to be ill shall, if possible, be removed under escort to hospital.
If no hospital is available, the nearest dresser shall be called in to prescribe treatment.
(b) If the prisoner is detained in hospital, arrangements shall be made by the O/C. Station with
the Medical Officer for a police guard to remain in attendance throughout the hospitalisation of the
prisoner.
(c) Prisoners detained in hospital will be released on police bail whenever permissible within the
terms of P.G.O. No. 351. Where this is inadvisable the hospitalisation of the prisoner will be
reported to a Magistrate at the earliest opportunity and arrangements made (subject to the advice of
the Medical Officer) for the person to be formally charged before a Magistrate and remanded into
prison hospital custody or released on Court bail.
Escorts
17. Every police officer who removes a prisoner from cells is personally responsible that he has
enough police assistance at hand to prevent violence or escape. O/C. Stations and Investigating
Officers will comply with P.G.O. No. 354 and ensure that an adequate escort is provided when
dangerous criminals or a number of prisoners are moved in or out of cells. The escort will remain
until the prisoners are safely disposed of and the cell door(s) locked.
Cleanliness of Cells
18. (a) Every O/C. Station shall inspect the cells in his station, whether occupied or not, once
per day to ensure that they are clean and that sanitary arrangements are satisfactory. Cells, latrines
and urinals shall be washed out and disinfected not less than once per day at frequent intervals.
(b) The Duty N.C.Os shall inspect the cells in Lines in the same way as outlined in sub-para. (a)
above.
(c) O/C. Stations are responsible for ensuring that all cells are white washed and decontaminated
at frequent intervals.
Contents of Cells
19. Cells shall be furnished in accordance with instructions to be issued by the Inspector General
from time to time based on applicable rules on prisoners accommodation.
Duplicate Cells Keys
20. Duplicate keys to all cells shall be properly labelled and kept in a safe or under lock and key
by O/C. Districts or O/C. Stations.
Feeding of Prisoners
21. Prisoners in police custody will be fed in accordance with P.G.O. No. 356.
Private Food for Prisoners
22. Food supplied by friends and relatives may be accepted between 0800 hours and 2000 daily,
but will not be given to any prisoner without the permission of the O/C. Station and until it has been
searched by the officer on Charge room duty for money, letters, tools, drugs and other improper
articles.
III-treatment of Prisoners
23. III-treatment of prisoners and accused persons is strictly forbidden. Offenders shall be
reported, without delay, to the Inspector General and will be liable to instant dismissal.
Prisoners not to be employed
24. Prisoners in police custody will not be employed on any work other than the cleaning of cells
and bedding.

759
 P.G.O. No.353(cont’d)
Complaints by Prisoners
25. Where prisoners wish to lay a complaint, the O/C. Station will be informed at once. He will
record the complaint in the Station Diary or in the Report Book if an offence is alleged and will
enquire into it and take whatever corrective action he considers necessary.
General Supervision
26. Visiting Gazetted Officers and Inspectors shall always examine the cells and the Detention
Register to ensure that the procedure laid down in this Order is properly carried out.

760
 P.G.O. No.354
PRISONERS – ESCORT OF
1. An adequate police escort shall always be provided to guard prisoners who are moved out of
cells.
2. Escorts shall, whenever possible, be provided on the following scale:-
For 1-3 prisoners 2 P.C.s
For 4-6 prisoners 1 N.C.O and 2 P.C.s
For 7-10 prisoners 1 N.C.O. and 4 P.C.s
For 11-15 prisoners 1 N.C.O. and 6 P.C.s
3. Every escort shall be under the direct command of the senior member thereof who shall be
detailed as officer in charge of the escort by the O/C. District or Station before the escort goes out. If
for any special reason, the officer in charge of the escort is not nominated, the senior member of the
escort shall automatically assume command. Officers in charge of escorts are held responsible for
the good behaviour of the police personnel under their control.
4. Each member of the escort shall be armed with a rifle and five rounds in the magazine. No
round shall be carried in the breech. The safety catch shall be applied. The officer in charge may be
armed with a loaded revolver if trained in its use.
5. No member of the escort may leave the escort without the permission of the officer in charge
of the escort.
6. The escort shall not permit any unauthorised person to communicate with prisoners at any
time.
7. Whenever it is necessary to move prisoners over a long distance entailing stops for meals and
rest, the officer in charge of the escort will lodge his prisoners in the nearest Police Station, or Local
Authority lock-up. Where no such lock-up is available and a stop is made for meals, sleep or other
purpose, he is responsible for posting sufficient sentries to prevent escape, injury or suicide.
8. All claims for safari allowances for police officers escorting prisoners to prison will be
handed to the Officer-in-Charge of the prison concerned for payment.
9. At least one police constable will guard any prisoner who wishes to obey a call of nature. He
must not release his hold on the prisoner until he has brought him back to the escort, except that
where a prisoner wishes to excrete, the guard will face the prisoner and stand over him. The greatest
care shall be taken to prevent escape in such circumstances.
10. When it is necessary to move prisoners, e.g. to or from court, etc., they will, whenever
possible, be conveyed in police transport.
11. In no circumstances may unescorted prisoners be moved by air. Movement of prisoners by air
is normally forbidden. Only in special circumstances, and with the approval in each case of the
Director of Criminal Investigation, may a prisoner and escort travel by air.
12. Disciplinary action will be taken against any police officer who, by carelessness or lack of
vigilance, permits a prisoner to escape.

761
 P.G.O. No.354(cont’d)

Use of Handcuffs
13. Male prisoners arrested for serious offences or male recidivist shall always be handcuffed.
Important prisoners should be handcuffed to members of the escort. Prisoners shall be handcuffed
together if the escort is not strong enough to guard them securely.
14. Male prisoners who appear dangerous or likely to escape shall be handcuffed, regardless of
the offence involved.
15. (a) Women shall never be handcuffed unless dangerous to themselves or to others.
(b) Children shall never be handcuffed.
16. Prisoners shall not be kept handcuffed on board moving boats or ships or aircraft. They
should be escorted on board handcuffed, but the handcuffs shall be removed as soon as the vessel or
aircraft gets under way. The handcuffs shall be replaced just before the aircraft lands or the vessel
ties up and is in contact with the land.
Escorting of Juveniles
17. Attention is drawn to the provisions of the Children & Young Persons Act, Cap. 13 R.E.
2002. Juveniles must not be escorted in company with adults charged with or convicted of any
offence other than an offence with which the juvenile is jointly charged or convicted. Even where a
juvenile is jointly charged or convicted of an offence with an adult, care should be taken to ensure
that the juvenile is protected considering his age and vulnerability.
Escorts – Persons under arrest by Court Warrant
18. Officers in charge of police are reminded that the Force is obliged to execute all warrants
lawfully issued. Escorts of persons arrested under Court warrant may, on occasion, have to be
undertaken by police.
19. All O/C. Districts will ensure that close liaison is maintained with the Court authorities in this
matter.

762
 P.G.O.
P.G.O. No.355)
PRISONERS – FOREIGN NATIONALS – ARREST AND CUSTODY
OF
1. Tanzania has treaty agreements with a number of foreign which provide for the
communication of information concerning arrest and detention of their nationals.
2. The foreign states include:-
Belgium Netherlands
France Portugal
Germany Spain
Greece Switzerland
Italy United States of America
3. O/C. Stations will, therefore, inform their O/C. Districts by the quickest possible means
whenever a national of any of the above foreign countries either arrested or sentenced to a term of
imprisonment after convictions summons. No action is necessary for summonses which do not result
in or imprisonment.
4. O/C. Districts, after enquiring into the reason for arrest or detention shall send a priority
telegram/signal to the Director of Criminal Investigation giving the following information :-
(a) Full name and address of person
(b) Nationality.
(c) Offence with which charged or convicted.
5. The Director of Criminal Investigation, on receipt of such information shall telephone a
Consular Officer of the State to which the prisoner belongs and inform him of the arrest/detention,
giving him particulars of the charge conviction.

763
 P.G.O. No.356
PRISONERS – POLICE WITNESSES – FEEDING OF
General
1. O/C. Stations will arrange, where possible, for a local contractors to supply meals to police
witnesses and prisoners. Where a contractor is not available, rations may be supplied by police
officers’ wives at the rate and scale quoted below.
2. Costs per person per day will not normally exceed the prescribed rate.
3. The scale of rations will follow as closely as possible that laid down in Ration Scale III of the
Prisons Act, Cap. 58 R.E. 2002 which is summarised at Appendix “A”.
4. Rations will be provided under arrangements made by O/C. Stations at the most economical
rate consisted with reasonable quality and quantity, in accordance with the racial custom of the
prisoner.
5. Rations will be ordered on the Meal Order Form (PF. 36), duly completed in duplicate and
signed by the O/C. Station. One copy of PF. 36 will be handed to the contractor and the duplicate
copy will be retained for checking purposes.
6. Contractors and/or police wives will submit their bills at the end of each month. No bills will
be paid unless supported by a PF. 36. These will be checked by the O/C. Station against the
duplicate copies of PF. 36. O/C. Stations will endorse the PF. 36 as correct before payment is
authorized. O/C. Station will then prepare a payment voucher debiting “Rations to Police
Witnesses”, PFs. 36 will be attached and forwarded to the Regional Police Commander or O/C.
District, who will pay from imprest or through the Ministry of Public Security and Safety, as the
case may be.
Police Witnesses’ Meals
7. For the purpose of this Order, a police witness is a person called to a Police Station for the
purpose of an enquiry or investigation.
8. A police witness may be granted rations or a ration allowance in the following
circumstances:-
(a) If the place where he normally lives or eats is a considerable distance from the Police Station.
(b) If he spends more than four hours in a Police Station.
9. (a) Cash in lieu of rations will only be provided in the authority of the O/C. Station, who
may authorise payment in accordance with the scale laid down by the Government.
(b) Allowances will be paid from the “Rations to Police Witness”.
10. When an Investigating Officer considers a witness is entitled to rations, he will prepare PF. 36
in duplicate for the required number of meals in accordance with paragraph 5.

764
 P.G.O. No.356(cont’d)
Police Prisoners’ Meals
11. Prisoners will be provided with meals at the following times only:-
Breakfast - 0630 to 0730 hours
Lunch - 1200 to 1300 hours
Supper - 1800 to 1900 hours
12. (a) The Charge Room Officer will prepare PF. 36 showing the number of meals required.
(b) The O/C. Station or other officer detailed by him will check the number of meals ordered
against the number of persons shown in the Detention Register, PF. 120. He will then sign PF. 36.
13. All meals supplied to prisoners will be recorded under the appropriate heading in the
Detention Register, PF. 120.
14. O/C. Stations shall ensure that prisoners’ meals are of the required quality and quantity.
15. (a) Meals will normally be eaten in the cells. They will be served in bowls and mugs as
issued from Police Stores.
(b) Eating utensils will only be issued to prisoners who are not accustomed to eating with their
fingers.
16. All bowls and utensils will be removed from cells on completion of each meal. They will be
washed by the Station orderly and stored in a clean place. Cells must always be cleaned out after
meals.
17. (a) Prisoners may be allowed food supplied by friends and relatives, subject to the
permission of the O/C. Station.
(b) Before the food is passed to the prisoner it will searched by the officer on Charge Room duty
for money, letters, tools, drugs and any other improper articles.
(c) Such food will be supplied only during the regulation meal hours.

APPENDIX “A”(To P.G.O. No. 356)

DIETARY SCALE FOR PRISONERS DETAINED IN POLICE CELLS

Breakfast:

150 grams daily. Maize meal/sorghum meal/millet meal (a)

300 grams daily. Cassava/Potatoes/Plantain

30 grams daily. Sugar

765
 P.G.O. No.356(cont’d)
15 grams daily. Salt

Main Menu:

350 grams daily except on Sundays. Maize meal/Sorghum meal/Millet meal (a)

350 grams on Sundays only Rice

100 grams daily. Beans/Dengu/Choroko/Kunde/Mbaazi (b)

150 grams in case of meat or 225 grams in Meat/Dagaa/Fish

case of fresh fish or 50 grams in case of dried
fish or dagaa on Tuesdays, Thursdays and
Sundays.

30 grams in case of oil or fat and 100 grams Fat/Groundnut/Cooking oil (c)
in case of groundnuts daily

100 grams daily. Ripe Bananas/Apple/Pawpaw/Pineapple

Guava/Mangoes

100 grams daily. Green vegetables (d)

15 grams daily. Salt

5 grams daily. Curry powder

10 grams daily. Onions

Notes on Scale III

(a) Maize/Sorghum/Millet may be whole or meal. If meal is machine-ground it must be freshly
prepared. 250 grams of maize meal may be mixed with 100 grams of sorghum or millet meal.
(b) When meat, fish or dagaa is issued the scale shall be reduced to 50 grams.
(c) May be coconut, simsim, groundnut, cottonseed or palm oil, but palm oil is preferred.
(d) Green vegetables may include spinach (mchicha), leaves of cassava or cowpeas or pumpkin.
It is essential to ensure that green vegetables are not overcooked so as not to destroy the vitamins
and they must be consumed immediately.
Additional Notes:
(i) The officer-in-charge of Prisons shall make effort to ensure that dengu, choroko, mbaazi or
kunde are substituted for beans as often as possible so that the prisoners are not fed with beans
continuously.
(ii) Fruit should not necessarily be of one type for all the prisoners in a given day. Some prisoners
may for example be issued with another type of fruit if there are not enough oranges for all
prisoners.
(iii) When tomatoes are available, 30 grams per prisoner may be added for flavour to meat, fish,
dagaa, beans, choroko, kunde or mbaazi.

766
 P.G.O. No.356(cont’d)
(iv) 30 grams of cabbage (as opposed to Chinese cabbage) per prisoner may be added to meat,
fish, dagaa, beans, choroko, kunde or mbaazi, but it should not be issued as green vegetable under
the main menu because of its poor nutritive value.

767
 P.G.O. No.357

PRISONERS – PROPERTY OF
1. Police powers of search arrested persons are laid down in Sections 23 and 26 of the Criminal
Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, and are quoted in full hereunder:-
“Search of Arrested 23. Whenever a person is arrested :-
(a) by a police officer under a warrant which does not provide for the taking of bail, or under
a warrant which provides for taking of bail but the person arrested cannot furnish bail; or
(b) without warrant, or by a private person under a warrant and the person arrested
cannot legally be admitted to bail or cannot furnish bail, the police officer making the arrest,
or when the arrest is made by a private person, the police officer to whom he makes over the
person arrested may search such person and place in safe custody all articles, other than
wearing apparel, found upon him.
Power to seize offensive weapons 26. The officer or other person making an arrest may
take from the person arrested any offensive weapons which he has about his person, and shall
deliver all weapons so taken the Court or officer which or whom the office or person making
the arrest is required by law to produce the person arrested”.
2. All articles of property removed by the arresting officer from a prisoner before arrival at a
Police Station shall be handed over as soon as possible to the officer on Charge Room duty.
3. Every police officer who hands over prisoner’s property in accordance with para. 2, will
require the Charge Room officer to certify, immediately below the list of property in his notebook,
that every item has been correctly handed over: (NOTE: Officers who remove property from a
prisoner at the time of arrest are required by para. 6 (c) of P.G.O. No. 272 to list such property in
their notebooks).
4. Every prisoner to be detained in police cells shall be thoroughly searched as soon as he is
brought into the station and the propriety of the arrest has been established. The officer on Charge
Room Duty is responsible that this search is properly carried out and that every item of property is
removed from the prisoner’s possession. Whenever possible, the arresting officer shall perform the
search.
5. Male prisoners shall be searched in the Charge Room. Female prisoners shall be searched by a
policewoman or female searcher out of public view and with strict regard to decency.
6. (a) The police officer who searches a prisoner in the Charge Room shall remove every
article of property in the prisoner’s possession, except the clothes he or she is actually wearing,
together with any belt, braces, girdle, tie, shoelaces or other article of clothing which could be used
to commit suicide by hanging and hand same over to the officer on charge room duty.
(b) The officer on charge room duty will then check the prisoner’s property in the presence of the
prisoner and of the officer who effected the arrest and will enter each item, in ink or indelible pencil,
on duplicate Prisoners’ Property Receipt (PF. 63). He will sign both copies and will required one
other police officer to witness his signature. The original copy of the receipt will be handed to the
prisoner and the duplicate will remain in the Receipt Book.

768
 P.G.O. No.357(cont’d)

(c) If the prisoner is illiterate in English, the description of the articles taken from him shall be
written in Kiswahili. This will be read over to him and explained in the presence of the officer
signing as a witness.
(d) When the prisoner has no property other than that which he is permitted to retain, a receipt
will, nevertheless, be issued to him with the word ”nil” entered thereon. The signature of a witness is
necessary on all Prisoners’ Property Receipts.
(e) All property taken from a prisoner will be parcelled up and labelled with a Prisoners’ Property
Label (PF. 167), showing the number of the receipt and the prisoner’s name and then stored in a safe
place. Any cash or valuables taken from a prisoner will be placed in a Valuable Property Envelope
(PF. 166) and handed over to the O/C. Station for safe custody in the safe or cash box.
(f) Articles of prisoners’ property which are required as exhibits in a case shall also be entered in
the Exhibits Register and a note to that effect made on both copies of the receipt.
7. When a prisoner leaves police custody on conviction, remand or discharge, his property, with
the exception of those items which are required as exhibits (vide para. 6(f)), will be handed back to
him and he will be required to acknowledge receipt, by signature, or thumbprint, on the reverse side
of the duplicate receipt in the Receipt Book. Not less than two police officers will also sign the
duplicate receipt as witness that the property has been correctly handed over. The original coy of the
Receipt will be taken from the prisoner and will be pasted on to the corresponding duplicate coy in
the receipt book.
8. The officer on Charge Room Duty is responsible for the safe custody of all prisoners’
property held in the Station. At the end of his tour of duty he shall hand over custody of all
prisoners’ property to his relief who shall check the property against the duplicate Prisoners’
Property Receipts and then note in the Station Diary if the property is correct. The relieving officer
shall report any deficiencies to the senior police officer in the Station and shall not accept the
property into his custody without further instructions.
9. The senior police officer in the Station on receipt of a report of deficiency in prisoners’
property will:-
(a) make an entry in the Report Book of the report;
(b) open a case file;
(c) initiate immediate investigation in to the report; and
(d) inform his O/C. District.

769
 P.G.O. No.358
SUPERVISION OF HABITUAL CRIMINALS – ON COURT
ORDER
The Law
1. The law relating to police supervision is set out under sections 341, 342 and 343 of the
Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20, R.E. 2002, and the Criminal Procedure (Police Supervision Rules),
1952.
2. The main object of a Supervision Order is to provide the police with the legal means of
exercising supervision over habitual criminals and, in particular, burglars and house-breakers in
order that they may be prevented from following a career of crime.
Definition of Habitual criminal
3. For the purposes of this Order, habitual criminal shall include thieves, breakers, receivers,
pickpockets and confidence tricksters who have been convicted on three or more occasions for
serious offences against property.

When Application for supervision order is to be made

4. Where an alien “Habitual Criminal” having no fixed abode is convicted before a subordinate
Court of a serious crime, particularly burglary, house breaking, warehouse or shop breaking, the
police prosecutor shall make application to the Court for an order of police supervision against the
prisoner.

Method of Application
5. (a) The Police Prosecutor shall make his application for a Supervision Order before the
subordinate Court proceeds to sentence the prisoner.
(b) Should the Court agree to the application, the prosecutor will request the Court to order that
the supervisee must reside in an area where employment is available or where relatives are known to
live (unless there are strong administrative or police reasons to the contrary).
(c) Where the court of its own accord makes a supervision order directing that the person
convicted shall be subject to police supervision on the expiration of his previous sentence, Police
Prosecutors must be prepared to make recommendations as to where the supervisee should reside.

Duties of the court when making order for supervision

6. At the time of making the order it is the duty of the court, under section 342 (1), to specify the
conditions of such supervision and inform the prisoner accordingly. Prosecutors must draw the
attention of the trial Magistrate to this duty if it is overlooked. This is important as failure may result
in the subsequent acquittal of a supervisee charged with failing to obey the terms of his order of
supervision.

Duties of Prosecutor when supervision order is made

7. When an order has been made, the prosecutor shall immediately apply to the court clerk for
two certified copies of the Court Order (Judicial Form CF 28 (a)) and forward them to the Forensic
Bureau.

Imprisonment of Supervisees
8. Arrangements have been made between the Inspector General of Police and the Principal
Commissioner of Prisons (when prison staff permits) for all convicts subject to supervision to be
transferred to the 1st Class Prison nearest to the district to which the supervisee is to report.
The prison authorities will effect such transfers at least six weeks before the convict is due for
release.

Documentation Procedure of supervisees

9. Two months prior to the release from prison of the supervisee, the Officer i/c Prisons will
forward a record of Previous Convictions Form (PF. 18C) to the O/C. Forensic Bureau.

770
 P.G.O. No.358(cont’d)

10. The O/C. Forensic Bureau, on receipt of PF. 18C will take the following action:-
(a) Prepare and forward to the Officer i/c prison responsible for the supervisee’s
custody:-
(i) Supervisee’s Identification Card (PF. 155), bearing the T.C.R.O. number;
(ii) Receipt Form (F.B. 5) in triplicate; and
(iii) Notification Form (F.B. 3).
(b) Forward to the Regional C.I.D. in whose Region the supervisee is to reside and report
:-
(i) copy of the Court Order (Jud. 28A);
(ii) copy of the Notification Form (F.B. 3); and
(iii) Criminal Record Form (PF. 18b).

11. The Regional C.I.D. Officer, within 48 hours of the receipt of the papers mentioned under
paragraph 10(b) above, will:-
(a) advise the Officer i/c Prison by letter of the date and place the supervisee is required
to report;
(b) prepare Police Supervision Sheet (P.F.21) in duplicate (one copy of which will be
filed at regional Headquarters);
(c) forward the supervisee’s file containing one copy of the Police Supervision Sheet
(PF. 21) and copy of the Court Order to the District C.I.D. Unit or O/C. District in
whose area the supervisee is to reside;
(d) return the Criminal Record Form (PF. 18b) to the O/C. Forensic Bureau.
(e) Write to the Regional C.I.D. Officer in whose Region the supervisee is sentence and
ask him to arrange for the supervisee to be photographed, this will be done in the
following manner :-
(i) the Regional Scenes of Crime Unit (if there is one) will prepare four prints,
send two to the Regional C.I.D. Officer requesting same to send the other two
prints and the negative to the O/C. Forensic Bureau for filing; and
(ii) if no scenes of crime unit is available, the negative will be sent to the O/C.
Forensic Bureau with instructions to send two prints to the Regional C.I.D.
Officer requiring them.
(f) On receipt of the supervisee’s photographs send one print to the O/C. District C.I.D.
and file one copy at Regional Headquarters.

12. The papers at paragraph 11(c) above shall form the supervisee’s dossier and shall be held and
maintained by the O/C. District C.I.D. Unit or where no C.I.D. Unit is established, by the O/C.
District.. The regional C.I.D. Officer will also hold a copy of each supervisee’s dossier. The dossier
shall be given a reference number prefixed by the Station abbreviation as detailed in P.G.O. No. 359
followed by the category letters SHS (Supervisee History sheet), the supervisee’s T.C.R.O. number
and the District C.I.D. serial number, e.g. MOS/SHS/241/59/3, indicating that a dossier is
maintained in Moshi for a supervisee whose identity card number is 241/59 and filed as Dossier No.
3 in the local C.I.D. Record Office.

13. An index of supervisees shall be merged with the nominal index maintained by District C.I.D.
and Regional C.I.D. officers.

14. All correspondence relating to supervisees will bear their respective T.C.R.O. numbers and all
copies of such correspondence and communications shall be sent to the Regional C.I.D. Officers and
the O/C. Forensic Bureau.

Supervisees Board
15. (a) A supervisee Board showing “at a glance” the position of a supervisee will be
maintained by District and Regional C.I.D. Officers in the form shown at Appendix “B”. Each

771
 P.G.O. No.358(cont’d)
supervisee will be the subject of a disc, one side of which will show the name, T.C.R.O. number
dossier reference and date of expiry of supervision. a photograph of the supervisee will be affixed to
the reverse of the disc.
(b) Discs of those supervisees in view will be placed on the “IN VIEW” section of the board,
showing the personal particulars. The “OUT OF VIEW” supervisees will be shown by the reverse
side of the disc displaying the photograph for all detectives to see.
(c) Re-convicted supervisees will be shown on the “IN PRISON” Section of the board with
additional particulars of date of release from prison.

Supervision – Implementation of
16. Upon the release of a supervisee, it shall be the duty of the Regional C.I.D. Officer to ensure
that the supervisee is immediately contacted and is aware of the conditions attaching to his
supervision.

17. When a supervisee first reports to the Police station from which he is to be supervised, the
O/C. Station will arrange for him to be viewed by all Station G.D. and C.I.D. personnel.

18. It shall then be the duty of the O/C. District C.I.D., or where no C.I.D. Unit is established, for
the O/C. District to assign a detective of the C.I.D. Unit to be responsible for the supervision of the
supervisee so that the detective so detailed may acquaint himself thoroughly with the habits,
characteristics and associates of the supervisee.

19. The supervisee will be contacted at least once weekly at his home or place of employment
both by day and by night, in addition to the voluntary reporting to the police station or native
authorities. It shall also be the duty of O/C. District C.I.D. to ensure that supervisees living long
distances from Police Stations and permitted to report to Local Authorities are visited by the native
authorities at similar intervals and by C.I.D. personnel. A record of the visit showing the apparent
mode and means of leaving and any other useful information on the supervisee will be made in the
police officer’s notebook and on his return to station, this entry will be copied into the supervisee’s
dossier.
NOTE: Supervision by Native Authorities is to be kept to the minimum and may only be
permitted in cases of real hardship unless ordered by the Court making the Order.
20. The detective assigned to the supervisee will report particulars of contact with the supervisee
weekly to his O/C. Station or C.I.D. Unit who shall record the particulars of the contact on the
supervisee’s sheet (PF. 21) in the dossier.

Permanent charge of Residence

21. (a) A supervisee may not transfer his place of residence from one District to another
without the written consent of the Administrative Officer or O/C. of the District in which he is
currently residing and on the Administrative Officer or O/C. of the District in which he intends to
reside. (Section 342 (1) (b) and (c)).
(b) An application for charge of residence will be passed to the Regional C.I.D. Officer in whose
region the supervisee is currently residing. This officer will refer the application to the Regional
C.I.D. Officer nearest to the intended new place of residence or if the new place of residence is in
the same region, to the relevant District C.I.D. Officer together with a copy of the supervisee’s
history sheet and the reasons for the desired change of residence.
(c) On receipt of the details referred to in sub-paragraph (b) above, the Regional/District C.I.D.
Officer in whose area the supervisee desires to reside will ascertain the validity and/or desirability of
the move of the supervisee into his area and will advise the Regional C.I.D. Officer in charge of the
supervisee’s current residential area, in writing, of his acceptance or otherwise.
(d) When a change of residence has been approved, in writing, by both officers, the Regional
C.I.D. Officer in whose area the supervisee is currently residing, will ensure that due advance
notification of the mode of travel and date and time of departure and estimated arrival is given to the
receiving officer and will, if necessary, provide an escort.

772
 P.G.O. No.358(cont’d)
(e) The supervisee’s Regional/District dossiers will be forwarded to the receiving officer and
where the new residence is in another region, the Regional C.I.D. Officer will follow the procedure
set out in paragraph 11(c) above. The CO. Forensic Bureau will be advised by the receiving officer
of the change of residence by letter.

Temporary change of residence

22. Where a supervisee is permitted to absent himself from his district for more than 30 days, his
card, together with a letter in the form appended hereto at Appendix “A” will be sent to the district
in which he intends temporarily to reside. This movement will be treated as a temporary transfer.

Breach of supervision order

23. Any breach of a Supervision Order shall be reported by an immediate signal to the CO.
Forensic Bureau and the supervisee thereafter shall be treated as a wanted person under terms of
P.G.O. No.37 and a Case File shall be opened without delay. The Regional C.I.D. Officer will, in
these circumstances, return Form 28A to the CO. Forensic Bureau.

24. A supervisee shall be considered “Out of View” one month from the date upon which he was
last seen, except in circumstances governed by written permission of absence.

Termination of Supervision
25. Upon expiry of a supervisee’s period of supervision, the supervisee’s card (PF. 155) will be
withdrawn and forwarded to the Regional C.I.D. Officer who, after completing his records, will
return the card to the CO. Forensic Bureau for destruction. The supervisee’s dossier will be retained
by the district and Regional C.I.D. Units and the supervisee treated as habitual criminal in
accordance with P.G.O. NO. 359.

773
 P.G.O. No.358(cont’d)

APPENDIX “A”To P.G.O. No. 358

To: The O/C. Police ....................................................................... District.
1. I have today given my written consent to the Police supervisee whose details are given below
to proceed to your district and to reside there for a period of ........................... days from today’s
date. I would request you to return the duplicate, duly completed, of this letter to me in due course.
2. Please inform me, by telegram, if subject does not report to you within seven days.
Officer i/c police .................. District
Date .......................................
Copy to: CO. Forensic Bureau.
C.R.O. No.......................................................................
Name......................................................................................
Tribe...................................................................................
Age................................................................................
Description ...............................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
Place which supervisee intends to visit ....................................
To: The Officer i/c Police................................................................. District.
The above named supervisee reported his arrival in this district on .......................................
He resided at .................................................... and .............................................................
During his stay in this district and he left for yours on .............................................. having been
instructed to report to you within seven days.
Officer i/c Police ................. District
Date ....................................
Copy to: CO. Forensic Bureau.

APPENDIX “B” To P.G.O. No. 358

SUPERVISEES KILIMANJARO SPECIMEN I

DISTRICT IN VIEW OUT OF VIEW IN PRISON

Mwanga OOOOOOOOO OOOO

Moshi OOOOO O

Hai OOOO OO

Same OOO

Rombo OOOOO OOO

774
 P.G.O. No.358(cont’d)

APENDIX “B”
To P.G.O. No. 358
SUPERVISEES
MOSHI DISTRICT
SPECIMEN II
STATION IN VIEW OUT OF VIEW IN PRISON

Central OOOO OO

Majengo OOO O

Himo OOOOO OOO

775
 P.G.O. No.359
SUPERVISION OF HABITUAL CRIMINALS – WITHOUT COURT
SUPERVISION ORDER
General
1. Police supervision without a Court Order shall be exercised over habitual criminals by those
Police Stations in whose area habitual criminals reside or frequent.
2. The procedure for the supervision of habitual criminals on a court order made under Section
341, 342 and 343 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 is set out in Police General Order
No. 358.
Definition of Habitual Criminal
3. For the purpose of this Order habitual criminals shall include thieves, breakers, receivers,
prick pockets and confidence tricksters, who have been convicted on three or more occasions for
offences under chapters XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX and XXXI of the Penal Code, Cap. 16 R.E.
2002 and such Police supervisees, whom, upon expiry of a Supervision Order, the Regional C.I.D.
Officer considers, should be treated as habitual criminals.
Selection and Documentation of Habitual criminals by Regional C.I.D.
Officers
4. Regional C.I.D. Officers will examine Criminal Record Forms (PF. 18b) in order to select
habitual criminals and will take the following action:-
(a) compile a dossier (PF. 26) in duplicate from the criminal’s particulars set out in PF. 18b.
(b) endorse PF. 18b on the top left-hand corner with the station and number of the dossier and
return PF. 18b to the Forensic Bureau.
(c) Give the dossier a reference number in the form laid down for Supervisee Dossiers (see
P.G.O. No. 358) except that the category prefix will be H.C. (Habitual Criminal) and the number of
the supervisee card omitted e.g. MOS/HC/5, will indicate that a dossier is maintained by District
C.I.D. Moshi for an habitual criminal and filed as dossier No. 5 in the District C.I.D. Office.
(d) The dossier will be retained by the Regional C.I.D. officer until such time as he is informed
through the medium of The Police Gazette of the date of release of the criminal, whereupon the
original will be forwarded to the District C.I.D. Unit in whose area the criminal was last convicted or
is known to reside.
Selection and documentation of Habitual criminals by District C.I.D. Officers
5. Where a habitual criminal is known to reside within the area policed by district C.I.D. and no
dossier exists for that criminal, the District C.I.D. Officer will be responsible for preparing and
maintaining a dossier (PF. 26) on that criminal and a copy of the PF. 26 shall be forwarded to the
Regional C.I.D. Officers for his records.
6. Where the Regional C.I.D. Officer receives a copy of a district dossier and no record of the
subject is available, he will advise the CO. Forensic Bureau and request details of criminal
antecedents. The CO. Forensic Bureau will, when subject has been traced in the Forensic Bureau
records, forward the P.F. 18b to the Regional C.I.D. Officer, who, after noting the details of the
criminal’s history and informing the O/C. District C.I.D. concerned, will return the PF. 18b to the
Forensic Bureau in accordance with para 4(b) above.
7. Habitual criminals will be indexed in the Nominal Index (see P.G.O. No. 40) maintained by
Regional and District C.I.D. Units.
Supervision of Habitual criminals
8. Each District C.I.D. Officer will ensure that every members of his unit has a complete
knowledge of the residence, associates, characteristics of every habitual criminal in the area and that

776
 P.G.O. No.359
regular contacts are made and recorded in the officer’s notebook and in the criminals dossier in the
same way as for supervisees under P.G.O. No. 358.
Transfers
9. Where a habitual criminal transfers his residence to another district/region, the District C.I.D.
dossier will be sent to the Regional C.I.D. Officer who will forward both District and Regional
dossiers to the Regional C.I.D. Officer in whose region the habitual criminal has taken up his new
residence. Relevant information concerning such transfer will be communicated to the Forensic
Bureau and will be recorded on the index cards of the habitual criminal and retained by the district
and Regional C.I.D. units previously concerned.
Habitual criminals out of view
10. When a habitual criminal has been out of view for a period of thirty days or more, details of
the subject will be sent to the Forensic Bureau for information.

777
 SECTION XIII
TRAFFIC LAW ENFORCEMENT
Nos. 371 - 400
P.G.O. No. Title
371 Traffic Forms-Use of
372 Vehicle Storage and Impound
373 Traffic Control
374 Traffic – Driving Under the Influence of Alcohol or Drugs
375 Traffic – Road Accident Investigations
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400

781
 PGO No. 371

TRAFFIC FORMS – USE OF

General
1. Printed Traffic Forms will be used by all Stations in the manner set out hereunder.

Warning Notice – Traffic (PF. 66)

2. To be used in all cases where the offence is not sufficiently serious to justify a
prosecution. The original will be sent to the offender and the duplicate will be filed.

Traffic File (PF. 89) (Thick and Thin)

3. The thick Traffic File will be used in all cases of inquiry into traffic accidents and
offences where the number of documents renders its use necessary, usually by virtue of the
seriousness of the offence. The thin Traffic File will be used in simple cases where few
documents have to be filed, Traffic Files will be maintained in accordance with P.G.O. No.
287 “Case Files and Minor Offence Dockets”, the thick file as a Case File and the thin file as
a Minor Offence Docket.

Particulars of a Road Accident (PF. 90)

4. To be used in accordance with paragraph 9 of P.G.O. No. 293 to supply Insurance
Companies with particulars of road accidents which do not involve a criminal offence.
Reports will be prepared in duplicate and one copy will be filed. (See also paragraph 14 of
this order).

Request for information of Identity of Driver of Motor Vehicle (PF. 92)

5. This form to be addressed to the registered owner of any vehicle seen being driven by
an unidentified driver in a manner which constitutes an offence. The scheduled seven days’
time limit for the receipt of a reply may be extended according to circumstances. The
duplicate PF. 92 shall be retained in the traffic file.

Vehicle Inspection Report Book (PF. 93)

6. For use whenever a motor vehicle is inspected by the police or by an authorized
examiner either following an accident, a road check, or as a prerequisite for licensing. The
report should be endorsed with the reason for the examination. The report (which is in book
form) is completed in quadruplicate. The Original will be given to the vehicle owner or his
representative and the duplicate and triplicate copies filed in the traffic file.

Notice to driver of Commission of Traffic Offence (PF. 101)

7. This form is normally used in connection with minor offences such as improper
parking, licensing offences and causing obstruction in cases where the vehicle has been left
and it is undesirable for the reporting officer to wait unduly for the driver’s return to obtain
his particulars. These forms are supplied in pad form and should be completed in duplicate,
the original being attached to the vehicle in a conspicuous position (usually under the
windscreen wiper) containing a request for the driver to contact the police to enable his name
to be ascertained. The duplicate copy will be retained in the possession of the Traffic Officer
for final filing in the traffic file.

Exceeding speed Limit Report (PF. 106)

8. One copy of this form (which is similar to PF. 108 but contains space for information
essential to a successful prosecution) will be prepared for each offence and will be filed in the
relevant traffic file.

782
 PGO No. 371(cont’d)

Particulars of Motor Accident (PF. 107)

9. Officers proceeding to the scenes of accidents for investigation should carry a supply
of these forms. As many actions as possible of this form should be completed at the scene or
as soon as practicable afterwards to ensure that a record is made of all the essential
information.

Report of Motor Offence (PF. 108)

10. One copy of this form will be prepared for each offence noted and the forms will be
retained in the relevant traffic files. Copies of this form should be carried by motor traffic
patrols and should be completed as soon as an offence is noted.

Notice of Intended Prosecution (PF. 109)

11. This notice is used to inform motorists of charges which the police intend to prefer
against them so that they may have an opportunity for them to prepare their defence and to
refute any allegations which might be made later of insufficient notice of prosecution. Its
issue is confined for practical purposes to offending motorists whose address other than a
post office box number is not known. The duplicate copy will be filed in the relevant traffic
file.

Motor vehicle identification plates warning notice – (PF. 110)

12. Issued as a warning to owners of motor vehicles which have been observed
displaying defective or illegible registration number plates. The specific details of the offence
observed should be stated.

Production of Documents (PF. 114)

13. Whenever a driver on whom PF. 136 (Notice to Driver to Produce Documents) is
served reports at a Police Station, the particulars of his driving license, certificate of
insurance and vehicle registration book will be recorded on this form which will then be
forwarded to the O/C. of the Station responsible for the issue of PF. 136.

Particular of Road Accident – Final Report (PF. 115)

14. Following the issue of PF. 90 – “Particulars of a Road Accident”, this form may be
issued free of charge on request showing the final result of the case, i.e. whether or not a
prosecution ensued and the result where applicable, Final reports will be prepared , in
duplicate, with the copy retained in the traffic file.

Notice to Driver to Produce Documents (PF. 136)

15. Notice to be served on driver to produce driver’s license/certificate of
insurance/registration book at a stated police station within five days, or longer as may be
practicable, when such documents are required but are not readily available. These notices
are in pad form; original to be served on driver and duplicate filed in the traffic file.

Driver’s Certificate of Competence (PF. 104)

16. Certificate issued upon the successful completion of a driving test for attaching to an
application for a driver’s license from the Licensing Authority. The applicant’s signature or
thumb-print must be placed upon the reverse of the original certificate. The duplicate copy is
sent to the local Licensing Authority and the triplicate copy remains in the book. No charge is
made for this certificate, but a fee of shs. 5000/= is made for the driving test.

Certificate of Inspection of Vehicles (PF. 195)

17. Certificate issued in original only to the owners of vehicles which have successfully
passed an examination for road-worthiness (see booklet: Notes on Inspection of Motor
Vehicles). No charge is made for the issue of this certificate but a fee of Shs. 5000/= is

783
 PGO No. 371(cont’d)
payable for the inspection of a public service vehicle when carried out by police at the
owner’s request prior to licensing.

Traffic Accident Statistical Card (PF. 212)

18. One card will be completed for each injury accident. The traffic file should be
endorsed showing that this has been done. Completed cards will be forwarded monthly to the
Inspector General through Regional Commanders.

Traffic Breath Test Record Form (PF 223)

19. Completed when a person is tested for Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) found to
be above 0.80% BAC.

Notification of Traffic offence

20. (a) This form to be used for disposal of simple traffic offences (listed on reverse
of the form) under section 70A of the Road Traffic Act, Cap. 168 R.E. 2002.
(b) The form is completed in triplicate, the original handed to the accused,
duplicate forwarded to the court at which the case will be heard and the triplicate retained in
the book.

Traffic records
21. The Traffic Unit will collect and maintain the following types of traffic-related
information:
(a) Traffic accident data (reports, investigations, locations),
(b) Traffic enforcement data (notifications, arrests, dispositions, locations),
(c) Roadway hazard reports,
(d) Traffic enforcement activity requests,
(e) Traffic volume data, and,
(f) Abandoned vehicles.
22. The above information will be gathered from traffic accident reports, police and
traffic-related reports.

Maintenance, distribution, retention and release of records

23. The Records Unit of the Traffic Unit is charged with the responsibility of processing,
maintaining and distributing all traffic records. The Traffic Records Unit will also retain and
release records in compliance with all applicable laws, in particular the Road Traffic Act,
Cap. 168 R.E. 2002.
24. The recording of accident locations, notification locations, and dates and times of
each are maintained by the Traffic Records Unit.

Analysis of accidents - factors to be included

25. A monthly report, prepared by the Records Unit from data, shall include the
following:
(a) number of accidents by time of day and day of week;
(b) type of accidents;
(c) location of accidents;
(d) primary collision factor;
(e) type of vehicles involved;
(f) the number of persons killed;
(g) the number of persons injured;
(h) the number of traffic accidents investigated and other data relevant to such
investigations; and
(i) other pertinent data on police activities on road safety.
26. Accident statistics for each month will be compared to the base year data for the
same month of the previous year and will include cumulative total year-to-date this year, and

784
 PGO No. 371(cont’d)
cumulative total year-to-date last year with a percentage of change (increase or decrease)
from the previous year's accidents.
27. Primary collision factors will be identified for each month. The report will contain a
list of the violations and indicate the number of violations in each category and a percentage
of total accidents caused by each primary collision factor. The leading primary collision
factor or cause of accidents per month will be listed, along with the percentage of accidents
attributed to it.

Analysis of traffic accident experience

28. High accident locations shall be identified through semi-annual and annual analyses
of all available traffic accident data. The leading locations where accidents most frequently
occur will be identified. Enforcement activities in those locations will consist of directed
patrol assignments with progress results reported on directed patrol assignment summaries.
29. High accident locations for a given month, along with the primary collision factor,
will be identified in the periodic report to the National Road Safety Council.
30. All traffic enforcement efforts shall be directed towards violations, which occur in
accident situations. The type of enforcement action should be designed to meet Unit goals
and to modify accident-causing behaviour. Basing analysis on a sufficient period of time and
information will allow for any variations that may occur as the result of weather changes,
population shifts, and monthly or seasonal increases or decreases in traffic volume.

Distribution of traffic analysis reports

31. Monthly, quarterly, and yearly traffic accident analyses will be distributed by the
Commander Traffic Unit through Regional Traffic Officers who will in turn make copies of
the analyses available to their respective O/C Districts.
32. Based on the accident data and information provided, the O/C District will identify
enforcement problems and deploy personnel and equipment on a directed patrol basis, with
the goal of the reduction of accidents and accident causing violations in the targeted area.
33. O/C District shall always provide feedback to the Regional Traffic Officer of the
measures taken to address problems in their localities.

785
 PGO No. 372

VEHICLE STORAGE AND IMPOUNDING

1. The purpose of this Order is to establish procedures for the legal removal of vehicles,
when necessary, from the roadway at an accident scene, or in any situation where a vehicle is
obstructing normal, safe traffic flow.
2. Officers shall cause the removal of a vehicle, pursuant to the Road Traffic Act, Cap.
168 R.E. 2002 when:
(a) The vehicle is in the roadway, cannot be moved, and is obstructing traffic.
(b) The driver/owner is dead or injured to the extent that he is unable to remove the
vehicle.
(c) In cases where a vehicle is not drivable, is a traffic hazard, and the driver is
capable of making decisions, the removal of the vehicle should be handled as a private tow.
Record of vehicles
3. Every vehicle brought or towed to the station on road traffic matters shall be
registered.
5. Any vehicle which remains uncollected by the owner within one year will be regarded
as unclaimed property and be dealt with in accordance with PGO 304 after efforts have been
made to locate and notify the owner of the impeding disposition.

786
 PGO No. 373

TRAFFIC CONTROL
General
1. The purpose of this Order is to provide guidelines to govern the movement and
control of traffic.
2. Manual traffic control may be required in the following situations:
(a) Traffic accident scenes;
(b) Rush hour traffic;
(c) Official motorcades;
(d) Special events (processions, parades, bike or motor races or other sports);
(e) Emergency cases;
(f) Traffic robots failure; and,
(g) Stalled vehicles.
High visibility clothing
3. Officers should wear reflective jackets or raincoats for visibility when operating at
night or during rains and other situations of poor visibility.
Traffic control - fire scenes
4. Officers assigned to traffic control at fire scenes will be responsible for assuring that
roadways in the area are accessible to all emergency vehicles. The officer at a fire scene may
close roads as necessary to facilitate the response of emergency vehicles. Such officer will
continue traffic control until the conclusion of the incident or until properly relieved by
another officer.

787
 PGO No. 374

TRAFFIC – DRIVING UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF ALCOHOL

1. When a person is arrested for driving or attempting to drive a motor vehicle or carriage
or for being in charge of a motor vehicle or carriage on a road or other public place while his
efficiency as a driver is impaired by alcohol the officer in charge of the case shall arrange for
a test to be carried out to determine the level of the alcohol in his blood.
2. If it is certified that the blood alcohol content is above the prescribed limit – the driver
should be charged. Where it is certified that the blood alcohol content is certified not to be
above the prescribed limit - the driver should be released immediately unless held for other
lawful reasons.

788
 P.G.O. No. 375

TRAFFIC – ROAD ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS

1. Under the Road Traffic Act, Cap. 168 R.E 2002 the driver of a motor vehicle
involved in an accident need only report to Police -
(a) If he is involved in an accident which results in injury to another person (he
is not required to report the accident if he alone is injured).
(b) If he is involved in an accident which results in damage to another vehicle, or
to any domestic animal not being carried in his vehicle AND DOES NOT STOP AND GIVE
HIS NAME AND ADDRESS AND THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE OWNER AND
THE IDENTIFICATION MARKS OF THE VEHICLE to any person having reasonable
grounds for so requiring at the place of the accident. (He is not required to report if the only
vehicle damaged is his own, nor if the injured animal was being carried in his vehicle. Nor is
he required to report if after an accident causing damage to another vehicle or injury to an
animal not being carried on his vehicle, he gives the required details as above).
(c) If he is involved in an accident which results in damage to property not being
his own property AND DOES NOT STOP AND GIVE HIS NAME AND ADDRESS AND
THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE OWNER AND THE IDENTIFICATION MARKS
OF THE VEHICLE to any person having reasonable grounds for so requiring at the place of
the accident.
2. On receipt of the report that a traffic accident has occurred, police responsible for
such investigation shall proceed immediately to the scene. Traffic Accident Report Form,
First Aid outfit, measuring tape, chalk or flour for marking the road and, in serious accidents,
a camera will be taken. Warning signs and lamps should also be taken where necessary.

Action at the scene of the accident and subsequently

3. On arrival at the scene of the accident, the following action should be taken :-
(a) Supervise the provision of first aid to injured persons and arrange for them to
be sent to hospital for treatment. Speed is essential when dealing with injured persons. Names
and addresses of injured persons should be ascertained and names of next – of – kin where
necessary. Steps should be taken to establish the identity of any unconscious persons.
(b) If the road is blocked, ensure the smooth flow of traffic by diverting it round
the accident or removing the vehicles to the side of the road after marking the relative tyre
positions on the road.
(c) Obtain the names and addresses of any eye witnesses at the scene and keep
pedestrians moving to prevent congestion.
(d) When taking particulars in PF 31, complete one thing at a time as far as
possible, e.g. if two or more vehicles are involved, obtain all the required information relating
to one before dealing with another. Allow vehicles to go as soon as dealt with to relieve
obstruction after taking notes of any damage and checking the conditions of their brakes,
steering, horn, etc. If mechanical defects in a vehicle are suspected, an examination should be
carried out by an Inspector of Motor Vehicles and such examinations will invariably be
ordered in all cases of fatal accidents. The drivers of vehicles should be assisted, if necessary,
in exchanging names and addresses and particulars of their insurance companies.
(e) If there is reason to believe that the efficiency of any driver is impaired by
drink or drugs, take action in accordance with P.G.O. No. 374.
(f) Take measurements of the road and prepare a rough sketch showing
dimensions of the road, location of skid marks and extent, position of bodies, vehicles,
broken glass, earth form mudguards and any other evidence of a similar nature. Measurement
should be accurately recorded and photograph taken where necessary.

757
 P.G.O. No. 375(cont’d)
(g) In case of damage to Government or public utility property, report to the
respective authority.
4. Injured persons should be interviewed after medical permission has been obtained and
statements recorded. Care should be taken to see that Form P.F. 3 is completed by the
Medical Authorities in respect of each injured person. The next-of-kin will be informed in all
cases of fatal or serious injury.
5. Statements shall be taken from drivers of the vehicles involved and their passengers
and other witnesses. Driving licences, certificates of insurance and vehicle licences will be
checked for validity.

Hit -and- Run accidents

6. (a) In the investigation of hit-and-run accident, the essential requirement is speed
to prevent the destruction of incriminating evidence. Once the immediate action laid down in
paragraph 3 of this order has been carried out, the investigating officer shall inform all local
garages and repair shops giving as many details of the vehicles concerned as possible and
requesting that a report should be made if any vehicle which appears to have been involved in
an accident is brought in for repair.
(b) Care must be taken to collect all pieces of broken glass, metal, silvers of paint
and any other material evidence found at the scene of the accident and these should be
preserved for comparison with the vehicle when traced.
(c) The traffic and General Duties staff should be warned to keep a look-out for
newly damaged or repaired vehicles answering to the prescription of the wanted vehicle.
Garage proprietors should be similarly informed.
(d) When a vehicle has been traced, arrangements should invariably be made for it
to be inspected in situ before it is moved. The whole of the bodywork and fittings should be
closely examined for traces of blood, hair and foreign bodies or scratches, dents, etc. Any
foreign bodies should be carefully removed and preserved for forensic examination.
7. When a death occurs as a result of a traffic accident, the coroner will be informed by
the submission of Form “B” and the body will be identified by a relative or witness to the
Medical Officer performing the post-mortem examination and, if possible, by a witness
present at the scene of the accident. Such witnesses should be warned that they will be
required to give evidence at the inquest or at Court. A report on the post-mortem examination
will be obtained on Form “D” (M.F.L. 6) from the Medical Officer, duly signed.
8. Upon receipt of an accident report, an entry will be made in the Station Report Book
(P.F. 162), together with a First Information Report (reverse side of P.F. 162A). The Charge
Room Officer responsible will immediately inform the O/C. Station or O/C. Traffic Unit and
ask him to provide suitable numbers of investigating officers. In all cases of fatal or serious
injuries or extensive damage, the O/C. will himself proceed to the scene and supervise the
investigation. First Warning Messages (P.G.O. No. 314) will be sent as required and in fatal
accidents details will be sent to the Labour Officer of the area concerned. Traffic File (P.F.
89) (thick or thin) vide P.G.O. No. 371 will be used.
9. On the completion of an investigation involving fatal or serious accidents,
drunkenness, serious driving offences or where persons of important Government officials or
police officers are concerned, the Traffic File will be forwarded to the O/C. District or Traffic
Unit with recommendations for prosecutions or further action.
10. Attention is drawn to the procedure to be followed in cases where Police Vehicles are
involved in accidents, as set out in P.G.O. No. 196 “Transport – Accidents to Police
Vehicles”.
11. A Traffic Accident Statistical Card (P.F. 212) will be completed in respect of all
reportable injury accidents.

757
 P.G.O. No. 375(cont’d)
12. Refer to P.G.O. No. 371, “Traffic Forms – Use of” or the various traffic forms which
may require completion.
Custody and disposal of Accident files
13. (a) Cases prosecuted before the courts shall be sent to District H.Q. and retained
there for one year and will then be destroyed by fire by the O/C. District, as laid down in
paragraph 15 of P.G.O. No. 286.
(b) Accident files in which no prosecution results will be sent
to District H.Q. and retained there for two years and will then be
similarly destroyed.

758
 SECTION XIV
POLITICAL AFFAIRS AND DEMOCRATIC ACTIVITIES
Nos. 401 - 410
P.G.O. No Title
401 Political Parties - Rights and Privileges and Meetings of
402 Political Parties – Election Campaigns by
403 Other Public Meetings and Processions
404
405
406
407
408
409
410

761
 P.G.O. No. 401
POLITICAL PARTIES - RIGHTS AND PRIVILEGES AND
MEETINGS OF

1. (a) The activities, rights and privileges of Political Parties in Tanzania are regulated
by the Constitutions of the United Republic of Tanzania 1977, Cap. 2 R. E. 2002 as amended
and the Constitution of Zanzibar of 1984 as well as the provisions of the Political Parties Act,
Cap. 258 R.E. 2002, National Elections Act, Cap. 343 R.E. 2002, Local Government
(Elections) Act, Cap.292 R.E. 2002 and the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap.
322 R.E. 2002 among other laws.
(b) In particular, officers in charge of areas where political parties carry their
activities are required to ensure law and order prevails but without interfering with genuine
and lawful activities of political parties.
(c) To ensure smooth activities of political parties in Regions and Districts,
Regional Police Commanders and O/C Districts shall be responsible for the regulation of
political parties’ assemblies and processions in their respective areas of jurisdiction in
accordance with the Political Parties Act, Cap. 258 R.E. 2002. This takes into account the
fact that every party which has been provisionally or fully registered is entitled to:–
(i) hold and address public meetings in any area in the United Republic after
giving notification to the police officer in charge of the area concerned for purposes of
publicising itself and soliciting for membership;
(ii) the protection and assistance of the security agencies for the purposes of
facilitating peaceful and orderly meetings.
2 (a) Where a procession proposed to be organised by a Political Party extends to
more than one District in a region, the issue whether a permit should be granted or not shall
be resolved between the Officers in Command of the Districts to be affected in consultation
with the Regional Police Commander. Otherwise the relevant O/C District shall have powers
to grant or refuse permit to organise a procession in his District in accordance with the
provisions of the Political Parties Act, Cap 258 R.E. 2002.
(b) O/C District should not allow a political party with a provisional registration to
campaign for any candidate in any parliamentary or presidential election or in a local
authority election as such parties are ineligible to do so.
3. Notwithstanding any other written law to the contrary sections 43, 44, 45 and 46 of the
Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap. 322 (refer to Appendix A to this Order) shall
apply and have effect as to all meetings to be held in any part of the United Republic by any
political party whether provisionally or fully registered.
4. O/C District shall ensure that a political party does not hold a meeting or procession in
any open public place in any area unless a written notification of not less than forty eight
hours before the meeting is submitted of its impending meeting to the police officer in charge
of the area in which the meeting is to take place.
5. O/C District should ensure that the written notification referred to in paragraph (4)
above specifies in the minimum:–
(a) the name of the political party submitting the notification;
(b) the place in and time at which the meeting is to take place;
(c) the agenda or general purpose of the meeting.

762
 P.G.O. No.401(cont’d)

6. O/C District must be aware that the Minister for Public Security and Safety may from
time to time by notice published in the Gazette specify other particulars to be provided by a
party in the notification. These particulars once issued should also be observed by political
parties.
7. Where a political party submits a notification in accordance with para 4 above it may
proceed to hold the meeting in question as scheduled unless and until it receives an order
from the police officer in charge of the area directing that the meeting be not held as notified.
8. An O/C District to whom a notification is submitted pursuant to para 4 shall not give a
stop order under paragraph 7 in relation to the notification unless he is satisfied that–
(a) a previous notification has been submitted by another political party or other
persons for holding a meeting or other function or procession in the same place at the same
time as is intended by the notifier;
(b) the meeting or procession is intended to execute, or to be used for, a purpose
contrary to the laws of the land;
(c) the meeting is likely or intended to cause a breach of the peace or to prejudice
the public safety in the area;
(d) the political party or group of persons giving the notification is not a registered
political party or body of persons or the person submitting the notification is not
appropriately identified as an authorised representative of the political party concerned.
(e) the holding or continuance of any assembly or procession in a public place is
otherwise than in accordance with the notification issued or in regard to which any particular
specified by the Minister has been or is being contravened.
9. (a) A stop order given under paragraph 8 shall be in writing and in such form as is
able to easily disclose the reasons for its issuance and state whether or not the political party
concerned may hold the meeting at the venue at another time or date convenient to it in the
same area.
(b) A stop order should be issued as a matter of last resort and that O/C Districts
should not interfere with political activities of a political party unless there are legitimate and
compelling reasons to do so.

763
 P.G.O. No.401(cont’d)
APPENDIX A (To P.G.O. 401)
EXTRACT FROM THE POLICE AND AUXILIARY SERVICES ACT, CAP 322 R.E. 2002
43. Assemblies and processions in public places
(1) Any person who is desirous of convening, collecting, forming or organising any assembly or
procession in any public place shall, not less than forty eight hours before the time when the assembly or
procession is scheduled to take place, submit a written notification of his impending assembly or procession to the
police officer in charge of the area specifying:–
(a) the place and time at which the meeting is to take place;
(b) the purpose in general of the meeting; and
(c) such other particulars as the Minister may from time to time, by notice published in the Gazette,
specify.
(2) Where a person submits a notification in accordance with subsection (1), he may proceed to convene,
collect, form or organise the assembly or procession in question as scheduled unless and until he receives an order
from the Police Officer in charge of the area directing that the assembly or procession shall not be held as notified.
(3) A Police Officer to whom a notification has been submitted pursuant to subsection (1), shall not give a
stop order under subsection (2) in relation to the notification unless he is satisfied that the assembly or procession
is likely to cause a breach of the peace or to prejudice the public safety or the maintenance of public order or to be
used for any unlawful purpose.
(4) The officer incharge of Police may stop or prevent the holding or continuance of any assembly or
procession in a public place which has been convened, collected, formed or organised otherwise than in
accordance with the notification under subsection (1) or in regard to which any particular specified by the Minister
under paragraph (c) of subsection (1) has been or is being contravened and may, for any of the purposes aforesaid,
give or issue such orders as he may consider necessary or expedient, including orders for the dispersal of any such
assembly or procession as aforesaid.
(5) The Minister may by order declare that the provisions of this section shall not apply to any assembly
or procession convened, collected, formed or organised exclusively for one or more of or a combination of one or
more such purposes as may be specified in such order.
(6) Any person who is aggrieved by the terms of a stop order issued under subsection (3) or, any order
given by a police officer under subsection (4), may appeal to the Minister whose decision on the matter shall be
final.
44. Power to disperse assemblies and processions wherever held
The officer in charge of Police may stop or prevent the holding or continuance of any assembly or
procession in any place whatsoever if, in the opinion of such officer the holding or continuance, as the case may be,
of such assembly or procession breaches the peace or prejudices the public safety or the maintenance of peace and
order and may, for any of the purposes aforesaid, give or issue such orders as he may consider necessary or
expedient, including orders for the dispersal of any such assembly or procession as aforesaid.

45. When assembly or procession unlawful

Any assembly or procession in which three or more persons attending or taking part neglect or refuse to
obey any order for dispersal given under the provisions of subsection (4) of section 43 or section 44, shall be
deemed to be an unlawful assembly, within the meaning of section 74 of the Penal Code, Cap. 16 R.E. 2002.

46. Penalties
(1) Any person who:–
(a) neglects or refuses to obey any order given or issued under the provisions of subsection (4) of
section 43 or section 44; or
(b) contravenes any particular specified by the Minister in accordance with paragraph (c) of
subsection (1) of section 43, shall be guilty of an offence and may be arrested without a warrant and shall be liable
on conviction to a fine not exceeding fifty thousand shillings or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding three
months or to both such fine and imprisonment.
(2) Subject to the provisions of any order made under subsection (5) of section 43, where any assembly or
procession in a public place has been convened, collected, formed or organised otherwise than in accordance with
subsection (1) of section 43–
(a) every person taking part in convening collecting, forming or organising such assembly or
procession shall be guilty of an offence and may be arrested without a warrant and shall be liable on conviction to
a fine not exceeding two hundred thousand shillings or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding one year or to
both such fine and imprisonment;
(b) every person attending such assembly or taking part in such procession, who knows or has
reasons to believe that such assembly or procession has been convened, collected, formed or organised otherwise
than in accordance with the provisions of subsection (1) of section 43, shall be guilty of an offence and may be
arrested without a warrant and shall be liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding one hundred thousand shillings
or to imprisonment for a term not exceeding six months or to both such fine and imprisonment
.

764
 P.G.O. No.402
POLITICAL PARTIES – ELECTION CAMPAIGNS BY
General Conduct during Campaigns
1. O/C Districts are reminded that a declaration of the period of campaign under election
laws shall, without further assurance, constitute a permit for the candidates and the political
parties sponsoring such candidates to convene and address public meetings for the purposes
of furthering the candidate's election or undertaking any public or door to door canvassing.
2. O/C Districts are duty bound to ensure that all political parties and candidates enjoy
equal rights with regard to election campaigns. Rallies, processions or other election
campaigns of the opponents cannot be disrupted or obstructed by another party.
3. The right of every individual for peaceful and undisturbed home life shall be
respected, however much the political parties or candidates may present his political opinions
or activities. Organising demonstrations or picketing before the houses of individuals by way
of protesting against their opinions or activities shall not be resorted to under any
circumstances.
4. No political party or candidate shall permit its or his followers to make use of any
individuals land, building, compound wall etc. without his permission for erecting flag-staffs,
suspending banners, pasting notices, writing slogans etc.,
5. (a) Police officers should arrest anyone who create obstructions in or break up
meetings and processions organised by the political parties.
(b) Workers or sympathisers of one political party shall not create disturbances at
public meetings organised by another political party by putting questions orally or in writing
or by distributing' leaflets of their own party.
(c) Processions shall not be taken out by one party along places at which meetings
are being held by another party. Posters issued by one party shall not be removed by workers
of another party.
Meetings
6. The party or candidate shall inform the local police authorities of the venue and time
of any proposed meeting well in time so as, to enable the police to make necessary
arrangements for controlling traffic and maintaining peace and order.
7. A party or candidate shall ascertain in advance if there are any restrictive or
prohibitory orders in force in the place proposed for the meeting. If such orders exist, they
shall be followed strictly. If any exemption is required from such orders it shall be applied for
and obtained well in time.
8. If permission of license is to be obtained for the use of loudspeakers or any other
facility in connection with any proposed meeting, the party or candidate shall apply to the
authority concerned well in advance and obtain such permission or license.
9. Organisers of a meeting shall invariably seek the assistance of the police on duty for
dealing with persons disturbing a meeting or otherwise attempting to create disorder.
Organisers themselves shall not take action against such persons.
10. O/C District should ensure that reports to the police of disturbance or disruption by
trouble makers to any rally, meeting or other programme are investigated and dealt with
according to law. The organisers must not take measures against the trouble makers on their
own lest they become guilt of an assault or any other offence under the Penal Code, Cap. 16.

765
 P.G.O. No.402(cont’d)

11. O/C District should bring to the attention of the organisers of meetings, rallies or
procession the fact that lands, buildings or other movable or immovable property of any
person must not be damaged in connection with the election and personal peace of any person
must not be violated by undesired activities or undisciplined behaviour of party members or
those in attendance.
12. No contender will in any way exceed the fixed time limit of the election campaign.
Processions
13. A party or candidate organising a procession shall decide before hand the time and
place of the starting of the procession, the route to be followed and the time and place at
which the procession will terminate. There shall ordinarily be no deviation from the
programme.
14. The organisers shall give advance intimation to the local police authorities of the
programme so as to enable the latter to make necessary arrangements.
15. The organisers shall ascertain if any restrictive orders are in force in the localities
through which the procession has to pass, and shall comply with the restrictions unless
exempted specially by competent authority. Any traffic regulations or restrictions shall also
be carefully adhered to.
16. The organisers shall take steps in advance to arrange for passage, of the procession so
that there is no block or hindrance to traffic. If the procession is very long, it shall be
organised in segments of suitable lengths, so that at convenient intervals, especially at points
where the procession has to pass road junctions, the passage of held-up traffic could be
allowed by stages thus avoiding heavy traffic congestion.
17. Processions shall be so regulated as to keep as much to the left of the road as possible
and the direction and advice of the police on duty shall be strictly complied with.
18. If two or more political parties or candidates propose to take processions over the same
route or parts thereof at about the same time, O/C District shall require the organises to
establish contact well in advance and decide upon the measures to be taken to see that the
processions do not clash or cause hindrance to traffic. The assistance of the police shall be
availed of for arriving at a satisfactory arrangement. For this purpose, the parties shall contact
the police at the earliest opportunity.
19. The political parties or candidates shall exercise control to the maximum extent
possible in the matter of processionists carrying articles which may be put to misuse by
undesirable elements, especially in moments of excitement.
20. Police officers are reminded to be vigilant of offences which may arise in the course of
assemblies such as those covered by section 37 (incitement to violence) and 63B (raising
discontent and ill-will for unlawful purposes) of the Penal Code.
Polling Day
21. O/C District may, at least one week before the polling day, organizse a meeting with
representatives of political parties taking part in the election in their respective areas of
jurisdictions and insist upon them that party leaders, members and candidates shall
(a) cooperate with the police officers on election duty to ensure peaceful and
orderly polling and complete freedom to the voters to exercise their franchise without being
subjected to any annoyance or obstruction;
(b) supply to their authorised staff in the polling area suitable badges or identity
cards;
(c) cooperate with the authorities in complying with the restrictions to be imposed
on the plying of vehicles on the polling day and obtain permits for them which should be
displayed prominently on those vehicles.

766
 P.G.O. No.402(cont’d)
(d) refrain from serving or distributing liquor on polling day and during the twenty
four hours preceding it;
(e) not allow unnecessary crowds to be collected, near the camps set up by the
political parties and candidates near the polling booths so as to; avoid confrontation and
tension among staff and sympathisers of the parties and candidate; and
(f) ensure that the candidate's camps shall be simple. They shall not display any
posters, flags, symbols or any other propaganda material. No eatables shall be served or
crowds allowed at the camps.

Polling Stations and Booth

22. Police Officers on duty at the poling stations should ensure security in the area and that
no person other than the following shall be admitted into the polling station:–
(a) presiding Officer;
(b) polling Assistant;
(c) polling agent;
(d) voter;
(e) a person assisting an incapacitated voter pursuant to section 61;
(f) an international or local observer duly authorised in writing by the Electoral
Commission;
(g) the candidate;
(h) officials of the Electoral Commission;
(i) Returning Officer or an Assistant Returning Officer;
(j) any other person duly authorised in writing by the Electoral Commission to be
at the polling station.
23. Police officers at poling stations should ensure that excepting the voters, no one
without a valid pass from the Election Commission shall enter the polling booths or attend
any of the polling materials.

767
 P.G.O. No.403
OTHER PUBLIC MEETINGS AND PROCESSIONS
1 (a) Any person who is desirous of convening, collecting, forming or organising
any assembly or procession in any public place shall, not less than forty eight hours before the
time when the assembly or procession is scheduled to take place, submit a written notification
of his impending assembly or procession to the police officer in charge of the area specifying:–
(i) the place and time at which the meeting is to take place;
(ii) the purpose in general of the meeting; and
(iii) such other particulars as the Minister may from time to time, by
notice published in the Gazette, specify.
(b) Where a person submits a notification in accordance with the preceding
paragraph, he may proceed to convene, collect, form or organise the assembly or procession
in question as scheduled unless and until he receives an order from the Police Officer in
charge of the area directing that the assembly or procession shall not be held as notified.
(c) A Police Officer to whom a notification has been submitted pursuant to
paragraph (1)(a), shall not give a stop order in relation to the notification unless he is satisfied
that the assembly or procession is likely to cause a breach of the peace or to prejudice the
public safety or the maintenance of public order or to be used for any unlawful purpose.
(d) The officer in charge of Police may stop or prevent the holding or
continuance of any assembly or procession in a public place which has been convened,
collected, formed or organised otherwise than in accordance with the notification issued give
or issue such orders as he may consider necessary or expedient, including orders for the
dispersal of any such assembly or procession as aforesaid.
(e) In this connection “public place” means any highway, public park, common
or garden any sea beach, or lake shore, and any public bridge, road, street, lane, footway,
square, court, alley or passage, whether a thoroughfare or not; and includes any place,
whether a building or not, to which for the time being the public have or are permitted to
have access, whether on payment or otherwise.
2. It should be noted that Permits are not required for the following
meetings/processions :-
(a) Meetings at which the only speakers are Ministers of the Government
speaking in their own ministerial capacity.
(b) Religious, social, educational, entertainment or sporting meetings (G.N. No.
169/58).
(c) Assemblies convened by Local Authorities within the area of their
jurisdiction for purposes connected with their official duties (G.N. No. 98/60).

768
 P.G.O. No. 411
SECTION XV
PROSECUTION OF CRIMINAL CASES
Nos. 411 - 420

P.G.O. No Title
411 Prosecutions – Costs in Criminal Cases
412 Expulsion of Undesirables
413 Prosecutions – Fines in Certain Cases Credited to Police Rewards and
Fines Fund
414 Prosecutions – Police Prosecutors, Appointment of
415 Prosecutions – Committal Proceedings
416 Prosecutions – Previous Convictions
417 Prosecutions – Production of Statements Made to Police
418 Prosecutions –Withdrawal of Charges
419
420

771
 P.G.O. No. 411

PROSECUTIONS – COSTS IN CRIMINAL CASES

1. Under Section 345 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 and Section 32 of the
Penal Code, an accused person who has been convicted may be ordered by the court to pay a limited
amount towards the costs of the prosecution.
2. It is the duty of every O/C. District to instruct the Police Prosecutor to remind the Court of its
powers under Section 345 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20.R.E. 2002 and Section 32 of the
Penal Code, Cap. 16, R.E. 2002 regarding costs in the following cases :-
(a) When the accused person has made a frivolous or unfounded allegation unforeseen
by the Court, with the result that further evidence must be called in rebuttal, thereby causing additional
expense in excess of the ordinary expenses of the prosecution.
(b) Where the accused requests, and is granted an adjournment which involves the
Government in additional expense and it is subsequently shown during the course of the case that the
adjournment was quite unnecessary for the proper and fair presentation of the accused’s case.
(c) Where the accused requests, and is granted, an adjournment which would have
been unnecessary had he taken certain precautions which were easily within his power to take, e.g.
arranging for his defence witnesses to be present.
(d) Where the accused has been convicted for a traffic offence and police have
incurred expenses for vehicle examination.
3. Provided that no such representation will be made by the prosecutor in the following cases:-
(a) Where the accused is quite obviously not in a position to pay costs; or
(b) Where it is thought that an accused person would be left so penniless through
payment of costs that he might be exposed to temptation on his release from prison.
4. When an O/C. District considers that there are good grounds, other than those mentioned in
para 2 (a), (b) or (c) above, for asking for costs in a criminal case, he will:- consult with the state
Attorney of the area concerned.

772
 P.G.O. No. 412
PROSECUTIONS – EXPULSION OF UNDESIRABLES
1. When a member of an immigrant race (other than a citizen of Tanzania) is convicted for an
offence involving either dishonesty or moral turpitude, the Prosecutor will draw the attention of the
Magistrate to the terms of Section 2 (1) (a) of the Expulsion of Undesirables Act, Cap 39 R.E. 2002.
2. When initiating such applications, the Prosecutor shall hand into the Court a typed record
containing the following particulars of the accused :-
(a) Nationality or tribal particulars.
(b) Country of origin, and place of residence therein.
(c) Place of residence in Tanzania .
(d) Length of residence in Tanzania
(e) Recent activities
(f) Any other relevant data.
3. In cases where a Magistrate recommends the issue of an Expulsion Order the Prosecutor will
submit, in duplicate, to the Director of Criminal Investigation, through the O/C. Station, a copy of the
report referred to above, together with the following further information :-
(a) Details of offences.
(b) Criminal Case No.
(c) Total period of imprisonment (if any) and date accused started serving his sentence.
4. If the trial Magistrate makes no recommendation and the O/C. Station considers the person
convicted should not be allowed to remain in Tanzania the particulars referred to at paragraphs 2 and 3
above will be forwarded to the Director of Criminal Investigation so that the Inspector General may
decide whether application should be made to the President to exercise his powers under Section 2 (1)
(b) of the Expulsion of Undesirables Cap. 39 R.E. 2002 or, alternatively, under Section 10 (f) of the
Immigration Act, Cap. 54 R.E. 2002.
Action when persons are convicted for failing to comply with Expulsion Order
5. (a) Where a person against whom an Expulsion Order is in force is in the Territory and
is convicted of an offence under Section 5 (1) of the expulsion of Undesirables Act, Cap. 39, it is
necessary to obtain an order from the President under the terms of Section 5 (3) of the Act, before he
may be arrested and re-deported at the conclusion of his sentence.
(b) When a notification of a conviction of this nature is received at the Forensic
Bureau, the O/C. will notify the Director of Criminal Investigation of the details, giving approximate
date of release.
(c) The Director of Criminal Investigation will apply to the Permanent Secretary,
Ministry of Public Security and Safety, for the Order to be made under the terms of Section 5 (3) of the
Expulsion of Undesirables Act, Cap. 39 and will copy the letter to the O/C. District where the
conviction was sustained.
(d) On receipt of the Order, the Director of Criminal Investigation will forward same to
the O/C. District who will arrange for the arrest of the subject at the conclusion of his sentence and
will execute the order for deportation.
(e) Each Order will be suitably endorsed after execution with the date and place of
deportation and the subject’s T.C.R.O. number and will then be sent to the Forensic Bureau.

773
 P.G.O. No. 413
PROSECUTIONS – FINES IN CERTAIN CASES CREDITED
TO POLICE REWARDS AND FINES FUND
1. Section 62 (2) of the Police Force and Auxiliary Services Act, Cap 322 R.E. 2002 provides
for the following payments into the Police Rewards and Fines Fund :-
(a) moneys accruing to the revenues of the United Republic in respect of fines levied in
any Court for assaults upon police officers under Chapter XXV of the Penal Code;
(b) moneys or the proceeds of any property forfeited to the revenue of the territory by
order of any Court in respect of any offence under the Prevention of Corruption Act, Cap. 329
R.E.2002, in which a police officer as a member of the public service is concerned:-
(i) corruption transactions with agents – Section 3;
(ii) public servant obtaining advantage without consideration – Section 6; and
(iii) gifts received on behalf of accused – Section 7.

2. In all the foregoing cases the prosecutor will obtain from the Court, and forward to the
Director of Criminal Investigation, a copy of the judgment whenever a fine is imposed or property is
forfeited to the Government.
3. On receipt of the judgment, the Director of Criminal Investigation will forward the papers in
the case to the Inspector General, who may make application to the President through the Director of
Public Prosecutions for such sums to be credited to the Police Rewards and Fines Fund.

774
 P.G.O. No. 414
PROSECUTIONS – POLICE PROSECUTORS,
APPOINTMENT OF

General
1. The Director of Public Prosecutions has appointed every officer of the Force not being below
the rank of Assistant Inspector to be a Public Prosecutor, with authority to act as such throughout
Tanzania.
2. The powers of Public Prosecutors are set out under Section 97 of the Criminal Procedure Act,
Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 hereunder :-
“A Public Prosecutor may appear and plead without any written authority before any Court in
which any case of which he has charge is under inquiry, trial or appeal, and if any private person
instructs an advocate to prosecute in any such case the Public Prosecutor may conduct the prosecutions
and the advocate so instructed shall act therein under his directions”.
Duties of Police Prosecutors
3. In general, police representations are made in Magisterial Courts through the Police
Prosecutor, who is responsible to the O/C. Station that :-
(a) all witnesses appear in Court when cases are due for hearing and that Form P.F. 6 is
used to warn those witnesses who have not already been summoned to appear by the Court;
(b) where a case is adjourned, summonses are served on outstanding witness before they
leave the precincts of the Court, where this is impossible, the prosecutor will ensure that the witness is
served with a summons prior to the next hearing;
(c) all the facts are properly collected and presented before the Court; that particular
care is taken when an accused person is undefended and that no material evidence is omitted which
might assist him in his defence;
(d) every Case File or Minor Offence Docket which requires further investigation or any
charge which has been wrongly framed is returned to the Investigating Officer for immediate action;
(e) all files committed to his charge are treated as confidential and that the contents are
not disclosed to any unauthorised person, other than in accordance with P.G.O. No. 417;
(f) the result of the trial and the sentence, if any, is endorsed on the file or docket cover
before the file/docket is filed away or returned to the Station of origin;
(g) any remarks made from the Bench on the conduct of the prosecution or of interest to
the Force are entered on the minute sheet of the file or dossier and brought to the notice of the
Regional Commander and O/C. District;
(h) police and public conduct themselves in a manner befitting the dignity of the Court;
(i) strict order and decorum is observed in all Courts and that no member of the Force
smokes within the precincts of the Court;
(j) witnesses are paid the fees due to them and the Clerk of the Court notified of the
number of days for which fees are due and whether rations were provided by the Government;
(k) the results of all prosecutions are duly entered in the appropriate Column of the
report book (P.F. 162) in accordance with P.G.O. No. 309.
4. Police prosecutors in addressing Courts after conviction and before sentence will be guided
by the following rules :-
(a) They will produce evidence of previous convictions if they exist and should call
evidence of make objective statements of any other antecedent facts in the accused’s career which may
be of assistance to the Court, whether for or against the accused and which are relevant (e.g., that the
accused has never succeeded in holding a job or has previously been dismissed from Public Service).
They must not introduce completely irrelevant prejudicial facts, e.g., relating to the accused’s private
morals, if such facts are not relevant to the case. They should only state facts in respect of which
evidence is available if they are challenged and should not comment on those facts or express an
opinion.

775
 P.G.O. No. 414(cont’d)

(b) They should state dispassionately any relevant facts of the case which have not
already been brought out by evidence whether they tell in favour of a severe sentence or otherwise, but
will not attempt by advocacy to influence the Court towards a more severe sentence. In particular, they
will not ask for a severe or a deterrent sentence. There is however, no objection to referring the Court
to the Penal sections relating to the offence concerned without any comment.
(c) Prosecutors may, and if the accused is not represented must, bring out any facts and
make any objective comment which the facts justify which may tend to mitigate the seriousness of the
offence. If the accused is represented, they will ensure that all the facts which may assist the defence
advocate in mitigation are made known to him.
(d) If a certain course is suggested by the defence advocate in mitigation (e.g. that the
accused be placed on probation or community service), the prosecuting officer will not tell the Court
that he opposes the suggestion, nor should he address the Court at all after defence counsel has
addressed it in mitigation, unless invited by the Court to assist it or to correct any misstatement of law
or fact by defence counsel. It is in any case improper for a prosecutor to inform the Court at any time
that he opposes a proposed course of action which may appear to him to be too lenient, e.g., placing
the accused on probation, community service, payment of fine, conditional or unconditional discharge,
reconciliation or any other lawful non-custodial measures.
(e) They should never comment on the seriousness of the offence. It is quite proper to
inform the Court whether or not the offence is a prevalent one. In special cases, if, and only if,
instructions have been given by or on behalf of the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Prosecutor
may inform the Court that the Republic does not take a serious view of a particular offence (e.g. if the
offence is a technical offence), or does not consider that the case calls for imprisonment. All
prosecutors should encourage the use of non custodial sentences where they are justified by the law
and nature or circumstances of the offence.
5. Where a police officer is posted to a Juvenile Court, he shall always wear civilian clothes and
shall behave in a manner that attracts the confidence of the juvenile in conflict with the law. He should
be as friendly as possible to the juvenile and cooperate with the parents or guardian and Social Welfare
Department officials involved in the case. Social Welfare Department officials appear in Court by
virtue of the Probation of Offenders Act, Cap. 247 R.E. 2002 and Children and Young Persons Act,
Cap. 13 R.E. 2002.
6. All police officers who may for one reason or another appear before a Juvenile Court shall
always be guided by the provisions of the Children and Young Persons Act, Cap. 13.

776
 P.G.O. No. 415
PROSECUTIONS – COMMITTAL PROCEEDINGS
1. Section 244 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, provides:-
“Wherever any charge has been brought against any person of an offence not triable by a
subordinate Court or as to which the Court is advised by the Director of Public Prosecutions in writing
or otherwise that it is not suitable to be disposed of upon summary trial committal proceedings shall be
held according to the provisions hereinafter contained by a subordinate Court of competent
jurisdiction”
2. The person arrested should be brought within 24 hours unless it is a capital offence where he
should be brought as soon as practicable before a subordinate Court of competent jurisdiction within
whose local limits the arrest was made, together with the charge upon which it is proposed to prosecute
him, for him to be dealt with according to law, subject to this Act (Refer to Sections 245 of the
Criminal Procedure Act).
3. After a person is committed to remand prison or on bail by a subordinate Court or after the
investigations have been completed but before the suspect is arrested, the O/C. District shall forthwith
cause the statements in quintuplicate of persons intended to be called as witnesses at the trial to be
properly typed out, conveniently compiled and sent, along with the police case file, to the Director of
Public Prosecutions or any other public officer designated by him in that behalf through the Director of
Criminal Investigation or Regional Police Commander.
4. If the Director of Public Prosecutions or his designee, after studying the Police Case File and
the statements of the intended witnesses, is of the view that the evidence available is insufficient to
warrant the institution of a prosecution, and has reason to believe that further investigations can change
the position, he will order further investigations to be carried out in which case the O/C. District will
be informed accordingly through the Director of Criminal Investigation or Regional Police
Commander. Otherwise the Director of Public Prosecutions has powers to discontinue the case if he is
of the view that it is inadvisable to prosecute.
5. Committal proceedings are usually for serious offences which also attracts sever punishments
in case of conviction. Police officers must always deal with this kind of cases expeditiously so as to
minimise the length the investigation takes before trial can commence. Otherwise the O/C District
should develop guidelines within their respective areas that will ensure speed investigation of cases,
particularly those earmarked for committal proceedings.

777
 P.G.O. No. 416
PROSECUTIONS – PREVIOUS CONVICTIONS
General
1. The law relating to proof of previous convictions is set out under Section 141 of the Criminal
Procedure Act:-
“(1) In any inquiry, trial or other proceeding under this Act, a previous conviction may be
proved, in addition to any other mode provided by any law for the time being in force –:
(a) by an extract certified, under the hand of the officer having the custody of the
records of the Court in which such conviction was had, to be a copy of the sentence or order; or
(b) by a certificate signed by the officer in charge of the prison in which the
punishment or any part of it was inflicted; or
(c) by production of the warrant of commitment under which the punishment was
suffered; or
(d) by production of a final judgment of a competent Court finally declaring a person
to be guilty of the offence,
together with, in each such case, evidence as to the identity of the accused person with the
person so convicted.
(2) A certificate in the form prescribed by the Director of Public Prosecutions given under the
hand of an officer appointed by him in that behalf, who shall have compared the fingerprints of an
accused person with the fingerprints of a person previously convicted, shall be prima facie evidence of
all facts set forth in it provided it is produced by the person who took the fingerprints of the accused.
(3) A previous conviction in any place outside Tanzania may be proved by the production of a
certificate purporting to be given under the hand of a police officer in the country where the conviction
was had, containing a copy of the sentence or order and the fingerprints or photographs of the
fingerprints of the persons so convicted, together with either–
(a) evidence that the fingerprints, or the photographs, of the person previously
convicted are those of the accused person; or
(b) a certificate given under the hand of an officer appointed by the Director of Public
Prosecutions under Subsection (2) that he has compared the fingerprints, or the photographs, of the
person previously convicted with the fingerprints or the photographs of the accused person and that
they are those of one and the same person.
(4) A certificate purporting to be given under the hand of a police officer in the country where
the conviction was had and a certificate given in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (b) of
Subsection (3) shall, if in the case of the latter certificate it is produced by the person who took the
fingerprints of the accused person, be prima facie evidence of all facts set forth in it without proof that
the officer purporting to sign it did in fact sign it and was empowered to do so.”
2. Previous convictions used for the purpose of assessing sentence must be proved in accordance
with the provision of Section 141 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 , after the accused
has been found guilty and before sentence has been passed. Every precaution must be taken prior to the
accused being found guilty, to ensure that the accused’s previous convictions do not come to the
knowledge of the Court unless there is legal authority to the contrary.
3. Person convicted of any offence constituted by any act may, notwithstanding such conviction,
be subsequently charged with and tried for any other offence constituted by the same acts which he may
have committed, if the Court by which he was first tried was not competent to try the offence with
which he is subsequently charged.
Preparation of forms for previous convictions
4. Prosecutors shall prove previous convictions by producing a certificate of Previous
Convictions (P.F. 18A) together with a set of finger prints on the Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B) which
have been searched at the Forensic Bureau. (The finger prints on the Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B)
must be produced by the person who took the finger prints.) P.G.O. No. 230 sets out the procedure at
Police Stations for obtaining from the Forensic Bureau the prescribed certificate and other evidence
necessary to prove a conviction. See also paragraph 6 below.
5. Previous convictions can only be proved if they relate to offences which the accused
committed prior to the date of commission of the offence for which he is being tried. For this reason,
accused persons who are awaiting trial for a series of offences which will require separate hearings
should if possible, be brought to Court in the order in which the offences were committed.

778
 P.G.O. No. 416(cont’d)

Denial of previous convictions

6. (a) On denial of previous convictions in a subordinate Court the prosecuting officer
shall:-
(i) request a remand;
(ii) signal or telegraph to the Forensic Bureau asking for a certificate
of previous Conviction (P.F. 18A).
(iii) cause a further set of the prisoner’s finger prints to be taken on
Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B) and dispatch them to the Forensic Bureau with a copy of the telegram
referred to in (ii) above.
(b) On receipt of the signal or telegram referred to in (a) (ii) above, the O/C. Forensic
Bureau shall prepare and dispatch by airmail a certificate of Previous Convictions (P.F. 18A) and the
original set of finger prints received from the Station on Finger Print Form (P.F. 14B).
7. Prosecutors will ensure that particulars of previous convictions are forwarded to the Director
of Public Prosecutions, with the Case File, in respect of each accused person committed for trial by the
High Court. The procedure to be followed by O/C. stations in obtaining particulars of previous
convictions in High Court cases is set out in P.G.O. No. 230.

779
 P.G.O. No. 417
PROSECUTIONS – PRODUCTION OF STATEMENTS
MADE TO POLICE

1. It is a well established practice for a deponent whether he be the accused, complainant or

witness, to be furnished upon request with a copy of his statement made to the police and in this
connections there is no distinction between the deponent and his legal representative, provided that the
police officer is satisfied that he is a representative of the deponent. The copy of the statement may be
handed to the applicant either immediately after making it to the police or during the course of
investigation or trial, free of charge.
Copies of witnesses’ statement
2. The defences have no right to the production or copies of statements made to the police by
witnesses (except a complainant) other than that made by the person they are representing (see para. 1
above) except and until:
(a) the witness who made the statement is under examination at the trial and the
prosecution wishes to use or tender the statement when such statement then becomes a relevant and
material item of evidence; or
(b) the witness who made the statement is under cross examination at the trial when
such statement may also become a relevant and material item of evidence.
3. The proper course for the defence is to give notice to the police that the production of such
statement(s) will be required at the trial whereupon the O/C. station will arrange for copies of the
statement(s) to be made available in Court. Such statement will not be handed to the defence until the
witness is under cross-examination at the trial when the statement may become relevant. At this time
the defence shall be permitted on request to have sight of the original statement made by the witness.
4. This order shall be read in conjunction with P.G.O. No. 236.

780
 P.G.O. No. 418
PROSECUTIONS –WITHDRAWAL OF CHARGES

1. The law relating to withdrawal of charges is found under Sections 98 and 224 of the Criminal
Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002 , both of which are set out below :-
“Section 98 – Criminal Procedure Act
In any trial before a subordinate Court any Public Prosecutor may, with the consent of the Court or on the
instructions of the Director of Public Prosecutions, at any time before judgment is pronounced, withdraw
from the prosecution of any person either generally or in respect of one or more of the offences with
which such person is charged; and upon such withdrawal-

(a) if it is made before the accused person is called upon to make his defence, he shall be
discharged, but such discharge of an accused person shall not operate as a bar to subsequent
proceedings against him on account of the same facts;
(b) if it is made after the accused person is called upon to make his defence, he shall be
acquitted”.
“Section 224 – Criminal Procedure Act
If a complainant, at any time before a final order is passed in any cases under this Part, satisfies
the Court that there are sufficient grounds for permitting him to withdraw his complaint, the Court
may permit him to withdraw the same and shall thereupon acquit the accused against whom the
complainant is so withdrawn; save that this Section shall apply only in cases of minor offences.”
2 The term “Public Prosecutor” is defined by Section 2 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20
R.E. 2002, as follows :-
“... means any person appointed under Section 95 (see paragraph 1, P.G.O. No. 414)
and includes the Director of Public Prosecutions, the Attorney General, the Deputy Attorney – General, a
Parliamentary Draftsman, a State Attorney and any person acting in criminal proceedings under the
directions of the Director of Public Prosecutions,”
The “complainant” is the person who makes the complaint to a Court under Section 128 of the
Criminal Procedure Act.
“Public Prosecutor” when exercising his powers under Section 98 shall be guided by the
following:-
(a) A prosecution may be withdrawn only with the consent of the Court or on the
instructions of the Director of Public Prosecutions. In cases where the Director of Public Prosecutions has
given consent to a prosecution or in which the Director of Public Prosecutions has tendered advice on
evidence or framing of charges shall not be withdrawn without prior reference to the Director of Public
Prosecutions through the Director of Criminal Investigation. (See P.G.O. No. 242).
(b) A prosecution may be withdrawn at any time before or after the trial has begun.
(c) Consent of the Court to withdraw will not be given as a matter of course but only as a
matter of discretion. In particular, it will not be given in any case where the accused is before the Court and
is entitled to an acquittal.

781
 P.G.O. No. 418(cont’d)

3 (a) In relation to a complainant’s right to exercise his power of withdrawal under Section
224 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002, the following points apply :-
(i) the prosecution may be withdrawn at any time before the final order is made
and with the consent of the Court; and
(ii) the withdraw means the acquittal of the accused person and therefore he
cannot be charged again with the same offence
(b) Where the accused cannot be traced, the Prosecutor or a complainant might as a matter
of practice be allowed to withdraw but the provisions to be used in this case are those contained in
Sections 98(a) and 99 of the Criminal Procedure Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002. This does not bar a fresh charge
in case he is arrested after the charge has been withdrawn.
4. It is again emphasised that police in their capacity as “Public Prosecutor” can only withdraw
criminal charges in exercise of the powers conferred upon them by Section 97 of the Criminal Procedure
Act, Cap. 20 R.E. 2002.

782